Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Dyeing of Cotton Fabrics:
A Practical Handbook for the Dyer and Student
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
will have to check the laws of the country where you are located
before using this eBook.
Title: The Dyeing of Cotton Fabrics: A Practical Handbook for the
Dyer and Student
Author: Franklin Beech
Release date: April 27, 2007 [eBook #21224]
Most recently updated: January 2, 2021
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/21224
Credits: Produced by Audrey Longhurst, Labyrinths and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE DYEING
OF COTTON FABRICS: A PRACTICAL HANDBOOK FOR THE DYER
AND STUDENT ***
A Practical Handbook for the Dyer and Student
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
will have to check the laws of the country where you are located
before using this eBook.
Title: The Dyeing of Cotton Fabrics: A Practical Handbook for the
Dyer and Student
Author: Franklin Beech
Release date: April 27, 2007 [eBook #21224]
Most recently updated: January 2, 2021
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/21224
Credits: Produced by Audrey Longhurst, Labyrinths and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE DYEING
OF COTTON FABRICS: A PRACTICAL HANDBOOK FOR THE DYER
AND STUDENT ***
Page 4
THE
DYEING OF COTTON FABRICS
DYEING OF COTTON FABRICS
Page 5
A PRACTICAL HANDBOOK FOR THE DYER
AND STUDENT
BY
AND STUDENT
BY
Page 6
FRANKLIN BEECH
PRACTICAL COLOURIST AND CHEMIST
ILLUSTRATED BY FORTY-FOUR ENGRAVINGS
LONDON
SCOTT, GREENWOOD & CO.
19 LUDGATE HILL, E.C.
1901
[All rights reserved]
PREFACE.
In writing this little book the author believes he is supplying a want which
most Students and Dyers of Cotton Fabrics have felt—that of a small
handbook clearly describing the various processes and operations of the
great industry of dyeing Cotton.
The aim has not been to produce a very elaborate treatise but rather a book
of a convenient size, and in order to do so it has been necessary to be brief
and to omit many matters that would rightfully find a place in a larger
treatise, but the author hopes that nothing of importance has been omitted.
The most modern processes have been described in some detail; care has
been taken to select those which experience shows to be thoroughly reliable
and to give good results.
PRACTICAL COLOURIST AND CHEMIST
ILLUSTRATED BY FORTY-FOUR ENGRAVINGS
LONDON
SCOTT, GREENWOOD & CO.
19 LUDGATE HILL, E.C.
1901
[All rights reserved]
PREFACE.
In writing this little book the author believes he is supplying a want which
most Students and Dyers of Cotton Fabrics have felt—that of a small
handbook clearly describing the various processes and operations of the
great industry of dyeing Cotton.
The aim has not been to produce a very elaborate treatise but rather a book
of a convenient size, and in order to do so it has been necessary to be brief
and to omit many matters that would rightfully find a place in a larger
treatise, but the author hopes that nothing of importance has been omitted.
The most modern processes have been described in some detail; care has
been taken to select those which experience shows to be thoroughly reliable
and to give good results.
Page 7
FRANKLIN BEECH.
May, 1901.
CONTENTS.
PAGE
CHAPTER I.
STRUCTURE AND CHEMISTRY OF THE COTTON FIBRE 1
Action of Alkalies 6
Action of Acids on Cellulose 9
Action of Sulphuric Acid on Cotton 10
Action of Hydrochloric Acid 11
Action of Nitric Acid 12
Action of Oxidising Agents on Cellulose or Cotton 16
CHAPTER II.
SCOURING AND BLEACHING OF COTTON 23
Stains and Damages in Bleached Goods 50
CHAPTER III.
DYEING MACHINERY AND DYEING MANIPULATIONS 53
Hand Dyeing 53
Dyeing Machines 57
Dyeing, Slubbing, Sliver or Carded Cotton and Wool 58
Cop Dyeing 64
CHAPTER IV.
THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF COTTON DYEING 82
(1) Direct Dyeing 85
(2) Direct Dyeing followed by Fixation with Metallic Salts 112
(3) Direct Dyeing followed by Fixation with Developers 128
(4) Direct Dyeing followed by Fixation with Couplers 139
(5) Dyeing on Tannic Mordant 147
(6) Dyeing on Metallic Mordants 156
(7) Production of Colour Direct upon Cotton Fibres 181
May, 1901.
CONTENTS.
PAGE
CHAPTER I.
STRUCTURE AND CHEMISTRY OF THE COTTON FIBRE 1
Action of Alkalies 6
Action of Acids on Cellulose 9
Action of Sulphuric Acid on Cotton 10
Action of Hydrochloric Acid 11
Action of Nitric Acid 12
Action of Oxidising Agents on Cellulose or Cotton 16
CHAPTER II.
SCOURING AND BLEACHING OF COTTON 23
Stains and Damages in Bleached Goods 50
CHAPTER III.
DYEING MACHINERY AND DYEING MANIPULATIONS 53
Hand Dyeing 53
Dyeing Machines 57
Dyeing, Slubbing, Sliver or Carded Cotton and Wool 58
Cop Dyeing 64
CHAPTER IV.
THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF COTTON DYEING 82
(1) Direct Dyeing 85
(2) Direct Dyeing followed by Fixation with Metallic Salts 112
(3) Direct Dyeing followed by Fixation with Developers 128
(4) Direct Dyeing followed by Fixation with Couplers 139
(5) Dyeing on Tannic Mordant 147
(6) Dyeing on Metallic Mordants 156
(7) Production of Colour Direct upon Cotton Fibres 181
Page 8
(8) Dyeing Cotton by Impregnation with Dye-stuff Solution 198
CHAPTER V.
DYEING UNION (MIXED COTTON AND WOOL) FABRICS 208
CHAPTER VI.
DYEING HALF SILK (COTTON-SILK, SATIN) FABRICS 225
Method of Dyeing 225
CHAPTER VII.
OPERATIONS FOLLOWING DYEING 239
Washing, Soaping, Drying 239
CHAPTER VIII.
TESTING OF THE COLOUR OF DYED FABRICS 257
CHAPTER IX.
EXPERIMENTAL DYEING AND COMPARATIVE DYE
262
TESTING
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIG. PAGE
1. Cotton Fibre 5
1A. Cross-section of Cotton Fibre 5
2. Mercerised Cotton Fibre 7
2A. Cross-section of Mercerised Cotton Fibre 7
3. Silkified Cotton Fibre 9
3A. Cross-section of Silkified Cotton Fibre 9
4. Mather & Platt's Low-pressure Bleaching Kier 31
5. Mather & Platt's Yarn-bleaching Kier 49
6. Rectangular Dye-tank 54
CHAPTER V.
DYEING UNION (MIXED COTTON AND WOOL) FABRICS 208
CHAPTER VI.
DYEING HALF SILK (COTTON-SILK, SATIN) FABRICS 225
Method of Dyeing 225
CHAPTER VII.
OPERATIONS FOLLOWING DYEING 239
Washing, Soaping, Drying 239
CHAPTER VIII.
TESTING OF THE COLOUR OF DYED FABRICS 257
CHAPTER IX.
EXPERIMENTAL DYEING AND COMPARATIVE DYE
262
TESTING
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIG. PAGE
1. Cotton Fibre 5
1A. Cross-section of Cotton Fibre 5
2. Mercerised Cotton Fibre 7
2A. Cross-section of Mercerised Cotton Fibre 7
3. Silkified Cotton Fibre 9
3A. Cross-section of Silkified Cotton Fibre 9
4. Mather & Platt's Low-pressure Bleaching Kier 31
5. Mather & Platt's Yarn-bleaching Kier 49
6. Rectangular Dye-tank 54
Page 9
7. Round Dye-tub 54
8. Section of Dye-vat 56
9. Delahunty's Dyeing Machine 58
10. Obermaier Dyeing Machine 59
11. Holliday's Yarn-dyeing Machine 60
12. Klauder-Weldon Dyeing Machine 62
13. Graemiger Cop-dyeing Machine 65
14. Graemiger Cop-dyeing Machine 66
15. Beaumont's Cop-dyeing Machine 67
16. Warp-dyeing Machine 70
17. Warp-dyeing Machine 71
18. Dye-jiggers 72
19. Dye-jigger 73
20. Jig Wince 75
21. Cloth-dyeing Machine 76
22. Dye Beck 77
23. Holliday's Machine for Hawking Cloth 78
24. Continuous Dyeing Machine 79
25. Padding Machine 80
26. Padding Machine 81
27. Dye-tub for Paranitroaniline Red 191
28. Padding Machine for Paranitroaniline Red 192
29. Developing Machine for Paranitroaniline Red 194
30. Indigo Dye-vat for Cloth 199
31. Squeezing Rollers 240
32. Yarn-washing Machine 243
33. Dye-house Washing Machine 244
34. Cloth-washing Machine 245
35. Cloth-washing Machine 247
36. Washing and Soaping Vats 248
37. Steaming Cottage 249
38. Steaming and Ageing Chamber 250
39. Hydro-extractor 251
40. Hydro-extractor 252
8. Section of Dye-vat 56
9. Delahunty's Dyeing Machine 58
10. Obermaier Dyeing Machine 59
11. Holliday's Yarn-dyeing Machine 60
12. Klauder-Weldon Dyeing Machine 62
13. Graemiger Cop-dyeing Machine 65
14. Graemiger Cop-dyeing Machine 66
15. Beaumont's Cop-dyeing Machine 67
16. Warp-dyeing Machine 70
17. Warp-dyeing Machine 71
18. Dye-jiggers 72
19. Dye-jigger 73
20. Jig Wince 75
21. Cloth-dyeing Machine 76
22. Dye Beck 77
23. Holliday's Machine for Hawking Cloth 78
24. Continuous Dyeing Machine 79
25. Padding Machine 80
26. Padding Machine 81
27. Dye-tub for Paranitroaniline Red 191
28. Padding Machine for Paranitroaniline Red 192
29. Developing Machine for Paranitroaniline Red 194
30. Indigo Dye-vat for Cloth 199
31. Squeezing Rollers 240
32. Yarn-washing Machine 243
33. Dye-house Washing Machine 244
34. Cloth-washing Machine 245
35. Cloth-washing Machine 247
36. Washing and Soaping Vats 248
37. Steaming Cottage 249
38. Steaming and Ageing Chamber 250
39. Hydro-extractor 251
40. Hydro-extractor 252
Page 10
41. Automatic Yarn-dryer 253
42. Truck Yarn-dryer 254
43. Drying Cylinders 255
44. Experimental Dye-bath 263
42. Truck Yarn-dryer 254
43. Drying Cylinders 255
44. Experimental Dye-bath 263
Page 11
CHAPTER I.
STRUCTURE AND CHEMISTRY OF THE COTTON FIBRE.
There is scarcely any subject of so much importance to the bleacher, textile
colourist or textile manufacturer as the structure and chemistry of the cotton
fibre with which he has to deal. By the term chemistry we mean not only
the composition of the fibre substance itself, but also the reactions it is
capable of undergoing when brought into contact with various chemical
substances—acids, alkalies, salts, etc. These reactions have a very
important bearing on the operations of bleaching and dyeing of cotton
fabrics.
A few words on vegetable textile fibres in general may be of interest. Fibres
are met with in connection with plants in three ways.
First, as cuticle or ciliary fibres or hairs; these are of no practical use, being
much too short for preparing textile fabrics from, but they play an important
part in the physiology of the plant.
Second, as seed hairs; that is fibres that are attached to the seeds of many
plants, such, for instance, as the common thistle and dandelion; the cotton
fibre belongs to this group of seed hairs, while there are others, kapok, etc.,
that have been tried from time to time in spinning and weaving, but without
much success. These seed hairs vary much in length, from ¼ inch to 1½
inches or even 2 inches; each fibre consists of a single unit. Whether it is
serviceable as a textile fibre depends upon its structure, which differs in
different plants, and also upon the quantity available.
The third class of fibre, which is by far the most numerous, consists of
those found lying between the bark or outer cuticle and the true woody
tissues of the plant. This portion is known as the bast, and hence these fibres
are known as "bast fibres". They are noticeable on account of the great
length of the fibres, in some cases upwards of 6 feet, which can be
obtained; but it should be pointed out that these long fibres are not the unit
fibres, but are really bundles of the ultimate fibres aggregated together to
STRUCTURE AND CHEMISTRY OF THE COTTON FIBRE.
There is scarcely any subject of so much importance to the bleacher, textile
colourist or textile manufacturer as the structure and chemistry of the cotton
fibre with which he has to deal. By the term chemistry we mean not only
the composition of the fibre substance itself, but also the reactions it is
capable of undergoing when brought into contact with various chemical
substances—acids, alkalies, salts, etc. These reactions have a very
important bearing on the operations of bleaching and dyeing of cotton
fabrics.
A few words on vegetable textile fibres in general may be of interest. Fibres
are met with in connection with plants in three ways.
First, as cuticle or ciliary fibres or hairs; these are of no practical use, being
much too short for preparing textile fabrics from, but they play an important
part in the physiology of the plant.
Second, as seed hairs; that is fibres that are attached to the seeds of many
plants, such, for instance, as the common thistle and dandelion; the cotton
fibre belongs to this group of seed hairs, while there are others, kapok, etc.,
that have been tried from time to time in spinning and weaving, but without
much success. These seed hairs vary much in length, from ¼ inch to 1½
inches or even 2 inches; each fibre consists of a single unit. Whether it is
serviceable as a textile fibre depends upon its structure, which differs in
different plants, and also upon the quantity available.
The third class of fibre, which is by far the most numerous, consists of
those found lying between the bark or outer cuticle and the true woody
tissues of the plant. This portion is known as the bast, and hence these fibres
are known as "bast fibres". They are noticeable on account of the great
length of the fibres, in some cases upwards of 6 feet, which can be
obtained; but it should be pointed out that these long fibres are not the unit
fibres, but are really bundles of the ultimate fibres aggregated together to
Page 12
form one long fibre, as found in and obtained from the plant. Thus the
ultimate fibres of jute are really very short—from 1/10 to 1/8 of an inch in
length; those of flax are somewhat longer. Jute, flax, China grass and hemp
are common fibres which are derived from the bast of the plants.
There is an important point of difference between seed fibres and bast
fibres, that is in the degree of purity. While the seed fibres are fairly free
from impurities—cotton rarely containing more than 5 per cent.—the bast
fibres contain a large proportion of impurity, from 25 to 30 per cent. as they
are first obtained from the plant, and this large quantity has much influence
on the extent and character of the treatments to which they are subjected.
As regards the structure of the fibres, it will be sufficient to say that while
seed hairs are cylindrical and tubular and have thin walls, bast fibres are
more or less polygonal in form and are not essentially tubular, having thick
walls and small central canals.
The Cotton Fibre.—The seed hairs of the cotton plant are separated from
the seeds by the process of ginning, and they then pass into commerce as
raw cotton. In this condition the fibre is found to consist of the actual
fibrous substance itself, containing, however, about 8 per cent. of
hygroscopic or natural moisture, and 5 per cent. of impurities of various
kinds, which vary in amount and in kind in various descriptions of cotton.
In the process of manufacture into cotton cloths, and as the material passes
through the operations of bleaching, dyeing or printing, the impurities are
eliminated.
Impurities of the Cotton Fibre.—Dr. E. Schunck made an investigation
many years ago into the character of the impurities, and found them to
consist of the following substances:—
Cotton Wax.—This substance bears a close resemblance to carnauba wax.
It is lighter than water, has a waxy lustre, is somewhat translucent, is easily
powdered, and melts below the boiling point of water. It is insoluble in
water, but dissolves in alcohol and in ether. When boiled with weak caustic
soda it melts but is not dissolved by the alkali; it can, however, be dissolved
by boiling with alcoholic caustic potash. This wax is found fairly uniformly
distributed over the surface of the cotton fibre, and it is due to this fact that
raw cotton is wetted by water only with difficulty.
ultimate fibres of jute are really very short—from 1/10 to 1/8 of an inch in
length; those of flax are somewhat longer. Jute, flax, China grass and hemp
are common fibres which are derived from the bast of the plants.
There is an important point of difference between seed fibres and bast
fibres, that is in the degree of purity. While the seed fibres are fairly free
from impurities—cotton rarely containing more than 5 per cent.—the bast
fibres contain a large proportion of impurity, from 25 to 30 per cent. as they
are first obtained from the plant, and this large quantity has much influence
on the extent and character of the treatments to which they are subjected.
As regards the structure of the fibres, it will be sufficient to say that while
seed hairs are cylindrical and tubular and have thin walls, bast fibres are
more or less polygonal in form and are not essentially tubular, having thick
walls and small central canals.
The Cotton Fibre.—The seed hairs of the cotton plant are separated from
the seeds by the process of ginning, and they then pass into commerce as
raw cotton. In this condition the fibre is found to consist of the actual
fibrous substance itself, containing, however, about 8 per cent. of
hygroscopic or natural moisture, and 5 per cent. of impurities of various
kinds, which vary in amount and in kind in various descriptions of cotton.
In the process of manufacture into cotton cloths, and as the material passes
through the operations of bleaching, dyeing or printing, the impurities are
eliminated.
Impurities of the Cotton Fibre.—Dr. E. Schunck made an investigation
many years ago into the character of the impurities, and found them to
consist of the following substances:—
Cotton Wax.—This substance bears a close resemblance to carnauba wax.
It is lighter than water, has a waxy lustre, is somewhat translucent, is easily
powdered, and melts below the boiling point of water. It is insoluble in
water, but dissolves in alcohol and in ether. When boiled with weak caustic
soda it melts but is not dissolved by the alkali; it can, however, be dissolved
by boiling with alcoholic caustic potash. This wax is found fairly uniformly
distributed over the surface of the cotton fibre, and it is due to this fact that
raw cotton is wetted by water only with difficulty.
Page 13
Fatty Acids.—A solid, fatty acid, melting at 55° C. is also present in cotton.
Probably stearic acid is the main constituent of this fatty acid.
Colouring Matter.—Two brown colouring matters, both containing
nitrogen, can be obtained from raw cotton. One of these is readily soluble in
alcohol, the other only sparingly so. The presence in relatively large
quantities of these bodies accounts for the brown colour of Egyptian and
some other dark-coloured varieties of cotton.
Pectic Acid.—This is the chief impurity found in raw cotton. It can be
obtained in the form of an amorphous substance of a light yellow colour,
not unlike gum in appearance. It is soluble in boiling water, and the solution
has a faint acid reaction. Acids and many metallic salts, such as mercury,
chloride and lead acetate, precipitate pectic acid from its solutions. Alkalies
combine with it, and these compounds form brown substances, are but
sparingly soluble in water, and many of them can be precipitated out by
addition of neutral salts, like sodium and ammonium chlorides.
Albumens.—A small quantity of albuminous matter is found among the
impurities of cotton.
Structure of the Cotton Fibre.—The cotton fibre varies in length from 1
to 2 inches, not only in fibres of the same class but also in fibres from
different localities—Indian fibres varying from 0.8 in the shortest to 1.4 in
the longest stapled varieties; Egyptian cotton fibres range from 1.1 to 1.6
inches long; American cotton ranges from 0.8 in the shortest to 2 inches in
the longest fibres. The diameter is about 1/1260 of an inch. When seen
under the microscope fully ripe cotton presents the appearance of
irregularly twisted ribbons, with thick rounded edges. The thickest part is
the root end, or point of attachment to the seed. The free end terminates in a
point. The diameter is fairly uniform through ¾ to ⅞ of its length, the rest is
taper. In Fig. 1 is given some illustrations of the cotton fibre, showing this
twisted and ribbon-like structure, while in Fig. 1A is given some transverse
sections of the fibre. These show that it is a collapsed cylinder, the walls
being of considerable thickness when compared with the internal bore or
canal.
Perfectly developed, well-formed cotton fibres always present this
appearance. But all commercial cottons contain more or less of fibres which
Probably stearic acid is the main constituent of this fatty acid.
Colouring Matter.—Two brown colouring matters, both containing
nitrogen, can be obtained from raw cotton. One of these is readily soluble in
alcohol, the other only sparingly so. The presence in relatively large
quantities of these bodies accounts for the brown colour of Egyptian and
some other dark-coloured varieties of cotton.
Pectic Acid.—This is the chief impurity found in raw cotton. It can be
obtained in the form of an amorphous substance of a light yellow colour,
not unlike gum in appearance. It is soluble in boiling water, and the solution
has a faint acid reaction. Acids and many metallic salts, such as mercury,
chloride and lead acetate, precipitate pectic acid from its solutions. Alkalies
combine with it, and these compounds form brown substances, are but
sparingly soluble in water, and many of them can be precipitated out by
addition of neutral salts, like sodium and ammonium chlorides.
Albumens.—A small quantity of albuminous matter is found among the
impurities of cotton.
Structure of the Cotton Fibre.—The cotton fibre varies in length from 1
to 2 inches, not only in fibres of the same class but also in fibres from
different localities—Indian fibres varying from 0.8 in the shortest to 1.4 in
the longest stapled varieties; Egyptian cotton fibres range from 1.1 to 1.6
inches long; American cotton ranges from 0.8 in the shortest to 2 inches in
the longest fibres. The diameter is about 1/1260 of an inch. When seen
under the microscope fully ripe cotton presents the appearance of
irregularly twisted ribbons, with thick rounded edges. The thickest part is
the root end, or point of attachment to the seed. The free end terminates in a
point. The diameter is fairly uniform through ¾ to ⅞ of its length, the rest is
taper. In Fig. 1 is given some illustrations of the cotton fibre, showing this
twisted and ribbon-like structure, while in Fig. 1A is given some transverse
sections of the fibre. These show that it is a collapsed cylinder, the walls
being of considerable thickness when compared with the internal bore or
canal.
Perfectly developed, well-formed cotton fibres always present this
appearance. But all commercial cottons contain more or less of fibres which
Page 14
are not perfectly developed or are unripe. These are known as "dead fibres";
they do not spin well and they do not dye well. On examination under the
microscope it is seen that these fibres have not the flattened, twisted
appearance of the ripe fibres, but are flatter, and the central canal is almost
obliterated and the fibres are but little twisted. Dead fibres are thin, brittle
and weak.
Composition of the Cotton Fibres.—Of all the vegetable textile fibres
cotton is found to have the simplest chemical composition and to be, as it
were, the type substance of all such fibres, the others differing from it in
several respects. When stripped of the comparatively small quantities of
impurities, cotton is found to consist of a substance to which the name of
cellulose has been given.
FIG. 1.—Cotton Fibre.
Cellulose is a compound of the three elements, carbon, hydrogen and
oxygen, in the proportions shown in the following analysis:—
Carbon, 44.2 per cent., Hydrogen, 6.3 per cent., Oxygen, 49.5 per cent.,
which corresponds to the empirical formula C6H10O5, which shows it to
belong to the group of carbo-hydrates, that is, bodies which contain the
hydrogen and oxygen present in them in the proportion in which they are
present in water, namely H2O.
Cellulose may be obtained in a pure condition from cotton by treatment
with alkalies, followed by washing, and by treatment with alkaline
they do not spin well and they do not dye well. On examination under the
microscope it is seen that these fibres have not the flattened, twisted
appearance of the ripe fibres, but are flatter, and the central canal is almost
obliterated and the fibres are but little twisted. Dead fibres are thin, brittle
and weak.
Composition of the Cotton Fibres.—Of all the vegetable textile fibres
cotton is found to have the simplest chemical composition and to be, as it
were, the type substance of all such fibres, the others differing from it in
several respects. When stripped of the comparatively small quantities of
impurities, cotton is found to consist of a substance to which the name of
cellulose has been given.
FIG. 1.—Cotton Fibre.
Cellulose is a compound of the three elements, carbon, hydrogen and
oxygen, in the proportions shown in the following analysis:—
Carbon, 44.2 per cent., Hydrogen, 6.3 per cent., Oxygen, 49.5 per cent.,
which corresponds to the empirical formula C6H10O5, which shows it to
belong to the group of carbo-hydrates, that is, bodies which contain the
hydrogen and oxygen present in them in the proportion in which they are
present in water, namely H2O.
Cellulose may be obtained in a pure condition from cotton by treatment
with alkalies, followed by washing, and by treatment with alkaline
Page 15
hypochlorites, acids, washing and, finally, drying. As thus obtained it is a
white substance having the form of the fibre from which it is procured,
showing a slight lustre, and is slightly translucent. The specific gravity is
1.5, it being heavier than water. It is characterised by being very inert, a
property of considerable value from a technical point of view, as enabling
the fibres to stand the various operations of bleaching, dyeing, printing,
finishing, etc. Nevertheless, by suitable means, cellulose can be made to
undergo various chemical decompositions which will be noted in some
detail.
Cellulose on exposure to the air will absorb moisture or water. This is
known as hygroscopic moisture, or "water of condition". The amount in
cotton is about 8 per cent., and it has a very important bearing on the
spinning properties of the fibre, as it makes the fibre soft and elastic, while
absolutely dry cotton fibre is stiff, brittle and non-elastic; hence it is easier
to spin and weave cotton in moist climates or weather than in dry climates
or weather. Cotton cellulose is insoluble in all ordinary solvents, such as
water, ether, alcohol, chloroform, benzene, etc., and these agents have no
influence in any way on the material, but it is soluble in some special
solvents that will be noted later on.
ACTION OF ALKALIES.
The action of alkalies on cellulose or cotton is one of great importance in
view of the universal use of alkaline liquors made from soda or caustic soda
in the scouring, bleaching and dyeing of cotton, while great interest attaches
to the use of caustic soda in the "mercerising" of cotton.
Dilute solutions of the caustic alkalies, caustic soda or caustic potash, of
from 2 to 7 per cent. strength, have no action on cellulose or cotton, in the
cold, even when a prolonged digestion of the fibre with the alkaline solution
takes place. Caustic alkali solutions of from 1 to 2 per cent. strength have
little or no action even when used at high temperatures and under
considerable pressure—a fact of very great importance from a bleacher's
point of view, as it enables him to subject cotton to a boil in kiers, with such
alkaline solutions at high pressures, for the purpose of scouring the cotton,
without damaging the fibre itself.
white substance having the form of the fibre from which it is procured,
showing a slight lustre, and is slightly translucent. The specific gravity is
1.5, it being heavier than water. It is characterised by being very inert, a
property of considerable value from a technical point of view, as enabling
the fibres to stand the various operations of bleaching, dyeing, printing,
finishing, etc. Nevertheless, by suitable means, cellulose can be made to
undergo various chemical decompositions which will be noted in some
detail.
Cellulose on exposure to the air will absorb moisture or water. This is
known as hygroscopic moisture, or "water of condition". The amount in
cotton is about 8 per cent., and it has a very important bearing on the
spinning properties of the fibre, as it makes the fibre soft and elastic, while
absolutely dry cotton fibre is stiff, brittle and non-elastic; hence it is easier
to spin and weave cotton in moist climates or weather than in dry climates
or weather. Cotton cellulose is insoluble in all ordinary solvents, such as
water, ether, alcohol, chloroform, benzene, etc., and these agents have no
influence in any way on the material, but it is soluble in some special
solvents that will be noted later on.
ACTION OF ALKALIES.
The action of alkalies on cellulose or cotton is one of great importance in
view of the universal use of alkaline liquors made from soda or caustic soda
in the scouring, bleaching and dyeing of cotton, while great interest attaches
to the use of caustic soda in the "mercerising" of cotton.
Dilute solutions of the caustic alkalies, caustic soda or caustic potash, of
from 2 to 7 per cent. strength, have no action on cellulose or cotton, in the
cold, even when a prolonged digestion of the fibre with the alkaline solution
takes place. Caustic alkali solutions of from 1 to 2 per cent. strength have
little or no action even when used at high temperatures and under
considerable pressure—a fact of very great importance from a bleacher's
point of view, as it enables him to subject cotton to a boil in kiers, with such
alkaline solutions at high pressures, for the purpose of scouring the cotton,
without damaging the fibre itself.
Page 16
Mercerised Cotton Fibre.
Solutions of caustic soda of greater strength than 3 per cent. tend, when
boiled under pressure, to convert the cellulose into soluble bodies, and as
much as 20 per cent. of the fibre may become dissolved under such
treatment. The action of strong solutions of caustic soda or caustic potash
upon cellulose or cotton is somewhat different. Mercer found that solutions
containing 10 per cent. of alkali had a very considerable effect upon the
fibre, causing it to swell up and become gelatinous and transparent in its
structure, each individual cotton fibre losing its ribbon-like appearance, and
assuming a rod-like form, the central canal being more or less obliterated.
This is shown in Fig. 2 and 2A, where the fibre is shown as a rod and the
cross section in Fig. 2A has no central canal. The action which takes place
is as follows: The cellulose enters into a combination with the alkali and
there is formed a sodium cellulose, which has the formula C6H10O52NaOH.
This alkali cellulose, however, is not a stable body; by washing with water
the alkali is removed, and hydrated cellulose is obtained, which has the
formula C6H10O5H2O. Water removes the whole of the alkali, but alcohol
only removes one half. It has been observed that during the process of
washing with water the fibre shrinks very much. This shrinkage is more
particularly to be observed in the case of cotton. As John Mercer was the
first to point out the action of the alkaline solutions on cotton, the process
has become known as "mercerisation".
Solutions of caustic soda of 1.000 or 20° Tw. in strength have very little
mercerising action, and it is only by prolonged treatment that mercerisation
can be effected. It is interesting to observe that the addition of zinc oxide to
the caustic solution increases its mercerising powers. Solutions of 1.225 to
1.275 (that is from 45° to 55° Tw. in strength) effect the mercerisation
Solutions of caustic soda of greater strength than 3 per cent. tend, when
boiled under pressure, to convert the cellulose into soluble bodies, and as
much as 20 per cent. of the fibre may become dissolved under such
treatment. The action of strong solutions of caustic soda or caustic potash
upon cellulose or cotton is somewhat different. Mercer found that solutions
containing 10 per cent. of alkali had a very considerable effect upon the
fibre, causing it to swell up and become gelatinous and transparent in its
structure, each individual cotton fibre losing its ribbon-like appearance, and
assuming a rod-like form, the central canal being more or less obliterated.
This is shown in Fig. 2 and 2A, where the fibre is shown as a rod and the
cross section in Fig. 2A has no central canal. The action which takes place
is as follows: The cellulose enters into a combination with the alkali and
there is formed a sodium cellulose, which has the formula C6H10O52NaOH.
This alkali cellulose, however, is not a stable body; by washing with water
the alkali is removed, and hydrated cellulose is obtained, which has the
formula C6H10O5H2O. Water removes the whole of the alkali, but alcohol
only removes one half. It has been observed that during the process of
washing with water the fibre shrinks very much. This shrinkage is more
particularly to be observed in the case of cotton. As John Mercer was the
first to point out the action of the alkaline solutions on cotton, the process
has become known as "mercerisation".
Solutions of caustic soda of 1.000 or 20° Tw. in strength have very little
mercerising action, and it is only by prolonged treatment that mercerisation
can be effected. It is interesting to observe that the addition of zinc oxide to
the caustic solution increases its mercerising powers. Solutions of 1.225 to
1.275 (that is from 45° to 55° Tw. in strength) effect the mercerisation
Page 17
almost immediately in the cold, and this is the best strength at which to use
caustic soda solutions for this purpose. In addition to the change brought
about by the shrinking and thickening of the material, the mercerised fibres
are stronger than the untreated fibres, and at the same time they have a
stronger affinity for dyes, a piece of cloth mercerised taking up three times
as much colouring matter as a piece of unmercerised cloth from the same
dye-bath.
The shrinkage of the cotton, which takes place during the operation of
washing with water, was for a long time a bar to any practical application of
the "mercerising" process, but some years ago Lowe ascertained that by
conducting the operation while the cotton was stretched or in a state of
tension this shrinkage did not take place; further, Thomas and Prevost found
that the cotton so treated gained a silky lustre, and it has since been
ascertained that this lustre is most highly developed with the long-stapled
Egyptian and Sea Island cottons. This mercerising under tension is now
applied on a large scale to produce silkified cotton. When viewed under the
microscope, the silkified cotton fibres have the appearance shown in Fig. 3,
long rod-like fibres nearly if not quite cylindrical; the cross section of those
fibres has the appearance shown in Fig. 3A. This structure fully accounts
for the silky lustre possessed by the mercerised fibres. Silky mercerised
cotton has very considerable affinity for dye-stuffs, taking them up much
more readily from dye-baths, and it is dyed in very brilliant shades.
FIG. 3.—Silkified Cotton Fibre.
caustic soda solutions for this purpose. In addition to the change brought
about by the shrinking and thickening of the material, the mercerised fibres
are stronger than the untreated fibres, and at the same time they have a
stronger affinity for dyes, a piece of cloth mercerised taking up three times
as much colouring matter as a piece of unmercerised cloth from the same
dye-bath.
The shrinkage of the cotton, which takes place during the operation of
washing with water, was for a long time a bar to any practical application of
the "mercerising" process, but some years ago Lowe ascertained that by
conducting the operation while the cotton was stretched or in a state of
tension this shrinkage did not take place; further, Thomas and Prevost found
that the cotton so treated gained a silky lustre, and it has since been
ascertained that this lustre is most highly developed with the long-stapled
Egyptian and Sea Island cottons. This mercerising under tension is now
applied on a large scale to produce silkified cotton. When viewed under the
microscope, the silkified cotton fibres have the appearance shown in Fig. 3,
long rod-like fibres nearly if not quite cylindrical; the cross section of those
fibres has the appearance shown in Fig. 3A. This structure fully accounts
for the silky lustre possessed by the mercerised fibres. Silky mercerised
cotton has very considerable affinity for dye-stuffs, taking them up much
more readily from dye-baths, and it is dyed in very brilliant shades.
FIG. 3.—Silkified Cotton Fibre.
Page 18
In the chapter on Scouring and Bleaching of Cotton, some reference will be
made to the action of alkalies on cotton.
ACTION OF ACIDS ON CELLULOSE.
The action of acids on cellulose is a very varied one, being dependent upon
several factors, such as the particular acid used, the strength of the acid,
duration of action, temperature, etc. As a rule, organic acids—for example
acetic, oxalic, citric, tartaric—have no action on cellulose or cotton.
Solutions of sulphuric acid or hydrochloric acid of 2 per cent. strength have
practically no action in the cold, and if after immersion the cotton or
cellulose be well washed there is no change of any kind. This is important,
as in certain operations of bleaching cotton and other vegetable fibres it is
necessary to sour them, which could not be done if acids acted on them, but
it is important to thoroughly wash the goods afterwards. When the acid
solutions are used at the boil they have a disintegrating effect on the
cellulose, the latter being converted into hydrocellulose. When dried, the
cellulose is very brittle and powdery, which in the case of cotton yarn being
so treated would show itself by the yarn becoming tender and rotten. The
degree of action varies with the temperature (the higher this is the stronger
the action), and also according to the strength of the acid solution. Thus a
10 per cent. solution of sulphuric acid used at a temperature of 80° C.
begins to act on cotton after about five minutes' immersion, in half an hour
there is a perceptible amount of disintegration, but the complete conversion
of the cotton into hydrocellulose requires one hour's immersion. A dilute
acid with 8 volumes of water, used in the cold, takes three hours' immersion
before any action on the cotton becomes evident.
ACTION OF SULPHURIC ACID ON COTTON.
When cellulose (cotton) is immersed in strong sulphuric acid the cotton
becomes gradually dissolved; as the action progresses cellulose sulphates
are formed, and some hydrolytic action takes place, with the formation of
sugar. This fact has long been known, but only recently has it been shown
that dextrose was the variety of sugar which was formed. On diluting the
strong acid solution with water there is precipitated out the hydro or
oxycelluloses that have been formed, while the cellulose sulphates are
retained in solution.
made to the action of alkalies on cotton.
ACTION OF ACIDS ON CELLULOSE.
The action of acids on cellulose is a very varied one, being dependent upon
several factors, such as the particular acid used, the strength of the acid,
duration of action, temperature, etc. As a rule, organic acids—for example
acetic, oxalic, citric, tartaric—have no action on cellulose or cotton.
Solutions of sulphuric acid or hydrochloric acid of 2 per cent. strength have
practically no action in the cold, and if after immersion the cotton or
cellulose be well washed there is no change of any kind. This is important,
as in certain operations of bleaching cotton and other vegetable fibres it is
necessary to sour them, which could not be done if acids acted on them, but
it is important to thoroughly wash the goods afterwards. When the acid
solutions are used at the boil they have a disintegrating effect on the
cellulose, the latter being converted into hydrocellulose. When dried, the
cellulose is very brittle and powdery, which in the case of cotton yarn being
so treated would show itself by the yarn becoming tender and rotten. The
degree of action varies with the temperature (the higher this is the stronger
the action), and also according to the strength of the acid solution. Thus a
10 per cent. solution of sulphuric acid used at a temperature of 80° C.
begins to act on cotton after about five minutes' immersion, in half an hour
there is a perceptible amount of disintegration, but the complete conversion
of the cotton into hydrocellulose requires one hour's immersion. A dilute
acid with 8 volumes of water, used in the cold, takes three hours' immersion
before any action on the cotton becomes evident.
ACTION OF SULPHURIC ACID ON COTTON.
When cellulose (cotton) is immersed in strong sulphuric acid the cotton
becomes gradually dissolved; as the action progresses cellulose sulphates
are formed, and some hydrolytic action takes place, with the formation of
sugar. This fact has long been known, but only recently has it been shown
that dextrose was the variety of sugar which was formed. On diluting the
strong acid solution with water there is precipitated out the hydro or
oxycelluloses that have been formed, while the cellulose sulphates are
retained in solution.
Page 19
By suitable means the calcium, barium, or lead salts of these cellulose-
sulphuric acids can be prepared. Analysis of them shows that these salts
undergo hydrolysis, and lose half their sulphuric acid.
The action of strong sulphuric acid has a practical application in the
production of parchment paper; unsized paper is immersed in strong acid of
the proper strength for about a minute, and then immediately rinsed in
water. The acid acts upon the surface of the paper and forms the cellulose-
sulphuric acid which remains attached to the surface. On passing into the
water this is decomposed, the acid is washed away, and the cellulose is
deposited in an amorphous form on the paper, filling up its pores and
rendering it waterproof and grease-proof. Such papers are now largely used
for packing purposes.
ACTION OF HYDROCHLORIC ACID.
Dilute hydrochloric acid of from 1° to 2° Tw. in strength, used in the cold,
has no action on cellulose. Cotton immersed in acids of the strength named
and then well washed in water is not materially affected in any way, which
is a feature of some value in connection with the bleaching of cotton, where
the material has to be treated at two points in the process with weak acids.
Boiling dilute hydrochloric acid of 10° Tw. disintegrates cellulose very
rapidly. The product is a white very friable powder, which if viewed under
the microscope appears to be fragments of the fibre that has been used to
prepare it. The product has the composition C12H22O11, and is therefore a
hydrate of cellulose, the latter having undergone hydrolysis by taking up the
elements of water according to the equation 2C6H10O5 + H2O = C12H22O11.
By further digestion with the acid, the hydrocellulose, as it is called,
undergoes molecular change, and is converted into dextrine. In composition
hydrocellulose resembles the product formed by the addition of sulphuric
acid which has received the name of amyloid. It differs from cellulose in
containing free carboxyl, CO, groups, while its hydroxyl groups, HO, are
much more active in their chemical reactions.
Hydrocellulose is soluble in nitric acid, 1.5 specific gravity, without
undergoing oxidation. Nitrates are formed varying in composition.
sulphuric acids can be prepared. Analysis of them shows that these salts
undergo hydrolysis, and lose half their sulphuric acid.
The action of strong sulphuric acid has a practical application in the
production of parchment paper; unsized paper is immersed in strong acid of
the proper strength for about a minute, and then immediately rinsed in
water. The acid acts upon the surface of the paper and forms the cellulose-
sulphuric acid which remains attached to the surface. On passing into the
water this is decomposed, the acid is washed away, and the cellulose is
deposited in an amorphous form on the paper, filling up its pores and
rendering it waterproof and grease-proof. Such papers are now largely used
for packing purposes.
ACTION OF HYDROCHLORIC ACID.
Dilute hydrochloric acid of from 1° to 2° Tw. in strength, used in the cold,
has no action on cellulose. Cotton immersed in acids of the strength named
and then well washed in water is not materially affected in any way, which
is a feature of some value in connection with the bleaching of cotton, where
the material has to be treated at two points in the process with weak acids.
Boiling dilute hydrochloric acid of 10° Tw. disintegrates cellulose very
rapidly. The product is a white very friable powder, which if viewed under
the microscope appears to be fragments of the fibre that has been used to
prepare it. The product has the composition C12H22O11, and is therefore a
hydrate of cellulose, the latter having undergone hydrolysis by taking up the
elements of water according to the equation 2C6H10O5 + H2O = C12H22O11.
By further digestion with the acid, the hydrocellulose, as it is called,
undergoes molecular change, and is converted into dextrine. In composition
hydrocellulose resembles the product formed by the addition of sulphuric
acid which has received the name of amyloid. It differs from cellulose in
containing free carboxyl, CO, groups, while its hydroxyl groups, HO, are
much more active in their chemical reactions.
Hydrocellulose is soluble in nitric acid, 1.5 specific gravity, without
undergoing oxidation. Nitrates are formed varying in composition.
Page 20
The formation of hydrocellulose has a very important bearing in woollen
manufacture. It is practically impossible to obtain wool free from vegetable
fibres, and it is often desirable to separate these vegetable fibres. For this
purpose the goods are passed into a bath of hydrochloric acid or of weak
sulphuric acid. On drying the acid converts the cotton or vegetable fibre
into hydrocellulose which, being friable or powdery, can be easily removed,
while the wool not having been acted on by the acid remains quite intact.
The process is known as "carbonising". It may not only be done by means
of the acids named but also by the use of acid salts, such as aluminium
chloride, which on being heated are decomposed into free acid and basic
oxide. For the same reason it is important to avoid the use of these bodies,
aluminium chloride and sulphate, zinc and magnesium chlorides, etc., in the
treatment of cotton fabrics; as in finishing processes, where the goods are
dried afterwards, there is a great liability to form hydrocellulose with the
accompaniment of the tendering of the goods.
ACTION OF NITRIC ACID.
The action of nitric acid on cellulose is a variable one, depending on many
factors, strength of acid, duration of action and temperature. Naturally as
nitric acid is a strong oxidising agent the action of nitric acid on cellulose is
essentially in all cases that of an oxidant, but the character of the product
which is obtained varies very much according to the conditions just noted.
When cellulose or cotton in any form is immersed in nitric acid of 1.4 to 1.5
specific gravity for a moment, and the fibre be well washed, there is a
formation of hydrate of cellulose which has a gelatinous nature. This is
deposited on the rest of the material, which is not materially affected so far
as regards strength and appearance, but its power of affinity for dyes is
materially increased. There is some shrinkage in the size of the cotton or
paper acted upon.
Nitric acid changes all kinds of cellulose into nitro products, the
composition of which depends upon the strength of the acid, the duration of
treatment, and one or two other factors. The nitrocelluloses are all highly
inflammable bodies, the more highly nitrated burning with explosive force.
They are produced commercially and are known as "gun cotton" or
"pyroxyline". The most highly nitrated body forms the basis of the
manufacture. It is practically impossible to obtain wool free from vegetable
fibres, and it is often desirable to separate these vegetable fibres. For this
purpose the goods are passed into a bath of hydrochloric acid or of weak
sulphuric acid. On drying the acid converts the cotton or vegetable fibre
into hydrocellulose which, being friable or powdery, can be easily removed,
while the wool not having been acted on by the acid remains quite intact.
The process is known as "carbonising". It may not only be done by means
of the acids named but also by the use of acid salts, such as aluminium
chloride, which on being heated are decomposed into free acid and basic
oxide. For the same reason it is important to avoid the use of these bodies,
aluminium chloride and sulphate, zinc and magnesium chlorides, etc., in the
treatment of cotton fabrics; as in finishing processes, where the goods are
dried afterwards, there is a great liability to form hydrocellulose with the
accompaniment of the tendering of the goods.
ACTION OF NITRIC ACID.
The action of nitric acid on cellulose is a variable one, depending on many
factors, strength of acid, duration of action and temperature. Naturally as
nitric acid is a strong oxidising agent the action of nitric acid on cellulose is
essentially in all cases that of an oxidant, but the character of the product
which is obtained varies very much according to the conditions just noted.
When cellulose or cotton in any form is immersed in nitric acid of 1.4 to 1.5
specific gravity for a moment, and the fibre be well washed, there is a
formation of hydrate of cellulose which has a gelatinous nature. This is
deposited on the rest of the material, which is not materially affected so far
as regards strength and appearance, but its power of affinity for dyes is
materially increased. There is some shrinkage in the size of the cotton or
paper acted upon.
Nitric acid changes all kinds of cellulose into nitro products, the
composition of which depends upon the strength of the acid, the duration of
treatment, and one or two other factors. The nitrocelluloses are all highly
inflammable bodies, the more highly nitrated burning with explosive force.
They are produced commercially and are known as "gun cotton" or
"pyroxyline". The most highly nitrated body forms the basis of the
Page 21
explosive variety; the least highly nitrated forms that of the soluble gun
cotton used for making collodion for photographic and other purposes.
The products formed by the action of nitric acid are usually considered to
be nitrocelluloses. It would appear that they are more correctly described as
cellulose-nitrates, for analysis indicates the presence of the NO3 group,
which is characteristic of nitrates, and not of the NO2 group, which is the
feature of nitro bodies in general. Further, nitro compounds, when subject to
the action of reducing agents, are converted into amido compounds, as is
the case, for instance, with nitro-benzene, C6H5NO2, into aniline,
C6H5NH2, or with nitro-naphthalene, C10H7NO2, which changes into
naphthylamine, C10H7NH2.
But the nitric acid derivatives of cellulose are not capable of conversion by
reducing agents into similar amido compounds. They have the following
properties, which accord more closely with nitrates than with nitric bodies:
alkalies remove the nitric acid; cold sulphuric acid expels the nitric acid,
cellulose sulphates being formed; boiling with ferrous sulphate and
hydrochloric acid causes the elimination of the nitric acid as nitric oxide (on
which reaction a method for determining the degree of nitration of gun
cotton is based). It is best therefore to consider them as cellulose nitrates.
Several well-characterised cellulose nitrates have been prepared, but is an
exceedingly difficult matter to obtain any one in a state of purity, the
commercial articles being always mixtures of two or three. Those that are
best known and of the most importance are the following:—
Cellulose Hexa-nitrate, C6H4O5(NO3)6. This forms the principal portion of
the commercial explosive gun cotton, and is made when a mixture of strong
nitric acid and strong sulphuric acid is allowed to act on cotton at from 50
to 55° F. for twenty-four hours. The longer the action is prolonged, the more
completely is the cotton converted into the nitrate, with a short duration the
finished product contains lower nitrates. This hexa-nitrate is insoluble in
ether, alcohol, or in a mixture of those solvents, likewise in glacial acetic
acid or in methyl alcohol.
Cellulose Penta-nitrate, C6H5O5(NO3)5, is found in explosive gun cotton to
a small extent. When gun cotton is dissolved in nitric acid and sulphuric
cotton used for making collodion for photographic and other purposes.
The products formed by the action of nitric acid are usually considered to
be nitrocelluloses. It would appear that they are more correctly described as
cellulose-nitrates, for analysis indicates the presence of the NO3 group,
which is characteristic of nitrates, and not of the NO2 group, which is the
feature of nitro bodies in general. Further, nitro compounds, when subject to
the action of reducing agents, are converted into amido compounds, as is
the case, for instance, with nitro-benzene, C6H5NO2, into aniline,
C6H5NH2, or with nitro-naphthalene, C10H7NO2, which changes into
naphthylamine, C10H7NH2.
But the nitric acid derivatives of cellulose are not capable of conversion by
reducing agents into similar amido compounds. They have the following
properties, which accord more closely with nitrates than with nitric bodies:
alkalies remove the nitric acid; cold sulphuric acid expels the nitric acid,
cellulose sulphates being formed; boiling with ferrous sulphate and
hydrochloric acid causes the elimination of the nitric acid as nitric oxide (on
which reaction a method for determining the degree of nitration of gun
cotton is based). It is best therefore to consider them as cellulose nitrates.
Several well-characterised cellulose nitrates have been prepared, but is an
exceedingly difficult matter to obtain any one in a state of purity, the
commercial articles being always mixtures of two or three. Those that are
best known and of the most importance are the following:—
Cellulose Hexa-nitrate, C6H4O5(NO3)6. This forms the principal portion of
the commercial explosive gun cotton, and is made when a mixture of strong
nitric acid and strong sulphuric acid is allowed to act on cotton at from 50
to 55° F. for twenty-four hours. The longer the action is prolonged, the more
completely is the cotton converted into the nitrate, with a short duration the
finished product contains lower nitrates. This hexa-nitrate is insoluble in
ether, alcohol, or in a mixture of those solvents, likewise in glacial acetic
acid or in methyl alcohol.
Cellulose Penta-nitrate, C6H5O5(NO3)5, is found in explosive gun cotton to
a small extent. When gun cotton is dissolved in nitric acid and sulphuric
Page 22
acid is added, the penta-nitrate is thrown down as a precipitate. It is not
soluble in alcohol, but is so in a mixture of ether and alcohol, it is also
slightly soluble in acetic acid. Solutions of caustic potash convert it into the
di-nitrate.
Cellulose Tetra-nitrate, C6H6O5(NO3)4, and Cellulose Tri-nitrate, C6H7O5,
(NO3)3, form the basis of the pyroxyline or soluble gun cotton of
commerce. It has not been found possible to separate them owing to their
behaviour to solvents being very similar. These nitrates are obtained by
treating cotton with nitric acid for twenty or thirty minutes. They are
characterised by being more soluble than the higher nitrates and less
inflammable. They are freely soluble in a mixture of ether and alcohol, from
which solutions they are precipitated in a gelatinous form on adding
chloroform. Acetic ether, methyl alcohol, acetone and glacial acetic acid,
will also dissolve these nitrates.
Cellulose Di-nitrate, C6H8O5(NO3)2, is obtained when cellulose is treated
with hot dilute nitric acid, or when the high nitrates are boiled with
solutions of caustic soda or caustic potash. Like the last-mentioned nitrates
it is soluble in a mixture of alcohol and ether, in acetic ether, and in absolute
alcohol. The solution of the pyroxyline nitrates in ether and alcohol is
known as collodion, and is used in photography and in medical and surgical
work.
One of the most interesting applications of the cellulose nitrates is in the
production of artificial silk. Several processes, the differences between
which are partly chemical and partly mechanical, have been patented for the
production of artificial silk, those of Lehner and of Chardonnet being of
most importance. They all depend upon the fact that when a solution of
cellulose nitrate is forced through a fine aperture or tube, the solvent
evaporates almost immediately, leaving a gelatinous thread of the cellulose
nitrate which is very tough and elastic, and possesses a brilliant lustre.
Chardonnet dissolves the cellulose nitrate in a mixture of alcohol and ether,
and the solution is forced through fine capillary tubes into hot water, when
the solvents immediately evaporate, leaving the cellulose nitrate in the form
of very fine fibre, which by suitable machinery is drawn away as fast as it is
formed. Lehner's process is very similar to that of Chardonnet. Lehner uses
a solution of cellulose nitrate in ether and alcohol, and adds a small quantity
soluble in alcohol, but is so in a mixture of ether and alcohol, it is also
slightly soluble in acetic acid. Solutions of caustic potash convert it into the
di-nitrate.
Cellulose Tetra-nitrate, C6H6O5(NO3)4, and Cellulose Tri-nitrate, C6H7O5,
(NO3)3, form the basis of the pyroxyline or soluble gun cotton of
commerce. It has not been found possible to separate them owing to their
behaviour to solvents being very similar. These nitrates are obtained by
treating cotton with nitric acid for twenty or thirty minutes. They are
characterised by being more soluble than the higher nitrates and less
inflammable. They are freely soluble in a mixture of ether and alcohol, from
which solutions they are precipitated in a gelatinous form on adding
chloroform. Acetic ether, methyl alcohol, acetone and glacial acetic acid,
will also dissolve these nitrates.
Cellulose Di-nitrate, C6H8O5(NO3)2, is obtained when cellulose is treated
with hot dilute nitric acid, or when the high nitrates are boiled with
solutions of caustic soda or caustic potash. Like the last-mentioned nitrates
it is soluble in a mixture of alcohol and ether, in acetic ether, and in absolute
alcohol. The solution of the pyroxyline nitrates in ether and alcohol is
known as collodion, and is used in photography and in medical and surgical
work.
One of the most interesting applications of the cellulose nitrates is in the
production of artificial silk. Several processes, the differences between
which are partly chemical and partly mechanical, have been patented for the
production of artificial silk, those of Lehner and of Chardonnet being of
most importance. They all depend upon the fact that when a solution of
cellulose nitrate is forced through a fine aperture or tube, the solvent
evaporates almost immediately, leaving a gelatinous thread of the cellulose
nitrate which is very tough and elastic, and possesses a brilliant lustre.
Chardonnet dissolves the cellulose nitrate in a mixture of alcohol and ether,
and the solution is forced through fine capillary tubes into hot water, when
the solvents immediately evaporate, leaving the cellulose nitrate in the form
of very fine fibre, which by suitable machinery is drawn away as fast as it is
formed. Lehner's process is very similar to that of Chardonnet. Lehner uses
a solution of cellulose nitrate in ether and alcohol, and adds a small quantity
Page 23
of sulphuric acid; by the adoption of the latter ingredient he is able to use a
stronger solution of cellulose nitrate, 10 to 15 per cent., than would
otherwise be possible, and thereby obtains a stronger thread which resists
the process of drawing much better than is the case when only a weak
solution in alcohol and ether is employed. By subsequent treatment the fibre
can be denitrated and so rendered less inflammable.
The denitrated fibres thus prepared very closely resemble silk in their lustre;
they are not quite so soft and supple, nor are they in any way so strong as
ordinary silk fibre of the same diameter.
Artificial silk can be dyed in the same manner as ordinary silk.
ACTION OF OXIDISING AGENTS ON CELLULOSE OR COTTON
Cellulose resists fairly well the action of weak oxidising agents; still too
prolonged an action of weak oxidising agents has some influence upon the
cotton fibre, and it may be worth while to point out the action of some
bodies having an oxidising effect.
Nitric acid of about 1.15 specific gravity has little action in the cold, and
only slowly on it when heated. The action is one of oxidation, the cellulose
being transformed into a substance known as oxycellulose. This
oxycellulose is white and flocculent. It tends to form gelatinous hydrates
with water, and has a composition corresponding to the formula C6H10O6. It
is soluble in a mixture of nitric and sulphuric acids, and on diluting this
solution with water a tri-nitrate precipitates out. A weak solution of soda
dissolves this oxycellulose with a yellow colour, while strong sulphuric acid
forms a pink colouration. It is important to note that nitric acid of the
strength given does not convert all the cellulose into oxycellulose, but there
are formed also carbonic and oxalic acids. When cotton is passed into
strong solutions of bleaching powder and of alkaline hypochlorites and then
dried, it is found to be tendered very considerably. This effect of bleaching
powder was first observed some thirteen years ago by George Witz, who
ascribed the tendering of the cotton to the formation of an oxycellulose.
Although the composition of this particular oxycellulose so formed has not
yet been ascertained, there is reason to think that it differs somewhat from
the oxycellulose formed by the action of the weak nitric acid. A notable
property of the oxycellulose now under consideration is its affinity for the
stronger solution of cellulose nitrate, 10 to 15 per cent., than would
otherwise be possible, and thereby obtains a stronger thread which resists
the process of drawing much better than is the case when only a weak
solution in alcohol and ether is employed. By subsequent treatment the fibre
can be denitrated and so rendered less inflammable.
The denitrated fibres thus prepared very closely resemble silk in their lustre;
they are not quite so soft and supple, nor are they in any way so strong as
ordinary silk fibre of the same diameter.
Artificial silk can be dyed in the same manner as ordinary silk.
ACTION OF OXIDISING AGENTS ON CELLULOSE OR COTTON
Cellulose resists fairly well the action of weak oxidising agents; still too
prolonged an action of weak oxidising agents has some influence upon the
cotton fibre, and it may be worth while to point out the action of some
bodies having an oxidising effect.
Nitric acid of about 1.15 specific gravity has little action in the cold, and
only slowly on it when heated. The action is one of oxidation, the cellulose
being transformed into a substance known as oxycellulose. This
oxycellulose is white and flocculent. It tends to form gelatinous hydrates
with water, and has a composition corresponding to the formula C6H10O6. It
is soluble in a mixture of nitric and sulphuric acids, and on diluting this
solution with water a tri-nitrate precipitates out. A weak solution of soda
dissolves this oxycellulose with a yellow colour, while strong sulphuric acid
forms a pink colouration. It is important to note that nitric acid of the
strength given does not convert all the cellulose into oxycellulose, but there
are formed also carbonic and oxalic acids. When cotton is passed into
strong solutions of bleaching powder and of alkaline hypochlorites and then
dried, it is found to be tendered very considerably. This effect of bleaching
powder was first observed some thirteen years ago by George Witz, who
ascribed the tendering of the cotton to the formation of an oxycellulose.
Although the composition of this particular oxycellulose so formed has not
yet been ascertained, there is reason to think that it differs somewhat from
the oxycellulose formed by the action of the weak nitric acid. A notable
property of the oxycellulose now under consideration is its affinity for the
Page 24
basic coal-tar dyes, which it will absorb directly. The oxycellulose is
soluble in alkaline solutions.
In the ordinary bleaching process there is considerable risk of the formation
of oxycellulose by the employment of the bleaching solutions of too great a
strength, or in allowing the goods to lie too long before the final washing
off. The presence of any oxycellulose in bleached cotton may be readily
determined by immersing it in a weak solution of Methylene blue, when, if
there be any oxycellulose present, the fibre will take up some of the dye-
stuff.
Permanganate of potash is a very powerful oxidising agent. On cellulose
neutral solutions have but little action, either in the cold or when heated.
They may, therefore, be used for the bleaching of cotton or other cellulose
fibres.
Alkaline solutions of permanganate convert the cellulose into oxycellulose,
which resembles the oxycellulose obtained by the action of the nitric acid.
Chromic acid, when used in the form of a solution, has but little action on
cellulose. In the presence of mineral acids, and used warm or boiling,
chromic acid oxidises cellulose into oxycellulose and other products.
It is therefore always advisable in carrying out any technical process
connected with cotton which involves its treatment with oxidising agents of
any kind, and where it is desired not to alter the cotton, to allow these
actions to be as short as possible.
Dyes and Cotton Dyeing.—An account of the chemistry of the cotton fibre
would not be complete unless something is said about the reactions
involved in the processes of dyeing and printing cotton. This is a most
interesting subject and opens up quite a number of problems relating to the
combination of the fibre with colouring matter of various kinds, but here
only a brief outline of the principles that present themselves in considering
the behaviour of the cotton fibre as regards colouring matter will be given.
When the question is considered from a broad point of view, and having
regard to the various affinities of the dyes for cotton; we notice (1) that
there is a large number of dye-stuffs—the Benzo, Congo, Diamine, Titan,
Mikado, etc., dyes—that will dye the cotton from a plain bath or from a
soluble in alkaline solutions.
In the ordinary bleaching process there is considerable risk of the formation
of oxycellulose by the employment of the bleaching solutions of too great a
strength, or in allowing the goods to lie too long before the final washing
off. The presence of any oxycellulose in bleached cotton may be readily
determined by immersing it in a weak solution of Methylene blue, when, if
there be any oxycellulose present, the fibre will take up some of the dye-
stuff.
Permanganate of potash is a very powerful oxidising agent. On cellulose
neutral solutions have but little action, either in the cold or when heated.
They may, therefore, be used for the bleaching of cotton or other cellulose
fibres.
Alkaline solutions of permanganate convert the cellulose into oxycellulose,
which resembles the oxycellulose obtained by the action of the nitric acid.
Chromic acid, when used in the form of a solution, has but little action on
cellulose. In the presence of mineral acids, and used warm or boiling,
chromic acid oxidises cellulose into oxycellulose and other products.
It is therefore always advisable in carrying out any technical process
connected with cotton which involves its treatment with oxidising agents of
any kind, and where it is desired not to alter the cotton, to allow these
actions to be as short as possible.
Dyes and Cotton Dyeing.—An account of the chemistry of the cotton fibre
would not be complete unless something is said about the reactions
involved in the processes of dyeing and printing cotton. This is a most
interesting subject and opens up quite a number of problems relating to the
combination of the fibre with colouring matter of various kinds, but here
only a brief outline of the principles that present themselves in considering
the behaviour of the cotton fibre as regards colouring matter will be given.
When the question is considered from a broad point of view, and having
regard to the various affinities of the dyes for cotton; we notice (1) that
there is a large number of dye-stuffs—the Benzo, Congo, Diamine, Titan,
Mikado, etc., dyes—that will dye the cotton from a plain bath or from a
Page 25
bath containing salt, sodium sulphate, borax or similar salts; (2) that there
are dyes which, like Magenta, Safranine, Auramine and Methyl violet, will
not dye the cotton fibre direct, but require it to be mordanted or prepared
with tannic acid; (3) that there are some dyes or rather colouring matters
which, like Alizarine, Nitroso-resorcine, barwood, logwood, etc., require
alumina, chrome and iron mordants; (4) that there are some dyes which,
like the azo scarlet and azo colours in general, cannot be used in cotton
dyeing; (5) that there are a few dyes, i.e., indigo, which do not come under
this grouping.
From the results of recent investigations into the chemistry of dyeing it is
now considered that for perfect dyeing to take place there must be formed
on the fibre a combination which is called a "colour lake," which consists of
at least two constituents; one of these is the dye-stuff or the colouring
matter itself, the other being either the fibre or a mordant, if such has to be
used. The question of the formation of colour lakes is one connected with
the molecular constitution of the colouring matter, but much yet remains to
be done before the proper functions and mode of action of the various
groups or radicles in the dye-stuffs can be definitely stated. While the
constitution of the dye-stuff is of importance, that of the substance being
dyed is also a factor in the question of the conditions under which it is
applied.
In dealing with the first of the above groups of dyes, the direct dyes, the
colourist is somewhat at a loss to explain in what manner the combination
with the cotton fibre is brought about. The affinity of cellulose for dyes
appears to be so small and its chemical activities so weak, that to assume
the existence of a reaction between the dye-stuff and the fibre, tending to
the formation of a colour lake, seems to be untenable. Then, again, the
chemical composition and constitution of the dyes of this group are so
varied that an explanation which would hold good for one might not do so
for another. The relative fastness of the dyes against washing and soaping
precludes the idea of a merely mechanical absorption of the dye by the
fibre; on the other hand the great difference in the fastness to soaping and
light between the same dyes on cotton and wool would show that there has
not been a true formation of colour lake.
are dyes which, like Magenta, Safranine, Auramine and Methyl violet, will
not dye the cotton fibre direct, but require it to be mordanted or prepared
with tannic acid; (3) that there are some dyes or rather colouring matters
which, like Alizarine, Nitroso-resorcine, barwood, logwood, etc., require
alumina, chrome and iron mordants; (4) that there are some dyes which,
like the azo scarlet and azo colours in general, cannot be used in cotton
dyeing; (5) that there are a few dyes, i.e., indigo, which do not come under
this grouping.
From the results of recent investigations into the chemistry of dyeing it is
now considered that for perfect dyeing to take place there must be formed
on the fibre a combination which is called a "colour lake," which consists of
at least two constituents; one of these is the dye-stuff or the colouring
matter itself, the other being either the fibre or a mordant, if such has to be
used. The question of the formation of colour lakes is one connected with
the molecular constitution of the colouring matter, but much yet remains to
be done before the proper functions and mode of action of the various
groups or radicles in the dye-stuffs can be definitely stated. While the
constitution of the dye-stuff is of importance, that of the substance being
dyed is also a factor in the question of the conditions under which it is
applied.
In dealing with the first of the above groups of dyes, the direct dyes, the
colourist is somewhat at a loss to explain in what manner the combination
with the cotton fibre is brought about. The affinity of cellulose for dyes
appears to be so small and its chemical activities so weak, that to assume
the existence of a reaction between the dye-stuff and the fibre, tending to
the formation of a colour lake, seems to be untenable. Then, again, the
chemical composition and constitution of the dyes of this group are so
varied that an explanation which would hold good for one might not do so
for another. The relative fastness of the dyes against washing and soaping
precludes the idea of a merely mechanical absorption of the dye by the
fibre; on the other hand the great difference in the fastness to soaping and
light between the same dyes on cotton and wool would show that there has
not been a true formation of colour lake.
Page 26
The dyeing of cotton with the second group of dyes is more easily
explained. The cotton fibre has some affinity for the tannic acid used in
preparing it and absorbs it from the mordanting bath. The tannic acid has
the property of combining with the basic constituents of these dyes and
forms a true colour lake, which is firmly fixed on the fibre. The colour lake
can be formed independently of the fibre by bringing the tannic acid and the
dye into contact with one another.
In the case of the dyes of the third group, the formation of a colour lake
between the metallic oxide and the colouring matter can be readily
demonstrated. In dyeing with these colours the cotton is first of all
impregnated with the mordanting oxide, and afterwards placed in the dye-
bath, the mordant already fixed on the fibre then reacts with the dye, and
absorbs it, thus dyeing the cotton. To some extent the dyeing of cotton with
the basic dyes of the second group and the mordant dyes of the third group
is almost a mechanical one, the cotton fibre taking no part in it from a
chemical point of view, but simply playing the part of a base or foundation
on which the colour lake may be formed. In the case of the dyes of the
fourth group, there being no chemical affinity of the cotton known for them,
these dyes cannot be used in a successful manner; cotton will, if immersed
in a bath containing them, more or less mechanically take up some of the
colour from the liquor, but such colour can be almost completely washed
out again, hence these dyes are not used in cotton dyeing, although many
attempts have been made to render them available.
Indigo is a dye-stuff that stands by itself. Its combination with the cotton
fibre is chiefly of a physical rather than a chemical nature; it does not form
colour lakes in the same way as Alizarine and Magenta do.
Cellulose can be dissolved by certain metallic solutions and preparations:—
(1) Zinc Chloride.—When cotton or other form of cellulose is heated with
a strong solution, 40 to 50 per cent., it slowly dissolves to a syrupy liquid.
On diluting this liquid with water the cellulose is thrown down in a
gelatinous form, but more or less hydrated, and containing some zinc oxide,
18 to 25 per cent., in combination.
(2) Zinc Chloride and Hydrochloric Acid.—When zinc chloride is
dissolved in hydrochloric acid a liquid is obtained which dissolves
explained. The cotton fibre has some affinity for the tannic acid used in
preparing it and absorbs it from the mordanting bath. The tannic acid has
the property of combining with the basic constituents of these dyes and
forms a true colour lake, which is firmly fixed on the fibre. The colour lake
can be formed independently of the fibre by bringing the tannic acid and the
dye into contact with one another.
In the case of the dyes of the third group, the formation of a colour lake
between the metallic oxide and the colouring matter can be readily
demonstrated. In dyeing with these colours the cotton is first of all
impregnated with the mordanting oxide, and afterwards placed in the dye-
bath, the mordant already fixed on the fibre then reacts with the dye, and
absorbs it, thus dyeing the cotton. To some extent the dyeing of cotton with
the basic dyes of the second group and the mordant dyes of the third group
is almost a mechanical one, the cotton fibre taking no part in it from a
chemical point of view, but simply playing the part of a base or foundation
on which the colour lake may be formed. In the case of the dyes of the
fourth group, there being no chemical affinity of the cotton known for them,
these dyes cannot be used in a successful manner; cotton will, if immersed
in a bath containing them, more or less mechanically take up some of the
colour from the liquor, but such colour can be almost completely washed
out again, hence these dyes are not used in cotton dyeing, although many
attempts have been made to render them available.
Indigo is a dye-stuff that stands by itself. Its combination with the cotton
fibre is chiefly of a physical rather than a chemical nature; it does not form
colour lakes in the same way as Alizarine and Magenta do.
Cellulose can be dissolved by certain metallic solutions and preparations:—
(1) Zinc Chloride.—When cotton or other form of cellulose is heated with
a strong solution, 40 to 50 per cent., it slowly dissolves to a syrupy liquid.
On diluting this liquid with water the cellulose is thrown down in a
gelatinous form, but more or less hydrated, and containing some zinc oxide,
18 to 25 per cent., in combination.
(2) Zinc Chloride and Hydrochloric Acid.—When zinc chloride is
dissolved in hydrochloric acid a liquid is obtained which dissolves
Page 27
cellulose; on dilution the cellulose is re-precipitated in a hydrated form. It is
worth noting that the solution is not a stable one: on keeping, the cellulose
changes its character and undergoes hydrolysis to a greater or less extent.
(3) Ammoniacal Copper.—When ammonia is added to a solution of
copper sulphate, there is formed at first a pale blue precipitate of copper
hydroxide, which on adding excess of ammonia dissolves to a deep blue
solution—a reaction highly characteristic of copper. The ammoniacal
copper solution thus prepared has, as was first observed by John Mercer, the
property of dissolving cellulose fairly rapidly, even in the cold.
If instead of preparing the ammoniacal copper solution in the manner
indicated above, which results in its containing a neutral ammonium salt,
the copper hydroxide be prepared separately and then dissolved in ammonia
a solution is obtained which is stronger in its action.
The cupra-ammonium solutions of cellulose are by no means stable but
change on keeping. When freshly prepared, the cellulose may be
precipitated from them almost unchanged by the addition of such bodies as
alcohol, sugar and solutions of neutral alkaline salts. On keeping the
cellulose undergoes more or less hydrolysis or even oxidation, for it has
been observed that oxycellulose is formed on prolonged digestion of
cellulose with cupra-ammonium solutions, while there is formed a fairly
large proportion of a nitrite.
On adding lead acetate to the cupra-ammonium solution of cellulose, a
compound of lead oxide and cellulose of somewhat variable composition is
precipitated. It is of interest also to note that on adding metallic zinc to the
cupra-ammonium solution the copper is thrown out and a solution
containing zinc is obtained.
This action of cupra-ammonium solutions on cellulose has been made the
basis for the production of the "Willesden" waterproof cloths. Cotton cloths
or paper are passed through these solutions of various degrees of strength
according to requirements, they are then passed through rollers which
causes the surface to become more compact. There is formed on the surface
of the goods a deposit of a gelatinous nature which makes the surface more
compact, and the fabric becomes waterproof in character while the copper
worth noting that the solution is not a stable one: on keeping, the cellulose
changes its character and undergoes hydrolysis to a greater or less extent.
(3) Ammoniacal Copper.—When ammonia is added to a solution of
copper sulphate, there is formed at first a pale blue precipitate of copper
hydroxide, which on adding excess of ammonia dissolves to a deep blue
solution—a reaction highly characteristic of copper. The ammoniacal
copper solution thus prepared has, as was first observed by John Mercer, the
property of dissolving cellulose fairly rapidly, even in the cold.
If instead of preparing the ammoniacal copper solution in the manner
indicated above, which results in its containing a neutral ammonium salt,
the copper hydroxide be prepared separately and then dissolved in ammonia
a solution is obtained which is stronger in its action.
The cupra-ammonium solutions of cellulose are by no means stable but
change on keeping. When freshly prepared, the cellulose may be
precipitated from them almost unchanged by the addition of such bodies as
alcohol, sugar and solutions of neutral alkaline salts. On keeping the
cellulose undergoes more or less hydrolysis or even oxidation, for it has
been observed that oxycellulose is formed on prolonged digestion of
cellulose with cupra-ammonium solutions, while there is formed a fairly
large proportion of a nitrite.
On adding lead acetate to the cupra-ammonium solution of cellulose, a
compound of lead oxide and cellulose of somewhat variable composition is
precipitated. It is of interest also to note that on adding metallic zinc to the
cupra-ammonium solution the copper is thrown out and a solution
containing zinc is obtained.
This action of cupra-ammonium solutions on cellulose has been made the
basis for the production of the "Willesden" waterproof cloths. Cotton cloths
or paper are passed through these solutions of various degrees of strength
according to requirements, they are then passed through rollers which
causes the surface to become more compact. There is formed on the surface
of the goods a deposit of a gelatinous nature which makes the surface more
compact, and the fabric becomes waterproof in character while the copper
Page 28
imparts to them a green colour and acts as a preservative. The "Willesden"
fabrics have been found very useful for a variety of purposes.
fabrics have been found very useful for a variety of purposes.
Page 29
CHAPTER II.
SCOURING AND BLEACHING OF COTTON.
Preparatory to the actual dyeing operations, it is necessary to treat cotton in
any condition—loose cotton, yarn, or piece—so that the dyeing shall be
properly done. Raw cotton contains many impurities, mechanical and
otherwise; cotton yarns accumulate dirt and impurities of various kinds
during the various spinning operations, while in weaving a piece of cotton
cloth it is practically impossible to keep it clean and free from dirt, etc.
Before the cotton can be dyed a perfectly level and uniform shade, free
from dark spots or light patches, these impurities must be removed, and
therefore the cotton is subjected to various scouring or cleansing operations
with the object of effecting this end. Then again cotton naturally, especially
Egyptian cotton, contains a small quantity of a brown colouring matter, and
this would interfere with the purity of any pale tints of blue, rose, yellow,
green, etc., which may be dyed on the cotton, and so it becomes necessary
to remove this colour and render the cotton quite bright. This is commonly
called "bleaching". It is these preparatory processes that will be dealt with
in this chapter.
Scouring Cotton.—When dark shades—blacks, browns, olives, sages,
greens, etc., are to be dyed it is not needful to subject the cotton to a
bleaching operation, but simply to a scouring by boiling it with soda or
caustic soda. This is very often-carried out in the same machine as the
goods will be dyed in; thus, for instance, in the case of pieces, they would
be charged in a jigger, this would be filled with a liquor made from soda or
from caustic soda, and the pieces run from end to end, while the liquor is
being heated to the boil—usually half to three-quarters of an hour is
sufficient. Then the alkali liquor is run out, clean water run into the jigger
and the pieces washed, after which the dyes, etc., are run into the jigger and
the dyeing done. There is usually used 2 lb. to 3 lb. of caustic soda, or 3 lb.
to 4 lb. of soda for each 100 lb. of goods so treated.
SCOURING AND BLEACHING OF COTTON.
Preparatory to the actual dyeing operations, it is necessary to treat cotton in
any condition—loose cotton, yarn, or piece—so that the dyeing shall be
properly done. Raw cotton contains many impurities, mechanical and
otherwise; cotton yarns accumulate dirt and impurities of various kinds
during the various spinning operations, while in weaving a piece of cotton
cloth it is practically impossible to keep it clean and free from dirt, etc.
Before the cotton can be dyed a perfectly level and uniform shade, free
from dark spots or light patches, these impurities must be removed, and
therefore the cotton is subjected to various scouring or cleansing operations
with the object of effecting this end. Then again cotton naturally, especially
Egyptian cotton, contains a small quantity of a brown colouring matter, and
this would interfere with the purity of any pale tints of blue, rose, yellow,
green, etc., which may be dyed on the cotton, and so it becomes necessary
to remove this colour and render the cotton quite bright. This is commonly
called "bleaching". It is these preparatory processes that will be dealt with
in this chapter.
Scouring Cotton.—When dark shades—blacks, browns, olives, sages,
greens, etc., are to be dyed it is not needful to subject the cotton to a
bleaching operation, but simply to a scouring by boiling it with soda or
caustic soda. This is very often-carried out in the same machine as the
goods will be dyed in; thus, for instance, in the case of pieces, they would
be charged in a jigger, this would be filled with a liquor made from soda or
from caustic soda, and the pieces run from end to end, while the liquor is
being heated to the boil—usually half to three-quarters of an hour is
sufficient. Then the alkali liquor is run out, clean water run into the jigger
and the pieces washed, after which the dyes, etc., are run into the jigger and
the dyeing done. There is usually used 2 lb. to 3 lb. of caustic soda, or 3 lb.
to 4 lb. of soda for each 100 lb. of goods so treated.
Page 30
If the ordinary dyeing machines are not used for this purpose, then the
ordinary bleachers' kiers may be used. These will be described presently.
Bleaching of Cotton.—Cotton is bleached in the form of yarn, or in the
finished pieces. In the latter case the method depends very largely on the
nature of the fabric; it is obvious that fine fabrics, like muslins or lace
curtains, cannot stand the same rough treatment as a piece of twilled calico
will. Then, again, the bleaching process is varied according to what is going
to be done with the goods after they are bleached; sometimes they are sent
out as they leave the bleach-house; again, they may have to be dyed or
printed. In the first case the bleach need not be of such a perfect character
as in the last case, which again must be more perfect than the second class
of bleach. There may be recognised:—
(1) Market or white bleach. (2) Dyers or printers' bleach. (3) Madder
bleach.
As the madder bleach is by far the most perfect of the three, and practically
includes the others, this will be described in detail, and differences between
it and the others will be then pointed out. A piece is subjected to the madder
bleach which has afterwards to be printed with madder or alizarine. Usually
in this kind of work the cloths are printed with mordant colours, and then
dyed in a bath of the dye-stuff. This stains the whole of the piece, and to rid
the cloth of the stain where it has to be left white, it is subjected to a soap
bath. Now, unless the bleach has been thorough, the whites will be more or
less stained permanently, and to avoid this cloths which are to be printed
with alizarine colours are most thoroughly bleached. The madder bleach of
the present day generally includes the following series of operations:—
(1) Stitching. (2) Singeing. (3) Singeing wash. (4) Lime boil. (5) Lime sour.
(6) Lye boil. (7) Resin boil. (8) Wash. (9) Chemicing. (10) White sour.
(1) Stitching.—The pieces are fastened together by stitching into one long
rope, which is passed in a continuous manner through all operations in
which such a proceeding is possible. This stitching is done by machines, the
simplest of which is the donkey machine, whereby the ends of the pieces,
which are to be stitched together, are forced by a pair of cogwheels working
together on to the needle carrying a piece of thread, this is then pulled
through and forms a running stitch, a considerable length of thread being
ordinary bleachers' kiers may be used. These will be described presently.
Bleaching of Cotton.—Cotton is bleached in the form of yarn, or in the
finished pieces. In the latter case the method depends very largely on the
nature of the fabric; it is obvious that fine fabrics, like muslins or lace
curtains, cannot stand the same rough treatment as a piece of twilled calico
will. Then, again, the bleaching process is varied according to what is going
to be done with the goods after they are bleached; sometimes they are sent
out as they leave the bleach-house; again, they may have to be dyed or
printed. In the first case the bleach need not be of such a perfect character
as in the last case, which again must be more perfect than the second class
of bleach. There may be recognised:—
(1) Market or white bleach. (2) Dyers or printers' bleach. (3) Madder
bleach.
As the madder bleach is by far the most perfect of the three, and practically
includes the others, this will be described in detail, and differences between
it and the others will be then pointed out. A piece is subjected to the madder
bleach which has afterwards to be printed with madder or alizarine. Usually
in this kind of work the cloths are printed with mordant colours, and then
dyed in a bath of the dye-stuff. This stains the whole of the piece, and to rid
the cloth of the stain where it has to be left white, it is subjected to a soap
bath. Now, unless the bleach has been thorough, the whites will be more or
less stained permanently, and to avoid this cloths which are to be printed
with alizarine colours are most thoroughly bleached. The madder bleach of
the present day generally includes the following series of operations:—
(1) Stitching. (2) Singeing. (3) Singeing wash. (4) Lime boil. (5) Lime sour.
(6) Lye boil. (7) Resin boil. (8) Wash. (9) Chemicing. (10) White sour.
(1) Stitching.—The pieces are fastened together by stitching into one long
rope, which is passed in a continuous manner through all operations in
which such a proceeding is possible. This stitching is done by machines, the
simplest of which is the donkey machine, whereby the ends of the pieces,
which are to be stitched together, are forced by a pair of cogwheels working
together on to the needle carrying a piece of thread, this is then pulled
through and forms a running stitch, a considerable length of thread being
Page 31
left on each side so as to prevent as far as possible the pulling asunder of
the pieces by an accidental drawing out of the thread.
Birch's sewing machine is very largely used in bleach works. It consists
essentially of a Wilcox & Gibb machine fitted on a stand so as to be driven
by power. The pieces are carried under the needle by a large wheel, the
periphery of which contains a number of projecting pins that, engaging in
the cloth, carry it along.
There is also a contrivance by which these pieces to be sewn can be kept
stretched, this takes the form of an arm with clips at the end, which hold
one end of the cloth while it is running through the machine. The clip
arrangement is automatic, and just before the end passes under the needle it
is released, and the arm flies back ready for the next piece; it is, however,
not necessary to use this arm always. This machine gives a chain stitch
sufficiently firm to resist a pull in the direction of the length of the pieces,
but giving readily to a pull at the end of the thread.
The Rayer & Lincoln machine is an American invention, and is much more
complicated than Birch's. It consists of a sewing machine mounted on the
periphery of a large revolving wheel. This carries a number of pins, which,
engaging in the cloth to be stitched, carry it under the needle of the
machine. Besides sewing the pieces together this machine is fitted with a
pair of revolving cutters which trim the ends of the pieces as they pass
through in a neat clean manner. There is also an arrangement to mark the
pieces as they are being stitched. Like Birch's it produces a chain stitch.
What is important in sewing the ends of pieces together is to get a firm
uniform stitch that lies level with the cloths without any knots projecting,
which would catch in the bleaching machinery during the processes of
bleaching, and this might lead to much damage being done.
Should it be necessary to mark the pieces so that they can be recognised
after bleaching, the best thing to use is printers' ink. Gas tar is also much
used, and is very good for the purpose. Coloured inks do not resist the
bleaching sufficiently well to be used satisfactory. Vermilion and Indian red
are used for reds, yellow ochre is the fastest of the yellows, there is no blue
which will stand the process, and Guignet's green is the only green that will
the pieces by an accidental drawing out of the thread.
Birch's sewing machine is very largely used in bleach works. It consists
essentially of a Wilcox & Gibb machine fitted on a stand so as to be driven
by power. The pieces are carried under the needle by a large wheel, the
periphery of which contains a number of projecting pins that, engaging in
the cloth, carry it along.
There is also a contrivance by which these pieces to be sewn can be kept
stretched, this takes the form of an arm with clips at the end, which hold
one end of the cloth while it is running through the machine. The clip
arrangement is automatic, and just before the end passes under the needle it
is released, and the arm flies back ready for the next piece; it is, however,
not necessary to use this arm always. This machine gives a chain stitch
sufficiently firm to resist a pull in the direction of the length of the pieces,
but giving readily to a pull at the end of the thread.
The Rayer & Lincoln machine is an American invention, and is much more
complicated than Birch's. It consists of a sewing machine mounted on the
periphery of a large revolving wheel. This carries a number of pins, which,
engaging in the cloth to be stitched, carry it under the needle of the
machine. Besides sewing the pieces together this machine is fitted with a
pair of revolving cutters which trim the ends of the pieces as they pass
through in a neat clean manner. There is also an arrangement to mark the
pieces as they are being stitched. Like Birch's it produces a chain stitch.
What is important in sewing the ends of pieces together is to get a firm
uniform stitch that lies level with the cloths without any knots projecting,
which would catch in the bleaching machinery during the processes of
bleaching, and this might lead to much damage being done.
Should it be necessary to mark the pieces so that they can be recognised
after bleaching, the best thing to use is printers' ink. Gas tar is also much
used, and is very good for the purpose. Coloured inks do not resist the
bleaching sufficiently well to be used satisfactory. Vermilion and Indian red
are used for reds, yellow ochre is the fastest of the yellows, there is no blue
which will stand the process, and Guignet's green is the only green that will
Page 32
at all resist the process, umber will serve for brown. All these colours are
used in the form of printing ink.
The next operation is a very important one, which cannot be too carefully
carried out, that is:—
(2) Singeing.—For printing bleaches the cloths are singed. This has for its
object the removal from the surface of the cloth of the fine fibres with
which it is covered, and which would, if allowed to remain, prevent the
designs printed on from coming out with sufficient clearness, giving them a
blurred appearance.
Singeing is done in various ways, by passing the cloth over a red-hot copper
plate, or over a red-hot revolving copper cylinder, or through a coke flame,
or through gas flames, and more recently over a rod of platinum made red
hot by electricity.
Plate singeing is the oldest of these methods and is still largely used. In this
method a semi-cylindrical copper plate is heated in a suitable furnace to a
bright red heat, the cloths are rapidly passed over it, and the loose fibres
thereby burnt off. One great trouble is to keep the plate at one uniform heat
over the whole of its surface, some parts will get hotter than others, and it is
only by careful attention to the firing of the furnace that this can be
obtained. To get over these difficulties Worral introduced a roller singeing
machine in which the plate was replaced by a revolving copper roller,
heated by a suitable furnace; the roller can be kept at a more uniform
temperature than the plate. The singe obtained by the plate and roller is
good, the principal fault being that if the cloths happen to get pressed down
too much on the hot plate the loose ends are not burnt off as they should be.
With both plate and roller the cloths are singed only on one side, and if both
sides require to be singed a second passage is necessary. Both systems still
retain their hold as the principal methods in use, notwithstanding the
introduction of more modern methods.
Singeing by passing the cloths over a row of Bunsen burners has come
largely into use. This has the great advantage of being very cleanly, and of
doing the work very effectually, much more thoroughly than any other
method, which is due to the fact that while in the methods described above
only the loose fibres on the surface are burnt off; with gas all the loose
used in the form of printing ink.
The next operation is a very important one, which cannot be too carefully
carried out, that is:—
(2) Singeing.—For printing bleaches the cloths are singed. This has for its
object the removal from the surface of the cloth of the fine fibres with
which it is covered, and which would, if allowed to remain, prevent the
designs printed on from coming out with sufficient clearness, giving them a
blurred appearance.
Singeing is done in various ways, by passing the cloth over a red-hot copper
plate, or over a red-hot revolving copper cylinder, or through a coke flame,
or through gas flames, and more recently over a rod of platinum made red
hot by electricity.
Plate singeing is the oldest of these methods and is still largely used. In this
method a semi-cylindrical copper plate is heated in a suitable furnace to a
bright red heat, the cloths are rapidly passed over it, and the loose fibres
thereby burnt off. One great trouble is to keep the plate at one uniform heat
over the whole of its surface, some parts will get hotter than others, and it is
only by careful attention to the firing of the furnace that this can be
obtained. To get over these difficulties Worral introduced a roller singeing
machine in which the plate was replaced by a revolving copper roller,
heated by a suitable furnace; the roller can be kept at a more uniform
temperature than the plate. The singe obtained by the plate and roller is
good, the principal fault being that if the cloths happen to get pressed down
too much on the hot plate the loose ends are not burnt off as they should be.
With both plate and roller the cloths are singed only on one side, and if both
sides require to be singed a second passage is necessary. Both systems still
retain their hold as the principal methods in use, notwithstanding the
introduction of more modern methods.
Singeing by passing the cloths over a row of Bunsen burners has come
largely into use. This has the great advantage of being very cleanly, and of
doing the work very effectually, much more thoroughly than any other
method, which is due to the fact that while in the methods described above
only the loose fibres on the surface are burnt off; with gas all the loose
Page 33
fibres are burnt off. This is brought about by the gas flame passing straight
through the cloth. It is not necessary to describe the gas singeing machine in
detail. Singeing machines should be kept scrupulously clean and free from
fluff, which is liable to collect round them, and very liable to fire. Some
machines are fitted with a flue having a powerful draught which carries off
this fluff, away from any source of danger.
(3) Singeing Wash.—After being singed the cloths are run through a
washing machine to remove by water as much of the loose charred fibres as
possible. The construction of a washing machine is well known. It consists
of a pair of large wooden rollers set above a trough containing water and
into which a constant stream of water flows. In the trough is also fixed
another wooden roller and the pieces are passed round this bottom roller
and between the top rollers. The cloth is passed through and round the
rollers several times in a spiral form so that it passes through the water in
the trough frequently, which is a great advantage, as the wash is thus much
more effectual. The pressure between the two top rollers presses out any
surplus water. The operation scarcely needs any further description.
(4) Lime Boil.—After the cloth leaves the singeing or grey wash, as it is
often called, it passes through the liming machine, which is made very
similar to the washing machine. In this it passes through milk of lime,
which should be made from freshly slaked lime. The latter maybe prepared
in a pasty form in a stone cistern. The lime used should be of good quality,
free from stones, badly burnt pieces or any other insoluble material, so that
when slaked it should give a fine smooth pasty mass.
Lime should not be slaked too long before using, as it absorbs carbonic acid
from the atmosphere, whereby carbonate of lime is formed, and this is
useless for liming cloth. The pasty slaked lime may be mixed with water to
form the milk of lime, and this can be run from the cistern in which it is
prepared into the liming machine as it is required; the supply pipe should be
run into the bottom of the trough of the liming machine and not over the
top, in which latter case it may splash on to the cloths and lead to
overliming, which is not to be desired on account of its liability to rot the
cloth. The amount of lime used varies in different bleachworks, and there is
no rule on the subject; about 5 lb. to 7 lb. of dry lime to 100 lb. of cloth may
be taken as a fair quantity to use.
through the cloth. It is not necessary to describe the gas singeing machine in
detail. Singeing machines should be kept scrupulously clean and free from
fluff, which is liable to collect round them, and very liable to fire. Some
machines are fitted with a flue having a powerful draught which carries off
this fluff, away from any source of danger.
(3) Singeing Wash.—After being singed the cloths are run through a
washing machine to remove by water as much of the loose charred fibres as
possible. The construction of a washing machine is well known. It consists
of a pair of large wooden rollers set above a trough containing water and
into which a constant stream of water flows. In the trough is also fixed
another wooden roller and the pieces are passed round this bottom roller
and between the top rollers. The cloth is passed through and round the
rollers several times in a spiral form so that it passes through the water in
the trough frequently, which is a great advantage, as the wash is thus much
more effectual. The pressure between the two top rollers presses out any
surplus water. The operation scarcely needs any further description.
(4) Lime Boil.—After the cloth leaves the singeing or grey wash, as it is
often called, it passes through the liming machine, which is made very
similar to the washing machine. In this it passes through milk of lime,
which should be made from freshly slaked lime. The latter maybe prepared
in a pasty form in a stone cistern. The lime used should be of good quality,
free from stones, badly burnt pieces or any other insoluble material, so that
when slaked it should give a fine smooth pasty mass.
Lime should not be slaked too long before using, as it absorbs carbonic acid
from the atmosphere, whereby carbonate of lime is formed, and this is
useless for liming cloth. The pasty slaked lime may be mixed with water to
form the milk of lime, and this can be run from the cistern in which it is
prepared into the liming machine as it is required; the supply pipe should be
run into the bottom of the trough of the liming machine and not over the
top, in which latter case it may splash on to the cloths and lead to
overliming, which is not to be desired on account of its liability to rot the
cloth. The amount of lime used varies in different bleachworks, and there is
no rule on the subject; about 5 lb. to 7 lb. of dry lime to 100 lb. of cloth may
be taken as a fair quantity to use.
Page 34
The lime boil has for its object the removal or rather the saponification of
the resinous and fatty matters present in the grey cloth, either naturally or
which have been added in the process of weaving, or have got upon the
cloth accidentally during the processes of spinning and weaving. With these
bodies the lime forms insoluble lime soaps; these remain in the cloth, but in
a form easily decomposable and removable by treatment with acids and
washing. Soda or potash is not nearly so good for this first boiling as lime—
for what reason is somewhat uncertain, but probably because they form
with the grease in the cloths soluble soaps, which might float about the kier
and accumulate in places where they are not required and thus lead to
stains, whereas the insoluble lime soap remains where it was formed. The
lime also seems to attack the natural colouring matter of the cotton, and
although the colour of the limed cloth is darker than before boiling, yet the
nature of the colour is so altered that it is more easily removed in the after
processes. Besides these changes the starchy matters put into the cloth in
the sizing are dissolved away. Great care should be taken to see that the
goods are evenly laid in the kiers, not too tight, or the liquor will not
penetrate properly; and not too slack, or they will float about and get
entangled and more or less damaged. Then again care should be taken,
especially when using low-pressure kiers, to see that the supply of liquor
does not get too low, in which case the goods in the upper part of the kier
are liable to get dry and are tendered thereby. So long as the goods in the
kiers are not allowed to get dry there is no risk of damage; this trouble
rarely arises with the Barlow and injector kiers. The inside of the kiers
should be kept well limed, so that the goods shall not come in contact with
the bare iron or metal of which the kier is constructed, as this would be very
likely to lead to stains being produced which are by no means easy to
remove. It is usual, and it is a good plan with almost all kinds of kiers,
except the Mather and Edmeston kiers, to put a number of large pebbles or
small stones at the bottom of the kier, which serves to make a false bottom
on which the goods rest and through which the liquor penetrates and flows
away. Before using, the stones should be well washed to free them from dirt
and grit.
The lime boil is carried out in what are called "kiers". Many forms of kiers
have been devised, but the one in most general use is that known as the
"injector kier," of which a drawing is given in Fig. 4, of the form made by
the resinous and fatty matters present in the grey cloth, either naturally or
which have been added in the process of weaving, or have got upon the
cloth accidentally during the processes of spinning and weaving. With these
bodies the lime forms insoluble lime soaps; these remain in the cloth, but in
a form easily decomposable and removable by treatment with acids and
washing. Soda or potash is not nearly so good for this first boiling as lime—
for what reason is somewhat uncertain, but probably because they form
with the grease in the cloths soluble soaps, which might float about the kier
and accumulate in places where they are not required and thus lead to
stains, whereas the insoluble lime soap remains where it was formed. The
lime also seems to attack the natural colouring matter of the cotton, and
although the colour of the limed cloth is darker than before boiling, yet the
nature of the colour is so altered that it is more easily removed in the after
processes. Besides these changes the starchy matters put into the cloth in
the sizing are dissolved away. Great care should be taken to see that the
goods are evenly laid in the kiers, not too tight, or the liquor will not
penetrate properly; and not too slack, or they will float about and get
entangled and more or less damaged. Then again care should be taken,
especially when using low-pressure kiers, to see that the supply of liquor
does not get too low, in which case the goods in the upper part of the kier
are liable to get dry and are tendered thereby. So long as the goods in the
kiers are not allowed to get dry there is no risk of damage; this trouble
rarely arises with the Barlow and injector kiers. The inside of the kiers
should be kept well limed, so that the goods shall not come in contact with
the bare iron or metal of which the kier is constructed, as this would be very
likely to lead to stains being produced which are by no means easy to
remove. It is usual, and it is a good plan with almost all kinds of kiers,
except the Mather and Edmeston kiers, to put a number of large pebbles or
small stones at the bottom of the kier, which serves to make a false bottom
on which the goods rest and through which the liquor penetrates and flows
away. Before using, the stones should be well washed to free them from dirt
and grit.
The lime boil is carried out in what are called "kiers". Many forms of kiers
have been devised, but the one in most general use is that known as the
"injector kier," of which a drawing is given in Fig. 4, of the form made by
Page 35
Messrs. Mather & Platt of Salford. Injector kiers are made to work either
under a pressure of 40 lb. to 50 lb. of steam per square inch, when they are
called high-pressure kiers, or at a pressure of 15 lb. to 20 lb., when they are
called low-pressure kiers. The one shown in the drawing is intended for
low-pressure kiers. The principle of construction is the same in all, the
details varying somewhat with different makers. Injector
Fig. 4.—Mather & Platt's Low-pressure
Bleaching Kier.
kiers consist of a hollow, upright iron cylinder made of plates riveted
together; the top is made to lift off, but can be fastened down tightly by
means of bolts and nuts as shown in the drawing. From the bottom, and
under a pressure of 40 lb. to 50 lb. of steam per square inch, when they are
called high-pressure kiers, or at a pressure of 15 lb. to 20 lb., when they are
called low-pressure kiers. The one shown in the drawing is intended for
low-pressure kiers. The principle of construction is the same in all, the
details varying somewhat with different makers. Injector
Fig. 4.—Mather & Platt's Low-pressure
Bleaching Kier.
kiers consist of a hollow, upright iron cylinder made of plates riveted
together; the top is made to lift off, but can be fastened down tightly by
means of bolts and nuts as shown in the drawing. From the bottom, and
Page 36
placed centrally, rises a pipe, known as the puffer pipe; this terminates at
the top in a rose arrangement. The lower end of the pipe is perforated. A jet
of steam is sent in at the bottom of this pipe, and by its force any liquor at
the bottom of the kier is forced up the puffer pipe and distributed in a spray
over any goods which may be in the kier. The liquor ultimately finds its
way to the bottom of the kier ready to be blown up again. This circulation
of the liquor can be maintained for any length of time and through its
agency every part of the goods gets thorough and effectual treatment.
The length of the boil depends upon the kiers; with the open kier about ten
hours are usually given, with the Barlow and injector kiers, working at a
pressure of 40 lb. to 50 lb., six to seven hours are given.
(5) Lime or Grey Sour.—After the lime boil, the next operation is that of
the lime sour or grey sour as it is often called to distinguish it from a
subsequent souring. The souring is done in a machine constructed in the
same way as a washing machine; the trough of the machine is filled with
hydrochloric acid at 2° Tw., which is kept ready prepared in a stone cistern
and run into the machine as required (it is not advisable to use acid stronger
than this). After passing through the sour the goods are piled in a heap on
the stillage for a few hours. The acid attacks the lime soap which was
formed during the lime boil, decomposes it and dissolves out the lime with
the formation of calcium chloride, while the fat of the soap is liberated, the
former is washed away in the subsequent washing, while the latter remains
to a large extent on the goods, and is removed by the lye boil that follows.
Sulphuric acid is not so satisfactory to use for the lime sour as hydrochloric
acid, because it forms with the lime the insoluble sulphate of calcium,
which is difficult to entirely remove from the goods, whereas the chloride is
very soluble and is entirely eliminated from the goods by the washing that
follows.
It is advisable to keep the acid at a uniform strength in the machine. The
Twaddell is here of no use as an indicator of the actual strength, because the
lime which the acid dissolves, while it neutralises and reduces the strength
of the acid, actually raises the Twaddell, under which circumstance the only
safe method is a chemical test. This can be carried out very simply and with
a sufficient degree of accuracy by the workmen, and if it be done at regular
intervals during the souring, and the supply of the fresh acid be regulated,
the top in a rose arrangement. The lower end of the pipe is perforated. A jet
of steam is sent in at the bottom of this pipe, and by its force any liquor at
the bottom of the kier is forced up the puffer pipe and distributed in a spray
over any goods which may be in the kier. The liquor ultimately finds its
way to the bottom of the kier ready to be blown up again. This circulation
of the liquor can be maintained for any length of time and through its
agency every part of the goods gets thorough and effectual treatment.
The length of the boil depends upon the kiers; with the open kier about ten
hours are usually given, with the Barlow and injector kiers, working at a
pressure of 40 lb. to 50 lb., six to seven hours are given.
(5) Lime or Grey Sour.—After the lime boil, the next operation is that of
the lime sour or grey sour as it is often called to distinguish it from a
subsequent souring. The souring is done in a machine constructed in the
same way as a washing machine; the trough of the machine is filled with
hydrochloric acid at 2° Tw., which is kept ready prepared in a stone cistern
and run into the machine as required (it is not advisable to use acid stronger
than this). After passing through the sour the goods are piled in a heap on
the stillage for a few hours. The acid attacks the lime soap which was
formed during the lime boil, decomposes it and dissolves out the lime with
the formation of calcium chloride, while the fat of the soap is liberated, the
former is washed away in the subsequent washing, while the latter remains
to a large extent on the goods, and is removed by the lye boil that follows.
Sulphuric acid is not so satisfactory to use for the lime sour as hydrochloric
acid, because it forms with the lime the insoluble sulphate of calcium,
which is difficult to entirely remove from the goods, whereas the chloride is
very soluble and is entirely eliminated from the goods by the washing that
follows.
It is advisable to keep the acid at a uniform strength in the machine. The
Twaddell is here of no use as an indicator of the actual strength, because the
lime which the acid dissolves, while it neutralises and reduces the strength
of the acid, actually raises the Twaddell, under which circumstance the only
safe method is a chemical test. This can be carried out very simply and with
a sufficient degree of accuracy by the workmen, and if it be done at regular
intervals during the souring, and the supply of the fresh acid be regulated,
Page 37
the sour will be kept at a more uniform strength and more uniform results
will be obtained than if the souring were done in a more empirical fashion.
The test is best and most easily done as follows:—
Prepare a solution of 1 oz. of the powdered high strength 98 per cent.
caustic soda in 1 pint of water, weighing and measuring these quantities
very carefully. Now take a tall, narrow, white bottle of about 5 oz. capacity
and make a mark on the neck. Fill this bottle with the test solution.
Now take exactly 5 ozs. of freshly prepared sour of 2° Tw., pour into a jar,
and add carefully some of the soda-test solution until a piece of cloth dyed
with turmeric is turned brown, when the acid is neutralised. Now make a
mark on the bottle of soda to show how much has been used. In all
subsequent tests of the sour 5 ozs. should always take the same quantity of
soda solution; if it takes less it is too weak, if more it is too strong; the
remedy in each case is obvious. It is worth while to graduate the test bottle
for 1°, 3°, 4°, 5° Twaddell, as well as for 2° Tw. acid.
After the souring it is often the custom to pile the goods on to a wooden
stillage, but the goods should not be left too long so piled up for they may
become dry, either entirely or in parts. In any case, as the goods dry the acid
becomes concentrated and attacks them and makes them tender, which is
not at all desirable. Therefore, if it is not convenient to proceed with them
for some time after souring, they should be moistened with water from time
to time, but it is best to wash them off at once, whereby they are made ready
for the next operation.
(6) Lye Boil.—This is, perhaps, the most important operation in the whole
process of bleaching, especially if the cloths are going to be printed in the
so-called madder style with alizarine colours, or otherwise stains are liable
to occur in the final stage, and it is then sometimes difficult to put the blame
for these upon the right shoulders.
In principle the lye boil is simple, consisting in boiling the goods with a
solution of soda ash, or caustic soda. The quantity of ash used varies in
different works, as might naturally be expected; from 170 lb. to 200 lb. of
ash to 10,000 lb. of cloth is a fair proportion to use. The length of boil
averages about four hours, certainly not less than three should be given, and
will be obtained than if the souring were done in a more empirical fashion.
The test is best and most easily done as follows:—
Prepare a solution of 1 oz. of the powdered high strength 98 per cent.
caustic soda in 1 pint of water, weighing and measuring these quantities
very carefully. Now take a tall, narrow, white bottle of about 5 oz. capacity
and make a mark on the neck. Fill this bottle with the test solution.
Now take exactly 5 ozs. of freshly prepared sour of 2° Tw., pour into a jar,
and add carefully some of the soda-test solution until a piece of cloth dyed
with turmeric is turned brown, when the acid is neutralised. Now make a
mark on the bottle of soda to show how much has been used. In all
subsequent tests of the sour 5 ozs. should always take the same quantity of
soda solution; if it takes less it is too weak, if more it is too strong; the
remedy in each case is obvious. It is worth while to graduate the test bottle
for 1°, 3°, 4°, 5° Twaddell, as well as for 2° Tw. acid.
After the souring it is often the custom to pile the goods on to a wooden
stillage, but the goods should not be left too long so piled up for they may
become dry, either entirely or in parts. In any case, as the goods dry the acid
becomes concentrated and attacks them and makes them tender, which is
not at all desirable. Therefore, if it is not convenient to proceed with them
for some time after souring, they should be moistened with water from time
to time, but it is best to wash them off at once, whereby they are made ready
for the next operation.
(6) Lye Boil.—This is, perhaps, the most important operation in the whole
process of bleaching, especially if the cloths are going to be printed in the
so-called madder style with alizarine colours, or otherwise stains are liable
to occur in the final stage, and it is then sometimes difficult to put the blame
for these upon the right shoulders.
In principle the lye boil is simple, consisting in boiling the goods with a
solution of soda ash, or caustic soda. The quantity of ash used varies in
different works, as might naturally be expected; from 170 lb. to 200 lb. of
ash to 10,000 lb. of cloth is a fair proportion to use. The length of boil
averages about four hours, certainly not less than three should be given, and
Page 38
it is not necessary to give more than five hours in either ordinary kiers, with
central puffer pipe, or in injector kiers.
Care should be taken to see that the goods are well packed into the kiers,
not too tightly or the lye will fail to penetrate equally all through, and this is
important if a uniform bleach is desired; neither should they be too loose, or
they will float about and get torn. It is not necessary to be particular about
the quantity of water used, except that it must be sufficient to keep the
goods well covered, and still have enough to keep the circulation energetic.
When the water is not sufficient in amount the goods get somewhat dry;
there is then a liability to tendering, but with plenty of water there is no fear
of any damage being done during a boil with alkali. Some works use caustic
soda instead of soda ash in which case less is required, from 120 lb. to 150
lb. to 10,000 lb. of cloth, otherwise no alteration is made in the mode of
boiling.
This lye boil clears away the fatty and waxy matter left in the goods after
the lime sour, and thus prepares the way for the next boil. There is no
advantage in using caustic soda in this preliminary boil, soda ash being just
as effective and cheaper.
(7) Resin Boil.—Following the lye boil is the resin boil which consists in
boiling the goods in a resin soap liquor. This is made as follows: a soda ash
liquor of about 15° to 20° Tw. is prepared, and into this is thrown resin,
broken up into small pieces.
The whole is boiled up until the resin is dissolved, and then as much more
is added in small quantities as the alkali will take up. The soda liquor
should not be much weaker than 20° Tw., it will then be heavier than the
resin which will float on the top, it is found to dissolve quicker and better
than when the liquor is weak, in which case, the resin would sink to the
bottom of the boiler and would there melt into a single mass difficult to
dissolve. The resin soap liquor when made is ready to be used. The
proportions of resin and alkali used in the boil vary in different works, but,
as a rule, the quantities for 10,000 lb. of goods are 430 lb. of 58 per cent.
soda ash, 180 lb. of resin, and 80 lb. of 70 per cent. caustic soda. Too much
resin should be avoided, as it is found that with an excess the whites
obtained are not nearly so good as when the right quantity is used; on the
central puffer pipe, or in injector kiers.
Care should be taken to see that the goods are well packed into the kiers,
not too tightly or the lye will fail to penetrate equally all through, and this is
important if a uniform bleach is desired; neither should they be too loose, or
they will float about and get torn. It is not necessary to be particular about
the quantity of water used, except that it must be sufficient to keep the
goods well covered, and still have enough to keep the circulation energetic.
When the water is not sufficient in amount the goods get somewhat dry;
there is then a liability to tendering, but with plenty of water there is no fear
of any damage being done during a boil with alkali. Some works use caustic
soda instead of soda ash in which case less is required, from 120 lb. to 150
lb. to 10,000 lb. of cloth, otherwise no alteration is made in the mode of
boiling.
This lye boil clears away the fatty and waxy matter left in the goods after
the lime sour, and thus prepares the way for the next boil. There is no
advantage in using caustic soda in this preliminary boil, soda ash being just
as effective and cheaper.
(7) Resin Boil.—Following the lye boil is the resin boil which consists in
boiling the goods in a resin soap liquor. This is made as follows: a soda ash
liquor of about 15° to 20° Tw. is prepared, and into this is thrown resin,
broken up into small pieces.
The whole is boiled up until the resin is dissolved, and then as much more
is added in small quantities as the alkali will take up. The soda liquor
should not be much weaker than 20° Tw., it will then be heavier than the
resin which will float on the top, it is found to dissolve quicker and better
than when the liquor is weak, in which case, the resin would sink to the
bottom of the boiler and would there melt into a single mass difficult to
dissolve. The resin soap liquor when made is ready to be used. The
proportions of resin and alkali used in the boil vary in different works, but,
as a rule, the quantities for 10,000 lb. of goods are 430 lb. of 58 per cent.
soda ash, 180 lb. of resin, and 80 lb. of 70 per cent. caustic soda. Too much
resin should be avoided, as it is found that with an excess the whites
obtained are not nearly so good as when the right quantity is used; on the
Page 39
other hand, too little acts much in the same way. It may be taken that from
1½ to 1¾ per cent. of the weight of the goods is about the right proportion;
1 per cent. being too little, and 2 per cent. too much. The quantity of soda
used should be rather more than twice that of the resin, from 3½ to 4 per
cent. The length of boil is usually about twelve hours in a low-pressure kier;
in a high-pressure kier about seven hours is sufficient.
What the special function of the resin is in this boil is not definitely known;
but experience, both on a large and small scale, proves that it is essential to
obtaining a good white for alizarine printing; without it, when the goods are
dyed with alizarine after the mordants have been printed on, they frequently
take a brown stain—with the resin this never or but rarely happens.
(8) Wash.—After the lye boils the goods must be washed, and it is
important that this be done in as thorough a manner as possible. With the
object of accomplishing this most thoroughly many washing machines have
been invented, the main idea in all being to bring every part of the goods
into contact with as much water as possible. Bridson's is an old form, and a
very good one, the principle of this machine is to cause the cloth to pass to
and fro, and to flap upon the surface of the water in the trough of the
machine.
Furnival's square beater works on much the same principle, and does its
work effectively. More modern washing machines are those of Birch,
Farmer, Mather & Platt, and Hawthorne, where by the peculiar construction
of the rollers and the use of beaters the cloth is very effectually washed.
These machines are much more economical in the use of water than the
older forms, and yet they do their work as well, if not better.
(9) Chemicing.—This is the actual bleaching operation, familiarly known
as "chemicing," that is, the treatment of the goods with bleaching powder.
The previous operations have resulted in obtaining a cloth free from grease,
natural or acquired, and from other impurities, but it still has a slight
brownish colour. This has to be removed before the goods can be
considered a good white, which it is the aim of every bleacher they should
be.
To get rid of this colour they are subjected to some final operations, the first
of which is now to be considered. The chemicing consists in running the
1½ to 1¾ per cent. of the weight of the goods is about the right proportion;
1 per cent. being too little, and 2 per cent. too much. The quantity of soda
used should be rather more than twice that of the resin, from 3½ to 4 per
cent. The length of boil is usually about twelve hours in a low-pressure kier;
in a high-pressure kier about seven hours is sufficient.
What the special function of the resin is in this boil is not definitely known;
but experience, both on a large and small scale, proves that it is essential to
obtaining a good white for alizarine printing; without it, when the goods are
dyed with alizarine after the mordants have been printed on, they frequently
take a brown stain—with the resin this never or but rarely happens.
(8) Wash.—After the lye boils the goods must be washed, and it is
important that this be done in as thorough a manner as possible. With the
object of accomplishing this most thoroughly many washing machines have
been invented, the main idea in all being to bring every part of the goods
into contact with as much water as possible. Bridson's is an old form, and a
very good one, the principle of this machine is to cause the cloth to pass to
and fro, and to flap upon the surface of the water in the trough of the
machine.
Furnival's square beater works on much the same principle, and does its
work effectively. More modern washing machines are those of Birch,
Farmer, Mather & Platt, and Hawthorne, where by the peculiar construction
of the rollers and the use of beaters the cloth is very effectually washed.
These machines are much more economical in the use of water than the
older forms, and yet they do their work as well, if not better.
(9) Chemicing.—This is the actual bleaching operation, familiarly known
as "chemicing," that is, the treatment of the goods with bleaching powder.
The previous operations have resulted in obtaining a cloth free from grease,
natural or acquired, and from other impurities, but it still has a slight
brownish colour. This has to be removed before the goods can be
considered a good white, which it is the aim of every bleacher they should
be.
To get rid of this colour they are subjected to some final operations, the first
of which is now to be considered. The chemicing consists in running the
Page 40
goods through a weak solution of bleaching powder (chloride of lime),
piling the goods up into heaps, and allowing them to lie overnight, the next
day they are finished. As the cloth has received, or ought to have received, a
thorough bottoming, only a weak bath of chemic is required, about ½ to 1°
Tw. is quite sufficient. The solution is prepared in a stone cistern. There is
very little difficulty in making it, the only precaution necessary is to have
the solution quite clear and free from undissolved particles, for if these get
upon the cloth they will either lead to the production of minute holes, or
they may overbleach the fibre, which in such case will have the power of
attracting excess of colour in any subsequent dyeing process and thus lead
to stains, the origin of which may not be readily grasped at the first sight.
It is best, therefore, either to allow the solution to settle in the cistern till
quite clear, which is the simplest way, or to filter through cloth.
The chemicing is best done cold and with weak solution, at ½° Tw. rather
than 1° Tw. Warming the liquor increases the rapidity of the bleaching
action, but there is a risk of over-chloring, which must be avoided as far as
possible, because there is then danger of tendering the fibre, moreover, such
over-chlored cloth has an affinity for colouring matters that is not at all
desirable, as it leads to the production of stains and patches in the dyeing
operations. It is much better, when a single chemicing does not bleach the
cloth sufficiently and give a white, to run the cloth twice through a weak
liquor rather than once through a strong liquor.
Although the chemicing is followed by a sour, which, acting on the
bleaching powder, liberates chlorine that bleaches the fabric, yet the
greatest proportion of the bleaching effect is brought about while the pieces
are being piled up into heaps between the chemicing and the sour. In this
state they should be left for some hours, covered over with a damp sheet,
care being taken that they are not left piled so long as to become dry, as in
this event there is a great risk of tendering the cloth or fabric; it is,
therefore, a good plan to moisten them with a little water from time to time.
They should not be tightly piled up, but be as loose as possible, so that the
air can get to them, as it is the carbonic acid and other acid vapours in the
air, that by acting on the chemic causes slow liberation of chlorine, which
effects the bleaching of the goods.
piling the goods up into heaps, and allowing them to lie overnight, the next
day they are finished. As the cloth has received, or ought to have received, a
thorough bottoming, only a weak bath of chemic is required, about ½ to 1°
Tw. is quite sufficient. The solution is prepared in a stone cistern. There is
very little difficulty in making it, the only precaution necessary is to have
the solution quite clear and free from undissolved particles, for if these get
upon the cloth they will either lead to the production of minute holes, or
they may overbleach the fibre, which in such case will have the power of
attracting excess of colour in any subsequent dyeing process and thus lead
to stains, the origin of which may not be readily grasped at the first sight.
It is best, therefore, either to allow the solution to settle in the cistern till
quite clear, which is the simplest way, or to filter through cloth.
The chemicing is best done cold and with weak solution, at ½° Tw. rather
than 1° Tw. Warming the liquor increases the rapidity of the bleaching
action, but there is a risk of over-chloring, which must be avoided as far as
possible, because there is then danger of tendering the fibre, moreover, such
over-chlored cloth has an affinity for colouring matters that is not at all
desirable, as it leads to the production of stains and patches in the dyeing
operations. It is much better, when a single chemicing does not bleach the
cloth sufficiently and give a white, to run the cloth twice through a weak
liquor rather than once through a strong liquor.
Although the chemicing is followed by a sour, which, acting on the
bleaching powder, liberates chlorine that bleaches the fabric, yet the
greatest proportion of the bleaching effect is brought about while the pieces
are being piled up into heaps between the chemicing and the sour. In this
state they should be left for some hours, covered over with a damp sheet,
care being taken that they are not left piled so long as to become dry, as in
this event there is a great risk of tendering the cloth or fabric; it is,
therefore, a good plan to moisten them with a little water from time to time.
They should not be tightly piled up, but be as loose as possible, so that the
air can get to them, as it is the carbonic acid and other acid vapours in the
air, that by acting on the chemic causes slow liberation of chlorine, which
effects the bleaching of the goods.
Page 41
(10) White Sour.—After the chemicing the goods are treated to a sour, for
which purpose either hydrochloric acid or sulphuric acid may be used.
Hydrochloric acid possesses the advantage of forming a more soluble salt of
lime (calcium chloride) than does sulphuric acid (calcium sulphate), and it
has a more solvent action upon any traces of iron and other metallic oxide
stains which may be present in the goods. On the other hand, on account of
its fuming properties, it is unpleasant to work with. The souring is done by
passing the goods through an acid liquor at 2° Tw. strong and piling for two
or three hours, after which it is washed. This final washing must be
thorough, so that all traces of acid and chemic are washed out, otherwise
there is a tendency for the goods to acquire a yellowish colouration.
So far the routine has been described of the so-called madder bleach, the
most perfect kind of bleach applied to cotton cloths. Besides this two other
kinds of bleach are distinguished in the trade. Turkey red and market
bleach. The former is used when the cloth or yarn is to be dyed plain or
self-coloured with delicate shades with Alizarine; the latter is used for cloth
sold in the white. As the operations involved in producing these are
identical in their method of manipulation to those already described, it will
only be necessary to give an outline of the process for each one.
Turkey Red Bleach—(1) Rinse through water into a kier and boil for two
hours. (2) Lime boil for three to four hours. The amount of lime required is
rather less than what is used with the madder bleach, from 2½ lb. to 3 lb,
lime to each 1 cwt. of goods being quite sufficient. (3) Souring as in the
madder bleach. (4) Lye boil, using about 100 lb. caustic soda to a ton of
goods, and giving ten hours' boil. (5) Second lye boil using about 50 lb.
soda ash to a ton of goods, after which the goods are well washed. (6)
Chemicing as with the madder bleach. (7) Souring as with the madder
bleach, then washing well.
This represents an average process, but almost every bleacher has his own
methods, differing from the above in some of the details and this applies to
all bleaching processes. It is obvious that the details may be varied to a
great extent without changing the principles on which the process depends.
Market Bleach—Here all that requires to be done is to get the cloth of a
sufficient degree of whiteness to please the eye of the customer. Market
which purpose either hydrochloric acid or sulphuric acid may be used.
Hydrochloric acid possesses the advantage of forming a more soluble salt of
lime (calcium chloride) than does sulphuric acid (calcium sulphate), and it
has a more solvent action upon any traces of iron and other metallic oxide
stains which may be present in the goods. On the other hand, on account of
its fuming properties, it is unpleasant to work with. The souring is done by
passing the goods through an acid liquor at 2° Tw. strong and piling for two
or three hours, after which it is washed. This final washing must be
thorough, so that all traces of acid and chemic are washed out, otherwise
there is a tendency for the goods to acquire a yellowish colouration.
So far the routine has been described of the so-called madder bleach, the
most perfect kind of bleach applied to cotton cloths. Besides this two other
kinds of bleach are distinguished in the trade. Turkey red and market
bleach. The former is used when the cloth or yarn is to be dyed plain or
self-coloured with delicate shades with Alizarine; the latter is used for cloth
sold in the white. As the operations involved in producing these are
identical in their method of manipulation to those already described, it will
only be necessary to give an outline of the process for each one.
Turkey Red Bleach—(1) Rinse through water into a kier and boil for two
hours. (2) Lime boil for three to four hours. The amount of lime required is
rather less than what is used with the madder bleach, from 2½ lb. to 3 lb,
lime to each 1 cwt. of goods being quite sufficient. (3) Souring as in the
madder bleach. (4) Lye boil, using about 100 lb. caustic soda to a ton of
goods, and giving ten hours' boil. (5) Second lye boil using about 50 lb.
soda ash to a ton of goods, after which the goods are well washed. (6)
Chemicing as with the madder bleach. (7) Souring as with the madder
bleach, then washing well.
This represents an average process, but almost every bleacher has his own
methods, differing from the above in some of the details and this applies to
all bleaching processes. It is obvious that the details may be varied to a
great extent without changing the principles on which the process depends.
Market Bleach—Here all that requires to be done is to get the cloth of a
sufficient degree of whiteness to please the eye of the customer. Market
Page 42
bleachers have, however, to deal with a wider range of goods than is dealt
with in the former kinds of bleaches, from very fine muslins to very heavy
sheetings. Now it is obvious from a merely mechanical point of view, that
the former could not stand as rough a process as the latter, therefore there
must be some differences in the details of muslin bleaching and sheeting
bleaching. Then again with goods sold in the white, it is customary to
weave coloured headings or markings, and as these have to be preserved, to
do so will cause some slight alteration of the details of the bleach with this
object. On all these points it is difficult to lay down general rules because of
the very varying feature of the conditions which are met with by the market
bleacher.
The resin boil may be omitted, only two lye boils being required, and these
need not be so long or of such a searching character as the corresponding
boils of the madder bleach. Outlines of two or three such processes, which
are now in use in bleach works, will serve to show the general routine of a
market bleach. The proportions given are calculated for 10,000 lb. of goods:
—
(1) Lime boil, using 500 lb. of lime, and giving a twelve-hours' boil.
(2) Grey sour, hydrochloric acid of 2° Tw., then wash well.
(3) Lye boil, 100 lb. caustic soda, 70 per cent. solid, ten to twelve hours'
boil; wash.
(4) Second lye boil, 100 lb., 58 per cent. soda ash, twelve-hours' boil.
(5) Chemic, bleaching powder liquor at 1° Tw., boil for three hours; wash.
(6) White sour, sulphuric acid at 2° Tw.; wash well.
The length of boil with the lime and lyes will depend upon the quality of the
goods, heavy goods will require from two to three hours longer than will
light goods, such as cambrics, the time given above being that for heavy
goods, sheetings, etc.
Another process is the following:—
(1) Lime boil, using 480 lb. lime, and boiling for ten hours.
with in the former kinds of bleaches, from very fine muslins to very heavy
sheetings. Now it is obvious from a merely mechanical point of view, that
the former could not stand as rough a process as the latter, therefore there
must be some differences in the details of muslin bleaching and sheeting
bleaching. Then again with goods sold in the white, it is customary to
weave coloured headings or markings, and as these have to be preserved, to
do so will cause some slight alteration of the details of the bleach with this
object. On all these points it is difficult to lay down general rules because of
the very varying feature of the conditions which are met with by the market
bleacher.
The resin boil may be omitted, only two lye boils being required, and these
need not be so long or of such a searching character as the corresponding
boils of the madder bleach. Outlines of two or three such processes, which
are now in use in bleach works, will serve to show the general routine of a
market bleach. The proportions given are calculated for 10,000 lb. of goods:
—
(1) Lime boil, using 500 lb. of lime, and giving a twelve-hours' boil.
(2) Grey sour, hydrochloric acid of 2° Tw., then wash well.
(3) Lye boil, 100 lb. caustic soda, 70 per cent. solid, ten to twelve hours'
boil; wash.
(4) Second lye boil, 100 lb., 58 per cent. soda ash, twelve-hours' boil.
(5) Chemic, bleaching powder liquor at 1° Tw., boil for three hours; wash.
(6) White sour, sulphuric acid at 2° Tw.; wash well.
The length of boil with the lime and lyes will depend upon the quality of the
goods, heavy goods will require from two to three hours longer than will
light goods, such as cambrics, the time given above being that for heavy
goods, sheetings, etc.
Another process is the following:—
(1) Lime boil, using 480 lb. lime, and boiling for ten hours.
Page 43
(2) Grey sour, hydrochloric acid at 2° Tw.; wash.
(3) Lye boil, 300 lb. soda ash, 58 per cent.; 50 lb. caustic soda, 70 per cent.,
and 30 lb. soft soap, giving ten hours' boil; wash.
(4) Chemic as above.
(5) White sour as above; wash well.
A smaller quantity of lime is used here, but on the other hand the lye boil is
a stronger one. This process gives good results. Some bleachers do not use
lime in their market bleaches, but give two lye boils, in which case the
process becomes:—
(1) Lye boil, using 140 lb. caustic soda, of 70 per cent., giving ten hours'
boil and washing well.
(2) Second lye boil, using 120 lb. soda ash, 58 per cent., and giving ten
hours' boil; wash.
(3) Chemic as above.
(4) White sour as above; wash well.
Light fabrics, such as laces, lace curtains, muslins, etc., cannot stand the
strain of the continuous process, and they are therefore subjected to a
different bleaching process, which varies much at different bleach works.
One method is to lime by steeping for an hour in a weak lime liquor, using
about 2 lb. of lime to 100 lb. of goods; they are then boiled in the kier for
eight hours, after which they are washed. This washing is done in what are
called dash wheels, large hollow wheels, the interior of each being divided
into four compartments. Into these the goods are put, and the wheel is
caused to revolve, while at the same time a current of water flows with
some force into the interior of the wheel and washes the goods.
The wheels do their work well, and the action being gentle the finest fabrics
can be washed without fear of any damage. It is necessary that the speed at
which they are driven should be such that as the wheel revolves the goods
are thrown from side to side of each compartment; if the speed be too slow
they will simply slide down, and then they do not get properly washed; on
the other hand, if the speed be too great then centrifugal action comes into
(3) Lye boil, 300 lb. soda ash, 58 per cent.; 50 lb. caustic soda, 70 per cent.,
and 30 lb. soft soap, giving ten hours' boil; wash.
(4) Chemic as above.
(5) White sour as above; wash well.
A smaller quantity of lime is used here, but on the other hand the lye boil is
a stronger one. This process gives good results. Some bleachers do not use
lime in their market bleaches, but give two lye boils, in which case the
process becomes:—
(1) Lye boil, using 140 lb. caustic soda, of 70 per cent., giving ten hours'
boil and washing well.
(2) Second lye boil, using 120 lb. soda ash, 58 per cent., and giving ten
hours' boil; wash.
(3) Chemic as above.
(4) White sour as above; wash well.
Light fabrics, such as laces, lace curtains, muslins, etc., cannot stand the
strain of the continuous process, and they are therefore subjected to a
different bleaching process, which varies much at different bleach works.
One method is to lime by steeping for an hour in a weak lime liquor, using
about 2 lb. of lime to 100 lb. of goods; they are then boiled in the kier for
eight hours, after which they are washed. This washing is done in what are
called dash wheels, large hollow wheels, the interior of each being divided
into four compartments. Into these the goods are put, and the wheel is
caused to revolve, while at the same time a current of water flows with
some force into the interior of the wheel and washes the goods.
The wheels do their work well, and the action being gentle the finest fabrics
can be washed without fear of any damage. It is necessary that the speed at
which they are driven should be such that as the wheel revolves the goods
are thrown from side to side of each compartment; if the speed be too slow
they will simply slide down, and then they do not get properly washed; on
the other hand, if the speed be too great then centrifugal action comes into
Page 44
play and the goods remain in a stationary position in the wheels with the
same result. As to the amount of washing, it should be as before. After this
washing they are boiled again in the kier with soda ash, using about 8 lb.
ash for 100 lb. goods and giving seven hours' boil, which, after washing, is
followed by a second boil with 5 lb. ash and 4 lb. soft soap for each 100 lb.
of goods, giving eight hours' boil. They are then washed and entered into
the chemic. The chemicing is done in stone cisterns, which are fitted with
false bottoms, on which the goods can rest, and which allow any insoluble
particles of bleaching powder to settle out and prevent them from getting on
the goods. The liquor is used at the strength of about ½° Tw., and the goods
are allowed to steep about two hours; they are then placed in a hydro-
extractor and the surplus chemic is whizzed out, after which they are
steeped in sour of hydrochloric acid at 1° Tw., kept in a stone cistern, the
goods being allowed to steep for two hours. Next they are washed, well
whizzed, passed through a blueing water, whizzed again, and dried. The
remarks made when describing similar operations of the madder bleach as
to the action, testing, etc., of the chemicals, are equally applicable here.
Another plan of bleaching fine fabrics is shown in outline in the following
scheme:—
(1) Wash; boil in water for two hours.
(2) Boil in soda for five hours, using 80 lb. soda ash of 58 per cent., and 30
lb. soft soap for 1,000 lb. of goods.
(3) Second soda boil, using from 40 lb. to 50 lb. soda ash, and 15 lb. to 20
lb. soft soap, giving four hours' boil; after each soda boil the goods should
be washed.
(4) Chemic, using bleaching powder liquor at ½° Tw., allowing them to
steep for two hours, then wash and whiz.
(5) White sour, using hydrochloric acid at 2° Tw., steeping two hours; wash.
A further extension of the same process is sometimes given for the best
goods, which consists, after the above, in giving:—
(6) A third soda boil, using 25 lb. to 30 lb. soda ash and 15 lb. to 20 lb. soft
soap, giving one hour's boil; washing.
same result. As to the amount of washing, it should be as before. After this
washing they are boiled again in the kier with soda ash, using about 8 lb.
ash for 100 lb. goods and giving seven hours' boil, which, after washing, is
followed by a second boil with 5 lb. ash and 4 lb. soft soap for each 100 lb.
of goods, giving eight hours' boil. They are then washed and entered into
the chemic. The chemicing is done in stone cisterns, which are fitted with
false bottoms, on which the goods can rest, and which allow any insoluble
particles of bleaching powder to settle out and prevent them from getting on
the goods. The liquor is used at the strength of about ½° Tw., and the goods
are allowed to steep about two hours; they are then placed in a hydro-
extractor and the surplus chemic is whizzed out, after which they are
steeped in sour of hydrochloric acid at 1° Tw., kept in a stone cistern, the
goods being allowed to steep for two hours. Next they are washed, well
whizzed, passed through a blueing water, whizzed again, and dried. The
remarks made when describing similar operations of the madder bleach as
to the action, testing, etc., of the chemicals, are equally applicable here.
Another plan of bleaching fine fabrics is shown in outline in the following
scheme:—
(1) Wash; boil in water for two hours.
(2) Boil in soda for five hours, using 80 lb. soda ash of 58 per cent., and 30
lb. soft soap for 1,000 lb. of goods.
(3) Second soda boil, using from 40 lb. to 50 lb. soda ash, and 15 lb. to 20
lb. soft soap, giving four hours' boil; after each soda boil the goods should
be washed.
(4) Chemic, using bleaching powder liquor at ½° Tw., allowing them to
steep for two hours, then wash and whiz.
(5) White sour, using hydrochloric acid at 2° Tw., steeping two hours; wash.
A further extension of the same process is sometimes given for the best
goods, which consists, after the above, in giving:—
(6) A third soda boil, using 25 lb. to 30 lb. soda ash and 15 lb. to 20 lb. soft
soap, giving one hour's boil; washing.
Page 45
(7) Chemic as before.
(8) Sour as before, after which the goods are well washed.
In the bleaching of Nottingham lace curtains for the soda boils there is used
what is called the "dolly," which consists of a large round wooden tub about
5 feet to 6 feet in diameter and about 2 feet 6 inches to 3 feet deep; this is
made to revolve slowly at about one revolution per minute. Above the tub
on a strong frame are arranged four stampers or beaters, which are caused
to rise and fall by means of cams. The goods are placed in the tub with the
scouring liquors and the dolly is set in motion, the beaters force the liquor
into the goods, and the revolution of the tub causes the beaters to work on a
fresh portion of the goods at every fall.
This is rather an old-fashioned form of machine, and is being replaced by
more modern forms of boiling kiers. In bleaching certain kinds of muslins
in which the warp threads are double, and in the case of lace curtains, it is
necessary to endeavour to keep the threads as open and prominent as
possible. This cannot be done with the continuous process, which puts a
strain on the threads and thus effaces their individuality. To avoid this the
fabrics have to be dealt with in bundles or lumps, and on these no strain is
put, therefore every thread retains its individuality. The process above
described is applicable.
Yarn Bleaching.—Yarn is supplied to the bleacher in two forms: (1) warps
in which the length of the threads may vary from as little as 50 to as much
as 5,000 yards; these can be dealt with in much the same manner as a piece
of cloth, that is, a continuous system can be adopted; (2) hanks, which are
too well known to require description. Sometimes yarn is bleached in the
form of cops, but as the results of cop bleaching are not very satisfactory it
is done as little as possible.
Warp Bleaching.—The warp, if very long, is doubled two, three or four
times upon itself, so as to reduce its length. Care should be taken that the
ends of the warp are tied together to prevent any chance of entangling,
which would very likely happen if the ends were left loose to float about.
As a rule, warps are not limed, but the adoption of the liming would assist
the bleaching. In outline warp bleaching consists of the following
operations:—
(8) Sour as before, after which the goods are well washed.
In the bleaching of Nottingham lace curtains for the soda boils there is used
what is called the "dolly," which consists of a large round wooden tub about
5 feet to 6 feet in diameter and about 2 feet 6 inches to 3 feet deep; this is
made to revolve slowly at about one revolution per minute. Above the tub
on a strong frame are arranged four stampers or beaters, which are caused
to rise and fall by means of cams. The goods are placed in the tub with the
scouring liquors and the dolly is set in motion, the beaters force the liquor
into the goods, and the revolution of the tub causes the beaters to work on a
fresh portion of the goods at every fall.
This is rather an old-fashioned form of machine, and is being replaced by
more modern forms of boiling kiers. In bleaching certain kinds of muslins
in which the warp threads are double, and in the case of lace curtains, it is
necessary to endeavour to keep the threads as open and prominent as
possible. This cannot be done with the continuous process, which puts a
strain on the threads and thus effaces their individuality. To avoid this the
fabrics have to be dealt with in bundles or lumps, and on these no strain is
put, therefore every thread retains its individuality. The process above
described is applicable.
Yarn Bleaching.—Yarn is supplied to the bleacher in two forms: (1) warps
in which the length of the threads may vary from as little as 50 to as much
as 5,000 yards; these can be dealt with in much the same manner as a piece
of cloth, that is, a continuous system can be adopted; (2) hanks, which are
too well known to require description. Sometimes yarn is bleached in the
form of cops, but as the results of cop bleaching are not very satisfactory it
is done as little as possible.
Warp Bleaching.—The warp, if very long, is doubled two, three or four
times upon itself, so as to reduce its length. Care should be taken that the
ends of the warp are tied together to prevent any chance of entangling,
which would very likely happen if the ends were left loose to float about.
As a rule, warps are not limed, but the adoption of the liming would assist
the bleaching. In outline warp bleaching consists of the following
operations:—
Page 46
(1) Lye boil, using 30 lb. caustic soda, 70 per cent., and 50 lb. soda ash, 58
per cent., giving six hours' boil, and washing.
(2) Sweeting, boil with 80 lb. soda ash, 58 per cent., for two hours.
(3) Washing.
(4) Chemicing, bleaching powder liquor at 1° Tw., washing.
(5) Sour, sulphuric acid at 2° Tw,. washing well.
(6) Hydro extracting and drying.
About 2,000 to 3,000 lb. of warps are usually treated at one time.
The machinery used may be the same as that used in the cloth bleach, and
each operation may be conducted in the same manner. In some warp
bleachworks, while the kiers are made in the same way, the other machines
are made differently. The chemicing and souring is done in strong cisterns
provided with a false bottom; in these the warps are allowed to remain for
about two hours. A more complicated form of chemicing cistern is also in
use. This is made of stone, and is provided with a false bottom. Above is a
tank or sieve, as it is called, having a perforated bottom through which the
liquor flows on the warp in the cistern below.
Under the chemicing cistern is a tank into which the liquor flows, and from
which it is pumped up into the sieve above. A circulation of liquor is thus
kept up during the whole of the operation. Owing to the action of the
chemic or acid on the metal work of the pump there is great wear and tear
of the latter, necessitating frequent repairs. This is a defect in this form of
chemicing machine. For drying the warps a hydro-extractor is first used to
get the surplus liquor from the goods. This machine is now well known, and
is in use in every bleachworks, where it is familiarly known as the "whiz,"
and the operation is generally called whizzing. Hydro-extractors are
described under the head of "Dyeing Machinery".
The actual drying of the warps is done over the "tins" as they are called.
These are a number of large cylinders measuring about 20 inches in
diameter and about—for warp drying—5 feet long. Usually they are
arranged vertically in two tiers, each tier consisting of about five cylinders,
per cent., giving six hours' boil, and washing.
(2) Sweeting, boil with 80 lb. soda ash, 58 per cent., for two hours.
(3) Washing.
(4) Chemicing, bleaching powder liquor at 1° Tw., washing.
(5) Sour, sulphuric acid at 2° Tw,. washing well.
(6) Hydro extracting and drying.
About 2,000 to 3,000 lb. of warps are usually treated at one time.
The machinery used may be the same as that used in the cloth bleach, and
each operation may be conducted in the same manner. In some warp
bleachworks, while the kiers are made in the same way, the other machines
are made differently. The chemicing and souring is done in strong cisterns
provided with a false bottom; in these the warps are allowed to remain for
about two hours. A more complicated form of chemicing cistern is also in
use. This is made of stone, and is provided with a false bottom. Above is a
tank or sieve, as it is called, having a perforated bottom through which the
liquor flows on the warp in the cistern below.
Under the chemicing cistern is a tank into which the liquor flows, and from
which it is pumped up into the sieve above. A circulation of liquor is thus
kept up during the whole of the operation. Owing to the action of the
chemic or acid on the metal work of the pump there is great wear and tear
of the latter, necessitating frequent repairs. This is a defect in this form of
chemicing machine. For drying the warps a hydro-extractor is first used to
get the surplus liquor from the goods. This machine is now well known, and
is in use in every bleachworks, where it is familiarly known as the "whiz,"
and the operation is generally called whizzing. Hydro-extractors are
described under the head of "Dyeing Machinery".
The actual drying of the warps is done over the "tins" as they are called.
These are a number of large cylinders measuring about 20 inches in
diameter and about—for warp drying—5 feet long. Usually they are
arranged vertically in two tiers, each tier consisting of about five cylinders,
Page 47
not arranged directly one above another but in a zig-zag manner, the centres
of the first, third and fifth being in one line, and the centres of the others in
another line. The cylinders are made to revolve by suitable driving
mechanism, and into them is sent steam at about 5 lb. to 10 lb. pressure,
which heats up the cylinders, whereby the warp passing over them is dried.
This drying may be partial or complete, being regulated by the speed at
which the warps pass over the cylinders and by the quantity of steam passed
into the same. The quicker the speed and the smaller the amount of steam,
the less the warps are dried; while, on the other hand, the slower the speed
and the larger the amount and greater the pressure of the steam, the quicker
and more thoroughly are the warps dried. As there is a great deal of water
formed in the cylinders by the condensation of the steam, means are always
provided for carrying off this water, as its retention in the cylinders often
leads to serious results and damage to the machine.
Hank Bleaching.—So far as the chemical part of hank bleaching is
concerned it does not differ from that of warp bleaching; the same
operations and proportions of chemicals may be used and in the same order,
but there is some difference in the machinery which is used. The hanks may
be manipulated in two ways: they may be either kept in separate hanks,
which is the method mostly in vogue in modern bleach-houses, or they may
be linked together in the form of a chain. In the latter case the operations
and the machinery may be the same as used in the madder bleach, with a
few unimportant minor differences. In the final washing the dumping
machine is used, which consists of two wooden bowls set over a wooden
trough containing the wash waters. The top bowl is covered with a thick
layer of rope and merely rests on the bottom bowl by its own weight, and is
driven by friction from the latter. The chain of hanks passing through
between the two bowls has the surplus liquor squeezed out of it, and as
there is considerable increase in the thickness at the points of linkage
between the hanks, when these pass through the bowls they lift up the top
bowl, which, when the thick places have passed through, falls down with a
sudden bump upon the thin places, and this bumping drives out all the
surplus liquor and drives the liquor itself into the very centre of the hanks,
which is sometimes an advantage.
In modern bleach-houses the chain form is gradually giving place to the
method of bleaching separate hanks, partly because so many improvements
of the first, third and fifth being in one line, and the centres of the others in
another line. The cylinders are made to revolve by suitable driving
mechanism, and into them is sent steam at about 5 lb. to 10 lb. pressure,
which heats up the cylinders, whereby the warp passing over them is dried.
This drying may be partial or complete, being regulated by the speed at
which the warps pass over the cylinders and by the quantity of steam passed
into the same. The quicker the speed and the smaller the amount of steam,
the less the warps are dried; while, on the other hand, the slower the speed
and the larger the amount and greater the pressure of the steam, the quicker
and more thoroughly are the warps dried. As there is a great deal of water
formed in the cylinders by the condensation of the steam, means are always
provided for carrying off this water, as its retention in the cylinders often
leads to serious results and damage to the machine.
Hank Bleaching.—So far as the chemical part of hank bleaching is
concerned it does not differ from that of warp bleaching; the same
operations and proportions of chemicals may be used and in the same order,
but there is some difference in the machinery which is used. The hanks may
be manipulated in two ways: they may be either kept in separate hanks,
which is the method mostly in vogue in modern bleach-houses, or they may
be linked together in the form of a chain. In the latter case the operations
and the machinery may be the same as used in the madder bleach, with a
few unimportant minor differences. In the final washing the dumping
machine is used, which consists of two wooden bowls set over a wooden
trough containing the wash waters. The top bowl is covered with a thick
layer of rope and merely rests on the bottom bowl by its own weight, and is
driven by friction from the latter. The chain of hanks passing through
between the two bowls has the surplus liquor squeezed out of it, and as
there is considerable increase in the thickness at the points of linkage
between the hanks, when these pass through the bowls they lift up the top
bowl, which, when the thick places have passed through, falls down with a
sudden bump upon the thin places, and this bumping drives out all the
surplus liquor and drives the liquor itself into the very centre of the hanks,
which is sometimes an advantage.
In modern bleach-houses the chain form is gradually giving place to the
method of bleaching separate hanks, partly because so many improvements
Page 48
have been made in the hank-bleaching machinery of late years, which
enables bleachers to handle the yarn in the form of separate hanks better
than they could do formerly; and as bleaching in separate hanks means that
the cotton is kept in a more open form, and is thus more easily penetrated
by the various liquors which are used, it follows that the bleach will be
better and more thorough, which is what the bleacher aims at. At the same
time weaker liquors or, what is the same thing, less material can be used,
which means a saving in the cost of the process. For bleaching yarn in the
hank the following process may be followed with good results:—
(1) Lye boil, using 1,000 lb. yarn, 40 lb. caustic soda of 70 per cent., and 50
lb. of soda ash of 58 per cent., giving five to six hours' boil at low pressure.
(2) Wash through washing machine.
(3) Second lye boil, using 40 lb. soda ash of 58 per cent., and giving two to
three hours' boil, wash again through a washing machine.
(4) Chemic as in warp bleaching.
(5) Sour as in warp bleaching.
(6) Wash well.
(7) Hydro extract and dry.
Sometimes, if the yarn is to be sold in thread form, before the last operation
it passes through another, viz., treating with soap and blue liquors, which
will be dealt with presently.
The lye boils are done in the ordinary kiers, and do not call for further
notice, except that in filling the goods into the kiers care should be taken
that while sufficiently loose to permit of the alkaline liquors penetrating
through the hanks properly, yet they should be so packed that they will not
float about and thus become entangled and damaged.
The washing is nowadays done in a special form of washing machine,
designed to wash the hanks quickly and well with as little expenditure of
labour and washing liquor as possible. There are now several makes of
these washing machines on the market, most of them do their work well,
and it is difficult to say which is the best. Some machines are made to wash
enables bleachers to handle the yarn in the form of separate hanks better
than they could do formerly; and as bleaching in separate hanks means that
the cotton is kept in a more open form, and is thus more easily penetrated
by the various liquors which are used, it follows that the bleach will be
better and more thorough, which is what the bleacher aims at. At the same
time weaker liquors or, what is the same thing, less material can be used,
which means a saving in the cost of the process. For bleaching yarn in the
hank the following process may be followed with good results:—
(1) Lye boil, using 1,000 lb. yarn, 40 lb. caustic soda of 70 per cent., and 50
lb. of soda ash of 58 per cent., giving five to six hours' boil at low pressure.
(2) Wash through washing machine.
(3) Second lye boil, using 40 lb. soda ash of 58 per cent., and giving two to
three hours' boil, wash again through a washing machine.
(4) Chemic as in warp bleaching.
(5) Sour as in warp bleaching.
(6) Wash well.
(7) Hydro extract and dry.
Sometimes, if the yarn is to be sold in thread form, before the last operation
it passes through another, viz., treating with soap and blue liquors, which
will be dealt with presently.
The lye boils are done in the ordinary kiers, and do not call for further
notice, except that in filling the goods into the kiers care should be taken
that while sufficiently loose to permit of the alkaline liquors penetrating
through the hanks properly, yet they should be so packed that they will not
float about and thus become entangled and damaged.
The washing is nowadays done in a special form of washing machine,
designed to wash the hanks quickly and well with as little expenditure of
labour and washing liquor as possible. There are now several makes of
these washing machines on the market, most of them do their work well,
and it is difficult to say which is the best. Some machines are made to wash
Page 49
only one bundle at once, while others will do several bundles. Generally the
principle on which they are constructed is the same in all, a trough
containing the ash liquor, over which is suspended a revolving reel or
bobbin, usually made of wood or enamelled iron, the bobbin being
polygonal in form so that it will overcome readily any resistance the yarn
may offer and carry the hank round as it revolves. The hank dips into the
wash liquor in the trough, and as it is drawn through by the revolution of
the bobbin it is washed very effectually. The moving of the hank opens out
the threads, and thus the wash liquor thoroughly penetrates to every part of
the hank, so that a few minutes' run through this machine thoroughly
washes the yarn. A constant stream of clean water is passed through the
trough. This machine may also be used for soaping and sizing the hanks if
required. By extending the trough in a horizontal direction, and increasing
the number of reels or bobbins, the quantity of material that can be washed
at one time can be extended, although not to an indefinite extent. The
workman can start at one end of the machine and fill all the bobbins with
yarn, by the time he has finished this the first bobbinful will have been
washed sufficiently and can be taken off and replaced with another quantity
of yarn, and thus one by one the bobbins may be emptied and refilled,
which means that a considerable amount of material can be got through in
the course of a day. To avoid the labour of walking to and fro to fill and
refill the bobbins, washing machines are constructed in which the trough is
made in a circular form. The bobbins are placed at the ends of radial arms
which are caused to revolve round over the trough, the workman is
stationed constantly at one part of the circle, and as the arms pass him in
their motion round the trough he takes off the washed hanks and puts on the
unwashed hanks. By this machine he is saved a very considerable amount
of labour, and is able to do his work in a more convenient manner. The yarn
is well washed in such a machine. The trough may be entire or it may be
divided into a number of compartments, each of which may contain a
different kind of wash liquor if necessary. Of course it goes almost without
saying that in all these machines the liquors in them may be heated up by
means of steam pipes if required.
The chemicing and souring of the hanks does not call for special mention,
beyond the fact that these operations are done in the same manner as warp
bleaching. In Fig. 5 is shown Mather & Platt's yarn-bleaching kier, which is
principle on which they are constructed is the same in all, a trough
containing the ash liquor, over which is suspended a revolving reel or
bobbin, usually made of wood or enamelled iron, the bobbin being
polygonal in form so that it will overcome readily any resistance the yarn
may offer and carry the hank round as it revolves. The hank dips into the
wash liquor in the trough, and as it is drawn through by the revolution of
the bobbin it is washed very effectually. The moving of the hank opens out
the threads, and thus the wash liquor thoroughly penetrates to every part of
the hank, so that a few minutes' run through this machine thoroughly
washes the yarn. A constant stream of clean water is passed through the
trough. This machine may also be used for soaping and sizing the hanks if
required. By extending the trough in a horizontal direction, and increasing
the number of reels or bobbins, the quantity of material that can be washed
at one time can be extended, although not to an indefinite extent. The
workman can start at one end of the machine and fill all the bobbins with
yarn, by the time he has finished this the first bobbinful will have been
washed sufficiently and can be taken off and replaced with another quantity
of yarn, and thus one by one the bobbins may be emptied and refilled,
which means that a considerable amount of material can be got through in
the course of a day. To avoid the labour of walking to and fro to fill and
refill the bobbins, washing machines are constructed in which the trough is
made in a circular form. The bobbins are placed at the ends of radial arms
which are caused to revolve round over the trough, the workman is
stationed constantly at one part of the circle, and as the arms pass him in
their motion round the trough he takes off the washed hanks and puts on the
unwashed hanks. By this machine he is saved a very considerable amount
of labour, and is able to do his work in a more convenient manner. The yarn
is well washed in such a machine. The trough may be entire or it may be
divided into a number of compartments, each of which may contain a
different kind of wash liquor if necessary. Of course it goes almost without
saying that in all these machines the liquors in them may be heated up by
means of steam pipes if required.
The chemicing and souring of the hanks does not call for special mention,
beyond the fact that these operations are done in the same manner as warp
bleaching. In Fig. 5 is shown Mather & Platt's yarn-bleaching kier, which is
Page 50
designed to bleach cotton yarn, either in hanks or in the warp forms,
without removing it from the vessel into which it is first placed. The process
is as follows: The hot alkali solution is circulated by means of a distributing
pipe through the action of an injector or centrifugal pump to scour the yarn;
then water is circulated by means of a centrifugal pump for washing. The
chemic and sour liquors are circulated also by means of pumps, so that
without the slightest disturbance to the yarn it is quickly and economically
bleached.
FIG. 5.—Mather & Platt's Yarn-bleaching
Kier.
STAINS AND DAMAGES IN BLEACHED GOODS.
Some of the stains in bleached goods which are met are beyond the control
of the bleacher to avoid, while others are due to various defects in the
process. Now the subject of stains can only be dealt with in a very general
way, because of the varying manner in which they arise. The recognition of
the particular way in which the stains have been formed is sometimes
difficult to discover. First, there are iron stains, which are the most common
kind of stains that a bleacher is troubled with. These generally make their
without removing it from the vessel into which it is first placed. The process
is as follows: The hot alkali solution is circulated by means of a distributing
pipe through the action of an injector or centrifugal pump to scour the yarn;
then water is circulated by means of a centrifugal pump for washing. The
chemic and sour liquors are circulated also by means of pumps, so that
without the slightest disturbance to the yarn it is quickly and economically
bleached.
FIG. 5.—Mather & Platt's Yarn-bleaching
Kier.
STAINS AND DAMAGES IN BLEACHED GOODS.
Some of the stains in bleached goods which are met are beyond the control
of the bleacher to avoid, while others are due to various defects in the
process. Now the subject of stains can only be dealt with in a very general
way, because of the varying manner in which they arise. The recognition of
the particular way in which the stains have been formed is sometimes
difficult to discover. First, there are iron stains, which are the most common
kind of stains that a bleacher is troubled with. These generally make their
Page 51
appearance in the form of red spots of greater or less extent. As a rule they
are not visible before the pieces are fully bleached. Their origin is varied.
Sometimes they arise from the machinery; if the kiers are not kept
thoroughly whitewashed out, there is a great liability to produce iron stains.
Every other machine which is used in the process is made of iron, and
should be kept free from rust, or the chances of stains are considerably
increased. The water used in the bleaching must be free from iron. A small
trace will not make much difference, but some waters contain a great deal
of iron, so much so that they are absolutely unusable for bleaching
purposes. Iron stains are often due to a very curious cause: the dropping of
the oil used in the spinning or weaving machinery on to the cotton during
the process of manufacture. This oil is often charged with iron derived from
the wear and tear of the machinery, and which often gets fixed in the form
of red spots of oxide on the fibre. Iron stains cannot readily be extracted.
Oil stains are also common. These take the form of bright yellow stains in
various shapes, sometimes extending along the piece in streaks, at other
times in patches in various places about the piece. Generally these oil stains
do not make their appearance as soon as the piece is bleached, and often the
bleacher sends out his goods quite white and apparently all right, and yet
soon afterwards comes a complaint that the goods are stained yellow. One
cause of these yellow oil stains can be traced to the use of paraffin wax in
the sizing of the warps. In this case the stains are more or less streaky in
form, and extend along the length of the piece. They are due to the fact that
paraffin wax is not saponifiable by the action of the alkalies used in the
process, and is therefore not extracted. When the goods are chemiced the
chlorine acts upon the paraffin and forms chlorine compounds, which are
acted upon by light, and turn yellow by exposure to that agent and to the
atmosphere. Paraffin, when used for the sizing of warps, may sometimes be
completely extracted from the fabric, but this depends upon the proportion
of tallow or other fat which is used in the composition of the sizing grease.
If the paraffin is only present in small quantities, and the grease well mixed,
then it may be possible to extract all the paraffin out of the fabric during the
bleaching process, but if the paraffin is in large proportion, or the grease not
well mixed, it is scarcely possible to extract it all out, and stains must be the
result. These stains can hardly be considered the fault of the bleacher, but
are due to the manufacturer of the cloth using cheap sizing compositions on
are not visible before the pieces are fully bleached. Their origin is varied.
Sometimes they arise from the machinery; if the kiers are not kept
thoroughly whitewashed out, there is a great liability to produce iron stains.
Every other machine which is used in the process is made of iron, and
should be kept free from rust, or the chances of stains are considerably
increased. The water used in the bleaching must be free from iron. A small
trace will not make much difference, but some waters contain a great deal
of iron, so much so that they are absolutely unusable for bleaching
purposes. Iron stains are often due to a very curious cause: the dropping of
the oil used in the spinning or weaving machinery on to the cotton during
the process of manufacture. This oil is often charged with iron derived from
the wear and tear of the machinery, and which often gets fixed in the form
of red spots of oxide on the fibre. Iron stains cannot readily be extracted.
Oil stains are also common. These take the form of bright yellow stains in
various shapes, sometimes extending along the piece in streaks, at other
times in patches in various places about the piece. Generally these oil stains
do not make their appearance as soon as the piece is bleached, and often the
bleacher sends out his goods quite white and apparently all right, and yet
soon afterwards comes a complaint that the goods are stained yellow. One
cause of these yellow oil stains can be traced to the use of paraffin wax in
the sizing of the warps. In this case the stains are more or less streaky in
form, and extend along the length of the piece. They are due to the fact that
paraffin wax is not saponifiable by the action of the alkalies used in the
process, and is therefore not extracted. When the goods are chemiced the
chlorine acts upon the paraffin and forms chlorine compounds, which are
acted upon by light, and turn yellow by exposure to that agent and to the
atmosphere. Paraffin, when used for the sizing of warps, may sometimes be
completely extracted from the fabric, but this depends upon the proportion
of tallow or other fat which is used in the composition of the sizing grease.
If the paraffin is only present in small quantities, and the grease well mixed,
then it may be possible to extract all the paraffin out of the fabric during the
bleaching process, but if the paraffin is in large proportion, or the grease not
well mixed, it is scarcely possible to extract it all out, and stains must be the
result. These stains can hardly be considered the fault of the bleacher, but
are due to the manufacturer of the cloth using cheap sizing compositions on
Page 52
his warps. There are no means which can be adopted before bleaching to
ascertain whether paraffin exists in the cloth. If found to be present, the
remedy which is the easiest practically is to saturate the cloth with a little
olive oil, or better, pale oleic acid. Allow the fatty matter to soak well in,
and then boil the goods in a little caustic soda. Another cause of oil stains is
the use of mineral oils in the lubrication of cotton machinery. These mineral
oils partake of the nature of paraffin in their properties, and therefore they
are unsaponifiable by the action of alkalies. Like paraffin wax, they resist
the bleaching process, and much in the same manner produce stains. Oil
stains show themselves in various forms—sometimes as spots. These may
be due to the splashing of oil from the spindles during the process of
spinning, or they may be in patches of a comparatively large size over the
pieces.
These are perhaps due to the oil dropping on to the piece during the process
of weaving when in the loom. The oils used for the lubrication of spinning
and weaving machinery should contain a fair proportion of some fatty oil,
such as olive or rape or cocoanut oil. Not less than 10 per cent. should be
used. More would be better, but the cost of course would be greater and oil
is an item with spinners and manufacturers.
Stains are occasionally due to other causes rather too numerous to be dealt
with in detail, and sometimes these stains only appear once in a lifetime,
and often do not make their appearance during the bleaching process, but
only in after dyeing or calico printing processes in curious ways the causes
of which are very baffling to find out.
ascertain whether paraffin exists in the cloth. If found to be present, the
remedy which is the easiest practically is to saturate the cloth with a little
olive oil, or better, pale oleic acid. Allow the fatty matter to soak well in,
and then boil the goods in a little caustic soda. Another cause of oil stains is
the use of mineral oils in the lubrication of cotton machinery. These mineral
oils partake of the nature of paraffin in their properties, and therefore they
are unsaponifiable by the action of alkalies. Like paraffin wax, they resist
the bleaching process, and much in the same manner produce stains. Oil
stains show themselves in various forms—sometimes as spots. These may
be due to the splashing of oil from the spindles during the process of
spinning, or they may be in patches of a comparatively large size over the
pieces.
These are perhaps due to the oil dropping on to the piece during the process
of weaving when in the loom. The oils used for the lubrication of spinning
and weaving machinery should contain a fair proportion of some fatty oil,
such as olive or rape or cocoanut oil. Not less than 10 per cent. should be
used. More would be better, but the cost of course would be greater and oil
is an item with spinners and manufacturers.
Stains are occasionally due to other causes rather too numerous to be dealt
with in detail, and sometimes these stains only appear once in a lifetime,
and often do not make their appearance during the bleaching process, but
only in after dyeing or calico printing processes in curious ways the causes
of which are very baffling to find out.
Page 53
CHAPTER III.
DYEING MACHINERY AND DYEING MANIPULATIONS.
Cotton is dyed in a variety of forms: raw, loose cotton, partly manufactured
fibre in the form of slubbing or sliver, spun fibres or yarns wound in cop or
bobbin forms, in hanks or skeins and in warps, and lastly in the form of
woven pieces. These different forms necessitate the employment of
different forms of machinery and different modes of handling; it is evident
to the least unobservant that it would be quite impossible to subject
slubbing or sliver to the same treatment as yarn or cloth, otherwise the
slubbing would be destroyed and rendered valueless.
In the early days all dyeing was done by hand in the simplest possible
contrivances, but during the last quarter of a century there has been a great
development in the quantity of dyeing that has been done, and this has
really necessitated the application of machinery, for hand work could not
possibly cope with the amount of dyeing now done. Consequently there has
been devised during the past two decades a great variety of machines for
dyeing every description of textile fabrics, some have not been found a
practical success for a variety of reasons and have gone out of use, others
have been successful and are in use in dye-works.
HAND DYEING.
Dyeing by hand is carried on in the simplest possible appliances; much
depends upon whether the work can be done at the ordinary temperature or
at the boil. Figs. 6 and 7 show respectively a rectangular vat and a round tub
much in use in dye-houses. These are made of wood, but
DYEING MACHINERY AND DYEING MANIPULATIONS.
Cotton is dyed in a variety of forms: raw, loose cotton, partly manufactured
fibre in the form of slubbing or sliver, spun fibres or yarns wound in cop or
bobbin forms, in hanks or skeins and in warps, and lastly in the form of
woven pieces. These different forms necessitate the employment of
different forms of machinery and different modes of handling; it is evident
to the least unobservant that it would be quite impossible to subject
slubbing or sliver to the same treatment as yarn or cloth, otherwise the
slubbing would be destroyed and rendered valueless.
In the early days all dyeing was done by hand in the simplest possible
contrivances, but during the last quarter of a century there has been a great
development in the quantity of dyeing that has been done, and this has
really necessitated the application of machinery, for hand work could not
possibly cope with the amount of dyeing now done. Consequently there has
been devised during the past two decades a great variety of machines for
dyeing every description of textile fabrics, some have not been found a
practical success for a variety of reasons and have gone out of use, others
have been successful and are in use in dye-works.
HAND DYEING.
Dyeing by hand is carried on in the simplest possible appliances; much
depends upon whether the work can be done at the ordinary temperature or
at the boil. Figs. 6 and 7 show respectively a rectangular vat and a round tub
much in use in dye-houses. These are made of wood, but
Page 54
FIG. 6.—Rectangular Dye-tank.
FIG. 7.—Round Dye-tub.
FIG. 7.—Round Dye-tub.
Page 55
copper dye-vats are also made. These may be used for all kinds of material,
loose fibre, yarns or cloth. In the case of loose fibre this is stirred about
either with poles or with rakes, care being taken to turn every part over and
over and open out the masses of fibre as much as possible in order to avoid
matting or clotting together. In the case of yarns or skeins, these are hung
on sticks resting on the edges of the tub or vat. These sticks are best made
of hickory, but ash or beech or any hard wood that can be worked smooth
and which does not swell much when treated with water may be used. The
usual method of working is to hang the skein on the stick, spreading it out
as much as possible, then immerse the yarn in the liquor, lift it up and down
two or three times to fully wet out the yarn, then turn the yarn over on the
stick and repeat the dipping processes, then allow to steep in the dye-liquor.
This is done with the batch of yarn that is to be dyed at a time. When all the
yarn has been entered into the dye-bath, the first stickful is lifted out, the
yarn turned over and re-entered in the dye-liquor, this operation is carried
out with all the sticks of yarn until the cotton has become dyed of the
required depth. In the case of long rectangular vats it is customary for two
men, one on each side of the vat to turn the yarns, each man taking charge
of the yarn which is nearest to him. The turning over one lot of yarn is
technically called "one turn" and the dyer often gives "three turns" or "four
turns" as may be required.
Woven goods may be dyed in the tub or vat, the pieces being drawn in and
out by poles, but the results are not altogether satisfactory and it is
preferable to use machines for dyeing piece goods.
Plain tubs or vats, such as those shown in Figs. 6 and 7, are used for dyeing,
and otherwise treating goods in the cold, or at a lukewarm heat, when the
supply of hot water can be drawn from a separate boiler. When, however, it
is necessary to work at the boil, then the vat must be fitted with a steam
coil. This is best laid along the bottom in a serpentine form. Above the pipe
should be an open lattice-work bottom, which, while it permits the free
circulation
loose fibre, yarns or cloth. In the case of loose fibre this is stirred about
either with poles or with rakes, care being taken to turn every part over and
over and open out the masses of fibre as much as possible in order to avoid
matting or clotting together. In the case of yarns or skeins, these are hung
on sticks resting on the edges of the tub or vat. These sticks are best made
of hickory, but ash or beech or any hard wood that can be worked smooth
and which does not swell much when treated with water may be used. The
usual method of working is to hang the skein on the stick, spreading it out
as much as possible, then immerse the yarn in the liquor, lift it up and down
two or three times to fully wet out the yarn, then turn the yarn over on the
stick and repeat the dipping processes, then allow to steep in the dye-liquor.
This is done with the batch of yarn that is to be dyed at a time. When all the
yarn has been entered into the dye-bath, the first stickful is lifted out, the
yarn turned over and re-entered in the dye-liquor, this operation is carried
out with all the sticks of yarn until the cotton has become dyed of the
required depth. In the case of long rectangular vats it is customary for two
men, one on each side of the vat to turn the yarns, each man taking charge
of the yarn which is nearest to him. The turning over one lot of yarn is
technically called "one turn" and the dyer often gives "three turns" or "four
turns" as may be required.
Woven goods may be dyed in the tub or vat, the pieces being drawn in and
out by poles, but the results are not altogether satisfactory and it is
preferable to use machines for dyeing piece goods.
Plain tubs or vats, such as those shown in Figs. 6 and 7, are used for dyeing,
and otherwise treating goods in the cold, or at a lukewarm heat, when the
supply of hot water can be drawn from a separate boiler. When, however, it
is necessary to work at the boil, then the vat must be fitted with a steam
coil. This is best laid along the bottom in a serpentine form. Above the pipe
should be an open lattice-work bottom, which, while it permits the free
circulation
Page 56
FIG. 8.—Section of Dye-vat.
of boiling water in the vat, prevents the material being dyed from coming in
contact with the steam pipe. This is important if uniform shades are to be
dyed, for any excessive heating of any portion of the bath leads to stains
being produced on the material in that part of the bath. Fig. 8 shows a vat
fitted with a steam pipe. That portion of the steam pipe which passes down
at the end of the vat is in a small compartment boxed off from the main
body of the vat, so that no part of the material which is being dyed can
come in contact with it. A closed steam coil will, on the whole, give the best
results, as then no weakening of the dye-liquor can take place through
dilution by the condensation of the steam. Many dye-vats are, however,
fitted with perforated, or, as they are called, open steam coils, in which case
there is, perhaps, better circulation of the liquor in the dye-vat, but as some
of the steam must condense, there is a little dilution of the dye-liquor in the
vat.
DYEING MACHINES.
Dye tubs and vats, such as those described above, have been largely
superseded by machines in which the handling, or working of the materials
being dyed is effected by mechanical means. There have been a large
of boiling water in the vat, prevents the material being dyed from coming in
contact with the steam pipe. This is important if uniform shades are to be
dyed, for any excessive heating of any portion of the bath leads to stains
being produced on the material in that part of the bath. Fig. 8 shows a vat
fitted with a steam pipe. That portion of the steam pipe which passes down
at the end of the vat is in a small compartment boxed off from the main
body of the vat, so that no part of the material which is being dyed can
come in contact with it. A closed steam coil will, on the whole, give the best
results, as then no weakening of the dye-liquor can take place through
dilution by the condensation of the steam. Many dye-vats are, however,
fitted with perforated, or, as they are called, open steam coils, in which case
there is, perhaps, better circulation of the liquor in the dye-vat, but as some
of the steam must condense, there is a little dilution of the dye-liquor in the
vat.
DYEING MACHINES.
Dye tubs and vats, such as those described above, have been largely
superseded by machines in which the handling, or working of the materials
being dyed is effected by mechanical means. There have been a large
Page 57
number of dyeing machines invented, some of these have not been found to
be very practical, and so they have gone out of use. Space will not admit of
a detailed account of every kind of machine, but only of those which are in
constant use in dye-works.
Dyeing Loose, or Raw Cotton.—Few machines have been designed for
this purpose, and about the only successful one is:
Delahunty's Dyeing Machine.—This is illustrated in Fig. 9. It consists of a
drum made of lattice work, which can revolve inside an outer wooden
casing. The interior of the revolving drum is fitted with hooks or fingers,
whose action is to keep the material open. One segment of the drum is made
to open, so that the loose cotton or wool to be dyed can be inserted. By
suitable gearing the drum can be revolved; and the dye-liquor, which is in
the lower half of the wooden casing, penetrates through the lattice work of
the drum, and dyes the material contained in it. The construction of the
machine is well shown in the drawing, while the mode of working is
obvious from it and the description just given. The machine is very
successful, and well adapted for dyeing loose, or raw wool and cotton. The
material may be scoured, bleached, dyed, or otherwise treated in this
machine.
The Obermaier machine, presently to be described, may also be used for
dyeing loose cotton or wool.
DYEING, SLUBBING, SLIVER OR CARDED COTTON AND WOOL.
be very practical, and so they have gone out of use. Space will not admit of
a detailed account of every kind of machine, but only of those which are in
constant use in dye-works.
Dyeing Loose, or Raw Cotton.—Few machines have been designed for
this purpose, and about the only successful one is:
Delahunty's Dyeing Machine.—This is illustrated in Fig. 9. It consists of a
drum made of lattice work, which can revolve inside an outer wooden
casing. The interior of the revolving drum is fitted with hooks or fingers,
whose action is to keep the material open. One segment of the drum is made
to open, so that the loose cotton or wool to be dyed can be inserted. By
suitable gearing the drum can be revolved; and the dye-liquor, which is in
the lower half of the wooden casing, penetrates through the lattice work of
the drum, and dyes the material contained in it. The construction of the
machine is well shown in the drawing, while the mode of working is
obvious from it and the description just given. The machine is very
successful, and well adapted for dyeing loose, or raw wool and cotton. The
material may be scoured, bleached, dyed, or otherwise treated in this
machine.
The Obermaier machine, presently to be described, may also be used for
dyeing loose cotton or wool.
DYEING, SLUBBING, SLIVER OR CARDED COTTON AND WOOL.
Page 58
FIG. 9.—Delahunty's Dyeing Machine.
It is found in practice that the dyeing of loose wool or cotton is not
altogether satisfactory—the impurities they naturally contain interfere with
the purity of the shade they will take. Then again the dyes and mordants
used in dyeing them are found to have some action on the wire of the
carding engine through which they are passed; at any rate a card does not
last as long when working dyed cotton or wool as when used on undyed
cotton or wool fibres. Yet for the production of certain fancy yarns for
weaving some special classes of fabrics, it is desirable to dye the cotton or
wool
It is found in practice that the dyeing of loose wool or cotton is not
altogether satisfactory—the impurities they naturally contain interfere with
the purity of the shade they will take. Then again the dyes and mordants
used in dyeing them are found to have some action on the wire of the
carding engine through which they are passed; at any rate a card does not
last as long when working dyed cotton or wool as when used on undyed
cotton or wool fibres. Yet for the production of certain fancy yarns for
weaving some special classes of fabrics, it is desirable to dye the cotton or
wool
Page 59
FIG. 10.—Obermaier Dyeing Machine.
before it is spun into thread. The best plan is undoubtedly to dye the fibre
after it has been carded and partly spun into what is known as slubbing or
sliver. All the impurities have been removed, the cotton fibres are laid,
straight, and so it becomes much easier to dye. On the other hand, as it is
necessary to keep the sliver or slubbing straight and level, no working about
in the dye-liquors can be allowed to take place, and so such must be dyed in
specially constructed machines, and one of the best of these is the
Obermaier dyeing machine which is illustrated in Fig. 10. The Obermaier
apparatus consists of a dye vat A. In this is placed a cage consisting of an
inner perforated metal cylinder C, and an outer perforated metal cylinder D,
between these two is placed the material to be dyed. C is in contact with the
suction end of a centrifugal pump P, the delivery end of which discharges
into the dye-vat A. The working of the machine is as follows: The slubbing
or sliver is placed in the space between C and D rather tightly so that it will
not move about. Then the inner cage is placed in the dye-vat as shown. The
vat is filled with the dye-liquor which can be heated up by a steam pipe.
The pump is set in motion, the dye liquor is drawn from A to C, and, in so
doing, passes through the material packed in B and dyes it. The circulation
of the liquor is carried on as long as experience shows to be necessary. The
dye-liquor is run off, hot water is run in to wash the dyed material, and the
pump is kept running for some time to ensure thorough rinsing; then the
before it is spun into thread. The best plan is undoubtedly to dye the fibre
after it has been carded and partly spun into what is known as slubbing or
sliver. All the impurities have been removed, the cotton fibres are laid,
straight, and so it becomes much easier to dye. On the other hand, as it is
necessary to keep the sliver or slubbing straight and level, no working about
in the dye-liquors can be allowed to take place, and so such must be dyed in
specially constructed machines, and one of the best of these is the
Obermaier dyeing machine which is illustrated in Fig. 10. The Obermaier
apparatus consists of a dye vat A. In this is placed a cage consisting of an
inner perforated metal cylinder C, and an outer perforated metal cylinder D,
between these two is placed the material to be dyed. C is in contact with the
suction end of a centrifugal pump P, the delivery end of which discharges
into the dye-vat A. The working of the machine is as follows: The slubbing
or sliver is placed in the space between C and D rather tightly so that it will
not move about. Then the inner cage is placed in the dye-vat as shown. The
vat is filled with the dye-liquor which can be heated up by a steam pipe.
The pump is set in motion, the dye liquor is drawn from A to C, and, in so
doing, passes through the material packed in B and dyes it. The circulation
of the liquor is carried on as long as experience shows to be necessary. The
dye-liquor is run off, hot water is run in to wash the dyed material, and the
pump is kept running for some time to ensure thorough rinsing; then the
Page 60
water is run off, and by keeping the pump running and air going through a
certain amount of drying can be effected. This machine works very well,
and, with a little experience, constant results can be obtained. The slubbing
or sliver may be scoured, bleached, rinsed, dyed, washed, soaped, or
otherwise treated without removing it from the machine, which is a most
decided advantage.
FIG. 11.—Holliday's Yarn-dyeing Machine.
Holliday's Yarn-dyeing Machine.—In Fig. 11 is given an illustration of a
machine for dyeing yarn in the hank form made by Messrs. Read Holliday
& Sons, of Huddersfield. The illustration gives a very good idea of the
machine. It consists of a wooden dye-vat which can be heated by steam
pipes in the usual way. Extending over the vat are a number of reels or
bobbins; these are best made of wood or enamelled iron; these reels are in
connection with suitable gearing so that they can be revolved. There is also
an arrangement by means of which the reels can be lifted bodily in and out
of the dye-vat for the purpose of taking on and off, "doffing," the hanks of
yarn for the reels. A reel will hold about two pounds of yarn. The working
of the machine is simple. The vat is filled with the requisite dye-liquor. The
reels, which are lifted out of the vat, are then charged with the yarn, which
has been previously wetted out. They are then set in revolution and dropped
into the dye-vat and kept there until it is seen that the yarn has acquired the
desired shade. The reels are lifted out and the hanks removed, when the
machine is ready for another lot of yarn.
There are several makes of hank-dyeing machines of this type, and as a rule
they work very well. The only source of trouble is a slight tendency for the
yarn on one reel if hung loosely of becoming entangled with the yarn on
certain amount of drying can be effected. This machine works very well,
and, with a little experience, constant results can be obtained. The slubbing
or sliver may be scoured, bleached, rinsed, dyed, washed, soaped, or
otherwise treated without removing it from the machine, which is a most
decided advantage.
FIG. 11.—Holliday's Yarn-dyeing Machine.
Holliday's Yarn-dyeing Machine.—In Fig. 11 is given an illustration of a
machine for dyeing yarn in the hank form made by Messrs. Read Holliday
& Sons, of Huddersfield. The illustration gives a very good idea of the
machine. It consists of a wooden dye-vat which can be heated by steam
pipes in the usual way. Extending over the vat are a number of reels or
bobbins; these are best made of wood or enamelled iron; these reels are in
connection with suitable gearing so that they can be revolved. There is also
an arrangement by means of which the reels can be lifted bodily in and out
of the dye-vat for the purpose of taking on and off, "doffing," the hanks of
yarn for the reels. A reel will hold about two pounds of yarn. The working
of the machine is simple. The vat is filled with the requisite dye-liquor. The
reels, which are lifted out of the vat, are then charged with the yarn, which
has been previously wetted out. They are then set in revolution and dropped
into the dye-vat and kept there until it is seen that the yarn has acquired the
desired shade. The reels are lifted out and the hanks removed, when the
machine is ready for another lot of yarn.
There are several makes of hank-dyeing machines of this type, and as a rule
they work very well. The only source of trouble is a slight tendency for the
yarn on one reel if hung loosely of becoming entangled with the yarn on
Page 61
one of the other reels. This is to some extent obviated by hanging in the
bottom of the hank a roller which acts as a weight and keeps the yarn
stretched and so prevents it flying about.
To some makes of these machines a hank wringer is attached.
Klauder-Weldon Hank-dyeing Machine.—This is illustrated in Fig. 12,
which shows the latest form. This machine consists of a half-cylindrical
dye-vat built of wood. On a central axis is built two discs or rod carriers
which can revolve in the dye-vat, the revolution being given by suitable
gearing, which is shown at the side of the machine. On the outer edge of the
discs are clips for carrying rods, on which one end of the hanks of yarn is
hung, while the other
FIG. 12.—Klauder-Weldon Dyeing
Machine.
end is placed on a similar rod carried near the axle. The revolution of the
discs carries the yarn through the dye-liquor contained in the lower semi-
cylindrical part of the machine previously alluded to. At a certain point,
every revolution of the discs, the rods carrying the yarns are turned a little;
bottom of the hank a roller which acts as a weight and keeps the yarn
stretched and so prevents it flying about.
To some makes of these machines a hank wringer is attached.
Klauder-Weldon Hank-dyeing Machine.—This is illustrated in Fig. 12,
which shows the latest form. This machine consists of a half-cylindrical
dye-vat built of wood. On a central axis is built two discs or rod carriers
which can revolve in the dye-vat, the revolution being given by suitable
gearing, which is shown at the side of the machine. On the outer edge of the
discs are clips for carrying rods, on which one end of the hanks of yarn is
hung, while the other
FIG. 12.—Klauder-Weldon Dyeing
Machine.
end is placed on a similar rod carried near the axle. The revolution of the
discs carries the yarn through the dye-liquor contained in the lower semi-
cylindrical part of the machine previously alluded to. At a certain point,
every revolution of the discs, the rods carrying the yarns are turned a little;
Page 62
this causes the yarn to move on the rods, and this motion helps to bring
about greater evenness of dyeing. The most modern form of this machine is
provided with an arrangement by means of which the whole batch of yarn
can be lifted out of the dye-liquor. Arrangements are made by which from
time to time fresh quantities of dye can be added if required to bring up the
dyed yarn to any desired shade. This machine works well and gives good
results. Beyond the necessary labour in charging and discharging, and a
little attention from time to time, as the operation proceeds, to see if the
dyeing is coming up to shade, the machine requires little attention.
Many other forms of hank-dyeing machines have been devised: there is
Corron's, in which an ordinary rectangular dye-vat is used. Round this is a
framework which carries a lifting and falling arrangement that travels to
and fro along the vat. The hanks of yarn are hung on rods of a special
construction designed to open them out in a manner as nearly approaching
handwork as is possible. The machine works in this way: the lifting
arrangement is at one end of the vat, the hanks are hung on the rods and
placed in the vat. Then the lifter is set in motion and moves along the vat; as
it does so it lifts up each rod full of yarn, turns it over, opening out the yarn
in so doing, then it drops it again in the vat. When it has travelled to the end
of the vat it returns, picking up the rods of yarn in so doing, and this motion
is kept up until the dyeing is completed. This machine is very ingenious.
A type of machine which has been made by several makers consists of an
ordinary rectangular dye-vat surrounded with a framework carrying a
number of sets of endless chains, the links of which carry fingers. The
hanks of yarn are hung on rods at one end of which is a tooth wheel that
when in position fits into a rack on the side of the vat. The action of the
machine is this: the hanks are hung on the rods and placed at the entrance
end of the vat, by the moving of the chains it is carried along the vat and at
the same time revolves, thus turning over the yarn which hangs in the dye-
liquor; when it reaches the opposite end of the vat, the rod full of yarn is
lifted out, carried upwards and then towards the other end of the vat when it
is again dropped into the dye-vat to go through the same cycle of
movements which is continued until the yarn is properly dyed.
COP DYEING.
about greater evenness of dyeing. The most modern form of this machine is
provided with an arrangement by means of which the whole batch of yarn
can be lifted out of the dye-liquor. Arrangements are made by which from
time to time fresh quantities of dye can be added if required to bring up the
dyed yarn to any desired shade. This machine works well and gives good
results. Beyond the necessary labour in charging and discharging, and a
little attention from time to time, as the operation proceeds, to see if the
dyeing is coming up to shade, the machine requires little attention.
Many other forms of hank-dyeing machines have been devised: there is
Corron's, in which an ordinary rectangular dye-vat is used. Round this is a
framework which carries a lifting and falling arrangement that travels to
and fro along the vat. The hanks of yarn are hung on rods of a special
construction designed to open them out in a manner as nearly approaching
handwork as is possible. The machine works in this way: the lifting
arrangement is at one end of the vat, the hanks are hung on the rods and
placed in the vat. Then the lifter is set in motion and moves along the vat; as
it does so it lifts up each rod full of yarn, turns it over, opening out the yarn
in so doing, then it drops it again in the vat. When it has travelled to the end
of the vat it returns, picking up the rods of yarn in so doing, and this motion
is kept up until the dyeing is completed. This machine is very ingenious.
A type of machine which has been made by several makers consists of an
ordinary rectangular dye-vat surrounded with a framework carrying a
number of sets of endless chains, the links of which carry fingers. The
hanks of yarn are hung on rods at one end of which is a tooth wheel that
when in position fits into a rack on the side of the vat. The action of the
machine is this: the hanks are hung on the rods and placed at the entrance
end of the vat, by the moving of the chains it is carried along the vat and at
the same time revolves, thus turning over the yarn which hangs in the dye-
liquor; when it reaches the opposite end of the vat, the rod full of yarn is
lifted out, carried upwards and then towards the other end of the vat when it
is again dropped into the dye-vat to go through the same cycle of
movements which is continued until the yarn is properly dyed.
COP DYEING.
Page 63
In weaving fancy-coloured fabrics the ordinary mode is to dye the yarn in
the hank form, then those which have to be used for the weft are wound into
the cop form for placing in the shuttles. The cop form is that in which the
yarn leaves the spinning frame, and necessarily apart from the dyeing there
is labour involved in reeling it into hanks and winding it back again into the
cop form, not only so but there is necessarily some waste made in these
operations. Many attempts have been made, with more or less success, to
dye the yarn while in the cop form and so save the cost of the hanking and
copping above referred to as well as the waste which occurs. Cops cannot
be satisfactorily dyed by simple immersion in a boiling dye-bath, the
outside becomes dyed but the central portions as often as not remain quite
white, and there is a distinct grading of colour or shade throughout the cop,
the outer portions being deeply dyed while the middle portion will only
have a medium shade and the central portions either not being dyed at all or
only faintly tinted, much depending on the firmness with which the cop has
been wound. A soft, loosely wound cop is much more thoroughly dyed than
a hard, tightly wound cop. This uneven dyeing of the cops is not
satisfactory, and must be avoided if cop dyeing is to be a success. Many
dyers have turned their attention to this question of dyeing yarn in the cop
form, and many machines have been devised for the purpose; some of these
have not been a success, but a few have been found to yield satisfactory
results and proved in practice very successful.
In all machines for dyeing cops one principle has been adopted—that of
drawing or forcing the dye-liquor through the cop.
the hank form, then those which have to be used for the weft are wound into
the cop form for placing in the shuttles. The cop form is that in which the
yarn leaves the spinning frame, and necessarily apart from the dyeing there
is labour involved in reeling it into hanks and winding it back again into the
cop form, not only so but there is necessarily some waste made in these
operations. Many attempts have been made, with more or less success, to
dye the yarn while in the cop form and so save the cost of the hanking and
copping above referred to as well as the waste which occurs. Cops cannot
be satisfactorily dyed by simple immersion in a boiling dye-bath, the
outside becomes dyed but the central portions as often as not remain quite
white, and there is a distinct grading of colour or shade throughout the cop,
the outer portions being deeply dyed while the middle portion will only
have a medium shade and the central portions either not being dyed at all or
only faintly tinted, much depending on the firmness with which the cop has
been wound. A soft, loosely wound cop is much more thoroughly dyed than
a hard, tightly wound cop. This uneven dyeing of the cops is not
satisfactory, and must be avoided if cop dyeing is to be a success. Many
dyers have turned their attention to this question of dyeing yarn in the cop
form, and many machines have been devised for the purpose; some of these
have not been a success, but a few have been found to yield satisfactory
results and proved in practice very successful.
In all machines for dyeing cops one principle has been adopted—that of
drawing or forcing the dye-liquor through the cop.
Page 64
FIG. 13.—Graemiger Cop-dyeing Machine.
Graemiger's Cop-dyeing Machine.—This is shown in section in Figs. 13
and 14. Although simple in its work it is somewhat complex in its
construction and difficult to describe. The machine consists of a dye-vat to
hold the requisite dye-liquors. In the upper portions of this is an iron casting
formed with four chambers, the two lower ones of which are immersed in
the dye-liquor while the upper chambers are above it. The sides of this
casting are formed of metal plates which fit tightly against the casting and
form as nearly air-and water-tight joints with it as it is possible to make.
These metal plates are on a spindle and can be rotated. They are perforated
and made to carry spindles, on which are placed the cops to be dyed. The
two lower chambers are in connection with a pump which draws the air
from them and so creates a vacuum inside the chambers. To fill this, liquor
from the dye-vat passes through the cops and into the chambers, and is in
turn drawn through the pump and returned to the dye-vat. In this way there
is a continual circulation of dye-liquors from the vat through the cops,
chambers and pump back to the vat again.
Graemiger's Cop-dyeing Machine.—This is shown in section in Figs. 13
and 14. Although simple in its work it is somewhat complex in its
construction and difficult to describe. The machine consists of a dye-vat to
hold the requisite dye-liquors. In the upper portions of this is an iron casting
formed with four chambers, the two lower ones of which are immersed in
the dye-liquor while the upper chambers are above it. The sides of this
casting are formed of metal plates which fit tightly against the casting and
form as nearly air-and water-tight joints with it as it is possible to make.
These metal plates are on a spindle and can be rotated. They are perforated
and made to carry spindles, on which are placed the cops to be dyed. The
two lower chambers are in connection with a pump which draws the air
from them and so creates a vacuum inside the chambers. To fill this, liquor
from the dye-vat passes through the cops and into the chambers, and is in
turn drawn through the pump and returned to the dye-vat. In this way there
is a continual circulation of dye-liquors from the vat through the cops,
chambers and pump back to the vat again.
Page 65
FIG. 14.—Graemiger Cop-dyeing Machine.
The left upper chamber is practically a blank chamber. Those portions of
the cop carriers in contact with it are filled with cops, which are placed on
perforated spindles; the discs are given a quarter revolution which brings
the cops into the dye-liquor and in connection with the left lower chamber
and are dyed. At the same time the section of the cop carriers now in
contact with the left top chamber is filled with a new lot of cops, another
quarter of a revolution is given to the cop carriers, which immerse the new
lot of cops in the dye-liquor. The third quarter of the cop plates is filled with
cops. A third movement of the cop plates now takes place; this brings the
first lot of cops out of the dye-liquor and in contact with the right upper
chamber, where the surplus liquor is drawn out of them and returned to the
dye-vat. Another revolution brings the cops back to their first position, they
are now removed and a new lot substituted. These proceedings go on
continuously. Although not quite free from defects the machine gives very
good results, the cops being very uniformly dyed through.
The left upper chamber is practically a blank chamber. Those portions of
the cop carriers in contact with it are filled with cops, which are placed on
perforated spindles; the discs are given a quarter revolution which brings
the cops into the dye-liquor and in connection with the left lower chamber
and are dyed. At the same time the section of the cop carriers now in
contact with the left top chamber is filled with a new lot of cops, another
quarter of a revolution is given to the cop carriers, which immerse the new
lot of cops in the dye-liquor. The third quarter of the cop plates is filled with
cops. A third movement of the cop plates now takes place; this brings the
first lot of cops out of the dye-liquor and in contact with the right upper
chamber, where the surplus liquor is drawn out of them and returned to the
dye-vat. Another revolution brings the cops back to their first position, they
are now removed and a new lot substituted. These proceedings go on
continuously. Although not quite free from defects the machine gives very
good results, the cops being very uniformly dyed through.
Page 66
FIG. 15.—Beaumont's Cop-dyeing Machine.
Beaumont's Cop-dyeing Machine.—This is illustrated in Fig. 15. It
consists of a copper hemispherical dye-vessel, which is provided with a
tightly fitting lid, although this is not needed in all cases. The bottom of the
vessel is in communication with the suction end of a centrifugal pump,
while the delivery end of the pump is attached to the upper end of the dye-
vessel, the action of the pump being to secure a constant circulation of dye-
liquor from the bottom to the top of the dye-vessel. Arrangements are
provided by a peculiar and ingenious contrivance fitted in one side of the
dye-kettle for introducing steam to heat the dye-liquor to any required
degree. As in most forms of cop-dyeing machines, the cops are placed on
perforated metal spindles. The cops and spindles are inserted in holes in a
perforated metal plate, and over them is placed a thin metal plate,
technically called the antifloater, whose object is to prevent the cops from
becoming detached from the plate. This plate, full of cops, is now placed in
the dye-vessel and rests upon a flange which is provided for that purpose.
When the cop plate is in position the dye-vessel is divided into two
chambers—a lower chamber and an upper one, in the latter being the cops.
Beaumont's Cop-dyeing Machine.—This is illustrated in Fig. 15. It
consists of a copper hemispherical dye-vessel, which is provided with a
tightly fitting lid, although this is not needed in all cases. The bottom of the
vessel is in communication with the suction end of a centrifugal pump,
while the delivery end of the pump is attached to the upper end of the dye-
vessel, the action of the pump being to secure a constant circulation of dye-
liquor from the bottom to the top of the dye-vessel. Arrangements are
provided by a peculiar and ingenious contrivance fitted in one side of the
dye-kettle for introducing steam to heat the dye-liquor to any required
degree. As in most forms of cop-dyeing machines, the cops are placed on
perforated metal spindles. The cops and spindles are inserted in holes in a
perforated metal plate, and over them is placed a thin metal plate,
technically called the antifloater, whose object is to prevent the cops from
becoming detached from the plate. This plate, full of cops, is now placed in
the dye-vessel and rests upon a flange which is provided for that purpose.
When the cop plate is in position the dye-vessel is divided into two
chambers—a lower chamber and an upper one, in the latter being the cops.
Page 67
The pump draws liquor from the chamber under the cop plate and so creates
a vacuum, which during the working of the machines ranges from 10 to 20
inches in degree. To supply this vacuum, dye-liquor is drawn from the
upper chamber through the cops. The pump returns the liquor to the dye-
vessel. A very rapid circulation of dye-liquor takes place, from 25 to 50
gallons per minute passing through the cops and pump. From five to ten
minutes is sufficient to dye the cops. The machine is simple in its
construction and gives good results, the cops being completely dyed
through. One important consideration in cop dyeing is to be able to dye
successive batches of cops to exactly the same shade, and this is quite
possible with this machine.
Young & Crippin's Cop-dyeing Machine.—So far as simplicity of
construction is concerned this lies between the two preceding machines. It
consists of four parts with some accessory mechanism. There is first a dye-
liquor storage tank at the base of the apparatus in which the liquor is kept
stored and boiling (if necessary) ready for use, above this and at the front
end is the dye-chamber, this communicates at its lower end by a pipe with
the dye-liquor in the dye-vat. Then there is a large vacuum chamber, in
which by means of an injector a vacuum can be formed, this directly
communicates with a liquor-receiving chamber which again in turn is in
communication with the upper part of the dye-chamber. The cops are placed
on perforated spindles as usual, and these on a perforated plate and are kept
in place by a plate which is screwed down on them. The charged cop plate
is placed in the dye-chamber on which a cover is placed and screwed down.
By means of a lever the injector is set at work, a vacuum created in the
vacuum and receiving chambers, the consequence being that dye-liquor is
drawn from the vat through the cops in the dye-chamber into the receiving
chamber. When a certain quantity of liquor has passed through, by a
movement of a lever, the vacuum is destroyed, and the dye-liquor runs back
into the dye-vat; these operations are repeated until from past experience of
the working of the machine it is thought sufficient has passed through to
dye the cops, when the dye-chamber is opened and the cops taken out. This
machine works very well.
Mommer's Cop-dyeing Machine.—This is in use in several continental
dye-works. The central portion of this machine is a rectangular dye-
chamber, which can be hermetically closed by hinged doors, the cops are
a vacuum, which during the working of the machines ranges from 10 to 20
inches in degree. To supply this vacuum, dye-liquor is drawn from the
upper chamber through the cops. The pump returns the liquor to the dye-
vessel. A very rapid circulation of dye-liquor takes place, from 25 to 50
gallons per minute passing through the cops and pump. From five to ten
minutes is sufficient to dye the cops. The machine is simple in its
construction and gives good results, the cops being completely dyed
through. One important consideration in cop dyeing is to be able to dye
successive batches of cops to exactly the same shade, and this is quite
possible with this machine.
Young & Crippin's Cop-dyeing Machine.—So far as simplicity of
construction is concerned this lies between the two preceding machines. It
consists of four parts with some accessory mechanism. There is first a dye-
liquor storage tank at the base of the apparatus in which the liquor is kept
stored and boiling (if necessary) ready for use, above this and at the front
end is the dye-chamber, this communicates at its lower end by a pipe with
the dye-liquor in the dye-vat. Then there is a large vacuum chamber, in
which by means of an injector a vacuum can be formed, this directly
communicates with a liquor-receiving chamber which again in turn is in
communication with the upper part of the dye-chamber. The cops are placed
on perforated spindles as usual, and these on a perforated plate and are kept
in place by a plate which is screwed down on them. The charged cop plate
is placed in the dye-chamber on which a cover is placed and screwed down.
By means of a lever the injector is set at work, a vacuum created in the
vacuum and receiving chambers, the consequence being that dye-liquor is
drawn from the vat through the cops in the dye-chamber into the receiving
chamber. When a certain quantity of liquor has passed through, by a
movement of a lever, the vacuum is destroyed, and the dye-liquor runs back
into the dye-vat; these operations are repeated until from past experience of
the working of the machine it is thought sufficient has passed through to
dye the cops, when the dye-chamber is opened and the cops taken out. This
machine works very well.
Mommer's Cop-dyeing Machine.—This is in use in several continental
dye-works. The central portion of this machine is a rectangular dye-
chamber, which can be hermetically closed by hinged doors, the cops are
Page 68
placed side by side on trays provided with perforated bottoms, the trays
being placed one on the top of the other in the dye-chamber. From the top
of the dye-chamber passes a pipe to a centrifugal pump, and a similar pipe
passes from the bottom of the chamber to the pump. A separate vat contains
the dye-liquor which is used. The pump forces the dye-liquor through the
cops which take up the dye. Arrangements are provided by which the
direction of the flow of the dye-liquor can be changed. This machine gives
fairly good results, not perhaps equal to those with the machines previously
described.
Warp-dyeing Machines.—Although many warps, especially for fancy
fabrics, are prepared from yarns dyed in the hank or cop form, yet it is
found advantageous when a warp is of one colour, a self-colour as it is
called, to form the warp from grey or white yarns and to dye it after
warping. If the warp were so wound as to be able to go into a Obermaier
dyeing machine, it would be possible to dye it in that machine, but
generally warps are dyed in the open form and are passed through a dyeing
vat, commonly called a warp-vat which is constructed as shown in Fig. 16.
These warp-dyeing machines generally consist of a long rectangular
wooden dye-vat, divided by two partitions into three compartments, each
provided with steam pipes to heat up its contents; between the first and
second and between the second and third compartments is fitted a pair of
squeezing rollers, while the third compartment is fitted with a heavier pair
of squeezing rollers. Motion is given to these rollers by suitable gearing,
and they serve to draw the warp through the machine. Guide rollers are
fitted in the compartment, and the warp being taken round these, it passes
several times up and down and through the dye-liquors contained in the
compartments. These warp-dyeing machines may be made of sufficient
width to take one, two, three or more warps at one time as desired.
FIG. 16.—Warp-dyeing Machine.
being placed one on the top of the other in the dye-chamber. From the top
of the dye-chamber passes a pipe to a centrifugal pump, and a similar pipe
passes from the bottom of the chamber to the pump. A separate vat contains
the dye-liquor which is used. The pump forces the dye-liquor through the
cops which take up the dye. Arrangements are provided by which the
direction of the flow of the dye-liquor can be changed. This machine gives
fairly good results, not perhaps equal to those with the machines previously
described.
Warp-dyeing Machines.—Although many warps, especially for fancy
fabrics, are prepared from yarns dyed in the hank or cop form, yet it is
found advantageous when a warp is of one colour, a self-colour as it is
called, to form the warp from grey or white yarns and to dye it after
warping. If the warp were so wound as to be able to go into a Obermaier
dyeing machine, it would be possible to dye it in that machine, but
generally warps are dyed in the open form and are passed through a dyeing
vat, commonly called a warp-vat which is constructed as shown in Fig. 16.
These warp-dyeing machines generally consist of a long rectangular
wooden dye-vat, divided by two partitions into three compartments, each
provided with steam pipes to heat up its contents; between the first and
second and between the second and third compartments is fitted a pair of
squeezing rollers, while the third compartment is fitted with a heavier pair
of squeezing rollers. Motion is given to these rollers by suitable gearing,
and they serve to draw the warp through the machine. Guide rollers are
fitted in the compartment, and the warp being taken round these, it passes
several times up and down and through the dye-liquors contained in the
compartments. These warp-dyeing machines may be made of sufficient
width to take one, two, three or more warps at one time as desired.
FIG. 16.—Warp-dyeing Machine.
Page 69
The three compartments of the machine may contain different liquids or all
the same liquid according as the nature of the shade to be dyed demands.
The passage is done slowly so as to give the warp time to absorb the liquors
and take up the dye. When all the length of warp has been sent through, it is
said to have been dyed "one end". Sometimes this will be enough, but often
it is not, and so the warp is sent through again, given another end, and still
again if the full shade has not been attained.
After being dyed in this machine the warp is sent through another one
containing various wash liquors to finish the process.
FIG. 17.—Warp-dyeing Machine.
Fig. 17 shows a warp-dyeing machine similar to, but a little more elaborate
in construction than, the vats just described.
Piece-dyeing Machines.—Wherever it is possible it is far more preferable
to dye textile fabrics in the form of woven pieces rather than in the yarn
from which they are woven. During the process of weaving it is quite
impossible to avoid the material getting dirty and somewhat greasy, and the
operations of scouring necessary to remove this dirt and grease has an
impairing action on the colour if dyed yarns have been used in weaving it.
This is avoided when the pieces are woven first and dyed afterwards, and
this can always be done when the cloths are dyed in one colour only. Of
the same liquid according as the nature of the shade to be dyed demands.
The passage is done slowly so as to give the warp time to absorb the liquors
and take up the dye. When all the length of warp has been sent through, it is
said to have been dyed "one end". Sometimes this will be enough, but often
it is not, and so the warp is sent through again, given another end, and still
again if the full shade has not been attained.
After being dyed in this machine the warp is sent through another one
containing various wash liquors to finish the process.
FIG. 17.—Warp-dyeing Machine.
Fig. 17 shows a warp-dyeing machine similar to, but a little more elaborate
in construction than, the vats just described.
Piece-dyeing Machines.—Wherever it is possible it is far more preferable
to dye textile fabrics in the form of woven pieces rather than in the yarn
from which they are woven. During the process of weaving it is quite
impossible to avoid the material getting dirty and somewhat greasy, and the
operations of scouring necessary to remove this dirt and grease has an
impairing action on the colour if dyed yarns have been used in weaving it.
This is avoided when the pieces are woven first and dyed afterwards, and
this can always be done when the cloths are dyed in one colour only. Of
Page 70
course when the goods are fancy goods containing several colours they
have to be woven from dyed yarns.
FIG. 18.—Dye-jiggers.
The most common form of machine in which pieces are dyed is The Jigger,
commonly called the jig. This is shown in Figs. 18 and 19. It consists of a
dye-vessel made sufficiently long to take the piece full width—wide at the
top and narrow at the bottom. At the top at each side is placed a large
winding roller on which the cloth is wound. At the bottom of the jig is
placed a guide roller round which passes the cloth. In some makes of jigs
(Fig. 19) there are two guide rollers at the bottom and one at the top, as
shown in the illustration, so that the cloth passes several times through the
dye-liquor. In working, the cloth is first wound on one of the rollers, then
threaded through the guide rollers and attached to the other winding roller.
When this is done dye-liquor is run into the jig, the gearing set in motion,
and
have to be woven from dyed yarns.
FIG. 18.—Dye-jiggers.
The most common form of machine in which pieces are dyed is The Jigger,
commonly called the jig. This is shown in Figs. 18 and 19. It consists of a
dye-vessel made sufficiently long to take the piece full width—wide at the
top and narrow at the bottom. At the top at each side is placed a large
winding roller on which the cloth is wound. At the bottom of the jig is
placed a guide roller round which passes the cloth. In some makes of jigs
(Fig. 19) there are two guide rollers at the bottom and one at the top, as
shown in the illustration, so that the cloth passes several times through the
dye-liquor. In working, the cloth is first wound on one of the rollers, then
threaded through the guide rollers and attached to the other winding roller.
When this is done dye-liquor is run into the jig, the gearing set in motion,
and
Page 71
FIG. 19.—Dye-jigger.
the cloth wound from the full on to the empty roller. With the object of
keeping the piece tight, a heavy press roller is arranged to bear on the cloth
on the full roller. When all the cloth has passed from one roller to the other
it is said to have been given "one end". The direction of motion is now
changed, and the cloth sent in the opposite direction through the jig, and the
piece has now received another "end". This alternation from one roller to
the other is continued as long as is deemed necessary, much depending on
the depth of colour which is being dyed—some pale shades may only take
two or three ends, deeper shades may take more. When dyeing wool with
acid colours which are all absorbed from the dye-liquor, or the bath is
exhausted, it is a good plan to run the pieces several more ends so as to
ensure thorough fixation of the dye on the cloth.
It is not advisable in working these jigs to add the whole of the dye to the
liquor at the commencement, but only a part of it; then when one end is
given, another portion of the dye may be added; such portions being always
in the form of solution. Adding dyes in powder form inevitably leads to the
production of colour specks on the finished goods. The reason for thus
the cloth wound from the full on to the empty roller. With the object of
keeping the piece tight, a heavy press roller is arranged to bear on the cloth
on the full roller. When all the cloth has passed from one roller to the other
it is said to have been given "one end". The direction of motion is now
changed, and the cloth sent in the opposite direction through the jig, and the
piece has now received another "end". This alternation from one roller to
the other is continued as long as is deemed necessary, much depending on
the depth of colour which is being dyed—some pale shades may only take
two or three ends, deeper shades may take more. When dyeing wool with
acid colours which are all absorbed from the dye-liquor, or the bath is
exhausted, it is a good plan to run the pieces several more ends so as to
ensure thorough fixation of the dye on the cloth.
It is not advisable in working these jigs to add the whole of the dye to the
liquor at the commencement, but only a part of it; then when one end is
given, another portion of the dye may be added; such portions being always
in the form of solution. Adding dyes in powder form inevitably leads to the
production of colour specks on the finished goods. The reason for thus
Page 72
adding the dye-stuff in portions is that with some dyes the affinity for the
fibre is so great that if all were added at once it would all be absorbed
before the cloth had been given one end; and, further, the cloth would be
very deep at the front end, while it would shade off to no colour at the other
end. By adding the dye in portions this difficulty is overcome and more
level shades are obtained; it is met with in all cases of jigger dyeing, but it
is most common in dyeing cotton or wool with basic dyes like magenta,
auramine, methyl violet or brilliant green, and in dyeing wool with acid
dyes like acid green, formyl violets, azo scarlet, or acid yellow.
Some attempts have been made to make jiggers automatic in their reversing
action, but they have not been successful; owing to the greatly varying
conditions of length of pieces, their thickness, etc., which have to be dyed,
and it is next to impossible to make all allowances for such varying
conditions.
The Jig Wince or Wince Dye Beck.—This dyeing machine is very largely
used, particularly in the dyeing of woollen cloths. It is made by many
makers, and varies somewhat in form accordingly. Figs. 20, 21 and 22,
show three forms
fibre is so great that if all were added at once it would all be absorbed
before the cloth had been given one end; and, further, the cloth would be
very deep at the front end, while it would shade off to no colour at the other
end. By adding the dye in portions this difficulty is overcome and more
level shades are obtained; it is met with in all cases of jigger dyeing, but it
is most common in dyeing cotton or wool with basic dyes like magenta,
auramine, methyl violet or brilliant green, and in dyeing wool with acid
dyes like acid green, formyl violets, azo scarlet, or acid yellow.
Some attempts have been made to make jiggers automatic in their reversing
action, but they have not been successful; owing to the greatly varying
conditions of length of pieces, their thickness, etc., which have to be dyed,
and it is next to impossible to make all allowances for such varying
conditions.
The Jig Wince or Wince Dye Beck.—This dyeing machine is very largely
used, particularly in the dyeing of woollen cloths. It is made by many
makers, and varies somewhat in form accordingly. Figs. 20, 21 and 22,
show three forms
Page 73
FIG. 20—Jig Wince.
by different makers. In any make the jig wince, or wince dye beck, consists
of a large rectangular, or, in some cases, hemicylindrical dye-vat. Probably
the best shape would be to have a vat with one straight side at the front, and
one curved side at the back. In some a small guide roller is fitted at the
bottom, under which the pieces to be dyed pass. Steam pipes are provided
for heating the dye-liquors. The becks should be fitted with a false bottom
made of wood, perforated with holes, or of wooden lattice work, and below
FIG. 21.—Cloth-dyeing Machine.
which the steam pipes are placed; the object being to prevent the pieces
from coming in contact with the steam pipe, and so preventing the
production of stains. Above the dye-vat, and towards the back, is the wince,
a revolving skeleton wheel, which draws the pieces out of the dye-vat at the
front, and delivers them into it again at the back. The construction of this
wince is well shown in the drawings. The wince will take the pieces full
breadth, but often they are somewhat folded, and so several pieces, four,
five or six strings as they are called, can be dealt with at one time. In this
case a guide rail is provided in the front part of the machine. In this rail are
pegs which serve to keep the pieces of cloth separate, and so prevent
entanglements. The pieces are stitched end to end so as to form an endless
by different makers. In any make the jig wince, or wince dye beck, consists
of a large rectangular, or, in some cases, hemicylindrical dye-vat. Probably
the best shape would be to have a vat with one straight side at the front, and
one curved side at the back. In some a small guide roller is fitted at the
bottom, under which the pieces to be dyed pass. Steam pipes are provided
for heating the dye-liquors. The becks should be fitted with a false bottom
made of wood, perforated with holes, or of wooden lattice work, and below
FIG. 21.—Cloth-dyeing Machine.
which the steam pipes are placed; the object being to prevent the pieces
from coming in contact with the steam pipe, and so preventing the
production of stains. Above the dye-vat, and towards the back, is the wince,
a revolving skeleton wheel, which draws the pieces out of the dye-vat at the
front, and delivers them into it again at the back. The construction of this
wince is well shown in the drawings. The wince will take the pieces full
breadth, but often they are somewhat folded, and so several pieces, four,
five or six strings as they are called, can be dealt with at one time. In this
case a guide rail is provided in the front part of the machine. In this rail are
pegs which serve to keep the pieces of cloth separate, and so prevent
entanglements. The pieces are stitched end to end so as to form an endless
Page 74
band. When running through the vat they fall down in folds at the back part
of the beck, and are drawn out of the bottom and up in the front. Each part
thus remains for some time in the dye-liquor, during which it necessarily
takes up the dye.
FIG. 22.—Dye Beck.
In the jig and wince dyeing machines the pieces necessarily are for a part of
the time, longer in the case of the jigger than in that of the wince, out of the
dye-liquor and exposed to the air. In the case of some dyes, indigo
especially, this is not desirable, and yet it is advisable to run the cloth open
for some time in the liquor, so as to get it thoroughly impregnated with the
dye-liquor, or to become dyed. This may be done on such a machine, as is
shown in Fig. 24, page 79, but having all the guide rollers below the liquor,
so that at no time is the piece out of the liquor, except, of course, when
entering and leaving.
of the beck, and are drawn out of the bottom and up in the front. Each part
thus remains for some time in the dye-liquor, during which it necessarily
takes up the dye.
FIG. 22.—Dye Beck.
In the jig and wince dyeing machines the pieces necessarily are for a part of
the time, longer in the case of the jigger than in that of the wince, out of the
dye-liquor and exposed to the air. In the case of some dyes, indigo
especially, this is not desirable, and yet it is advisable to run the cloth open
for some time in the liquor, so as to get it thoroughly impregnated with the
dye-liquor, or to become dyed. This may be done on such a machine, as is
shown in Fig. 24, page 79, but having all the guide rollers below the liquor,
so that at no time is the piece out of the liquor, except, of course, when
entering and leaving.
Page 75
FIG. 23.—Holliday's Machine for Hawking
Cloth.
The so-called hawking machines have also this object in view, and Fig. 23
is an illustration of Holliday's hawking machine, made by Messrs. Read
Holliday & Sons, of Huddersfield. There is the dye-vat as usual; in this is
suspended the drawing mechanism, whose construction is well shown in the
drawing. This is a pair of rollers driven by suitable gearing, between which
the cloth passes, and by which it is drawn through the machine. A small
roller ensures the cloth properly leaving the large rollers; then there is a
lattice-work arrangement over which the pieces are drawn. In actual work
the whole of this arrangement is below the surface of the dye-liquor in the
vat. The piece to be dyed is threaded through the machine, the ends stitched
together. Then the arrangement is lowered into the dye-vat and set into
motion, whereby the cloth is drawn continuously in the open form through
the dye-liquor, this being done as long as experience shows to be necessary.
This hawking machine will be found useful in dyeing indigo on cotton or
wool, or in dyeing cotton cloths with such dyes as Immedial blacks, Cross-
dye blacks, Amidazol blacks, Vidal blacks, where it is necessary to keep the
goods below the surface of the dye-liquor during the operation.
Cloth.
The so-called hawking machines have also this object in view, and Fig. 23
is an illustration of Holliday's hawking machine, made by Messrs. Read
Holliday & Sons, of Huddersfield. There is the dye-vat as usual; in this is
suspended the drawing mechanism, whose construction is well shown in the
drawing. This is a pair of rollers driven by suitable gearing, between which
the cloth passes, and by which it is drawn through the machine. A small
roller ensures the cloth properly leaving the large rollers; then there is a
lattice-work arrangement over which the pieces are drawn. In actual work
the whole of this arrangement is below the surface of the dye-liquor in the
vat. The piece to be dyed is threaded through the machine, the ends stitched
together. Then the arrangement is lowered into the dye-vat and set into
motion, whereby the cloth is drawn continuously in the open form through
the dye-liquor, this being done as long as experience shows to be necessary.
This hawking machine will be found useful in dyeing indigo on cotton or
wool, or in dyeing cotton cloths with such dyes as Immedial blacks, Cross-
dye blacks, Amidazol blacks, Vidal blacks, where it is necessary to keep the
goods below the surface of the dye-liquor during the operation.
Page 76
FIG. 24.—Continuous Dyeing Machine.
Fig. 24 shows a form of cloth-dyeing machine much used in the cotton
trade. It consists of a number of compartments fitted with guide rollers at
top and bottom, and round which the cloth is threaded, so that it passes up
and down in the dye-liquor several times. Between each two compartments
is a pair of squeezing rollers to press out all surplus liquors. All the
compartments may be filled with the same dye-liquor, or with different dye-
liquors and developing liquors, as may be most convenient and required for
the work in hand. Such a machine is used in dyeing logwood black, aniline
black, and many of the direct colours, etc.
From the direct colours a large number of light shades are dyed on to cotton
cloth by the process known as padding; this consists in passing the cloth
through a liquor containing the dye-stuff, usually a little phosphate of soda
is added, then between squeezing rollers, and finally drying the cloth. For
this process there is used what is called a padding machine. This is shown
in Figs. 25 and 26.
Fig. 24 shows a form of cloth-dyeing machine much used in the cotton
trade. It consists of a number of compartments fitted with guide rollers at
top and bottom, and round which the cloth is threaded, so that it passes up
and down in the dye-liquor several times. Between each two compartments
is a pair of squeezing rollers to press out all surplus liquors. All the
compartments may be filled with the same dye-liquor, or with different dye-
liquors and developing liquors, as may be most convenient and required for
the work in hand. Such a machine is used in dyeing logwood black, aniline
black, and many of the direct colours, etc.
From the direct colours a large number of light shades are dyed on to cotton
cloth by the process known as padding; this consists in passing the cloth
through a liquor containing the dye-stuff, usually a little phosphate of soda
is added, then between squeezing rollers, and finally drying the cloth. For
this process there is used what is called a padding machine. This is shown
in Figs. 25 and 26.
Page 77
FIG. 25.—Padding Machine.
It consists essentially of a trough, which contains two or more guide rollers,
and in this is placed the padding liquor. Above the trough is fitted squeezing
rollers, sometimes two as in Fig. 25, or three as in Fig. 26. Besides these,
there
It consists essentially of a trough, which contains two or more guide rollers,
and in this is placed the padding liquor. Above the trough is fitted squeezing
rollers, sometimes two as in Fig. 25, or three as in Fig. 26. Besides these,
there
Page 78
FIG. 26.—Padding Machine.
are winding and beaming and other guide rollers. Fig. 25 shows the
simplest padding machine, where the cloth passes once through the liquor
and through the squeezing rollers. In Fig. 26 the cloth passes several times
through the liquor and twice through the squeezing rollers, thus ensuring a
more perfect impregnation of the cloth with the dye-liquor, and therefore a
more uniform dyeing of the cloth.
are winding and beaming and other guide rollers. Fig. 25 shows the
simplest padding machine, where the cloth passes once through the liquor
and through the squeezing rollers. In Fig. 26 the cloth passes several times
through the liquor and twice through the squeezing rollers, thus ensuring a
more perfect impregnation of the cloth with the dye-liquor, and therefore a
more uniform dyeing of the cloth.
Page 79
CHAPTER IV.
THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF COTTON DYEING.
Students of cotton dyeing should have a good knowledge of the principles
that underlie the processes of dyeing cotton fabrics. It is only by
recognising these principles and then endeavouring to apply them to each
individual case of dyeing, that the dyer or student will obtain a thorough
grasp of his subject. It is the aim of the author to lay down these principles
in a clear and intelligible form. Cotton is dyed in its loose raw condition, as
yarn in the form of hanks, yarn in the form of cops, and in the woven pieces
of every kind. Formerly the idea was prevalent among cotton dyers that the
process which succeeds with piece goods would not answer with yarns. It is
now recognised however that this is not so, that a process which will dye
cotton yarn will also dye cotton piece goods or loose cotton. The
differences which do exist in the practical working of the processes entirely
arise from the difference in the form in which the cotton is presented to the
dyer, for it must be obvious to any one that the mode of handling a piece of
cotton cloth during the time it is in the dye-bath must be different from that
of a hank of yarn, a parcel of loose cotton or a number of cops. The various
machines used for dyeing all these forms and the manner of working them
have been already described.
The dyes, whether natural—derived from the various dye-woods, etc.—or
artificial—prepared from coal tar—may according to their varied chemical
composition and constitution be divided into seventeen or eighteen distinct
groups, but it is not intended here to give any account of them; the reader is
referred to other books such as The Dictionary of Coal Tar Colours, by
George H. Hurst; The Chemistry of Coal Tar Colours, by Benedikt and
Knecht; or The Chemistry of Organic Colouring Matters, by Nietzki, where
the composition and properties of the dyes are fully described.
From the manner in which the various dyes are applied to cotton, linen,
wool and other fibres we can divide them into five groups, thus:—
Group 1.Direct dyes.
THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF COTTON DYEING.
Students of cotton dyeing should have a good knowledge of the principles
that underlie the processes of dyeing cotton fabrics. It is only by
recognising these principles and then endeavouring to apply them to each
individual case of dyeing, that the dyer or student will obtain a thorough
grasp of his subject. It is the aim of the author to lay down these principles
in a clear and intelligible form. Cotton is dyed in its loose raw condition, as
yarn in the form of hanks, yarn in the form of cops, and in the woven pieces
of every kind. Formerly the idea was prevalent among cotton dyers that the
process which succeeds with piece goods would not answer with yarns. It is
now recognised however that this is not so, that a process which will dye
cotton yarn will also dye cotton piece goods or loose cotton. The
differences which do exist in the practical working of the processes entirely
arise from the difference in the form in which the cotton is presented to the
dyer, for it must be obvious to any one that the mode of handling a piece of
cotton cloth during the time it is in the dye-bath must be different from that
of a hank of yarn, a parcel of loose cotton or a number of cops. The various
machines used for dyeing all these forms and the manner of working them
have been already described.
The dyes, whether natural—derived from the various dye-woods, etc.—or
artificial—prepared from coal tar—may according to their varied chemical
composition and constitution be divided into seventeen or eighteen distinct
groups, but it is not intended here to give any account of them; the reader is
referred to other books such as The Dictionary of Coal Tar Colours, by
George H. Hurst; The Chemistry of Coal Tar Colours, by Benedikt and
Knecht; or The Chemistry of Organic Colouring Matters, by Nietzki, where
the composition and properties of the dyes are fully described.
From the manner in which the various dyes are applied to cotton, linen,
wool and other fibres we can divide them into five groups, thus:—
Group 1.Direct dyes.
Page 80
" 2.Basic dyes.
" 3.Acid dyes.
" 4.Mordant dyes.
" 5.Miscellaneous dyes.
First group, direct dyes, are now very numerous; they dye cotton, linen and
other vegetable fibres from a plain bath, and do not require those fibres to
be prepared in any way. Hence the reason of their being named direct, or by
some the substantive colours. They will also dye wool and silk.
The second group, basic dyes, comprise some of the oldest of the coal-tar
dyes; they dye wool and silk direct from plain baths, but require cotton,
linen and other vegetable fibres to be previously prepared in baths of tannic
acid, sumach or other tanning material.
The third group, acid dyes, are very numerous, and from both their
chemical composition and mode of dyeing can be divided into several sub-
groups. Their principal feature is that they dye wool and silk from baths
containing Glauber's salt and some acid, hence their name of "acid dyes".
They do not dye cotton or linen well, some not at all, others are absorbed to
a slight extent by the cotton, but only pale tints are produced, while others
may be used along with metallic mordants to dye bright but pale and
fugitive shades. The acid dyes comprise such as Acid green, Formyl violet,
Acid magenta, Azo scarlet, Orange. Thiocarmine R., Patent blues, Wool
greens, indigo extract, Eosines, etc.
The fourth group, mordant dyes, includes the alizarine series of coal-tar
colours, logwood, Brazil wood and most natural colours, and some others.
The principal feature of these dyes is that they require the cotton to be
prepared with some metallic oxide, like those of chrome, alumina and iron,
before dyeing, and the colour which is got depends partly upon the
particular dye-stuff used and partly upon the oxide with which the cotton
has been prepared.
The fifth group includes a few dyes like indigo, which are dyed on to cotton
by various and special processes.
The processes of cotton dyeing employed to-day may be comprised under
eight heads, namely:—
" 3.Acid dyes.
" 4.Mordant dyes.
" 5.Miscellaneous dyes.
First group, direct dyes, are now very numerous; they dye cotton, linen and
other vegetable fibres from a plain bath, and do not require those fibres to
be prepared in any way. Hence the reason of their being named direct, or by
some the substantive colours. They will also dye wool and silk.
The second group, basic dyes, comprise some of the oldest of the coal-tar
dyes; they dye wool and silk direct from plain baths, but require cotton,
linen and other vegetable fibres to be previously prepared in baths of tannic
acid, sumach or other tanning material.
The third group, acid dyes, are very numerous, and from both their
chemical composition and mode of dyeing can be divided into several sub-
groups. Their principal feature is that they dye wool and silk from baths
containing Glauber's salt and some acid, hence their name of "acid dyes".
They do not dye cotton or linen well, some not at all, others are absorbed to
a slight extent by the cotton, but only pale tints are produced, while others
may be used along with metallic mordants to dye bright but pale and
fugitive shades. The acid dyes comprise such as Acid green, Formyl violet,
Acid magenta, Azo scarlet, Orange. Thiocarmine R., Patent blues, Wool
greens, indigo extract, Eosines, etc.
The fourth group, mordant dyes, includes the alizarine series of coal-tar
colours, logwood, Brazil wood and most natural colours, and some others.
The principal feature of these dyes is that they require the cotton to be
prepared with some metallic oxide, like those of chrome, alumina and iron,
before dyeing, and the colour which is got depends partly upon the
particular dye-stuff used and partly upon the oxide with which the cotton
has been prepared.
The fifth group includes a few dyes like indigo, which are dyed on to cotton
by various and special processes.
The processes of cotton dyeing employed to-day may be comprised under
eight heads, namely:—
Page 81
(1) Direct dyeing. (2) Direct dyeing followed by fixation with metallic salts.
(3) Direct dyeing followed by fixation with developers. (4) Direct dyeing
followed by fixation with couplers. (5) Dyeing on tannic mordant. (6)
Dyeing on metallic mordant. (7) Developing the colour direct on fibre. (8)
Dyeing by impregnating the cotton with the dye-stuff, followed by
oxidation or steaming.
It is of course not easy to elaborate a simple scheme of grouping the
processes that shall definitely include all processes, but the above grouping
will be found as successful as any, and each will be considered as fully as is
deemed necessary.
(1) DIRECT DYEING.
Nothing in the history of cotton dyeing caused such a revolution in the
methods of working as did the introduction some fifteen years ago of the
forerunners (Congo red, Benzo purpurine, Chrysamine, Azo blue) of the
now numerous group of direct dyes, followed as they were by the Benzo,
Congo, Diamine, Titan, Chicago and Zambesi members of the group. Prior
to their introduction cotton dyeing was always more or less complicated and
mordanting methods had to be employed.
With the introduction of the direct dyes cotton dyeing has become even
more simple than wool or silk dyeing, and now all that is necessary is to
prepare a dye liquor containing the necessary amount of dye-stuff and
Glauber's salt, or common salt or soda, or some similar body, or a
combination thereof. The method of working is to place the cotton in a
lukewarm or even in a hot bath, raise to the boil, allow the goods to remain
in the boiling bath for half an hour to an hour, then take them out, wring,
wash and dry. This method is simple and will answer for all the dyes of this
group. There are some that do not require the working to be done boiling; it
is simply needful to enter the cotton into a boiling bath and work without
steam until the bath has cooled down. Furious boiling is not needed—a
gentle simmer gives the best results. Uneven dyeing seems to be an
impossibility in this group of dyes, unless the cotton is dirty; no matter how
the operations are carried on, level dyeing is the rule not the exception. An
enormous variety of shades and tints can be obtained from these dyes, and
(3) Direct dyeing followed by fixation with developers. (4) Direct dyeing
followed by fixation with couplers. (5) Dyeing on tannic mordant. (6)
Dyeing on metallic mordant. (7) Developing the colour direct on fibre. (8)
Dyeing by impregnating the cotton with the dye-stuff, followed by
oxidation or steaming.
It is of course not easy to elaborate a simple scheme of grouping the
processes that shall definitely include all processes, but the above grouping
will be found as successful as any, and each will be considered as fully as is
deemed necessary.
(1) DIRECT DYEING.
Nothing in the history of cotton dyeing caused such a revolution in the
methods of working as did the introduction some fifteen years ago of the
forerunners (Congo red, Benzo purpurine, Chrysamine, Azo blue) of the
now numerous group of direct dyes, followed as they were by the Benzo,
Congo, Diamine, Titan, Chicago and Zambesi members of the group. Prior
to their introduction cotton dyeing was always more or less complicated and
mordanting methods had to be employed.
With the introduction of the direct dyes cotton dyeing has become even
more simple than wool or silk dyeing, and now all that is necessary is to
prepare a dye liquor containing the necessary amount of dye-stuff and
Glauber's salt, or common salt or soda, or some similar body, or a
combination thereof. The method of working is to place the cotton in a
lukewarm or even in a hot bath, raise to the boil, allow the goods to remain
in the boiling bath for half an hour to an hour, then take them out, wring,
wash and dry. This method is simple and will answer for all the dyes of this
group. There are some that do not require the working to be done boiling; it
is simply needful to enter the cotton into a boiling bath and work without
steam until the bath has cooled down. Furious boiling is not needed—a
gentle simmer gives the best results. Uneven dyeing seems to be an
impossibility in this group of dyes, unless the cotton is dirty; no matter how
the operations are carried on, level dyeing is the rule not the exception. An
enormous variety of shades and tints can be obtained from these dyes, and
Page 82
they can be combined together in every conceivable manner and
proportions.
No satisfactory explanation has yet been given as to what feature in the
chemical composition of these dye-stuffs give them such an affinity for the
cotton fibre as to enable them to dye in so simple a manner such fast shades
as they do; it is a fact there is such an affinity and there the matter must rest.
It has been found in practice that the efficiency of the dyeing operation
depends, primarily of course, on the particular dye-stuff used, but also upon
other factors, that a certain assistant be used. Some dyes work on the cotton
better from a bath containing Glauber's salt, while with others common salt
works best, while a little soda along with the salt facilitates the dyeing in
some cases. It is practically impossible to specify here the best assistant for
all the direct colours, on account of the great number of such dyes which
are known, but in the practical recipes given below much useful advice will
be found. Then the quantity of such assistants used is of much importance;
there is one proportion at which the best results are obtained for each dye.
The dyer should find out for himself by experiment and the use of the dyes
he employs in his work what assistant and how much is best, and make his
baths up to that strength. With some dyes 10 per cent. of the assistant will
be found sufficient, while with others, 25 to 30 per cent. will not be too
much. The percentage refers to the weight of the cotton that is taken.
One function of the assistants must be pointed out here: it is that in some
cases they—especially the alkaline ones, soda, potash, borax, phosphate of
soda—help the dyeing by promoting the solubility of the dye-stuff in the
bath, thereby retarding the exhaustion of the bath and ensuring the
production of level shades.
The following formulas show the application of the foregoing principles to
the dyeing of numerous shades on to cotton and also the dyes which are
applicable, some of the combinations which are possible with these direct
dyes, and give some idea of the tints and shades of the colours that can be
got by their means. The best assistants to use are also indicated in the
formulæ.
All the formulæ here given and all that will be given in future chapters are
intended for 100 lb. weight of cotton fabrics in any condition, whether of
proportions.
No satisfactory explanation has yet been given as to what feature in the
chemical composition of these dye-stuffs give them such an affinity for the
cotton fibre as to enable them to dye in so simple a manner such fast shades
as they do; it is a fact there is such an affinity and there the matter must rest.
It has been found in practice that the efficiency of the dyeing operation
depends, primarily of course, on the particular dye-stuff used, but also upon
other factors, that a certain assistant be used. Some dyes work on the cotton
better from a bath containing Glauber's salt, while with others common salt
works best, while a little soda along with the salt facilitates the dyeing in
some cases. It is practically impossible to specify here the best assistant for
all the direct colours, on account of the great number of such dyes which
are known, but in the practical recipes given below much useful advice will
be found. Then the quantity of such assistants used is of much importance;
there is one proportion at which the best results are obtained for each dye.
The dyer should find out for himself by experiment and the use of the dyes
he employs in his work what assistant and how much is best, and make his
baths up to that strength. With some dyes 10 per cent. of the assistant will
be found sufficient, while with others, 25 to 30 per cent. will not be too
much. The percentage refers to the weight of the cotton that is taken.
One function of the assistants must be pointed out here: it is that in some
cases they—especially the alkaline ones, soda, potash, borax, phosphate of
soda—help the dyeing by promoting the solubility of the dye-stuff in the
bath, thereby retarding the exhaustion of the bath and ensuring the
production of level shades.
The following formulas show the application of the foregoing principles to
the dyeing of numerous shades on to cotton and also the dyes which are
applicable, some of the combinations which are possible with these direct
dyes, and give some idea of the tints and shades of the colours that can be
got by their means. The best assistants to use are also indicated in the
formulæ.
All the formulæ here given and all that will be given in future chapters are
intended for 100 lb. weight of cotton fabrics in any condition, whether of
Page 83
loose cotton, yarn in cops, hanks or wraps and woven fabrics of every kind.
Bright Red.—Dye with 3 lb. Benzo purpurine 4 B, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb.
Glauber's salt. This dye may also be used with 3 lb. soap and 10 lb. soda in
the bath with equally good results.
Pale Salmon.—Prepare a dye-bath with 3 lb. salt, 5 lb. phosphate of soda, 1
lb. soap, ½ oz. Benzo orange R. For a pale shade like this it is not necessary
to heat to the boil, a temperature of 170° to 180° F. is sufficient.
Dark Plum.—Prepare a dye-bath with 20 lb. of Glauber's salt, 2½ lb. soap,
1½ lb. Diamine black R O. and 2 lb. Diamine red N. Enter at 180° F., work
for a few minutes, then raise to boil and dye to shade; lift, wash and dry.
Turkey Red.—Prepare a dye-bath with 1½ lb. Benzo purpurine 4 B, 1 lb.
Brilliant purpurine, 2 lb. soap, 10 lb. borax. Enter the cotton at the boil and
work for one hour; lift, wash and dry.
Lilac Red.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. soap, 5 lb. soda, 3 lb. Rose
azurine G. Work at the boil for one hour.
Pink.—Prepare a bath containing 10 lb. soda, 1 oz. Rose azurine B. Enter at
a boil and work for one hour, boiling to shade; lift, wash and dry.
Bordeaux.—Prepare a dye-bath with 15 lb. Glauber's salt, 5 lb. soda
crystals, 3 lb. Diamine fast red F, 1 lb. Diamine violet N, 1 lb. Rose azurine
G. Enter cold, then raise to the boil, and work for one and a half hours; lift,
wash and dry.
Rose Pink.—The dye-bath is made with 2 lb. Erika B, 20 lb. Glauber's salt
and 3 lb. soap, working at near the boil to shade.
Brilliant Red.—Make the dye-bath with 24 lb. Brilliant purpurine R and 25
lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Deep Pink.—Make the dye-bath with ½ lb. Diamine rose B D, ½ lb. soda, 1
lb. soap and 5 lb. Glauber's salt, working at 150° F. for half an hour.
Dark Red.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine red 5 B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Bright Red.—Dye with 3 lb. Benzo purpurine 4 B, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb.
Glauber's salt. This dye may also be used with 3 lb. soap and 10 lb. soda in
the bath with equally good results.
Pale Salmon.—Prepare a dye-bath with 3 lb. salt, 5 lb. phosphate of soda, 1
lb. soap, ½ oz. Benzo orange R. For a pale shade like this it is not necessary
to heat to the boil, a temperature of 170° to 180° F. is sufficient.
Dark Plum.—Prepare a dye-bath with 20 lb. of Glauber's salt, 2½ lb. soap,
1½ lb. Diamine black R O. and 2 lb. Diamine red N. Enter at 180° F., work
for a few minutes, then raise to boil and dye to shade; lift, wash and dry.
Turkey Red.—Prepare a dye-bath with 1½ lb. Benzo purpurine 4 B, 1 lb.
Brilliant purpurine, 2 lb. soap, 10 lb. borax. Enter the cotton at the boil and
work for one hour; lift, wash and dry.
Lilac Red.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. soap, 5 lb. soda, 3 lb. Rose
azurine G. Work at the boil for one hour.
Pink.—Prepare a bath containing 10 lb. soda, 1 oz. Rose azurine B. Enter at
a boil and work for one hour, boiling to shade; lift, wash and dry.
Bordeaux.—Prepare a dye-bath with 15 lb. Glauber's salt, 5 lb. soda
crystals, 3 lb. Diamine fast red F, 1 lb. Diamine violet N, 1 lb. Rose azurine
G. Enter cold, then raise to the boil, and work for one and a half hours; lift,
wash and dry.
Rose Pink.—The dye-bath is made with 2 lb. Erika B, 20 lb. Glauber's salt
and 3 lb. soap, working at near the boil to shade.
Brilliant Red.—Make the dye-bath with 24 lb. Brilliant purpurine R and 25
lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Deep Pink.—Make the dye-bath with ½ lb. Diamine rose B D, ½ lb. soda, 1
lb. soap and 5 lb. Glauber's salt, working at 150° F. for half an hour.
Dark Red.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine red 5 B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Page 84
Pink.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 oz. Diamine rose B D, 1 lb. Turkey-red
oil, 40 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Scarlet.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Diamine scarlet 3 B, 1 lb. Turkey-
red oil, 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Scarlet.—Prepare the dye-bath with 3 lb. Titan scarlet C, ½ lb. Titan
orange, 50 lb. salt. Work at the boil for thirty minutes, then lift, wash and
dry. The dye-bath is not exhausted and may be used for further lots.
Crimson Red.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Titan scarlet D and 50 lb.
salt. Work at the boil for fifty minutes, then lift, wash and dry. The bath is
not exhausted, the cotton taking up only about 3 lb. of the dye-stuff; it may
therefore be kept for further use, when for each succeeding lot 3 to 3½ lb.
of colour and 25 lb. of salt only need be added.
Scarlet.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Rosophenine 5 B, dissolved in 50
gallons hot water, 2 gallons caustic soda lye (60° Tw.). When thoroughly
dissolved add 150 lb. salt. Make up the bath to 100 gallons. Enter the yarn
and work for a quarter to half an hour at about 180° F; squeeze off and
wash thoroughly in cold water until the water runs off clean.
Rose Red.—Use 1 lb. Diamine red 10 B, 3 lb. soda, and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt.
Deep Crimson.—Use 3 lb. Diamine red 10 B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Claret.—Use 3 lb. Diamine Bordeaux B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt.
Pink.—The dye-bath is made with 5 oz. Dianil red 4 B, 5 lb. salt and 3 lb.
soda.
Scarlet.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Dianil red 4 B, 15 lb. salt and 5 lb. soda.
Work at the boil for one hour.
Claret.—Dye with 1½ lb. Dianil claret G, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt. Work at
the boil for one hour.
oil, 40 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Scarlet.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Diamine scarlet 3 B, 1 lb. Turkey-
red oil, 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Scarlet.—Prepare the dye-bath with 3 lb. Titan scarlet C, ½ lb. Titan
orange, 50 lb. salt. Work at the boil for thirty minutes, then lift, wash and
dry. The dye-bath is not exhausted and may be used for further lots.
Crimson Red.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Titan scarlet D and 50 lb.
salt. Work at the boil for fifty minutes, then lift, wash and dry. The bath is
not exhausted, the cotton taking up only about 3 lb. of the dye-stuff; it may
therefore be kept for further use, when for each succeeding lot 3 to 3½ lb.
of colour and 25 lb. of salt only need be added.
Scarlet.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Rosophenine 5 B, dissolved in 50
gallons hot water, 2 gallons caustic soda lye (60° Tw.). When thoroughly
dissolved add 150 lb. salt. Make up the bath to 100 gallons. Enter the yarn
and work for a quarter to half an hour at about 180° F; squeeze off and
wash thoroughly in cold water until the water runs off clean.
Rose Red.—Use 1 lb. Diamine red 10 B, 3 lb. soda, and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt.
Deep Crimson.—Use 3 lb. Diamine red 10 B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Claret.—Use 3 lb. Diamine Bordeaux B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt.
Pink.—The dye-bath is made with 5 oz. Dianil red 4 B, 5 lb. salt and 3 lb.
soda.
Scarlet.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Dianil red 4 B, 15 lb. salt and 5 lb. soda.
Work at the boil for one hour.
Claret.—Dye with 1½ lb. Dianil claret G, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt. Work at
the boil for one hour.
Page 85
Maroon.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil claret B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt. Work at
the boil for one hour.
Bright Scarlet.—Use in the dye-bath 2½ lb. Dianil red 4 B 5 oz. Dianil
orange G, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb. salt.
Dark Maroon.—Make the dye-bath with 1 lb. Dianil red 4 B, 2 lb. Dianil
claret G, 13 oz. Dianil claret B, 5 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt.
Crimson.—Dye with 3 lb. Congo rubine, 5 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt.
Dark Maroon.—Use in the dye-bath 1 lb. Benzo purpurine 4 B, 3 lb. Congo
Corinth G, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil to shade.
Pale Fawn Red.—Use in the dye-bath 1½ oz. Diamine red 5 B, 1½ oz.
Diamine catechine G, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Rose Red.—Prepare the dye-bath with ¾ lb. Diamine Bordeaux B, 3 oz.
Diamine orange B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt.
Crimson.—Use in the dye-bath ¾ lb. Diamine Bordeaux B, 3 oz. Diamine
fast yellow B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Salmon.—Dye with 1½ oz. Diamine fast red F, 1½ oz. Diamine fast yellow
B, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Terra-Gotta Red.—Dye with 1½ lb. Diamine brown M, ¾ lb. Diamine fast
red F, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Lilac Red.—Dye with 4 lb. Heliotrope B B, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb. Glauber's
salt.
Bright Pink.—Use in the dye-bath 2 oz. Rose azurine G, 1 lb. soda and 10
lb. Glauber's salt. Nearly all the direct reds give good pink tints when used
in proportion, varying from 0.1 to 0.25 per cent. of dye-stuff.
Bright Straw.—Dye in a bath made of ¼ lb. Titan yellow G G, 10 lb. salt,
for three-quarters of an hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Yellow.—Prepare a dye-bath with 1 lb. Titan yellow Y, 10 lb. salt. Heat to
180° F., enter the goods, raise to boil, and dye for one hour; lift, wash and
the boil for one hour.
Bright Scarlet.—Use in the dye-bath 2½ lb. Dianil red 4 B 5 oz. Dianil
orange G, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb. salt.
Dark Maroon.—Make the dye-bath with 1 lb. Dianil red 4 B, 2 lb. Dianil
claret G, 13 oz. Dianil claret B, 5 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt.
Crimson.—Dye with 3 lb. Congo rubine, 5 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt.
Dark Maroon.—Use in the dye-bath 1 lb. Benzo purpurine 4 B, 3 lb. Congo
Corinth G, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil to shade.
Pale Fawn Red.—Use in the dye-bath 1½ oz. Diamine red 5 B, 1½ oz.
Diamine catechine G, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Rose Red.—Prepare the dye-bath with ¾ lb. Diamine Bordeaux B, 3 oz.
Diamine orange B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt.
Crimson.—Use in the dye-bath ¾ lb. Diamine Bordeaux B, 3 oz. Diamine
fast yellow B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Salmon.—Dye with 1½ oz. Diamine fast red F, 1½ oz. Diamine fast yellow
B, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Terra-Gotta Red.—Dye with 1½ lb. Diamine brown M, ¾ lb. Diamine fast
red F, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Lilac Red.—Dye with 4 lb. Heliotrope B B, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb. Glauber's
salt.
Bright Pink.—Use in the dye-bath 2 oz. Rose azurine G, 1 lb. soda and 10
lb. Glauber's salt. Nearly all the direct reds give good pink tints when used
in proportion, varying from 0.1 to 0.25 per cent. of dye-stuff.
Bright Straw.—Dye in a bath made of ¼ lb. Titan yellow G G, 10 lb. salt,
for three-quarters of an hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Yellow.—Prepare a dye-bath with 1 lb. Titan yellow Y, 10 lb. salt. Heat to
180° F., enter the goods, raise to boil, and dye for one hour; lift, wash and
Page 86
dry.
Yellow.—Prepare the dye-bath with ¼ lb. Diamine fast yellow A, 1 lb.
Turkey red oil, 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Sun Yellow.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Sun yellow, 30 lb. common
salt. Dye at the boil. The bath is kept for further lots.
Yellow.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Direct yellow R, 20 lb. Glauber's
salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Yellow.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Curcuphenine, 20 lb. common salt.
Work at the boil for one hour; lift, rinse and dry.
Old Gold.—Make the dye-bath with 5 lb. Diamine yellow N powder, 20 lb.
phosphate of soda, 10 lb. soap. Work at the boil for one hour; finish in the
usual way. The bath may be kept for other lots of goods.
Dark Yellow.—The bath is made from 2 lb. Toluylene orange G, 10 lb.
phosphate of soda, and 2½ lb. soap, working at the boil to shade.
Bright Yellow.—Use 1 lb. Chrysophenine, 2 lb. phosphate of soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Lemon Yellow.—Use 1 oz. Chrysamine G, 2 lb. phosphate of soda and 10
lb. Glauber's salt.
Yellow.—Dye with 2 lb. Oxyphenine and 20 lb. salt.
Yellow Olive.—Use in the dye-bath 2 oz. Cotton brown N, 4½ oz. Diamine
bronze G, 4½ oz. Diamine fast yellow B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt.
Green Yellow.—Dye with ½ lb. Diamine fast yellow B. 2 oz. Diamine
bronze G, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Gold Yellow.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Columbia yellow, 3 lb. soda and 20
lb. Glauber's salt.
Cream.—Dye with ½ oz. Toluylene orange G, 24 grains Brilliant orange G,
1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Primrose.—Dye with 3 oz. Dianil yellow 3 G, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. salt.
Yellow.—Prepare the dye-bath with ¼ lb. Diamine fast yellow A, 1 lb.
Turkey red oil, 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Sun Yellow.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Sun yellow, 30 lb. common
salt. Dye at the boil. The bath is kept for further lots.
Yellow.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Direct yellow R, 20 lb. Glauber's
salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Yellow.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Curcuphenine, 20 lb. common salt.
Work at the boil for one hour; lift, rinse and dry.
Old Gold.—Make the dye-bath with 5 lb. Diamine yellow N powder, 20 lb.
phosphate of soda, 10 lb. soap. Work at the boil for one hour; finish in the
usual way. The bath may be kept for other lots of goods.
Dark Yellow.—The bath is made from 2 lb. Toluylene orange G, 10 lb.
phosphate of soda, and 2½ lb. soap, working at the boil to shade.
Bright Yellow.—Use 1 lb. Chrysophenine, 2 lb. phosphate of soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Lemon Yellow.—Use 1 oz. Chrysamine G, 2 lb. phosphate of soda and 10
lb. Glauber's salt.
Yellow.—Dye with 2 lb. Oxyphenine and 20 lb. salt.
Yellow Olive.—Use in the dye-bath 2 oz. Cotton brown N, 4½ oz. Diamine
bronze G, 4½ oz. Diamine fast yellow B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt.
Green Yellow.—Dye with ½ lb. Diamine fast yellow B. 2 oz. Diamine
bronze G, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Gold Yellow.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Columbia yellow, 3 lb. soda and 20
lb. Glauber's salt.
Cream.—Dye with ½ oz. Toluylene orange G, 24 grains Brilliant orange G,
1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Primrose.—Dye with 3 oz. Dianil yellow 3 G, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. salt.
Page 87
Gold Yellow.—Dye with 2½ lb. Dianil yellow G, ½ lb. soda and 15 lb. salt.
Buff Yellow.—Dye with 3½ oz. Dianil yellow 2 R, ½ lb. soda and 10 lb. salt.
Orange.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Chlorophenine orange R, 20 lb.
common salt. Work at the boil for one hour; lift, rinse and dry.
Red Orange.—Make the dye-bath with 3 lb. Mikado orange 4 R and 25 lb.
salt. Work at the boil for one hour.
Orange.—Make the dye-bath with 3 lb. Mikado orange G and 25 lb. salt.
Work at the boil for one hour.
Pale Orange.—The dye-bath contains 6 oz. Diamine Orange G, 1½ oz.
Diamine fast yellow B, ¼ oz. Diamine scarlet B, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Olive Yellow.—Dye with ¾ lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 1 oz. Oxydiamine
black N, 1½ oz. Diamine bronze G, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Dark Orange.—Dye with 3 lb. Columbia orange R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Bright Orange.—Use 3 lb. Congo orange R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt at the boil for one hour.
Pale Orange.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil orange 2 R, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. salt
at the boil for one hour.
Brilliant Orange.—Dye with 4 lb. Dianil orange G and 20 lb. salt for one
hour.
Deep Orange.—Dye with 2 lb. Oxydiamine orange R, ¾ lb. soda and 20 lb.
salt for an hour.
Pale Orange.—Dye with ¾ lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 1 lb. Diamine
orange B, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Bright Orange.—Dye with 1½ lb. Benzo orange R, 1½ lb. Chrysamine R,
10 lb. phosphate of soda and 2 lb. soap.
Buff Yellow.—Dye with 3½ oz. Dianil yellow 2 R, ½ lb. soda and 10 lb. salt.
Orange.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Chlorophenine orange R, 20 lb.
common salt. Work at the boil for one hour; lift, rinse and dry.
Red Orange.—Make the dye-bath with 3 lb. Mikado orange 4 R and 25 lb.
salt. Work at the boil for one hour.
Orange.—Make the dye-bath with 3 lb. Mikado orange G and 25 lb. salt.
Work at the boil for one hour.
Pale Orange.—The dye-bath contains 6 oz. Diamine Orange G, 1½ oz.
Diamine fast yellow B, ¼ oz. Diamine scarlet B, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Olive Yellow.—Dye with ¾ lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 1 oz. Oxydiamine
black N, 1½ oz. Diamine bronze G, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Dark Orange.—Dye with 3 lb. Columbia orange R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Bright Orange.—Use 3 lb. Congo orange R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt at the boil for one hour.
Pale Orange.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil orange 2 R, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. salt
at the boil for one hour.
Brilliant Orange.—Dye with 4 lb. Dianil orange G and 20 lb. salt for one
hour.
Deep Orange.—Dye with 2 lb. Oxydiamine orange R, ¾ lb. soda and 20 lb.
salt for an hour.
Pale Orange.—Dye with ¾ lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 1 lb. Diamine
orange B, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Bright Orange.—Dye with 1½ lb. Benzo orange R, 1½ lb. Chrysamine R,
10 lb. phosphate of soda and 2 lb. soap.
Page 88
Green.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Benzo green G, 10 lb. Glauber's
salt. Enter lukewarm, bring slowly to the boil, dye for one hour at the boil.
Russian Green.—Make the dye-bath with 16 oz. Diamine black H W, 4 oz.
Diamine fast yellow A, 3 lb. soda, 15 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil
for one hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Dark Olive.—Prepare a dye-bath with 3½ lb. Benzo olive, 2½ lb. Diamine
black B O, 2 lb. Diamine yellow, 20 lb. common salt, 2 lb. soap. The goods
are entered into the bath at 160° F., then heat is raised to the boil, and the
dyeing continued for one hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Dark Olive.—Dye in a bath of 2 lb. Titan yellow Y, 1 lb. Diamine brown Y,
1½ lb. Diamine blue 3 B, 2 lb. soda. Work for one hour, then lift, wash and
dry.
Olive.—Prepare a dye-bath with 15 lb. phosphate of soda, 3 lb. soap, 1½ lb.
Diamine yellow N, 4 oz. Diamine blue 3 B, 1½ oz. Diamine brown V. Dye
at the boil to shade; lift, wash and dry.
Green Olive.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Diamine black R O, 1 lb.
Chrysamine, ¼ lb. Benzo brown, 5 lb. soda, 5 lb. salt, 2 lb. soap. The goods
are entered at about 180° F. and worked for a short time, then the
temperature is raised to the boil, and the goods are worked for one hour,
lifted, washed and dried.
Reseda.—Prepare a bath with 10 lb. Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soap, ½ lb.
Diamine black R O, 2 lb. Diamine yellow N. Enter at 120° F., heat to boil
and dye for one hour at that temperature; lift, wash and dry.
Sage Green.—Prepare a dye-bath with 10 lb. Glauber's salt, ½ lb. Diamine
black R O, 2 lb. Diamine yellow N. Enter at about 150° F. and then raise to
boil and dye boiling for one hour, wash and dry.
Drab.—Prepare the dye-bath with 10 lb. Cross dye drab, 5 lb. soda crystals.
Enter at the boil and work at this temperature for half an hour. Whilst
dyeing add gradually 75 lb. salt. Rinse well and dry.
Olive.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Dianil olive, 5 lb. phosphate of
soda, 5 lb. common salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
salt. Enter lukewarm, bring slowly to the boil, dye for one hour at the boil.
Russian Green.—Make the dye-bath with 16 oz. Diamine black H W, 4 oz.
Diamine fast yellow A, 3 lb. soda, 15 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil
for one hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Dark Olive.—Prepare a dye-bath with 3½ lb. Benzo olive, 2½ lb. Diamine
black B O, 2 lb. Diamine yellow, 20 lb. common salt, 2 lb. soap. The goods
are entered into the bath at 160° F., then heat is raised to the boil, and the
dyeing continued for one hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Dark Olive.—Dye in a bath of 2 lb. Titan yellow Y, 1 lb. Diamine brown Y,
1½ lb. Diamine blue 3 B, 2 lb. soda. Work for one hour, then lift, wash and
dry.
Olive.—Prepare a dye-bath with 15 lb. phosphate of soda, 3 lb. soap, 1½ lb.
Diamine yellow N, 4 oz. Diamine blue 3 B, 1½ oz. Diamine brown V. Dye
at the boil to shade; lift, wash and dry.
Green Olive.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Diamine black R O, 1 lb.
Chrysamine, ¼ lb. Benzo brown, 5 lb. soda, 5 lb. salt, 2 lb. soap. The goods
are entered at about 180° F. and worked for a short time, then the
temperature is raised to the boil, and the goods are worked for one hour,
lifted, washed and dried.
Reseda.—Prepare a bath with 10 lb. Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soap, ½ lb.
Diamine black R O, 2 lb. Diamine yellow N. Enter at 120° F., heat to boil
and dye for one hour at that temperature; lift, wash and dry.
Sage Green.—Prepare a dye-bath with 10 lb. Glauber's salt, ½ lb. Diamine
black R O, 2 lb. Diamine yellow N. Enter at about 150° F. and then raise to
boil and dye boiling for one hour, wash and dry.
Drab.—Prepare the dye-bath with 10 lb. Cross dye drab, 5 lb. soda crystals.
Enter at the boil and work at this temperature for half an hour. Whilst
dyeing add gradually 75 lb. salt. Rinse well and dry.
Olive.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Dianil olive, 5 lb. phosphate of
soda, 5 lb. common salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Page 89
Olive.—The dyeing is done in a bath containing 4 oz. Diamine black H W,
1¾ lb. Diamine bronze G, 5 lb. soda, 15 lb. Glauber's salt. Work at the boil
for one hour.
Grass Green.—Make the dye-bath with 2 lb. Chrysamine G, 1½ oz. Benzo
azurine G, 3 lb. soap and 10 lb. borax, working at the boil for one hour.
Green.—Make the dye-bath with 2 lb. Titan yellow Y, 1 lb. Titan blue 3 B
and 20 lb. salt.
Bright Grass Green.—Dye for an hour at the boil with 1 lb. Sulphon
azurine D, 2 lb. Thiazole yellow and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Green.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine green B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, working at the boil to shade.
Dark Green.—Dye with 3 lb. Diamine dark green N, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Green.—Use in the bath 3 lb. Benzo green B B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Dark Sea Green.—Dye with 5 oz. Diamine black H W, 3 oz. Diamine
catechine G, 3 oz. Diamine fast yellow B, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's
salt.
Pale Green.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 2 oz.
Diamine black H W, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Bright Pea Green.—Use in the dye-bath 1 oz. Thioflavine S, ¼ oz. Diamine
sky blue F F and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Dark Green.—Use 1¾ lb. Diamine green G, ¾ lb. Oxydiamine yellow G G,
3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Deep Green.—Use 1¾ lb. Diamine green G, ¾ lb. Diamine black B H, ½
lb. Oxydiamine yellow G G, 3 lb. soda, and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Sea Green.—Use 2 oz. Dianil yellow R, 2½ oz. Dianil blue B, 1¾ oz.
Dianil dark blue R, 1 lb. soda, and 20 lb. salt, working at the boil.
1¾ lb. Diamine bronze G, 5 lb. soda, 15 lb. Glauber's salt. Work at the boil
for one hour.
Grass Green.—Make the dye-bath with 2 lb. Chrysamine G, 1½ oz. Benzo
azurine G, 3 lb. soap and 10 lb. borax, working at the boil for one hour.
Green.—Make the dye-bath with 2 lb. Titan yellow Y, 1 lb. Titan blue 3 B
and 20 lb. salt.
Bright Grass Green.—Dye for an hour at the boil with 1 lb. Sulphon
azurine D, 2 lb. Thiazole yellow and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Green.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine green B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, working at the boil to shade.
Dark Green.—Dye with 3 lb. Diamine dark green N, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Green.—Use in the bath 3 lb. Benzo green B B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Dark Sea Green.—Dye with 5 oz. Diamine black H W, 3 oz. Diamine
catechine G, 3 oz. Diamine fast yellow B, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's
salt.
Pale Green.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 2 oz.
Diamine black H W, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Bright Pea Green.—Use in the dye-bath 1 oz. Thioflavine S, ¼ oz. Diamine
sky blue F F and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Dark Green.—Use 1¾ lb. Diamine green G, ¾ lb. Oxydiamine yellow G G,
3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Deep Green.—Use 1¾ lb. Diamine green G, ¾ lb. Diamine black B H, ½
lb. Oxydiamine yellow G G, 3 lb. soda, and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Sea Green.—Use 2 oz. Dianil yellow R, 2½ oz. Dianil blue B, 1¾ oz.
Dianil dark blue R, 1 lb. soda, and 20 lb. salt, working at the boil.
Page 90
Leaf Green.—Dye with 1½ lb. Dianil yellow 3 G, 1 lb. Dianil blue B, 11 oz.
Dianil blue 2 R, 3 lb. soda, and 20 lb. salt at the boil for one hour.
Deep Green.—Dye with 2½ lb. Dianil yellow 3 G, 2½ lb. Dianil blue 2 R, 6
oz. Dianil dark blue R, 3 lb. soda, and 20 lb. salt at the boil for one hour.
Greens are largely produced by mixing yellows and blues together as will
be seen from the recipes given above; the particular shade of green which is
got from a combination of blue and green depends upon the quality of the
dye-stuffs used: thus, to produce bright greens of a pure tone, it is essential
that the yellow used shall have a greenish tone like Thioflavine S, Thiazole
yellow, or Dianil yellow 3 G, while the blue must also have a greenish tone
like Diamine sky blue, Benzo blue 3 B, etc. By using yellows like Diamine
fast yellow R, and dark blues like Benzo azurine 3 R, Diamine blue R W,
Dianil dark blue R, the green which is got is darker and duller in tone. The
addition of such a dye as Diamine black B H throws the shade more on to
an olive, while a brown dye-stuff, like Diamine brown M, or an orange dye,
like Titan orange N, throws the green on to a sage tone. Examples of these
effects will be found among the recipes given above.
It may be added here that by using smaller quantities, but in the same
proportions as given in the above recipes, a great range of tints and shades
of green can be dyed from very pale to very deep.
Bright Blue.—Prepare a dye-bath with ½ lb. Congo blue 2 B, 5 lb. salt, 5 lb.
phosphate of soda, 2 lb. soap. Work at the boil for one hour, then rinse and
dry.
Dark Navy.—Prepare a dye-bath with 1 lb. Diamine black R O, 2 lb.
Diamine blue 3 R, 8 lb. Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soap. Enter the cotton at 180°
F., and boil for one hour.
Pale Blue.—Prepare a dye-bath with 10 lb. salt, 3 lb. soda, 3 oz. diamine
blue 3 R. Work for one hour at the boil, then lift, wash and dry.
Sky Blue.—Prepare a dye-bath with 2 lb. Titan como G, 20 lb. common salt,
2 oz. acetic acid. Work at the boil for half an hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Bright Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1½ lb. Chicago blue 6 B, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, 3 lb. soap. Work at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash and
Dianil blue 2 R, 3 lb. soda, and 20 lb. salt at the boil for one hour.
Deep Green.—Dye with 2½ lb. Dianil yellow 3 G, 2½ lb. Dianil blue 2 R, 6
oz. Dianil dark blue R, 3 lb. soda, and 20 lb. salt at the boil for one hour.
Greens are largely produced by mixing yellows and blues together as will
be seen from the recipes given above; the particular shade of green which is
got from a combination of blue and green depends upon the quality of the
dye-stuffs used: thus, to produce bright greens of a pure tone, it is essential
that the yellow used shall have a greenish tone like Thioflavine S, Thiazole
yellow, or Dianil yellow 3 G, while the blue must also have a greenish tone
like Diamine sky blue, Benzo blue 3 B, etc. By using yellows like Diamine
fast yellow R, and dark blues like Benzo azurine 3 R, Diamine blue R W,
Dianil dark blue R, the green which is got is darker and duller in tone. The
addition of such a dye as Diamine black B H throws the shade more on to
an olive, while a brown dye-stuff, like Diamine brown M, or an orange dye,
like Titan orange N, throws the green on to a sage tone. Examples of these
effects will be found among the recipes given above.
It may be added here that by using smaller quantities, but in the same
proportions as given in the above recipes, a great range of tints and shades
of green can be dyed from very pale to very deep.
Bright Blue.—Prepare a dye-bath with ½ lb. Congo blue 2 B, 5 lb. salt, 5 lb.
phosphate of soda, 2 lb. soap. Work at the boil for one hour, then rinse and
dry.
Dark Navy.—Prepare a dye-bath with 1 lb. Diamine black R O, 2 lb.
Diamine blue 3 R, 8 lb. Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soap. Enter the cotton at 180°
F., and boil for one hour.
Pale Blue.—Prepare a dye-bath with 10 lb. salt, 3 lb. soda, 3 oz. diamine
blue 3 R. Work for one hour at the boil, then lift, wash and dry.
Sky Blue.—Prepare a dye-bath with 2 lb. Titan como G, 20 lb. common salt,
2 oz. acetic acid. Work at the boil for half an hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Bright Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1½ lb. Chicago blue 6 B, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, 3 lb. soap. Work at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash and
Page 91
dry.
Pale Sky Blue.—Make the dye-bath with 1 oz. Chicago blue 6 B, 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soap. Work at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash and
dry.
Sky Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Diamine sky blue F F, 1 lb.
Turkey-red oil, 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Dark Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2½ lb. Diamineral blue R, 2½ lb.
Diamine deep black Cr, 1 lb. Turkey-red oil, 40 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at
the boil for one hour.
Dark Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 3 lb. Triamine black B, 15 lb.
Glauber's salt, in 50 gallons of water. Enter at 150° F., and boil for one hour.
Allow the goods to remain until the water is cold, when the dye-bath will be
completely exhausted.
Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Diamine steel blue L, 2 lb. soda, 15
lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Diamine blue B G, 2 lb. soda, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour. In shade this is very similar to
that got with Diamine brilliant blue G, which however should be used for
light shades on account of its brightness. For deep shades Diamine blue B
G, is preferable, because of its greater tinctorial power.
Light Indigo Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Paramine indigo blue, 2
lb. soda, 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Enter at about 150° F., and dye at the boil for
one hour.
Navy Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Paramine navy blue R, 2 lb.
soda, 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Enter at about 150° F., and dye at the boil for one
hour.
Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Paramine navy blue R, 2 lb. soda, 20
lb. Glauber's salt. Enter at about 150° F., and dye at the boil for one hour.
Navy Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Benzo chrome black blue B,
15 lb. Glauber's salt, 3 lb. soda. Work at the boil for one hour; lift, rinse and
dry.
Pale Sky Blue.—Make the dye-bath with 1 oz. Chicago blue 6 B, 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soap. Work at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash and
dry.
Sky Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Diamine sky blue F F, 1 lb.
Turkey-red oil, 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Dark Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2½ lb. Diamineral blue R, 2½ lb.
Diamine deep black Cr, 1 lb. Turkey-red oil, 40 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at
the boil for one hour.
Dark Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 3 lb. Triamine black B, 15 lb.
Glauber's salt, in 50 gallons of water. Enter at 150° F., and boil for one hour.
Allow the goods to remain until the water is cold, when the dye-bath will be
completely exhausted.
Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Diamine steel blue L, 2 lb. soda, 15
lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Diamine blue B G, 2 lb. soda, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour. In shade this is very similar to
that got with Diamine brilliant blue G, which however should be used for
light shades on account of its brightness. For deep shades Diamine blue B
G, is preferable, because of its greater tinctorial power.
Light Indigo Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Paramine indigo blue, 2
lb. soda, 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Enter at about 150° F., and dye at the boil for
one hour.
Navy Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Paramine navy blue R, 2 lb.
soda, 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Enter at about 150° F., and dye at the boil for one
hour.
Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Paramine navy blue R, 2 lb. soda, 20
lb. Glauber's salt. Enter at about 150° F., and dye at the boil for one hour.
Navy Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Benzo chrome black blue B,
15 lb. Glauber's salt, 3 lb. soda. Work at the boil for one hour; lift, rinse and
dry.
Page 92
Grey Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Paramine blue black S, 2 lb.
soda, 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Enter at 150° F., and dye for one hour at boil.
Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Paramine blue B, 2 lb. soda, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt. Enter at about 150° F., and dye at the boil for one hour.
Slate Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with ¼ lb. Diamine black B H, ¾ oz.
Diamine fast yellow B, 2 lb. soda, and 10 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil
to shade.
Deep Blue.—Use 3¼ lb. Diamine blue B X, ½ lb. Oxydiamine black N, 3
lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Blue.—Dye at the boil for one hour with 1½ lb. Diamine sky blue, 2 oz.
Diamine green B, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Navy.—Dye with 1 lb. Dianil dark blue R, 8 oz. Dianil black C R, 5 lb. soda
and 20 lb. salt at the boil for one hour.
Dark Navy.—Use 2 lb. Dianil blue B, 2 lb. Dianil dark blue R, ¾ lb. Dianil
black C R, 2 lb. soda and 25 lb. salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Deep Blue.—Dye with 3½ lb. Diamine blue black E, 5 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Deep Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Zambesi black B R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Dark Navy.—Use 3 lb. Dianil dark blue R, 3 lb. caustic soda 70° Tw., and
25 lb. salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Violet Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil dark blue 3 R and 25 lb. salt at the boil
for one hour.
Bright Blue.—Use 1 lb. Dianil blue B, and 20 lb. salt, working at the boil
for one hour.
Full Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Brilliant azurine 5 G, 5 lb. common salt, 5 lb.
phosphate of soda and 2 lb. soap at the boil for one hour.
Dark Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Erie blue B X, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt at the boil for one hour.
soda, 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Enter at 150° F., and dye for one hour at boil.
Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Paramine blue B, 2 lb. soda, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt. Enter at about 150° F., and dye at the boil for one hour.
Slate Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with ¼ lb. Diamine black B H, ¾ oz.
Diamine fast yellow B, 2 lb. soda, and 10 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil
to shade.
Deep Blue.—Use 3¼ lb. Diamine blue B X, ½ lb. Oxydiamine black N, 3
lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Blue.—Dye at the boil for one hour with 1½ lb. Diamine sky blue, 2 oz.
Diamine green B, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Navy.—Dye with 1 lb. Dianil dark blue R, 8 oz. Dianil black C R, 5 lb. soda
and 20 lb. salt at the boil for one hour.
Dark Navy.—Use 2 lb. Dianil blue B, 2 lb. Dianil dark blue R, ¾ lb. Dianil
black C R, 2 lb. soda and 25 lb. salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Deep Blue.—Dye with 3½ lb. Diamine blue black E, 5 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Deep Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Zambesi black B R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Dark Navy.—Use 3 lb. Dianil dark blue R, 3 lb. caustic soda 70° Tw., and
25 lb. salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Violet Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil dark blue 3 R and 25 lb. salt at the boil
for one hour.
Bright Blue.—Use 1 lb. Dianil blue B, and 20 lb. salt, working at the boil
for one hour.
Full Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Brilliant azurine 5 G, 5 lb. common salt, 5 lb.
phosphate of soda and 2 lb. soap at the boil for one hour.
Dark Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Erie blue B X, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt at the boil for one hour.
Page 93
Pale Blue.—Dye with 1 lb. Chicago blue 6 B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt at
the boil for one hour.
Deep Blue.—Dye with 1½ lb. Oxydiamine black A, 2 lb. Diamine deep blue
R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Blue.—Dye with 6 oz. Diamine blue 3 B, 1½ oz. Diamine sky blue F F, 3
lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Navy.—Dye with 4 lb. Diamine new blue R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt at the boil for one hour.
Dark Navy.—Dye with 1¾ lb. Diamineral blue R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Sky Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 6 oz. Diamine sky blue F F, 3 lb. soda
and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Dark Blue.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine blue R W, 2 lb. soda and 20
lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Dark Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 3 lb. Triamine black B T, and 15 lb.
Glauber's salt; work at the boil to shade.
Blue.—Use 2 lb. Direct indigo blue and 15 lb. Glauber's salt; work at the
boil.
Bright Blue.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Titan como S N, 2 lb. acetic acid
and 20 lb. salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Turquoise Blue.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine sky blue, 1 oz. Diamine fast
yellow B, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil to shade.
Dark Navy.—Use 4 lb. Titan navy R, and 20 lb. salt at the boil for one hour.
Green Blue.—Dye with 1 lb. Dianil blue G, 2½ oz. Dianil yellow G, 1 lb.
soda and 20 lb. salt at the boil for one hour.
Many more formulæ could have been given, but the above will perhaps
suffice; they include all the best of the direct blues. Paler tints of blue may
be got by using from 1 to 2 per cent. of any of these blues and also of the
the boil for one hour.
Deep Blue.—Dye with 1½ lb. Oxydiamine black A, 2 lb. Diamine deep blue
R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Blue.—Dye with 6 oz. Diamine blue 3 B, 1½ oz. Diamine sky blue F F, 3
lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Navy.—Dye with 4 lb. Diamine new blue R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt at the boil for one hour.
Dark Navy.—Dye with 1¾ lb. Diamineral blue R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Sky Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 6 oz. Diamine sky blue F F, 3 lb. soda
and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Dark Blue.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine blue R W, 2 lb. soda and 20
lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Dark Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 3 lb. Triamine black B T, and 15 lb.
Glauber's salt; work at the boil to shade.
Blue.—Use 2 lb. Direct indigo blue and 15 lb. Glauber's salt; work at the
boil.
Bright Blue.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Titan como S N, 2 lb. acetic acid
and 20 lb. salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Turquoise Blue.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine sky blue, 1 oz. Diamine fast
yellow B, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil to shade.
Dark Navy.—Use 4 lb. Titan navy R, and 20 lb. salt at the boil for one hour.
Green Blue.—Dye with 1 lb. Dianil blue G, 2½ oz. Dianil yellow G, 1 lb.
soda and 20 lb. salt at the boil for one hour.
Many more formulæ could have been given, but the above will perhaps
suffice; they include all the best of the direct blues. Paler tints of blue may
be got by using from 1 to 2 per cent. of any of these blues and also of the
Page 94
many direct blacks now on the market. The direct blues as a rule have a
good degree of fastness to light.
Lilac.—Prepare a dye-bath with ¼ lb. Hessian brown 2 M, 1 oz. Azo mauve
A M, 1 lb. soap, 2 lb. soda, 10 lb. salt. Work at the boil for one hour, then
lift, wash and dry.
Plum.—Dye with 3 lb. Oxydiamine violet G, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt.
Dark Plum.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Oxydiamine violet B, 3 lb. soda and
20 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil.
Violet.—Make the dye-bath with ¾ lb. Oxydiamine violet B, 1 lb. soda and
10 lb. Glauber's salt, and dye at the boil to shade.
Violet.—Dye with 12 oz. Dianil blue 4 R, 2 oz. Dianil blue B and 10 lb. salt
at the boil.
Lilac.—Dye with 1½ oz. Diamine rose G D, ¾ oz. Diamine sky blue F F, 1
lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil to shade.
Red Violet.—Make the dye-bath with ½ lb. Diamine violet N, ½ oz.
Diamine brilliant blue G, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the
boil.
Red Violet.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine violet N, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Bright Red Lilac.—Dye with 1¾ lb. Erika B N, 4 oz. Chicago blue 4 R, 3
lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil.
Grey Lilac.—Dye with 12 oz. Neutral grey G, 3 oz. erika B N, 1 lb. soda
and 10 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Pale Lilac.—Dye with 2½ oz. Dianil claret B, 2½ oz. Dianil blue 4 R, and
10 lb. salt.
Light Plum.—Dye with 10 oz. Dianil claret B, 10 oz. Dianil blue and 20 lb.
salt.
Dull Lilac.—Dye with ½ lb. Diamine brown V, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt.
good degree of fastness to light.
Lilac.—Prepare a dye-bath with ¼ lb. Hessian brown 2 M, 1 oz. Azo mauve
A M, 1 lb. soap, 2 lb. soda, 10 lb. salt. Work at the boil for one hour, then
lift, wash and dry.
Plum.—Dye with 3 lb. Oxydiamine violet G, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt.
Dark Plum.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Oxydiamine violet B, 3 lb. soda and
20 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil.
Violet.—Make the dye-bath with ¾ lb. Oxydiamine violet B, 1 lb. soda and
10 lb. Glauber's salt, and dye at the boil to shade.
Violet.—Dye with 12 oz. Dianil blue 4 R, 2 oz. Dianil blue B and 10 lb. salt
at the boil.
Lilac.—Dye with 1½ oz. Diamine rose G D, ¾ oz. Diamine sky blue F F, 1
lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil to shade.
Red Violet.—Make the dye-bath with ½ lb. Diamine violet N, ½ oz.
Diamine brilliant blue G, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the
boil.
Red Violet.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine violet N, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Bright Red Lilac.—Dye with 1¾ lb. Erika B N, 4 oz. Chicago blue 4 R, 3
lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil.
Grey Lilac.—Dye with 12 oz. Neutral grey G, 3 oz. erika B N, 1 lb. soda
and 10 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Pale Lilac.—Dye with 2½ oz. Dianil claret B, 2½ oz. Dianil blue 4 R, and
10 lb. salt.
Light Plum.—Dye with 10 oz. Dianil claret B, 10 oz. Dianil blue and 20 lb.
salt.
Dull Lilac.—Dye with ½ lb. Diamine brown V, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Page 95
Heliotrope.—Dye with 4 oz. Heliotrope 2 B, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's
salt.
Plum.—Dye with 3 lb. Congo Corinth B, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's
salt.
Dull Violet.—Use in the dye-bath 1½ lb. Chicago blue 4 R, 14 oz. Erika B
N, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Red Lilac.—Dye with 6 oz. Oxydiamine violet G, 2 oz. Oxydiamine violet
B, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Violet.—Dye with 3 oz. Diamine violet N, 2 oz. diamine blue 3 R, 1 lb.
soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Fawn Drab.—Prepare a dye-bath with 1 lb. Cachou de laval, ¼ oz. Benzo
purpurine B. Enter the cotton into this bath in the cold and heat to the boil,
taking about one hour for the operation, then add 4 lb. common salt and boil
for three-quarters of an hour longer; lift, wash and dry.
Pale Olive Brown.—The dye-bath is made with 1 lb. Diamine bronze G, 1
oz. Cotton brown N, 3 oz. Diamine gold, 5 lb. soda, 15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Work at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Red Brown.—Prepare a dye-bath with 1¾ lb. Cotton yellow, 4 lb. Hessian
brown 2 B N, 2 lb. Diamine black R O, 1 lb. soda, 2 lb. salt. Enter the goods
at 180° F., then raise to the boil and work to the shade; lift, wash and dry.
Brown Drab.—Prepare a dye-bath with ¼ lb. Cotton brown N, ¾ oz.
Diamine yellow N, ¾ oz. Diamine black B O, 15 lb. phosphate of soda, 3
lb. soap. Work at the boil for one hour.
Gold Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 16¼ oz. Toluylene orange G, 9½
oz. Toluylene orange R, 4¾ oz. azo mauve, 2½ lb. soap, 5 lb. soda. Dye at
the boil for one hour.
Chestnut Brown.—Prepare a dye-bath with 10 lb. common salt, 2 lb. Benzo
brown G, ½ lb. Benzo azurine G, ½ lb. Chrysophenine. Enter the goods at
150° F., raise to the boil and dye boiling for one hour.
salt.
Plum.—Dye with 3 lb. Congo Corinth B, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's
salt.
Dull Violet.—Use in the dye-bath 1½ lb. Chicago blue 4 R, 14 oz. Erika B
N, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Red Lilac.—Dye with 6 oz. Oxydiamine violet G, 2 oz. Oxydiamine violet
B, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Violet.—Dye with 3 oz. Diamine violet N, 2 oz. diamine blue 3 R, 1 lb.
soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Fawn Drab.—Prepare a dye-bath with 1 lb. Cachou de laval, ¼ oz. Benzo
purpurine B. Enter the cotton into this bath in the cold and heat to the boil,
taking about one hour for the operation, then add 4 lb. common salt and boil
for three-quarters of an hour longer; lift, wash and dry.
Pale Olive Brown.—The dye-bath is made with 1 lb. Diamine bronze G, 1
oz. Cotton brown N, 3 oz. Diamine gold, 5 lb. soda, 15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Work at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Red Brown.—Prepare a dye-bath with 1¾ lb. Cotton yellow, 4 lb. Hessian
brown 2 B N, 2 lb. Diamine black R O, 1 lb. soda, 2 lb. salt. Enter the goods
at 180° F., then raise to the boil and work to the shade; lift, wash and dry.
Brown Drab.—Prepare a dye-bath with ¼ lb. Cotton brown N, ¾ oz.
Diamine yellow N, ¾ oz. Diamine black B O, 15 lb. phosphate of soda, 3
lb. soap. Work at the boil for one hour.
Gold Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 16¼ oz. Toluylene orange G, 9½
oz. Toluylene orange R, 4¾ oz. azo mauve, 2½ lb. soap, 5 lb. soda. Dye at
the boil for one hour.
Chestnut Brown.—Prepare a dye-bath with 10 lb. common salt, 2 lb. Benzo
brown G, ½ lb. Benzo azurine G, ½ lb. Chrysophenine. Enter the goods at
150° F., raise to the boil and dye boiling for one hour.
Page 96
Purple Brown.—Prepare a dye-bath with 10 lb. common salt, 2 lb. Benzo
brown N B, 1 lb. Azo violet. Enter the cotton at 150° F., raise to the boil and
dye boiling for an hour; lift, wash and dry.
Brown.—Prepare a dye-bath with 5 lb. soda, 10 lb. Glauber's salt, 12 oz.
Chrysamine, 1 oz. Benzo purpurine, 6¼ oz. Benzo azurine. Dye at the boil
for one hour, rinse and dry. The brown thus got is fast to washing.
Dark Chestnut Brown.—Prepare a dye-bath with 10 lb. salt, 3 lb. Benzo
brown N B X, raise to 150° F., enter goods, heat to boil, and work for one
hour; lift, rinse and dry.
Dark Brown.—Prepare a dye-bath with 20 oz. Glauber's salt per gallon of
water used, 2½ lb. soap, 1½ lb. Diamine black R O, 2 lb. Cotton brown N.
Enter the yarn at 180° F., give three turns, raise temperature to boil, and
work to shade; lift, rinse and wash.
Gold Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Titan gold, 50 lb. salt. Work
at the boil for thirty minutes, then lift, wash and dry. The dye-bath is not
exhausted, only about 3 lb. of the colour being taken up by the cotton. It
may, therefore, be kept for further lots, adding 3 lb. more colour and about
20 lb. more salt for each batch of cotton, or if it is not desired to keep the
bath, add less colour to start with, and towards the end of the operation add
more salt.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Paramine brown G, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Light Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 3 lb. Diamine catechine G, 3 lb.
soda, 15 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Dark Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Diamine catechine B, 3 lb.
soda, 15 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Dark Drab.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Titan brown Y, 3 oz.
Columbia green, 32¾ oz. Diamine bronze, 17 lb. Glauber's salt. Work at the
boil for one hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Pale Brown.—The dye-bath is made with 2 lb. Mikado orange 4 R, 3 oz.
Benzo fast grey, 30 lb. Glauber's salt. Work at the boil for one hour, then
brown N B, 1 lb. Azo violet. Enter the cotton at 150° F., raise to the boil and
dye boiling for an hour; lift, wash and dry.
Brown.—Prepare a dye-bath with 5 lb. soda, 10 lb. Glauber's salt, 12 oz.
Chrysamine, 1 oz. Benzo purpurine, 6¼ oz. Benzo azurine. Dye at the boil
for one hour, rinse and dry. The brown thus got is fast to washing.
Dark Chestnut Brown.—Prepare a dye-bath with 10 lb. salt, 3 lb. Benzo
brown N B X, raise to 150° F., enter goods, heat to boil, and work for one
hour; lift, rinse and dry.
Dark Brown.—Prepare a dye-bath with 20 oz. Glauber's salt per gallon of
water used, 2½ lb. soap, 1½ lb. Diamine black R O, 2 lb. Cotton brown N.
Enter the yarn at 180° F., give three turns, raise temperature to boil, and
work to shade; lift, rinse and wash.
Gold Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Titan gold, 50 lb. salt. Work
at the boil for thirty minutes, then lift, wash and dry. The dye-bath is not
exhausted, only about 3 lb. of the colour being taken up by the cotton. It
may, therefore, be kept for further lots, adding 3 lb. more colour and about
20 lb. more salt for each batch of cotton, or if it is not desired to keep the
bath, add less colour to start with, and towards the end of the operation add
more salt.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Paramine brown G, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Light Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 3 lb. Diamine catechine G, 3 lb.
soda, 15 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Dark Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Diamine catechine B, 3 lb.
soda, 15 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Dark Drab.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Titan brown Y, 3 oz.
Columbia green, 32¾ oz. Diamine bronze, 17 lb. Glauber's salt. Work at the
boil for one hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Pale Brown.—The dye-bath is made with 2 lb. Mikado orange 4 R, 3 oz.
Benzo fast grey, 30 lb. Glauber's salt. Work at the boil for one hour, then
Page 97
lift, ash and dry.
Gold Brown.—Make a dye-bath with 1 lb. Titan gold, 50 lb. common salt.
Enter at the boil, work for an hour, then lift, wash and dry. Keep the bath for
another lot of goods; it will only require the addition of about 14 oz. of
colour and 10 lb. salt.
Buff Brown.—Make the dye-bath with ¾ lb. Titan gold, ¼ lb. Titan brown
R, 5 oz. Titan blue 3 B, 40 lb. common salt. Work at the boil to shade, then
lift, wash and dry.
Deep Chestnut Brown.—Make the dye-bath with 3 lb. Titan brown R, 1½
lb. Titan blue R, 25 lb. common salt. Work at the boil for an hour, then lift,
wash and dry.
Light Seal Brown.—Make the dye-bath with 10 lb. salt, 2 lb. soda, 14 oz.
Oxyphenine, ¾ lb. Atlas red R, 6 oz. Diamine blue B X. Work at the boil to
shade, then lift, wash and dry.
Orange Brown.—Make a dye-bath with 10 lb. salt, 2 lb soda, 14 oz.
Oxyphenine, 1 lb. Atlas red R, 1 oz. Diamine blue B X. Work at the boil to
shade, then lift, wash and dry.
Pale Nut Brown.—Use in the dye-bath 4½ oz. Diamine catechine G, 1 oz.
Diamine brown M, 1 oz. Diamine catechine B, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Walnut Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine brown M, 3 oz. Diamine orange
G, 2 oz. Diamine black H W, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil
for one hour.
Black Brown.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine brown M, ¾ lb. Diamine
blue black R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil.
Reddish Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Dianil brown R, 5 lb. salt and 5 lb.
phosphate of soda at the boil for one hour.
Chocolate Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Dianil brown T, 5 lb. phosphate of soda
and 5 lb. salt at the boil for one hour.
Gold Brown.—Make a dye-bath with 1 lb. Titan gold, 50 lb. common salt.
Enter at the boil, work for an hour, then lift, wash and dry. Keep the bath for
another lot of goods; it will only require the addition of about 14 oz. of
colour and 10 lb. salt.
Buff Brown.—Make the dye-bath with ¾ lb. Titan gold, ¼ lb. Titan brown
R, 5 oz. Titan blue 3 B, 40 lb. common salt. Work at the boil to shade, then
lift, wash and dry.
Deep Chestnut Brown.—Make the dye-bath with 3 lb. Titan brown R, 1½
lb. Titan blue R, 25 lb. common salt. Work at the boil for an hour, then lift,
wash and dry.
Light Seal Brown.—Make the dye-bath with 10 lb. salt, 2 lb. soda, 14 oz.
Oxyphenine, ¾ lb. Atlas red R, 6 oz. Diamine blue B X. Work at the boil to
shade, then lift, wash and dry.
Orange Brown.—Make a dye-bath with 10 lb. salt, 2 lb soda, 14 oz.
Oxyphenine, 1 lb. Atlas red R, 1 oz. Diamine blue B X. Work at the boil to
shade, then lift, wash and dry.
Pale Nut Brown.—Use in the dye-bath 4½ oz. Diamine catechine G, 1 oz.
Diamine brown M, 1 oz. Diamine catechine B, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Walnut Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine brown M, 3 oz. Diamine orange
G, 2 oz. Diamine black H W, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil
for one hour.
Black Brown.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine brown M, ¾ lb. Diamine
blue black R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil.
Reddish Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Dianil brown R, 5 lb. salt and 5 lb.
phosphate of soda at the boil for one hour.
Chocolate Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Dianil brown T, 5 lb. phosphate of soda
and 5 lb. salt at the boil for one hour.
Page 98
Dark Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Dianil dark brown, 5 lb. salt and 5 lb.
phosphate of soda at the boil for one hour.
Light Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Diamine catechine G, 3 lb.
soda and 15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Brown.—Dye with 2¼ lb. Cotton brown N, 4 oz. Diamine black H W, 2 lb.
soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Dark Walnut Brown.—Make the dye-bath with 3¼ lb. Diamine brown M, 6
oz. Diamine catechine B, 6 oz. Diamine red 5 B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt; work at the boil.
Dark Chestnut Brown.—Dye with 2½ lb. Dianil brown R, 1 lb. soda and 20
lb. salt at the boil.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Dianil brown 3 G O, 2 lb. Dianil brown B D,
1 lb. Dianil red 4 B, 3 lb. soda and 25 lb. salt at the boil for one hour.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Mikado brown M and 25 lb. salt;
work the cotton in this at the boil for one hour.
Nut Brown.—Use in the dye-bath 2½ lb. Benzo brown G and 15 lb. salt,
working at the boil.
Dark Brown.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Benzo brown N B and 15 lb.
Glauber's salt, working at the boil.
Dark Brown.—Make the dye-bath with 4 lb. Diphenyl brown B N, 10 lb.
Glauber's salt and 4 lb. soap, working at the boil to shade.
Black Brown.—Use in the dye-bath 2½ lb. Dianil brown 3 G O, 1½ lb.
Dianil brown G, ¾ lb. Dianil dark blue R, 3 lb. soda and 25 lb. salt.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 1½ lb. Zambesi black D, 1¼ lb. Brilliant orange
G, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil to shade.
Gold Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Curcumine S, 1 lb. Columbia orange R, 5 oz.
Columbia black F B, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil.
Dark Chestnut.—Dye at the boil with 2 lb. Columbia Orange R, 8 oz.
Columbia black F B, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
phosphate of soda at the boil for one hour.
Light Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Diamine catechine G, 3 lb.
soda and 15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Brown.—Dye with 2¼ lb. Cotton brown N, 4 oz. Diamine black H W, 2 lb.
soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour.
Dark Walnut Brown.—Make the dye-bath with 3¼ lb. Diamine brown M, 6
oz. Diamine catechine B, 6 oz. Diamine red 5 B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt; work at the boil.
Dark Chestnut Brown.—Dye with 2½ lb. Dianil brown R, 1 lb. soda and 20
lb. salt at the boil.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Dianil brown 3 G O, 2 lb. Dianil brown B D,
1 lb. Dianil red 4 B, 3 lb. soda and 25 lb. salt at the boil for one hour.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Mikado brown M and 25 lb. salt;
work the cotton in this at the boil for one hour.
Nut Brown.—Use in the dye-bath 2½ lb. Benzo brown G and 15 lb. salt,
working at the boil.
Dark Brown.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Benzo brown N B and 15 lb.
Glauber's salt, working at the boil.
Dark Brown.—Make the dye-bath with 4 lb. Diphenyl brown B N, 10 lb.
Glauber's salt and 4 lb. soap, working at the boil to shade.
Black Brown.—Use in the dye-bath 2½ lb. Dianil brown 3 G O, 1½ lb.
Dianil brown G, ¾ lb. Dianil dark blue R, 3 lb. soda and 25 lb. salt.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 1½ lb. Zambesi black D, 1¼ lb. Brilliant orange
G, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil to shade.
Gold Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Curcumine S, 1 lb. Columbia orange R, 5 oz.
Columbia black F B, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil.
Dark Chestnut.—Dye at the boil with 2 lb. Columbia Orange R, 8 oz.
Columbia black F B, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Page 99
Sage Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Zambesi black D, 1 lb. Curcumine S, ¾ lb.
Diamine orange G D, 3 lb. soda and 30 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil.
Deep Brown.—Dye 3½ lb. Diamine brown M, ¾ lb. Oxydiamine orange G,
¾ lb. Diamine black H W, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil.
Chestnut.—Dye with 2½ lb. Diamine brown G, ¾ lb. Oxydiamine orange
R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Pale Walnut Brown.—Dye with 3½ lb. Diamine brown M, ¾ lb.
Oxydiamine orange G, 1½ oz. Diamine black B H, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Various other browns may be obtained by combining the various direct
browns together or with other direct dyes. The use of a yellow or orange
will brighten them; that of a red will redden the shade; the addition of a
dark blue or a black will darken the shade considerably. It may be useful to
remember that a combination of red, orange and blue or black produces a
brown, and by using various proportions a great range of shades can be
dyed.
Black.—Prepare a dye-bath with 6 lb. Diamine black R O, 2 oz. Thioflavine
S, 2 lb. soap, 10 lb. salt. Enter the cotton at the boil and dye for one hour;
lift, wash and dry.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Direct deep black E extra, and ½ to
1½ oz. common salt per gallon of water. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Deep Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5½ lb. Diamine deep black R B, 2
lb. soda, 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour; lift, wash and
dry.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Direct triamine black G X, 15 lb.
Glauber's salt. Dye for one hour at the boil; lift, rinse and dry. In working
for from two to three hours the dye-bath will exhaust completely.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Oxydiamine black A, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 6 lb. Pluto black B. Dye at the boil for
one hour with the addition of ¾ to 1¼ oz. Glauber's salt, ½ to ¾ oz. soda
Diamine orange G D, 3 lb. soda and 30 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil.
Deep Brown.—Dye 3½ lb. Diamine brown M, ¾ lb. Oxydiamine orange G,
¾ lb. Diamine black H W, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil.
Chestnut.—Dye with 2½ lb. Diamine brown G, ¾ lb. Oxydiamine orange
R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Pale Walnut Brown.—Dye with 3½ lb. Diamine brown M, ¾ lb.
Oxydiamine orange G, 1½ oz. Diamine black B H, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Various other browns may be obtained by combining the various direct
browns together or with other direct dyes. The use of a yellow or orange
will brighten them; that of a red will redden the shade; the addition of a
dark blue or a black will darken the shade considerably. It may be useful to
remember that a combination of red, orange and blue or black produces a
brown, and by using various proportions a great range of shades can be
dyed.
Black.—Prepare a dye-bath with 6 lb. Diamine black R O, 2 oz. Thioflavine
S, 2 lb. soap, 10 lb. salt. Enter the cotton at the boil and dye for one hour;
lift, wash and dry.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Direct deep black E extra, and ½ to
1½ oz. common salt per gallon of water. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Deep Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5½ lb. Diamine deep black R B, 2
lb. soda, 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour; lift, wash and
dry.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Direct triamine black G X, 15 lb.
Glauber's salt. Dye for one hour at the boil; lift, rinse and dry. In working
for from two to three hours the dye-bath will exhaust completely.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Oxydiamine black A, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 6 lb. Pluto black B. Dye at the boil for
one hour with the addition of ¾ to 1¼ oz. Glauber's salt, ½ to ¾ oz. soda
Page 100
ash per gallon of liquor. To develop the shade it is necessary to dye in a
boiling liquor.
Black.—Use 2½ lb. Diamine jet black Cr, 2½ lb. Diamine jet black R B, 2
lb. soda, and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Black.—Use 6 lb. Oxydiamine black N R, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Black.—Use 6 lb. Columbia Black F B B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt, working at the boil to shade.
Besides the blacks given in the above recipes, there are other brands which
are used in the same way, and vary slightly in the shade of black they give.
All the direct blacks require working in strong baths to give anything like
black shades; they all have, more or less, a bluish tone, which can be
changed to a jetter shade by the addition of a yellow or green dye in small
proportions, which has been done in one of the recipes given above.
By coupling, chroming or developing, the direct blacks can be made to give
full, deep and fast blacks, and examples of their use in this manner will be
found in following sections.
By using all the direct blacks in proportions varying from ¼ to 1 per cent.
of dye-stuff to the weight of the cotton they give greys of various tints and
depths; a few examples of such greys will now be given.
Blue Grey.—Prepare the dye-bath with ½ lb. Oxydiamine black A, 1 lb.
soda, 10 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Bright Grey.—Prepare a dye-bath with 4½ oz. Azo mauve A M, 1½ oz.
Direct yellow G, 3 lb. soda, 15 lb. common salt.
Silver Grey.—Prepare the dye-bath with ½ oz. Neutral grey G, 10 lb.
sulphate of soda. Work at the boil to shade, then lift, wash and dry.
Slate.—Dye in a bath with ½ lb. Diamine black B H, 3 oz. Diamine bronze
G, 15 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil for three-quarters of an hour.
boiling liquor.
Black.—Use 2½ lb. Diamine jet black Cr, 2½ lb. Diamine jet black R B, 2
lb. soda, and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Black.—Use 6 lb. Oxydiamine black N R, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt, working at the boil for one hour.
Black.—Use 6 lb. Columbia Black F B B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt, working at the boil to shade.
Besides the blacks given in the above recipes, there are other brands which
are used in the same way, and vary slightly in the shade of black they give.
All the direct blacks require working in strong baths to give anything like
black shades; they all have, more or less, a bluish tone, which can be
changed to a jetter shade by the addition of a yellow or green dye in small
proportions, which has been done in one of the recipes given above.
By coupling, chroming or developing, the direct blacks can be made to give
full, deep and fast blacks, and examples of their use in this manner will be
found in following sections.
By using all the direct blacks in proportions varying from ¼ to 1 per cent.
of dye-stuff to the weight of the cotton they give greys of various tints and
depths; a few examples of such greys will now be given.
Blue Grey.—Prepare the dye-bath with ½ lb. Oxydiamine black A, 1 lb.
soda, 10 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Bright Grey.—Prepare a dye-bath with 4½ oz. Azo mauve A M, 1½ oz.
Direct yellow G, 3 lb. soda, 15 lb. common salt.
Silver Grey.—Prepare the dye-bath with ½ oz. Neutral grey G, 10 lb.
sulphate of soda. Work at the boil to shade, then lift, wash and dry.
Slate.—Dye in a bath with ½ lb. Diamine black B H, 3 oz. Diamine bronze
G, 15 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil for three-quarters of an hour.
Page 101
Bronze Grey.—Prepare a dye-bath with ½ lb. Diamine bronze G, 15 lb.
Glauber's salt, 3 lb. soap. Enter at about 160° F., raise to boil and work for
one hour; lift, wash and dry.
Dark Slate.—Prepare a dye-bath with 10 lb. Glauber's salt, 1½ lb. soap, 1
lb. Diamine black R O, 2 lb. Cotton brown N. Heat to about 150° F. Enter
the goods, work for a short time, then raise to the boil and work for one
hour; lift, wash and dry.
Green Grey.—Prepare a dye-bath with 10 lb. Glauber's salt, 1 lb. Diamine
black R O, ¾ oz. Thioflavine S. Enter at from 150° Tw. to 180° F., raise to
boil and dye for one hour; wash and dry.
Light Slate.—Prepare a dye-bath containing 2¼ lb. soap, 15 lb. Glauber's
salt, 6 oz. Diamine black R O, ½ oz. thioflavine S. Enter cotton at 140° F.,
work a little, then heat to boil and dye to shade; lift, wash and dry.
Grey.—Prepare the dye-bath with ½ lb. Diamine grey G, ½ oz. Diamine
scarlet B, 1 lb. soda, 1 lb. soap, 5 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye for one hour at the
boil.
Light Grey.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Diamine grey G, 1 lb. soda, 1
lb. soap, 5 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye for one hour at the boil; lift, rinse and dry.
It may be convenient here to deal with the question of the fastness of the
direct dyes to such influences as light, air, acids, alkalies, washing and
soaping, that have a very material influence on the use of these dyes in
dyeing various fabrics. This matter can only be dealt with here in very
general terms, for space is limited and the dyes are too numerous for
detailed mention. They vary very greatly in degrees of fastness, some are
absolutely fast to all influences; the blacks are among the fastest, generally
these resist washing and soaping, stand acids well and are fast to alkalies,
light however affects them more or less, though they cannot be reckoned
fugitive colours. The few direct greens known are good colours; they stand
washing, soaping and light well, but they are affected by acids and alkalies.
The blues vary very much, generally they stand soaping and have a fair
degree of fastness to light, acids have but little action, alkalies tend to
redden the shade, while heat also affects them. The direct browns are very
variable; they are in general not fast to light; they stand washing and
Glauber's salt, 3 lb. soap. Enter at about 160° F., raise to boil and work for
one hour; lift, wash and dry.
Dark Slate.—Prepare a dye-bath with 10 lb. Glauber's salt, 1½ lb. soap, 1
lb. Diamine black R O, 2 lb. Cotton brown N. Heat to about 150° F. Enter
the goods, work for a short time, then raise to the boil and work for one
hour; lift, wash and dry.
Green Grey.—Prepare a dye-bath with 10 lb. Glauber's salt, 1 lb. Diamine
black R O, ¾ oz. Thioflavine S. Enter at from 150° Tw. to 180° F., raise to
boil and dye for one hour; wash and dry.
Light Slate.—Prepare a dye-bath containing 2¼ lb. soap, 15 lb. Glauber's
salt, 6 oz. Diamine black R O, ½ oz. thioflavine S. Enter cotton at 140° F.,
work a little, then heat to boil and dye to shade; lift, wash and dry.
Grey.—Prepare the dye-bath with ½ lb. Diamine grey G, ½ oz. Diamine
scarlet B, 1 lb. soda, 1 lb. soap, 5 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye for one hour at the
boil.
Light Grey.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. Diamine grey G, 1 lb. soda, 1
lb. soap, 5 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye for one hour at the boil; lift, rinse and dry.
It may be convenient here to deal with the question of the fastness of the
direct dyes to such influences as light, air, acids, alkalies, washing and
soaping, that have a very material influence on the use of these dyes in
dyeing various fabrics. This matter can only be dealt with here in very
general terms, for space is limited and the dyes are too numerous for
detailed mention. They vary very greatly in degrees of fastness, some are
absolutely fast to all influences; the blacks are among the fastest, generally
these resist washing and soaping, stand acids well and are fast to alkalies,
light however affects them more or less, though they cannot be reckoned
fugitive colours. The few direct greens known are good colours; they stand
washing, soaping and light well, but they are affected by acids and alkalies.
The blues vary very much, generally they stand soaping and have a fair
degree of fastness to light, acids have but little action, alkalies tend to
redden the shade, while heat also affects them. The direct browns are very
variable; they are in general not fast to light; they stand washing and
Page 102
soaping and resist alkalies, but are altered by acids slightly. The yellows
rank among the fastest of colours to light and washing and soaping; acids
have but little effect; they are reddened by alkalies. Among the reds there is
great variation in properties, generally they are not fast to light, standing
washing and soaping well and resisting weak alkalies; some of them, such
as the Benzo purpurines and Congo reds are very sensitive to acids, being
turned blue with very weak acids, but on washing or soaping the original
colour comes back; others, like the Titan reds, Diamine reds and Delta
purpurines are not so sensitive, but these are affected by moderately strong
acids; there are one or two reds like Benzo fast scarlet 4 B S and
Purpuramine D H, which are fast to acids. The depth of shade which is dyed
has some considerable influence on the degree of fastness, the deeper
shades of a colour are always faster than the paler shades, particularly as
regards light, a difference of ½ per cent, of dye-stuff has been known to
make a very appreciable degree of difference as regards the fastness of a
colour to light.
In dyeing cotton with all the direct dyes, it is found that the whole of the
dye-stuff is not removed from the dye-bath, how much is taken up by the
cotton, and the depth of the shade which is dyed upon the cotton chiefly
depends upon three factors:—
(1) Volume of water used. (2) Quantity of saline salts used. (3) Degree of
affinity of the dye-stuff for the fibre.
There may also be some minor factors such as temperature at which the
dyeing is carried on, the character and condition of the fabrics being dyed,
etc.
The volume of water used in making the dye-bath has a very great influence
upon the amount of dye taken up by the cotton, the greater the volume of
water the less dye is absorbed and the paler the colour which is produced
upon the fibre. It is therefore important to use as little water as possible in
making up the dye-bath, indeed, for anything like good results to be
obtained with some dyes, especially those of the sulphur series like Vidal
black, Immedial blacks, Katigen browns, Cross-dye blacks, Amidazol
blacks, etc., it is necessary to employ what is called a short bath, that is
making it as strong as possible. The proportion of water with such dyes
rank among the fastest of colours to light and washing and soaping; acids
have but little effect; they are reddened by alkalies. Among the reds there is
great variation in properties, generally they are not fast to light, standing
washing and soaping well and resisting weak alkalies; some of them, such
as the Benzo purpurines and Congo reds are very sensitive to acids, being
turned blue with very weak acids, but on washing or soaping the original
colour comes back; others, like the Titan reds, Diamine reds and Delta
purpurines are not so sensitive, but these are affected by moderately strong
acids; there are one or two reds like Benzo fast scarlet 4 B S and
Purpuramine D H, which are fast to acids. The depth of shade which is dyed
has some considerable influence on the degree of fastness, the deeper
shades of a colour are always faster than the paler shades, particularly as
regards light, a difference of ½ per cent, of dye-stuff has been known to
make a very appreciable degree of difference as regards the fastness of a
colour to light.
In dyeing cotton with all the direct dyes, it is found that the whole of the
dye-stuff is not removed from the dye-bath, how much is taken up by the
cotton, and the depth of the shade which is dyed upon the cotton chiefly
depends upon three factors:—
(1) Volume of water used. (2) Quantity of saline salts used. (3) Degree of
affinity of the dye-stuff for the fibre.
There may also be some minor factors such as temperature at which the
dyeing is carried on, the character and condition of the fabrics being dyed,
etc.
The volume of water used in making the dye-bath has a very great influence
upon the amount of dye taken up by the cotton, the greater the volume of
water the less dye is absorbed and the paler the colour which is produced
upon the fibre. It is therefore important to use as little water as possible in
making up the dye-bath, indeed, for anything like good results to be
obtained with some dyes, especially those of the sulphur series like Vidal
black, Immedial blacks, Katigen browns, Cross-dye blacks, Amidazol
blacks, etc., it is necessary to employ what is called a short bath, that is
making it as strong as possible. The proportion of water with such dyes
Page 103
should not exceed fifteen times the weight of the cotton being dyed, that is,
for every pound of cotton, 1½ gallons of water can be allowed. This will
suit the dyeing of yarns and loose fabrics like knitted stockings and hosiery
goods very well. In the case of dyeing piece goods on a jigger or continuous
dyeing machines even stronger liquors can be used with advantage. With
some of the older, direct dyes like Congo red, Benzo azurine, Diamine
scarlets, the proportion of water may be increased to twenty times the
weight of the cotton. In any case the quantity of water used should not
exceed twenty-five times the weight of the cotton.
The second factor, the quantity of saline salts, like Glauber's salt, soda,
borax, etc., added in the dyeing, is not without influence, generally the more
that is added the more dye there is left in the bath, but here again much
depends upon the salt and the colouring matters used. Some salts, more
particularly Glauber's salt and common salt, tend to throw some dye-stuffs
out of the bath, and so the more there is used of them the deeper the shade
produced on the fabric. It is quite impossible, having regard to the scope of
this book, to deal with this question in detail. The dyer should ascertain for
himself the best salts and the best proportions of these to use with the
particular dyes he is using. The recipes given above will give him some
ideas on this point.
The third factor, the degree of affinity of the dye for the cotton fibre, has
some influence on the depth of shade which can be dyed from any given
strength of the dye-bath. There is a very considerable difference among the
direct dyes in this respect. There are some which have a fair degree of
affinity, while there are others which have but little affinity, and while in the
former case there is little dye left in the bath, in the latter case there is a
good deal. When dyeing plain shades with single dye-stuffs this is not of
much moment, because if the bath be kept for further use, as will be spoken
of presently, the bath may be brought up to its original strength by adding a
proportionate amount of dye-stuff, but when compound shades are being
dyed, using two or more dyes, then this feature has some influence, for they
will not be absorbed by the fibre in the same proportion as they were put in
the bath, and so when making up the dye-bath for the second lot, and
adding the same proportion of dyes, the shade which is produced will not be
quite the same, for the first lot of cotton in taking up the dyes in varying
quantities has altered their relative proportions, and so the bath for the
for every pound of cotton, 1½ gallons of water can be allowed. This will
suit the dyeing of yarns and loose fabrics like knitted stockings and hosiery
goods very well. In the case of dyeing piece goods on a jigger or continuous
dyeing machines even stronger liquors can be used with advantage. With
some of the older, direct dyes like Congo red, Benzo azurine, Diamine
scarlets, the proportion of water may be increased to twenty times the
weight of the cotton. In any case the quantity of water used should not
exceed twenty-five times the weight of the cotton.
The second factor, the quantity of saline salts, like Glauber's salt, soda,
borax, etc., added in the dyeing, is not without influence, generally the more
that is added the more dye there is left in the bath, but here again much
depends upon the salt and the colouring matters used. Some salts, more
particularly Glauber's salt and common salt, tend to throw some dye-stuffs
out of the bath, and so the more there is used of them the deeper the shade
produced on the fabric. It is quite impossible, having regard to the scope of
this book, to deal with this question in detail. The dyer should ascertain for
himself the best salts and the best proportions of these to use with the
particular dyes he is using. The recipes given above will give him some
ideas on this point.
The third factor, the degree of affinity of the dye for the cotton fibre, has
some influence on the depth of shade which can be dyed from any given
strength of the dye-bath. There is a very considerable difference among the
direct dyes in this respect. There are some which have a fair degree of
affinity, while there are others which have but little affinity, and while in the
former case there is little dye left in the bath, in the latter case there is a
good deal. When dyeing plain shades with single dye-stuffs this is not of
much moment, because if the bath be kept for further use, as will be spoken
of presently, the bath may be brought up to its original strength by adding a
proportionate amount of dye-stuff, but when compound shades are being
dyed, using two or more dyes, then this feature has some influence, for they
will not be absorbed by the fibre in the same proportion as they were put in
the bath, and so when making up the dye-bath for the second lot, and
adding the same proportion of dyes, the shade which is produced will not be
quite the same, for the first lot of cotton in taking up the dyes in varying
quantities has altered their relative proportions, and so the bath for the
Page 104
second lot of cotton will actually contain more of one dye than did the first
bath, and the influence of this excess of the one constituent will show itself
in the shade ultimately dyed. The more lots of cotton there are dyed in the
bath the greater will this influence be. The dyer must by practical
experience find out for himself in what direction this feature of the direct
dyes exerts its influence on the particular dyes he is working with and make
due allowance.
It is found in practice that from one-fourth to one-half of the original weight
of dye-stuff is left in the bath, and in order to be as economical as possible a
custom has arisen of keeping the bath and using it again for dyeing further
lots of cotton. In thus making a continuous use of dye-baths it is important
in preparing the baths for the next lot of cotton to add first the requisite
quantities of dye-stuffs, how much will depend upon the factors and
conditions already detailed, but from one-half to three-fourths of the
original quantities are added. Practical experience alone is the guide to be
followed.
Having added the dye-stuff, then sufficient water must be added to bring up
the volume of the bath to the proper amount, for it will have lost some. The
loss of water arises from two sources: first there is the evaporation, which
always occurs when dye-baths are heated up, and, second, there is the
mechanical loss due to its absorption by the material which is being dyed.
When a piece of cotton or other textile fabric is immersed in a dye liquor it
absorbs mechanically some of it, and this amount may be roughly put down
as about its own weight; thus 100 lb. weight of cotton will take up 10
gallons of liquor and carry that quantity out of the bath. To some extent this
may be minimised by a previous wetting out of the cotton, which will then
have in it as much liquor as it will take up, and so practically no more will
be taken up from the dye-bath. Any loss of volume which may thus occur
can be remedied by the addition of water.
The dye-baths containing in solution, in addition to the dye-stuff, salt, or
Glauber's salt, or any other added substance, the cotton in taking up the dye
liquor will of course take up some of these in proportion to the volume of
liquor absorbed. The amount may range from 4 oz. to 1 lb. per gallon of
liquor, and if 100 lb. cotton is being dyed and takes up from 10 to 15
gallons of liquor, it is obvious that it must absorb from 3 to 10 lb. of saline
bath, and the influence of this excess of the one constituent will show itself
in the shade ultimately dyed. The more lots of cotton there are dyed in the
bath the greater will this influence be. The dyer must by practical
experience find out for himself in what direction this feature of the direct
dyes exerts its influence on the particular dyes he is working with and make
due allowance.
It is found in practice that from one-fourth to one-half of the original weight
of dye-stuff is left in the bath, and in order to be as economical as possible a
custom has arisen of keeping the bath and using it again for dyeing further
lots of cotton. In thus making a continuous use of dye-baths it is important
in preparing the baths for the next lot of cotton to add first the requisite
quantities of dye-stuffs, how much will depend upon the factors and
conditions already detailed, but from one-half to three-fourths of the
original quantities are added. Practical experience alone is the guide to be
followed.
Having added the dye-stuff, then sufficient water must be added to bring up
the volume of the bath to the proper amount, for it will have lost some. The
loss of water arises from two sources: first there is the evaporation, which
always occurs when dye-baths are heated up, and, second, there is the
mechanical loss due to its absorption by the material which is being dyed.
When a piece of cotton or other textile fabric is immersed in a dye liquor it
absorbs mechanically some of it, and this amount may be roughly put down
as about its own weight; thus 100 lb. weight of cotton will take up 10
gallons of liquor and carry that quantity out of the bath. To some extent this
may be minimised by a previous wetting out of the cotton, which will then
have in it as much liquor as it will take up, and so practically no more will
be taken up from the dye-bath. Any loss of volume which may thus occur
can be remedied by the addition of water.
The dye-baths containing in solution, in addition to the dye-stuff, salt, or
Glauber's salt, or any other added substance, the cotton in taking up the dye
liquor will of course take up some of these in proportion to the volume of
liquor absorbed. The amount may range from 4 oz. to 1 lb. per gallon of
liquor, and if 100 lb. cotton is being dyed and takes up from 10 to 15
gallons of liquor, it is obvious that it must absorb from 3 to 10 lb. of saline
Page 105
matter, and as the salinity of the dye liquor is of some importance in dyeing
direct colours, in making up the bath for the next lot of cotton this must be
allowed for and suitable additions made. In order to do this properly it is a
good plan to rely upon the Twaddell.
The dyer should take the Twaddell of his bath before use and always make
up his baths to that strength. This will be found to range from 3° to 12° Tw.
Thus, for instance, a dye-bath made from 120 gallons of water with 20 lb. to
25 lb. common salt or Glauber's salt with the dye-stuffs will stand at 4° Tw.,
one made with 50 lb. common salt or Glauber's salt at 8° Tw., while one
which is made with 80 lb. to 100 lb. salt will stand at 12° to 13° Tw. If the
dyer always maintains his liquors at one uniform degree Twaddell he can
invariably depend upon getting uniform shades from his dye-baths. This
uniform strength is attained by adding more salt or more water as the case
may require.
Of course the continuous working of dye-baths cannot go on for ever;
sooner or later the baths become thick and dirty, and then they must be
thrown away and a new bath started.
(2) DIRECT DYEING FOLLOWED BY FIXATION WITH METALLIC
SALTS.
It is an acknowledged principle in dyeing that to produce colours fast to
washing, soaping and rubbing, there must be produced on the fibre an
insoluble coloured substance. Now as the direct dyes do not essentially
produce such insoluble bodies when dyed on the cotton, the colours they
form are not always fast to washing and soaping. It has been ascertained,
however, that some of the direct dyes, e.g., Benzo azurine, Chicago blue,
Catechu browns, Diamine blues, Diamine browns, etc., are capable of
uniting with metallic bodies to form insoluble colour lakes, and this
combination can take place on the fibre. Fast shades may be dyed with the
dye-stuffs named above, and with others of this group, by first dyeing them
in the usual way, then passing through a boiling bath containing bichromate
of potash or copper sulphate, either together or separately. The two fixing
agents here named have been found to be the best, although others, as, for
instance, zinc sulphate, chromium fluoride and iron sulphate have been
tried. With some dyes there is little or no alteration in shade, but in others
direct colours, in making up the bath for the next lot of cotton this must be
allowed for and suitable additions made. In order to do this properly it is a
good plan to rely upon the Twaddell.
The dyer should take the Twaddell of his bath before use and always make
up his baths to that strength. This will be found to range from 3° to 12° Tw.
Thus, for instance, a dye-bath made from 120 gallons of water with 20 lb. to
25 lb. common salt or Glauber's salt with the dye-stuffs will stand at 4° Tw.,
one made with 50 lb. common salt or Glauber's salt at 8° Tw., while one
which is made with 80 lb. to 100 lb. salt will stand at 12° to 13° Tw. If the
dyer always maintains his liquors at one uniform degree Twaddell he can
invariably depend upon getting uniform shades from his dye-baths. This
uniform strength is attained by adding more salt or more water as the case
may require.
Of course the continuous working of dye-baths cannot go on for ever;
sooner or later the baths become thick and dirty, and then they must be
thrown away and a new bath started.
(2) DIRECT DYEING FOLLOWED BY FIXATION WITH METALLIC
SALTS.
It is an acknowledged principle in dyeing that to produce colours fast to
washing, soaping and rubbing, there must be produced on the fibre an
insoluble coloured substance. Now as the direct dyes do not essentially
produce such insoluble bodies when dyed on the cotton, the colours they
form are not always fast to washing and soaping. It has been ascertained,
however, that some of the direct dyes, e.g., Benzo azurine, Chicago blue,
Catechu browns, Diamine blues, Diamine browns, etc., are capable of
uniting with metallic bodies to form insoluble colour lakes, and this
combination can take place on the fibre. Fast shades may be dyed with the
dye-stuffs named above, and with others of this group, by first dyeing them
in the usual way, then passing through a boiling bath containing bichromate
of potash or copper sulphate, either together or separately. The two fixing
agents here named have been found to be the best, although others, as, for
instance, zinc sulphate, chromium fluoride and iron sulphate have been
tried. With some dyes there is little or no alteration in shade, but in others
Page 106
there is some change, thus the blues as a rule tend to become greener in
tone, and browns also tend to acquire a greener tone and deeper shade. The
treated shades thus obtained are notable for considerable fastness to
washing, soaping and light. It is to be noted that bichromate of potash
exercises both a fixing and an oxidising action on dye-stuffs, hence it is
needful to use it with some degree of caution and not in too great an
amount, otherwise with some dyes there is a risk of over-oxidation, and in
consequence poor shades will be developed. The following recipes will
serve to show what dyes may thus be used, and the colours that can be
obtained with them.
Dark Red.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine fast red F, 3 lb. soda and 20
lb. Glauber's salt, work at the boil for one hour, then lift, rinse and pass into
a boiling bath containing 3 lb. fluoride of chromium for ten to fifteen
minutes, then lift, rinse and dry. By using 1 lb. of the dye-stuff in the same
way a light red shade is got.
Orange.—Dye at the boil for one hour with 1 lb. Chrysamine G, 3 lb. soap
and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then rinse and fix in a fresh boiling bath with 1 lb.
bichromate of potash, 3 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Yellow.—Dye with 3½ lb. Diamine yellow N, 3 lb. soap and 15 lb.
phosphate of soda, then fix with 4 lb. fluoride of chromium.
Gold Yellow.—Prepare the dye-bath with 3 lb. Benzo chrome brown 5 G, 1
lb. soda ash, 12 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour and rinse.
This gives an orange brown. To get the yellow shade, afterwards chrome
with 3 lb. bichromate of potash, 3 lb. sulphate of copper, 1 lb. acetic acid, in
a fresh bath. Enter at about 130° F., bring to the boil, and boil for half an
hour.
Pale Leaf Green.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil yellow 3 G, 1 lb. Dianil yellow R,
1 lb. Dianil blue G, and 20 lb. salt, then fix with 3 lb. copper sulphate and 2
lb. acetic acid.
Leaf Green.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil yellow 3 G, 3 lb. Dianil blue G, and 20
lb. salt, fixing with 4 lb. copper sulphate and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Green.—Dye with 2 lb. Dianil yellow R, 1½ lb. Dianil dark blue R, 1
lb. soda and 20 lb. salt, fixing with 3 lb. copper sulphate.
tone, and browns also tend to acquire a greener tone and deeper shade. The
treated shades thus obtained are notable for considerable fastness to
washing, soaping and light. It is to be noted that bichromate of potash
exercises both a fixing and an oxidising action on dye-stuffs, hence it is
needful to use it with some degree of caution and not in too great an
amount, otherwise with some dyes there is a risk of over-oxidation, and in
consequence poor shades will be developed. The following recipes will
serve to show what dyes may thus be used, and the colours that can be
obtained with them.
Dark Red.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine fast red F, 3 lb. soda and 20
lb. Glauber's salt, work at the boil for one hour, then lift, rinse and pass into
a boiling bath containing 3 lb. fluoride of chromium for ten to fifteen
minutes, then lift, rinse and dry. By using 1 lb. of the dye-stuff in the same
way a light red shade is got.
Orange.—Dye at the boil for one hour with 1 lb. Chrysamine G, 3 lb. soap
and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then rinse and fix in a fresh boiling bath with 1 lb.
bichromate of potash, 3 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Yellow.—Dye with 3½ lb. Diamine yellow N, 3 lb. soap and 15 lb.
phosphate of soda, then fix with 4 lb. fluoride of chromium.
Gold Yellow.—Prepare the dye-bath with 3 lb. Benzo chrome brown 5 G, 1
lb. soda ash, 12 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour and rinse.
This gives an orange brown. To get the yellow shade, afterwards chrome
with 3 lb. bichromate of potash, 3 lb. sulphate of copper, 1 lb. acetic acid, in
a fresh bath. Enter at about 130° F., bring to the boil, and boil for half an
hour.
Pale Leaf Green.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil yellow 3 G, 1 lb. Dianil yellow R,
1 lb. Dianil blue G, and 20 lb. salt, then fix with 3 lb. copper sulphate and 2
lb. acetic acid.
Leaf Green.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil yellow 3 G, 3 lb. Dianil blue G, and 20
lb. salt, fixing with 4 lb. copper sulphate and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Green.—Dye with 2 lb. Dianil yellow R, 1½ lb. Dianil dark blue R, 1
lb. soda and 20 lb. salt, fixing with 3 lb. copper sulphate.
Page 107
Pale Olive Green.—Dye with 2¾ lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 1¼ lb.
Diamine blue R W, ¾ lb. Diamine blue R W, ¾ lb. Diamine catechine G; fix
with 4 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Russia Green.—Dye with 2½ lb. Diamine blue R W, 10 oz. Diamine dark
blue B, 2½ lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt;
fix with 4 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Blue Green.—Dye with 1¾ lb. Diamine sky blue F F, 6 oz. Diamine fast
yellow B, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 2 lb. sulphate of
copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Bronze Green.—Use in the bath at the boil 4 lb. Diamine bronze G, 2 lb.
soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then fix with 4 lb. fluoride of chromium.
Pea Green.—Dye in a boiling bath with ½ lb. Diamine sky blue F F, 2¼ lb.
Diamine fast yellow A, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then fix in a
fresh bath with 2 lb. sulphate of copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Leaf Green.—Dye at the boil for one hour in a bath containing 2¾ lb.
Diamine fast yellow B, 1¾ lb. Diamine blue R W, 7 oz. Diamine catechine
B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then fix in a new bath with 4 lb.
sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Light Green.—Prepare the dye-bath with 7¼ oz. Diamine blue R W, 5½ oz.
Diamine orange B, 2 lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, work at the boil for one hour, then treat in a fresh bath with 3
lb. sulphate of copper.
Olive Green.—Dye with 2¼ lb. Chicago blue R W, 15 oz. Chrysamine G, 2
lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 1 lb. bichromate of potash, 3 lb.
sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Pea Green.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Chrysophenine G, 1 lb. Chicago blue
6 B, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour,
then fix in a fresh boiling bath with 3 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic
acid.
Green.—Dye with 2¾ lb. Chicago blue 6 B, 5 oz. Chrysamine G, 2 lb. soap
and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 1 lb. bichromate of potash, 3 lb. sulphate
Diamine blue R W, ¾ lb. Diamine blue R W, ¾ lb. Diamine catechine G; fix
with 4 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Russia Green.—Dye with 2½ lb. Diamine blue R W, 10 oz. Diamine dark
blue B, 2½ lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt;
fix with 4 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Blue Green.—Dye with 1¾ lb. Diamine sky blue F F, 6 oz. Diamine fast
yellow B, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 2 lb. sulphate of
copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Bronze Green.—Use in the bath at the boil 4 lb. Diamine bronze G, 2 lb.
soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then fix with 4 lb. fluoride of chromium.
Pea Green.—Dye in a boiling bath with ½ lb. Diamine sky blue F F, 2¼ lb.
Diamine fast yellow A, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then fix in a
fresh bath with 2 lb. sulphate of copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Leaf Green.—Dye at the boil for one hour in a bath containing 2¾ lb.
Diamine fast yellow B, 1¾ lb. Diamine blue R W, 7 oz. Diamine catechine
B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then fix in a new bath with 4 lb.
sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Light Green.—Prepare the dye-bath with 7¼ oz. Diamine blue R W, 5½ oz.
Diamine orange B, 2 lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, work at the boil for one hour, then treat in a fresh bath with 3
lb. sulphate of copper.
Olive Green.—Dye with 2¼ lb. Chicago blue R W, 15 oz. Chrysamine G, 2
lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 1 lb. bichromate of potash, 3 lb.
sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Pea Green.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Chrysophenine G, 1 lb. Chicago blue
6 B, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour,
then fix in a fresh boiling bath with 3 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic
acid.
Green.—Dye with 2¾ lb. Chicago blue 6 B, 5 oz. Chrysamine G, 2 lb. soap
and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 1 lb. bichromate of potash, 3 lb. sulphate
Page 108
of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Green.—Dye with 1½ lb. Diamine green B, 1½ oz. Diamine bronze
G, 1 lb. Diamine fast yellow A, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, working
at the boil for one hour, then lift, rinse and fix in a fresh boiling bath with 3
lb. fluoride of chromium for one to fifteen minutes.
Dark Bronze.—Use in the dye-bath 2½ lb. Diamine bronze G, 3 lb. soda
and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour, then lift, rinse
and fix with 3 lb. fluoride of chromium as above.
Dark Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 3 lb. Benzo blue R W, 10 lb.
Glauber's salt; dye for one hour at the boil, then treat in fresh bath with 1 lb.
sulphate of copper at the boil for half an hour.
Blue.—Dye with 1¾ lb. Diamine brilliant blue G, 1¼ lb. Diamine sky blue
F F, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix in a bath with 4 lb. sulphate of
copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Light Navy.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine blue 3 R, 2¼ lb. Diamine blue R W, 2
lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 4 lb. sulphate of copper and 20
lb. acetic acid.
Bright Navy.—Dye with 4 lb. Diamine brilliant blue G, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt; fix with 4 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Chicago blue R W, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt; fix with 3 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Blue.—- Dye with 3 lb. Chicago blue R W, 1½ lb. Zambesi black F, 3
lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 3 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb.
acetic acid.
Deep Slate Blue.—Dye with 1¼ lb. Zambesi black F, 1¼ lb. Chicago blue
B, 6 oz. Columbia yellow, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 3 lb.
sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Light Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 oz. Diamine sky blue F F, ¾ oz.
Diamine fast yellow A, ½ lb. soda, 2 lb. soap and 5 lb. Glauber's salt; dye
for one hour at the boil, then treat in a fresh bath with 1½ lb. sulphate of
copper for half an hour.
Dark Green.—Dye with 1½ lb. Diamine green B, 1½ oz. Diamine bronze
G, 1 lb. Diamine fast yellow A, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, working
at the boil for one hour, then lift, rinse and fix in a fresh boiling bath with 3
lb. fluoride of chromium for one to fifteen minutes.
Dark Bronze.—Use in the dye-bath 2½ lb. Diamine bronze G, 3 lb. soda
and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, working at the boil for one hour, then lift, rinse
and fix with 3 lb. fluoride of chromium as above.
Dark Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 3 lb. Benzo blue R W, 10 lb.
Glauber's salt; dye for one hour at the boil, then treat in fresh bath with 1 lb.
sulphate of copper at the boil for half an hour.
Blue.—Dye with 1¾ lb. Diamine brilliant blue G, 1¼ lb. Diamine sky blue
F F, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix in a bath with 4 lb. sulphate of
copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Light Navy.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine blue 3 R, 2¼ lb. Diamine blue R W, 2
lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 4 lb. sulphate of copper and 20
lb. acetic acid.
Bright Navy.—Dye with 4 lb. Diamine brilliant blue G, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt; fix with 4 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Chicago blue R W, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt; fix with 3 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Blue.—- Dye with 3 lb. Chicago blue R W, 1½ lb. Zambesi black F, 3
lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 3 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb.
acetic acid.
Deep Slate Blue.—Dye with 1¼ lb. Zambesi black F, 1¼ lb. Chicago blue
B, 6 oz. Columbia yellow, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 3 lb.
sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Light Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 oz. Diamine sky blue F F, ¾ oz.
Diamine fast yellow A, ½ lb. soda, 2 lb. soap and 5 lb. Glauber's salt; dye
for one hour at the boil, then treat in a fresh bath with 1½ lb. sulphate of
copper for half an hour.
Page 109
Dark Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Benzo chrome black blue B,
15 lb. Glauber's salt and 3 lb. soda. Work at the boil for one hour, then
chrome in a fresh bath with 1 lb. bichromate of potash, 1 lb. sulphate of
copper and ½ lb. sulphuric acid.
Dark Blue.—Dye with 2½ lb. Diamineral blue R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt; fix with 2 lb. sulphate of copper, 2 lb. bichromate of potash
and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Turquoise Blue.—Dye with 1 lb. Chicago blue 6 B, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, and fix with 3 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Turquoise Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Chicago blue 4 B, 2 lb. soda and 10
lb. Glauber's salt, and fix with 3 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lbs. acetic
acid.
Black Blue.—Dye with 4¼ lb. Diamine dark blue B, 1 lb. Diamine new
blue R, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, fixing with 5 lb. sulphate of
copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
By mixing together the various Diamine blues a very great range of shades
can be produced, from pale sky-blue tints to the deepest of blues.
Bright Blue.—Dye with 2¼ lb. Dianil blue B and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix
with 3 lb. of fluoride of chromium.
Dark Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil blue B, 1 lb. Dianil dark blue R, 1 lb.
soda and 20 lb. salt, fixing with 3 lb. fluoride of chromium.
Red Violet.—Dye with 1 lb. Dianil blue 4 R and 10 lb, salt, fixing with 4 lb.
fluoride of chromium.
Dark Plum.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil blue 4 R and 15 lb. salt, fixing with 4
lb. fluoride of chromium.
Red Violet.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine blue 3 R, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, fixing with 1½ lb. sulphate of copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Red Plum.—Use 3¾ lb. Diamine blue 3 R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt, fixing with 5 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
15 lb. Glauber's salt and 3 lb. soda. Work at the boil for one hour, then
chrome in a fresh bath with 1 lb. bichromate of potash, 1 lb. sulphate of
copper and ½ lb. sulphuric acid.
Dark Blue.—Dye with 2½ lb. Diamineral blue R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt; fix with 2 lb. sulphate of copper, 2 lb. bichromate of potash
and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Turquoise Blue.—Dye with 1 lb. Chicago blue 6 B, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, and fix with 3 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Turquoise Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Chicago blue 4 B, 2 lb. soda and 10
lb. Glauber's salt, and fix with 3 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lbs. acetic
acid.
Black Blue.—Dye with 4¼ lb. Diamine dark blue B, 1 lb. Diamine new
blue R, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, fixing with 5 lb. sulphate of
copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
By mixing together the various Diamine blues a very great range of shades
can be produced, from pale sky-blue tints to the deepest of blues.
Bright Blue.—Dye with 2¼ lb. Dianil blue B and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix
with 3 lb. of fluoride of chromium.
Dark Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil blue B, 1 lb. Dianil dark blue R, 1 lb.
soda and 20 lb. salt, fixing with 3 lb. fluoride of chromium.
Red Violet.—Dye with 1 lb. Dianil blue 4 R and 10 lb, salt, fixing with 4 lb.
fluoride of chromium.
Dark Plum.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil blue 4 R and 15 lb. salt, fixing with 4
lb. fluoride of chromium.
Red Violet.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine blue 3 R, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, fixing with 1½ lb. sulphate of copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Red Plum.—Use 3¾ lb. Diamine blue 3 R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt, fixing with 5 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Page 110
Dark Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Diamine catechine B, 3 lb.
soda and 15 lb. Glauber's salt and dye at the boil for one hour, then treat
with 2 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. bichromate of potash.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Paramine brown C, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda and dye at the boil for one hour; treat with 3 lb.
copper sulphate.
Light Brown.—Dye at the boil for one hour in a bath containing 5 lb.
Diamine catechine G, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb. Glauber's salt, then treat in a
fresh bath with 2 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. bichromate of potash.
Dark Chestnut Brown.—Dye for an hour in a boiling bath with 2¼ lb.
Diamine catechine G, 1¼ lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt; then fix in a fresh boiling bath with 2 lb. sulphate of copper,
2 lb. bichromate of potash and 2 lb. acetic acid, working for fifteen to
twenty minutes, then rinsing and drying.
Brown.—Use 3 lb. Catechu brown G K, 15 lb. Glauber's salt and ½ lb. soap;
after dyeing for one hour at the boil treat in a fresh boiling bath with 3 lb.
copper sulphate.
Dark Brown.—Dye at the boil for one hour with 3 lb. Catechu brown F K,
15 lb. Glauber's salt and 1 lb. soap, then treat in a fresh boiling bath with 3
lb. copper sulphate.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 9 oz. Diamine blue R W, 12½ oz.
Diamine orange B, 1¾ lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt; after working for one hour at the boil treat in a fresh boiling
bath with 4 lb. sulphate of copper.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Benzo chrome brown 2 R, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt (crystals) and dye at the boil for one hour; afterwards treat
with bichromate of potash and sulphate of copper.
Nut Brown.—Dye in a bath with 4 lb. Benzo chrome brown G and 20 lb.
salt, then treat in a fresh bath with 4 lb. bichromate of potash, 4 lb. copper
sulphate and 1 lb. acetic acid.
soda and 15 lb. Glauber's salt and dye at the boil for one hour, then treat
with 2 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. bichromate of potash.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Paramine brown C, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda and dye at the boil for one hour; treat with 3 lb.
copper sulphate.
Light Brown.—Dye at the boil for one hour in a bath containing 5 lb.
Diamine catechine G, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb. Glauber's salt, then treat in a
fresh bath with 2 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. bichromate of potash.
Dark Chestnut Brown.—Dye for an hour in a boiling bath with 2¼ lb.
Diamine catechine G, 1¼ lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt; then fix in a fresh boiling bath with 2 lb. sulphate of copper,
2 lb. bichromate of potash and 2 lb. acetic acid, working for fifteen to
twenty minutes, then rinsing and drying.
Brown.—Use 3 lb. Catechu brown G K, 15 lb. Glauber's salt and ½ lb. soap;
after dyeing for one hour at the boil treat in a fresh boiling bath with 3 lb.
copper sulphate.
Dark Brown.—Dye at the boil for one hour with 3 lb. Catechu brown F K,
15 lb. Glauber's salt and 1 lb. soap, then treat in a fresh boiling bath with 3
lb. copper sulphate.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 9 oz. Diamine blue R W, 12½ oz.
Diamine orange B, 1¾ lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt; after working for one hour at the boil treat in a fresh boiling
bath with 4 lb. sulphate of copper.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Benzo chrome brown 2 R, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt (crystals) and dye at the boil for one hour; afterwards treat
with bichromate of potash and sulphate of copper.
Nut Brown.—Dye in a bath with 4 lb. Benzo chrome brown G and 20 lb.
salt, then treat in a fresh bath with 4 lb. bichromate of potash, 4 lb. copper
sulphate and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Page 111
Chestnut Brown.—Dye at the boil for one hour in a bath containing 4 lb.
Benzo chrome brown R, and boiling bath with 4 lb. bichromate of potash, 4
lb. sulphate of copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Olive Brown.—Dye with 4 lb. Diamine bronze G, 1 lb. Diamine
orange B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 5 lb. sulphate of
copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Deep Brown.—Use in the Dye-bath 1¾ lb. Diamine brown B, 1¾ lb.
Diamine fast yellow B, ½ oz. Diamine black B H, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt. The fixing bath contains 2 lb. sulphate of copper, 2 lb.
bichromate of potash, and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine brown M, 1 lb. Diamine fast red F,
½ lb. Diamine jet black Cr, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt. The fixing
bath contains 2 lb. sulphate of copper, 2 lb. bichromate of potash and 2 lb.
acetic acid.
Black Brown.—Dye with 1¾ lb. Diamine dark blue B, ¾ lb. Diamine
orange B, 1¾ lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt,
fixing with 5 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Light Sage Brown.—Dye with ¾ lb. Diamine brown B, 1½ lb. Diamine fast
yellow B, 3 oz. Diamine dark blue B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt,
fixing with 3 lb. sulphate of copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Pale Brown.—Use in the dye-bath 1 lb. Dianil brown 3 G O, 4 oz. Dianil
brown E, 4 oz. Dianil black N, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt, fixing with 1½ lb.
sulphate of copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Walnut Brown.—Dye with 2½ lb. Diamine blue 3 R, 1 lb. Diamine brown
M, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then fix with 5 lb. sulphate of copper
and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Pale Fawn Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine blue 3 R, 1 lb. Diamine brown
M, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then fix with 5 lb. sulphate of copper
and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Pale Fawn Brown.—Dye with ½ lb. Diamine orange B, ¼ lb. Diamine fast
yellow B, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, fixing with 2 lb. sulphate of
Benzo chrome brown R, and boiling bath with 4 lb. bichromate of potash, 4
lb. sulphate of copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Olive Brown.—Dye with 4 lb. Diamine bronze G, 1 lb. Diamine
orange B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 5 lb. sulphate of
copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Deep Brown.—Use in the Dye-bath 1¾ lb. Diamine brown B, 1¾ lb.
Diamine fast yellow B, ½ oz. Diamine black B H, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt. The fixing bath contains 2 lb. sulphate of copper, 2 lb.
bichromate of potash, and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine brown M, 1 lb. Diamine fast red F,
½ lb. Diamine jet black Cr, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt. The fixing
bath contains 2 lb. sulphate of copper, 2 lb. bichromate of potash and 2 lb.
acetic acid.
Black Brown.—Dye with 1¾ lb. Diamine dark blue B, ¾ lb. Diamine
orange B, 1¾ lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt,
fixing with 5 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Light Sage Brown.—Dye with ¾ lb. Diamine brown B, 1½ lb. Diamine fast
yellow B, 3 oz. Diamine dark blue B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt,
fixing with 3 lb. sulphate of copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Pale Brown.—Use in the dye-bath 1 lb. Dianil brown 3 G O, 4 oz. Dianil
brown E, 4 oz. Dianil black N, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt, fixing with 1½ lb.
sulphate of copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Walnut Brown.—Dye with 2½ lb. Diamine blue 3 R, 1 lb. Diamine brown
M, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then fix with 5 lb. sulphate of copper
and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Pale Fawn Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine blue 3 R, 1 lb. Diamine brown
M, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then fix with 5 lb. sulphate of copper
and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Pale Fawn Brown.—Dye with ½ lb. Diamine orange B, ¼ lb. Diamine fast
yellow B, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, fixing with 2 lb. sulphate of
Page 112
copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Sage Brown.—Dye with 9 oz. Diamine blue R W, ¾ lb. Diamine orange B,
1¾ lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt. The
fixing is done with 4 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Red Chocolate.—Dye with 3 lb. Diamine orange B, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt; fix with 2 lb. sulphate of copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Chestnut.—Dye with 2½ lb. Dianil brown 3 G O, 13 oz. Dianil brown
R, 13 oz. Dianil brown B D, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt, fixing with 3 lb.
copper sulphate and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Brown.—Dye with 2¼ lb. Chrysophenine G, 1¼ lb. Diamine brown G, 1¼
lb. Chicago blue R W, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 3 lb.
sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Nut Brown.—Dye with 3 lb. Chromanil brown 2 G, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt; fix with 1 lb. bichromate of potash, 3 lb. sulphate of copper
and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Grey.—Dye at the boil for one hour with 1 lb. Zambesi black F, 3 lb.
soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt; fix in a fresh boiling bath with 3 lb. sulphate
of copper, 1 lb. bichromate of potash and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Dark Grey.—Dye with 3 lb. Chromanil black 4 R F, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt; fix with 1 lb. bichromate of potash, 3 lb. sulphate of copper
and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Grey.—Use in the dye-bath 1 lb. Diamine blue R W, ½ lb. Diamine
orange B, ¼ lb. Diamine new blue R, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt,
fixing with 4 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Pale Greenish Grey.—Dye with ¼ oz. Diamine orange B, 3 oz. Diamine
blue R W, ½ lb. soda, 2 lb. soap and 5 lb. Glauber's salt, fixing with 1 lb.
sulphate of copper and ½ lb. acetic acid.
Slate Blue.—Dye with ¼ lb. Diamine dark blue B, 2 oz. Diamine new blue
R, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 2 lb. sulphate of copper and
1 lb. acetic acid.
Sage Brown.—Dye with 9 oz. Diamine blue R W, ¾ lb. Diamine orange B,
1¾ lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt. The
fixing is done with 4 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Red Chocolate.—Dye with 3 lb. Diamine orange B, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt; fix with 2 lb. sulphate of copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Chestnut.—Dye with 2½ lb. Dianil brown 3 G O, 13 oz. Dianil brown
R, 13 oz. Dianil brown B D, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt, fixing with 3 lb.
copper sulphate and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Brown.—Dye with 2¼ lb. Chrysophenine G, 1¼ lb. Diamine brown G, 1¼
lb. Chicago blue R W, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 3 lb.
sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Nut Brown.—Dye with 3 lb. Chromanil brown 2 G, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt; fix with 1 lb. bichromate of potash, 3 lb. sulphate of copper
and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Grey.—Dye at the boil for one hour with 1 lb. Zambesi black F, 3 lb.
soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt; fix in a fresh boiling bath with 3 lb. sulphate
of copper, 1 lb. bichromate of potash and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Dark Grey.—Dye with 3 lb. Chromanil black 4 R F, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt; fix with 1 lb. bichromate of potash, 3 lb. sulphate of copper
and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Dark Grey.—Use in the dye-bath 1 lb. Diamine blue R W, ½ lb. Diamine
orange B, ¼ lb. Diamine new blue R, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt,
fixing with 4 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Pale Greenish Grey.—Dye with ¼ oz. Diamine orange B, 3 oz. Diamine
blue R W, ½ lb. soda, 2 lb. soap and 5 lb. Glauber's salt, fixing with 1 lb.
sulphate of copper and ½ lb. acetic acid.
Slate Blue.—Dye with ¼ lb. Diamine dark blue B, 2 oz. Diamine new blue
R, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt; fix with 2 lb. sulphate of copper and
1 lb. acetic acid.
Page 113
Grey.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Cross-dye black 2 B, 5 lb. soda ash,
15 lb. common salt; after rinsing leave the cotton in the air to age overnight,
rinse again and work for half to three-quarters of an hour at from 150° to
160° F. in a bath containing 5 lb. bichromate of potash and 5 lb. sulphuric
acid, then thoroughly rinse and dry.
Dark Grey.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine jet black Cr, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, fixing with 1 lb. bichromate of potash and ½ lb. acetic acid.
Green Grey.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine dark blue B, 2 oz. Diamine orange B,
4 oz. Diamine fast yellow B, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, fixing with
3 lb. sulphate of copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Grey.—Dye with 4 oz. Dianil black N, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. salt, fixing with
1 lb. copper sulphate and ½ lb. acetic acid.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5½ lb. Diamine jet black R B, 1 lb.
Diamine dark blue B, 20 lb. Glauber's salt; dye at the boil for one hour,
rinse and then treat the goods simmering for twenty minutes with 4 lb.
bichromate of potash.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 8 lb. Chromanil black R F and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt; dye at the boil for one hour, then treat boiling hot for about
thirty minutes in a fresh bath with 1 lb. bichromate of potash and 3 lb.
sulphate of copper. Add 6 lb. only of the dye-stuff to the bath for a second
batch.
Black.—Use 5 lb. Dianil black N, 5 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt; then fix with 3
lb. copper sulphate, 3 lb. bichromate of potash and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Black.—Use in the dye-bath 5 lb. Dianil black C R. 3 lb. caustic soda, 36°
Tw. and 20 lb. salt, fixing with 3 lb. copper sulphate, 3 lb. bichromate of
potash and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Jet Black.—Dye with 5 lb. Diamine jet black Cr, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, fixing with 4 lb. bichromate of potash and 2 lb. acetic acid.
It will be convenient here to deal with a small but growing and important
class of dye-stuffs which contain sulphur in their composition, and which,
therefore, are named:—
15 lb. common salt; after rinsing leave the cotton in the air to age overnight,
rinse again and work for half to three-quarters of an hour at from 150° to
160° F. in a bath containing 5 lb. bichromate of potash and 5 lb. sulphuric
acid, then thoroughly rinse and dry.
Dark Grey.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine jet black Cr, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, fixing with 1 lb. bichromate of potash and ½ lb. acetic acid.
Green Grey.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine dark blue B, 2 oz. Diamine orange B,
4 oz. Diamine fast yellow B, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, fixing with
3 lb. sulphate of copper and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Grey.—Dye with 4 oz. Dianil black N, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. salt, fixing with
1 lb. copper sulphate and ½ lb. acetic acid.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5½ lb. Diamine jet black R B, 1 lb.
Diamine dark blue B, 20 lb. Glauber's salt; dye at the boil for one hour,
rinse and then treat the goods simmering for twenty minutes with 4 lb.
bichromate of potash.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 8 lb. Chromanil black R F and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt; dye at the boil for one hour, then treat boiling hot for about
thirty minutes in a fresh bath with 1 lb. bichromate of potash and 3 lb.
sulphate of copper. Add 6 lb. only of the dye-stuff to the bath for a second
batch.
Black.—Use 5 lb. Dianil black N, 5 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt; then fix with 3
lb. copper sulphate, 3 lb. bichromate of potash and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Black.—Use in the dye-bath 5 lb. Dianil black C R. 3 lb. caustic soda, 36°
Tw. and 20 lb. salt, fixing with 3 lb. copper sulphate, 3 lb. bichromate of
potash and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Jet Black.—Dye with 5 lb. Diamine jet black Cr, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, fixing with 4 lb. bichromate of potash and 2 lb. acetic acid.
It will be convenient here to deal with a small but growing and important
class of dye-stuffs which contain sulphur in their composition, and which,
therefore, are named:—
Page 114
Sulphur or Sulphyl Colours.
The original type of this group is Cachou de laval, sent out a good many
years ago, but of late years Vidal black, St. Dennis black, Cross-dye blacks
and drab, Immedial blacks, blues and browns, Amidazol blacks, browns and
olives, Sulfaniline black and brown, Katigen blacks, greens and browns,
etc., have been added, and the group is likely to become a very numerous
one in the future.
All these colours are dyed on to the cotton or linen from baths containing
soda and salt, while some require the addition of sodium sulphide or caustic
soda in order to have the dye-stuff properly dissolved. They are very weak
dyes compared with the direct colours, and require from 20 to 60 per cent.
to produce full shades, although of this fully one-third remains in the bath
unabsorbed by the cotton. It is, therefore, important in order to work as
economically as possible to retain the bath, bringing it up to strength by the
addition of fresh dye-stuffs, etc.
Most of the dyes require the dyed goods to pass through a second bath of
some reagent, bichromate of potash, sulphate of copper, etc., in order to
fully develop and fix the dye on the fabric.
The best method of using the various dyes of this group will be given in the
form of formulæ. Two points of importance are to use as strong a dye liquor
as possible, and to expose the cotton as little as possible to the air during the
dyeing operation. The dye-stuffs when exposed to the air readily become
oxidised, and are thereby converted into insoluble products which become
fixed on the fibre in a loose form, and in that case the dyed fibre rubs rather
badly.
Pale Brown.—Prepare a dye-bath with 15 lb. Cachou de laval, 10 lb. of
soda, and 10 lb. salt. The bath is not exhausted of colouring matter, and by
adding one-half of the above quantities of dye-stuff and salt may be used
again for another lot of cotton. After the dyeing the cotton is passed into a
fixing bath of 2 lb. bichromate of potash and 1 lb. acetic acid, working at
180° F. ten to fifteen minutes.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 200 gallons of water, 10 lb. soda, 10 lb.
sulphide of sodium, 60 lb. salt and 16 lb. Immedial black V extra. Work at
The original type of this group is Cachou de laval, sent out a good many
years ago, but of late years Vidal black, St. Dennis black, Cross-dye blacks
and drab, Immedial blacks, blues and browns, Amidazol blacks, browns and
olives, Sulfaniline black and brown, Katigen blacks, greens and browns,
etc., have been added, and the group is likely to become a very numerous
one in the future.
All these colours are dyed on to the cotton or linen from baths containing
soda and salt, while some require the addition of sodium sulphide or caustic
soda in order to have the dye-stuff properly dissolved. They are very weak
dyes compared with the direct colours, and require from 20 to 60 per cent.
to produce full shades, although of this fully one-third remains in the bath
unabsorbed by the cotton. It is, therefore, important in order to work as
economically as possible to retain the bath, bringing it up to strength by the
addition of fresh dye-stuffs, etc.
Most of the dyes require the dyed goods to pass through a second bath of
some reagent, bichromate of potash, sulphate of copper, etc., in order to
fully develop and fix the dye on the fabric.
The best method of using the various dyes of this group will be given in the
form of formulæ. Two points of importance are to use as strong a dye liquor
as possible, and to expose the cotton as little as possible to the air during the
dyeing operation. The dye-stuffs when exposed to the air readily become
oxidised, and are thereby converted into insoluble products which become
fixed on the fibre in a loose form, and in that case the dyed fibre rubs rather
badly.
Pale Brown.—Prepare a dye-bath with 15 lb. Cachou de laval, 10 lb. of
soda, and 10 lb. salt. The bath is not exhausted of colouring matter, and by
adding one-half of the above quantities of dye-stuff and salt may be used
again for another lot of cotton. After the dyeing the cotton is passed into a
fixing bath of 2 lb. bichromate of potash and 1 lb. acetic acid, working at
180° F. ten to fifteen minutes.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 200 gallons of water, 10 lb. soda, 10 lb.
sulphide of sodium, 60 lb. salt and 16 lb. Immedial black V extra. Work at
Page 115
the boil for one hour, keeping the cotton well under the surface during the
operation, in the case of yarns this is effected by using bent iron rods on
which to hang the hanks in the vat, in the case of pieces by working with
vats the guide rollers of which are below the surface of the dye liquor. After
the dyeing the yarn or pieces are squeezed, well rinsed in water, then passed
into the fixing bath, which contains 2 lb. sulphate of copper, 2 lb.
bichromate of potash and 3 lb. of acetic acid, for half an hour at 170° to
180° F. Bichromate of potash used alone gives a reddish shade of black,
sulphate of copper a greenish shade, a mixture of the two gives a greenish
shade.
There are three brands of Immedial black, viz., V extra, G extra and F F,
which vary a little in the tone of black they produce. The method of using is
identical for all three. The dye-bath is not exhausted of colour and so should
be kept standing, for each subsequent lot of cotton add 8 lb. Immedial black
and 3 lb. sulphide of soda, and to every 10 gallons of water added to bring
the bath up to volume ½ lb. soda and 3 lb. salt.
These blacks are very fast to washing, light, etc. By using smaller quantities
of dye-stuff good greys can be dyed.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 10 lb. soda, 10 lb. sulphide of sodium,
60 lb. salt and 25 lb. Vidal black, work at the boil for one hour, then rinse
and fix with 3 lb bichromate of potash and 2 lb. sulphuric acid.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 30 lb. Cross-dye black B, 10 lb. soda,
150 lb. salt. Dissolve the dye-stuff in boiling water, then add the soda
crystals and finally the salt. Enter the previously well-boiled cotton at about
175° F. After a few turns raise the temperature to the boil as quickly as
possible, and work for one hour (just at the boil). Lift and thoroughly rinse
without delay. (The better the cotton is washed the clearer the ultimate
shade.) After washing, wring up and let air age for about one hour; the
intensity of the black is thereby increased.
Meanwhile prepare a bath with 5 lb. bichromate of potash, 4 lb. sulphuric
acid (168° Tw.). Enter at 150° to 160° F., and work at this for about ten
minutes. After chroming, wash thoroughly to remove all traces of acid. At
this stage, the usual softening may take place if desirable, and finally dry at
a low temperature.
operation, in the case of yarns this is effected by using bent iron rods on
which to hang the hanks in the vat, in the case of pieces by working with
vats the guide rollers of which are below the surface of the dye liquor. After
the dyeing the yarn or pieces are squeezed, well rinsed in water, then passed
into the fixing bath, which contains 2 lb. sulphate of copper, 2 lb.
bichromate of potash and 3 lb. of acetic acid, for half an hour at 170° to
180° F. Bichromate of potash used alone gives a reddish shade of black,
sulphate of copper a greenish shade, a mixture of the two gives a greenish
shade.
There are three brands of Immedial black, viz., V extra, G extra and F F,
which vary a little in the tone of black they produce. The method of using is
identical for all three. The dye-bath is not exhausted of colour and so should
be kept standing, for each subsequent lot of cotton add 8 lb. Immedial black
and 3 lb. sulphide of soda, and to every 10 gallons of water added to bring
the bath up to volume ½ lb. soda and 3 lb. salt.
These blacks are very fast to washing, light, etc. By using smaller quantities
of dye-stuff good greys can be dyed.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 10 lb. soda, 10 lb. sulphide of sodium,
60 lb. salt and 25 lb. Vidal black, work at the boil for one hour, then rinse
and fix with 3 lb bichromate of potash and 2 lb. sulphuric acid.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 30 lb. Cross-dye black B, 10 lb. soda,
150 lb. salt. Dissolve the dye-stuff in boiling water, then add the soda
crystals and finally the salt. Enter the previously well-boiled cotton at about
175° F. After a few turns raise the temperature to the boil as quickly as
possible, and work for one hour (just at the boil). Lift and thoroughly rinse
without delay. (The better the cotton is washed the clearer the ultimate
shade.) After washing, wring up and let air age for about one hour; the
intensity of the black is thereby increased.
Meanwhile prepare a bath with 5 lb. bichromate of potash, 4 lb. sulphuric
acid (168° Tw.). Enter at 150° to 160° F., and work at this for about ten
minutes. After chroming, wash thoroughly to remove all traces of acid. At
this stage, the usual softening may take place if desirable, and finally dry at
a low temperature.
Page 116
The bath is kept up for further lots, and three-fourths the quantity of
colouring matter, and about half soda and one fourth salt are used. Wood, or
iron cisterns are most suitable, and copper pans or pipes must be avoided.
The dye-bath should be kept as short as possible, about twelve to fifteen
times the amount of water on the weight of cotton is advisable. The cotton
when in the dye-bath should be exposed as little as possible to the air.
There are several brands of these Cross-dye blacks varying in the tone of
black they give.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. soda ash, 200 lb. salt and 20 lb.
Amidazol black G, this is heated to 150° F., the cotton is entered, the heat
raised to the boil, and the dyeing done for an hour at that heat. Lift, rinse
well, then pass into a chroming bath, made from 5 lb. bichromate of potash
and 3 lb. sulphuric acid, used at 160° F. for twenty minutes, then lift, wash
well and dry. The bath may be kept standing and used for other lots of
cotton by replenishing with about two-thirds of the original weight of dye-
stuff and a little soda. There are four brands of these Amidazol blacks which
dye from a jet black with the G to a deep blue black with the 6 G brand. The
G, 2 G, and 4 G, used in small quantities, 2½ to 3 lb., dye good greys of a
bluish tone, the 6 G gives a dull blue, the 4 G and 6 G, used in the
proportions of 7½ to 10 per cent., give dark blues.
All these blacks may be combined with aniline black with good results as
shown in the following recipe:—
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 10 lb. Amidazol black 2 G, 5 lb. soda
and 100 lb. salt. Work at the boil for an hour, then rinse, pass into a cold
bath made from 2½ lb. aniline oil, 2½ lb. hydrochloric acid, 6½ lb.
sulphuric acid, 7½ lb. bichromate of potash, and 5½ lb. perchloride of iron,
66° Tw. This is used cold for an hour, then the heat is slowly raised to 160°
F., when the operation is finished, and the cotton is taken out well rinsed
and finished as usual. Any of this class of black may be so topped with
aniline black if thought necessary A very fast black is thus got.
Black.—Make the dye-bath with 15 lb. Sulfaniline black G, 60 lb. salt, 10
lb. soda, and 5 lb. sulphide of sodium. Work at a little under the boil, then
lift, rinse well and pass into a hot bath of 3 lb. bichromate of potash, 3 lb.
colouring matter, and about half soda and one fourth salt are used. Wood, or
iron cisterns are most suitable, and copper pans or pipes must be avoided.
The dye-bath should be kept as short as possible, about twelve to fifteen
times the amount of water on the weight of cotton is advisable. The cotton
when in the dye-bath should be exposed as little as possible to the air.
There are several brands of these Cross-dye blacks varying in the tone of
black they give.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. soda ash, 200 lb. salt and 20 lb.
Amidazol black G, this is heated to 150° F., the cotton is entered, the heat
raised to the boil, and the dyeing done for an hour at that heat. Lift, rinse
well, then pass into a chroming bath, made from 5 lb. bichromate of potash
and 3 lb. sulphuric acid, used at 160° F. for twenty minutes, then lift, wash
well and dry. The bath may be kept standing and used for other lots of
cotton by replenishing with about two-thirds of the original weight of dye-
stuff and a little soda. There are four brands of these Amidazol blacks which
dye from a jet black with the G to a deep blue black with the 6 G brand. The
G, 2 G, and 4 G, used in small quantities, 2½ to 3 lb., dye good greys of a
bluish tone, the 6 G gives a dull blue, the 4 G and 6 G, used in the
proportions of 7½ to 10 per cent., give dark blues.
All these blacks may be combined with aniline black with good results as
shown in the following recipe:—
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 10 lb. Amidazol black 2 G, 5 lb. soda
and 100 lb. salt. Work at the boil for an hour, then rinse, pass into a cold
bath made from 2½ lb. aniline oil, 2½ lb. hydrochloric acid, 6½ lb.
sulphuric acid, 7½ lb. bichromate of potash, and 5½ lb. perchloride of iron,
66° Tw. This is used cold for an hour, then the heat is slowly raised to 160°
F., when the operation is finished, and the cotton is taken out well rinsed
and finished as usual. Any of this class of black may be so topped with
aniline black if thought necessary A very fast black is thus got.
Black.—Make the dye-bath with 15 lb. Sulfaniline black G, 60 lb. salt, 10
lb. soda, and 5 lb. sulphide of sodium. Work at a little under the boil, then
lift, rinse well and pass into a hot bath of 3 lb. bichromate of potash, 3 lb.
Page 117
sulphate of copper, and 4 lb. acetic acid for half an hour, then lift, rinse well
and dry.
It has been observed in the practical application on a large scale of these
sulphur blacks that the cotton is liable to become tendered on being stored,
although there are few signs of such after the dyeing is finished. The exact
cause of this is somewhat uncertain, the most probable reason is that during
the process of dyeing a deposit of sulphur in a fine state of division has
been thrown down on the cotton by decomposition of the dye-stuff, and that
this sulphur has in time become oxidised to sulphuric acid which then
exerts its well-known tendering action on the cotton.
The remedy for this evil lies partly with the dye manufacturer and chiefly
with the dyer. The dye manufacturer should see that his product is made as
free from sulphur as possible, while the dyer by careful attention to
thorough washing, thorough fixation in the chrome, etc. baths, tends to
eliminate all sulphur from the goods, and so prevent all possibility of the
cotton becoming affected.
Blue.—Make the dye-bath with 22 lb. Immedial blue C, 13 lb. sulphide of
sodium, 50 lb. salt and 15 lb. caustic soda lye at 70° Tw. Work at just under
the boil for one hour, keeping the goods well under the surface of the liquor.
After the dyeing the goods are well rinsed in the water and then passed into
a vat which contains 1 lb. peroxide of sodium and 1 lb. sulphuric acid. This
is started cold, after about fifteen minutes heat slowly to about 150°, work
for twenty minutes, then lift, wash and dry. For subsequent lots of cotton
there only need be used 7 lb. Immedial blue C. 2 lb. sulphide of sodium, 3
lb. salt and 1½ lb. caustic soda lye at 70° Tw. The blue may also be
developed by steaming with air in a suitable chest or steaming chamber. By
topping with ¼ lb. New methylene blue N, very bright blue shades can be
dyed.
Dark Navy.—Prepare the dye-bath with 25 lb. Immedial blue C, 24 lb.
sulphide of sodium, 35 lb. common salt and 12 lb. caustic soda lye, working
at the boil for one hour, then rinse and develop in a bath made from 2½ lb.
peroxide of sodium and 2½ lb. sulphuric acid, started cold, then after
twenty minutes heated to 160° F., twenty minutes longer at that heat will be
sufficient. For second and subsequent lots of cotton there is added to the old
and dry.
It has been observed in the practical application on a large scale of these
sulphur blacks that the cotton is liable to become tendered on being stored,
although there are few signs of such after the dyeing is finished. The exact
cause of this is somewhat uncertain, the most probable reason is that during
the process of dyeing a deposit of sulphur in a fine state of division has
been thrown down on the cotton by decomposition of the dye-stuff, and that
this sulphur has in time become oxidised to sulphuric acid which then
exerts its well-known tendering action on the cotton.
The remedy for this evil lies partly with the dye manufacturer and chiefly
with the dyer. The dye manufacturer should see that his product is made as
free from sulphur as possible, while the dyer by careful attention to
thorough washing, thorough fixation in the chrome, etc. baths, tends to
eliminate all sulphur from the goods, and so prevent all possibility of the
cotton becoming affected.
Blue.—Make the dye-bath with 22 lb. Immedial blue C, 13 lb. sulphide of
sodium, 50 lb. salt and 15 lb. caustic soda lye at 70° Tw. Work at just under
the boil for one hour, keeping the goods well under the surface of the liquor.
After the dyeing the goods are well rinsed in the water and then passed into
a vat which contains 1 lb. peroxide of sodium and 1 lb. sulphuric acid. This
is started cold, after about fifteen minutes heat slowly to about 150°, work
for twenty minutes, then lift, wash and dry. For subsequent lots of cotton
there only need be used 7 lb. Immedial blue C. 2 lb. sulphide of sodium, 3
lb. salt and 1½ lb. caustic soda lye at 70° Tw. The blue may also be
developed by steaming with air in a suitable chest or steaming chamber. By
topping with ¼ lb. New methylene blue N, very bright blue shades can be
dyed.
Dark Navy.—Prepare the dye-bath with 25 lb. Immedial blue C, 24 lb.
sulphide of sodium, 35 lb. common salt and 12 lb. caustic soda lye, working
at the boil for one hour, then rinse and develop in a bath made from 2½ lb.
peroxide of sodium and 2½ lb. sulphuric acid, started cold, then after
twenty minutes heated to 160° F., twenty minutes longer at that heat will be
sufficient. For second and subsequent lots of cotton there is added to the old
Page 118
bath 15 lb. Immedial blue C, 4 lb. sulphide of sodium, 5 lb. salt and 2 lb.
caustic soda lye of 70° Tw.
Blue.—A pale but not very bright shade of blue is dyed in a bath of 3 lb.
Amidazol black 6 G, 5 lb. soda and 25 lb. salt. After working for one hour
at the boil, lift, rinse and pass into a bath which contains 2½ lb. peroxide of
sodium and 2½ lb. sulphuric acid; this is started cold, then heated to 150°
F., and kept at that heat for twenty minutes, when the cotton is taken out,
well washed and dried.
Deep Blue.—Dye with 20 lb. Amidazol black 6 G, 5 lb. soda and 200 lb.
salt; develop with 2 lb. peroxide of sodium and 2½ lb. sulphuric acid,
working as noted above.
Dark Drab.—Prepare the dye-bath with 20 lb. Cross-dye drab, 5 lb. soda
crystals and 80 lb. salt, work at the boil for an hour, then lift, wash well and
dry; this can be chromed if desired.
Brown.—Dye with 20 lb. Amidazol cutch, 5 lb. soda ash and 150 lb. salt,
working at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash thoroughly and dry. By after
treatment in a bath of 3 lb. potassium bichromate and 3 lb. sulphuric acid
the colour is made fast to washing. The shade is not altered.
Buff.—Dye with 2½ lb. Amidazol cutch, 5 lb. soda and 25 lb. salt, working
at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Pale Sea Green.—Dye with 4 lb. Amidazol green Y, 5 lb. soda and 25 lb.
salt, working at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash well and dry.
Dark Green.—Dye with 20 lb. Amidazol green B, 5 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt;
work at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash thoroughly and dry.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 20 lb. Amidazol cachou, 5 lb. soda and 200 lb.
salt, working for an hour at the boil, then lift, rinse well and pass into a
chrome bath of 4 lb. potassium bichromate and 3 lb. sulphuric acid at 50° F.
for half an hour, then wash well and dry.
Dark Sage.—Dye with 20 lb. Amidazol drab, 5 lb. soda ash and 150 lb. salt
for an hour at the boil, then lift and chrome with 4 lb. potassium bichromate
caustic soda lye of 70° Tw.
Blue.—A pale but not very bright shade of blue is dyed in a bath of 3 lb.
Amidazol black 6 G, 5 lb. soda and 25 lb. salt. After working for one hour
at the boil, lift, rinse and pass into a bath which contains 2½ lb. peroxide of
sodium and 2½ lb. sulphuric acid; this is started cold, then heated to 150°
F., and kept at that heat for twenty minutes, when the cotton is taken out,
well washed and dried.
Deep Blue.—Dye with 20 lb. Amidazol black 6 G, 5 lb. soda and 200 lb.
salt; develop with 2 lb. peroxide of sodium and 2½ lb. sulphuric acid,
working as noted above.
Dark Drab.—Prepare the dye-bath with 20 lb. Cross-dye drab, 5 lb. soda
crystals and 80 lb. salt, work at the boil for an hour, then lift, wash well and
dry; this can be chromed if desired.
Brown.—Dye with 20 lb. Amidazol cutch, 5 lb. soda ash and 150 lb. salt,
working at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash thoroughly and dry. By after
treatment in a bath of 3 lb. potassium bichromate and 3 lb. sulphuric acid
the colour is made fast to washing. The shade is not altered.
Buff.—Dye with 2½ lb. Amidazol cutch, 5 lb. soda and 25 lb. salt, working
at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Pale Sea Green.—Dye with 4 lb. Amidazol green Y, 5 lb. soda and 25 lb.
salt, working at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash well and dry.
Dark Green.—Dye with 20 lb. Amidazol green B, 5 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt;
work at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash thoroughly and dry.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 20 lb. Amidazol cachou, 5 lb. soda and 200 lb.
salt, working for an hour at the boil, then lift, rinse well and pass into a
chrome bath of 4 lb. potassium bichromate and 3 lb. sulphuric acid at 50° F.
for half an hour, then wash well and dry.
Dark Sage.—Dye with 20 lb. Amidazol drab, 5 lb. soda ash and 150 lb. salt
for an hour at the boil, then lift and chrome with 4 lb. potassium bichromate
Page 119
and 8 lb. sulphuric acid for thirty minutes at 150° F., washing well
afterwards.
All the Amidazol dyes are very fast to washing, acids, etc. They can be
treated with sulphate of copper or peroxide of sodium when they produce
good shades. They may even be diazotised and developed with beta-
naphthol and phenylene diamine. The pale tints got by using from 2 to 4 per
cent. of dye-stuff are useful ones, as also are the medium shades with 10 per
cent. of dye-stuff.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 10 lb. Sulfaniline brown 4 B, 50 lb. salt,
10 lb. soda and 5 lb sulphide of sodium; work at the boil for one hour, then
lift, wash and treat in a fresh bath with 3 lb. potassium bichromate and 2 lb.
acetic acid at 160° F. for half an hour, then wash well and dry.
Olive.—Dye with 10 lb. Katigen olive G, 50 lb. salt, 10 lb. soda and 6 lb.
sulphide of sodium; work for one hour at the boil, then lift, wash and treat
in a fresh bath with 2 lb. bichromate of potash, 2 lb. sulphate of copper and
2 lb. acetic acid for half an hour at the boil, then wash.
Dark Olive.—Dye with 20 lb. Katigen olive G, 50 lb. salt, 10 lb. soda, and
6 lb. sulphide of sodium, working at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash
and dry. By chroming a darker and faster olive is got.
Brown.—Dye with 20 lb. Katigen dark brown, 50 lb. salt, 10 lb. soda and 6
lb. sulphide of sodium at the boil for one hour, then treat in a fresh bath
with 2 lb. bichromate of potash, 2 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic
acid for half an hour at the boil, then wash well.
Pale Brown.—Dye with 8 lb. Immedial bronze A, 2 lb. soda, 2 lb. sulphide
of sodium and 10 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour, then lift, rinse
and pass into a fresh bath containing 1 lb. bichromate of potash and 2 lb.
acetic-acid at 150° F. for half an hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 12 lb. Immedial brown B, 5 lb. sulphide of
sodium, 5 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt at the boil for one hour, then lift and treat
in a fresh bath with 2 lb. bichromate of potash, 2 lb. sulphate of copper and
2 lb. acetic acid.
afterwards.
All the Amidazol dyes are very fast to washing, acids, etc. They can be
treated with sulphate of copper or peroxide of sodium when they produce
good shades. They may even be diazotised and developed with beta-
naphthol and phenylene diamine. The pale tints got by using from 2 to 4 per
cent. of dye-stuff are useful ones, as also are the medium shades with 10 per
cent. of dye-stuff.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 10 lb. Sulfaniline brown 4 B, 50 lb. salt,
10 lb. soda and 5 lb sulphide of sodium; work at the boil for one hour, then
lift, wash and treat in a fresh bath with 3 lb. potassium bichromate and 2 lb.
acetic acid at 160° F. for half an hour, then wash well and dry.
Olive.—Dye with 10 lb. Katigen olive G, 50 lb. salt, 10 lb. soda and 6 lb.
sulphide of sodium; work for one hour at the boil, then lift, wash and treat
in a fresh bath with 2 lb. bichromate of potash, 2 lb. sulphate of copper and
2 lb. acetic acid for half an hour at the boil, then wash.
Dark Olive.—Dye with 20 lb. Katigen olive G, 50 lb. salt, 10 lb. soda, and
6 lb. sulphide of sodium, working at the boil for one hour, then lift, wash
and dry. By chroming a darker and faster olive is got.
Brown.—Dye with 20 lb. Katigen dark brown, 50 lb. salt, 10 lb. soda and 6
lb. sulphide of sodium at the boil for one hour, then treat in a fresh bath
with 2 lb. bichromate of potash, 2 lb. sulphate of copper and 2 lb. acetic
acid for half an hour at the boil, then wash well.
Pale Brown.—Dye with 8 lb. Immedial bronze A, 2 lb. soda, 2 lb. sulphide
of sodium and 10 lb. Glauber's salt at the boil for one hour, then lift, rinse
and pass into a fresh bath containing 1 lb. bichromate of potash and 2 lb.
acetic-acid at 150° F. for half an hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 12 lb. Immedial brown B, 5 lb. sulphide of
sodium, 5 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt at the boil for one hour, then lift and treat
in a fresh bath with 2 lb. bichromate of potash, 2 lb. sulphate of copper and
2 lb. acetic acid.
Page 120
The Immedial blacks, blue, bronze and brown dye very fast shades,
standing soaping, acids and light. They may be combined together to
produce a great range of shades of blue, brown, green, grey, etc.
These examples will perhaps suffice to show how this new but important
class of sulphyl colours are applied to the dyeing of cotton. They may be
topped with aniline black, indigo, basic dyes, or combined with such direct
dyes as produce shades fast to chroming to form a very great range of
shades which have the merit of fastness.
(3) DIRECT DYEING FOLLOWED BY FIXATION WITH
DEVELOPERS.
A large number of the dyes prepared from coal tar are called azo colours,
such for instance are the Biebrich and Croceine scarlets and oranges,
Naphthol black, Congo red, etc., just to name a few. The preparation of
these is about the simplest operation of colour chemistry, and consists in
taking as the base an amido compound as the chemist calls such. These
amido compounds, of which aniline, toluidine, benzidine, naphthylamine
are familiar examples, are characterised by containing the molecular group
NH2, which radicle is built up of the two elements nitrogen and hydrogen.
All compounds which contain this group are basic in character and combine
with acids to form well-defined salts. When these amido bodies are treated
with sodium nitrite and hydrochloric acid they undergo a chemical change,
the feature of which is that the nitrogen atoms present in the amido
compound and in the nitrite unite together and a new compound is produced
which is called a diazo compound, and the operation is called
"diazotisation".
For example when paranitroaniline is subjected to this reaction it undergoes
a change indicated in the chemical equation:—
C6H4NO2NH2, + NaNO2, + 2HCl = Paranitroaniline, Sodium nitrite,
Hydrochloric acid.
C6H4NO2N: NCl + NaCl + 2H20 = Paranitro benzene Sodium chloride,
Water, diazo chloride.
standing soaping, acids and light. They may be combined together to
produce a great range of shades of blue, brown, green, grey, etc.
These examples will perhaps suffice to show how this new but important
class of sulphyl colours are applied to the dyeing of cotton. They may be
topped with aniline black, indigo, basic dyes, or combined with such direct
dyes as produce shades fast to chroming to form a very great range of
shades which have the merit of fastness.
(3) DIRECT DYEING FOLLOWED BY FIXATION WITH
DEVELOPERS.
A large number of the dyes prepared from coal tar are called azo colours,
such for instance are the Biebrich and Croceine scarlets and oranges,
Naphthol black, Congo red, etc., just to name a few. The preparation of
these is about the simplest operation of colour chemistry, and consists in
taking as the base an amido compound as the chemist calls such. These
amido compounds, of which aniline, toluidine, benzidine, naphthylamine
are familiar examples, are characterised by containing the molecular group
NH2, which radicle is built up of the two elements nitrogen and hydrogen.
All compounds which contain this group are basic in character and combine
with acids to form well-defined salts. When these amido bodies are treated
with sodium nitrite and hydrochloric acid they undergo a chemical change,
the feature of which is that the nitrogen atoms present in the amido
compound and in the nitrite unite together and a new compound is produced
which is called a diazo compound, and the operation is called
"diazotisation".
For example when paranitroaniline is subjected to this reaction it undergoes
a change indicated in the chemical equation:—
C6H4NO2NH2, + NaNO2, + 2HCl = Paranitroaniline, Sodium nitrite,
Hydrochloric acid.
C6H4NO2N: NCl + NaCl + 2H20 = Paranitro benzene Sodium chloride,
Water, diazo chloride.
Page 121
The above, put into words, means that when paranitroaniline is dissolved
with hydrochloric acid and treated with nitrite of soda it forms diazonitro
benzene chloride, sodium chloride and water. Now the diazo compounds
are rather unstable bodies, but they have a great affinity for other
compounds, such as naphthol, phenylene diamine, phenol, and combine
easily with them when brought into contact with them. The new compounds
thus made form the dye-stuffs of commerce.
The azo dyes contain the characteristic group of two nitrogen atoms shown
in the formula N: N. In dealing with the production of colours direct on the
fibre this subject will be elaborated more fully.
Now many of the direct dyes, Diamine blacks, Diamine cutch, Primuline,
Diazo brown, Zambesi blues, browns, etc., contain amido groups, by reason
of having been made from such bodies as phenylene diamine, amido
naphthol, toluidine, etc., and it has been found that when dyed on the fibre
they are capable of being diazotised by passing the dyed fibre into a bath of
sodium nitrite acidified with hydrochloric acid, and if then they are placed
into a bath containing such a body as beta-naphthol, phenylene diamine,
etc., new compounds or dyes are produced, which are characterised by
being insoluble in water, and therefore as formed on the fibre in the manner
indicated are very fast to washing, soaping and similar agencies.
Often the new or developed dye formed on the fibre differs markedly in
colour from the original dye. Perhaps in no case is this more strongly shown
than with Primuline. The original colour is a greenish yellow, but by using
various developers, as they are called, a great variety of shade can be got, as
shown in this table.
Developer. Colour produced.
Beta-naphthol Bright scarlet. Alpha-naphthol Crimson. Phenylene diamine
Brown. Phenol Gold yellow. Resorcine Orange. Naphthylamine ether Blue.
Blue developer A N Green.
As regards the dyeing operation, it no way differs from that described for
simple direct colours. It should, however, be noted that if good results are
required full shades must be dyed. The cotton must be rinsed in cold water,
and be quite cold before it is subjected to the diazotising operation.
with hydrochloric acid and treated with nitrite of soda it forms diazonitro
benzene chloride, sodium chloride and water. Now the diazo compounds
are rather unstable bodies, but they have a great affinity for other
compounds, such as naphthol, phenylene diamine, phenol, and combine
easily with them when brought into contact with them. The new compounds
thus made form the dye-stuffs of commerce.
The azo dyes contain the characteristic group of two nitrogen atoms shown
in the formula N: N. In dealing with the production of colours direct on the
fibre this subject will be elaborated more fully.
Now many of the direct dyes, Diamine blacks, Diamine cutch, Primuline,
Diazo brown, Zambesi blues, browns, etc., contain amido groups, by reason
of having been made from such bodies as phenylene diamine, amido
naphthol, toluidine, etc., and it has been found that when dyed on the fibre
they are capable of being diazotised by passing the dyed fibre into a bath of
sodium nitrite acidified with hydrochloric acid, and if then they are placed
into a bath containing such a body as beta-naphthol, phenylene diamine,
etc., new compounds or dyes are produced, which are characterised by
being insoluble in water, and therefore as formed on the fibre in the manner
indicated are very fast to washing, soaping and similar agencies.
Often the new or developed dye formed on the fibre differs markedly in
colour from the original dye. Perhaps in no case is this more strongly shown
than with Primuline. The original colour is a greenish yellow, but by using
various developers, as they are called, a great variety of shade can be got, as
shown in this table.
Developer. Colour produced.
Beta-naphthol Bright scarlet. Alpha-naphthol Crimson. Phenylene diamine
Brown. Phenol Gold yellow. Resorcine Orange. Naphthylamine ether Blue.
Blue developer A N Green.
As regards the dyeing operation, it no way differs from that described for
simple direct colours. It should, however, be noted that if good results are
required full shades must be dyed. The cotton must be rinsed in cold water,
and be quite cold before it is subjected to the diazotising operation.
Page 122
Diazotising is a simple operation, yet it must be carried out with care if
good results are desired. It consists essentially in the use of an acidulated
bath of sodium nitrite.
To make the bath for diazotising there is taken (for each 100 lb. of goods)
sufficient water to handle them in comfortably, 8 lb. of sodium nitrite and 6
lb. hydrochloric acid. This bath must be quite cold otherwise it does not
work well. The goods are handled in this for from fifteen to twenty minutes,
when they are ready for the next operation. The bath is not exhausted of
nitrite, etc., hence it can be kept standing, and for each succeeding lot of
cotton it is strengthened up by adding one-third of the quantities of nitrite
and acid originally used. Of course the bath cannot be kept for ever, sooner
or later it will get dirty, and then it must be thrown away and a new bath be
made up.
The diazo compounds formed on the fibre are not very stable bodies. They
decompose on being exposed for any great length of time to the air, while
light has a strong action on most, if not all of them; hence it follows that the
diazotising process should not be carried out in a room where direct, strong
sunlight can enter or fall upon the goods. Then again, after diazotising, the
treated goods should not be allowed to lie about exposed to air and light,
but the operation of developing should be proceeded with at once,
otherwise the diazo body will decompose, and weak and defective colours
are liable to be obtained on subsequent development.
For developing, quite a large number of substances are used. Some of these
are regular articles of commerce, others are the special productions of
certain firms, who advise their use with the dyes that they also manufacture.
These latter are sent out under such designations as Developer B, Developer
A N, or Fast-blue developer. Those most in use are beta-naphthol for red
from Primuline, and for bluish blacks from Diamine blacks, Diazo blacks,
Zambesi blacks, etc.; for dark blues from Diamine blues, Diazo blues, etc.;
for greys from Diamine blues, Neutral grey, etc. Alpha-naphthol for dark
reds from Primuline, greys from Diamine blues, Neutral grey, etc.
Phenylene diamine for blacks from Diamine blacks, Diazo blacks, Zambesi
blacks, Triamine blacks, etc.; for dark browns from Diamine browns, Diazo
browns, etc.; for light browns from Cotton browns, Diamine cutch,
Primuline, etc. Naphthylamine ether for blues from Diamine blacks, etc.
good results are desired. It consists essentially in the use of an acidulated
bath of sodium nitrite.
To make the bath for diazotising there is taken (for each 100 lb. of goods)
sufficient water to handle them in comfortably, 8 lb. of sodium nitrite and 6
lb. hydrochloric acid. This bath must be quite cold otherwise it does not
work well. The goods are handled in this for from fifteen to twenty minutes,
when they are ready for the next operation. The bath is not exhausted of
nitrite, etc., hence it can be kept standing, and for each succeeding lot of
cotton it is strengthened up by adding one-third of the quantities of nitrite
and acid originally used. Of course the bath cannot be kept for ever, sooner
or later it will get dirty, and then it must be thrown away and a new bath be
made up.
The diazo compounds formed on the fibre are not very stable bodies. They
decompose on being exposed for any great length of time to the air, while
light has a strong action on most, if not all of them; hence it follows that the
diazotising process should not be carried out in a room where direct, strong
sunlight can enter or fall upon the goods. Then again, after diazotising, the
treated goods should not be allowed to lie about exposed to air and light,
but the operation of developing should be proceeded with at once,
otherwise the diazo body will decompose, and weak and defective colours
are liable to be obtained on subsequent development.
For developing, quite a large number of substances are used. Some of these
are regular articles of commerce, others are the special productions of
certain firms, who advise their use with the dyes that they also manufacture.
These latter are sent out under such designations as Developer B, Developer
A N, or Fast-blue developer. Those most in use are beta-naphthol for red
from Primuline, and for bluish blacks from Diamine blacks, Diazo blacks,
Zambesi blacks, etc.; for dark blues from Diamine blues, Diazo blues, etc.;
for greys from Diamine blues, Neutral grey, etc. Alpha-naphthol for dark
reds from Primuline, greys from Diamine blues, Neutral grey, etc.
Phenylene diamine for blacks from Diamine blacks, Diazo blacks, Zambesi
blacks, Triamine blacks, etc.; for dark browns from Diamine browns, Diazo
browns, etc.; for light browns from Cotton browns, Diamine cutch,
Primuline, etc. Naphthylamine ether for blues from Diamine blacks, etc.
Page 123
Phenol for claret from Diamine cutch, and for gold yellow from Primuline,
etc. Resorcine for orange from Primuline, etc. Soda for browns from
Diamine cutch, Diazo browns, Zambesi browns, for orange from Diamine
orange, and yellow from Primuline.
Beta-naphthol.—This is by far the most important of the developers. It is a
white body, insoluble in water, but readily soluble in soda lye, and a
solution is easily made by taking 10 lb. beta-naphthol and heating it with 10
lb. caustic soda lye of 70° Tw. and 60 gallons of water. This bath may be
used as the developing bath, or it may be diluted with more water. It is not
desirable to use any more caustic soda than is necessary to dissolve the
beta-naphthol, so that the bath is not too alkaline. To produce full shades it
usually takes 1 per cent. of the weight of the cotton of the beta-naphthol,
but it is best to use the bath as a continuous one and for the first lot of
cotton use 2 per cent. of naphthol, while for each succeeding lot only 1 per
cent. more naphthol need be added to the same bath.
This bath is alkaline, while the diazotising bath is acid, unless, therefore,
the cotton be well washed when it is taken from the latter bath there is a risk
of the alkali of the one being neutralised by the acidity of the other, and the
naphthol being thrown out in an insoluble form. This, of course, is easily
remedied should it occur.
Developer A (Bayer) is a mixture of beta-naphthol and caustic soda in the
powder form, so that a solution is obtained by simply adding water. Rather
more (about 1½ per cent.) of this is required than of beta-naphthol.
Alpha-naphthol has similar properties to, and is used in the same way as,
beta-naphthol; it develops much darker and rather duller colours, which are
less fast to washing.
Resorcine, like naphthol, is insoluble in water, but it can be dissolved by
using either soda ash or caustic soda. The latter is preferable, as the former
is liable to give a developing bath that froths in working, especially if much
acid has been left in the cotton from the diazotising bath. The proportions
are: 10 lb. resorcine, 25 lb. caustic soda lye of 70° Tw., and 60 gallons of
water; or 10 lb. resorcine, 20 lb. soda ash, and 60 gallons of water, heated
until a solution is obtained. In the developing bath 1 per cent. of resorcine is
usually sufficient to use. It develops an orange with Primuline.
etc. Resorcine for orange from Primuline, etc. Soda for browns from
Diamine cutch, Diazo browns, Zambesi browns, for orange from Diamine
orange, and yellow from Primuline.
Beta-naphthol.—This is by far the most important of the developers. It is a
white body, insoluble in water, but readily soluble in soda lye, and a
solution is easily made by taking 10 lb. beta-naphthol and heating it with 10
lb. caustic soda lye of 70° Tw. and 60 gallons of water. This bath may be
used as the developing bath, or it may be diluted with more water. It is not
desirable to use any more caustic soda than is necessary to dissolve the
beta-naphthol, so that the bath is not too alkaline. To produce full shades it
usually takes 1 per cent. of the weight of the cotton of the beta-naphthol,
but it is best to use the bath as a continuous one and for the first lot of
cotton use 2 per cent. of naphthol, while for each succeeding lot only 1 per
cent. more naphthol need be added to the same bath.
This bath is alkaline, while the diazotising bath is acid, unless, therefore,
the cotton be well washed when it is taken from the latter bath there is a risk
of the alkali of the one being neutralised by the acidity of the other, and the
naphthol being thrown out in an insoluble form. This, of course, is easily
remedied should it occur.
Developer A (Bayer) is a mixture of beta-naphthol and caustic soda in the
powder form, so that a solution is obtained by simply adding water. Rather
more (about 1½ per cent.) of this is required than of beta-naphthol.
Alpha-naphthol has similar properties to, and is used in the same way as,
beta-naphthol; it develops much darker and rather duller colours, which are
less fast to washing.
Resorcine, like naphthol, is insoluble in water, but it can be dissolved by
using either soda ash or caustic soda. The latter is preferable, as the former
is liable to give a developing bath that froths in working, especially if much
acid has been left in the cotton from the diazotising bath. The proportions
are: 10 lb. resorcine, 25 lb. caustic soda lye of 70° Tw., and 60 gallons of
water; or 10 lb. resorcine, 20 lb. soda ash, and 60 gallons of water, heated
until a solution is obtained. In the developing bath 1 per cent. of resorcine is
usually sufficient to use. It develops an orange with Primuline.
Page 124
Developer F (Bayer) is a mixture of resorcine and soda ash. It requires 1½
per cent, to make a developing bath.
Phenol, better known as carbolic acid, finds a use as a developer. It is
dissolved in caustic soda, 10 lb. phenol, 15 lb. caustic soda lye of 70° Tw.,
and 60 gallons of water. Generally 1 per cent. is sufficient to use as a
developer. It is often called yellow developer.
Naphthylamine ether is used as a developer for blues in conjunction with
the Diamine blacks. It is prepared for use by dissolving in hydrochloric
acid, 10 lb. naphthylamine ether powder heated with 5 lb. hydrochloric acid
and 50 gallons water. About 1¼ per cent. is required to form a developing
bath. Naphthylamine ether is also sent out in the form of a paste mixed with
acid, and containing about 25 per cent. of the actual developer.
Fast blue developer A D (Cassella), is amidodiphenylamine. It is insoluble
in water, but soluble in dilute acid, 10 lb. fast blue developer A D, 5 lb.
hydrochloric acid and 35 gallons of water making the bath. To develop full
shades 1 to 1½ per cent, is required.
Blue developer A N (Cassella). The base of this is insoluble in water, but
dissolves in soda, and is probably a naphthol-sulpho acid. The product, as
met with in the market, is soluble in water, and 27 lb. dissolved in 20
gallons of water form the bath. To produce full shades 1½ per cent, is
usually required.
Phenylene diamine is a most important developer. It comes into the market
in two forms, as a powder, very nearly pure, made into a solution by
dissolving 10 lb. with 20 gallons of water and 5 lb. hydrochloric acid, and
as a solution prepared ready for use. Developer C (Bayer) and developer E
(Bayer) are preparations of diamine, the former in a powder, the latter in a
solution. Phenylene diamine can be used with the addition to the developing
bath of acetic acid or soda.
Schaeffer's acid is a sulpho acid of beta-naphthol, and is dissolved by
taking 10 lb. of the acid and 7½ lb. soda, boiling with 50 gallons of water.
About 1¼ per cent. is required for developing full shades.
Developer B (Bayer) is ethyl beta-naphthylamine, in the form of its
hydrochloric acid compound. The bath is made from 10 lb. of the developer
per cent, to make a developing bath.
Phenol, better known as carbolic acid, finds a use as a developer. It is
dissolved in caustic soda, 10 lb. phenol, 15 lb. caustic soda lye of 70° Tw.,
and 60 gallons of water. Generally 1 per cent. is sufficient to use as a
developer. It is often called yellow developer.
Naphthylamine ether is used as a developer for blues in conjunction with
the Diamine blacks. It is prepared for use by dissolving in hydrochloric
acid, 10 lb. naphthylamine ether powder heated with 5 lb. hydrochloric acid
and 50 gallons water. About 1¼ per cent. is required to form a developing
bath. Naphthylamine ether is also sent out in the form of a paste mixed with
acid, and containing about 25 per cent. of the actual developer.
Fast blue developer A D (Cassella), is amidodiphenylamine. It is insoluble
in water, but soluble in dilute acid, 10 lb. fast blue developer A D, 5 lb.
hydrochloric acid and 35 gallons of water making the bath. To develop full
shades 1 to 1½ per cent, is required.
Blue developer A N (Cassella). The base of this is insoluble in water, but
dissolves in soda, and is probably a naphthol-sulpho acid. The product, as
met with in the market, is soluble in water, and 27 lb. dissolved in 20
gallons of water form the bath. To produce full shades 1½ per cent, is
usually required.
Phenylene diamine is a most important developer. It comes into the market
in two forms, as a powder, very nearly pure, made into a solution by
dissolving 10 lb. with 20 gallons of water and 5 lb. hydrochloric acid, and
as a solution prepared ready for use. Developer C (Bayer) and developer E
(Bayer) are preparations of diamine, the former in a powder, the latter in a
solution. Phenylene diamine can be used with the addition to the developing
bath of acetic acid or soda.
Schaeffer's acid is a sulpho acid of beta-naphthol, and is dissolved by
taking 10 lb. of the acid and 7½ lb. soda, boiling with 50 gallons of water.
About 1¼ per cent. is required for developing full shades.
Developer B (Bayer) is ethyl beta-naphthylamine, in the form of its
hydrochloric acid compound. The bath is made from 10 lb. of the developer
Page 125
and 50 gallons of water, 1¼ per cent. being used to obtain full shades.
Developer D (Bayer) is dioxy-naphthalene-sulpho acid, and simply requires
dissolving in water to make the bath.
Toluylene diamine is a homologue of phenylene diamine and is used in
precisely the same way.
Generally the special developers issued by the various colour firms simply
require dissolving in water to form the developing bath.
The cotton, previously being passed through the diazotising bath, is then
run into the developing bath, in which it is kept for from twenty to thirty
minutes or until the required shade is fully developed, after which it is taken
out, rinsed and dried. The method of working is the same for all the
developers, and may be carried out in any kind of vessels. As is indicated
above, the developing baths may be kept standing and be freshened up as
required; they are used cold. Sometimes two developers are mixed together,
in which case care should be taken that an alkaline developer naphthol or
phenol be not mixed with an acid developer (phenylene diamine,
naphthylamine, etc.), unless the acidity of the latter has been neutralised
with soda; otherwise the developer might be thrown out of the bath in an
insoluble and hence useless form.
The advantages of the diazotising and developing process just described
may be summed as—easy and quick working, superior fastness to washing,
soaping and milling, increased fastness to light and softness of the dyed
fibre.
Scarlet.—Dye with 3 lb. Primuline and 20 lb. salt, at the boil for one hour,
diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Crimson.—Dye with 3 lb. Primuline and 20 lb. salt, then diazotise and
develop with alpha-naphthol.
Red Brown.—Dye with 4 lb. Primuline and 20 lb. salt, then diazotise and
develop with phenylene diamine.
Deep Orange.—Dye with 3 lb. Primuline and 20 lb. salt, then diazotise and
develop with resorcine.
Developer D (Bayer) is dioxy-naphthalene-sulpho acid, and simply requires
dissolving in water to make the bath.
Toluylene diamine is a homologue of phenylene diamine and is used in
precisely the same way.
Generally the special developers issued by the various colour firms simply
require dissolving in water to form the developing bath.
The cotton, previously being passed through the diazotising bath, is then
run into the developing bath, in which it is kept for from twenty to thirty
minutes or until the required shade is fully developed, after which it is taken
out, rinsed and dried. The method of working is the same for all the
developers, and may be carried out in any kind of vessels. As is indicated
above, the developing baths may be kept standing and be freshened up as
required; they are used cold. Sometimes two developers are mixed together,
in which case care should be taken that an alkaline developer naphthol or
phenol be not mixed with an acid developer (phenylene diamine,
naphthylamine, etc.), unless the acidity of the latter has been neutralised
with soda; otherwise the developer might be thrown out of the bath in an
insoluble and hence useless form.
The advantages of the diazotising and developing process just described
may be summed as—easy and quick working, superior fastness to washing,
soaping and milling, increased fastness to light and softness of the dyed
fibre.
Scarlet.—Dye with 3 lb. Primuline and 20 lb. salt, at the boil for one hour,
diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Crimson.—Dye with 3 lb. Primuline and 20 lb. salt, then diazotise and
develop with alpha-naphthol.
Red Brown.—Dye with 4 lb. Primuline and 20 lb. salt, then diazotise and
develop with phenylene diamine.
Deep Orange.—Dye with 3 lb. Primuline and 20 lb. salt, then diazotise and
develop with resorcine.
Page 126
Pale Orange.—Dye with 3 lb. Primuline and 20 lb. salt, then diazotise and
develop with phenol.
Sage Brown.—Dye with 6 lb. Primuline, 3 lb. Titan ingrain blue and 20 lb.
salt, then diazotise and develop with resorcine.
Dark Maroon.—Dye with 6 lb. Primuline, 3 lb. Titan ingrain blue and 20 lb.
salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Dark Crimson.—Dye with 5¾ lb. Primuline, ¼ lb. Titan ingrain blue and 20
lb. salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Dark Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Zambesi blue B X, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with amidonaphthol ether.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 8 lb. Zambesi brown 2 G, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with toluylene diamine.
Blue Black.—Dye with 4 lb. Zambesi blue B X, 2 lb. Zambesi black D, 2 lb.
soda and 20 lb. salt, then diazotise and develop with ¾ lb. toluylene
diamine and ½ lb. beta-naphthol.
Red.—Dye with 4½ lb. Primuline, ½ lb. Diamine fast yellow A and 20 lb.
salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 4 lb. Primuline, 1 lb. Diamine azo blue R R, and
20 lb. salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-napthol.
Deep Chestnut Brown.—Dye with 5 lb. Diamine cutch, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop by passing for twenty minutes in
a boiling bath of soda.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 4 lb. Diamine cutch, 1 lb. Diamine black B H, 2
lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with phenol.
Black Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine brown M, 1½ lb. Primuline, 1 oz.
Diamine black B H, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then diazotise and
develop with phenylene diamine.
Blue.—Dye with 2 lb. Diaminogene blue B B, ½ lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol. A dark blue is
develop with phenol.
Sage Brown.—Dye with 6 lb. Primuline, 3 lb. Titan ingrain blue and 20 lb.
salt, then diazotise and develop with resorcine.
Dark Maroon.—Dye with 6 lb. Primuline, 3 lb. Titan ingrain blue and 20 lb.
salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Dark Crimson.—Dye with 5¾ lb. Primuline, ¼ lb. Titan ingrain blue and 20
lb. salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Dark Blue.—Dye with 3 lb. Zambesi blue B X, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with amidonaphthol ether.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 8 lb. Zambesi brown 2 G, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with toluylene diamine.
Blue Black.—Dye with 4 lb. Zambesi blue B X, 2 lb. Zambesi black D, 2 lb.
soda and 20 lb. salt, then diazotise and develop with ¾ lb. toluylene
diamine and ½ lb. beta-naphthol.
Red.—Dye with 4½ lb. Primuline, ½ lb. Diamine fast yellow A and 20 lb.
salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 4 lb. Primuline, 1 lb. Diamine azo blue R R, and
20 lb. salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-napthol.
Deep Chestnut Brown.—Dye with 5 lb. Diamine cutch, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop by passing for twenty minutes in
a boiling bath of soda.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 4 lb. Diamine cutch, 1 lb. Diamine black B H, 2
lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with phenol.
Black Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine brown M, 1½ lb. Primuline, 1 oz.
Diamine black B H, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then diazotise and
develop with phenylene diamine.
Blue.—Dye with 2 lb. Diaminogene blue B B, ½ lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol. A dark blue is
Page 127
got by using 8 lb. of Diaminogene blue B B in the same way.
Dark Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1½ lb. Diaminogene blue B B, 1-
1/10 lb. Diamine azo blue R R, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at
the boil for one hour, rinse slightly in cold water, then enter into a fresh cold
bath prepared with 4 lb nitrite of soda previously dissolved in water, and
12½ lb. hydrochloric acid. For subsequent lots in the same bath one-third of
these additions is sufficient. After diazotising rinse the goods in a bath
weakly acidulated with hydrochloric or sulphuric acid, and then
immediately develop with beta-naphthol.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 3 lb. Triamine black B, 15 lb. Glauber's
salt, in fifty gallons of water. Dye exactly as in the preceding recipe. Wash
and rinse very thoroughly after lifting, then diazotise in a bath of about 250
gallons of cold water, to which add separately 2½ lb. sodium nitrite
dissolved in five times its bulk of water and 8 lb. hydrochloric acid diluted.
Enter the damp cotton and treat it for about half an hour. Lift, pass through
a weak acid bath, rinse, and develop immediately in a bath of about 250
gallons of cold water, containing 1 lb. developer T, 1 lb. soda, previously
dissolved together in hot water. Enter the damp goods, work well for half an
hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Blue Black.—Dye with 4 lb. Diamine black B H, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with naphthylamine ether.
Dark Navy.—Dye with 3 lb. Diamine azo blue R R, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Light Chestnut Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Cotton brown N, 1 lb. diamine fast
yellow A, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. salt, then diazotise and develop with
phenylene diamine.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 5 lb. Diamine cutch, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with fast blue developer A D.
Black.—Dye with 4 lb. Diamine black B H, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt, diazotise and develop with 2 lb. resorcine and 1 lb. phenylene diamine.
Blue Black.—Dye with 4 lb. Diaminogene B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Dark Blue.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1½ lb. Diaminogene blue B B, 1-
1/10 lb. Diamine azo blue R R, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at
the boil for one hour, rinse slightly in cold water, then enter into a fresh cold
bath prepared with 4 lb nitrite of soda previously dissolved in water, and
12½ lb. hydrochloric acid. For subsequent lots in the same bath one-third of
these additions is sufficient. After diazotising rinse the goods in a bath
weakly acidulated with hydrochloric or sulphuric acid, and then
immediately develop with beta-naphthol.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 3 lb. Triamine black B, 15 lb. Glauber's
salt, in fifty gallons of water. Dye exactly as in the preceding recipe. Wash
and rinse very thoroughly after lifting, then diazotise in a bath of about 250
gallons of cold water, to which add separately 2½ lb. sodium nitrite
dissolved in five times its bulk of water and 8 lb. hydrochloric acid diluted.
Enter the damp cotton and treat it for about half an hour. Lift, pass through
a weak acid bath, rinse, and develop immediately in a bath of about 250
gallons of cold water, containing 1 lb. developer T, 1 lb. soda, previously
dissolved together in hot water. Enter the damp goods, work well for half an
hour, then lift, wash and dry.
Blue Black.—Dye with 4 lb. Diamine black B H, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with naphthylamine ether.
Dark Navy.—Dye with 3 lb. Diamine azo blue R R, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Light Chestnut Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Cotton brown N, 1 lb. diamine fast
yellow A, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. salt, then diazotise and develop with
phenylene diamine.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 5 lb. Diamine cutch, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with fast blue developer A D.
Black.—Dye with 4 lb. Diamine black B H, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt, diazotise and develop with 2 lb. resorcine and 1 lb. phenylene diamine.
Blue Black.—Dye with 4 lb. Diaminogene B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Page 128
Black.—Dye with 4½ lb. Diaminogene B, ½ oz. Diamine fast yellow B, 3
lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with 3 lb.
resorcine and 1 lb. phenylene diamine.
Light Blue.—Dye with 1½ lb. Diaminogene blue B B, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotised and develop with beta-naphthol.
Maroon.—Dye with 6 lb. Primuline and 20 lb. salt, diazotise and develop
with blue developer A N.
Olive Brown.—Dye with 5½ lb. Diamine cutch, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with fast blue developer A D.
Gold Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Cotton brown N, ¾ lb. Diamine bronze G, 2
lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with phenylene
diamine.
Walnut Brown.—Dye with 3 lb. Diamine brown M, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Brown.—Dye with 1½ lb. Diamine brown M, 1 lb. Diamine fast yellow B,
1 lb. cotton brown N, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then diazotise and
develop with phenylene diamine.
Dark Plum.—Dye with 3 lb. Diamine brown V, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Black Brown.—Dye with 3 lb. Diamine cutch, 3 lb. Diamine black B H, 8
lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then diazotised and develop with
phenylene diamine.
Blue Black.—Dye with 4½ lb. Diamine black R O, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Blue Black.—Dye with 4½ lb. Diamine black R O, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with naphthylamine ether.
Blue Black.—Dye with 5 lb. Diamine black B O, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with 3 lb.
resorcine and 1 lb. phenylene diamine.
Light Blue.—Dye with 1½ lb. Diaminogene blue B B, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotised and develop with beta-naphthol.
Maroon.—Dye with 6 lb. Primuline and 20 lb. salt, diazotise and develop
with blue developer A N.
Olive Brown.—Dye with 5½ lb. Diamine cutch, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with fast blue developer A D.
Gold Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Cotton brown N, ¾ lb. Diamine bronze G, 2
lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with phenylene
diamine.
Walnut Brown.—Dye with 3 lb. Diamine brown M, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Brown.—Dye with 1½ lb. Diamine brown M, 1 lb. Diamine fast yellow B,
1 lb. cotton brown N, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then diazotise and
develop with phenylene diamine.
Dark Plum.—Dye with 3 lb. Diamine brown V, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Black Brown.—Dye with 3 lb. Diamine cutch, 3 lb. Diamine black B H, 8
lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then diazotised and develop with
phenylene diamine.
Blue Black.—Dye with 4½ lb. Diamine black R O, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Blue Black.—Dye with 4½ lb. Diamine black R O, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with naphthylamine ether.
Blue Black.—Dye with 5 lb. Diamine black B O, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with beta-naphthol.
Page 129
Dark Blue.—Dye with 4 lb. Diamine black R O, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with blue developer A N.
Black.—Dye with 5 lb. Diamine black R O, 1 oz. Diamine bronze G, 3 lb.
soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with phenylene
diamine.
The Diamine blacks are a range of very useful dye-stuffs, and by their
means alone and in conjunction with the various developers as seen in the
examples given above a range of useful shades of blue, navy blue, and
blacks of every tone can be obtained. It may also be added that many of the
direct dyes, although not diazotisable, are not altered by the process and so
may be used along with diazotisable dyes for the purpose of shading them,
and in that way a great range of shades can be produced, particularly by
combining Primuline with other dyes.
(4) DIRECT DYEING FOLLOWED BY FIXATION WITH COUPLERS.
A further development in the application of the direct dyes has of late years
been made. This is a two-bath method. The cotton is dyed with certain of
the direct dyes: Primuline, Diamine jet blacks, Diazo blacks, Toluylene
orange and brown, Diazo brown, Diamine nitrazol dyes, Benzo nitrol dyes,
etc., in the usual way. Then a bath is prepared by diazotising
paranitroaniline, benzidine, metanitraniline, dianisidine, etc., or by using
the ready diazotised preparations which are now on the market, Nitrazol C,
Azophor red P N, Azophor blue P N, etc., and immersing the dyed cotton in
this bath. Combination takes place between the dye on the fibre and the
diazo compound in this bath, and a new product is produced direct on the
fibre, which being insoluble is very resistant to washing and soaping. These
"coupled" shades, as they will probably come to be called, differ from those
produced on the fibre by the original dye-stuff, thus the Diamine jet blacks
and some of the Diazo blacks give, with paranitroaniline, browns of various
shades.
In this section also may be considered the method of dyeing cotton by using
the direct colours in the ordinary way, and then "topping," as it is called,
with a basic dye in a fresh bath.
Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with blue developer A N.
Black.—Dye with 5 lb. Diamine black R O, 1 oz. Diamine bronze G, 3 lb.
soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, then diazotise and develop with phenylene
diamine.
The Diamine blacks are a range of very useful dye-stuffs, and by their
means alone and in conjunction with the various developers as seen in the
examples given above a range of useful shades of blue, navy blue, and
blacks of every tone can be obtained. It may also be added that many of the
direct dyes, although not diazotisable, are not altered by the process and so
may be used along with diazotisable dyes for the purpose of shading them,
and in that way a great range of shades can be produced, particularly by
combining Primuline with other dyes.
(4) DIRECT DYEING FOLLOWED BY FIXATION WITH COUPLERS.
A further development in the application of the direct dyes has of late years
been made. This is a two-bath method. The cotton is dyed with certain of
the direct dyes: Primuline, Diamine jet blacks, Diazo blacks, Toluylene
orange and brown, Diazo brown, Diamine nitrazol dyes, Benzo nitrol dyes,
etc., in the usual way. Then a bath is prepared by diazotising
paranitroaniline, benzidine, metanitraniline, dianisidine, etc., or by using
the ready diazotised preparations which are now on the market, Nitrazol C,
Azophor red P N, Azophor blue P N, etc., and immersing the dyed cotton in
this bath. Combination takes place between the dye on the fibre and the
diazo compound in this bath, and a new product is produced direct on the
fibre, which being insoluble is very resistant to washing and soaping. These
"coupled" shades, as they will probably come to be called, differ from those
produced on the fibre by the original dye-stuff, thus the Diamine jet blacks
and some of the Diazo blacks give, with paranitroaniline, browns of various
shades.
In this section also may be considered the method of dyeing cotton by using
the direct colours in the ordinary way, and then "topping," as it is called,
with a basic dye in a fresh bath.
Page 130
Practically in the "coupling process" of dyeing only diazotised
paranitroaniline is used as the coupler, although other amido bases of a
similar nature are available.
When paranitroaniline is used as the source for the coupling bath it is well
to prepare a stock bath of diazotised paranitroaniline, which may be done in
the following manner:—
Preparation of diazotised paranitroaniline.—Take 1 lb. paranitroaniline,
mix with 1 gallon boiling water and 1 quart hydrochloric acid, stir well,
when the paranitroaniline will dissolve the solution may if necessary be
assisted by a little heat. Now add 1½ gallons of cold water, and set aside to
cool, when the hydrochloride of paranitroaniline will separate out in the
form of fine crystals; when the mixture is quite cold (it cannot be too cold)
there is added ½ lb. sodium nitrite dissolved in ½ gallon cold water, stir
well for fifteen to twenty minutes, by the end of which time the
paranitroaniline will have become fully diazotised, cold water is added to
bring up the volume of the mixture to 10 gallons. This stock bath well
prepared and kept in a cool, dark place will keep good for three to four
weeks. This bath contains 1 lb. of paranitroaniline in 10 gallons, and it is a
good rule to allow ½ lb., or 5 gallons of this stock bath to each pound of
dye-stuff used in dyeing the ground colour to be developed up.
To prepare the coupling bath there is taken 5 gallons of the stock bath, 1 lb.
sodium acetate with sufficient water for each 1 lb. of dye that has been
used.
This bath is used cold, and the cotton is worked in it for half an hour, then it
is taken out, washed well and dried.
Nitrazol C is a ready prepared diazotised paranitroaniline in a powder form
which keeps well if stored in a dry place. The method of using is to take 8
lb. Nitrazol C, stir into a paste with water and then add this paste to the
coupling bath, together with 2 lb. soda and ¾ lb. acetate of soda. This bath
is used cold and the dyed cotton is immersed in it for half an hour, then
taken out, well washed and dried.
The quantity of Nitrazol C given will suffice for all shades dyed with from
2 to 4 per cent, of dye-stuff, but when paler shades are dyed, using less than
paranitroaniline is used as the coupler, although other amido bases of a
similar nature are available.
When paranitroaniline is used as the source for the coupling bath it is well
to prepare a stock bath of diazotised paranitroaniline, which may be done in
the following manner:—
Preparation of diazotised paranitroaniline.—Take 1 lb. paranitroaniline,
mix with 1 gallon boiling water and 1 quart hydrochloric acid, stir well,
when the paranitroaniline will dissolve the solution may if necessary be
assisted by a little heat. Now add 1½ gallons of cold water, and set aside to
cool, when the hydrochloride of paranitroaniline will separate out in the
form of fine crystals; when the mixture is quite cold (it cannot be too cold)
there is added ½ lb. sodium nitrite dissolved in ½ gallon cold water, stir
well for fifteen to twenty minutes, by the end of which time the
paranitroaniline will have become fully diazotised, cold water is added to
bring up the volume of the mixture to 10 gallons. This stock bath well
prepared and kept in a cool, dark place will keep good for three to four
weeks. This bath contains 1 lb. of paranitroaniline in 10 gallons, and it is a
good rule to allow ½ lb., or 5 gallons of this stock bath to each pound of
dye-stuff used in dyeing the ground colour to be developed up.
To prepare the coupling bath there is taken 5 gallons of the stock bath, 1 lb.
sodium acetate with sufficient water for each 1 lb. of dye that has been
used.
This bath is used cold, and the cotton is worked in it for half an hour, then it
is taken out, washed well and dried.
Nitrazol C is a ready prepared diazotised paranitroaniline in a powder form
which keeps well if stored in a dry place. The method of using is to take 8
lb. Nitrazol C, stir into a paste with water and then add this paste to the
coupling bath, together with 2 lb. soda and ¾ lb. acetate of soda. This bath
is used cold and the dyed cotton is immersed in it for half an hour, then
taken out, well washed and dried.
The quantity of Nitrazol C given will suffice for all shades dyed with from
2 to 4 per cent, of dye-stuff, but when paler shades are dyed, using less than
Page 131
say ½ per cent. of dye-stuff, about 4 lb. Nitrazol C, with the soda and
acetate of soda in proportionate quantities, may be used.
Azophor red P N is also a preparation of diazotised paranitroaniline in the
form of a dry powder which keeps well.
To prepare the coupling bath there is taken 2 lb. of Azophor red P N, which
is dissolved in water and added to the bath along with 1 lb. acetate of soda.
The dyed goods are worked in the cold bath for half an hour, then taken out,
well washed and dried.
The quantities given are sufficient for shades dyed with 2 to 4 per cent. of
dye-stuff; for weaker shades half the quantities may be taken.
Benzo-nitrol developer is sold in the form of a yellow paste. To use it take 5
lb., stir into a smooth paste with water, then add to the coupling bath. There
is then added 3 pints of hydrochloric acid, with some stirring. Allow to
stand for half an hour, add 1½ lb. acetate of soda and 6½ oz. soda, when the
bath is ready for use. The cotton is entered and worked for half an hour,
then lifted out, washed and dried.
It may be mentioned that solutions of the three couplers just named may be
kept for some time without decomposition, but as soon as soda and acetate
of soda are added they begin to decompose and then cannot be kept more
than a few hours in a good condition. It is a good plan therefore not to add
the acetate of soda until the bath is to be used.
An excess of coupler in the bath does no harm, but a deficiency may lead to
poor and weak shades being developed.
The following recipes show the dyes which may be applied by this method
and give some idea of the colours that can be got. Only the dye-stuffs are
given. Any of the above couplers can be used with them as may be most
convenient.
Black.—Dye with 5 lb. Benzo-nitrol black B, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt.
Olive Green.—Dye with 6 lb. Primuline, 3 lb. Titan ingrain blue and 20 lb.
salt.
acetate of soda in proportionate quantities, may be used.
Azophor red P N is also a preparation of diazotised paranitroaniline in the
form of a dry powder which keeps well.
To prepare the coupling bath there is taken 2 lb. of Azophor red P N, which
is dissolved in water and added to the bath along with 1 lb. acetate of soda.
The dyed goods are worked in the cold bath for half an hour, then taken out,
well washed and dried.
The quantities given are sufficient for shades dyed with 2 to 4 per cent. of
dye-stuff; for weaker shades half the quantities may be taken.
Benzo-nitrol developer is sold in the form of a yellow paste. To use it take 5
lb., stir into a smooth paste with water, then add to the coupling bath. There
is then added 3 pints of hydrochloric acid, with some stirring. Allow to
stand for half an hour, add 1½ lb. acetate of soda and 6½ oz. soda, when the
bath is ready for use. The cotton is entered and worked for half an hour,
then lifted out, washed and dried.
It may be mentioned that solutions of the three couplers just named may be
kept for some time without decomposition, but as soon as soda and acetate
of soda are added they begin to decompose and then cannot be kept more
than a few hours in a good condition. It is a good plan therefore not to add
the acetate of soda until the bath is to be used.
An excess of coupler in the bath does no harm, but a deficiency may lead to
poor and weak shades being developed.
The following recipes show the dyes which may be applied by this method
and give some idea of the colours that can be got. Only the dye-stuffs are
given. Any of the above couplers can be used with them as may be most
convenient.
Black.—Dye with 5 lb. Benzo-nitrol black B, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt.
Olive Green.—Dye with 6 lb. Primuline, 3 lb. Titan ingrain blue and 20 lb.
salt.
Page 132
Black.—Dye with 4 lb. Dianil black C R, 2 lb. soda and 25 lb. salt.
Dark Blue.—Dye with 2 lb. Dianil dark blue R, 1 lb. Dianil dark blue 3 R, 2
lb. soda and 25 lb. salt.
Gold Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Primuline, 8 oz. Dianil brown R and 20 lb.
salt.
Chestnut.—Dye with 3 lb. Primuline, ¾ lb. Dianil brown G O, 1 lb. Dianil
brown E, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Dianil brown 3 G O, 3 lb. Dianil brown D, 1
lb. soda and 20 lb. salt.
Dark Green.—Dye with 4 lb. Primuline, 1½ lb. Dianil black C R, 1 lb. soda
and 20 lb. salt.
Walnut Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Dianil brown 3 G O, 8 oz. Dianil brown R,
3 lb. Dianil brown B D, 1 lb. soda, and 20 lb. salt.
Light Green.—Dye with 3 lb. Primuline, 8 oz. Dianil blue B, 5 oz. Dianil
dark blue R, 1 lb. soda, and 20 lb. salt.
Orange Yellow.—Dye with 3¼ lb. Primuline, 1 lb. Oxydianil yellow, and 25
lb. salt.
Olive.—Dye with 3½ lb. Primuline, 8 oz. Dianil brown 3 G O, 8 oz. Dianil
blue B, 4 oz. Dianil dark blue R, 1 lb. soda, and 25 lb. salt.
Bright Yellow.—Dye with 2 lb. Primuline, and 20 lb. salt.
Gold Yellow.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine fast yellow A, 1 lb. soda, and 20 lb.
salt.
Bright Walnut.—Dye with ½ lb. Diamine nitrazol brown B, 1 lb.
Oxydiamine orange R, 1 lb. soda, and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Gold Brown.—Dye with ½ lb. Diamine nitrazol brown G, 1 lb. Primuline,
and 20 lb. salt.
Green.—Dye with 2 lb. Primuline, 1 lb. Diamine nitrazol black B, 1 lb.
soda and 20 lb. salt.
Dark Blue.—Dye with 2 lb. Dianil dark blue R, 1 lb. Dianil dark blue 3 R, 2
lb. soda and 25 lb. salt.
Gold Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Primuline, 8 oz. Dianil brown R and 20 lb.
salt.
Chestnut.—Dye with 3 lb. Primuline, ¾ lb. Dianil brown G O, 1 lb. Dianil
brown E, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb. salt.
Dark Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Dianil brown 3 G O, 3 lb. Dianil brown D, 1
lb. soda and 20 lb. salt.
Dark Green.—Dye with 4 lb. Primuline, 1½ lb. Dianil black C R, 1 lb. soda
and 20 lb. salt.
Walnut Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Dianil brown 3 G O, 8 oz. Dianil brown R,
3 lb. Dianil brown B D, 1 lb. soda, and 20 lb. salt.
Light Green.—Dye with 3 lb. Primuline, 8 oz. Dianil blue B, 5 oz. Dianil
dark blue R, 1 lb. soda, and 20 lb. salt.
Orange Yellow.—Dye with 3¼ lb. Primuline, 1 lb. Oxydianil yellow, and 25
lb. salt.
Olive.—Dye with 3½ lb. Primuline, 8 oz. Dianil brown 3 G O, 8 oz. Dianil
blue B, 4 oz. Dianil dark blue R, 1 lb. soda, and 25 lb. salt.
Bright Yellow.—Dye with 2 lb. Primuline, and 20 lb. salt.
Gold Yellow.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine fast yellow A, 1 lb. soda, and 20 lb.
salt.
Bright Walnut.—Dye with ½ lb. Diamine nitrazol brown B, 1 lb.
Oxydiamine orange R, 1 lb. soda, and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Gold Brown.—Dye with ½ lb. Diamine nitrazol brown G, 1 lb. Primuline,
and 20 lb. salt.
Green.—Dye with 2 lb. Primuline, 1 lb. Diamine nitrazol black B, 1 lb.
soda and 20 lb. salt.
Page 133
Pale Chestnut.—Dye with 1 lb. Primuline, ½ lb. Oxydiamine orange R and
20 lb. salt.
Moss Brown,—Dye with 2 lb. Primuline, 1 lb. diamine jet black O O and 20
lb. salt.
Chocolate.—Dye with 1½ lb. Diamine brown V, 2 lb. Diamine nitrazol
brown R D, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Olive Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine nitrazol brown G, 1 lb. Diamine
nitrazol black B, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Russian Green.—Dye with 2 lb. Diaminogene extra, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Bronze Green.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine grey G, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Terra-cotta Bed.—Dye with 2 lb. Oxydiamine orange R, 1 lb. soda and 20
lb. Glauber's salt.
Terra-cotta Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine nitrazol brown R D, 1 lb. soda
and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Olive Green.—Dye with 1 lb. Primuline, 2 lb. Diamine bronze G, 1 lb. soda
and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Dark Green.—Dye with 1 lb. Primuline, 2 lb. Diamine nitrazol black B, 2
lb. soda and 20 lb. salt.
Sage Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Primuline, 2 lb. Diamine jet black O O, 1 lb.
soda and 20 lb. salt.
Black Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine brown V, 2 lb. Diamine nitrazol
black B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Dark Walnut.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine brown V, 2 lb. Oxydiamine orange
R, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Pale Sage.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine brown V, 2 lb. Primuline, 1 lb. soda
and 20 lb. salt.
20 lb. salt.
Moss Brown,—Dye with 2 lb. Primuline, 1 lb. diamine jet black O O and 20
lb. salt.
Chocolate.—Dye with 1½ lb. Diamine brown V, 2 lb. Diamine nitrazol
brown R D, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Olive Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine nitrazol brown G, 1 lb. Diamine
nitrazol black B, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Russian Green.—Dye with 2 lb. Diaminogene extra, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Bronze Green.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine grey G, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Terra-cotta Bed.—Dye with 2 lb. Oxydiamine orange R, 1 lb. soda and 20
lb. Glauber's salt.
Terra-cotta Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine nitrazol brown R D, 1 lb. soda
and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Olive Green.—Dye with 1 lb. Primuline, 2 lb. Diamine bronze G, 1 lb. soda
and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Dark Green.—Dye with 1 lb. Primuline, 2 lb. Diamine nitrazol black B, 2
lb. soda and 20 lb. salt.
Sage Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Primuline, 2 lb. Diamine jet black O O, 1 lb.
soda and 20 lb. salt.
Black Brown.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine brown V, 2 lb. Diamine nitrazol
black B, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Dark Walnut.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine brown V, 2 lb. Oxydiamine orange
R, 2 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Pale Sage.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine brown V, 2 lb. Primuline, 1 lb. soda
and 20 lb. salt.
Page 134
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 3 lb. Diamine jet black O O, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with ¾ lb. Benzo nitrol brown G, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda. Dye for one hour at the boil.
Dark Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Benzo nitrol dark brown N,
20 lb. Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda. Dye for one hour at the boil.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Direct fast brown B, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda. Dye for one hour at the boil.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. 11 oz. Diamine jet black O O, 2 lb.
Cotton brown N, 1 lb. 5 oz. Diamine brown V, 20 lb. Glauber's salt, 2 lb.
soda. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Diamine bronze G, 6½ oz. Cotton
brown N, 9¾ oz. Diamine fast yellow A, 20 lb. Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Pluto black B, 20 lb. Glauber's salt,
2 lb. soda. Dye for one hour at the boil.
Solidogen A is a new coupler that has latterly been applied. It is a syrupy
liquid, and the coupling bath is made by taking from 4 lb. to 6 lb. of the
Solidogen A, and 1 lb. to 2 lb. of hydrochloric acid, in place of which 3 lb.
to 5 lb. alum may be used. This bath is used at the boil, the goods being
treated for half an hour, then well rinsed and dried. It increases the fastness
of the colours to washing and soaping.
The following recipes show its application:—
Bright Bed.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil red 4 B, 2 lb. soap, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb.
Glauber's salt, then fix with Solidogen A.
Scarlet.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil scarlet G, 2 lb. soda and 25 lb. salt; fix with
Solidogen A.
Plum.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil claret B, 5 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt,
then fix with Solidogen A.
Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with ¾ lb. Benzo nitrol brown G, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda. Dye for one hour at the boil.
Dark Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Benzo nitrol dark brown N,
20 lb. Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda. Dye for one hour at the boil.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 4 lb. Direct fast brown B, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda. Dye for one hour at the boil.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 1 lb. 11 oz. Diamine jet black O O, 2 lb.
Cotton brown N, 1 lb. 5 oz. Diamine brown V, 20 lb. Glauber's salt, 2 lb.
soda. Dye at the boil for one hour.
Brown.—Prepare the dye-bath with 2 lb. Diamine bronze G, 6½ oz. Cotton
brown N, 9¾ oz. Diamine fast yellow A, 20 lb. Glauber's salt, 2 lb. soda.
Black.—Prepare the dye-bath with 5 lb. Pluto black B, 20 lb. Glauber's salt,
2 lb. soda. Dye for one hour at the boil.
Solidogen A is a new coupler that has latterly been applied. It is a syrupy
liquid, and the coupling bath is made by taking from 4 lb. to 6 lb. of the
Solidogen A, and 1 lb. to 2 lb. of hydrochloric acid, in place of which 3 lb.
to 5 lb. alum may be used. This bath is used at the boil, the goods being
treated for half an hour, then well rinsed and dried. It increases the fastness
of the colours to washing and soaping.
The following recipes show its application:—
Bright Bed.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil red 4 B, 2 lb. soap, 3 lb. soda and 15 lb.
Glauber's salt, then fix with Solidogen A.
Scarlet.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil scarlet G, 2 lb. soda and 25 lb. salt; fix with
Solidogen A.
Plum.—Dye with 3 lb. Dianil claret B, 5 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt,
then fix with Solidogen A.
Page 135
Topping with Basic Dyes.—The shades dyed with the direct dyes may be
materially brightened and new shades produced by topping with any of the
basic dyes, which are applied in a fresh warm bath. A great variety of
effects may be thus got of which the following recipes give a few examples:
—
Green.—Dye with 1 lb. Titan yellow G and 20 lb. salt; top with ½ lb.
Brilliant green.
Blue.—Dye with 1¾ lb. Diamine azo blue R, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt, then top with 2 oz. New Methylene blue N.
Bright Blue.—Dye with ¾ lb. Diamine brilliant blue G, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt; top with 2 oz. New Methylene blue 3 R.
Blue.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine sky blue, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's
salt, and top with 4 oz. Brilliant green.
Bose Lilac.—Dye with 1½ oz. Diamine violet N, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, then top with 2 oz. Tannin heliotrope.
Green.—Dye at the boil for one hour with 2 lb. Benzo green G and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, then top in a fresh bath with ½ lb. Turquoise blue B B.
Violet.—Dye with 5 oz. Diamine violet N, 2 oz. Diamine brilliant blue G, 1
lb. soda and 10 lb. salt, and top with 1 oz. Methyl violet 2 B.
Plum.—Dye with 1½ lb. Oxydiamine violet B, 5 oz. Diamine red 10 B, 2
lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then top with 1½ oz. Methyl violet R.
Bright Green.—Dye with 1¼ lb. Diamine green G, 1¼ lb. Oxydiamine
yellow G G, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then top with 2 oz. Brilliant
green.
Blue.—Dye with 2 lb. Benzo azurine G, 3 oz. Brilliant azurine B, 1 lb. soda
and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, topping with 6 oz. Turquoise blue G and 3 oz.
New Victoria blue B.
Dark Lilac.—Dye with 3¾ lb. Heliotrope B B, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then top with 1 lb. Methyl violet R, and ½ lb. Methyl violet 3
R.
materially brightened and new shades produced by topping with any of the
basic dyes, which are applied in a fresh warm bath. A great variety of
effects may be thus got of which the following recipes give a few examples:
—
Green.—Dye with 1 lb. Titan yellow G and 20 lb. salt; top with ½ lb.
Brilliant green.
Blue.—Dye with 1¾ lb. Diamine azo blue R, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt, then top with 2 oz. New Methylene blue N.
Bright Blue.—Dye with ¾ lb. Diamine brilliant blue G, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt; top with 2 oz. New Methylene blue 3 R.
Blue.—Dye with 1 lb. Diamine sky blue, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's
salt, and top with 4 oz. Brilliant green.
Bose Lilac.—Dye with 1½ oz. Diamine violet N, 1 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, then top with 2 oz. Tannin heliotrope.
Green.—Dye at the boil for one hour with 2 lb. Benzo green G and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, then top in a fresh bath with ½ lb. Turquoise blue B B.
Violet.—Dye with 5 oz. Diamine violet N, 2 oz. Diamine brilliant blue G, 1
lb. soda and 10 lb. salt, and top with 1 oz. Methyl violet 2 B.
Plum.—Dye with 1½ lb. Oxydiamine violet B, 5 oz. Diamine red 10 B, 2
lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then top with 1½ oz. Methyl violet R.
Bright Green.—Dye with 1¼ lb. Diamine green G, 1¼ lb. Oxydiamine
yellow G G, 2 lb. soda and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then top with 2 oz. Brilliant
green.
Blue.—Dye with 2 lb. Benzo azurine G, 3 oz. Brilliant azurine B, 1 lb. soda
and 20 lb. Glauber's salt, topping with 6 oz. Turquoise blue G and 3 oz.
New Victoria blue B.
Dark Lilac.—Dye with 3¾ lb. Heliotrope B B, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, then top with 1 lb. Methyl violet R, and ½ lb. Methyl violet 3
R.
Page 136
Scarlet.—Dye with 3 lb. Brilliant Congo R, 3 lb. soda and 20 lb. Glauber's
salt, then top with 8 oz. Safranine.
Bright Green.—Dye with 3 lb. Chrysamine G, 2 lb. soap and 10 lb.
phosphate of soda, topping with ¾ lb. Malachite green.
Bright Violet.—Dye with 1½ lb. Chicago blue 6 B, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, topping with 10 oz. Methyl violet B.
Dark Green.—Dye with 2 lb. Columbia green, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, topping with 10 oz. Malachite green.
Claret.—Prepare a dye-bath with ¾ oz. Diamine black R O, 2½ lb. Benzo
purpurine 6 B, 10 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour, then enter
in a fresh cold bath of ½ lb. Safranine G. Work for twenty minutes, lift,
wash and dry.
Seal Brown.—Make up a dye-bath with 2 lb. Benzo azurine G, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt. Enter yarn at 180° F., dye at the boil for one hour, lift, wring,
and enter into a fresh bath of 1½ lb. Bismarck brown. Work for one hour at
about 180° F., lift, rinse well and dry.
(5) DYEING ON TANNIC MORDANT.
The oldest group of coal-tar dyes are the basic dyes, of which Magenta,
Brilliant green, Chrysoidine, Bismarck brown, Auramine are typical
representatives. For a long time these dyes were only used for dyeing wool
and silk; for cotton, linen, and some other vegetable fibres they have little
or no affinity, and hence cannot dye them direct. However, it was found out
that if the cotton be prepared or mordanted (as it is called) with tannic acid
or with any substance containing that compound they could be used for
dyeing cotton.
The mordant used, tannic acid, has the property of combining with the dyes
of this group to form insoluble coloured tannates. Now tannic acid has a
certain amount of affinity for cotton, if the latter be immersed in solution of
tannic acid or any material containing it some of the latter is taken up and
more or less fixed by the cotton fibre. Tannic acid is a vegetable product
found in a large number of plants, and plant products, such as sumac,
myrabolams, divi-divi, galls, oak bark, gambier, cutch, algarobilla, valonia,
salt, then top with 8 oz. Safranine.
Bright Green.—Dye with 3 lb. Chrysamine G, 2 lb. soap and 10 lb.
phosphate of soda, topping with ¾ lb. Malachite green.
Bright Violet.—Dye with 1½ lb. Chicago blue 6 B, 1 lb. soda and 20 lb.
Glauber's salt, topping with 10 oz. Methyl violet B.
Dark Green.—Dye with 2 lb. Columbia green, 3 lb. soda and 10 lb.
Glauber's salt, topping with 10 oz. Malachite green.
Claret.—Prepare a dye-bath with ¾ oz. Diamine black R O, 2½ lb. Benzo
purpurine 6 B, 10 lb. Glauber's salt. Dye at the boil for one hour, then enter
in a fresh cold bath of ½ lb. Safranine G. Work for twenty minutes, lift,
wash and dry.
Seal Brown.—Make up a dye-bath with 2 lb. Benzo azurine G, 20 lb.
Glauber's salt. Enter yarn at 180° F., dye at the boil for one hour, lift, wring,
and enter into a fresh bath of 1½ lb. Bismarck brown. Work for one hour at
about 180° F., lift, rinse well and dry.
(5) DYEING ON TANNIC MORDANT.
The oldest group of coal-tar dyes are the basic dyes, of which Magenta,
Brilliant green, Chrysoidine, Bismarck brown, Auramine are typical
representatives. For a long time these dyes were only used for dyeing wool
and silk; for cotton, linen, and some other vegetable fibres they have little
or no affinity, and hence cannot dye them direct. However, it was found out
that if the cotton be prepared or mordanted (as it is called) with tannic acid
or with any substance containing that compound they could be used for
dyeing cotton.
The mordant used, tannic acid, has the property of combining with the dyes
of this group to form insoluble coloured tannates. Now tannic acid has a
certain amount of affinity for cotton, if the latter be immersed in solution of
tannic acid or any material containing it some of the latter is taken up and
more or less fixed by the cotton fibre. Tannic acid is a vegetable product
found in a large number of plants, and plant products, such as sumac,
myrabolams, divi-divi, galls, oak bark, gambier, cutch, algarobilla, valonia,
Page 137
etc., which are commonly known as tannins, or tannin matters, on account
of their use in the conversion of animal skins or hides into leather, which is
done in the tanning industry.
By itself the tannin-colour lake, which may be formed on the cotton fibre
by immersion first in a bath of tannin and then in a dye-bath, is not fast to
washing and soaping, but by taking advantage of the fact with such metals
as tin, iron, antimony, etc., it combines to form insoluble tannates; the
tannic acid can be fixed on the cotton by immersion in a bath containing
such fixing salts as tartar emetic, tin crystals, copperas, antimony fluoride,
and antimony oxalate. The dyeing of cotton with the basic colours therefore
resolves itself into three operations:—
(1) Tanning with tannic acid or some tanning matters.
(2) Fixation with tartar emetic or other fixing agent.
(3) Dyeing with the required colour or mixture of colours.
(1) The Tanning Operation.—The practice of tanning or mordanting
cotton with tannin is variously carried on by dyers. Some steep the cotton in
the tannin bath over night, others immerse it from two to three hours in a
lukewarm bath, while some enter it in a boiling bath, which is then allowed
to cool down and the cotton is lifted out. The last is perhaps the quickest
method, and experiments have shown that it is as good as any other method,
if the quantity of tannic acid taken up be regarded as the criterion of
success.
In the natural products which have just been enumerated, the tannic acid is
accompanied by some colouring matter, which is also absorbed by the
cotton; in some (sumac and galls) this colour is present in but small
quantities; in others (divi-divi, myrabolams, algarobilla), there is a large
quantity; therefore cotton treated with these comes out more or less
coloured. Now it is obvious that such forms of tannin cannot be used when
light tints are to be dyed, for such the acid itself must be used, for medium
shades sumac or galls may be used; while when dark shades—browns,
maroons, dark greens, navy blues, etc., are to be dyed, then such tannin
matters as divi-divi or myrabolams may be conveniently and economically
adopted. The quantity used varies according to circumstances; the character
of their use in the conversion of animal skins or hides into leather, which is
done in the tanning industry.
By itself the tannin-colour lake, which may be formed on the cotton fibre
by immersion first in a bath of tannin and then in a dye-bath, is not fast to
washing and soaping, but by taking advantage of the fact with such metals
as tin, iron, antimony, etc., it combines to form insoluble tannates; the
tannic acid can be fixed on the cotton by immersion in a bath containing
such fixing salts as tartar emetic, tin crystals, copperas, antimony fluoride,
and antimony oxalate. The dyeing of cotton with the basic colours therefore
resolves itself into three operations:—
(1) Tanning with tannic acid or some tanning matters.
(2) Fixation with tartar emetic or other fixing agent.
(3) Dyeing with the required colour or mixture of colours.
(1) The Tanning Operation.—The practice of tanning or mordanting
cotton with tannin is variously carried on by dyers. Some steep the cotton in
the tannin bath over night, others immerse it from two to three hours in a
lukewarm bath, while some enter it in a boiling bath, which is then allowed
to cool down and the cotton is lifted out. The last is perhaps the quickest
method, and experiments have shown that it is as good as any other method,
if the quantity of tannic acid taken up be regarded as the criterion of
success.
In the natural products which have just been enumerated, the tannic acid is
accompanied by some colouring matter, which is also absorbed by the
cotton; in some (sumac and galls) this colour is present in but small
quantities; in others (divi-divi, myrabolams, algarobilla), there is a large
quantity; therefore cotton treated with these comes out more or less
coloured. Now it is obvious that such forms of tannin cannot be used when
light tints are to be dyed, for such the acid itself must be used, for medium
shades sumac or galls may be used; while when dark shades—browns,
maroons, dark greens, navy blues, etc., are to be dyed, then such tannin
matters as divi-divi or myrabolams may be conveniently and economically
adopted. The quantity used varies according to circumstances; the character
Page 138
of the shades that are to be dyed, the dye-stuff used, the quality and
character of the tannin matter used. For pale shades about 1 per cent. of
tannic acid may be used, deep shades require from 3 to 4 per cent. Of tannin
matters from 5 per cent. may be used for pale shades, from 20 to 25 per
cent. for deep shades. The tannin baths are not exhausted, and may be kept
standing, adding for each succeeding lot of cotton from ½ to ¾ of the above
quantities of tannin matters. Of course sooner or later the baths become
unusable from various causes, and then they may be thrown away; but old
tannin baths often work better than the new ones.
(2) The Fixing Bath.—Following on the tannin bath comes the fixing bath
to fix the tannin on the cotton in the form of insoluble metallic tannates. A
variety of metallic salts may be used for this purpose, those of antimony,
tin, iron, lead, etc., the substances most commonly used being tartar emetic,
antimony fluoride, oxalate of antimony, tin crystals and copperas.
Beyond forming the insoluble tannate of antimony or tin, as the case may
be, the salts of antimony and tin have no further effect on the tanned cotton,
and they may be used to fix the tannin for all tints or shades, from very pale
to very deep. Of all these salts tartar emetic has been found to be the best,
probably because it is the least acid in its reactions, and therefore there is no
tendency to remove any tannin from the fibre, as is the case with the other
salts. Tin salt is little used for this purpose, because of its acidity, which
prevents it from fixing the tannin as completely as is the case with tartar
emetic.
With copperas or iron liquor the question comes up not only of the mere
fixation of the tannin, but also the fact that iron forms with tannin grey to
black compounds, hence cotton which has been tanned and then immersed
in a bath of copperas becomes coloured grey to black, according to the
quantity of the tannin matter used. The property is useful when dark shades
of maroons, clarets, greens, browns, blues, etc., are to be dyed, and is
frequently employed.
(3) Dyeing.—After the tannin and fixing operations comes the dyeing. This
is not by any means a difficult operation. It is best carried out by preparing
a cold bath, entering the prepared or mordanted cotton in this and heating
slowly up. It is not necessary to raise to the boil nor to maintain the dye-
character of the tannin matter used. For pale shades about 1 per cent. of
tannic acid may be used, deep shades require from 3 to 4 per cent. Of tannin
matters from 5 per cent. may be used for pale shades, from 20 to 25 per
cent. for deep shades. The tannin baths are not exhausted, and may be kept
standing, adding for each succeeding lot of cotton from ½ to ¾ of the above
quantities of tannin matters. Of course sooner or later the baths become
unusable from various causes, and then they may be thrown away; but old
tannin baths often work better than the new ones.
(2) The Fixing Bath.—Following on the tannin bath comes the fixing bath
to fix the tannin on the cotton in the form of insoluble metallic tannates. A
variety of metallic salts may be used for this purpose, those of antimony,
tin, iron, lead, etc., the substances most commonly used being tartar emetic,
antimony fluoride, oxalate of antimony, tin crystals and copperas.
Beyond forming the insoluble tannate of antimony or tin, as the case may
be, the salts of antimony and tin have no further effect on the tanned cotton,
and they may be used to fix the tannin for all tints or shades, from very pale
to very deep. Of all these salts tartar emetic has been found to be the best,
probably because it is the least acid in its reactions, and therefore there is no
tendency to remove any tannin from the fibre, as is the case with the other
salts. Tin salt is little used for this purpose, because of its acidity, which
prevents it from fixing the tannin as completely as is the case with tartar
emetic.
With copperas or iron liquor the question comes up not only of the mere
fixation of the tannin, but also the fact that iron forms with tannin grey to
black compounds, hence cotton which has been tanned and then immersed
in a bath of copperas becomes coloured grey to black, according to the
quantity of the tannin matter used. The property is useful when dark shades
of maroons, clarets, greens, browns, blues, etc., are to be dyed, and is
frequently employed.
(3) Dyeing.—After the tannin and fixing operations comes the dyeing. This
is not by any means a difficult operation. It is best carried out by preparing
a cold bath, entering the prepared or mordanted cotton in this and heating
slowly up. It is not necessary to raise to the boil nor to maintain the dye-
Page 139
bath at that heat, a temperature of 180° F. being quite sufficient in dyeing
with the basic colours, and the operation should last only until the colouring
matter is extracted from the dye-bath. Working in this way, level uniform
shades can be got.
One source of trouble in the dyeing of basic dyes, more especially with
magentas, violets and greens, lies in their slight solubility and great
strength. In preparing solutions of such dyes it is best to dissolve the dye-
stuff by pouring boiling water over it, and stirring well until all appears to
be dissolved.
This solution should be strained through a fine cloth, as any undissolved
specks will be sure to fix themselves on the cloth and lead to dark spots and
stains, as, owing to the weak solubility of the dye, and this being also fixed
as insoluble tannate by the tannic acid on the fibre, there is no tendency for
the dye to diffuse itself over the cloth, as occasionally happens in other
methods of dyeing. No advantage is gained by adding to the dye-bath such
substances as common salt or Glauber's salt.
Some few of the dyes, e.g., Soluble blue, Victoria blue, which will dye on a
tannic mordant, are sulphonated compounds of the colour base. These can
be dyed in medium or light shades on to unmordanted cotton from a bath
containing alum, and in the ordinary method of dyeing the addition of alum
is beneficial, as tending to result in the production of deep shades. These are
somewhat faster to washing and soaping, which is owing to the dye-stuff
combining with the alumina in the alum to form an insoluble colour lake of
the sulphuric acid groups it contains.
Many recipes can be given for the dyeing of basic dyes on cotton; for the
range of tints and shades of all colours that can be produced by their means
is truly great. Typical recipes will be given showing what basic dyes are
available and how they can be combined together. The dyer, however, who
knows how to produce shades by combining one dye-stuff with another is
able to get many more shades than space will permit to be given here.
Sky Blue.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and ½ lb. tartar emetic, then dye
with 2½ oz. Victoria blue B, and ½ oz. Turquoise blue G.
with the basic colours, and the operation should last only until the colouring
matter is extracted from the dye-bath. Working in this way, level uniform
shades can be got.
One source of trouble in the dyeing of basic dyes, more especially with
magentas, violets and greens, lies in their slight solubility and great
strength. In preparing solutions of such dyes it is best to dissolve the dye-
stuff by pouring boiling water over it, and stirring well until all appears to
be dissolved.
This solution should be strained through a fine cloth, as any undissolved
specks will be sure to fix themselves on the cloth and lead to dark spots and
stains, as, owing to the weak solubility of the dye, and this being also fixed
as insoluble tannate by the tannic acid on the fibre, there is no tendency for
the dye to diffuse itself over the cloth, as occasionally happens in other
methods of dyeing. No advantage is gained by adding to the dye-bath such
substances as common salt or Glauber's salt.
Some few of the dyes, e.g., Soluble blue, Victoria blue, which will dye on a
tannic mordant, are sulphonated compounds of the colour base. These can
be dyed in medium or light shades on to unmordanted cotton from a bath
containing alum, and in the ordinary method of dyeing the addition of alum
is beneficial, as tending to result in the production of deep shades. These are
somewhat faster to washing and soaping, which is owing to the dye-stuff
combining with the alumina in the alum to form an insoluble colour lake of
the sulphuric acid groups it contains.
Many recipes can be given for the dyeing of basic dyes on cotton; for the
range of tints and shades of all colours that can be produced by their means
is truly great. Typical recipes will be given showing what basic dyes are
available and how they can be combined together. The dyer, however, who
knows how to produce shades by combining one dye-stuff with another is
able to get many more shades than space will permit to be given here.
Sky Blue.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and ½ lb. tartar emetic, then dye
with 2½ oz. Victoria blue B, and ½ oz. Turquoise blue G.
Page 140
Bright Blue.—Mordant with 2 lb. tannic acid and 1½ lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with 1½ lb. New Victoria blue B, and ¾ lb. Turquoise blue G.
Pale Green.—Mordant with 1½ lb. tannic acid and ¼ lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with ¼ oz. Brilliant green and ½ oz. Auramine I I.
Bright Green.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and 1 lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with 6 oz. Brilliant green and 8 oz. Auramine I I.
Turquoise Blue.—Mordant with 2 lb. tannic acid and 1½ lb. tartar emetic;
dye with 1 lb. Turquoise blue G.
Crimson.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, then dye
with 1¼ lb. Brilliant rhoduline red B and 5 oz. Auramine I I.
Bright Violet.—Mordant with 2 lb. tannic acid and 1 lb. tartar emetic; dye
with 1¼ lb. Rhoduline violet and 3 oz. Methyl violet B.
Rose Lilac.—Mordant with 2 lb. tannic acid and 1 lb. tartar emetic; dye
with ¾ lb. Rhoduline violet.
Yellow.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2½ lb. tartar emetic; dye with 2
lb. Auramine I I.
Orange.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2¼ lb. tartar emetic; dye with
2 lb. Chrysoidine.
Green.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2½ lb. tartar emetic, then dye
with 2 lb. Brilliant green.
Red Violet.—Mordant with 1½ lb. tannic acid and 1¼ lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with 8 oz. Methyl violet 4 R.
The same method may be followed with all the brands of Methyl, Paris and
Hoffmann violets, and so a range of shades from a purple to a pure violet
can be dyed. The 4 R to R brands of these violets dye reddish shades, the
redness decreasing according to the mark, the B to 6 B brands dye bluish
shades, the blueness increasing till the 6 B brand dyes a very blue shade of
violet.
dye with 1½ lb. New Victoria blue B, and ¾ lb. Turquoise blue G.
Pale Green.—Mordant with 1½ lb. tannic acid and ¼ lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with ¼ oz. Brilliant green and ½ oz. Auramine I I.
Bright Green.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and 1 lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with 6 oz. Brilliant green and 8 oz. Auramine I I.
Turquoise Blue.—Mordant with 2 lb. tannic acid and 1½ lb. tartar emetic;
dye with 1 lb. Turquoise blue G.
Crimson.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, then dye
with 1¼ lb. Brilliant rhoduline red B and 5 oz. Auramine I I.
Bright Violet.—Mordant with 2 lb. tannic acid and 1 lb. tartar emetic; dye
with 1¼ lb. Rhoduline violet and 3 oz. Methyl violet B.
Rose Lilac.—Mordant with 2 lb. tannic acid and 1 lb. tartar emetic; dye
with ¾ lb. Rhoduline violet.
Yellow.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2½ lb. tartar emetic; dye with 2
lb. Auramine I I.
Orange.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2¼ lb. tartar emetic; dye with
2 lb. Chrysoidine.
Green.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2½ lb. tartar emetic, then dye
with 2 lb. Brilliant green.
Red Violet.—Mordant with 1½ lb. tannic acid and 1¼ lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with 8 oz. Methyl violet 4 R.
The same method may be followed with all the brands of Methyl, Paris and
Hoffmann violets, and so a range of shades from a purple to a pure violet
can be dyed. The 4 R to R brands of these violets dye reddish shades, the
redness decreasing according to the mark, the B to 6 B brands dye bluish
shades, the blueness increasing till the 6 B brand dyes a very blue shade of
violet.
Page 141
Bright Sea-Green.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and ½ lb. tartar emetic,
then dye with 2 oz. Turquoise blue G and ¼ oz. New Victoria blue B. With
these two blues a very great variety of tints and shades of blue can be dyed.
Sea Green.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and ¾ lb. tartar emetic, and dye
with 2 oz. Malachite green.
Dark Green.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with 1¼ lb. Malachite green and ¾ oz. Auramine I I.
By combination of Brilliant green or Malachite green (which are the
principal basic greens) with Auramine in various proportions a great range
of greens of all tints and shades, from pale to deep and from very yellow to
very green tints, can be dyed.
Scarlet.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, then dye
with 1½ lb. Rhodamine 6 G and ¼ lb. Auramine I I.
Pink.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and ¾ lb. tartar emetic, and dye with
¼ lb. Rhodamine G.
Pink.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and ¾ lb. tartar emetic, and dye with
½ lb. Irisamine G.
Slate Blue.—Mordant with 1½ lb. tannic acid and 1 lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with ¾ lb. Victoria blue B and 2 oz. Malachite green.
Indigo Blue.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2½ lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with 1 lb. Methylene blue 2 B and ½ lb. Malachite green.
Dark Scarlet.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2½ lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with 1 lb. Safranine prima and ½ lb. Auramine I I.
Grey.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and ½ lb. tartar emetic, then dye with
½ lb. New Methylene grey B.
Bluish Rose.—Mordant with 2 lb. tannic acid and 1 lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with 1 lb. Rhodamine B.
Maroon.—Mordant with 4 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, and dye
with 2 lb. Magenta and ½ lb. Auramine.
then dye with 2 oz. Turquoise blue G and ¼ oz. New Victoria blue B. With
these two blues a very great variety of tints and shades of blue can be dyed.
Sea Green.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and ¾ lb. tartar emetic, and dye
with 2 oz. Malachite green.
Dark Green.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with 1¼ lb. Malachite green and ¾ oz. Auramine I I.
By combination of Brilliant green or Malachite green (which are the
principal basic greens) with Auramine in various proportions a great range
of greens of all tints and shades, from pale to deep and from very yellow to
very green tints, can be dyed.
Scarlet.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, then dye
with 1½ lb. Rhodamine 6 G and ¼ lb. Auramine I I.
Pink.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and ¾ lb. tartar emetic, and dye with
¼ lb. Rhodamine G.
Pink.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and ¾ lb. tartar emetic, and dye with
½ lb. Irisamine G.
Slate Blue.—Mordant with 1½ lb. tannic acid and 1 lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with ¾ lb. Victoria blue B and 2 oz. Malachite green.
Indigo Blue.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2½ lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with 1 lb. Methylene blue 2 B and ½ lb. Malachite green.
Dark Scarlet.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2½ lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with 1 lb. Safranine prima and ½ lb. Auramine I I.
Grey.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and ½ lb. tartar emetic, then dye with
½ lb. New Methylene grey B.
Bluish Rose.—Mordant with 2 lb. tannic acid and 1 lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with 1 lb. Rhodamine B.
Maroon.—Mordant with 4 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, and dye
with 2 lb. Magenta and ½ lb. Auramine.
Page 142
Dark Green.—Mordant with 5 lb. tannic acid and 2½ lb. tartar emetic, and
dye with ½ lb. Methylene blue B B, ½ lb. Methyl violet 2 B and 2½ lb.
Auramine I I.
Orange.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, and dye
with 1 lb. New Phosphine G.
Lilac Grey.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and 1½ lb. tartar emetic, and
dye with ¼ lb. Methylene grey B F.
Gold Brown.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 1½ lb. tartar emetic, and
dye with ¾ lb. Thioflavine T and ¾ lb. Bismarck brown.
Orange.—Mordant with 2 lb. tannic acid and 1 lb. tartar emetic, and dye
with 1 lb. Auramine and ¼ lb. Safranine.
Dark Blue.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, and dye
with 2¼ lb. New Methylene blue R and ¾ lb. Naphtindone B B.
Olive Green.—Mordant with 5 lb. sumac extract and 2 lb. copperas, and
dye with 1 lb. Auramine.
Russian Green.—Mordant with 5 lb. sumac extract and 2 lb. copperas, and
dye with 2 lb. Malachite green.
Scarlet.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, and dye
with 1½ lb. Thioflavine T and ½ lb. Irisamine G. With these two dye-stuffs
it is possible to produce a variety of useful shades from a pure greenish
yellow, with Thioflavine T alone, to a bright bluish pink, with the Irisamine
alone, through orange, scarlet, etc., with combinations of the two dye-stuffs.
Dark Grey.—Mordant with 5 lb. sumac extract and 3 lb. copperas, then dye
with 1 lb. New Methylene grey G.
Blue Black.—Mordant with 8 lb. sumac extract and 4 lb. copperas, or better
with iron liquor, then dye with 2 lb. Indamine blue N.
Olive Brown.—Mordant with 5 lb. sumac extract and 3 lb. copperas, and
dye with 1½ lb. New Phosphine G.
dye with ½ lb. Methylene blue B B, ½ lb. Methyl violet 2 B and 2½ lb.
Auramine I I.
Orange.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, and dye
with 1 lb. New Phosphine G.
Lilac Grey.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and 1½ lb. tartar emetic, and
dye with ¼ lb. Methylene grey B F.
Gold Brown.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 1½ lb. tartar emetic, and
dye with ¾ lb. Thioflavine T and ¾ lb. Bismarck brown.
Orange.—Mordant with 2 lb. tannic acid and 1 lb. tartar emetic, and dye
with 1 lb. Auramine and ¼ lb. Safranine.
Dark Blue.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, and dye
with 2¼ lb. New Methylene blue R and ¾ lb. Naphtindone B B.
Olive Green.—Mordant with 5 lb. sumac extract and 2 lb. copperas, and
dye with 1 lb. Auramine.
Russian Green.—Mordant with 5 lb. sumac extract and 2 lb. copperas, and
dye with 2 lb. Malachite green.
Scarlet.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, and dye
with 1½ lb. Thioflavine T and ½ lb. Irisamine G. With these two dye-stuffs
it is possible to produce a variety of useful shades from a pure greenish
yellow, with Thioflavine T alone, to a bright bluish pink, with the Irisamine
alone, through orange, scarlet, etc., with combinations of the two dye-stuffs.
Dark Grey.—Mordant with 5 lb. sumac extract and 3 lb. copperas, then dye
with 1 lb. New Methylene grey G.
Blue Black.—Mordant with 8 lb. sumac extract and 4 lb. copperas, or better
with iron liquor, then dye with 2 lb. Indamine blue N.
Olive Brown.—Mordant with 5 lb. sumac extract and 3 lb. copperas, and
dye with 1½ lb. New Phosphine G.
Page 143
Indigo Blue.—Mordant with 1½ lb. tannic acid and 1 lb. tartar emetic; dye
with ½ lb. New Methylene blue N.
Sky Blue.—Mordant with ½ lb. tannic acid and ¾ lb. tartar emetic; dye with
1½ oz. New Methylene blue G G.
Dark Violet.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with 4 lb. Fast neutral violet B.
Bright Yellow.—Mordant with 2 lb. tannic acid and 1 lb. tartar emetic, and
dye with 2 lb. Thioflavine T.
Primrose Yellow.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and ¼ lb. tartar emetic,
and dye with 2 oz. Thioflavine T.
Navy Blue.—Mordant with 5 lb. sumac extract and 3 lb. copperas, then dye
with 2 lb. New Methylene blue R.
Violet.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, and dye with
2 lb. New Methylene blue 3 R.
Dark Blue.—Mordant with 5 lb. sumac extract and 3 lb copperas, and dye
with 2 lb. New Methylene blue N X.
Blue Black.—Mordant with 8 lb. sumac extract and iron liquor, then dye
with 3 lb. Metaphenylene blue B.
Emerald Tint.—Mordant the cotton in the usual way with 1 lb. tannic acid
and 1 lb. tartar emetic; dye to shade at 180° F. in a bath containing 14 oz.
Auramine G, 2 oz. Brilliant green, then lift, wash and dry.
Orange.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, then dye
with 4 lb. Tannin orange R.
Scarlet.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, and dye
with 2 lb. Tannin orange R and 1 lb. Safranine S.
Dark Scarlet.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, and
dye with ½ lb. Tannin orange R and 2 lb. Safranine S.
The Janus colours are a series of dyes of a basic nature which can be
applied somewhat differently to the ordinary basic dyes, although the
with ½ lb. New Methylene blue N.
Sky Blue.—Mordant with ½ lb. tannic acid and ¾ lb. tartar emetic; dye with
1½ oz. New Methylene blue G G.
Dark Violet.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, then
dye with 4 lb. Fast neutral violet B.
Bright Yellow.—Mordant with 2 lb. tannic acid and 1 lb. tartar emetic, and
dye with 2 lb. Thioflavine T.
Primrose Yellow.—Mordant with 1 lb. tannic acid and ¼ lb. tartar emetic,
and dye with 2 oz. Thioflavine T.
Navy Blue.—Mordant with 5 lb. sumac extract and 3 lb. copperas, then dye
with 2 lb. New Methylene blue R.
Violet.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, and dye with
2 lb. New Methylene blue 3 R.
Dark Blue.—Mordant with 5 lb. sumac extract and 3 lb copperas, and dye
with 2 lb. New Methylene blue N X.
Blue Black.—Mordant with 8 lb. sumac extract and iron liquor, then dye
with 3 lb. Metaphenylene blue B.
Emerald Tint.—Mordant the cotton in the usual way with 1 lb. tannic acid
and 1 lb. tartar emetic; dye to shade at 180° F. in a bath containing 14 oz.
Auramine G, 2 oz. Brilliant green, then lift, wash and dry.
Orange.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, then dye
with 4 lb. Tannin orange R.
Scarlet.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, and dye
with 2 lb. Tannin orange R and 1 lb. Safranine S.
Dark Scarlet.—Mordant with 3 lb. tannic acid and 2 lb. tartar emetic, and
dye with ½ lb. Tannin orange R and 2 lb. Safranine S.
The Janus colours are a series of dyes of a basic nature which can be
applied somewhat differently to the ordinary basic dyes, although the
Page 144
ordinary method can be followed. With these Janus dyes a two-bath process
is followed. A dye-bath is prepared containing the dye-stuff, sulphuric acid
and common salt, and this is used at the boil from half to three-quarters of
an hour, and the goods are allowed to remain in another three-quarters of an
hour while the bath cools down. Next the dyed goods are run in a fixing
bath of sulphuric acid, tannic acid and tartar emetic, this is used at the boil
from half to one hour, after which the dyed goods are taken out and washed.
If necessary the goods may be now topped with basic colours in order to
produce any desired shade. The following recipes will show how the Janus
dyes may be used:—
Blue.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 8 oz. Janus blue G, and 5 lb. common
salt; fix with ¾ lb. sulphuric acid, 8 oz. tannic acid and 4 oz. tartar emetic.
Turquoise Blue.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 1 lb. Janus green B and 10
lb. salt, fixing with ¾ lb. sulphuric acid, 1 lb. tannin and ½ lb. tartar emetic.
Dark Blue.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 2½ lb. Janus blue R and 15 lb.
common salt; fix with ¾ lb. sulphuric acid, 2½ lb. tannic acid and 1¼ lb.
tartar emetic.
Buff.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 2 oz. Janus yellow R and 3 lb. salt; fix
with ¾ lb. sulphuric acid, 3 oz. tannic acid and 3 lb. tartar emetic.
Crimson.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 2½ lb. Janus red B and 15 lb. salt,
fixing with ¾ lb. sulphuric acid, 2½ lb. tannic acid and 1¼ lb. tartar emetic.
Red Violet.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 1 lb. Janus claret red B and 10
lb. salt; fix with 12 oz. sulphuric acid, 1 lb. tannic acid and ½ lb. tartar
emetic.
Orange.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 1 lb. Janus yellow R and 10 lb.
salt; fix with 12 oz. sulphuric acid, 1 lb. tannic acid and ½ lb. tartar emetic.
Dark Violet.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 2 lb. Janus grey B and 15 lb.
salt; fix with 12 oz. sulphuric acid, 2½ lb. tannic acid and 1¼ lb. tartar
emetic.
Chocolate Brown.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 3½ lb. Janus brown B
and 15 lb. salt, fixing with 2 oz. sulphuric acid, 2½ lb. tannic acid and 1 lb.
is followed. A dye-bath is prepared containing the dye-stuff, sulphuric acid
and common salt, and this is used at the boil from half to three-quarters of
an hour, and the goods are allowed to remain in another three-quarters of an
hour while the bath cools down. Next the dyed goods are run in a fixing
bath of sulphuric acid, tannic acid and tartar emetic, this is used at the boil
from half to one hour, after which the dyed goods are taken out and washed.
If necessary the goods may be now topped with basic colours in order to
produce any desired shade. The following recipes will show how the Janus
dyes may be used:—
Blue.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 8 oz. Janus blue G, and 5 lb. common
salt; fix with ¾ lb. sulphuric acid, 8 oz. tannic acid and 4 oz. tartar emetic.
Turquoise Blue.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 1 lb. Janus green B and 10
lb. salt, fixing with ¾ lb. sulphuric acid, 1 lb. tannin and ½ lb. tartar emetic.
Dark Blue.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 2½ lb. Janus blue R and 15 lb.
common salt; fix with ¾ lb. sulphuric acid, 2½ lb. tannic acid and 1¼ lb.
tartar emetic.
Buff.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 2 oz. Janus yellow R and 3 lb. salt; fix
with ¾ lb. sulphuric acid, 3 oz. tannic acid and 3 lb. tartar emetic.
Crimson.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 2½ lb. Janus red B and 15 lb. salt,
fixing with ¾ lb. sulphuric acid, 2½ lb. tannic acid and 1¼ lb. tartar emetic.
Red Violet.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 1 lb. Janus claret red B and 10
lb. salt; fix with 12 oz. sulphuric acid, 1 lb. tannic acid and ½ lb. tartar
emetic.
Orange.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 1 lb. Janus yellow R and 10 lb.
salt; fix with 12 oz. sulphuric acid, 1 lb. tannic acid and ½ lb. tartar emetic.
Dark Violet.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 2 lb. Janus grey B and 15 lb.
salt; fix with 12 oz. sulphuric acid, 2½ lb. tannic acid and 1¼ lb. tartar
emetic.
Chocolate Brown.—Dye with 9 oz. sulphuric acid, 3½ lb. Janus brown B
and 15 lb. salt, fixing with 2 oz. sulphuric acid, 2½ lb. tannic acid and 1 lb.
Page 145
tartar emetic.
(6) DYEING ON METALLIC MORDANTS.
There are a number of dye-stuffs or colouring matters like alizarine,
logwood, fustic, barwood, cutch, resorcine green, etc., which have no
affinity for the cotton fibre, and of themselves will not dye it. They have the
property of combining with metallic oxides such as those of iron,
chromium, aluminium, tin, lead, calcium, etc., to form coloured bodies
which are more or less insoluble in water. These coloured bodies are called
"colour lakes," and the metallic compounds used in connection with their
production "mordants," hence often the dye-stuffs applied by this method
are termed "mordant dyes". In the case of the natural dye-stuffs—logwood,
fustic, Persian berries, Brazil wood, camwood, cochineal, quercitron, cutch,
etc.—which belong to this group of "mordant dyes," the whole of the
material does not enter into the operation, but only a certain constituent
contained therein, which is commonly soluble in boiling water, and
extracted out by boiling. This constituent is called the "colouring principle"
of the dye-stuff or wood, and naturally varies with each. It is not intended
here to deal in detail with these colouring principles. The methods of
applying and the colours which can be got from these dyes varies very
much. Roughly, the modes of application fall under three heads: (1) the
particular metallic mordant is first fixed on the fibre by any suitable
method, and then the fibre is dyed; (2) the dye-stuff is first applied to the
fibre, and then the colour is fixed and developed by treatment with the
mordant; and (3) the dye-stuff and the mordant are applied at the same time.
This last method is not much used. In the following sections many
examples of these methods will be given.
The dyes fixed with metallic mordant vary in their composition and
properties. There is first the group of eosine dyes, which are acid
derivatives of a colour-base, and, in virtue of being so, will combine with
the metallic oxides. The colour of these colour lakes is quite independent of
what oxide is used, depending only on that of the particular eosine dye
employed. Then there are some members of the azo dyes, particularly the
(6) DYEING ON METALLIC MORDANTS.
There are a number of dye-stuffs or colouring matters like alizarine,
logwood, fustic, barwood, cutch, resorcine green, etc., which have no
affinity for the cotton fibre, and of themselves will not dye it. They have the
property of combining with metallic oxides such as those of iron,
chromium, aluminium, tin, lead, calcium, etc., to form coloured bodies
which are more or less insoluble in water. These coloured bodies are called
"colour lakes," and the metallic compounds used in connection with their
production "mordants," hence often the dye-stuffs applied by this method
are termed "mordant dyes". In the case of the natural dye-stuffs—logwood,
fustic, Persian berries, Brazil wood, camwood, cochineal, quercitron, cutch,
etc.—which belong to this group of "mordant dyes," the whole of the
material does not enter into the operation, but only a certain constituent
contained therein, which is commonly soluble in boiling water, and
extracted out by boiling. This constituent is called the "colouring principle"
of the dye-stuff or wood, and naturally varies with each. It is not intended
here to deal in detail with these colouring principles. The methods of
applying and the colours which can be got from these dyes varies very
much. Roughly, the modes of application fall under three heads: (1) the
particular metallic mordant is first fixed on the fibre by any suitable
method, and then the fibre is dyed; (2) the dye-stuff is first applied to the
fibre, and then the colour is fixed and developed by treatment with the
mordant; and (3) the dye-stuff and the mordant are applied at the same time.
This last method is not much used. In the following sections many
examples of these methods will be given.
The dyes fixed with metallic mordant vary in their composition and
properties. There is first the group of eosine dyes, which are acid
derivatives of a colour-base, and, in virtue of being so, will combine with
the metallic oxides. The colour of these colour lakes is quite independent of
what oxide is used, depending only on that of the particular eosine dye
employed. Then there are some members of the azo dyes, particularly the
Page 146
croceine scarlets, which can also be dyed on the cotton by the aid of tin,
lead or alum mordants. Here, again, the mordant has no influence on the
colour, but only fixes it on the cotton.
The most important class of dye-stuffs which are dyed on to cotton with a
metallic mordant is that to which the term "mordant dyes" is now given.
This includes such dyes as logwood, fustic, madder, alizarine, and all the
dyes derived from anthracene. Many of these are not really dyes, that is,
they will not of themselves produce or develop a colour on to any fibre
when used alone; it is only when they combine with the mordant oxide
which is used, and then the colour varies with the mordant. Thus, for
instance, logwood with iron produces a bluish black; with chrome, a blue;
with alumina, a reddish blue. Alizarine with iron produces a dark violet;
with alumina, a scarlet; with chrome, a red; with tin, a bright scarlet. Fustic
gives with tin and alumina, bright yellows; with chrome, a dark yellow;
with iron, an olive, and so on with other members of this group, of which
more will be said later on.
Dyeing with Eosines.
At one time a fairly large quantity of cotton was dyed with the eosines,
owing to the brightness of the shades given by them; but the introduction of
such direct dyes as the Erikas, Ceranines, etc., has thrown the eosines out of
use.
The method adopted for the production of eosine pinks and scarlets on
cotton involves three operations: (1) impregnating the cloth with sodium
stannate; (2) fixing oxide of tin by a bath of weak sulphuric acid; and (3)
dyeing with the eosine.
(1) Preparing with Sodium Stannate.—A bath of 8° Tw. is prepared, and
the cotton is allowed to steep in this bath until it becomes thoroughly
impregnated, after which it is taken out and wrung.
(2) Fixing the Tin Oxide.—A bath of sulphuric acid of 2° to 4° Tw. is
prepared, and the cotton is sent through it, after which it is washed well
with water, when it is ready for dyeing.
Stannate of soda is easily decomposed by acids; even the carbonic acid
present in the air will bring about this change. The tin contained in the
lead or alum mordants. Here, again, the mordant has no influence on the
colour, but only fixes it on the cotton.
The most important class of dye-stuffs which are dyed on to cotton with a
metallic mordant is that to which the term "mordant dyes" is now given.
This includes such dyes as logwood, fustic, madder, alizarine, and all the
dyes derived from anthracene. Many of these are not really dyes, that is,
they will not of themselves produce or develop a colour on to any fibre
when used alone; it is only when they combine with the mordant oxide
which is used, and then the colour varies with the mordant. Thus, for
instance, logwood with iron produces a bluish black; with chrome, a blue;
with alumina, a reddish blue. Alizarine with iron produces a dark violet;
with alumina, a scarlet; with chrome, a red; with tin, a bright scarlet. Fustic
gives with tin and alumina, bright yellows; with chrome, a dark yellow;
with iron, an olive, and so on with other members of this group, of which
more will be said later on.
Dyeing with Eosines.
At one time a fairly large quantity of cotton was dyed with the eosines,
owing to the brightness of the shades given by them; but the introduction of
such direct dyes as the Erikas, Ceranines, etc., has thrown the eosines out of
use.
The method adopted for the production of eosine pinks and scarlets on
cotton involves three operations: (1) impregnating the cloth with sodium
stannate; (2) fixing oxide of tin by a bath of weak sulphuric acid; and (3)
dyeing with the eosine.
(1) Preparing with Sodium Stannate.—A bath of 8° Tw. is prepared, and
the cotton is allowed to steep in this bath until it becomes thoroughly
impregnated, after which it is taken out and wrung.
(2) Fixing the Tin Oxide.—A bath of sulphuric acid of 2° to 4° Tw. is
prepared, and the cotton is sent through it, after which it is washed well
with water, when it is ready for dyeing.
Stannate of soda is easily decomposed by acids; even the carbonic acid
present in the air will bring about this change. The tin contained in the
Page 147
stannate is deposited on the cotton in the form of stannic oxide, or, more
strictly, stannic acid. As this is somewhat soluble in acids, it is important
that the sulphuric acid bath be not too strong, or there will be a tendency for
the tin oxide to be dissolved off the cotton, and then but weak shades will
be obtained in the final operation of dyeing. Further, owing to the
decomposition of the stannate by exposure to the air, it is important that the
substance should be used while fresh, and that only fresh baths should be
used.
(3) Dyeing with Eosine Colours.—After the treatment with stannate of
soda and sulphuric acid the prepared cotton is ready for dyeing. This
process is carried out by preparing a cold bath with the required dye-stuff,
entering the cotton therein, and then slowly raising to about 180° F., and
maintaining at that heat until the desired shade is obtained. It is not needful
to raise to the boil and work at that heat. No better results are obtained,
while there is even a tendency for colours to be produced that rub badly,
which is due to the too rapid formation of the colour lake; and it is worthy
of note that when a colour lake is rapidly formed on the fibre in dyeing it is
apt to be but loosely fixed, and the colour is then loose to both washing and
rubbing.
Dyeing with Acid and Azo Dyes.
In dyeing with this class of colours stannate of soda, acetate of lead or alum
may be used as mordants. The stannate of soda is employed in the same
manner as when the eosines are used, and, therefore, does not require to be
further dealt with.
Acetate of lead is used in a similar way. The cotton is first steeped in a bath
of acetate of lead of about 10° Tw. strong, used cold, and from half an hour
to an hour is allowed for the cotton to be thoroughly impregnated with the
lead solution, it is then wrung and passed a second time into a bath of soda,
when lead oxide or lead carbonate is deposited on the cotton. After this
treatment the cotton is ready for dyeing with any kind of acid, azo and even
eosine dyes, and this is done in the same manner as is used in dyeing the
strictly, stannic acid. As this is somewhat soluble in acids, it is important
that the sulphuric acid bath be not too strong, or there will be a tendency for
the tin oxide to be dissolved off the cotton, and then but weak shades will
be obtained in the final operation of dyeing. Further, owing to the
decomposition of the stannate by exposure to the air, it is important that the
substance should be used while fresh, and that only fresh baths should be
used.
(3) Dyeing with Eosine Colours.—After the treatment with stannate of
soda and sulphuric acid the prepared cotton is ready for dyeing. This
process is carried out by preparing a cold bath with the required dye-stuff,
entering the cotton therein, and then slowly raising to about 180° F., and
maintaining at that heat until the desired shade is obtained. It is not needful
to raise to the boil and work at that heat. No better results are obtained,
while there is even a tendency for colours to be produced that rub badly,
which is due to the too rapid formation of the colour lake; and it is worthy
of note that when a colour lake is rapidly formed on the fibre in dyeing it is
apt to be but loosely fixed, and the colour is then loose to both washing and
rubbing.
Dyeing with Acid and Azo Dyes.
In dyeing with this class of colours stannate of soda, acetate of lead or alum
may be used as mordants. The stannate of soda is employed in the same
manner as when the eosines are used, and, therefore, does not require to be
further dealt with.
Acetate of lead is used in a similar way. The cotton is first steeped in a bath
of acetate of lead of about 10° Tw. strong, used cold, and from half an hour
to an hour is allowed for the cotton to be thoroughly impregnated with the
lead solution, it is then wrung and passed a second time into a bath of soda,
when lead oxide or lead carbonate is deposited on the cotton. After this
treatment the cotton is ready for dyeing with any kind of acid, azo and even
eosine dyes, and this is done in the same manner as is used in dyeing the
Page 148
eosines on a stannate mordant. The shades obtained on a lead mordant
cannot be considered as fast; they bleed on washing and rub off badly.
When alum is used as the mordant it may be employed in the same way as
acetate of lead, but as a rule it is added to the dye-bath direct, and the
dyeing is done at the boil. This latter method gives equally good results, and
is more simple.
The eosines and erythrosines, water blues, soluble blues, croceine scarlets,
cloth scarlets, and a few other dyes of the azo and acid series are used
according to this method. The results are by no means first class, deep
shades cannot be obtained, and they are not fast to washing, soaping and
rubbing.
The methods of employing the much more important group of colouring
matters known as the mordant dyes, which comprise such well-known
products as logwood, fustic and alizarine, require more attention. With
these, alumina, iron, and chromium mordants are used as chief mordants,
either alone or in combination with one another, and with other bodies. The
principal point is to obtain a good deposit of the mordant on the cotton
fibre, and this is by no means easy.
There are several methods by the use of which a deposit is formed of the
mordant, either in the form of metallic oxide (or, perhaps, hydroxide) or of
a basic salt. In some cases the cotton is passed through alternate baths
containing, on one hand, the mordanting salt, e.g., alum, copperas, etc., and,
on the other, a fixing agent, such as soda or phosphate of soda. Or a
mordanting salt may be used, containing some volatile acid that on being
subjected to a subsequent steaming is decomposed. Both these methods will
be briefly discussed.
Methods of Mordanting.
The cotton is first steeped in a bath containing Turkey-red oil, and is then
dried. By this means there is formed on the fibre a deposit of fatty acid,
which is of great value in the subsequent dyeing operations to produce
cannot be considered as fast; they bleed on washing and rub off badly.
When alum is used as the mordant it may be employed in the same way as
acetate of lead, but as a rule it is added to the dye-bath direct, and the
dyeing is done at the boil. This latter method gives equally good results, and
is more simple.
The eosines and erythrosines, water blues, soluble blues, croceine scarlets,
cloth scarlets, and a few other dyes of the azo and acid series are used
according to this method. The results are by no means first class, deep
shades cannot be obtained, and they are not fast to washing, soaping and
rubbing.
The methods of employing the much more important group of colouring
matters known as the mordant dyes, which comprise such well-known
products as logwood, fustic and alizarine, require more attention. With
these, alumina, iron, and chromium mordants are used as chief mordants,
either alone or in combination with one another, and with other bodies. The
principal point is to obtain a good deposit of the mordant on the cotton
fibre, and this is by no means easy.
There are several methods by the use of which a deposit is formed of the
mordant, either in the form of metallic oxide (or, perhaps, hydroxide) or of
a basic salt. In some cases the cotton is passed through alternate baths
containing, on one hand, the mordanting salt, e.g., alum, copperas, etc., and,
on the other, a fixing agent, such as soda or phosphate of soda. Or a
mordanting salt may be used, containing some volatile acid that on being
subjected to a subsequent steaming is decomposed. Both these methods will
be briefly discussed.
Methods of Mordanting.
The cotton is first steeped in a bath containing Turkey-red oil, and is then
dried. By this means there is formed on the fibre a deposit of fatty acid,
which is of great value in the subsequent dyeing operations to produce
Page 149
bright and fast shades. After the oiling comes a bath of alum or alumina
sulphate, either used as bought, or made basic by the addition of soda. The
result is to bring about on the fibre a combination of the fatty acid with the
alumina. Following on the alum bath comes a bath containing soda or
phosphate of soda, which brings about a better fixation of the alumina.
These operations may be repeated several times, especially when a full
shade having a good degree of fastness is desired, as, for instance, Turkey-
reds from Alizarine. This method of mordanting is subject to considerable
variations as regards the order in which the various operations are carried
out, the strength of the baths, and their composition. A great deal depends
upon the ultimate result desired to be obtained, and the price to be paid for
the work.
Iron is much easier to fix on cotton than is either alumina or chrome. It is
usually sufficient to pass the cotton through a bath of either copperas or iron
liquor, hang up to dry or age, and then pass into a bath of lime, soda or even
phosphate of soda. The other mordants require two passages to ensure
proper deposition of the mordant on the fibre.
Following on the mordanting operations comes the dyeing, which is carried
out in the following manner. The bath is made cold with the required
amount of dye-stuff and not too small a quantity of water, the cotton is
immersed and worked for a short time to ensure impregnation, then the
temperature is slowly raised to the boil. This operation should be carefully
carried out, inasmuch as time is an important element in the dyeing with
mordant colours; the colouring principle contained in the dye-stuff must
enter into a chemical combination with the mordant that has been fixed on
the fibre. Heat greatly assists this being brought about, but if the operation
is carried on too quickly, then there is a tendency for uneven shades to be
formed. This can only be remedied by keeping the temperature low until the
dye-stuff has been fairly well united with the mordant, and then maintaining
the heat at the boil to ensure complete formation of the colouring lake on
the fibre, and therefore the production of fast colours.
It has been noticed in the dyeing of alizarines on both cotton and wool that
when, owing to a variety of circumstances, local overheating of the bath
sulphate, either used as bought, or made basic by the addition of soda. The
result is to bring about on the fibre a combination of the fatty acid with the
alumina. Following on the alum bath comes a bath containing soda or
phosphate of soda, which brings about a better fixation of the alumina.
These operations may be repeated several times, especially when a full
shade having a good degree of fastness is desired, as, for instance, Turkey-
reds from Alizarine. This method of mordanting is subject to considerable
variations as regards the order in which the various operations are carried
out, the strength of the baths, and their composition. A great deal depends
upon the ultimate result desired to be obtained, and the price to be paid for
the work.
Iron is much easier to fix on cotton than is either alumina or chrome. It is
usually sufficient to pass the cotton through a bath of either copperas or iron
liquor, hang up to dry or age, and then pass into a bath of lime, soda or even
phosphate of soda. The other mordants require two passages to ensure
proper deposition of the mordant on the fibre.
Following on the mordanting operations comes the dyeing, which is carried
out in the following manner. The bath is made cold with the required
amount of dye-stuff and not too small a quantity of water, the cotton is
immersed and worked for a short time to ensure impregnation, then the
temperature is slowly raised to the boil. This operation should be carefully
carried out, inasmuch as time is an important element in the dyeing with
mordant colours; the colouring principle contained in the dye-stuff must
enter into a chemical combination with the mordant that has been fixed on
the fibre. Heat greatly assists this being brought about, but if the operation
is carried on too quickly, then there is a tendency for uneven shades to be
formed. This can only be remedied by keeping the temperature low until the
dye-stuff has been fairly well united with the mordant, and then maintaining
the heat at the boil to ensure complete formation of the colouring lake on
the fibre, and therefore the production of fast colours.
It has been noticed in the dyeing of alizarines on both cotton and wool that
when, owing to a variety of circumstances, local overheating of the bath
Page 150
happens to take place dark strains or streaks are sure to be formed. To avoid
these care should be taken that no such local heating can occur.
It only remains to add that it is possible to dye a great range of shades by
this method, reds with alizarine and alumina; blacks with logwood and iron;
greens from logwood, fustic, or Persian berries, with chrome and iron; blues
from alizarine blues; greens from Coeruleine or Dinitrosoresorcine, etc.
Another method of mordanting cotton for the mordant group of dye-stuffs is
that in which the cotton is impregnated with a salt of the mordant oxide
derived from a volatile acid such as acetic acid, and then subjected to heat
or steaming. This method is largely taken advantage of by calico printers
for grounds, and dyers might make use of it to a much larger extent than
they do.
There are used in this process the acetates of iron, chromium and
aluminium, and bisulphites of the same metals and a few other compounds.
Baths of these are prepared, and the cotton is impregnated by steeping in
the usual way; then it is gently wrung out and aged, that is, hung up in a
warm room overnight. During this time the mordant penetrates more
thoroughly into the substance of the fabric, while the acid, being more or
less volatile, passes off—probably not entirely, but at any rate some of the
metal is left in the condition of oxide and the bulk of it as a basic salt.
Instead of ageing the cotton may be subjected to a process of steaming with
the same results. After this the cotton is ready for dyeing, which is done by
the method described in the last section.
There is still another method to be noticed here, that is, one in which a bath
is prepared containing both the mordant and the dye-stuff. In this case the
character of the mordant must be such that, under the conditions that
prevail, it will not form a colour lake with the dye-stuff. Such substances
are the bisulphites, if used with the bisulphite compounds of the dye-stuffs;
the acetates, if mixed with some acetic acid, may also be used. The process
consists in preparing the dye-bath containing both the mordant and the dye-
stuff, entering the cotton, steeping for some time, then wringing and
steaming. During the latter operation the acid combined with the mordant,
being volatile, passes away, and the colouring matter and mordant enter into
these care should be taken that no such local heating can occur.
It only remains to add that it is possible to dye a great range of shades by
this method, reds with alizarine and alumina; blacks with logwood and iron;
greens from logwood, fustic, or Persian berries, with chrome and iron; blues
from alizarine blues; greens from Coeruleine or Dinitrosoresorcine, etc.
Another method of mordanting cotton for the mordant group of dye-stuffs is
that in which the cotton is impregnated with a salt of the mordant oxide
derived from a volatile acid such as acetic acid, and then subjected to heat
or steaming. This method is largely taken advantage of by calico printers
for grounds, and dyers might make use of it to a much larger extent than
they do.
There are used in this process the acetates of iron, chromium and
aluminium, and bisulphites of the same metals and a few other compounds.
Baths of these are prepared, and the cotton is impregnated by steeping in
the usual way; then it is gently wrung out and aged, that is, hung up in a
warm room overnight. During this time the mordant penetrates more
thoroughly into the substance of the fabric, while the acid, being more or
less volatile, passes off—probably not entirely, but at any rate some of the
metal is left in the condition of oxide and the bulk of it as a basic salt.
Instead of ageing the cotton may be subjected to a process of steaming with
the same results. After this the cotton is ready for dyeing, which is done by
the method described in the last section.
There is still another method to be noticed here, that is, one in which a bath
is prepared containing both the mordant and the dye-stuff. In this case the
character of the mordant must be such that, under the conditions that
prevail, it will not form a colour lake with the dye-stuff. Such substances
are the bisulphites, if used with the bisulphite compounds of the dye-stuffs;
the acetates, if mixed with some acetic acid, may also be used. The process
consists in preparing the dye-bath containing both the mordant and the dye-
stuff, entering the cotton, steeping for some time, then wringing and
steaming. During the latter operation the acid combined with the mordant,
being volatile, passes away, and the colouring matter and mordant enter into
Page 151
combination to form the colour lake, which is firmly fixed upon the fibre.
Very good results may be obtained by this method.
Lastly, in connection with the mordant colours, attention may be directed to
the process of using some of them, which consists in making a solution of
the dye-stuff in ammonia, impregnating the cotton with this alkaline
solution, and subjecting it to a steaming operation, during which the alkali,
being volatile, passes away, leaving the colouring matter behind in an
insoluble form. The cotton is next passed into a weak bath of the mordant
(preferably the acetates of iron, etc.)., this being used first cold and then
gradually heated up. The dye on the fibre and the mordant combine to form
the desired colour, which is fixed on the fibre.
The chrome mordants are those which are most commonly applied by the
methods here sketched out, and with the large and increasing number of
mordant dyes available, the processes should be worth attention from the
cotton dyer.
The following recipes give fuller details than the outline sketches of the
methods given above for the use of the various dyes produced with the
mordant dyes and metallic mordants. In some cases as will be seen other
dyes may be added to produce special shades:—
Dark Olive.—Prepare a bath from 8 lb. cutch, 4 lb. logwood extract, 7 lb.
fustic extract, 2 lb. copper sulphate. Work in this for one to one and a half
hours at the boil. This bath may be kept standing, adding new ingredients
from time to time, and works best when it gets old. Then pass into a cold
bath of 3 lb. copperas for one hour, then wash and enter into a new bath of
10 lb. salt, 6 oz. Titan blue 3 B, 6 oz. Titan brown R, 6 oz. Titan yellow Y,
work for one hour at the boil, then lift, wash and dry.
Brown.—Prepare a bath with 20 lb. cutch, 2 lb. copper sulphate, 4 lb.
quercitron extract. Work for one and a quarter hours at the boil, then allow
to lie for a day, when the goods are passed into a bath containing 3 lb.
bichromate of potash and 1 lb. alum. Work at 150° to 160° F. in this for a
few minutes, then allow to lie for four to five hours, wash well and dry.
Olive.—Work for twenty minutes at 80° F. in a bath of 10 lb. fustic extract,
5 lb. quercitron extract, 2 lb. logwood extract; heat to boil, work for half an
Very good results may be obtained by this method.
Lastly, in connection with the mordant colours, attention may be directed to
the process of using some of them, which consists in making a solution of
the dye-stuff in ammonia, impregnating the cotton with this alkaline
solution, and subjecting it to a steaming operation, during which the alkali,
being volatile, passes away, leaving the colouring matter behind in an
insoluble form. The cotton is next passed into a weak bath of the mordant
(preferably the acetates of iron, etc.)., this being used first cold and then
gradually heated up. The dye on the fibre and the mordant combine to form
the desired colour, which is fixed on the fibre.
The chrome mordants are those which are most commonly applied by the
methods here sketched out, and with the large and increasing number of
mordant dyes available, the processes should be worth attention from the
cotton dyer.
The following recipes give fuller details than the outline sketches of the
methods given above for the use of the various dyes produced with the
mordant dyes and metallic mordants. In some cases as will be seen other
dyes may be added to produce special shades:—
Dark Olive.—Prepare a bath from 8 lb. cutch, 4 lb. logwood extract, 7 lb.
fustic extract, 2 lb. copper sulphate. Work in this for one to one and a half
hours at the boil. This bath may be kept standing, adding new ingredients
from time to time, and works best when it gets old. Then pass into a cold
bath of 3 lb. copperas for one hour, then wash and enter into a new bath of
10 lb. salt, 6 oz. Titan blue 3 B, 6 oz. Titan brown R, 6 oz. Titan yellow Y,
work for one hour at the boil, then lift, wash and dry.
Brown.—Prepare a bath with 20 lb. cutch, 2 lb. copper sulphate, 4 lb.
quercitron extract. Work for one and a quarter hours at the boil, then allow
to lie for a day, when the goods are passed into a bath containing 3 lb.
bichromate of potash and 1 lb. alum. Work at 150° to 160° F. in this for a
few minutes, then allow to lie for four to five hours, wash well and dry.
Olive.—Work for twenty minutes at 80° F. in a bath of 10 lb. fustic extract,
5 lb. quercitron extract, 2 lb. logwood extract; heat to boil, work for half an
Page 152
hour, then enter in a cold bath of 2 lb. sodium bichromate and 5 lb. copper
sulphate; work for twenty minutes, then heat to boil; work for twenty
minutes more, wash and dry.
Pale Brown.—Treat in a hot bath of 25 lb. cutch, 1¾ lb. bluestone; work for
half an hour in this bath, then lift, wring, and work in a bath of 1¾ lb.
bichromate of potash for twenty to thirty minutes. Dye in a bath of 2¼ lb.
alum, 7 oz. Chrysoidin, 14 oz. Ponceau B.
Fast Brown.—The cotton is heated in a boiling bath containing 20 lb. cutch,
4 oz. copper sulphate for one hour, it is then treated in a bath containing 8
oz. bichromate of potash for half an hour, then dyed in a bath containing 2
oz. Benzo black blue, 6 oz. Benzo brown N B, 2 lb. soap, 8 lb. salt, for one
hour at the boil, washed and dried.
Drab.—Dissolve ½ lb. cutch, 7 lb. bluestone, 8 lb. extract of fustic; enter
goods at 120° F., give six turns, lift and drain. Prepare a fresh bath
containing 2 lb. copperas; enter goods, give three turns, lift, and enter fresh
bath at 120°, containing 2 lb. bichromate of potash, give four turns, drain,
wash and dry.
Coffee Brown.—For one piece, wet out in hot water, run for half an hour
upon a jigger in a bath of 6 lb. good cutch, take up and drain in a bath of 8
lb. black iron liquor; drain, run again through each bath and rinse well.
Prepare a fresh bath with Bismarck brown, enter at 100° F., heat slowly to
200° F., drain, rinse and dry.
Dark Brown Olive.—Prepare the dye-bath with 12 lb. cutch, 2 lb. bluestone,
2½ lb. alum, 10 lb. quercitron extract, 2 lb. indigo carmine 4 lb. turmeric, ¼
lb. Bismarck brown; boil for one and a half hours, then lift and add 1 lb.
copperas; re-enter the goods, give another half-hour, boil, then add 1½ lb.
bichromate of potash, work two hours more, then wash and dry.
Red Drab.—Boil up 10 lb. cutch and 5 lb. sumac; enter the cotton at 140°
F., work fifteen minutes and lift. Prepare a fresh bath of 4 lb. black iron
liquor; enter the cotton cold, work ten minutes and lift. Prepare another bath
with 3 lb. bichromate of potash; enter cotton at 160° F., work fifteen
minutes, lift and wash. Finish in a fresh bath containing 3 lb. logwood, 6 lb.
red liquor; enter cotton at 100° F., work ten minutes, lift, wash and dry.
sulphate; work for twenty minutes, then heat to boil; work for twenty
minutes more, wash and dry.
Pale Brown.—Treat in a hot bath of 25 lb. cutch, 1¾ lb. bluestone; work for
half an hour in this bath, then lift, wring, and work in a bath of 1¾ lb.
bichromate of potash for twenty to thirty minutes. Dye in a bath of 2¼ lb.
alum, 7 oz. Chrysoidin, 14 oz. Ponceau B.
Fast Brown.—The cotton is heated in a boiling bath containing 20 lb. cutch,
4 oz. copper sulphate for one hour, it is then treated in a bath containing 8
oz. bichromate of potash for half an hour, then dyed in a bath containing 2
oz. Benzo black blue, 6 oz. Benzo brown N B, 2 lb. soap, 8 lb. salt, for one
hour at the boil, washed and dried.
Drab.—Dissolve ½ lb. cutch, 7 lb. bluestone, 8 lb. extract of fustic; enter
goods at 120° F., give six turns, lift and drain. Prepare a fresh bath
containing 2 lb. copperas; enter goods, give three turns, lift, and enter fresh
bath at 120°, containing 2 lb. bichromate of potash, give four turns, drain,
wash and dry.
Coffee Brown.—For one piece, wet out in hot water, run for half an hour
upon a jigger in a bath of 6 lb. good cutch, take up and drain in a bath of 8
lb. black iron liquor; drain, run again through each bath and rinse well.
Prepare a fresh bath with Bismarck brown, enter at 100° F., heat slowly to
200° F., drain, rinse and dry.
Dark Brown Olive.—Prepare the dye-bath with 12 lb. cutch, 2 lb. bluestone,
2½ lb. alum, 10 lb. quercitron extract, 2 lb. indigo carmine 4 lb. turmeric, ¼
lb. Bismarck brown; boil for one and a half hours, then lift and add 1 lb.
copperas; re-enter the goods, give another half-hour, boil, then add 1½ lb.
bichromate of potash, work two hours more, then wash and dry.
Red Drab.—Boil up 10 lb. cutch and 5 lb. sumac; enter the cotton at 140°
F., work fifteen minutes and lift. Prepare a fresh bath of 4 lb. black iron
liquor; enter the cotton cold, work ten minutes and lift. Prepare another bath
with 3 lb. bichromate of potash; enter cotton at 160° F., work fifteen
minutes, lift and wash. Finish in a fresh bath containing 3 lb. logwood, 6 lb.
red liquor; enter cotton at 100° F., work ten minutes, lift, wash and dry.
Page 153
Fawn.—Boil up 5 lb. cutch and 5 oz. bluestone, cool to 100° F.; enter, give
six turns, lift, and add 2 lb. copperas; re-enter cotton, give four turns, lift
and wring. Prepare a fresh bath with 1 lb. bichromate of potash; enter cotton
at 110° F., give five turns, lift, wash and dry.
Grey Slate.—Boil up 10 lb. sumac, 3 lb. fustic extract; cool down to 120°
F., give eight turns, lift and wring. Prepare a fresh bath with 5 lb. copperas;
enter cotton cold, give five turns, lift and wash.
Dark Plum.—Lay down overnight in 30 lb. sumac. Next morning wring and
enter in a fresh bath of oxy-muriate of tin 20° Tw., give four turns, lift and
wash well in two waters. Boil out 40 lb. ground logwood, 10 lb. ground
fustic, cool bath down to 140° F.; enter cotton, give eight turns, lift and add
1½ gallons red liquor; re-enter yarn, give four turns, lift, wash and dry.
Pale Chamois.—Work the cotton seven turns in a cold bath of 3 lb.
copperas, then wring and pass into a cold bath of 3 lb. soda ash; work well,
wash and dry.
Dark Brown Olive.—Prepare a bath of 28 lb. fustic, ¾ lb. logwood, 18 lb.
cutch, 4 lb. turmeric, 2 lb. copper sulphate, ¾ lb. alum; work for an hour at
the boil, then sadden in a new bath of 1 lb. bichromate of potash for half an
hour, then sadden in a new bath of ¼ lb. nitrate of iron, working in the cold
for half an hour, lift, wash and dry.
Havana Brown.—Prepare a bath with 4 lb. cutch and 1 lb. bluestone; work
at the boil for one hour, then pass through a warm bath of ½ lb. bichromate
of potash, 1 lb. sulphuric acid. Wash and dye in a bath of ¾ lb. Bismarck
brown and 4 lb. alum; work for one hour at about 180° F., wash and dry.
Black.—Prepare a dye-bath with 20 lb. extract of logwood, 4 lb. cutch, 5 lb.
soda ash, 5 lb. copper sulphate. Heat to the boil, enter the cotton, and work
well for three hours, then lift, and allow to lie overnight in a wet condition,
wash and pass into a bath of 1 lb. bichromate of potash for half an hour; lift,
wash and dry. The dye-bath is not exhausted, and only about one-third of
the various drugs need be added for further batches of cotton.
Reseda Green.—Prepare a bath with 15 lb. cutch, 8 lb. turmeric; work in
this for fifteen minutes at about 150° F., then pass through a hot bath of 2
lb. bichromate of potash for one hour, then re-enter into a cutch bath to
six turns, lift, and add 2 lb. copperas; re-enter cotton, give four turns, lift
and wring. Prepare a fresh bath with 1 lb. bichromate of potash; enter cotton
at 110° F., give five turns, lift, wash and dry.
Grey Slate.—Boil up 10 lb. sumac, 3 lb. fustic extract; cool down to 120°
F., give eight turns, lift and wring. Prepare a fresh bath with 5 lb. copperas;
enter cotton cold, give five turns, lift and wash.
Dark Plum.—Lay down overnight in 30 lb. sumac. Next morning wring and
enter in a fresh bath of oxy-muriate of tin 20° Tw., give four turns, lift and
wash well in two waters. Boil out 40 lb. ground logwood, 10 lb. ground
fustic, cool bath down to 140° F.; enter cotton, give eight turns, lift and add
1½ gallons red liquor; re-enter yarn, give four turns, lift, wash and dry.
Pale Chamois.—Work the cotton seven turns in a cold bath of 3 lb.
copperas, then wring and pass into a cold bath of 3 lb. soda ash; work well,
wash and dry.
Dark Brown Olive.—Prepare a bath of 28 lb. fustic, ¾ lb. logwood, 18 lb.
cutch, 4 lb. turmeric, 2 lb. copper sulphate, ¾ lb. alum; work for an hour at
the boil, then sadden in a new bath of 1 lb. bichromate of potash for half an
hour, then sadden in a new bath of ¼ lb. nitrate of iron, working in the cold
for half an hour, lift, wash and dry.
Havana Brown.—Prepare a bath with 4 lb. cutch and 1 lb. bluestone; work
at the boil for one hour, then pass through a warm bath of ½ lb. bichromate
of potash, 1 lb. sulphuric acid. Wash and dye in a bath of ¾ lb. Bismarck
brown and 4 lb. alum; work for one hour at about 180° F., wash and dry.
Black.—Prepare a dye-bath with 20 lb. extract of logwood, 4 lb. cutch, 5 lb.
soda ash, 5 lb. copper sulphate. Heat to the boil, enter the cotton, and work
well for three hours, then lift, and allow to lie overnight in a wet condition,
wash and pass into a bath of 1 lb. bichromate of potash for half an hour; lift,
wash and dry. The dye-bath is not exhausted, and only about one-third of
the various drugs need be added for further batches of cotton.
Reseda Green.—Prepare a bath with 15 lb. cutch, 8 lb. turmeric; work in
this for fifteen minutes at about 150° F., then pass through a hot bath of 2
lb. bichromate of potash for one hour, then re-enter into a cutch bath to
Page 154
which has been added, 1 lb. sulphate of iron; work for one hour, then add 2
lb. alum and work half an hour longer, rinse, wash and dry.
Fawn Brown.—Prepare a dye-bath with 4 lb. cutch, 2 lb. fustic extract;
work for one hour at hand heat, then lift, and pass through a bath of 1¼ lb.
bichromate of potash; work for a quarter of an hour, rinse and pass into a
fresh bath of 1 oz. Bismarck brown for ten minutes, then lift, wash and dry.
Beige.—Prepare a bath with 20 lb. sumac; enter cotton at 120° F., give six
turns, lift and add ½ lb. copperas; re-enter cotton, give four turns and wring.
Prepare a fresh bath containing 2 lb. extract of fustic, 3 oz. extract of
indigo; enter cotton at 120° F., give three turns, raise temperature to 140° F.,
and turn to shade, lift, wash and dry.
Turkey Red.—One of the most important colours dyed on cotton is that
known as Turkey red, a bright red of a bluish tone, characterised by its great
fastness to light, washing, etc. Strong alkalies turn it more yellowish, but
weak acids and alkalies have little action.
Into the history of the dyeing of Turkey red it is not intended to enter, those
who are interested in the subject should refer to old works on dyeing; nor is
it intended to speak of old methods of producing it with the aid of madder,
but rather to give some of the most modern methods for dyeing it with
alizarine.
Many processes differing somewhat in detail have been devised for dyeing
Turkey red on cotton, and it is probable that no two Turkey-red dyers work
exactly alike. It is difficult to produce the most perfect red, and a very great
deal of care in carrying out the various operations is necessary to obtain it.
This care and the number of operations makes Turkey red an expensive
colour to dye, and so shorter methods are in use which dye a red on cotton
that is cheaper, but not so brilliant or fast as a true Turkey red.
Process 1.—This process is perhaps the most elaborate of all processes, but
it yields a fine red. The process is applicable to cloth or yarn, although
naturally the machinery used will vary to suit the different conditions of the
material. Bleached yarn or cloth may be treated, although a full bleach is
not necessary, but the cloth or yarn must be clean or well scoured, so that it
is free from grease and other impurities.
lb. alum and work half an hour longer, rinse, wash and dry.
Fawn Brown.—Prepare a dye-bath with 4 lb. cutch, 2 lb. fustic extract;
work for one hour at hand heat, then lift, and pass through a bath of 1¼ lb.
bichromate of potash; work for a quarter of an hour, rinse and pass into a
fresh bath of 1 oz. Bismarck brown for ten minutes, then lift, wash and dry.
Beige.—Prepare a bath with 20 lb. sumac; enter cotton at 120° F., give six
turns, lift and add ½ lb. copperas; re-enter cotton, give four turns and wring.
Prepare a fresh bath containing 2 lb. extract of fustic, 3 oz. extract of
indigo; enter cotton at 120° F., give three turns, raise temperature to 140° F.,
and turn to shade, lift, wash and dry.
Turkey Red.—One of the most important colours dyed on cotton is that
known as Turkey red, a bright red of a bluish tone, characterised by its great
fastness to light, washing, etc. Strong alkalies turn it more yellowish, but
weak acids and alkalies have little action.
Into the history of the dyeing of Turkey red it is not intended to enter, those
who are interested in the subject should refer to old works on dyeing; nor is
it intended to speak of old methods of producing it with the aid of madder,
but rather to give some of the most modern methods for dyeing it with
alizarine.
Many processes differing somewhat in detail have been devised for dyeing
Turkey red on cotton, and it is probable that no two Turkey-red dyers work
exactly alike. It is difficult to produce the most perfect red, and a very great
deal of care in carrying out the various operations is necessary to obtain it.
This care and the number of operations makes Turkey red an expensive
colour to dye, and so shorter methods are in use which dye a red on cotton
that is cheaper, but not so brilliant or fast as a true Turkey red.
Process 1.—This process is perhaps the most elaborate of all processes, but
it yields a fine red. The process is applicable to cloth or yarn, although
naturally the machinery used will vary to suit the different conditions of the
material. Bleached yarn or cloth may be treated, although a full bleach is
not necessary, but the cloth or yarn must be clean or well scoured, so that it
is free from grease and other impurities.
Page 155
Operation 1. Boil the cotton for six to eight hours with a carbonate of soda
lye at 1° Tw. in a kier at ordinary pressure, then wash well, wring, or, better,
hydro-extract.
Operation 2. First "greening": What is called the "first green liquor" is
prepared by taking 15 lb. of gallipoli oil, 3 lb. phosphate of soda and 15 lb.
carbonate of soda, the liquor to stand at 2° Tw. Originally this "liquor" was
made with sheep dung, but this is now omitted. The cotton is worked in this
liquor, which is kept at 100° F., until it is thoroughly impregnated, then it is
taken out, squeezed and dried, or in some cases piled overnight and then
stoved.
Operation 3. Second green liquor. As before.
Operation 4. Third green liquor. As before.
Operation 5. A carbonate of soda liquor of 2° Tw. strength is prepared, and
the cotton steeped in this until it is thoroughly impregnated, then it is wrung
out and stoved. This is called "white liquor treatment".
Operation 6. Second white liquor. As before.
Operation 7. Steeping: Prepare a bath of water at 150° F., and steep for
twelve hours, then wring and dry.
Operation 8. Sumacing: A liquor is made from 12 lb. sumac with water, and
after straining from undissolved sumac leaves the liquor is made to stand at
2° Tw., this is kept at about a 100° F., and the cotton is well worked in it and
allowed to steep for four hours, after which it is taken out and wrung.
Operation 9. Mordanting or aluming: 20 lb. of alum are dissolved in hot
water, and 5 lb. of soda crystals are slowly added in order to prepare a basic
alum solution; this is now made by the addition of water to stand at 8° Tw.
The sumaced cotton is worked in this bath and allowed to steep for twenty-
four hours, when it is taken out and wrung. Some dyers add a little tin
crystals to this bath; others add a small quantity of red liquor.
Operation 10. The dyeing: A cold bath is prepared with 10 lb. to 12 lb.
alizarine, 3 lb. sumac extract, and 2 oz. lime. The cotton is entered into the
cold bath, worked from fifteen to twenty minutes so as to get it thoroughly
lye at 1° Tw. in a kier at ordinary pressure, then wash well, wring, or, better,
hydro-extract.
Operation 2. First "greening": What is called the "first green liquor" is
prepared by taking 15 lb. of gallipoli oil, 3 lb. phosphate of soda and 15 lb.
carbonate of soda, the liquor to stand at 2° Tw. Originally this "liquor" was
made with sheep dung, but this is now omitted. The cotton is worked in this
liquor, which is kept at 100° F., until it is thoroughly impregnated, then it is
taken out, squeezed and dried, or in some cases piled overnight and then
stoved.
Operation 3. Second green liquor. As before.
Operation 4. Third green liquor. As before.
Operation 5. A carbonate of soda liquor of 2° Tw. strength is prepared, and
the cotton steeped in this until it is thoroughly impregnated, then it is wrung
out and stoved. This is called "white liquor treatment".
Operation 6. Second white liquor. As before.
Operation 7. Steeping: Prepare a bath of water at 150° F., and steep for
twelve hours, then wring and dry.
Operation 8. Sumacing: A liquor is made from 12 lb. sumac with water, and
after straining from undissolved sumac leaves the liquor is made to stand at
2° Tw., this is kept at about a 100° F., and the cotton is well worked in it and
allowed to steep for four hours, after which it is taken out and wrung.
Operation 9. Mordanting or aluming: 20 lb. of alum are dissolved in hot
water, and 5 lb. of soda crystals are slowly added in order to prepare a basic
alum solution; this is now made by the addition of water to stand at 8° Tw.
The sumaced cotton is worked in this bath and allowed to steep for twenty-
four hours, when it is taken out and wrung. Some dyers add a little tin
crystals to this bath; others add a small quantity of red liquor.
Operation 10. The dyeing: A cold bath is prepared with 10 lb. to 12 lb.
alizarine, 3 lb. sumac extract, and 2 oz. lime. The cotton is entered into the
cold bath, worked from fifteen to twenty minutes so as to get it thoroughly
Page 156
impregnated; then the heat is slowly raised to the boil and the dyeing
carried on at that heat until the full shade is obtained, which usually takes
about an hour. According to the brand of alizarine used so will the shade
that is obtained vary, as will be mentioned later on.
Operation 11. First clearing: The dyed cotton is placed in a boiler and
boiled for four hours with 3 lb. soda crystals and 3 lb. palm oil soap,
afterwards washing well.
Operation 12. Second clearing: The dyed cotton is again boiled for two
hours with 2½ lb. soap and ½ lb. tin crystals, then give a good washing and
dry.
This process is a long one—indeed, some dyers by repeating some of the
operations lengthen it—and it takes at least two weeks, in some cases three
weeks, to carry out.
The first idea is to get the cotton thoroughly impregnated with the oil, and
this oxidised to some extent on the fibre, and to this end the oil treatments
are carried out. In this process experience has shown that olive oil is the
best to use, although other oils have been tried from time to time. The
sumacing enables the alumina to be more firmly fixed on to the cotton. The
alumina combines with both the oil and the sumac, and the resulting
mordant produces a better and more brilliant red with the alizarine. The
clearing operations serve to remove impurities, to brighten the colour, and
to more fully fix it on the cotton.
Process 2.—Operation 1. The cotton is well bleached or scoured with soda
in the usual way.
Operation 2. Oiling or preparing: A liquor is made from 10 lb. alizarine oil
or Turkey-red oil in 10 gallons water. This oil is prepared from castor oil by
a process of treatment with sulphuric acid, washing with water and
neutralising with caustic soda. The cotton is thoroughly impregnated with
this oil by steeping, then it is wrung out and dried.
Operation 3. Steaming: The cotton is put into a steaming cottage or
continuous steaming chamber and steamed for from one to one and a half
hours at about 5 lb. pressure.
carried on at that heat until the full shade is obtained, which usually takes
about an hour. According to the brand of alizarine used so will the shade
that is obtained vary, as will be mentioned later on.
Operation 11. First clearing: The dyed cotton is placed in a boiler and
boiled for four hours with 3 lb. soda crystals and 3 lb. palm oil soap,
afterwards washing well.
Operation 12. Second clearing: The dyed cotton is again boiled for two
hours with 2½ lb. soap and ½ lb. tin crystals, then give a good washing and
dry.
This process is a long one—indeed, some dyers by repeating some of the
operations lengthen it—and it takes at least two weeks, in some cases three
weeks, to carry out.
The first idea is to get the cotton thoroughly impregnated with the oil, and
this oxidised to some extent on the fibre, and to this end the oil treatments
are carried out. In this process experience has shown that olive oil is the
best to use, although other oils have been tried from time to time. The
sumacing enables the alumina to be more firmly fixed on to the cotton. The
alumina combines with both the oil and the sumac, and the resulting
mordant produces a better and more brilliant red with the alizarine. The
clearing operations serve to remove impurities, to brighten the colour, and
to more fully fix it on the cotton.
Process 2.—Operation 1. The cotton is well bleached or scoured with soda
in the usual way.
Operation 2. Oiling or preparing: A liquor is made from 10 lb. alizarine oil
or Turkey-red oil in 10 gallons water. This oil is prepared from castor oil by
a process of treatment with sulphuric acid, washing with water and
neutralising with caustic soda. The cotton is thoroughly impregnated with
this oil by steeping, then it is wrung out and dried.
Operation 3. Steaming: The cotton is put into a steaming cottage or
continuous steaming chamber and steamed for from one to one and a half
hours at about 5 lb. pressure.
Page 157
Operation 4. A bath of red liquor (acetate of alumina) at 8° Tw. is prepared.
Some dyers use basic alum at the same strength. In this bath the cotton is
steeped at 100° F. for two hours; then it is wrung out and dried. This
aluming bath can be repeated. Next it is run through a bath of chalk and
water containing 2 lb. chalk in 10 gallons water. This helps to fix the
alumina on the cotton. Phosphate of soda also makes a good fixing agent.
Operation 5. Dyeing: This is carried out in precisely the same way as in the
other process.
Operation 6. Oiling: A second oiling is now given in a bath of 5 lb. alizarine
oil, or Turkey-red oil, in 10 gallons water, after which the cotton is dried,
when it is ready for further treatment. In place of giving a second oiling
after the dyeing, it is, perhaps, better to give it after the mordanting and
before dyeing.
Operation 7. Clearing: The dyed cotton is cleared with soap in the same
manner as the clearing operations of the first process, which see.
Any of the treatments preparatory to, and following the actual dyeing of,
any of these processes may be repeated if deemed necessary. The text-books
on dyeing and the technical journals devoted to the subject frequently
contain accounts of methods of dyeing Turkey red, but when these come to
be dissected the methods are but little more than variants of those which
have just been given.
Seeing that the theory or theories involved in this rather complex process of
dyeing Turkey red, and that colourists are not agreed as to the real part
played by the oil, the sumac and the clearing operations in the formation of
a Turkey red on cotton, nothing will be said here as to the theory of Turkey-
red dyeing.
Alizarine Red.—It is possible to dye a red with alizarine on cotton which,
while being a good colour, is not quite so fast to washing, etc., as a Turkey
red. This is done by using fewer treatments, as shown in the following
process:—
Process 1.—Boil the cotton in soda.
Some dyers use basic alum at the same strength. In this bath the cotton is
steeped at 100° F. for two hours; then it is wrung out and dried. This
aluming bath can be repeated. Next it is run through a bath of chalk and
water containing 2 lb. chalk in 10 gallons water. This helps to fix the
alumina on the cotton. Phosphate of soda also makes a good fixing agent.
Operation 5. Dyeing: This is carried out in precisely the same way as in the
other process.
Operation 6. Oiling: A second oiling is now given in a bath of 5 lb. alizarine
oil, or Turkey-red oil, in 10 gallons water, after which the cotton is dried,
when it is ready for further treatment. In place of giving a second oiling
after the dyeing, it is, perhaps, better to give it after the mordanting and
before dyeing.
Operation 7. Clearing: The dyed cotton is cleared with soap in the same
manner as the clearing operations of the first process, which see.
Any of the treatments preparatory to, and following the actual dyeing of,
any of these processes may be repeated if deemed necessary. The text-books
on dyeing and the technical journals devoted to the subject frequently
contain accounts of methods of dyeing Turkey red, but when these come to
be dissected the methods are but little more than variants of those which
have just been given.
Seeing that the theory or theories involved in this rather complex process of
dyeing Turkey red, and that colourists are not agreed as to the real part
played by the oil, the sumac and the clearing operations in the formation of
a Turkey red on cotton, nothing will be said here as to the theory of Turkey-
red dyeing.
Alizarine Red.—It is possible to dye a red with alizarine on cotton which,
while being a good colour, is not quite so fast to washing, etc., as a Turkey
red. This is done by using fewer treatments, as shown in the following
process:—
Process 1.—Boil the cotton in soda.
Page 158
Process 2.—Oil with Turkey-red oil, as in the Turkey-red process No. 2
above.
Process 3.—Mordant with alum or acetate of alumina.
Process 4.—Dye with alizarine as before.
Process 5.—Soap.
There are three distinct colouring matters which are sold commercially
under the name of "alizarine". These are: alizarine itself, which produces a
bluish shade of red; anthra-purpurine, which gives a similar but less blue
red than alizarine; and flavo-purpurine, which produces the yellowest reds.
The makers send out all these various products under various marks.
For dyeing Turkey reds the flavo-and anthra-purpurine brands or yellow
alizarines are to be preferred; for pinks and rose shades the alizarine or blue
shade brands are best.
Alizarine Pink.—This can be dyed in the same way as Turkey red, only
using for full pinks 4 per cent, of alizarine in the dye-bath, or for pale pinks
1 to 2 per cent. It is advisable to reduce the strength of the oiling and
mordanting baths down to one-half.
Alizarine Violet.—Alizarine has the property of combining with iron to
form a dark violet colour, and advantage is taken of this fact to dye what are
called in the dyeing and calico printing trades alizarine purples and lilacs,
although these do not resemble in hue or brilliance the purples and lilacs
which can be got from the direct dyes. They have not the importance which
they formerly possessed, and but a mere outline of two processes for their
production will be given.
Alizarine Purple.—Process 1. (1) Boil with soda, (2) prepare with Turkey
red oil, (3) mordant by steeping in copperas liquor at 4° Tw. for twenty
minutes, take out, allow to lie on stillages overnight, then wash and dry. For
deep purples it may be advisable to repeat these treatments; for pale lilacs
using them at half strength is advisable. (4) Dye with 8 to 10 per cent. of
alizarine blue shade, working as described under Turkey red. The best
results are obtained when 1 per cent, of chalk is added to the dye-bath. (5)
Soap as in red dyeing.
above.
Process 3.—Mordant with alum or acetate of alumina.
Process 4.—Dye with alizarine as before.
Process 5.—Soap.
There are three distinct colouring matters which are sold commercially
under the name of "alizarine". These are: alizarine itself, which produces a
bluish shade of red; anthra-purpurine, which gives a similar but less blue
red than alizarine; and flavo-purpurine, which produces the yellowest reds.
The makers send out all these various products under various marks.
For dyeing Turkey reds the flavo-and anthra-purpurine brands or yellow
alizarines are to be preferred; for pinks and rose shades the alizarine or blue
shade brands are best.
Alizarine Pink.—This can be dyed in the same way as Turkey red, only
using for full pinks 4 per cent, of alizarine in the dye-bath, or for pale pinks
1 to 2 per cent. It is advisable to reduce the strength of the oiling and
mordanting baths down to one-half.
Alizarine Violet.—Alizarine has the property of combining with iron to
form a dark violet colour, and advantage is taken of this fact to dye what are
called in the dyeing and calico printing trades alizarine purples and lilacs,
although these do not resemble in hue or brilliance the purples and lilacs
which can be got from the direct dyes. They have not the importance which
they formerly possessed, and but a mere outline of two processes for their
production will be given.
Alizarine Purple.—Process 1. (1) Boil with soda, (2) prepare with Turkey
red oil, (3) mordant by steeping in copperas liquor at 4° Tw. for twenty
minutes, take out, allow to lie on stillages overnight, then wash and dry. For
deep purples it may be advisable to repeat these treatments; for pale lilacs
using them at half strength is advisable. (4) Dye with 8 to 10 per cent. of
alizarine blue shade, working as described under Turkey red. The best
results are obtained when 1 per cent, of chalk is added to the dye-bath. (5)
Soap as in red dyeing.
Page 159
Process 2. (1) Boil with soda, (2) oil with Turkey-red oil, (3) steep in
pyrolignite of iron (iron liquor) for one hour, then age by hanging in the air.
(4) Dye as before. (5) Soap.
Fine blacks are got if after oiling the cotton is treated with sumac or tannic
acid, then mordanted with iron and dyed with alizarine as usual.
Chocolate Browns.—Fine fast chocolate browns can be got from alizarine
by using a mixed mordant of iron and alumina, either the acetate or the
sulphate. By varying the relative proportions various shades can be
obtained.
Alizarine Orange—Prepare the cotton as if for dyeing a Turkey red, but use
in the dye-bath 8 to 10 per cent. of Alizarine orange.
Alizarine Blue—The cotton is boiled three hours with 3 per cent. ammonia
soda at 30 lb. pressure, and then washed thoroughly. The boiled, washed
and hydro-extracted yarn is oiled with a solution containing from ¼ lb. to
1½ lb. Turkey-red oil, 50 per cent. for every gallon of water. It is then
wrung out evenly and dried for twelve hours at 150° F.
Tannin Grounding.
The oiled and dried cotton is worked three-quarters of an hour in a vat
containing a tannin solution (1 oz. per gallon). The cotton remains in this
liquid, which is allowed to cool off for twelve hours, then it is hydro-
extracted. Sumac turns the shade somewhat greener, which is noticed
especially after bleaching, therefore tannin is given the preference.
Chromium Mordant.
The cotton treated with tannin and then hydro-extracted is worked cold for
one hour in a vat containing a solution of chromium chloride at 32° Tw.,
and remains in this solution twelve hours. The cotton is then hydro-
extracted and washed directly; it is best to employ running water. A special
fixation does not take place. The cotton is now ready for dyeing. The
solution of chromium chloride and the tannin solution can be used
continuously, adding fresh liquor to keep the baths up to strength.
pyrolignite of iron (iron liquor) for one hour, then age by hanging in the air.
(4) Dye as before. (5) Soap.
Fine blacks are got if after oiling the cotton is treated with sumac or tannic
acid, then mordanted with iron and dyed with alizarine as usual.
Chocolate Browns.—Fine fast chocolate browns can be got from alizarine
by using a mixed mordant of iron and alumina, either the acetate or the
sulphate. By varying the relative proportions various shades can be
obtained.
Alizarine Orange—Prepare the cotton as if for dyeing a Turkey red, but use
in the dye-bath 8 to 10 per cent. of Alizarine orange.
Alizarine Blue—The cotton is boiled three hours with 3 per cent. ammonia
soda at 30 lb. pressure, and then washed thoroughly. The boiled, washed
and hydro-extracted yarn is oiled with a solution containing from ¼ lb. to
1½ lb. Turkey-red oil, 50 per cent. for every gallon of water. It is then
wrung out evenly and dried for twelve hours at 150° F.
Tannin Grounding.
The oiled and dried cotton is worked three-quarters of an hour in a vat
containing a tannin solution (1 oz. per gallon). The cotton remains in this
liquid, which is allowed to cool off for twelve hours, then it is hydro-
extracted. Sumac turns the shade somewhat greener, which is noticed
especially after bleaching, therefore tannin is given the preference.
Chromium Mordant.
The cotton treated with tannin and then hydro-extracted is worked cold for
one hour in a vat containing a solution of chromium chloride at 32° Tw.,
and remains in this solution twelve hours. The cotton is then hydro-
extracted and washed directly; it is best to employ running water. A special
fixation does not take place. The cotton is now ready for dyeing. The
solution of chromium chloride and the tannin solution can be used
continuously, adding fresh liquor to keep the baths up to strength.
Page 160
Dyeing—For dyeing, water free from lime must be used. Water having not
more than 2.5° hardness can be employed if it is corrected with acetic acid,
thereby converting the carbonate of lime into acetate of lime. Very
calcareous water must be freed from lime before use. The dye-bath contains
for 100 lb. cotton 15 lb. Alizarine blue paste (A R or F, according to the
shade desired), 35 lb. acetic acid (12° Tw.), 15½ lb. ammonia (25 per cent.),
2¼ oz. tannin. The cotton is worked a quarter of an hour in the cold; the
temperature is raised slowly to a boil, taking about one hour, and the cotton
is worked three-quarters of an hour at that heat. Finally the cotton is washed
and hydro-extracted. The dyed and washed cotton is steamed two hours at
15 lb. to 22 lb. pressure. Steaming turns the shade greener and darker, and
increases the fastness. After steaming the cotton it is soaped one or two
hours at the boil, with or without pressure. According to the quality of water
employed, 2 to 5 parts soap per 1,000 parts water are taken.
Brown.—A fine brown is got by a similar process to this, if instead of
Alizarine blue, Alizarine orange is used in the dye-bath. A deeper brown
still if Anthracene brown, or a mixture of Anthracene brown and Alizarine
blue, be used.
Claret Red.—Clarets to maroon shade of red are got by preparing the cotton
as for blue given above, then dyeing with alizarine.
Logwood Black.—One of the most important colours that come under this
section is logwood black, the formation of which on the fibre depends upon
the fact that the colouring principle of logwood forms a black colour lake
with iron and also one with chromium.
There are many ways of dyeing logwood blacks on cotton, whether that be
in form of hanks of yarns, warps or pieces. While these blacks may be, and
in the case of hanks are, dyed by what may be termed an intermittent
process, yet for warps and piece goods a continuous process is preferred by
dyers. Examples of both methods will be given. As in the dyeing of Turkey
reds it is probable that no two dyers of logwood blacks quite agree in the
details of their process, there may be variations in the order of the various
baths and in their relative strengths. Typical methods will be noted here.
Dyeing Logwood Black on Yarn in Hanks.—Operation 1. Sumacing:
Prepare a bath with 10 lb. sumac extract in hot water. Work the yarn in this
more than 2.5° hardness can be employed if it is corrected with acetic acid,
thereby converting the carbonate of lime into acetate of lime. Very
calcareous water must be freed from lime before use. The dye-bath contains
for 100 lb. cotton 15 lb. Alizarine blue paste (A R or F, according to the
shade desired), 35 lb. acetic acid (12° Tw.), 15½ lb. ammonia (25 per cent.),
2¼ oz. tannin. The cotton is worked a quarter of an hour in the cold; the
temperature is raised slowly to a boil, taking about one hour, and the cotton
is worked three-quarters of an hour at that heat. Finally the cotton is washed
and hydro-extracted. The dyed and washed cotton is steamed two hours at
15 lb. to 22 lb. pressure. Steaming turns the shade greener and darker, and
increases the fastness. After steaming the cotton it is soaped one or two
hours at the boil, with or without pressure. According to the quality of water
employed, 2 to 5 parts soap per 1,000 parts water are taken.
Brown.—A fine brown is got by a similar process to this, if instead of
Alizarine blue, Alizarine orange is used in the dye-bath. A deeper brown
still if Anthracene brown, or a mixture of Anthracene brown and Alizarine
blue, be used.
Claret Red.—Clarets to maroon shade of red are got by preparing the cotton
as for blue given above, then dyeing with alizarine.
Logwood Black.—One of the most important colours that come under this
section is logwood black, the formation of which on the fibre depends upon
the fact that the colouring principle of logwood forms a black colour lake
with iron and also one with chromium.
There are many ways of dyeing logwood blacks on cotton, whether that be
in form of hanks of yarns, warps or pieces. While these blacks may be, and
in the case of hanks are, dyed by what may be termed an intermittent
process, yet for warps and piece goods a continuous process is preferred by
dyers. Examples of both methods will be given. As in the dyeing of Turkey
reds it is probable that no two dyers of logwood blacks quite agree in the
details of their process, there may be variations in the order of the various
baths and in their relative strengths. Typical methods will be noted here.
Dyeing Logwood Black on Yarn in Hanks.—Operation 1. Sumacing:
Prepare a bath with 10 lb. sumac extract in hot water. Work the yarn in this
Page 161
for half an hour, then allow to steep for six hours or overnight, lift and
wring. The liquor which is left may be used again for another lot of yarn by
adding 5 lb. sumac extract for each successive lot of yarn. In place of using
sumac the cheaper myrabolam extract may be used.
Operation 2. Ironing or Saddening: Prepare a bath with 3½ gallons nitrate
of iron, 80° Tw. Work the yarn in this for fifteen minutes, then wring out.
The bath may be used again when 1 gallon of nitrate of iron is added for
each lot of yarn worked in it. In place of the nitrate of iron, the pyrolignite
of iron or iron liquor may be used.
Operation 3. Liming: Work for ten minutes in a weak bath of milk of lime.
Operation 4. Dyeing: This is done in a bath made from 10 lb. logwood
extract and 1 lb. fustic extract. The yarn is entered into the cold or tepid
bath, the heat slowly raised to about 150° F, then kept at this heat until a
good black is got, when the yarn is taken out, rinsed and wrung. The
addition of the fustic extract enables a much deeper and jetter shade of
black to be dyed.
Operation 5. Saddening: To obtain a fuller black the dyed cotton is sent
through a bath of 1½ lb. of copperas, then washed well.
Operation 6. Soaping: Work for twenty minutes in a bath of 2 lb. soap at
140° to 150° F. Then wash well.
Much the same process may be followed for dyeing logwood black on
warps and piece goods, jiggers being used for each operation.
Another method is to first work the cotton in pyrolignite (iron liquor) at 10°
Tw., until it is thoroughly impregnated, then to dry and hang in the air for
some hours, next to pass through lime water to fix the iron, and then to dye
as before.
Continuous Process.—In this case a continuous dyeing machine is
provided, fitted with five to six compartments. The cotton is first of all
prepared by steeping in a bath of 12 lb. myrabolam extract for several
hours, then it is taken to the continuous machine and run in succession
through nitrate of iron liquor, lime water, logwood and fustic, iron liquor
and water. The nitrate of iron bath contains 2 gallons of the nitrate to 10
wring. The liquor which is left may be used again for another lot of yarn by
adding 5 lb. sumac extract for each successive lot of yarn. In place of using
sumac the cheaper myrabolam extract may be used.
Operation 2. Ironing or Saddening: Prepare a bath with 3½ gallons nitrate
of iron, 80° Tw. Work the yarn in this for fifteen minutes, then wring out.
The bath may be used again when 1 gallon of nitrate of iron is added for
each lot of yarn worked in it. In place of the nitrate of iron, the pyrolignite
of iron or iron liquor may be used.
Operation 3. Liming: Work for ten minutes in a weak bath of milk of lime.
Operation 4. Dyeing: This is done in a bath made from 10 lb. logwood
extract and 1 lb. fustic extract. The yarn is entered into the cold or tepid
bath, the heat slowly raised to about 150° F, then kept at this heat until a
good black is got, when the yarn is taken out, rinsed and wrung. The
addition of the fustic extract enables a much deeper and jetter shade of
black to be dyed.
Operation 5. Saddening: To obtain a fuller black the dyed cotton is sent
through a bath of 1½ lb. of copperas, then washed well.
Operation 6. Soaping: Work for twenty minutes in a bath of 2 lb. soap at
140° to 150° F. Then wash well.
Much the same process may be followed for dyeing logwood black on
warps and piece goods, jiggers being used for each operation.
Another method is to first work the cotton in pyrolignite (iron liquor) at 10°
Tw., until it is thoroughly impregnated, then to dry and hang in the air for
some hours, next to pass through lime water to fix the iron, and then to dye
as before.
Continuous Process.—In this case a continuous dyeing machine is
provided, fitted with five to six compartments. The cotton is first of all
prepared by steeping in a bath of 12 lb. myrabolam extract for several
hours, then it is taken to the continuous machine and run in succession
through nitrate of iron liquor, lime water, logwood and fustic, iron liquor
and water. The nitrate of iron bath contains 2 gallons of the nitrate to 10
Page 162
gallons of water, and as the pieces go through fresh additions of this liquor
are made from time to time to keep up the volume and strength of the liquor
to the original points.
The logwood bath is made from 10 lb. logwood extract and 1 lb. fustic
extract, and it is used at about 160° F. The quantities here given will serve
for 100 lb. of cotton, and it is well to add them dissolved up in hot water in
small quantities from time to time as the cotton goes through the bath.
The iron liquor given after the dyeing contains 2 lb. of copperas in 10
gallons of water.
Between the various compartments of the machine is fitted squeezing
rollers to press out any surplus liquor, which is run back into the
compartment. The rate of running the warp or pieces through should not be
too rapid, and the dyer must adapt the rate to the speed with which the cloth
dyes up in the dye-bath.
are made from time to time to keep up the volume and strength of the liquor
to the original points.
The logwood bath is made from 10 lb. logwood extract and 1 lb. fustic
extract, and it is used at about 160° F. The quantities here given will serve
for 100 lb. of cotton, and it is well to add them dissolved up in hot water in
small quantities from time to time as the cotton goes through the bath.
The iron liquor given after the dyeing contains 2 lb. of copperas in 10
gallons of water.
Between the various compartments of the machine is fitted squeezing
rollers to press out any surplus liquor, which is run back into the
compartment. The rate of running the warp or pieces through should not be
too rapid, and the dyer must adapt the rate to the speed with which the cloth
dyes up in the dye-bath.
Page 163
The addition of a little red liquor (alumina acetate) to the iron bath is
sometimes made, this is advantageous, as it results in the production of a
finer black. Iron by itself tends to give a rusty-looking, or brownish black,
but the violet, or lilac shade that alumina gives with logwood, tones the
black and makes it look more pleasant.
Some dyers add a small quantity, 1 per cent., of the weight of the cotton of
sulphate of copper to the iron bath, others add even more than this. Some
use nitrate of copper; the copper giving a greenish shade of black with
logwood, and this tones down the iron black and makes it more bloomy in
appearance.
Single bath methods of dyeing logwood blacks are in use, such methods are
not economical as a large quantity, both of dye-wood and mordants, remain
in the bath unused. Although full intense blacks can be dyed with them, the
black is rather loosely fixed and tends to rub off. This is because as both the
dye-stuff and the mordant are in the same bath together they tend to enter
into combination and form a colour lake that precipitates out in the dye-
bath, causing the loss of material alluded to above, while some of it gets
mechanically fixed on the cotton, in a more or less loose form, and this
looseness causes the colour to rub off.
For a chrome-logwood black, a dye-bath is made with 3 lb. bichromate of
potash, 100 gallons logwood decoction at 3° Tw., and 6½ lb. hydrochloric
acid. Enter the cotton into the cold bath, raise slowly to the boil and work
until the cotton has acquired a full black blue colour, then take it out and
rinse in a hot lime water when a blue black will be got.
A copper-logwood black is got by taking 100 gallons logwood decoction at
3° Tw., and 6 lb. copper acetate (verdigris); the cotton is entered cold and
brought up to the boil. Copper nitrate may be used in the place of the
copper acetate, when it is a good plan to add a little soda to the bath. Some
dyers in working a copper-logwood black make the dye-bath from 100
gallons logwood liquor at 2° Tw., 4 lb. copper sulphate (bluestone) and 4 lb.
soda. This bath is used at about 180° to 190° F., for three-quarters of an
hour, then the cotton is lifted out, wrung and aged or as it is sometimes
called "smothered" for five hours. The operations are repeated two or three
times to develop a full black.
sometimes made, this is advantageous, as it results in the production of a
finer black. Iron by itself tends to give a rusty-looking, or brownish black,
but the violet, or lilac shade that alumina gives with logwood, tones the
black and makes it look more pleasant.
Some dyers add a small quantity, 1 per cent., of the weight of the cotton of
sulphate of copper to the iron bath, others add even more than this. Some
use nitrate of copper; the copper giving a greenish shade of black with
logwood, and this tones down the iron black and makes it more bloomy in
appearance.
Single bath methods of dyeing logwood blacks are in use, such methods are
not economical as a large quantity, both of dye-wood and mordants, remain
in the bath unused. Although full intense blacks can be dyed with them, the
black is rather loosely fixed and tends to rub off. This is because as both the
dye-stuff and the mordant are in the same bath together they tend to enter
into combination and form a colour lake that precipitates out in the dye-
bath, causing the loss of material alluded to above, while some of it gets
mechanically fixed on the cotton, in a more or less loose form, and this
looseness causes the colour to rub off.
For a chrome-logwood black, a dye-bath is made with 3 lb. bichromate of
potash, 100 gallons logwood decoction at 3° Tw., and 6½ lb. hydrochloric
acid. Enter the cotton into the cold bath, raise slowly to the boil and work
until the cotton has acquired a full black blue colour, then take it out and
rinse in a hot lime water when a blue black will be got.
A copper-logwood black is got by taking 100 gallons logwood decoction at
3° Tw., and 6 lb. copper acetate (verdigris); the cotton is entered cold and
brought up to the boil. Copper nitrate may be used in the place of the
copper acetate, when it is a good plan to add a little soda to the bath. Some
dyers in working a copper-logwood black make the dye-bath from 100
gallons logwood liquor at 2° Tw., 4 lb. copper sulphate (bluestone) and 4 lb.
soda. This bath is used at about 180° to 190° F., for three-quarters of an
hour, then the cotton is lifted out, wrung and aged or as it is sometimes
called "smothered" for five hours. The operations are repeated two or three
times to develop a full black.
Page 164
Logwood black dyeing has lost much of its importance of late years owing
to the introduction of the many direct blacks, which are much easier of
application and leave the cotton with a fuller and softer feel.
Logwood Greys.—These are much dyed on cotton and are nothing more
than weak logwood blacks, and may be dyed by the same processes only
using baths of about one-tenth the strength.
By a one-bath process 5 lb. of logwood are made into a decoction and to
this 1 lb. of copperas (ferrous sulphate) is added and the cotton is dyed at
about 150° F. in this bath. By adding to the dye-bath small quantities of
other dye-woods, fustic, peach wood, sumach, etc., greys of various shades
are obtained. Some recipes bearing on this point are given in this section.
Logwood is not only used for dyeing blacks and greys as the principal
colouring matter, but is also used as a shading colour along with cutch,
fustic, quercitron, etc., in dyeing olives, browns, etc., and among the recipes
given in this section examples of its use in this direction will be found.
The dye-woods—fustic, Brazil wood, bar wood, Lima wood, cam wood,
cutch, peach wood, quercitron bark, Persian berries—have since the
introduction of the direct dyes lost much of their importance and are now
little used. Cutch is used in the dyeing of browns and several recipes have
already been given. Their production consists essentially in treating the
cotton in a bath of cutch, either alone or for the purpose of shading with
other dye-woods when the cotton takes up the tannin and colouring matter
of the cutch, etc. The colour is then developed by treatment with bichromate
of potash, either with or without the addition of an iron salt to darken the
shade of brown.
The usual methods of applying all the other dye-woods, to obtain scarlets to
reds with Brazil wood, Lima wood, peach wood; or yellows with fustic,
quercitron or Persian berries, is to first prepare the cotton with sumac, then
mordant with alumina acetate or tin crystals (the latter gives the brightest
shades), then dye in a decoction of the dye-woods. Sometimes the cotton is
boiled in a bath of the wood when it takes up some of the dye-wood, next
there is added alumina acetate or tin crystals and the dyeing is continued
when the colour becomes developed and fixed upon the cotton.
to the introduction of the many direct blacks, which are much easier of
application and leave the cotton with a fuller and softer feel.
Logwood Greys.—These are much dyed on cotton and are nothing more
than weak logwood blacks, and may be dyed by the same processes only
using baths of about one-tenth the strength.
By a one-bath process 5 lb. of logwood are made into a decoction and to
this 1 lb. of copperas (ferrous sulphate) is added and the cotton is dyed at
about 150° F. in this bath. By adding to the dye-bath small quantities of
other dye-woods, fustic, peach wood, sumach, etc., greys of various shades
are obtained. Some recipes bearing on this point are given in this section.
Logwood is not only used for dyeing blacks and greys as the principal
colouring matter, but is also used as a shading colour along with cutch,
fustic, quercitron, etc., in dyeing olives, browns, etc., and among the recipes
given in this section examples of its use in this direction will be found.
The dye-woods—fustic, Brazil wood, bar wood, Lima wood, cam wood,
cutch, peach wood, quercitron bark, Persian berries—have since the
introduction of the direct dyes lost much of their importance and are now
little used. Cutch is used in the dyeing of browns and several recipes have
already been given. Their production consists essentially in treating the
cotton in a bath of cutch, either alone or for the purpose of shading with
other dye-woods when the cotton takes up the tannin and colouring matter
of the cutch, etc. The colour is then developed by treatment with bichromate
of potash, either with or without the addition of an iron salt to darken the
shade of brown.
The usual methods of applying all the other dye-woods, to obtain scarlets to
reds with Brazil wood, Lima wood, peach wood; or yellows with fustic,
quercitron or Persian berries, is to first prepare the cotton with sumac, then
mordant with alumina acetate or tin crystals (the latter gives the brightest
shades), then dye in a decoction of the dye-woods. Sometimes the cotton is
boiled in a bath of the wood when it takes up some of the dye-wood, next
there is added alumina acetate or tin crystals and the dyeing is continued
when the colour becomes developed and fixed upon the cotton.
Page 165
Iron may be used as a mordant for any of these dye-woods but it gives dull
sad shades.
Chrome mordants can also be used and these produce darker shades than tin
or alumina mordants.
As practically all these dye-woods are now not used by themselves it has
not been deemed necessary to give specific recipes for their application, on
previous pages several are given showing their use in combination with
other dyes.
The dye-stuff Dinitroso-resorcine or Solid green O is used along with iron
mordants for producing fast greens and with chrome mordants for
producing browns to a limited extent in cotton dyeing. The following
recipes give the details of the process.
Green.—Steep the cotton yarn or cloth in the following liquor until well
impregnated, then dry: 3 gallons iron liquor (pyrolignite of iron), 22° Tw.
gallons of water, ¾ gallon acetic acid, 12° Tw., 2 lb. ammonium chloride.
Then pass the cotton through a warm bath of 3 oz. phosphate of soda and 4
oz. chalk per gallon, then enter into a dye-bath containing 6 lb. Solid green
O. Work as described for dyeing alizarine red. For darker greens of a
Russian green shade use 10 lb. of solid green O, in the dye-bath.
Brown.—A fine brown is got by steeping the cotton in a bath of 8 lb. Solid
green O, 6¾ gallons water, 1½ gallons ammonia and 2 lb. acetate of
chrome; dry, then pass through a soap-bath, wash and dry.
Deep Olive Brown.—Mix 8 lb. Solid green O and 4½ lb. borax with 6
gallons water, add ½ lb. Turkey-red oil, 5 lb. ammonia, then 2 gallons water
and 1½ lb. copper-soda solution and another 2 gallons water. Steep the
cotton in this, dry, soap well and wash. The copper-soda solution is made
from 10 lb. chloride of copper (75° Tw.), 5 lb. tartaric acid, 12 lb. caustic
soda (75° Tw.) and 4 lb. glycerine.
Khaki.—Make the dye liquor from 14 lb. Solid green O, ½ lb. Alizarine
yellow N, 1 lb. caustic soda (36° Tw.), ½ lb. Turkey-red oil and 8 gallons
water. To this add 2½ lb. acetate of chrome (32° Tw.), 2¼ lb. copper-soda
solution and 4 gallons water.
sad shades.
Chrome mordants can also be used and these produce darker shades than tin
or alumina mordants.
As practically all these dye-woods are now not used by themselves it has
not been deemed necessary to give specific recipes for their application, on
previous pages several are given showing their use in combination with
other dyes.
The dye-stuff Dinitroso-resorcine or Solid green O is used along with iron
mordants for producing fast greens and with chrome mordants for
producing browns to a limited extent in cotton dyeing. The following
recipes give the details of the process.
Green.—Steep the cotton yarn or cloth in the following liquor until well
impregnated, then dry: 3 gallons iron liquor (pyrolignite of iron), 22° Tw.
gallons of water, ¾ gallon acetic acid, 12° Tw., 2 lb. ammonium chloride.
Then pass the cotton through a warm bath of 3 oz. phosphate of soda and 4
oz. chalk per gallon, then enter into a dye-bath containing 6 lb. Solid green
O. Work as described for dyeing alizarine red. For darker greens of a
Russian green shade use 10 lb. of solid green O, in the dye-bath.
Brown.—A fine brown is got by steeping the cotton in a bath of 8 lb. Solid
green O, 6¾ gallons water, 1½ gallons ammonia and 2 lb. acetate of
chrome; dry, then pass through a soap-bath, wash and dry.
Deep Olive Brown.—Mix 8 lb. Solid green O and 4½ lb. borax with 6
gallons water, add ½ lb. Turkey-red oil, 5 lb. ammonia, then 2 gallons water
and 1½ lb. copper-soda solution and another 2 gallons water. Steep the
cotton in this, dry, soap well and wash. The copper-soda solution is made
from 10 lb. chloride of copper (75° Tw.), 5 lb. tartaric acid, 12 lb. caustic
soda (75° Tw.) and 4 lb. glycerine.
Khaki.—Make the dye liquor from 14 lb. Solid green O, ½ lb. Alizarine
yellow N, 1 lb. caustic soda (36° Tw.), ½ lb. Turkey-red oil and 8 gallons
water. To this add 2½ lb. acetate of chrome (32° Tw.), 2¼ lb. copper-soda
solution and 4 gallons water.
Page 166
Sage Green.—Use 1¼ lb. Solid green O, 3 lb. caustic soda (36° Tw.), ½ lb.
Ceruleine, ½ lb. Turkey-red oil, 1 gallon water to which is added 2½ lb.
acetate of chrome (32° Tw.) and 2¼ lb. copper-soda solution dissolved in 4
gallons water.
Pale Brown.—Use 4 lb. Solid green O, 2½ lb. borax, 3 lb. ammonia, ½ lb.
Turkey-red oil, 6 gallons of water and 1½ lb. copper-soda solution
dissolved in 2 gallons water.
Pale Fawn Brown.—The dye-bath is made from ½ lb. Alizarine, 1¼ lb.
Solid green O, 1½ lb. borax, ½ lb. Turkey-red oil and 5 gallons of water to
which is added 1½ lb. acetate of chrome (32° Tw.), 1½ lb. copper-soda
solution and 4 gallons water. In all cases the cotton is steeped in the dye
liquors until thoroughly impregnated, then the excess liquor is wrung out,
the cotton dried, then passed through a soap bath, washed well and dried.
Dark Brown.—Place the cotton in a lukewarm bath of 25 lb. cutch and 1½
lb. copper sulphate; work for half an hour, then steep for six hours, then lift,
wring and enter into a bath of 3¼ lb. bichromate of potash at 160° F. for
twenty minutes. Then wash and dry.
Yellow Brown.—Make a bath with 14 lb. cutch and ½ lb. copper sulphate;
work in this bath for four hours at 120° F., then pass into a bath of 2 lb.
copperas and ½ lb. chalk, work for half an hour in the cold, then pass into a
hot bath of 2½ lb. bichromate of potash at 150° F. for half an hour.
Dark Brown.—Make a dye-bath with 15 lb. cutch, 2 lb. logwood extract
and 2 lb. fustic extract; work the cotton in this at 160° F. for three hours,
then pass into a cold bath of 1 lb. copperas and ¼ lb. chalk for half an hour,
then into a bath of 3 lb. bichromate of potash for half an hour at 150° F.,
then wash and dry.
Ceruleine, ½ lb. Turkey-red oil, 1 gallon water to which is added 2½ lb.
acetate of chrome (32° Tw.) and 2¼ lb. copper-soda solution dissolved in 4
gallons water.
Pale Brown.—Use 4 lb. Solid green O, 2½ lb. borax, 3 lb. ammonia, ½ lb.
Turkey-red oil, 6 gallons of water and 1½ lb. copper-soda solution
dissolved in 2 gallons water.
Pale Fawn Brown.—The dye-bath is made from ½ lb. Alizarine, 1¼ lb.
Solid green O, 1½ lb. borax, ½ lb. Turkey-red oil and 5 gallons of water to
which is added 1½ lb. acetate of chrome (32° Tw.), 1½ lb. copper-soda
solution and 4 gallons water. In all cases the cotton is steeped in the dye
liquors until thoroughly impregnated, then the excess liquor is wrung out,
the cotton dried, then passed through a soap bath, washed well and dried.
Dark Brown.—Place the cotton in a lukewarm bath of 25 lb. cutch and 1½
lb. copper sulphate; work for half an hour, then steep for six hours, then lift,
wring and enter into a bath of 3¼ lb. bichromate of potash at 160° F. for
twenty minutes. Then wash and dry.
Yellow Brown.—Make a bath with 14 lb. cutch and ½ lb. copper sulphate;
work in this bath for four hours at 120° F., then pass into a bath of 2 lb.
copperas and ½ lb. chalk, work for half an hour in the cold, then pass into a
hot bath of 2½ lb. bichromate of potash at 150° F. for half an hour.
Dark Brown.—Make a dye-bath with 15 lb. cutch, 2 lb. logwood extract
and 2 lb. fustic extract; work the cotton in this at 160° F. for three hours,
then pass into a cold bath of 1 lb. copperas and ¼ lb. chalk for half an hour,
then into a bath of 3 lb. bichromate of potash for half an hour at 150° F.,
then wash and dry.
Page 167
(7) PRODUCTION OF COLOUR DIRECT
UPON COTTON FIBRES.
By the action of nitrous acid upon the salts of the primary organic amines
the so-called diazo compounds are formed. An example of this important
process is that of nitrous acid on aniline hydrochloride shown in the
following equation:—
C6H5NH2 + HCl + HNO2 2H2O + C6H5N:NCl Hydrochloric acid Nitrous
Water, Diazo-benzene aniline, acid, chloride.
These diazo compounds are distinguished by their active properties,
especially in combining with amines in acid solutions, or with phenols in
alkaline solution to form the azo dyes, thus diazobenzene chloride will
combine with naphthol to form naphthol-azo-benzene, thus:—
C6H5N:NCl + C10H7OH + NaOH = Diazo-benzene chloride, Naphthol,
Caustic soda.
C10H6OHN:NC6H5 + NaCl + H2O Naphthol-azo-benzene, Salt, Water.
These azo compounds are coloured, but are perfectly insoluble in water,
alkalies, or acids; on the other hand the sulphonates of these bodies are
easily soluble and form the numerous azo dyes now so largely made and
used in wool and silk dyeing, but which on account of their being
sulphonates cannot be used for cotton dyeing.
Methods have been devised for producing the insoluble azo colours direct
upon the fibres. They are also called naphthol colours from the use of beta-
and alpha-naphthol in their production. Although these azo dyes, when
produced on the fibre, do not possess the fastness of the alizarine dyes, yet,
on account of their cheapness and relative great fastness to soap and the
action of sunlight, they are better than many of the newer cotton dyes.
By this method (first introduced in England by Holliday) colours of
exceptional brightness and fastness can be obtained which were not
UPON COTTON FIBRES.
By the action of nitrous acid upon the salts of the primary organic amines
the so-called diazo compounds are formed. An example of this important
process is that of nitrous acid on aniline hydrochloride shown in the
following equation:—
C6H5NH2 + HCl + HNO2 2H2O + C6H5N:NCl Hydrochloric acid Nitrous
Water, Diazo-benzene aniline, acid, chloride.
These diazo compounds are distinguished by their active properties,
especially in combining with amines in acid solutions, or with phenols in
alkaline solution to form the azo dyes, thus diazobenzene chloride will
combine with naphthol to form naphthol-azo-benzene, thus:—
C6H5N:NCl + C10H7OH + NaOH = Diazo-benzene chloride, Naphthol,
Caustic soda.
C10H6OHN:NC6H5 + NaCl + H2O Naphthol-azo-benzene, Salt, Water.
These azo compounds are coloured, but are perfectly insoluble in water,
alkalies, or acids; on the other hand the sulphonates of these bodies are
easily soluble and form the numerous azo dyes now so largely made and
used in wool and silk dyeing, but which on account of their being
sulphonates cannot be used for cotton dyeing.
Methods have been devised for producing the insoluble azo colours direct
upon the fibres. They are also called naphthol colours from the use of beta-
and alpha-naphthol in their production. Although these azo dyes, when
produced on the fibre, do not possess the fastness of the alizarine dyes, yet,
on account of their cheapness and relative great fastness to soap and the
action of sunlight, they are better than many of the newer cotton dyes.
By this method (first introduced in England by Holliday) colours of
exceptional brightness and fastness can be obtained which were not
Page 168
obtainable with the dyes then known. Those which are obtained from
phenols are of the first importance.
The Diazotisation of the Amido Bases.
With most bases this must be accomplished as cold as possible below 65° F.
At a higher temperature, and when allowed to stand, most diazo compounds
decompose quickly with evolution of nitrogen, which decomposition results
in the mixture losing its power of producing colour, or at the most gives
unsatisfactory results. For this reason it is therefore always necessary to
work as cold and as quickly as possible.
The amido-azo bodies, whose compounds with the phenols are also
distinguished by their great fastness, are in this respect an exception. They
can be diazotised at the ordinary temperature, and their diazo compounds
are much stabler than those, for example, of alpha-and beta-naphthylamine
or of aniline, which must always be used as quickly as possible.
From anisidine, phenetidine and amido-diphenylamine, still more stable
diazo compounds can be obtained, but the prices of these bases are rather
high, and the colours produced with them are not fast to light.
The cheapest and most convenient method of obtaining nitrous acid for
diazotising is by the action of a mineral acid, preferably hydrochloric acid,
upon nitrite of soda.
For diazotising one molecule of base requires one molecule of hydrochloric
acid to form a salt of the base, a molecule of nitrite of soda, and another
molecule of hydrochloric acid to decompose the nitrite. The diazotisation is
better carried out and the diazo solution rendered more stable if another
molecule of hydrochloric acid and an excess of nitrite of soda are used. The
presence of an excess of nitrite can be determined by testing the diazo
solution with potassium iodide starch paper, which in the presence of excess
of nitrite gives the blue iodine starch reaction.
In carrying out the diazotisation, the base is first dissolved in the whole
amount of hydrochloric acid which has to be used, and the solution is
filtered. The diazotisation takes place in the manner shown in the equation:
—
phenols are of the first importance.
The Diazotisation of the Amido Bases.
With most bases this must be accomplished as cold as possible below 65° F.
At a higher temperature, and when allowed to stand, most diazo compounds
decompose quickly with evolution of nitrogen, which decomposition results
in the mixture losing its power of producing colour, or at the most gives
unsatisfactory results. For this reason it is therefore always necessary to
work as cold and as quickly as possible.
The amido-azo bodies, whose compounds with the phenols are also
distinguished by their great fastness, are in this respect an exception. They
can be diazotised at the ordinary temperature, and their diazo compounds
are much stabler than those, for example, of alpha-and beta-naphthylamine
or of aniline, which must always be used as quickly as possible.
From anisidine, phenetidine and amido-diphenylamine, still more stable
diazo compounds can be obtained, but the prices of these bases are rather
high, and the colours produced with them are not fast to light.
The cheapest and most convenient method of obtaining nitrous acid for
diazotising is by the action of a mineral acid, preferably hydrochloric acid,
upon nitrite of soda.
For diazotising one molecule of base requires one molecule of hydrochloric
acid to form a salt of the base, a molecule of nitrite of soda, and another
molecule of hydrochloric acid to decompose the nitrite. The diazotisation is
better carried out and the diazo solution rendered more stable if another
molecule of hydrochloric acid and an excess of nitrite of soda are used. The
presence of an excess of nitrite can be determined by testing the diazo
solution with potassium iodide starch paper, which in the presence of excess
of nitrite gives the blue iodine starch reaction.
In carrying out the diazotisation, the base is first dissolved in the whole
amount of hydrochloric acid which has to be used, and the solution is
filtered. The diazotisation takes place in the manner shown in the equation:
—
Page 169
C6H5NH2 + HCl + HCl + NaNO2 =
Aniline hydrochloride, Hydrochloric acid, Sodium nitrite,
NaCl + C6H5N:NCl + H20
Salt, Diazo-benzene chloride, Water.
The bases which form salts soluble with difficulty, such as nitroaniline and
the amido-azo bodies, offer special difficulties in diazotising.
It has been found that the operation with these is best carried out if the
chemically pure bases in paste form are mixed with the requisite amount of
nitrite, and the diluted paste then poured into the hydrochloric acid.
It has been found by experience that the colour is developed much brighter
upon the fibre when the diazo solution contains acetic acid and no free
mineral acid. However, the diazotisation is better carried out with
hydrochloric acid, and the presence of the latter is necessary to give
stability to the solution. If before the diazo solution is used a quantity of
acetate of soda be added to it, the free hydrochloric acid liberates acetic
acid from the acetate, and the chloride of the diazo body changes into its
acetate. It is better to add an excess above the two molecules of acetate of
soda which are required.
The combination when aniline and beta-naphthol are used, as the amine and
phenol respectively, is shown in the following equations:—
C6H5N:NCl + C10H7OH +
Diazo-benzene chloride, B. naphthol,
NaOH = 2NaCl + C6H5N:NC10H6OH + H2O Caustic soda, Benzene- azo-
naphthol, Water.
Or, with naphthylamine and naphthol, thus:—
C10H7N:NCl + C10H7OH + NaOH =
NaCl + C10H7N:NC10H6OH + H2O
Naphthalene azo-naphthol.
By the action of nitrous acid upon amido-azo bodies a group of bodies
called diazo-azo compounds are obtained which contain the group N:N
Aniline hydrochloride, Hydrochloric acid, Sodium nitrite,
NaCl + C6H5N:NCl + H20
Salt, Diazo-benzene chloride, Water.
The bases which form salts soluble with difficulty, such as nitroaniline and
the amido-azo bodies, offer special difficulties in diazotising.
It has been found that the operation with these is best carried out if the
chemically pure bases in paste form are mixed with the requisite amount of
nitrite, and the diluted paste then poured into the hydrochloric acid.
It has been found by experience that the colour is developed much brighter
upon the fibre when the diazo solution contains acetic acid and no free
mineral acid. However, the diazotisation is better carried out with
hydrochloric acid, and the presence of the latter is necessary to give
stability to the solution. If before the diazo solution is used a quantity of
acetate of soda be added to it, the free hydrochloric acid liberates acetic
acid from the acetate, and the chloride of the diazo body changes into its
acetate. It is better to add an excess above the two molecules of acetate of
soda which are required.
The combination when aniline and beta-naphthol are used, as the amine and
phenol respectively, is shown in the following equations:—
C6H5N:NCl + C10H7OH +
Diazo-benzene chloride, B. naphthol,
NaOH = 2NaCl + C6H5N:NC10H6OH + H2O Caustic soda, Benzene- azo-
naphthol, Water.
Or, with naphthylamine and naphthol, thus:—
C10H7N:NCl + C10H7OH + NaOH =
NaCl + C10H7N:NC10H6OH + H2O
Naphthalene azo-naphthol.
By the action of nitrous acid upon amido-azo bodies a group of bodies
called diazo-azo compounds are obtained which contain the group N:N
Page 170
twice over, thus:—
C6H5N:NC6H4NH2HCl + NaNO2 + 2HCl =
Benzene-azo-aniline-hydrochloride,
NaCl + C6H5N:NC6H4N:NCl + 2H2O.
Diazo-azo-benzene-chloride.
When this compound is combined with naphthol diazo-azo dyes are
produced.
C6H5N:NC6H4N:NC10H6OH. Benzene-azo-benzene-azo-naphthol.
The molecular weights of the bases, phenols and chemicals employed are
the following:—
1. Hydrochloric acid, HCl—36.5. 2. Caustic soda, NaOH—40. 3. Nitrite of
soda, NaNO2—69. 4. Acetate of soda, NaC2H3O23H2O—136.
1. Commercial hydrochloric acid at 32° Tw. contains about 365 grams of
HCl in a litre, or 3½ lb. in a gallon.
2. The commercial 77 per cent. soda must always be used, and for practical
purposes it may be taken as pure. It is best to make a solution which
contains 160 grams NaOH in a litre of water.
3. The nitrite supplied is almost chemically pure, and is easily soluble in
water. In order to make a solution 140 or 290 grams are dissolved per litre.
4. Crystallised acetate of soda contains 3 molecules of water of
crystallisation, and is usually somewhat moist. Instead of 136 grams 140 are
taken to allow for moisture. The amount is dissolved in about 500 cubic
centimetres of water.
Bases.
1. Aniline, C6H5NH2—93.
2. Toluidine, C7H7NH2—107.
3. Alpha-and beta-naphthylamine, C10H7NH2—143.
4. Para-or meta-nitroaniline, C6H4NO2NH2—138.
C6H5N:NC6H4NH2HCl + NaNO2 + 2HCl =
Benzene-azo-aniline-hydrochloride,
NaCl + C6H5N:NC6H4N:NCl + 2H2O.
Diazo-azo-benzene-chloride.
When this compound is combined with naphthol diazo-azo dyes are
produced.
C6H5N:NC6H4N:NC10H6OH. Benzene-azo-benzene-azo-naphthol.
The molecular weights of the bases, phenols and chemicals employed are
the following:—
1. Hydrochloric acid, HCl—36.5. 2. Caustic soda, NaOH—40. 3. Nitrite of
soda, NaNO2—69. 4. Acetate of soda, NaC2H3O23H2O—136.
1. Commercial hydrochloric acid at 32° Tw. contains about 365 grams of
HCl in a litre, or 3½ lb. in a gallon.
2. The commercial 77 per cent. soda must always be used, and for practical
purposes it may be taken as pure. It is best to make a solution which
contains 160 grams NaOH in a litre of water.
3. The nitrite supplied is almost chemically pure, and is easily soluble in
water. In order to make a solution 140 or 290 grams are dissolved per litre.
4. Crystallised acetate of soda contains 3 molecules of water of
crystallisation, and is usually somewhat moist. Instead of 136 grams 140 are
taken to allow for moisture. The amount is dissolved in about 500 cubic
centimetres of water.
Bases.
1. Aniline, C6H5NH2—93.
2. Toluidine, C7H7NH2—107.
3. Alpha-and beta-naphthylamine, C10H7NH2—143.
4. Para-or meta-nitroaniline, C6H4NO2NH2—138.
Page 171
5. Nitro-para-toluidine, C7H6NO2NH2—152.
6. Amidoazobenzene (base), C6H5N:NC6H4NH2—197.
7. Orthoamidoazotoluol (base), C7H7N:NC7H6NH2—225.
8. Alpha-or beta-naphthol C10H7OH—144.
Example of Quantities Taken.
Molecular Weight.
1. Molecule nitrite 69 grams.
2. Molecule aniline 93 "
3. Molecule hydrochloric acid 365 "
4. Molecule acetate of soda 136 "
5. Molecule of naphthol 144 "
6. Molecule caustic soda 40 "
Applying the principles which have just been described to the dyeing of
cotton, it is found that the cotton may be dyed by taking the base and
preparing the diazo body, impregnating the cotton with this, and developing
the colour by passing into a bath of the phenol. On the other hand, the
cotton can be prepared with the phenol and the colour developed by passing
into a bath of the diazotised base, and practice has shown that this latter
proceeding is the best. Practically the only phenol that is used is the beta-
naphthol; alpha-naphthol is occasionally used, but not often.
The purer the beta-naphthol the better, especially for producing the
paranitroaniline red. Various preparations of beta-naphthol have been
brought out by colour makers.
The process of dyeing cotton with a naphthol colour takes place in two
stages, the first being the grounding or preparing with the naphthol, the
second the developing with the diazotised base. Some of the effects which
can be obtained from the two naphthols and various bases are given in the
following table:—
Base. With beta-naphthol, gives With alpha-naphthol, gives
1. Aniline, Orange yellow; Cutch brown.
2. Paratoluidine, Full yellow orange; Cutch brown.
3. Metanitroaniline, Fiery yellowish red; Brownish orange.
6. Amidoazobenzene (base), C6H5N:NC6H4NH2—197.
7. Orthoamidoazotoluol (base), C7H7N:NC7H6NH2—225.
8. Alpha-or beta-naphthol C10H7OH—144.
Example of Quantities Taken.
Molecular Weight.
1. Molecule nitrite 69 grams.
2. Molecule aniline 93 "
3. Molecule hydrochloric acid 365 "
4. Molecule acetate of soda 136 "
5. Molecule of naphthol 144 "
6. Molecule caustic soda 40 "
Applying the principles which have just been described to the dyeing of
cotton, it is found that the cotton may be dyed by taking the base and
preparing the diazo body, impregnating the cotton with this, and developing
the colour by passing into a bath of the phenol. On the other hand, the
cotton can be prepared with the phenol and the colour developed by passing
into a bath of the diazotised base, and practice has shown that this latter
proceeding is the best. Practically the only phenol that is used is the beta-
naphthol; alpha-naphthol is occasionally used, but not often.
The purer the beta-naphthol the better, especially for producing the
paranitroaniline red. Various preparations of beta-naphthol have been
brought out by colour makers.
The process of dyeing cotton with a naphthol colour takes place in two
stages, the first being the grounding or preparing with the naphthol, the
second the developing with the diazotised base. Some of the effects which
can be obtained from the two naphthols and various bases are given in the
following table:—
Base. With beta-naphthol, gives With alpha-naphthol, gives
1. Aniline, Orange yellow; Cutch brown.
2. Paratoluidine, Full yellow orange; Cutch brown.
3. Metanitroaniline, Fiery yellowish red; Brownish orange.
Page 172
4. Paranitroaniline, Bright scarlet; " "
Base. With beta-naphthol, gives With alpha-naphthol, gives
5. Nitroparatoluidine, Orange; Very bright catechu.
6. Alpha-naphthylamine, Bluish claret red; Reddish puce.
7. Beta-naphthylamine, Turkey red; "
8. Amidoazobenzene, Red; "
9. Orthoamidoazotoluene, Yellowish claret red; "
By mixing alpha-and beta-naphthols together a variety of grenat and claret
reds and browns can be obtained.
With regard to the fastness of the shades produced the following may be
considered:—
Fast to Soaping.
Combination of A-Naphthol with Toluidine.
" " A-Naphthylamine.
" " B-Naphthylamine.
" " Amidoazobenzene.
" B-Naphthol with Toluidine.
" " Paranitroaniline.
" " Nitroparatoluidine.
" " B-Naphthylamine.
" " A-Naphthylamine.
Moderately Fast.
Combination of A-Naphthol with Aniline.
" " Paranitroaniline.
" " Orthoamidoazotoluene.
" B-Naphthol with Metanitroaniline.
" " Amidoazobenzene.
Very Loose.
Combination of A-Naphthol with Paratoluidine.
" " Metanitroaniline.
" " Nitroparatoluidine.
" B-Naphthol with Aniline.
" " Paratoluidine.
" " Orthoamidoazotoluene.
Base. With beta-naphthol, gives With alpha-naphthol, gives
5. Nitroparatoluidine, Orange; Very bright catechu.
6. Alpha-naphthylamine, Bluish claret red; Reddish puce.
7. Beta-naphthylamine, Turkey red; "
8. Amidoazobenzene, Red; "
9. Orthoamidoazotoluene, Yellowish claret red; "
By mixing alpha-and beta-naphthols together a variety of grenat and claret
reds and browns can be obtained.
With regard to the fastness of the shades produced the following may be
considered:—
Fast to Soaping.
Combination of A-Naphthol with Toluidine.
" " A-Naphthylamine.
" " B-Naphthylamine.
" " Amidoazobenzene.
" B-Naphthol with Toluidine.
" " Paranitroaniline.
" " Nitroparatoluidine.
" " B-Naphthylamine.
" " A-Naphthylamine.
Moderately Fast.
Combination of A-Naphthol with Aniline.
" " Paranitroaniline.
" " Orthoamidoazotoluene.
" B-Naphthol with Metanitroaniline.
" " Amidoazobenzene.
Very Loose.
Combination of A-Naphthol with Paratoluidine.
" " Metanitroaniline.
" " Nitroparatoluidine.
" B-Naphthol with Aniline.
" " Paratoluidine.
" " Orthoamidoazotoluene.
Page 173
The samples were tested for fastness to light by exposing them for nine
days with the following results:—
Fast.
Combination of A-Naphthol with Aniline.
" " Toluidine.
" " Metanitroaniline.
" " Paranitroaniline.
" " Nitroparatoluidine.
" " B-Naphthylamine.
" " Amidoazobenzol.
" " Orthoamidoazotoluol.
" B-Naphthol with Aniline.
" " Paratoluidine.
" " Metanitroaniline.
" " Paranitroaniline.
" " B-Naphthylamine.
" " A-Naphthylamine.
Moderately Fast.
Combination of B- Naphthol with Nitroparatoluidine.
Very Loose.
Combination of A-Naphthol with Toluidine.
" " A-Naphthylamine
" B-Naphthol with Toluidine.
" " Amidoazobenzene.
" " Orthoamidoazotoluene.
The most important of the naphthol colours is undoubtedly paranitroaniline
red, produced by the combination of paranitroaniline and beta-naphthol. In
order to produce the best and brightest shades these two bodies must be
quite pure. The following directions may be followed:—
Dyeing Paranitroaniline Red on Yarn.
It unfortunately happens that this red does not admit of being worked in
large quantities at a time, particularly in the diazo bath where the colour is
developed, as the previous operations seem to render the yarn slightly
days with the following results:—
Fast.
Combination of A-Naphthol with Aniline.
" " Toluidine.
" " Metanitroaniline.
" " Paranitroaniline.
" " Nitroparatoluidine.
" " B-Naphthylamine.
" " Amidoazobenzol.
" " Orthoamidoazotoluol.
" B-Naphthol with Aniline.
" " Paratoluidine.
" " Metanitroaniline.
" " Paranitroaniline.
" " B-Naphthylamine.
" " A-Naphthylamine.
Moderately Fast.
Combination of B- Naphthol with Nitroparatoluidine.
Very Loose.
Combination of A-Naphthol with Toluidine.
" " A-Naphthylamine
" B-Naphthol with Toluidine.
" " Amidoazobenzene.
" " Orthoamidoazotoluene.
The most important of the naphthol colours is undoubtedly paranitroaniline
red, produced by the combination of paranitroaniline and beta-naphthol. In
order to produce the best and brightest shades these two bodies must be
quite pure. The following directions may be followed:—
Dyeing Paranitroaniline Red on Yarn.
It unfortunately happens that this red does not admit of being worked in
large quantities at a time, particularly in the diazo bath where the colour is
developed, as the previous operations seem to render the yarn slightly
Page 174
waterproof, and hence if large quantities of yarn were dealt with at one time
some would be found to be dyed all right, others would be defective. It has,
therefore, been found best to work only about 2 lb. of yarn at a time,
carefully carrying out each operation with this quantity. As, however, the
process can be quickly worked it follows that in the course of a day a fairly
large quantity of yarn can be treated.
1. Grounding. The grounding or preparing bath for 100 lb. of yarn is best
made in the following manner: 4 lb. of beta-naphthol are stirred in 2½ lb. of
caustic soda liquor 70° Tw., then 1½ quarts of boiling water is added, when
dissolved 1½ quarts of cold water. In a separate vessel dissolve 5 lb.
Turkey-red oil in 11 quarts of water, then mix the two liquors together and
add sufficient water to make up the whole to 12 gallons.
In working sufficient of this liquor is taken and put into a deep tub in which
2 lb. of yarn can be conveniently worked. It is best to work at a tepid heat,
say 100° to 110° F.; 2 lb. of the yarn are worked in this liquor, so that it
becomes thoroughly impregnated, then it is gently wrung out and hung up.
This operation is repeated with each 2 lb. until the whole 100 lb. has been
treated, adding from time to time some of the naphthol liquor to make up
for that taken up by the cotton. When all the yarn has been through the
liquor, give it another dip through the same liquor. Place the yarn in a
hydro-extractor for five to seven minutes. Next open out the yarn well, and
hang on sticks and dry in a stove at 140° to 150° F. The stove should be
heated with iron pipes, through which steam at 30 lb. to 40 lb. pressure
passes. This stove should be reserved entirely for this work, for if other
goods be dried in it along with the naphthol-prepared cotton, any steam or
acid vapours which might be given off from the former might damage the
latter.
When thoroughly dry the yarn is ready for the next operation.
2. Developing. The developing bath is made in the following manner: 1½
lb. paranitroaniline is mixed with 1½ gallons of boiling water, and 1¾
quarts of hydrochloric acid at 30° to 32° Tw. Stir well until the
paranitroaniline is completely dissolved, add 3½ gallons of cold water,
which will cause a precipitation of the hydrochlorate of paranitroaniline as a
yellow powder. Let the mixture thoroughly cool off, best by allowing to
some would be found to be dyed all right, others would be defective. It has,
therefore, been found best to work only about 2 lb. of yarn at a time,
carefully carrying out each operation with this quantity. As, however, the
process can be quickly worked it follows that in the course of a day a fairly
large quantity of yarn can be treated.
1. Grounding. The grounding or preparing bath for 100 lb. of yarn is best
made in the following manner: 4 lb. of beta-naphthol are stirred in 2½ lb. of
caustic soda liquor 70° Tw., then 1½ quarts of boiling water is added, when
dissolved 1½ quarts of cold water. In a separate vessel dissolve 5 lb.
Turkey-red oil in 11 quarts of water, then mix the two liquors together and
add sufficient water to make up the whole to 12 gallons.
In working sufficient of this liquor is taken and put into a deep tub in which
2 lb. of yarn can be conveniently worked. It is best to work at a tepid heat,
say 100° to 110° F.; 2 lb. of the yarn are worked in this liquor, so that it
becomes thoroughly impregnated, then it is gently wrung out and hung up.
This operation is repeated with each 2 lb. until the whole 100 lb. has been
treated, adding from time to time some of the naphthol liquor to make up
for that taken up by the cotton. When all the yarn has been through the
liquor, give it another dip through the same liquor. Place the yarn in a
hydro-extractor for five to seven minutes. Next open out the yarn well, and
hang on sticks and dry in a stove at 140° to 150° F. The stove should be
heated with iron pipes, through which steam at 30 lb. to 40 lb. pressure
passes. This stove should be reserved entirely for this work, for if other
goods be dried in it along with the naphthol-prepared cotton, any steam or
acid vapours which might be given off from the former might damage the
latter.
When thoroughly dry the yarn is ready for the next operation.
2. Developing. The developing bath is made in the following manner: 1½
lb. paranitroaniline is mixed with 1½ gallons of boiling water, and 1¾
quarts of hydrochloric acid at 30° to 32° Tw. Stir well until the
paranitroaniline is completely dissolved, add 3½ gallons of cold water,
which will cause a precipitation of the hydrochlorate of paranitroaniline as a
yellow powder. Let the mixture thoroughly cool off, best by allowing to
Page 175
stand all night; 1¼ lb. of nitrite of soda is dissolved in 4 quarts of cold
water, and this solution is added to the paranitroaniline solution slowly and
with constant stirring; in about fifteen to twenty minutes the diazotisation
will be complete. At this and following stages the temperature of working
should be kept as low as possible. Some dyers use ice in preparing their
diazo solutions, and certainly the best results are attained thereby, but with
paranitroaniline the ice can be dispensed with. After the end of the time
sufficient cold water is added to bring the volume of the liquor up to 10
gallons. This diazo liquor will keep for some days, but it decomposes in
time, so that it should not be kept too long.
Another liquor is made by dissolving 4 lb. acetate of soda in 11 quarts of
water.
The developing bath is made by taking 4 gallons of the diazo liquor and 1
gallon of the acetate liquor and mixing together, and in this bath the
prepared yarn, 2 lb. at a time, is worked. The colour develops immediately.
The yarn when dyed is lifted out, wrung, and then it is well washed with
water, soaped in a bath at 120° F., with a liquor containing ½ oz. soap per
gallon, then dried. As the cotton yarn is being passed through the
developing bath, the latter is freshened up from time to time by suitable
additions of the diazo and acetate liquors in the proportions given above.
Some dyers use a special form of dye vat for dyeing paranitroaniline red on
yarn, whose construction can be seen from Fig. 27.
water, and this solution is added to the paranitroaniline solution slowly and
with constant stirring; in about fifteen to twenty minutes the diazotisation
will be complete. At this and following stages the temperature of working
should be kept as low as possible. Some dyers use ice in preparing their
diazo solutions, and certainly the best results are attained thereby, but with
paranitroaniline the ice can be dispensed with. After the end of the time
sufficient cold water is added to bring the volume of the liquor up to 10
gallons. This diazo liquor will keep for some days, but it decomposes in
time, so that it should not be kept too long.
Another liquor is made by dissolving 4 lb. acetate of soda in 11 quarts of
water.
The developing bath is made by taking 4 gallons of the diazo liquor and 1
gallon of the acetate liquor and mixing together, and in this bath the
prepared yarn, 2 lb. at a time, is worked. The colour develops immediately.
The yarn when dyed is lifted out, wrung, and then it is well washed with
water, soaped in a bath at 120° F., with a liquor containing ½ oz. soap per
gallon, then dried. As the cotton yarn is being passed through the
developing bath, the latter is freshened up from time to time by suitable
additions of the diazo and acetate liquors in the proportions given above.
Some dyers use a special form of dye vat for dyeing paranitroaniline red on
yarn, whose construction can be seen from Fig. 27.
Page 176
FIG. 27.—Dye-tub for Paranitroaniline Red.
The beta-naphthol bath does not keep well and in time tends to grow brown,
and when this occurs stains are invariably produced on the cotton. When the
yarn or cloth has been prepared with the beta-naphthol, and dried, the
developing should be immediately proceeded with, for it is found that by
allowing the prepared cotton to lie about it becomes covered with brown
stains, and when such stained cotton is passed through the developing bath
stains and defective dyeing result.
It has been found that by adding a little tartar emetic to the beta-naphthol
bath this is largely if not entirely prevented, and the prepared cloth may be
kept for a reasonable length of time before proceeding with the
development without fear of stains being formed.
Various additions have been made from time to time to the naphthol bath.
Some of these take the form of special preparations of the colour
manufacturers, and are sold as naphthol D, naphthol X, red developer C,
etc., sometimes gum tragacanth has been added, at others in place of
Turkey-red oil there is used a soap made from castor oil with soda and
ammonia, but such complicated baths do not yield any better results than
the simple preparing liquor given above.
The beta-naphthol bath does not keep well and in time tends to grow brown,
and when this occurs stains are invariably produced on the cotton. When the
yarn or cloth has been prepared with the beta-naphthol, and dried, the
developing should be immediately proceeded with, for it is found that by
allowing the prepared cotton to lie about it becomes covered with brown
stains, and when such stained cotton is passed through the developing bath
stains and defective dyeing result.
It has been found that by adding a little tartar emetic to the beta-naphthol
bath this is largely if not entirely prevented, and the prepared cloth may be
kept for a reasonable length of time before proceeding with the
development without fear of stains being formed.
Various additions have been made from time to time to the naphthol bath.
Some of these take the form of special preparations of the colour
manufacturers, and are sold as naphthol D, naphthol X, red developer C,
etc., sometimes gum tragacanth has been added, at others in place of
Turkey-red oil there is used a soap made from castor oil with soda and
ammonia, but such complicated baths do not yield any better results than
the simple preparing liquor given above.
Page 177
FIG. 28.—Padding Machine for
Paranitroaniline Red.
Dyeing Paranitroaniline Red on Piece Goods.
The dyeing of this red on to piece goods only differs from that on yarn by
reason of the difference in the form of material that is dealt with.
1. Preparing or Grounding.—The same liquor may be used. This operation
is best done on a padding machine, a sketch of which is given in Fig. 26,
showing the course of the cloth through the liquor. This is contained in the
box of the machine, and this is kept full by a constant stream flowing in
from a store vat placed beside the machine. After going through the liquor,
the cloth passes between a pair of squeezing rollers which squeeze out the
surplus liquor. Fig. 28 shows a view of a padding machine adapted for
grounding paranitroaniline reds. After the padding, the cloth is dried by
being sent over a set of drying cylinders, or through what is known as the
hot flue.
2. The Developing.—After being dried, the pieces are sent through a
padding machine charged with the developing liquor made as described
above, after which the cloth is rinsed, then soaped, and then washed. Some
dyers use a continuous machine for these operations, such as shown in Fig.
29.
Paranitroaniline Red.
Dyeing Paranitroaniline Red on Piece Goods.
The dyeing of this red on to piece goods only differs from that on yarn by
reason of the difference in the form of material that is dealt with.
1. Preparing or Grounding.—The same liquor may be used. This operation
is best done on a padding machine, a sketch of which is given in Fig. 26,
showing the course of the cloth through the liquor. This is contained in the
box of the machine, and this is kept full by a constant stream flowing in
from a store vat placed beside the machine. After going through the liquor,
the cloth passes between a pair of squeezing rollers which squeeze out the
surplus liquor. Fig. 28 shows a view of a padding machine adapted for
grounding paranitroaniline reds. After the padding, the cloth is dried by
being sent over a set of drying cylinders, or through what is known as the
hot flue.
2. The Developing.—After being dried, the pieces are sent through a
padding machine charged with the developing liquor made as described
above, after which the cloth is rinsed, then soaped, and then washed. Some
dyers use a continuous machine for these operations, such as shown in Fig.
29.
Page 178
While the developing bath used for piece goods may be the same as that
used for yarns, some dyers prefer to use one made somewhat differently,
thus 6¼ lb. paranitroaniline are mixed with 7 gallons boiling-water and 1½
gallons hydrochloric acid; when dissolved 16 gallons of cold water are
added, then, after completely cooling, 3½ lb. sodium nitrite dissolved in 3
gallons cold water. After twenty minutes, when the diazotisation is
complete, water is added to make the whole up to 40 gallons. The acetate
liquor is made from 13¼ lb. acetate of soda in 13½ gallons of water.
Equal quantities of these two liquors are used in making the developing
bath.
Of late years, under the names of Azophor red P N, Nitrazol C,
Nitrosamine, etc., there has been offered to dyers preparations of diazotised
paranitroaniline in the form of a powder or paste, readily soluble in water,
that will keep in a
FIG. 29—
Developing
Machine for
used for yarns, some dyers prefer to use one made somewhat differently,
thus 6¼ lb. paranitroaniline are mixed with 7 gallons boiling-water and 1½
gallons hydrochloric acid; when dissolved 16 gallons of cold water are
added, then, after completely cooling, 3½ lb. sodium nitrite dissolved in 3
gallons cold water. After twenty minutes, when the diazotisation is
complete, water is added to make the whole up to 40 gallons. The acetate
liquor is made from 13¼ lb. acetate of soda in 13½ gallons of water.
Equal quantities of these two liquors are used in making the developing
bath.
Of late years, under the names of Azophor red P N, Nitrazol C,
Nitrosamine, etc., there has been offered to dyers preparations of diazotised
paranitroaniline in the form of a powder or paste, readily soluble in water,
that will keep in a
FIG. 29—
Developing
Machine for
Page 179
Paranitroaniline
Red.
cool and dry place for any reasonable length of time. These are prepared in
various ways, and to any dyer who does not want the trouble of diazotising
the paranitroaniline they offer some advantages. They produce a red equal
in every respect to that obtained from paranitroaniline. The following
details show the method to be followed with some of these products, others
are very similar to make the developing baths.
Paranitroaniline Red with Nitrazol C.—Dissolve 25 lb. Nitrazol C in 12
gallons of cold water with constant stirring, then add sufficient cold water
to make 37 gallons. In another vessel dissolve 11 lb. of acetate of soda in
5½ gallons water, then add 1½ gallons caustic soda, 36° Tw., mixed with
5½ gallons water. The developing bath is made by mixing both these
solutions. It will suffice for both yarn and piece goods.
Paranitroaniline Red with Azophor Red P N.—Dissolve 5½ lb. of Azophor
red P N in 4 gallons of water—it dissolves almost completely but usually a
few particles of a flocculent character remain undissolved, these can be
removed; 2¼ gallons of caustic soda lye of 36° Tw. are diluted with water to
10 gallons, and this is added with constant stirring to the azophor red P N
solution. When all is mixed and a clear solution obtained, the developing
bath is ready for use, and is used in the same way as the paranitroaniline
bath.
Metanitroaniline Orange.—This orange is produced in the same way as the
paranitroaniline red, using metanitroaniline or Azophor orange M N in
place of the paranitroaniline or the Azophor red P N given for the red. The
quantities of all the materials used are identical.
Nitrosamine Red.—Dissolve 5 lb. Nitrosamine red in 5 gallons of water and
2¼ lb. hydrochloric acid, when well mixed there is added 2½ lb. acetate of
soda, when all is dissolved add sufficient water to make 6½ gallons. This
bath is used exactly in the same way as the paranitroaniline developing
bath, and it produces identical results in every way.
Paranitroaniline Brown.—By boiling the paranitroaniline red dyed cotton
in a weak bath of copper sulphate a very fine fast brown resembling a cutch
Red.
cool and dry place for any reasonable length of time. These are prepared in
various ways, and to any dyer who does not want the trouble of diazotising
the paranitroaniline they offer some advantages. They produce a red equal
in every respect to that obtained from paranitroaniline. The following
details show the method to be followed with some of these products, others
are very similar to make the developing baths.
Paranitroaniline Red with Nitrazol C.—Dissolve 25 lb. Nitrazol C in 12
gallons of cold water with constant stirring, then add sufficient cold water
to make 37 gallons. In another vessel dissolve 11 lb. of acetate of soda in
5½ gallons water, then add 1½ gallons caustic soda, 36° Tw., mixed with
5½ gallons water. The developing bath is made by mixing both these
solutions. It will suffice for both yarn and piece goods.
Paranitroaniline Red with Azophor Red P N.—Dissolve 5½ lb. of Azophor
red P N in 4 gallons of water—it dissolves almost completely but usually a
few particles of a flocculent character remain undissolved, these can be
removed; 2¼ gallons of caustic soda lye of 36° Tw. are diluted with water to
10 gallons, and this is added with constant stirring to the azophor red P N
solution. When all is mixed and a clear solution obtained, the developing
bath is ready for use, and is used in the same way as the paranitroaniline
bath.
Metanitroaniline Orange.—This orange is produced in the same way as the
paranitroaniline red, using metanitroaniline or Azophor orange M N in
place of the paranitroaniline or the Azophor red P N given for the red. The
quantities of all the materials used are identical.
Nitrosamine Red.—Dissolve 5 lb. Nitrosamine red in 5 gallons of water and
2¼ lb. hydrochloric acid, when well mixed there is added 2½ lb. acetate of
soda, when all is dissolved add sufficient water to make 6½ gallons. This
bath is used exactly in the same way as the paranitroaniline developing
bath, and it produces identical results in every way.
Paranitroaniline Brown.—By boiling the paranitroaniline red dyed cotton
in a weak bath of copper sulphate a very fine fast brown resembling a cutch
Page 180
brown is produced. A better plan, however, is to prepare the cotton with a
ground containing an alkaline solution of copper, 3 lb. beta-naphthol are
dissolved in 5 pints of caustic soda lye of 36° Tw., to which is added 5 lb.
Turkey-red oil and 10 pints alkaline copper solution, water being added to
make 13 gallons of liquor. The cotton is treated in this way as with the
ordinary beta-naphthol preparation. The alkaline copper solution is made by
taking 5 pints of copper chloride solution at 76° Tw., adding 3¼ lb. tartaric
acid, 6 pints caustic soda lye, 70° Tw., and 2 pints of glycerine. The
developing bath for the brown is the same as for the paranitroaniline red, or
the Azophor red P N bath may be used.
Toluidine Orange.—For this colour the cotton is prepared with the beta-
naphthol in the ordinary way. The developing bath is made from 2 lb.
orthonitrotoluidine mixed with 12 pints boiling water and 2¼ pints
hydrochloric acid; when dissolved allow to cool and then add 12½ lb. ice.
When thoroughly cold stir in 2½ pints of sodium nitrite solution containing
3 lb. per gallon. Stir well for twenty minutes, then filter; add 4 lb. sodium
acetate and sufficient ice-cold water to make 13 gallons. Use this bath in the
same way as the paranitroaniline bath.
Beta-naphthylamine Red.—This red is a good one, but is not so bright or so
fast as the paranitroaniline red, hence although somewhat older in point of
time it is not dyed to the same extent. The developing bath is made from 1¾
lb. beta-naphthylamine dissolved with the aid of 10 pints boiling water and
1 pint hydrochloric acid. When dissolved allow to cool; add 27 lb. ice and 2
pints hydrochloric acid. When cooled to 32° to 36° Tw., add 3 pints sodium
nitrite solution (3 lb. per gallon) and 4 lb. sodium acetate, making up to 13
gallons with water. This also is used in precisely the same way as the
paranitroaniline red developing liquor.
Alpha-Naphthylamine Claret.—This is a very fine and fairly fast red, and
next to the paranitroaniline red may be considered the most important of the
naphthol colours. The developing bath is a little more difficult to make,
owing to the fact that it is more difficult to get the alpha-naphthylamine into
solution. The best way of proceeding is the following: Heat 1¾ lb. of alpha-
naphthylamine in 10 pints of boiling water, agitating well until the base is
very finely divided in the water, then 1¼ pints of hydrochloric acid is
added, and the heat and stirring continued until the base is dissolved, then
ground containing an alkaline solution of copper, 3 lb. beta-naphthol are
dissolved in 5 pints of caustic soda lye of 36° Tw., to which is added 5 lb.
Turkey-red oil and 10 pints alkaline copper solution, water being added to
make 13 gallons of liquor. The cotton is treated in this way as with the
ordinary beta-naphthol preparation. The alkaline copper solution is made by
taking 5 pints of copper chloride solution at 76° Tw., adding 3¼ lb. tartaric
acid, 6 pints caustic soda lye, 70° Tw., and 2 pints of glycerine. The
developing bath for the brown is the same as for the paranitroaniline red, or
the Azophor red P N bath may be used.
Toluidine Orange.—For this colour the cotton is prepared with the beta-
naphthol in the ordinary way. The developing bath is made from 2 lb.
orthonitrotoluidine mixed with 12 pints boiling water and 2¼ pints
hydrochloric acid; when dissolved allow to cool and then add 12½ lb. ice.
When thoroughly cold stir in 2½ pints of sodium nitrite solution containing
3 lb. per gallon. Stir well for twenty minutes, then filter; add 4 lb. sodium
acetate and sufficient ice-cold water to make 13 gallons. Use this bath in the
same way as the paranitroaniline bath.
Beta-naphthylamine Red.—This red is a good one, but is not so bright or so
fast as the paranitroaniline red, hence although somewhat older in point of
time it is not dyed to the same extent. The developing bath is made from 1¾
lb. beta-naphthylamine dissolved with the aid of 10 pints boiling water and
1 pint hydrochloric acid. When dissolved allow to cool; add 27 lb. ice and 2
pints hydrochloric acid. When cooled to 32° to 36° Tw., add 3 pints sodium
nitrite solution (3 lb. per gallon) and 4 lb. sodium acetate, making up to 13
gallons with water. This also is used in precisely the same way as the
paranitroaniline red developing liquor.
Alpha-Naphthylamine Claret.—This is a very fine and fairly fast red, and
next to the paranitroaniline red may be considered the most important of the
naphthol colours. The developing bath is a little more difficult to make,
owing to the fact that it is more difficult to get the alpha-naphthylamine into
solution. The best way of proceeding is the following: Heat 1¾ lb. of alpha-
naphthylamine in 10 pints of boiling water, agitating well until the base is
very finely divided in the water, then 1¼ pints of hydrochloric acid is
added, and the heat and stirring continued until the base is dissolved, then
Page 181
the mass is allowed to cool, 27 lb. of ice is added and 1½ pints of
hydrochloric acid. When cooled down to 32° to 36° F., there is added 3
pints sodium nitrite solution (3 lb. per gallon), and after allowing the
diazotisation to be completed, 4 lb. sodium acetate and sufficient water to
make 13 gallons of liquor.
The bath is used in the same manner as the previous developing baths.
Dianisidine Blue.—Dianisidine develops with beta-naphthol, a violet blue,
which is not very fast, but by the addition of some copper to the developing
bath a very fine blue is got which has a fair degree of fastness. The
developing bath is made as follows: Mix 10½ oz. dianisidine with 7 oz.
hydrochloric acid and 7½ pints of boiling water, when complete solution is
obtained it is allowed to cool, then 20 lb. of ice is added. Next 1¾ pints of
nitrite of soda solution, containing 1½ lb. per gal. and 2½ pints of cold
water. Stir for thirty minutes, then add 1¼ pints copper chloride solution at
72° Tw., and sufficient water to make up 6½ gallons.
The cotton is prepared with beta-naphthol in the usual way, and then passed
through this developing bath.
Amidoazotoluol Garnet.—Amidoazotoluol produces with beta-naphthol a
fine garnet red in the usual way.
The developing bath is made from 14 oz. amidoazotoluol, mixed with 1½
pints of sodium nitrite solution containing 1½ lb. per gallon, when well
mixed add 1 pint of hydrochloric acid diluted with 2 pints water, when this
is well mixed add sufficient water to make up a gallon, then add 1 lb.
acetate of soda.
The cotton is passed through this dye-bath, then washed well, passed
through a weak acid bath, then soaped well, washed and dried.
(8) DYEING COTTON BY IMPREGNATION WITH DYE-STUFF
SOLUTION.
hydrochloric acid. When cooled down to 32° to 36° F., there is added 3
pints sodium nitrite solution (3 lb. per gallon), and after allowing the
diazotisation to be completed, 4 lb. sodium acetate and sufficient water to
make 13 gallons of liquor.
The bath is used in the same manner as the previous developing baths.
Dianisidine Blue.—Dianisidine develops with beta-naphthol, a violet blue,
which is not very fast, but by the addition of some copper to the developing
bath a very fine blue is got which has a fair degree of fastness. The
developing bath is made as follows: Mix 10½ oz. dianisidine with 7 oz.
hydrochloric acid and 7½ pints of boiling water, when complete solution is
obtained it is allowed to cool, then 20 lb. of ice is added. Next 1¾ pints of
nitrite of soda solution, containing 1½ lb. per gal. and 2½ pints of cold
water. Stir for thirty minutes, then add 1¼ pints copper chloride solution at
72° Tw., and sufficient water to make up 6½ gallons.
The cotton is prepared with beta-naphthol in the usual way, and then passed
through this developing bath.
Amidoazotoluol Garnet.—Amidoazotoluol produces with beta-naphthol a
fine garnet red in the usual way.
The developing bath is made from 14 oz. amidoazotoluol, mixed with 1½
pints of sodium nitrite solution containing 1½ lb. per gallon, when well
mixed add 1 pint of hydrochloric acid diluted with 2 pints water, when this
is well mixed add sufficient water to make up a gallon, then add 1 lb.
acetate of soda.
The cotton is passed through this dye-bath, then washed well, passed
through a weak acid bath, then soaped well, washed and dried.
(8) DYEING COTTON BY IMPREGNATION WITH DYE-STUFF
SOLUTION.
Page 182
Indigo is a dye-stuff which requires special processes for its application to
the cotton or wool fibre.
Its peculiarity is that in the form in which it comes to the dyer it is insoluble
in water, and to enable it to be dissolved and therefore to be used as a dye,
the indigo has to go under a special treatment. The colouring principle of
indigo is a body named indigotin, to which the formula C16H16N2O2 has
been given. When indigo is mixed with substances like lime and copperas,
lime and zinc, zinc and bisulphite of soda, which cause the evolution of
nascent hydrogen, it takes up this body and passes into another substance
which is called indigo white that has the formula C16H12N2O2, leuco, or
white indigo; this substance is soluble in water, and so when it is formed the
indigo passes into solution and can then be used for dyeing. But indigo
white is an unstable substance on exposure to air, the oxygen of the latter
attacks the hydrogen which it has taken up, and indigotin is reformed, the
indigo white changing again into indigo blue.
Indigo dyeing consists of three operations:—
(1) Preparation of the indigo solution, or, as it is called,
setting the dye vat. (2) Steeping the cotton in this vat. (3)
Exposing to the air.
FIG. 30.—Indigo Dye-vat for Cloth.
the cotton or wool fibre.
Its peculiarity is that in the form in which it comes to the dyer it is insoluble
in water, and to enable it to be dissolved and therefore to be used as a dye,
the indigo has to go under a special treatment. The colouring principle of
indigo is a body named indigotin, to which the formula C16H16N2O2 has
been given. When indigo is mixed with substances like lime and copperas,
lime and zinc, zinc and bisulphite of soda, which cause the evolution of
nascent hydrogen, it takes up this body and passes into another substance
which is called indigo white that has the formula C16H12N2O2, leuco, or
white indigo; this substance is soluble in water, and so when it is formed the
indigo passes into solution and can then be used for dyeing. But indigo
white is an unstable substance on exposure to air, the oxygen of the latter
attacks the hydrogen which it has taken up, and indigotin is reformed, the
indigo white changing again into indigo blue.
Indigo dyeing consists of three operations:—
(1) Preparation of the indigo solution, or, as it is called,
setting the dye vat. (2) Steeping the cotton in this vat. (3)
Exposing to the air.
FIG. 30.—Indigo Dye-vat for Cloth.
Page 183
There are several methods of preparing, or setting the dye vat, and of each
of these modifications are in use in every indigo dye-house:—
(1) With lime and copperas. (2) Zinc and lime vat. (3) Zinc and
bisulphite of soda.
In all cases it is necessary for the indigo to be ground to the form of a fine
paste with water; this is usually done in what is known as the ball-grinding
mill. The finer it is ground the more easy is it to make the dye-vats.
The dye-vats may be either round tubs or square wooden tanks; when cloths
or warps are being dyed these may be fitted with winces and guide rollers,
so as to draw the materials through the liquor. In the case of yarns in hanks
these appliances are not necessary.
Fig. 30 is a sketch of an indigo dye-vat for cloth or warps.
(1) Lime and Copperas Vat.—To prepare this vat take 75 gallons of water,
4 lb. of indigo, 8 lb. copperas, and 10 lb. of good quicklime. Put these into
the vat in the order shown. The amount of indigo is added in proportion to
the shade which is required to be dyed: for pale shades, 2 lb. to 3 lb. will be
sufficient; while for deep shades, 6 lb. to 7 lb. may be used. The amount of
copperas should be from one and a half to twice that of the indigo. The vat
should be stirred very well and then left to stand. The changes which occur
are probably the following: The lime acts upon the copperas and produces
ferrous hydrate—this is unstable and tends to take up oxygen and hydrogen
from the water, particularly when there is some indigo present, and forms
ferric hydrate; hydrogen is at the same time liberated, and combines with
the indigo to form the soluble indigo white. It takes about twenty-four hours
to make an indigo vat. When properly made and in good condition, the
liquor will be clear and of a brownish-yellow colour, a bluish scum may
collect on the surface. If the liquor appears at all greenish it is an indication
that the indigo has not been completely reduced, and the vat needs a further
addition of lime and copperas, which should be of good quality. Too much
of each should not be used, because with them there is formed at the bottom
of the vat a sediment of calcium sulphate and ferric hydrate, and it is not
wise to increase this to too great an extent, which would be the case if too
much lime and copperas were added.
of these modifications are in use in every indigo dye-house:—
(1) With lime and copperas. (2) Zinc and lime vat. (3) Zinc and
bisulphite of soda.
In all cases it is necessary for the indigo to be ground to the form of a fine
paste with water; this is usually done in what is known as the ball-grinding
mill. The finer it is ground the more easy is it to make the dye-vats.
The dye-vats may be either round tubs or square wooden tanks; when cloths
or warps are being dyed these may be fitted with winces and guide rollers,
so as to draw the materials through the liquor. In the case of yarns in hanks
these appliances are not necessary.
Fig. 30 is a sketch of an indigo dye-vat for cloth or warps.
(1) Lime and Copperas Vat.—To prepare this vat take 75 gallons of water,
4 lb. of indigo, 8 lb. copperas, and 10 lb. of good quicklime. Put these into
the vat in the order shown. The amount of indigo is added in proportion to
the shade which is required to be dyed: for pale shades, 2 lb. to 3 lb. will be
sufficient; while for deep shades, 6 lb. to 7 lb. may be used. The amount of
copperas should be from one and a half to twice that of the indigo. The vat
should be stirred very well and then left to stand. The changes which occur
are probably the following: The lime acts upon the copperas and produces
ferrous hydrate—this is unstable and tends to take up oxygen and hydrogen
from the water, particularly when there is some indigo present, and forms
ferric hydrate; hydrogen is at the same time liberated, and combines with
the indigo to form the soluble indigo white. It takes about twenty-four hours
to make an indigo vat. When properly made and in good condition, the
liquor will be clear and of a brownish-yellow colour, a bluish scum may
collect on the surface. If the liquor appears at all greenish it is an indication
that the indigo has not been completely reduced, and the vat needs a further
addition of lime and copperas, which should be of good quality. Too much
of each should not be used, because with them there is formed at the bottom
of the vat a sediment of calcium sulphate and ferric hydrate, and it is not
wise to increase this to too great an extent, which would be the case if too
much lime and copperas were added.
Page 184
To Use this Vat.—Any scum on the surface is raked on one side, the cotton
yarn immersed for a few minutes, then it is taken out, wrung, allowing the
excess liquor to flow back into the vat, and the yarn hung up in the air for
the blue to develop. The depth of shade which is dyed depends chiefly upon
the amount of indigo in the vat, and also upon the time during which the
hanks are dipped in the liquor. Light and medium shades can be readily and
conveniently got by a single dip, but deep shades are best got by repeating
the dipping once or twice as occasion demands. Deep shades got by using a
strong bath at a single dip are found to rub badly, while by repeated dips the
dye gets more into the substance of the fibre, and therefore the colour is
more firmly fixed and it rubs less.
Some indigo dyers have quite a range of vats, using those fresh made for
dyeing deep shades, while the old vats being nearly exhausted are used only
for light shades and finally when completely exhausted are thrown away.
After the day's work the vat should be stirred up and then allowed to stand.
If necessary it may be strengthened by the addition of fresh quantities of
indigo, lime and copperas, the next morning it will be ready for use.
Generally a lime-copperas vat will remain in good working order for about
a month, when it will be necessary to throw it away.
(2) Zinc and Lime Vat.—Zinc dust is a bye-product in the process of zinc
extraction. It is a grey, very heavy powder, consisting mostly of finely
divided metallic zinc, with traces of oxide and sulphide of zinc. Of these
only the metallic zinc is active in reducing the indigo, the rest of the
ingredients are not of any consequence. The valuation of zinc dust is a very
difficult operation, but it is desirable that this be done, as the product is
liable to be very variable in the proportion of actual zinc it contains, and it
will pay large buyers always to have it tested. Zinc dust must always be
kept in a dry place.
For the reduction of zinc powder lime is chiefly used. The following are
two good mixtures.
Vat with zinc and lime:—
10 lb. indigo, dry and ground fine; 5½ lb. zinc dust; 22 lb. slaked lime, dry.
yarn immersed for a few minutes, then it is taken out, wrung, allowing the
excess liquor to flow back into the vat, and the yarn hung up in the air for
the blue to develop. The depth of shade which is dyed depends chiefly upon
the amount of indigo in the vat, and also upon the time during which the
hanks are dipped in the liquor. Light and medium shades can be readily and
conveniently got by a single dip, but deep shades are best got by repeating
the dipping once or twice as occasion demands. Deep shades got by using a
strong bath at a single dip are found to rub badly, while by repeated dips the
dye gets more into the substance of the fibre, and therefore the colour is
more firmly fixed and it rubs less.
Some indigo dyers have quite a range of vats, using those fresh made for
dyeing deep shades, while the old vats being nearly exhausted are used only
for light shades and finally when completely exhausted are thrown away.
After the day's work the vat should be stirred up and then allowed to stand.
If necessary it may be strengthened by the addition of fresh quantities of
indigo, lime and copperas, the next morning it will be ready for use.
Generally a lime-copperas vat will remain in good working order for about
a month, when it will be necessary to throw it away.
(2) Zinc and Lime Vat.—Zinc dust is a bye-product in the process of zinc
extraction. It is a grey, very heavy powder, consisting mostly of finely
divided metallic zinc, with traces of oxide and sulphide of zinc. Of these
only the metallic zinc is active in reducing the indigo, the rest of the
ingredients are not of any consequence. The valuation of zinc dust is a very
difficult operation, but it is desirable that this be done, as the product is
liable to be very variable in the proportion of actual zinc it contains, and it
will pay large buyers always to have it tested. Zinc dust must always be
kept in a dry place.
For the reduction of zinc powder lime is chiefly used. The following are
two good mixtures.
Vat with zinc and lime:—
10 lb. indigo, dry and ground fine; 5½ lb. zinc dust; 22 lb. slaked lime, dry.
Page 185
The vat is set as follows, a part of the lime is mixed with the indigo, and the
two bodies are well mixed together and allowed to stand for ten minutes,
then the zinc powder is added. It is best to make this into a smooth paste
with water before adding it to the other ingredients, then the rest of the lime
is added and the whole is thoroughly stirred together with the necessary
quantity of water.
Vat with zinc powder, lime and soda:—
10 lb. indigo, dry and ground fine; 10 lb. zinc powder; 10 lb. slaked lime,
dry; 35 lb. caustic soda at 11° Tw.
Add the lime to the ground indigo, then add the zinc and finally the soda
lye.
Soon after the various ingredients of the vats are added together the whole
mass becomes hot, when it must be well stirred. It soon begins to evolve
gas and the mixture froths. In from two to four hours the evolution of gas
ceases. The dark blue solution now becomes yellow and the liquor shows
all the characteristics of the indigo vat. It is necessary to keep the vat well
stirred up during the time of setting, which takes from five to six hours. If
there is much evolution of gas after this time it indicates that too much zinc
powder has been added; this is a common fault with dyers, and such excess
causes the vat to be too much disturbed and to work dirty. A lime-zinc vat,
with occasional additions of new materials, keeps good for three months,
and even then is in a better condition than the copperas vat.
This vat is used in precisely the same way as the copperas vat; as it contains
no sediment, or but little, it works cleaner than the copperas vat and as a
rule the indigo blues dyed in it are faster to rubbing.
After a day's work it can be well stirred up and fresh additions of lime, zinc
and indigo made to bring it up to its original dyeing strength.
(3) Zinc-Bisulphite Indigo Vat.—When zinc dust and bisulphite of soda
are mixed together a reaction sets in, the zinc dissolves, and there is formed
sodium hydrosulphite and zinc and sodium sulphites. If now indigo is
mixed with this solution the sodium hydrosulphite exerts a reducing action
on it, forming white indigo and sodium sulphite, a perfectly clear solution
being obtained, which may be used in dyeing cotton or wool.
two bodies are well mixed together and allowed to stand for ten minutes,
then the zinc powder is added. It is best to make this into a smooth paste
with water before adding it to the other ingredients, then the rest of the lime
is added and the whole is thoroughly stirred together with the necessary
quantity of water.
Vat with zinc powder, lime and soda:—
10 lb. indigo, dry and ground fine; 10 lb. zinc powder; 10 lb. slaked lime,
dry; 35 lb. caustic soda at 11° Tw.
Add the lime to the ground indigo, then add the zinc and finally the soda
lye.
Soon after the various ingredients of the vats are added together the whole
mass becomes hot, when it must be well stirred. It soon begins to evolve
gas and the mixture froths. In from two to four hours the evolution of gas
ceases. The dark blue solution now becomes yellow and the liquor shows
all the characteristics of the indigo vat. It is necessary to keep the vat well
stirred up during the time of setting, which takes from five to six hours. If
there is much evolution of gas after this time it indicates that too much zinc
powder has been added; this is a common fault with dyers, and such excess
causes the vat to be too much disturbed and to work dirty. A lime-zinc vat,
with occasional additions of new materials, keeps good for three months,
and even then is in a better condition than the copperas vat.
This vat is used in precisely the same way as the copperas vat; as it contains
no sediment, or but little, it works cleaner than the copperas vat and as a
rule the indigo blues dyed in it are faster to rubbing.
After a day's work it can be well stirred up and fresh additions of lime, zinc
and indigo made to bring it up to its original dyeing strength.
(3) Zinc-Bisulphite Indigo Vat.—When zinc dust and bisulphite of soda
are mixed together a reaction sets in, the zinc dissolves, and there is formed
sodium hydrosulphite and zinc and sodium sulphites. If now indigo is
mixed with this solution the sodium hydrosulphite exerts a reducing action
on it, forming white indigo and sodium sulphite, a perfectly clear solution
being obtained, which may be used in dyeing cotton or wool.
Page 186
With this vat it is customary to prepare a strong stock solution of reduced
indigo, and to add this to the dyeing vats as may be required.
To Make the Stock Liquor.—Take 20 lb. of indigo, grind into a paste with 20
gallons of boiled water, then add 25 lb. lime slaked into a milk. In a
separate tub there is mixed 80 lb. bisulphite of soda, 70° Tw., with 9 lb. zinc
dust; this mixture is well stirred and every care taken to prevent it getting
hot. When the zinc has dissolved and the mixture is free from any
sulphurous smell it is run into the indigo mixture given above. The whole is
well stirred together for some time, and then at intervals, until the indigo
has become dissolved, sufficient water is added to make up 50 gallons,
when the stock liquor will be ready. It should have a deep yellow colour.
The surface may have a scum of a bronzy colour collect on it. This stock
liquor should be kept in casks free from exposure to the air.
To make the working vat from this stock liquor the following is the method
of proceeding:—
Water is run into the vat, and this is heated from 70° to 80° C. in order to
expel air from it, after which it may be allowed to cool, then for each 1,000
gallons contained in the vat there is added 30 lb. bisulphite of soda, 3 lb.
zinc dust and 3 lb. lime, made into a cream. When all these ingredients are
dissolved a quantity of the stock liquor is added in proportion to the shade
that it is desired to dye. The whole is well stirred, then the vat is allowed to
rest for half an hour to enable any sediment to settle, and then the dyeing is
proceeded with.
Should the vat show signs of becoming green in colour it is a good plan to
add a mixture of 1 lb. zinc dust and 10 lb. bisulphite of soda. The vat should
be kept alkaline, and so a little lime may be added from time to time.
After a day's work it is well to add a little of the zinc and bisulphite mixture,
to stir well and allow to stand overnight; the next morning strengthen up the
vat by adding fresh stock liquor.
In place of using lime in making up the vat it is possible to use a mixture of
caustic soda and ammonia. The lime will tend to cause some sediment to
form in the vat, whereas the soda and ammonia will not. When they are
used the following mode of working may be followed:—
indigo, and to add this to the dyeing vats as may be required.
To Make the Stock Liquor.—Take 20 lb. of indigo, grind into a paste with 20
gallons of boiled water, then add 25 lb. lime slaked into a milk. In a
separate tub there is mixed 80 lb. bisulphite of soda, 70° Tw., with 9 lb. zinc
dust; this mixture is well stirred and every care taken to prevent it getting
hot. When the zinc has dissolved and the mixture is free from any
sulphurous smell it is run into the indigo mixture given above. The whole is
well stirred together for some time, and then at intervals, until the indigo
has become dissolved, sufficient water is added to make up 50 gallons,
when the stock liquor will be ready. It should have a deep yellow colour.
The surface may have a scum of a bronzy colour collect on it. This stock
liquor should be kept in casks free from exposure to the air.
To make the working vat from this stock liquor the following is the method
of proceeding:—
Water is run into the vat, and this is heated from 70° to 80° C. in order to
expel air from it, after which it may be allowed to cool, then for each 1,000
gallons contained in the vat there is added 30 lb. bisulphite of soda, 3 lb.
zinc dust and 3 lb. lime, made into a cream. When all these ingredients are
dissolved a quantity of the stock liquor is added in proportion to the shade
that it is desired to dye. The whole is well stirred, then the vat is allowed to
rest for half an hour to enable any sediment to settle, and then the dyeing is
proceeded with.
Should the vat show signs of becoming green in colour it is a good plan to
add a mixture of 1 lb. zinc dust and 10 lb. bisulphite of soda. The vat should
be kept alkaline, and so a little lime may be added from time to time.
After a day's work it is well to add a little of the zinc and bisulphite mixture,
to stir well and allow to stand overnight; the next morning strengthen up the
vat by adding fresh stock liquor.
In place of using lime in making up the vat it is possible to use a mixture of
caustic soda and ammonia. The lime will tend to cause some sediment to
form in the vat, whereas the soda and ammonia will not. When they are
used the following mode of working may be followed:—
Page 187
Stock Liquor.—Soda zinc vat: Put in a tub 26 gallons cold water, 15 lb. zinc
powder ground into a paste with 6 gallons water, then stir in 8 gallons
bisulphite of soda at 60° Tw., stir well, keeping the heat down as much as
possible, after which add 8 pints caustic soda lye at 70° Tw. and 14 pints 20
per cent. liquor ammonia. When all is thoroughly mixed add 30 lb. indigo,
ground into a paste with 7 gallons water, allow to stand for half an hour,
then add water to make 100 gallons, stir at intervals for twelve hours or so,
when the stock liquor will be ready for use.
This is used to make the vat in the same way as the first above described. It
is needful before adding the stock liquor in making a vat to destroy any
oxygen or air which is present in the vat. This may most conveniently be
done by adding thereto a solution of hydrosulphite of soda, which may be
made by mixing 4½ lb. zinc dust with 5 gallons of water and 3 gallons
bisulphite of soda at 70° Tw., stirring well, so that the temperature does not
rise too high, there is then added 2 pints caustic soda and 3 pints liquor
ammonia, 20 per cent.; when all is dissolved, water is added to make up 13
gallons.
Should the vat show signs of becoming charged with indigo, indicated by
its becoming of a green colour, a little of this hydrosulphite added from
time to time will correct it.
The hydrosulphite-indigo vat made by either of the two methods indicated
above works well, and with due care may be kept in work for months. It
gives good shades of indigo, although some dyers consider that these have
not the rich bronze hue got from the lime and copperas vat. The shades are
rather faster to rubbing.
It has been proposed to employ the dye-stuff indophenol in conjunction
with indigo, in which case the method of making the vat is with zinc,
bisulphite of soda, caustic soda and ammonia as last described, only in
place of using all indigo a mixture of 22 lb. indigo and 7½ lb. indophenol is
used. Good blue shades of considerable fastness can thus be got.
Aniline Black.—This black is produced direct upon the cotton fibre by
various processes which entail the oxidation of aniline. The chemical
composition and constitution of aniline black has not yet been worked out.
It is not by any means an easy colour to dye, but still with careful attention
powder ground into a paste with 6 gallons water, then stir in 8 gallons
bisulphite of soda at 60° Tw., stir well, keeping the heat down as much as
possible, after which add 8 pints caustic soda lye at 70° Tw. and 14 pints 20
per cent. liquor ammonia. When all is thoroughly mixed add 30 lb. indigo,
ground into a paste with 7 gallons water, allow to stand for half an hour,
then add water to make 100 gallons, stir at intervals for twelve hours or so,
when the stock liquor will be ready for use.
This is used to make the vat in the same way as the first above described. It
is needful before adding the stock liquor in making a vat to destroy any
oxygen or air which is present in the vat. This may most conveniently be
done by adding thereto a solution of hydrosulphite of soda, which may be
made by mixing 4½ lb. zinc dust with 5 gallons of water and 3 gallons
bisulphite of soda at 70° Tw., stirring well, so that the temperature does not
rise too high, there is then added 2 pints caustic soda and 3 pints liquor
ammonia, 20 per cent.; when all is dissolved, water is added to make up 13
gallons.
Should the vat show signs of becoming charged with indigo, indicated by
its becoming of a green colour, a little of this hydrosulphite added from
time to time will correct it.
The hydrosulphite-indigo vat made by either of the two methods indicated
above works well, and with due care may be kept in work for months. It
gives good shades of indigo, although some dyers consider that these have
not the rich bronze hue got from the lime and copperas vat. The shades are
rather faster to rubbing.
It has been proposed to employ the dye-stuff indophenol in conjunction
with indigo, in which case the method of making the vat is with zinc,
bisulphite of soda, caustic soda and ammonia as last described, only in
place of using all indigo a mixture of 22 lb. indigo and 7½ lb. indophenol is
used. Good blue shades of considerable fastness can thus be got.
Aniline Black.—This black is produced direct upon the cotton fibre by
various processes which entail the oxidation of aniline. The chemical
composition and constitution of aniline black has not yet been worked out.
It is not by any means an easy colour to dye, but still with careful attention
Page 188
to carrying out the various operations in detail excellent results can be
attained.
Aniline black is the fastest black which is known, it resists when well dyed
exposure to air and light, is quite fast to washing and soaping. Its
disadvantages are that there is, with some methods of working, a tendency
to tender the cotton fibre, making it tear easily; secondly, on exposure to air
it tends to turn green, this however only happens when the black has not
been dyed properly.
At the present day it is perhaps without doubt the most used of all blacks.
The methods for producing it are many and varied, the following recipes
show how some of the finest aniline blacks can be dyed:—
Ungreenable black is formed when the aniline is by the action of the
oxidising agents converted into a substance named nigraniline. This
compound when formed will not turn green on the fibre under the influence
of acids.
1. The most usual oxidising agent employed for dyeing aniline black is
bichromate of soda, which salt will be found much better for all purposes
than bichromate of potash. Two separate solutions are prepared: (1) 61 lb.
aniline, 9 lb. hydrochloric acid and 10 gallons of water; and (2) 12 lb.
bichromate of soda and 20 gallons of water. After cooling, equal quantities
of these solutions are mixed and the cotton worked rapidly through the
mixture, in a few minutes it assumes a bronze black. The material is then
wrung out and steamed for twenty minutes at 3½ lb. pressure, which
process renders it jet black and also ungreenable.
2. Another aniline black: For 100 lb. cotton use 11 lb. aniline oil, 15 lb.
bichromate of soda, 40 lb. hydrochloric acid and 160 gallons water or 12 lb.
sulphuric acid. The dye-bath is filled with the water and the cold solution of
aniline oil and a part of the hydrochloric acid in water is first added,
afterwards the bichromate is dissolved in a small quantity of water, working
cold at first and gradually rising to the boil.
3. Another method is the following and gives a black that is fast and
ungreenable and will not rub: 10 lb. chlorate of soda, 10 lb. ammonium
chloride, 10 lb. copper sulphate, 35 lb. aniline salt, 101 lb. aniline oil and 20
attained.
Aniline black is the fastest black which is known, it resists when well dyed
exposure to air and light, is quite fast to washing and soaping. Its
disadvantages are that there is, with some methods of working, a tendency
to tender the cotton fibre, making it tear easily; secondly, on exposure to air
it tends to turn green, this however only happens when the black has not
been dyed properly.
At the present day it is perhaps without doubt the most used of all blacks.
The methods for producing it are many and varied, the following recipes
show how some of the finest aniline blacks can be dyed:—
Ungreenable black is formed when the aniline is by the action of the
oxidising agents converted into a substance named nigraniline. This
compound when formed will not turn green on the fibre under the influence
of acids.
1. The most usual oxidising agent employed for dyeing aniline black is
bichromate of soda, which salt will be found much better for all purposes
than bichromate of potash. Two separate solutions are prepared: (1) 61 lb.
aniline, 9 lb. hydrochloric acid and 10 gallons of water; and (2) 12 lb.
bichromate of soda and 20 gallons of water. After cooling, equal quantities
of these solutions are mixed and the cotton worked rapidly through the
mixture, in a few minutes it assumes a bronze black. The material is then
wrung out and steamed for twenty minutes at 3½ lb. pressure, which
process renders it jet black and also ungreenable.
2. Another aniline black: For 100 lb. cotton use 11 lb. aniline oil, 15 lb.
bichromate of soda, 40 lb. hydrochloric acid and 160 gallons water or 12 lb.
sulphuric acid. The dye-bath is filled with the water and the cold solution of
aniline oil and a part of the hydrochloric acid in water is first added,
afterwards the bichromate is dissolved in a small quantity of water, working
cold at first and gradually rising to the boil.
3. Another method is the following and gives a black that is fast and
ungreenable and will not rub: 10 lb. chlorate of soda, 10 lb. ammonium
chloride, 10 lb. copper sulphate, 35 lb. aniline salt, 101 lb. aniline oil and 20
Page 189
gallons water. The sodium chlorate and ammonium chloride are dissolved
in 6½ gallons and the copper sulphate separately in 5½ gallons water. The
aniline salt is dissolved in as little hot water as possible and neutralised with
a small amount of aniline oil (10 lb.). The solution of aniline salt is first
added to the bath, then the sodium chlorate and ammonium chloride, and
lastly the copper sulphate, dilute the whole to 14° Tw. and then enter the
goods. Next steam, then run through a solution containing 10 lb. bichromate
and 5 lb. soda per 100 gallons water at 160° F., after which the goods are
washed and dry steamed at 15 lb. pressure.
4. A very good black is the prussiate or steam aniline black whose
cheapness should recommend it. Prepare concentrated solutions of 1¾ lb.
aniline salt in 1 gallon water, 1½ lb. ferrocyanide of potash in ¾ gallons
water and 1½ lb. potassium chlorate in 1½ gallons water. Mix the solutions
and work in a jigger, then steam in a Mather & Platt apparatus for two
minutes, then work hot in a jigger in a solution of 2 lb. bichromate per 50
gallons water, dry and finish.
Either of these methods yields a good full black; with a little experience and
care perfectly uniform shades will be got.
in 6½ gallons and the copper sulphate separately in 5½ gallons water. The
aniline salt is dissolved in as little hot water as possible and neutralised with
a small amount of aniline oil (10 lb.). The solution of aniline salt is first
added to the bath, then the sodium chlorate and ammonium chloride, and
lastly the copper sulphate, dilute the whole to 14° Tw. and then enter the
goods. Next steam, then run through a solution containing 10 lb. bichromate
and 5 lb. soda per 100 gallons water at 160° F., after which the goods are
washed and dry steamed at 15 lb. pressure.
4. A very good black is the prussiate or steam aniline black whose
cheapness should recommend it. Prepare concentrated solutions of 1¾ lb.
aniline salt in 1 gallon water, 1½ lb. ferrocyanide of potash in ¾ gallons
water and 1½ lb. potassium chlorate in 1½ gallons water. Mix the solutions
and work in a jigger, then steam in a Mather & Platt apparatus for two
minutes, then work hot in a jigger in a solution of 2 lb. bichromate per 50
gallons water, dry and finish.
Either of these methods yields a good full black; with a little experience and
care perfectly uniform shades will be got.
Page 190
CHAPTER V.
DYEING UNION (MIXED COTTON AND WOOL) FABRICS.
There is now produced a great variety of textile fabrics of every
conceivable texture by combining the two fibres, cotton and wool, in a
number of ways; the variety of these fabrics has of late years considerably
increased, which increase may be largely ascribed to the introduction of the
direct dyeing colouring matters—the Diamine dyes, the Benzo dyes, the
Congo and the Zambesi dyes, for in the dyeing of wool-cotton fabrics they
have made a revolution. The dyer of union fabrics, that is, fabrics composed
of wool and cotton, was formerly put to great straits to obtain uniform
shades on the fabrics supplied to him, owing to the difference in the affinity
of the two fibres for the dye-stuffs then known. Now the direct dyes afford
him a means of easily dyeing a piece of cotton-wool cloth in any colour of a
uniform shade, while the production of two coloured effects is much more
under his control, and has led to the increased production of figured-dress
fabrics, with the ground in one fibre (wool) and colour, and the design in
another fibre (cotton) and colour. The number of direct dyes issued by the
various colour manufacturers is so great that it would take a fairly
considerable space to discuss them all.
To obtain good results it is needful that the dyer of union fabrics should
have a thorough knowledge of the dyes he is using, for each dye makes a
rule to itself as regards its power of dyeing wool and cotton—some go
better on to the cotton than on to the wool, and vice versa. Some dye wool
best at the boil, others equally well below that heat; some go on the cotton
at a moderate temperature, others require the dye-bath to be boiling; some
will go on to the cotton only, and appear to ignore the wool.
The presence or absence in the dye-bath of such bodies as carbonate of
soda, Glauber's salt, etc., has a material influence on the degree of the
affinity of the dye-stuff for the two fibres, as will perhaps be noted
hereafter. Again, while some of the dyes produce equal colours on both
fibres, there are others where the tone is different. With all these
DYEING UNION (MIXED COTTON AND WOOL) FABRICS.
There is now produced a great variety of textile fabrics of every
conceivable texture by combining the two fibres, cotton and wool, in a
number of ways; the variety of these fabrics has of late years considerably
increased, which increase may be largely ascribed to the introduction of the
direct dyeing colouring matters—the Diamine dyes, the Benzo dyes, the
Congo and the Zambesi dyes, for in the dyeing of wool-cotton fabrics they
have made a revolution. The dyer of union fabrics, that is, fabrics composed
of wool and cotton, was formerly put to great straits to obtain uniform
shades on the fabrics supplied to him, owing to the difference in the affinity
of the two fibres for the dye-stuffs then known. Now the direct dyes afford
him a means of easily dyeing a piece of cotton-wool cloth in any colour of a
uniform shade, while the production of two coloured effects is much more
under his control, and has led to the increased production of figured-dress
fabrics, with the ground in one fibre (wool) and colour, and the design in
another fibre (cotton) and colour. The number of direct dyes issued by the
various colour manufacturers is so great that it would take a fairly
considerable space to discuss them all.
To obtain good results it is needful that the dyer of union fabrics should
have a thorough knowledge of the dyes he is using, for each dye makes a
rule to itself as regards its power of dyeing wool and cotton—some go
better on to the cotton than on to the wool, and vice versa. Some dye wool
best at the boil, others equally well below that heat; some go on the cotton
at a moderate temperature, others require the dye-bath to be boiling; some
will go on to the cotton only, and appear to ignore the wool.
The presence or absence in the dye-bath of such bodies as carbonate of
soda, Glauber's salt, etc., has a material influence on the degree of the
affinity of the dye-stuff for the two fibres, as will perhaps be noted
hereafter. Again, while some of the dyes produce equal colours on both
fibres, there are others where the tone is different. With all these
Page 191
peculiarities of the Diamine and other direct dyes the union dyer must make
himself familiar. These dyes are used in neutral baths, that is, along with the
dye-stuff. It is often convenient to use, along with the direct dyes, some azo
or acid dyes, which have the property of dyeing the wool from neutral
baths, many examples of such will be found in the practical recipes given
below. The dyes now under consideration may be conveniently classed into
five groups.
1. Those dyes which dye the cotton and wool from the same bath to the
same shade, or nearly so. Among such are Thioflavine S, Diamine fast
yellow B, Diamine orange B, Diamine rose B D, Diamine reds 4 B, 5 B, 6
B and 10 B, Diamine fast red F, Diamine Bordeaux B, Diamine brown N,
Diamine browns 3 G, B and G, Diamine blues R W, B X, Diamine blue G,
Diamine greens G and B, Diamine black H W, Diamine dark blue B, Union
blacks B and S, Oxydiamine blacks B, M, D and A, Diamine catechine G,
Union blue B B, Oxyphenine, Chloramine yellow, Alkali yellow R,
Chromine G, Titan scarlet S, Mimosa, Curcumine, Primuline, Auroline,
Congo Corinth B, Thiazole yellow, Columbia yellow, Oxydiamine yellow G
G, Oxydiamine oranges G and R, Diamine orange F, Oxydiamine red S.
2. Dyes which dye the cotton a deeper shade than the wool. The following
belong to this group: Diamine fast yellow A, Diamine oranges G and D,
Diamine catechine G, Diamine catechine B, Diamine sky blue, Diamine
blue 2 B, Diamine blue 8 B, Diamine blue B G, Diamine brilliant blue G,
Diamine new blue R, Diamine steel blue L, Diamine black R O, Diamine
black B 0, Diamine black B H, and Oxydiamine black S O O O, Diamine
nitrazol brown G, Diamine sky blue F F, Diamine dark blue B, Diamine
Bordeaux B, Diamine violet N, Oxydiamine violet B, Columbia blacks B
and F B, Zambesi black B, Congo brown G, Direct yellow G, Direct orange
B, Clayton yellow, Cotton yellow, orange T A, Benzo purpurine B, Brilliant
Congo R, Chicago blues B and 4 B and 6 B.
3. Dyes which dye wool a deeper shade than the cotton. The dyes in this
group are not numerous. They are Diamine gold, Diamine scarlet B,
Diamine scarlet 3 B, Diamine Bordeaux S, Diamine blue R W, and Diamine
green G, Diamine reds N 0 and B, Chicago blues G and R, Brilliant
purpurine R, Diamine scarlet B, Delta purpurine 5 B, Chrysamine, Titan
blue, Titan pink, Congo oranges G and R, Erie blue 2 G, Congo R, Brilliant
himself familiar. These dyes are used in neutral baths, that is, along with the
dye-stuff. It is often convenient to use, along with the direct dyes, some azo
or acid dyes, which have the property of dyeing the wool from neutral
baths, many examples of such will be found in the practical recipes given
below. The dyes now under consideration may be conveniently classed into
five groups.
1. Those dyes which dye the cotton and wool from the same bath to the
same shade, or nearly so. Among such are Thioflavine S, Diamine fast
yellow B, Diamine orange B, Diamine rose B D, Diamine reds 4 B, 5 B, 6
B and 10 B, Diamine fast red F, Diamine Bordeaux B, Diamine brown N,
Diamine browns 3 G, B and G, Diamine blues R W, B X, Diamine blue G,
Diamine greens G and B, Diamine black H W, Diamine dark blue B, Union
blacks B and S, Oxydiamine blacks B, M, D and A, Diamine catechine G,
Union blue B B, Oxyphenine, Chloramine yellow, Alkali yellow R,
Chromine G, Titan scarlet S, Mimosa, Curcumine, Primuline, Auroline,
Congo Corinth B, Thiazole yellow, Columbia yellow, Oxydiamine yellow G
G, Oxydiamine oranges G and R, Diamine orange F, Oxydiamine red S.
2. Dyes which dye the cotton a deeper shade than the wool. The following
belong to this group: Diamine fast yellow A, Diamine oranges G and D,
Diamine catechine G, Diamine catechine B, Diamine sky blue, Diamine
blue 2 B, Diamine blue 8 B, Diamine blue B G, Diamine brilliant blue G,
Diamine new blue R, Diamine steel blue L, Diamine black R O, Diamine
black B 0, Diamine black B H, and Oxydiamine black S O O O, Diamine
nitrazol brown G, Diamine sky blue F F, Diamine dark blue B, Diamine
Bordeaux B, Diamine violet N, Oxydiamine violet B, Columbia blacks B
and F B, Zambesi black B, Congo brown G, Direct yellow G, Direct orange
B, Clayton yellow, Cotton yellow, orange T A, Benzo purpurine B, Brilliant
Congo R, Chicago blues B and 4 B and 6 B.
3. Dyes which dye wool a deeper shade than the cotton. The dyes in this
group are not numerous. They are Diamine gold, Diamine scarlet B,
Diamine scarlet 3 B, Diamine Bordeaux S, Diamine blue R W, and Diamine
green G, Diamine reds N 0 and B, Chicago blues G and R, Brilliant
purpurine R, Diamine scarlet B, Delta purpurine 5 B, Chrysamine, Titan
blue, Titan pink, Congo oranges G and R, Erie blue 2 G, Congo R, Brilliant
Page 192
Congo R, Erika B N, Benzo purpurines 4 B and 10 B, Chrysophenine, Titan
yellow, Titan browns Y, R and O, Congo brown G, Sulphon azurine B,
Zambesi black B.
4. Dyes which produce different shades on the two fibres. Diamine brown
G, and Diamine blue 3 R, Diamine brown V, Diamine brown S, Diamine
nitrazol brown B, Diamine blues B X and 3 R, Diamine blue black E,
Benzo blue black G, Benzo purpurine 10 B, Benzo azurines R, G and 3 G,
Columbia red S, Brilliant azurine 5 G, Titan marine blue, Congo Corinths G
and B, Azo blue, Hessian violet, Titan blue, Azo mauve, Congo brown,
Diamine bronze G, Zambesi browns G and 2 G, Zambesi black F.
5. Azo-acid dyes, which dye wool from neutral baths, and are therefore
suitable for shading up the wool to the cotton in union fabric dyeing.
Among the dyes thus available may be enumerated: Naphthol blues G and
R, Naphthol blue black, Formyl violet 10 B, Lanacyl blue B B, Lanacyl
blue R, Alkaline blue, Formyl violets S 4 B and 6 B, Rocceleine, Azo red A,
Croceine A Z, Brilliant scarlet, Orange extra, Orange E N Z, Indian yellow
G, Indian yellow R, Tropæoline O O, Naphthylamine black 4 B and
Naphthol blue black, Brilliant scarlet G, Lanacyl violet B, Brilliant milling
green B, Thiocarmine R, Formyl blue B, Naphthylamine blacks D, 4 B and
6 B; Azo-acid yellow, Curcumine extra, Mandarine G, Ponceau 3 R B, Acid
violet 6 B, Guinea violet 4 B, Guinea green B, Wool black 6 B.
Regarding the best methods of dyeing, that in neutral baths yields the most
satisfactory results in practical working. It is done in a boiling hot or in a
slightly boiling bath, with the addition of 6¼ oz. crystallised Glauber's salt
per gallon water for the first bath, and when the baths are kept standing 20
per cent. crystallised Glauber's salt, reckoned upon the weight of the goods,
for each succeeding lot.
In dyeing unions, the dye-baths must be as concentrated as possible, and
must not contain more than from 25 to 30 times as much water as the goods
weigh. In this respect it may serve as a guide that concentrated baths are
best used when dyeing dark shades, while light shades can be dyed in more
diluted baths. The most important factor for producing uniform dyeings is
the appropriate regulation of the temperature of the dye-bath. Concerning
this, the dyer must bear in mind that the direct colours possess a greater
yellow, Titan browns Y, R and O, Congo brown G, Sulphon azurine B,
Zambesi black B.
4. Dyes which produce different shades on the two fibres. Diamine brown
G, and Diamine blue 3 R, Diamine brown V, Diamine brown S, Diamine
nitrazol brown B, Diamine blues B X and 3 R, Diamine blue black E,
Benzo blue black G, Benzo purpurine 10 B, Benzo azurines R, G and 3 G,
Columbia red S, Brilliant azurine 5 G, Titan marine blue, Congo Corinths G
and B, Azo blue, Hessian violet, Titan blue, Azo mauve, Congo brown,
Diamine bronze G, Zambesi browns G and 2 G, Zambesi black F.
5. Azo-acid dyes, which dye wool from neutral baths, and are therefore
suitable for shading up the wool to the cotton in union fabric dyeing.
Among the dyes thus available may be enumerated: Naphthol blues G and
R, Naphthol blue black, Formyl violet 10 B, Lanacyl blue B B, Lanacyl
blue R, Alkaline blue, Formyl violets S 4 B and 6 B, Rocceleine, Azo red A,
Croceine A Z, Brilliant scarlet, Orange extra, Orange E N Z, Indian yellow
G, Indian yellow R, Tropæoline O O, Naphthylamine black 4 B and
Naphthol blue black, Brilliant scarlet G, Lanacyl violet B, Brilliant milling
green B, Thiocarmine R, Formyl blue B, Naphthylamine blacks D, 4 B and
6 B; Azo-acid yellow, Curcumine extra, Mandarine G, Ponceau 3 R B, Acid
violet 6 B, Guinea violet 4 B, Guinea green B, Wool black 6 B.
Regarding the best methods of dyeing, that in neutral baths yields the most
satisfactory results in practical working. It is done in a boiling hot or in a
slightly boiling bath, with the addition of 6¼ oz. crystallised Glauber's salt
per gallon water for the first bath, and when the baths are kept standing 20
per cent. crystallised Glauber's salt, reckoned upon the weight of the goods,
for each succeeding lot.
In dyeing unions, the dye-baths must be as concentrated as possible, and
must not contain more than from 25 to 30 times as much water as the goods
weigh. In this respect it may serve as a guide that concentrated baths are
best used when dyeing dark shades, while light shades can be dyed in more
diluted baths. The most important factor for producing uniform dyeings is
the appropriate regulation of the temperature of the dye-bath. Concerning
this, the dyer must bear in mind that the direct colours possess a greater
Page 193
affinity for the cotton if dyed below the boiling point, and only go on the
wool when the bath is boiling, especially so the longer and more intensely
the goods are boiled.
The following method of dyeing is perhaps the best one: Charge the dye-
bath with the requisite dye-stuff and Glauber's salt, boil up, shut off the
steam, enter the goods and let run for half an hour without steam, then
sample. If the shade of both cotton and wool is too light add some more of
the dye-stuffs used for both fibres, boil up once more and boil for a quarter
to half an hour. If the wool only is too light, or its shade different from that
of the cotton, add some more of the dye-stuff used for shading the wool and
bring them again to the boil. If, however, the cotton turns out too light, or
does not correspond in shade to the wool, add some more of the dye-stuffs
used for dyeing the cotton, without, however, raising the temperature.
Prolonged boiling is only necessary very rarely, and generally only if the
goods to be dyed are difficult to penetrate, or contain qualities of wool
which only with difficulty take up the dye-stuff. In such cases, in making up
the bath dye-stuffs are to be selected some of which go only on the wool
and others which go only on the cotton (those belonging to the second
group).
The goods can then be boiled for some time, and perfect penetration and
level shades will result. If the wool takes up the dye-stuff easily (as is
frequently the case with goods manufactured from shoddy), and are
therefore dyed too dark a shade, then dye-stuffs have to be used which
principally dye the cotton, and a too high temperature should be avoided. In
such cases it is advisable to diminish the affinity of the wool by the addition
of one-fifth of the original quantity of Glauber's salt (about 3/8 oz. per
gallon water), and from three-quarters to four-fifths of the dye-stuff used for
the first lot. Care has to be taken that not much of the dye liquor is lost
when taking out the dyed goods, otherwise the quantities of Glauber's salt
and dye-stuff will have to be increased proportionately. Wooden vats, such
as are generally used for piece dyeing, have proved the most suitable. They
are heated with direct, or, still better, with indirect steam. The method
which has proved most advantageous is to let the steam run into a space
separated from the vat by a perforated wall, into which space the required
dye-stuffs and salt are placed.
wool when the bath is boiling, especially so the longer and more intensely
the goods are boiled.
The following method of dyeing is perhaps the best one: Charge the dye-
bath with the requisite dye-stuff and Glauber's salt, boil up, shut off the
steam, enter the goods and let run for half an hour without steam, then
sample. If the shade of both cotton and wool is too light add some more of
the dye-stuffs used for both fibres, boil up once more and boil for a quarter
to half an hour. If the wool only is too light, or its shade different from that
of the cotton, add some more of the dye-stuff used for shading the wool and
bring them again to the boil. If, however, the cotton turns out too light, or
does not correspond in shade to the wool, add some more of the dye-stuffs
used for dyeing the cotton, without, however, raising the temperature.
Prolonged boiling is only necessary very rarely, and generally only if the
goods to be dyed are difficult to penetrate, or contain qualities of wool
which only with difficulty take up the dye-stuff. In such cases, in making up
the bath dye-stuffs are to be selected some of which go only on the wool
and others which go only on the cotton (those belonging to the second
group).
The goods can then be boiled for some time, and perfect penetration and
level shades will result. If the wool takes up the dye-stuff easily (as is
frequently the case with goods manufactured from shoddy), and are
therefore dyed too dark a shade, then dye-stuffs have to be used which
principally dye the cotton, and a too high temperature should be avoided. In
such cases it is advisable to diminish the affinity of the wool by the addition
of one-fifth of the original quantity of Glauber's salt (about 3/8 oz. per
gallon water), and from three-quarters to four-fifths of the dye-stuff used for
the first lot. Care has to be taken that not much of the dye liquor is lost
when taking out the dyed goods, otherwise the quantities of Glauber's salt
and dye-stuff will have to be increased proportionately. Wooden vats, such
as are generally used for piece dyeing, have proved the most suitable. They
are heated with direct, or, still better, with indirect steam. The method
which has proved most advantageous is to let the steam run into a space
separated from the vat by a perforated wall, into which space the required
dye-stuffs and salt are placed.
Page 194
The mode of working is rather influenced by the character of the goods, and
the following notes will be found useful by the union dyer:—
Very little difficulty will be met with in dyeing such light fabrics as Italians,
cashmere, serges and similar thin textiles lightly woven from cotton warp
and woollen weft. When deep shades (blacks, dark blues, browns and
greens), are being dyed it is not advisable to make up the dye-bath with the
whole of the dyes at once. It is much better to add these in quantities of
about one-fourth at a time at intervals during the dyeing of the piece. It is
found that the affinity of the wool for the dyes at the boil is so much greater
than is that of the cotton that it would, if the whole of the dye were used,
take up too much of the colour, and then would come up too deep in shade.
Never give a strong boil with such fabrics, but keep the bath just under the
boil, which results in the wool dyeing much more nearly like to cotton.
Bright Yellow.—Use 2 lb. Thioflavine S in a bath which contains 4 lb.
Glauber's salt per 10 gallons of dye liquor.
Good Yellow.—A very fine deep shade is dyed with 2½ lb. Diamine gold
and 2½ lb. Diamine fast yellow A, in the same way as the last. Here
advantage is taken of the fact that while the Diamine gold dyes the wool
better than the cotton, the yellow dyes the cotton the deeper shade, and
between the two a uniform shade of yellow is got.
Pale Gold Yellow.—Use a dye liquor containing 4 lb. Glauber's salt in every
10 gallons, 2½ lb. Diamine fast yellow A, 2 oz. Indian yellow G and 3½ oz.
Indian yellow R. In this recipe there is used in the two last dyes purely wool
yellows, which dye the wool the same tint as the fast yellow A dyes the
cotton.
Bright Yellow.—Use in the same way as the last, 2½ lb. Diamine fast yellow
B and 3 oz. Indian yellow G.
Gold Orange.—Use as above 2 lb. Diamine orange G, 5½ oz. Indian yellow
K and 1½ oz. Orange E N Z.
Deep Orange.—Use 2½ lb. Diamine orange D C, 6½ oz. Orange E N Z,
and 3¼ oz. Indian yellow R.
the following notes will be found useful by the union dyer:—
Very little difficulty will be met with in dyeing such light fabrics as Italians,
cashmere, serges and similar thin textiles lightly woven from cotton warp
and woollen weft. When deep shades (blacks, dark blues, browns and
greens), are being dyed it is not advisable to make up the dye-bath with the
whole of the dyes at once. It is much better to add these in quantities of
about one-fourth at a time at intervals during the dyeing of the piece. It is
found that the affinity of the wool for the dyes at the boil is so much greater
than is that of the cotton that it would, if the whole of the dye were used,
take up too much of the colour, and then would come up too deep in shade.
Never give a strong boil with such fabrics, but keep the bath just under the
boil, which results in the wool dyeing much more nearly like to cotton.
Bright Yellow.—Use 2 lb. Thioflavine S in a bath which contains 4 lb.
Glauber's salt per 10 gallons of dye liquor.
Good Yellow.—A very fine deep shade is dyed with 2½ lb. Diamine gold
and 2½ lb. Diamine fast yellow A, in the same way as the last. Here
advantage is taken of the fact that while the Diamine gold dyes the wool
better than the cotton, the yellow dyes the cotton the deeper shade, and
between the two a uniform shade of yellow is got.
Pale Gold Yellow.—Use a dye liquor containing 4 lb. Glauber's salt in every
10 gallons, 2½ lb. Diamine fast yellow A, 2 oz. Indian yellow G and 3½ oz.
Indian yellow R. In this recipe there is used in the two last dyes purely wool
yellows, which dye the wool the same tint as the fast yellow A dyes the
cotton.
Bright Yellow.—Use in the same way as the last, 2½ lb. Diamine fast yellow
B and 3 oz. Indian yellow G.
Gold Orange.—Use as above 2 lb. Diamine orange G, 5½ oz. Indian yellow
K and 1½ oz. Orange E N Z.
Deep Orange.—Use 2½ lb. Diamine orange D C, 6½ oz. Orange E N Z,
and 3¼ oz. Indian yellow R.
Page 195
Black.—Use 4½ lb. Union black S, 2 oz. Diamine fast yellow A, 5 oz.
Naphthol blue black and 3¼ oz. Formyl violet S 4 B, with 4 lb. Glauber's
salt in each 10 gallons dye liquor.
Navy Blue.—Use 1¼ lb. Union black S, 3 lb. Diamine black B H, ½ oz.
Naphthol blue black, ½ lb. Formyl violet S 4 B and 2½ oz. alkaline blue B.
Red Plum.—Use a dye-bath containing 2½ lb. Oxydiamine violet B and 3¼
oz. Formyl violet S 4 B.
Dark Green.—A fine shade can be dyed in a bath containing 3 lb. Diamine
green B and 1½ lb. Diamine black H W.
Dark Slate.—Use 4 lb. Diamine black H W, 2 oz. Naphthol blue black and
3 oz. Azo red A.
Sage.—Use a dye-bath containing 4 lb. Diamine bronze G and 1¼ oz.
Naphthol blue black.
Dark Brown.—A fine dark shade is got from 2½ lb. Diamine brown V and 2
oz. Naphthol blue black.
Peacock Green.—Use 3¾ lb. Diamine steel blue L, 13 oz. Diamine fast
yellow B, 14½ oz. Thiocarmine K and 2¼ oz. Indian yellow G in a bath of
4 lb. Glauber's salt per gallon dye liquor.
Dark Sea Green.—Use 9 oz. Diamine steel blue L, 3¾ oz. Diamine fast
yellow B, ½ oz. Diamine orange G, 1¼ oz. Naphthol blue black and ¾ oz.
Indian yellow G.
Dark Brown.—Use 1 lb. Diamine orange B, 1 lb. Diamine Fast yellow S,
13¾ oz. Union black S, 1 lb. Diamine brown M and ½ lb. Indian yellow G.
Fix in an alum bath after dyeing.
Dark Stone.—Use ½ lb. Diamine orange B, 3¾ oz. Union black, ¼ oz.
Diamine Bordeaux B, 1½ oz. Azo red A and ¾ oz. Naphthol blue black.
Black.—A very fine black can be got from 3½ lb. Oxydiamine black B M, 2
lb. Union black S, 9½ oz. Naphthol blue black and 4 oz. Formyl violet S 4
B.
Naphthol blue black and 3¼ oz. Formyl violet S 4 B, with 4 lb. Glauber's
salt in each 10 gallons dye liquor.
Navy Blue.—Use 1¼ lb. Union black S, 3 lb. Diamine black B H, ½ oz.
Naphthol blue black, ½ lb. Formyl violet S 4 B and 2½ oz. alkaline blue B.
Red Plum.—Use a dye-bath containing 2½ lb. Oxydiamine violet B and 3¼
oz. Formyl violet S 4 B.
Dark Green.—A fine shade can be dyed in a bath containing 3 lb. Diamine
green B and 1½ lb. Diamine black H W.
Dark Slate.—Use 4 lb. Diamine black H W, 2 oz. Naphthol blue black and
3 oz. Azo red A.
Sage.—Use a dye-bath containing 4 lb. Diamine bronze G and 1¼ oz.
Naphthol blue black.
Dark Brown.—A fine dark shade is got from 2½ lb. Diamine brown V and 2
oz. Naphthol blue black.
Peacock Green.—Use 3¾ lb. Diamine steel blue L, 13 oz. Diamine fast
yellow B, 14½ oz. Thiocarmine K and 2¼ oz. Indian yellow G in a bath of
4 lb. Glauber's salt per gallon dye liquor.
Dark Sea Green.—Use 9 oz. Diamine steel blue L, 3¾ oz. Diamine fast
yellow B, ½ oz. Diamine orange G, 1¼ oz. Naphthol blue black and ¾ oz.
Indian yellow G.
Dark Brown.—Use 1 lb. Diamine orange B, 1 lb. Diamine Fast yellow S,
13¾ oz. Union black S, 1 lb. Diamine brown M and ½ lb. Indian yellow G.
Fix in an alum bath after dyeing.
Dark Stone.—Use ½ lb. Diamine orange B, 3¾ oz. Union black, ¼ oz.
Diamine Bordeaux B, 1½ oz. Azo red A and ¾ oz. Naphthol blue black.
Black.—A very fine black can be got from 3½ lb. Oxydiamine black B M, 2
lb. Union black S, 9½ oz. Naphthol blue black and 4 oz. Formyl violet S 4
B.
Page 196
Dark Grey.—A fine bluish shade of grey is got from 7 oz. Diamine black B
H, 2¼ oz. Diamine orange G, 2½ oz. Diamine orange G, 2½ oz. Naphthol
blue black and 1 oz. Orange E N Z.
Dark Blue.—A fine shade is got by using 2 lb. Diamine black B H, ½ lb.
Diamine black H W, and 3½ oz. Alkaline blue 6 B.
Drab.—Use 3½ oz. Diamine orange B, ¾ oz. Union black, 1/8 oz. Diamine
Bordeaux B, ¾ oz. Azo red A and ¼ oz. Naphthol blue black.
Plum.—Use 2½ lb. Diamine violet N, 9½ oz. Union black and 1 lb. Formyl
violet S 4 B.
Bright Yellow.—Use a dye-bath containing 4 lb. Thioflavine S, 2 lb.
Naphthol yellow S, 10 lb. Glauber's salt and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Pink.—Use 1/6 oz. Diamine Rose B D, ¼ oz. Diamine scarlet B, ½ oz.
Rhodamine B and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Scarlet.—A fine shade is got from 1½ lb. Diamine scarlet B, ½ oz. Diamine
red 5 B and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Orange.—Use a dye-bath containing 3½ lb. Diamine orange G, 14½ oz.
Tropæoline O O, and 2¾ oz. Orange extra.
Sky Blue.—Use 1½ oz. Diamine sky blue and 1¼ oz. Alkaline blue B.
Bright Blue.—A fine shade similar to that formerly known as royal blue is
got by using 1½ lb. Diamine brilliant blue G and 9¼ oz. Alkaline blue 6 B.
Maroon.—Use 3 lb. Diamine Bordeaux B, 2 lb. Diamine violet N and 3¼
oz. Formyl violet S 4 B.
Green.—A fine green similar in shade to that used for billiard-table cloth is
got from 2 lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 2 lb. Diamine steel blue L, 14½ oz.
Thiocarmine R and 7¼ oz. Indian yellow G.
Gold Brown—A fine brown is got from 3 lb. Diamine orange B, ½ lb.
Union black, 2½ oz. Diamine brown, ¾ oz. Naphthol blue black and ½ lb.
Indian yellow G.
H, 2¼ oz. Diamine orange G, 2½ oz. Diamine orange G, 2½ oz. Naphthol
blue black and 1 oz. Orange E N Z.
Dark Blue.—A fine shade is got by using 2 lb. Diamine black B H, ½ lb.
Diamine black H W, and 3½ oz. Alkaline blue 6 B.
Drab.—Use 3½ oz. Diamine orange B, ¾ oz. Union black, 1/8 oz. Diamine
Bordeaux B, ¾ oz. Azo red A and ¼ oz. Naphthol blue black.
Plum.—Use 2½ lb. Diamine violet N, 9½ oz. Union black and 1 lb. Formyl
violet S 4 B.
Bright Yellow.—Use a dye-bath containing 4 lb. Thioflavine S, 2 lb.
Naphthol yellow S, 10 lb. Glauber's salt and 2 lb. acetic acid.
Pink.—Use 1/6 oz. Diamine Rose B D, ¼ oz. Diamine scarlet B, ½ oz.
Rhodamine B and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Scarlet.—A fine shade is got from 1½ lb. Diamine scarlet B, ½ oz. Diamine
red 5 B and 20 lb. Glauber's salt.
Orange.—Use a dye-bath containing 3½ lb. Diamine orange G, 14½ oz.
Tropæoline O O, and 2¾ oz. Orange extra.
Sky Blue.—Use 1½ oz. Diamine sky blue and 1¼ oz. Alkaline blue B.
Bright Blue.—A fine shade similar to that formerly known as royal blue is
got by using 1½ lb. Diamine brilliant blue G and 9¼ oz. Alkaline blue 6 B.
Maroon.—Use 3 lb. Diamine Bordeaux B, 2 lb. Diamine violet N and 3¼
oz. Formyl violet S 4 B.
Green.—A fine green similar in shade to that used for billiard-table cloth is
got from 2 lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 2 lb. Diamine steel blue L, 14½ oz.
Thiocarmine R and 7¼ oz. Indian yellow G.
Gold Brown—A fine brown is got from 3 lb. Diamine orange B, ½ lb.
Union black, 2½ oz. Diamine brown, ¾ oz. Naphthol blue black and ½ lb.
Indian yellow G.
Page 197
Navy Blue.—Use 3¼ lb. Diamine black B H, 1½ lb. Diamine brilliant blue
G and ½ lb. Alkaline blue.
Fawn Drab.—A fine shade is got by dyeing in a bath containing 6¾ oz.
Diamine orange B, 1¾ lb. Union black, ¼ oz. Naphthol blue black, ¼ oz.
Diamine Bordeaux B and 1 oz. Azo red A.
In all these colours the dye-baths contain Glauber's salt at the rate of 4 lb.
per 10 gallons.
Dark Brown.—2½ lb. Diamine orange B, 13 oz. Diamine Bordeaux B, 1½
lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 1¾ lb. Union black and 3½ oz. Naphthol black.
Drab.—1¾ lb. Diamine fast yellow R, 3¼ oz. Diamine Bordeaux B, 2½ oz.
Union black, ½ oz. Naphthol blue black and 1¼ oz. Indian yellow G.
Dark Blue.—Use in the dye-bath 4¼ lb. Diamine dark blue B, 1½ lb.
Diamine brilliant blue G, ¾ lb. Formyl violet S 4 B and 5 oz. Naphthol blue
black.
Blue Black-—Use 3½ lb. Union black S, 1½ lb. Oxydiamine black B M, 6½
oz. Naphthol blue black and ¼ lb. Formyl violet S 4 B.
Dark Walnut.—2¾ lb. Diamine brown M, 1½ lb. Union black S, and 11¼
oz. Indian yellow G.
Peacock Green.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine black H W, 5-1/6 oz.
Diamine fast yellow B, 1¼ lb. Thiocarmine R and 1-1/6 oz. Indian yellow
G.
Slate Blue.—Use in the dye-bath 6½ oz. Diamine carechine B, 4¾ oz.
Diamine orange B, 2½ oz. Union black, 2¾ oz. Orange E N Z, and 1¾ oz.
Naphthol blue black.
Dark Sage.—A good shade is dyed with 1 lb. Diamine orange B, 6½ oz.
Union black, 1¾ oz. Diamine brown M, 3¼ oz. azo red A and 2¼ oz.
Naphthol blue black.
Navy Blue.—Use 2 lb. Diamine dark blue B, 1¼ lb. Lanacyl violet B, and 7
oz. Naphthol blue black.
G and ½ lb. Alkaline blue.
Fawn Drab.—A fine shade is got by dyeing in a bath containing 6¾ oz.
Diamine orange B, 1¾ lb. Union black, ¼ oz. Naphthol blue black, ¼ oz.
Diamine Bordeaux B and 1 oz. Azo red A.
In all these colours the dye-baths contain Glauber's salt at the rate of 4 lb.
per 10 gallons.
Dark Brown.—2½ lb. Diamine orange B, 13 oz. Diamine Bordeaux B, 1½
lb. Diamine fast yellow B, 1¾ lb. Union black and 3½ oz. Naphthol black.
Drab.—1¾ lb. Diamine fast yellow R, 3¼ oz. Diamine Bordeaux B, 2½ oz.
Union black, ½ oz. Naphthol blue black and 1¼ oz. Indian yellow G.
Dark Blue.—Use in the dye-bath 4¼ lb. Diamine dark blue B, 1½ lb.
Diamine brilliant blue G, ¾ lb. Formyl violet S 4 B and 5 oz. Naphthol blue
black.
Blue Black-—Use 3½ lb. Union black S, 1½ lb. Oxydiamine black B M, 6½
oz. Naphthol blue black and ¼ lb. Formyl violet S 4 B.
Dark Walnut.—2¾ lb. Diamine brown M, 1½ lb. Union black S, and 11¼
oz. Indian yellow G.
Peacock Green.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine black H W, 5-1/6 oz.
Diamine fast yellow B, 1¼ lb. Thiocarmine R and 1-1/6 oz. Indian yellow
G.
Slate Blue.—Use in the dye-bath 6½ oz. Diamine carechine B, 4¾ oz.
Diamine orange B, 2½ oz. Union black, 2¾ oz. Orange E N Z, and 1¾ oz.
Naphthol blue black.
Dark Sage.—A good shade is dyed with 1 lb. Diamine orange B, 6½ oz.
Union black, 1¾ oz. Diamine brown M, 3¼ oz. azo red A and 2¼ oz.
Naphthol blue black.
Navy Blue.—Use 2 lb. Diamine dark blue B, 1¼ lb. Lanacyl violet B, and 7
oz. Naphthol blue black.
Page 198
Bronze Green.—A good shade is dyed with 2 lb. Diamine orange B, 5 oz.
Diamine brown N, ¾ lb. Union black S, 1 lb. Indian yellow G and 2½ oz.
Naphthol blue black.
Black.—Use 2½ lb. Oxydiamine black B M and 1½> lb. Naphthylamine
black 6 B. Another recipe, 2¼ lb. Oxydiamine black B M, 1 lb. Diamine
brown M, 1 lb. Orange E N Z and 2 oz. Naphthol blue black.
Dark Brown.—Use 1½ lb. Oxydiamine black B M, 15½ oz. Diamine brown
M, 1¾ lb. Indian yellow G and 2¾ oz. Naphthol blue black. Another
combination, 1½ lb. Oxydiamine black B M, 1½ lb. Orange E N Z, 1 lb.
Indian yellow G and 5 oz. Naphthol blue black.
Scarlet.—3 lb. Benzo purpurine 4 B, ¾ oz. Ponceau 3 R B and ½ lb.
Curcumine S.
Crimson.—½ lb. Congo Corinth G, 2 lb. Benzo purpurine 10 B and ½ lb.
Curcumine S.
Bright Blue.—2 lb. Chicago blue 6 B, 3 oz. Alkali blue 6 B, 1½ oz.
Zambesi blue R X. After dyeing rinse and develop in a bath of 8 oz.
sulphuric acid in 10 gallons of water, then rinse well.
Dark Blue.—2½ lb. Columbia fast blue 2 G, 3 oz. Sulphon azurine D, 8 oz.
Alkali blue 6 B. After dyeing rinse and develop in a bath of 8 oz. sulphuric
acid in 20 gallons of water.
Orange.—9 oz. Congo brown G, 1½ lb. Mikado orange 4 R O and 1½ oz.
Mandarine G.
Dark Green.—2 lb. Columbia green, ½ lb. Sulphon azurine D, 1 lb.
Zambesi blue B X, 1½ oz. Curcumine S.
Black.—4 lb. Columbia black F B and 2 lb. Wool black 6 B.
Pale Sage Green.—5 oz. Zambesi black D, ¾ lb. Chrysophenine G and 1½
lb. Curcumine S.
Slate.—½ lb. Zambesi black D, ¾ oz. Zambesi blue R X, ½ oz. Mikado
orange 4 R 0 and 1½ oz. Acid violet 6 B.
Diamine brown N, ¾ lb. Union black S, 1 lb. Indian yellow G and 2½ oz.
Naphthol blue black.
Black.—Use 2½ lb. Oxydiamine black B M and 1½> lb. Naphthylamine
black 6 B. Another recipe, 2¼ lb. Oxydiamine black B M, 1 lb. Diamine
brown M, 1 lb. Orange E N Z and 2 oz. Naphthol blue black.
Dark Brown.—Use 1½ lb. Oxydiamine black B M, 15½ oz. Diamine brown
M, 1¾ lb. Indian yellow G and 2¾ oz. Naphthol blue black. Another
combination, 1½ lb. Oxydiamine black B M, 1½ lb. Orange E N Z, 1 lb.
Indian yellow G and 5 oz. Naphthol blue black.
Scarlet.—3 lb. Benzo purpurine 4 B, ¾ oz. Ponceau 3 R B and ½ lb.
Curcumine S.
Crimson.—½ lb. Congo Corinth G, 2 lb. Benzo purpurine 10 B and ½ lb.
Curcumine S.
Bright Blue.—2 lb. Chicago blue 6 B, 3 oz. Alkali blue 6 B, 1½ oz.
Zambesi blue R X. After dyeing rinse and develop in a bath of 8 oz.
sulphuric acid in 10 gallons of water, then rinse well.
Dark Blue.—2½ lb. Columbia fast blue 2 G, 3 oz. Sulphon azurine D, 8 oz.
Alkali blue 6 B. After dyeing rinse and develop in a bath of 8 oz. sulphuric
acid in 20 gallons of water.
Orange.—9 oz. Congo brown G, 1½ lb. Mikado orange 4 R O and 1½ oz.
Mandarine G.
Dark Green.—2 lb. Columbia green, ½ lb. Sulphon azurine D, 1 lb.
Zambesi blue B X, 1½ oz. Curcumine S.
Black.—4 lb. Columbia black F B and 2 lb. Wool black 6 B.
Pale Sage Green.—5 oz. Zambesi black D, ¾ lb. Chrysophenine G and 1½
lb. Curcumine S.
Slate.—½ lb. Zambesi black D, ¾ oz. Zambesi blue R X, ½ oz. Mikado
orange 4 R 0 and 1½ oz. Acid violet 6 B.
Page 199
Dark Grey.—1 lb. Columbia black F B, 3 oz. Zambesi black B and ¾ oz.
Sulphon azurine D.
Drab.—1½ oz. Zambesi black D, ¾ oz. Mandarine G extra, ¼ oz.
Curcumine extra and 3 oz. Mikado orange 4 R O.
Brown.—5 oz. Zambesi black D, ¾ oz. Mandarine G extra, 1½ oz. Orange
T A and 2 oz. Mikado orange 4 R 0.
Nut Brown.—¾ lb. Congo brown G, ¼ lb. Chicago blue R W and ¾ lb.
Mikado orange 4 R 0.
Dark Brown.—1 lb. Congo brown G, 1½ lb. Benzo purpurine 4 B, 1½ lb.
Zambesi black F and ½ lb. Wool black 6 B.
Stone.—1 oz. Zambesi black D, ¼ oz. Mandarine G, ¼ oz. Curcumine extra
and 1¼ oz. Mikado orange 4 R 0.
Slate Green.—3 oz. Zambesi black D, 1½ oz. Guinea green B.
Sage Brown.—½ lb. Zambesi black D, 1½ oz. Mandarine G extra, 3 oz.
Curcumine extra, 3 oz. Acid violet 6 B, 6 oz. Mikado orange 4 R 0 and 4½
oz. Curcumine S.
Cornflower Blue.—3 oz. Chicago blue 4 R, ¼ lb. Zambesi blue R X, ¼ lb.
Acid violet 6 B and ¾ oz. Zambesi brown G.
Dark Brown.—1½ lb. Brilliant orange G, ½ lb. Orange T A, 1 lb. Columbia
black F B and ¼ lb. Wool black 6 B.
Dark Blue.—2 lb. Chicago blue W, 1 lb. Zambesi blue R X, ½ lb. Columbia
black F B, 10 oz. Guinea green B and ½ lb. Guinea violet 4 B.
The Janus dyes may be used for the dyeing of half wool (union) fabrics.
The best plan of working is to prepare a bath with 5 lb. of sulphate of zinc;
in this the goods are worked at the boil for five minutes, then there is added
the dyes previously dissolved in water, and the working continued for a
quarter of an hour; there is then added 20 lb. Glauber's salt, and the working
at the boil continued for one hour, at the end of which time the dye-bath
will be fairly well exhausted of colour. The goods are now taken out and put
into a fixing-bath of sumac or tannin, in which they are treated for fifteen
Sulphon azurine D.
Drab.—1½ oz. Zambesi black D, ¾ oz. Mandarine G extra, ¼ oz.
Curcumine extra and 3 oz. Mikado orange 4 R O.
Brown.—5 oz. Zambesi black D, ¾ oz. Mandarine G extra, 1½ oz. Orange
T A and 2 oz. Mikado orange 4 R 0.
Nut Brown.—¾ lb. Congo brown G, ¼ lb. Chicago blue R W and ¾ lb.
Mikado orange 4 R 0.
Dark Brown.—1 lb. Congo brown G, 1½ lb. Benzo purpurine 4 B, 1½ lb.
Zambesi black F and ½ lb. Wool black 6 B.
Stone.—1 oz. Zambesi black D, ¼ oz. Mandarine G, ¼ oz. Curcumine extra
and 1¼ oz. Mikado orange 4 R 0.
Slate Green.—3 oz. Zambesi black D, 1½ oz. Guinea green B.
Sage Brown.—½ lb. Zambesi black D, 1½ oz. Mandarine G extra, 3 oz.
Curcumine extra, 3 oz. Acid violet 6 B, 6 oz. Mikado orange 4 R 0 and 4½
oz. Curcumine S.
Cornflower Blue.—3 oz. Chicago blue 4 R, ¼ lb. Zambesi blue R X, ¼ lb.
Acid violet 6 B and ¾ oz. Zambesi brown G.
Dark Brown.—1½ lb. Brilliant orange G, ½ lb. Orange T A, 1 lb. Columbia
black F B and ¼ lb. Wool black 6 B.
Dark Blue.—2 lb. Chicago blue W, 1 lb. Zambesi blue R X, ½ lb. Columbia
black F B, 10 oz. Guinea green B and ½ lb. Guinea violet 4 B.
The Janus dyes may be used for the dyeing of half wool (union) fabrics.
The best plan of working is to prepare a bath with 5 lb. of sulphate of zinc;
in this the goods are worked at the boil for five minutes, then there is added
the dyes previously dissolved in water, and the working continued for a
quarter of an hour; there is then added 20 lb. Glauber's salt, and the working
at the boil continued for one hour, at the end of which time the dye-bath
will be fairly well exhausted of colour. The goods are now taken out and put
into a fixing-bath of sumac or tannin, in which they are treated for fifteen
Page 200
minutes; to this same bath there is next added tartar emetic and 1 lb.
sulphuric acid, and the working continued for a quarter of an hour, then the
bath is heated to 160° F., when the goods are lifted, rinsed and dried. In the
recipes the quantities of the dyes, sumac or tannin and tartar emetic are
given only, the other ingredients and processes are the same in all.
Dark Blue.—2¼ lb. Janus dark blue B and ¼ lb. Janus green B in the dye-
bath, and 16 lb. sumac extract and 2 lb. tartar emetic in the fixing-bath.
Blue Black.—3½ lb. Janus black I and ½ lb. Janus black II in the dye-bath,
and 16 lb. sumac extract and 2 lb. tartar emetic in the fixing-bath.
Dark Brown.—2½ lb. Janus brown B, 1 lb. Janus black I, 3½ oz. Janus
yellow G and 5 oz. Janus red B in the dye-bath, with 16 lb. sumac extract
and 2 lb. tartar emetic in the fixing-bath.
Drab.—1½ oz. Janus yellow R, ¾ oz. Janus red B, 1 oz. Janus blue R and ¼
oz. Janus grey B B in the dye-bath, and 4 lb. sumac extract and 1 lb. tartar
emetic in the fixing-bath.
Grey.—5 oz. Janus blue R, 3¼ oz. Janus grey B, 1½ oz. Janus yellow R and
¼ oz. Janus red B in the dye-bath, with 4 lb. sumach extract and 1 lb. tartar
emetic in the fixing-bath.
Nut Brown.—1 lb. Janus brown R, 8 oz. Janus yellow R and 1½ oz. Janus
blue B in the dye-bath, and 8 lb. sumac extract and 1 lb. tartar emetic in the
fixing-bath.
Walnut Brown.—3 lb. Janus brown B, 1 lb. Janus red B, 1 lb. Janus yellow
R, 1¼ oz. Janus green B in the dye-bath, with 8 lb. sumac extract and 1 lb.
tartar emetic in the fixing-bath.
Crimson.—2½ lb. Janus red B and 8 oz. Janus claret red B in the dye-bath,
with 8 lb. sumac extract and 1 lb. tartar emetic in the fixing-bath.
Dark Green.—1½ lb. Janus green B, 1½ lb. Janus yellow R and 8 oz. Janus
grey B B in the dye-bath, with 12 lb. sumac extract and 1¼ lb. tartar emetic
in the fixing-bath.
Chestnut Brown.—1 lb. Janus brown R and 1 lb. Janus yellow R in the dye-
bath, and 8 lb. sumac extract and 1 lb. tartar emetic in the fixing-bath.
sulphuric acid, and the working continued for a quarter of an hour, then the
bath is heated to 160° F., when the goods are lifted, rinsed and dried. In the
recipes the quantities of the dyes, sumac or tannin and tartar emetic are
given only, the other ingredients and processes are the same in all.
Dark Blue.—2¼ lb. Janus dark blue B and ¼ lb. Janus green B in the dye-
bath, and 16 lb. sumac extract and 2 lb. tartar emetic in the fixing-bath.
Blue Black.—3½ lb. Janus black I and ½ lb. Janus black II in the dye-bath,
and 16 lb. sumac extract and 2 lb. tartar emetic in the fixing-bath.
Dark Brown.—2½ lb. Janus brown B, 1 lb. Janus black I, 3½ oz. Janus
yellow G and 5 oz. Janus red B in the dye-bath, with 16 lb. sumac extract
and 2 lb. tartar emetic in the fixing-bath.
Drab.—1½ oz. Janus yellow R, ¾ oz. Janus red B, 1 oz. Janus blue R and ¼
oz. Janus grey B B in the dye-bath, and 4 lb. sumac extract and 1 lb. tartar
emetic in the fixing-bath.
Grey.—5 oz. Janus blue R, 3¼ oz. Janus grey B, 1½ oz. Janus yellow R and
¼ oz. Janus red B in the dye-bath, with 4 lb. sumach extract and 1 lb. tartar
emetic in the fixing-bath.
Nut Brown.—1 lb. Janus brown R, 8 oz. Janus yellow R and 1½ oz. Janus
blue B in the dye-bath, and 8 lb. sumac extract and 1 lb. tartar emetic in the
fixing-bath.
Walnut Brown.—3 lb. Janus brown B, 1 lb. Janus red B, 1 lb. Janus yellow
R, 1¼ oz. Janus green B in the dye-bath, with 8 lb. sumac extract and 1 lb.
tartar emetic in the fixing-bath.
Crimson.—2½ lb. Janus red B and 8 oz. Janus claret red B in the dye-bath,
with 8 lb. sumac extract and 1 lb. tartar emetic in the fixing-bath.
Dark Green.—1½ lb. Janus green B, 1½ lb. Janus yellow R and 8 oz. Janus
grey B B in the dye-bath, with 12 lb. sumac extract and 1¼ lb. tartar emetic
in the fixing-bath.
Chestnut Brown.—1 lb. Janus brown R and 1 lb. Janus yellow R in the dye-
bath, and 8 lb. sumac extract and 1 lb. tartar emetic in the fixing-bath.
Page 201
Before the introduction of the direct dyes the method usually followed, and,
indeed still used to a great extent, is that known as cross dyeing. The goods
were woven with dyed cotton threads of the required shade, and undyed
woollen threads. After weaving and cleansing the woollen part of the fabric
was dyed with acid dyes, such as Acid magenta, Scarlet R, Acid yellow, etc.
In such methods care has to be taken that the dyes used for dyeing the
cotton are such as stand acids, a by no means easy condition to fulfil at one
time. Many of the direct dyes are fast to acids and, therefore, lend
themselves more or less readily to cross dyeing. For details of the dyes for
cotton reference may be made to the sections on dyeing with the direct
colours, page 85, etc., while information as to methods of dyeing the wool
will be found in the companion volume to this on Dyeing of Woollen
Fabrics.
Shot Effects.—A pleasing kind of textile fabric which is now made, and is
a great favourite for ladies' dress goods, is where the cotton of a mixed
fabric is thrown up to form a figured design. It is possible to dye the two
fibres in different colours, and so produce a variety of shot effects. These
latter are so endless that it is impossible here to enumerate all that may be
produced. It will have to suffice to lay down the lines which may be
followed to the best advantage, and then give some recipes to illustrate the
remarks that have been made. The best plan for the production of shot
effects upon union fabrics is to take advantage of the property of certain
acid dyes which dye only the wool in an acid bath, and of many of the
direct colours which will only dye the cotton in an alkaline bath. The
process, working on these lines, becomes as follows: The wool is first dyed
in an acid bath with the addition of Glauber's salt and bisulphate of soda, or
sulphuric acid, the goods are then washed with water containing a little
ammonia to free them from the acid, and afterwards dyed with the direct
colour in an alkaline bath.
Fancy or the mode shades are obtained by combining suitable dye-stuffs.
If the cotton is to be dyed in light shades it is advantageous to dye on the
liquor at 65° to 80° F., with the addition of 3¼ oz. Glauber's salt, and from
20 to 40 grains borax per gallon water. The addition of an alkali is advisable
in order to neutralise any slight quantities of acid which may have remained
indeed still used to a great extent, is that known as cross dyeing. The goods
were woven with dyed cotton threads of the required shade, and undyed
woollen threads. After weaving and cleansing the woollen part of the fabric
was dyed with acid dyes, such as Acid magenta, Scarlet R, Acid yellow, etc.
In such methods care has to be taken that the dyes used for dyeing the
cotton are such as stand acids, a by no means easy condition to fulfil at one
time. Many of the direct dyes are fast to acids and, therefore, lend
themselves more or less readily to cross dyeing. For details of the dyes for
cotton reference may be made to the sections on dyeing with the direct
colours, page 85, etc., while information as to methods of dyeing the wool
will be found in the companion volume to this on Dyeing of Woollen
Fabrics.
Shot Effects.—A pleasing kind of textile fabric which is now made, and is
a great favourite for ladies' dress goods, is where the cotton of a mixed
fabric is thrown up to form a figured design. It is possible to dye the two
fibres in different colours, and so produce a variety of shot effects. These
latter are so endless that it is impossible here to enumerate all that may be
produced. It will have to suffice to lay down the lines which may be
followed to the best advantage, and then give some recipes to illustrate the
remarks that have been made. The best plan for the production of shot
effects upon union fabrics is to take advantage of the property of certain
acid dyes which dye only the wool in an acid bath, and of many of the
direct colours which will only dye the cotton in an alkaline bath. The
process, working on these lines, becomes as follows: The wool is first dyed
in an acid bath with the addition of Glauber's salt and bisulphate of soda, or
sulphuric acid, the goods are then washed with water containing a little
ammonia to free them from the acid, and afterwards dyed with the direct
colour in an alkaline bath.
Fancy or the mode shades are obtained by combining suitable dye-stuffs.
If the cotton is to be dyed in light shades it is advantageous to dye on the
liquor at 65° to 80° F., with the addition of 3¼ oz. Glauber's salt, and from
20 to 40 grains borax per gallon water. The addition of an alkali is advisable
in order to neutralise any slight quantities of acid which may have remained
Page 202
in the wool, and to prevent the dye-stuff from dyeing the cotton too deep a
shade.
Very light shades can also be done on the padding machine. The dye-stuffs
of Group II., which have been previously enumerated, do not stain the wool
at all, or only very slightly, and are, therefore, the most suitable. Less bright
effects can be produced by simply dyeing the goods in one bath. The wool
is first dyed at the boil with the respective wool dye-stuff in a neutral bath,
the steam is then shut off and the cotton dyed by adding the cotton dye-stuff
to the bath, and dyeing without again heating. By passing the goods through
cold water to which some sulphuric or acetic acid is added, the brightness
of most effects is greatly increased.
Gold and Green.—First bath, 1 lb. Cyanole extra, 7¼ oz. Acid green, 1½
oz. Orange G G, and 10 lb. bisulphate of soda; work at the boil for one
hour, then lift and rinse well. Second bath, 4 lb. Diamine orange G and 15
lb. Glauber's salt; work in the cold or at a lukewarm heat. Third bath, at
120° F., 4 oz. Chrysoidine and ¼ oz. Safranine.
Black and Blue.—First bath, 3½ lb. Naphthol black 3 B and 10 lb.
bisulphate of soda. Second bath, 2 lb. Diamine sky blue and 13 lb.
Glauber's salt. Third bath, 6½ oz. New Methylene blue N. Work as in the
last recipe.
Green and Claret.—First bath, 3½ lb. Naphthol red C and 10 lb. bisulphate
of soda. Second bath, 2 lb. Diamine sky blue F F, 1¼ lb. Thioflavine S, and
15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Gold Brown and Blue.—First bath, 2½ oz. orange E N Z, 1½ oz. Orange G
G, ¼ oz. Cyanole extra and 10 lb. bisulphate of soda. Second bath, 14 oz.
Diamine sky blue F F and 15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Dark Brown and Blue.—First bath, ½ lb. Orange G G, 1½ oz. Orange E N
Z, 1½ oz. Cyanole extra and 10 lb. bisulphate of soda. Second bath, 12 oz.
Diamine sky blue F F and 15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Black and Green Blue.—First bath, 3 lb. Orange G G, 1 lb. Brilliant
cochineal 4 R, 1 lb. Fast acid green B N and 10 lb. Glauber's salt. Second
bath, 1¾ lb. Diamine sky blue F F, 3¼ lb. Thioflavine S and 15 lb.
Glauber's salt.
shade.
Very light shades can also be done on the padding machine. The dye-stuffs
of Group II., which have been previously enumerated, do not stain the wool
at all, or only very slightly, and are, therefore, the most suitable. Less bright
effects can be produced by simply dyeing the goods in one bath. The wool
is first dyed at the boil with the respective wool dye-stuff in a neutral bath,
the steam is then shut off and the cotton dyed by adding the cotton dye-stuff
to the bath, and dyeing without again heating. By passing the goods through
cold water to which some sulphuric or acetic acid is added, the brightness
of most effects is greatly increased.
Gold and Green.—First bath, 1 lb. Cyanole extra, 7¼ oz. Acid green, 1½
oz. Orange G G, and 10 lb. bisulphate of soda; work at the boil for one
hour, then lift and rinse well. Second bath, 4 lb. Diamine orange G and 15
lb. Glauber's salt; work in the cold or at a lukewarm heat. Third bath, at
120° F., 4 oz. Chrysoidine and ¼ oz. Safranine.
Black and Blue.—First bath, 3½ lb. Naphthol black 3 B and 10 lb.
bisulphate of soda. Second bath, 2 lb. Diamine sky blue and 13 lb.
Glauber's salt. Third bath, 6½ oz. New Methylene blue N. Work as in the
last recipe.
Green and Claret.—First bath, 3½ lb. Naphthol red C and 10 lb. bisulphate
of soda. Second bath, 2 lb. Diamine sky blue F F, 1¼ lb. Thioflavine S, and
15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Gold Brown and Blue.—First bath, 2½ oz. orange E N Z, 1½ oz. Orange G
G, ¼ oz. Cyanole extra and 10 lb. bisulphate of soda. Second bath, 14 oz.
Diamine sky blue F F and 15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Dark Brown and Blue.—First bath, ½ lb. Orange G G, 1½ oz. Orange E N
Z, 1½ oz. Cyanole extra and 10 lb. bisulphate of soda. Second bath, 12 oz.
Diamine sky blue F F and 15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Black and Green Blue.—First bath, 3 lb. Orange G G, 1 lb. Brilliant
cochineal 4 R, 1 lb. Fast acid green B N and 10 lb. Glauber's salt. Second
bath, 1¾ lb. Diamine sky blue F F, 3¼ lb. Thioflavine S and 15 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Page 203
We may here note that in all the above recipes the second bath (for dying
the cotton) should be used cold or at lukewarm heat and as strong as
possible. It is not completely exhausted of colour, only about one-half going
on the fibre. If kept as a standing bath this feature should be borne in mind,
and less dye-stuff used in the dyeing of the second and following lots of
goods.
Blue and Gold Yellow.—3 lb. Diamine orange G, 13 oz. Naphthol blue G,
14½ oz. Formyl violet S 4 B and 15 lb. Glauber's salt. Work at just under
the boil.
Brown and Blue.—1 lb. Diamine steel blue L, 9½ oz. Diamine sky blue, 1
lb. Orange E N Z, 1 lb. Indian yellow G, 1¾ oz. Naphthol blue black and 15
lb. Glauber s salt. Work at 170° to 180° F.
In these two last recipes only one bath is used, all the dyes being added at
once. This is possible if care be taken that dye-stuffs of two kinds are used,
one or more which will dye wool and not cotton from neutral baths, and
those direct dyes which dye cotton better than wool. The temperature
should also be kept below the boil and carefully regulated as the operation
proceeds and the results begin to show themselves.
Grey and Orange.—First bath, 3 oz. Orange extra, 1¼ lb. Cyanole extra, 1
lb. Azo red A and 10 lb. bisulphate of soda. Second bath, 5 oz. Diamine
orange D C and 3 oz. Diamine fast yellow B.
Green and Red.—First bath, 2 lb. Croceine A Z, and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Second bath, 1 lb. Diamine sky blue F F, ½ lb. Thioflavine S, and 15 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Brown and Violet.—First bath, ¾ lb. Orange extra, ¾ lb. Cyanole extra, and
10 lb. bisulphate of soda. Second bath, 5 oz. Diamine brilliant blue G, and
15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Black and Yellow.—First bath, 7 lb. Naphthol black B, ½ lb. Fast yellow S,
and 10 lb. bisulphate of soda. Second bath 3 lb. Diamine fast yellow A, and
15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Black and Pink.—Black as above. Pink with Diamine rose B D (see above).
the cotton) should be used cold or at lukewarm heat and as strong as
possible. It is not completely exhausted of colour, only about one-half going
on the fibre. If kept as a standing bath this feature should be borne in mind,
and less dye-stuff used in the dyeing of the second and following lots of
goods.
Blue and Gold Yellow.—3 lb. Diamine orange G, 13 oz. Naphthol blue G,
14½ oz. Formyl violet S 4 B and 15 lb. Glauber's salt. Work at just under
the boil.
Brown and Blue.—1 lb. Diamine steel blue L, 9½ oz. Diamine sky blue, 1
lb. Orange E N Z, 1 lb. Indian yellow G, 1¾ oz. Naphthol blue black and 15
lb. Glauber s salt. Work at 170° to 180° F.
In these two last recipes only one bath is used, all the dyes being added at
once. This is possible if care be taken that dye-stuffs of two kinds are used,
one or more which will dye wool and not cotton from neutral baths, and
those direct dyes which dye cotton better than wool. The temperature
should also be kept below the boil and carefully regulated as the operation
proceeds and the results begin to show themselves.
Grey and Orange.—First bath, 3 oz. Orange extra, 1¼ lb. Cyanole extra, 1
lb. Azo red A and 10 lb. bisulphate of soda. Second bath, 5 oz. Diamine
orange D C and 3 oz. Diamine fast yellow B.
Green and Red.—First bath, 2 lb. Croceine A Z, and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Second bath, 1 lb. Diamine sky blue F F, ½ lb. Thioflavine S, and 15 lb.
Glauber's salt.
Brown and Violet.—First bath, ¾ lb. Orange extra, ¾ lb. Cyanole extra, and
10 lb. bisulphate of soda. Second bath, 5 oz. Diamine brilliant blue G, and
15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Black and Yellow.—First bath, 7 lb. Naphthol black B, ½ lb. Fast yellow S,
and 10 lb. bisulphate of soda. Second bath 3 lb. Diamine fast yellow A, and
15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Black and Pink.—Black as above. Pink with Diamine rose B D (see above).
Page 204
Green and Buff.—First bath, ¼ lb. Orange extra, ¾ oz. Fast yellow S, and
10 lb. bisulphate of soda. Second bath, ¾ lb. Diamine sky blue F F, ½ lb.
Thioflavine S, and 15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Orange and Violet.—First bath, 9 oz. Orange extra, and 10 lb. bisulphate of
soda. Second bath, ¾ lb. Diamine violet N, and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Black and Blue.—First bath, Naphthol black as given above. Second bath,
Diamine sky blue as given above.
Black and Yellow.—Add first 1 lb. Wool black 6 B, and 10 lb. Glauber's
salt, then, when the wool has been dyed, add 2 lb. Curcumine S to dye the
cotton in the same bath.
Green and Red.—Dye the wool by using 3 lb. Guinea green B, ¼ lb.
Curcumeine extra, and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then add to the bath ¾ lb. Erika
B N, and ¾ lb. Congo Corinth G.
Orange and Blue.—Dye the wool first with 1¼ lb. Mandarine G, 2 oz.
Wool black 6 B, and 10 lb. Glauber's salt; then the cotton with 2 lb.
Columbia blue G.
Blue and Orange.—Dye the wool first with ¾ lb. Guinea violet B, ¾ lb.
Guinea green B, and 10 lb. Glauber's salt; then dye the cotton with 2 lb.
Mikado orange 4 R O.
Green and Orange.—Dye the wool with 3 lb. Guinea green B, ¼ lb.
Curcumeine extra, and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then dye the cotton in the same
bath with 1½ lb. Mikado orange 4 R O.
10 lb. bisulphate of soda. Second bath, ¾ lb. Diamine sky blue F F, ½ lb.
Thioflavine S, and 15 lb. Glauber's salt.
Orange and Violet.—First bath, 9 oz. Orange extra, and 10 lb. bisulphate of
soda. Second bath, ¾ lb. Diamine violet N, and 10 lb. Glauber's salt.
Black and Blue.—First bath, Naphthol black as given above. Second bath,
Diamine sky blue as given above.
Black and Yellow.—Add first 1 lb. Wool black 6 B, and 10 lb. Glauber's
salt, then, when the wool has been dyed, add 2 lb. Curcumine S to dye the
cotton in the same bath.
Green and Red.—Dye the wool by using 3 lb. Guinea green B, ¼ lb.
Curcumeine extra, and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then add to the bath ¾ lb. Erika
B N, and ¾ lb. Congo Corinth G.
Orange and Blue.—Dye the wool first with 1¼ lb. Mandarine G, 2 oz.
Wool black 6 B, and 10 lb. Glauber's salt; then the cotton with 2 lb.
Columbia blue G.
Blue and Orange.—Dye the wool first with ¾ lb. Guinea violet B, ¾ lb.
Guinea green B, and 10 lb. Glauber's salt; then dye the cotton with 2 lb.
Mikado orange 4 R O.
Green and Orange.—Dye the wool with 3 lb. Guinea green B, ¼ lb.
Curcumeine extra, and 10 lb. Glauber's salt, then dye the cotton in the same
bath with 1½ lb. Mikado orange 4 R O.
Page 205
CHAPTER VI.
DYEING HALF SILK (COTTON-SILK, SATIN) FABRICS.
The direct dyes of the Diamine, Benzo and Congo types have been of late
years increasingly used for dyeing satin (silk and cotton), and they have
quite displaced the old methods of dyeing this class of fabrics, which
consisted in first dyeing the silk with an acid dye and then dyeing the cotton
with a basic dye. For details of the method of applying acid dyes to silk
reference may be made to Mr. G.H. Hurst's book on Silk Dyeing.
Most of the direct colours are exceedingly well adapted for this purpose,
some under certain conditions possess the property of dyeing the cotton a
deeper shade than the silk, which is an advantage rather than otherwise.
The dyeing of goods composed of silk and cotton is generally done in
winch dye-vats, in some cases also on the jigger.
METHOD OF DYEING.
The direct colours are as a rule dyed in a soap-bath with addition of
phosphate of soda, Glauber's salt or common salt and a little soda.
The addition of these salts effects a better exhaustion of the baths; they are
therefore principally used for dark and full shades, whilst pale shades are
dyed with the addition of soap only or in combination with phosphate of
soda. Dark or pale shades may thus be produced at will by selecting the
proper additions, but the fact should not be overlooked that the greater
exhaustion of the baths not only increases the depth of shade of the cotton
but also causes the silk to absorb more dye-stuff. Too large a proportion of
salt would cause the dye-stuffs to go on the fibre too quickly and thus make
the dyeing liable to turn out uneven.
A large proportion of soap counteracts the effects of the salts, causing the
dye-stuff to go on less quickly and tending to leave the silk lighter than the
cotton, in some cases even almost white, a property which is valuable in
DYEING HALF SILK (COTTON-SILK, SATIN) FABRICS.
The direct dyes of the Diamine, Benzo and Congo types have been of late
years increasingly used for dyeing satin (silk and cotton), and they have
quite displaced the old methods of dyeing this class of fabrics, which
consisted in first dyeing the silk with an acid dye and then dyeing the cotton
with a basic dye. For details of the method of applying acid dyes to silk
reference may be made to Mr. G.H. Hurst's book on Silk Dyeing.
Most of the direct colours are exceedingly well adapted for this purpose,
some under certain conditions possess the property of dyeing the cotton a
deeper shade than the silk, which is an advantage rather than otherwise.
The dyeing of goods composed of silk and cotton is generally done in
winch dye-vats, in some cases also on the jigger.
METHOD OF DYEING.
The direct colours are as a rule dyed in a soap-bath with addition of
phosphate of soda, Glauber's salt or common salt and a little soda.
The addition of these salts effects a better exhaustion of the baths; they are
therefore principally used for dark and full shades, whilst pale shades are
dyed with the addition of soap only or in combination with phosphate of
soda. Dark or pale shades may thus be produced at will by selecting the
proper additions, but the fact should not be overlooked that the greater
exhaustion of the baths not only increases the depth of shade of the cotton
but also causes the silk to absorb more dye-stuff. Too large a proportion of
salt would cause the dye-stuffs to go on the fibre too quickly and thus make
the dyeing liable to turn out uneven.
A large proportion of soap counteracts the effects of the salts, causing the
dye-stuff to go on less quickly and tending to leave the silk lighter than the
cotton, in some cases even almost white, a property which is valuable in
Page 206
many cases, especially as enabling the silk and cotton to be dyed in
different colours to obtain shot effects.
It is thus obvious that a general method applicable in all cases cannot be
given; it will vary according to the effect desired, and partly also depend on
the material to be dyed.
The following particulars may serve as a guide for the first bath:—
For pale shades each 10 gallons dye-liquor should contain 3¼ to 6½ oz.
soap and 4 to 7 drs. soda or 3¼ to 6½ oz. soap, 4 to 5½ drs. soda and 3¼ to
6½ oz. phosphate of soda.
For medium and dark shades each 10 gallons dye-liquor may contain 3¼ to
6½ oz. soap, 4 to 7 drs. soda, 3¼ to 6½ oz. phosphate of soda and 6½ to 13
oz. cryst. Glauber's salt.
For two coloured effects or dyeings, in which the silk is intended to remain
as pale as possible or even white, each 10 gallons dye-liquor may contain
4¾ to 8 oz. soap, 4 to 6 drs. soda, 3¼ to 8 oz. phosphate of soda and 4¾ to
9½ oz. cryst. Glauber's salt.
The temperature of the dye-baths is generally 175° to 195° F.; in practical
dyeing it is usual to boil up the fully charged dye-bath, shut off the steam,
enter the goods and dye for about three-quarters of an hour.
For obtaining level dyeings in pale shades it is advisable not to enter the
goods too hot, but to raise the temperature gradually. Raising the
temperature, or dyeing for some time at the boil will deepen the shade of
the cotton, but at the same time will have the same effect on the silk which
may sometimes be an advantage when dyeing dark shades.
As a complete exhaustion of the baths does not take place, especially when
dyeing dark shades, it is advantageous, nay, even imperative, to preserve the
baths for further use, they are then replenished with only about three-
fourths of the quantities of dye-stuffs used for the first bath, of the soap
only about one fourth, of Glauber's salt, soda and phosphate of soda only
about one-fifth, of the first quantities are necessary.
different colours to obtain shot effects.
It is thus obvious that a general method applicable in all cases cannot be
given; it will vary according to the effect desired, and partly also depend on
the material to be dyed.
The following particulars may serve as a guide for the first bath:—
For pale shades each 10 gallons dye-liquor should contain 3¼ to 6½ oz.
soap and 4 to 7 drs. soda or 3¼ to 6½ oz. soap, 4 to 5½ drs. soda and 3¼ to
6½ oz. phosphate of soda.
For medium and dark shades each 10 gallons dye-liquor may contain 3¼ to
6½ oz. soap, 4 to 7 drs. soda, 3¼ to 6½ oz. phosphate of soda and 6½ to 13
oz. cryst. Glauber's salt.
For two coloured effects or dyeings, in which the silk is intended to remain
as pale as possible or even white, each 10 gallons dye-liquor may contain
4¾ to 8 oz. soap, 4 to 6 drs. soda, 3¼ to 8 oz. phosphate of soda and 4¾ to
9½ oz. cryst. Glauber's salt.
The temperature of the dye-baths is generally 175° to 195° F.; in practical
dyeing it is usual to boil up the fully charged dye-bath, shut off the steam,
enter the goods and dye for about three-quarters of an hour.
For obtaining level dyeings in pale shades it is advisable not to enter the
goods too hot, but to raise the temperature gradually. Raising the
temperature, or dyeing for some time at the boil will deepen the shade of
the cotton, but at the same time will have the same effect on the silk which
may sometimes be an advantage when dyeing dark shades.
As a complete exhaustion of the baths does not take place, especially when
dyeing dark shades, it is advantageous, nay, even imperative, to preserve the
baths for further use, they are then replenished with only about three-
fourths of the quantities of dye-stuffs used for the first bath, of the soap
only about one fourth, of Glauber's salt, soda and phosphate of soda only
about one-fifth, of the first quantities are necessary.
Page 207
The first bath should be prepared with condensed water. If none is at hand
ordinary water should be boiled up with soda and soap and the scum
removed. Clear soap baths are absolutely necessary for the production of
pure shades and clean pieces.
After dyeing, the pieces must be very well rinsed, and the colour raised or
brightened with 1 pint of acetic acid in 10 gallons of water.
Many of the Diamine and Titan colours being very fast to acids, but few of
them will be affected by this treatment.
In the following tables are given those Diamine, etc., colours especially
adapted for the dyeing of goods composed of silk and cotton, divided into
three groups according to their relation to silk and cotton:—
1. Dye-stuffs possessing a great affinity to cotton and tinting the silk not at
all or only very little. To this class belong Chicago blues, Benzo blues,
Diamine fast yellow A, Diamine orange G G, Diamine orange D C,
Diamine blue B B, Diamine blue 3 B, Diamine sky blue F F, Diamine
brilliant blue G, Diamineral blue E, Diamine black B, Mikado browns,
Mikado oranges, Mikado yellows.
2. Dye-stuffs producing on cotton and silk the same or nearly the same
shade but covering the cotton better than the silk. These are Thioflavine S,
Diamine yellow N, Diamine gold, Diamine fast yellow B, Diamine orange
B, Diamine grey G, Diamine rose B D, Diamine scarlet S, Diamine scarlet
B, Diamine scarlet 3 B, Diamine red 5 B, Diamine fast red F, Diamine
Bordeaux B, Diamine Bordeaux S, Diamine violet N, Oxydiamine violet B,
Diamine blue R W, Diamine black H W, Diamine steel blue L, Diamine
dark blue B, Union black S, Oxydiamine black D, Diaminogene extra,
Diaminogene B, Diamine brown M, Diamine brown 3 G, Diamine green B,
Diamine green G.
3. Dye-stuffs producing on cotton more or less different shades than on silk.
This group comprises Diamine blue C B, Diamine blue B G, Diamine blue
B X, Diamine azo blue 2 R, Diamine blue 3 R, Diamine blue black E,
Diamine black R O, Oxydiamine black S O O O, Diamine brown V,
Diamine brown B, Diamine bronze G. Cotton brown N produces on silk
darker shades than on cotton.
ordinary water should be boiled up with soda and soap and the scum
removed. Clear soap baths are absolutely necessary for the production of
pure shades and clean pieces.
After dyeing, the pieces must be very well rinsed, and the colour raised or
brightened with 1 pint of acetic acid in 10 gallons of water.
Many of the Diamine and Titan colours being very fast to acids, but few of
them will be affected by this treatment.
In the following tables are given those Diamine, etc., colours especially
adapted for the dyeing of goods composed of silk and cotton, divided into
three groups according to their relation to silk and cotton:—
1. Dye-stuffs possessing a great affinity to cotton and tinting the silk not at
all or only very little. To this class belong Chicago blues, Benzo blues,
Diamine fast yellow A, Diamine orange G G, Diamine orange D C,
Diamine blue B B, Diamine blue 3 B, Diamine sky blue F F, Diamine
brilliant blue G, Diamineral blue E, Diamine black B, Mikado browns,
Mikado oranges, Mikado yellows.
2. Dye-stuffs producing on cotton and silk the same or nearly the same
shade but covering the cotton better than the silk. These are Thioflavine S,
Diamine yellow N, Diamine gold, Diamine fast yellow B, Diamine orange
B, Diamine grey G, Diamine rose B D, Diamine scarlet S, Diamine scarlet
B, Diamine scarlet 3 B, Diamine red 5 B, Diamine fast red F, Diamine
Bordeaux B, Diamine Bordeaux S, Diamine violet N, Oxydiamine violet B,
Diamine blue R W, Diamine black H W, Diamine steel blue L, Diamine
dark blue B, Union black S, Oxydiamine black D, Diaminogene extra,
Diaminogene B, Diamine brown M, Diamine brown 3 G, Diamine green B,
Diamine green G.
3. Dye-stuffs producing on cotton more or less different shades than on silk.
This group comprises Diamine blue C B, Diamine blue B G, Diamine blue
B X, Diamine azo blue 2 R, Diamine blue 3 R, Diamine blue black E,
Diamine black R O, Oxydiamine black S O O O, Diamine brown V,
Diamine brown B, Diamine bronze G. Cotton brown N produces on silk
darker shades than on cotton.
Page 208
Of course this classification cannot be taken as absolutely correct, as by
raising or lowering the temperature during the dyeing process or by a larger
or smaller addition of soap or Glauber's salt (common salt, phosphate of
soda), the dye-stuffs are more or less influenced in one or the other
direction. Diamine violet N, for instance, when dyed with an increased
addition of soap would dye the cotton somewhat lighter, but at the same
time leave the silk perfectly white.
Topping with Basic and Acid Dye-stuffs.—As in very few cases only the
desired shade can be obtained in the first instance by bottoming with direct
colours, topping generally has to be resorted to. This is best done with basic
dyes, in some cases also with acid dye-stuffs in cold or tepid bath with
addition of sulphuric acid, hydrochloric or acetic acid. The use of acid dye-
stuffs is restricted to cases where the silk alone is to be shaded. In most
cases basic dye-stuffs are made use of, which dye silk and cotton the same
shade and deepen the shade of the cotton if the latter has a sufficiently good
bottom, thus giving the goods a better and fuller appearance.
It is not advisable to employ basic and acid dye-stuffs in the same bath
except when the quantities of either class are very small. Should it be
necessary to dye with large quantities of both classes, the acid dye-stuffs are
first dyed in a tepid acid bath and then the goods are topped with the basic
dye-stuffs in a fresh cold bath with the addition of a little hydrochloric or
acetic acid.
Of the basic dye-stuffs which are available, the following are the most
suitable for topping: New methylene blue N, and other brands; New blue D
and other brands; Cresyl blue, Methylindone B and R, Metaphenylene blue,
Indazine; the various brands of Brilliant green, Solid green and Malachite
green, Capri green, Cresyl violet, Thioflavine T, New phosphine G, Tannin
orange R, and the various brands of Bismarck brown; Safranine, Magenta
all brands, Tannin heliotrope, all brands of Neutral violet, Methyl violet.
Of the acid dye-stuffs, the following are good for topping or shading the
silk: Cyanole extra, Indigo blue N, Indigo blue S G N, and the various
brands of Water blue, Soluble blue, Solid blue, and Induline; the various
brands of Acid green and Fast acid green; Indian yellow G and R, Naphthol
yellow S, Tropæoline O and O O, and the various brands of Milling yellow
raising or lowering the temperature during the dyeing process or by a larger
or smaller addition of soap or Glauber's salt (common salt, phosphate of
soda), the dye-stuffs are more or less influenced in one or the other
direction. Diamine violet N, for instance, when dyed with an increased
addition of soap would dye the cotton somewhat lighter, but at the same
time leave the silk perfectly white.
Topping with Basic and Acid Dye-stuffs.—As in very few cases only the
desired shade can be obtained in the first instance by bottoming with direct
colours, topping generally has to be resorted to. This is best done with basic
dyes, in some cases also with acid dye-stuffs in cold or tepid bath with
addition of sulphuric acid, hydrochloric or acetic acid. The use of acid dye-
stuffs is restricted to cases where the silk alone is to be shaded. In most
cases basic dye-stuffs are made use of, which dye silk and cotton the same
shade and deepen the shade of the cotton if the latter has a sufficiently good
bottom, thus giving the goods a better and fuller appearance.
It is not advisable to employ basic and acid dye-stuffs in the same bath
except when the quantities of either class are very small. Should it be
necessary to dye with large quantities of both classes, the acid dye-stuffs are
first dyed in a tepid acid bath and then the goods are topped with the basic
dye-stuffs in a fresh cold bath with the addition of a little hydrochloric or
acetic acid.
Of the basic dye-stuffs which are available, the following are the most
suitable for topping: New methylene blue N, and other brands; New blue D
and other brands; Cresyl blue, Methylindone B and R, Metaphenylene blue,
Indazine; the various brands of Brilliant green, Solid green and Malachite
green, Capri green, Cresyl violet, Thioflavine T, New phosphine G, Tannin
orange R, and the various brands of Bismarck brown; Safranine, Magenta
all brands, Tannin heliotrope, all brands of Neutral violet, Methyl violet.
Of the acid dye-stuffs, the following are good for topping or shading the
silk: Cyanole extra, Indigo blue N, Indigo blue S G N, and the various
brands of Water blue, Soluble blue, Solid blue, and Induline; the various
brands of Acid green and Fast acid green; Indian yellow G and R, Naphthol
yellow S, Tropæoline O and O O, and the various brands of Milling yellow
Page 209
and Orange; Azo red A, Azo rubine A, Archil substitute N, Azo orseille B B,
Brilliant orseille C, and the various brands of Eosine, Erythrosine, Rose
bengale, Rhodamine, Brilliant croceine and Brilliant scarlet; the various
brands of Formyl violet and Acid violet; Aniline grey B and Nigrosine,
soluble in water.
Bright Yellow.—Use 2 lb. Thioflavine S.
Deep Orange Yellow.—This can be dyed by using 2 lb. Diamine yellow N.
Gold Yellow.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine gold. Some care must be taken with
this, especially not to dye too hot or the silk will be dyed deeper than the
cotton.
Deep Orange.—Use 2 lb. Diamine orange B.
Bright Rose.—Use 2 lb. Diamine Rose B D. Do not work too high,
especially when dyeing light rose shades, as then the silk is apt to take up
too much colour.
Scarlet.—Use in the dye-bath 2 lb. Diamine scarlet H S. The heat of the
dye-bath should not be allowed to exceed 160° to 170° F., or there is a risk
of the shades becoming somewhat duller.
Crimson.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine fast red F.
Violet.—Use 2 lb. Oxydiamine violet B.
Bright Blue.—A fine shade is dyed with 2 lb. Diamine blue R W.
Dark Green.—Use 2 lb. Diamine black H W. This gives a fine shade of
bluish green.
Gold Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine brown 3 G at a low heat, from 150°
to 160° F., otherwise the silk takes up too much colour.
Dark Green.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine green B.
Deep Rose.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine red 10 B.
Brilliant Yellow.—Dye with 1½ lb. Mikado golden yellow 8 G; then enter
into a cold bath which contains 1½ per cent. Auramine II. This gives a very
Brilliant orseille C, and the various brands of Eosine, Erythrosine, Rose
bengale, Rhodamine, Brilliant croceine and Brilliant scarlet; the various
brands of Formyl violet and Acid violet; Aniline grey B and Nigrosine,
soluble in water.
Bright Yellow.—Use 2 lb. Thioflavine S.
Deep Orange Yellow.—This can be dyed by using 2 lb. Diamine yellow N.
Gold Yellow.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine gold. Some care must be taken with
this, especially not to dye too hot or the silk will be dyed deeper than the
cotton.
Deep Orange.—Use 2 lb. Diamine orange B.
Bright Rose.—Use 2 lb. Diamine Rose B D. Do not work too high,
especially when dyeing light rose shades, as then the silk is apt to take up
too much colour.
Scarlet.—Use in the dye-bath 2 lb. Diamine scarlet H S. The heat of the
dye-bath should not be allowed to exceed 160° to 170° F., or there is a risk
of the shades becoming somewhat duller.
Crimson.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine fast red F.
Violet.—Use 2 lb. Oxydiamine violet B.
Bright Blue.—A fine shade is dyed with 2 lb. Diamine blue R W.
Dark Green.—Use 2 lb. Diamine black H W. This gives a fine shade of
bluish green.
Gold Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine brown 3 G at a low heat, from 150°
to 160° F., otherwise the silk takes up too much colour.
Dark Green.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine green B.
Deep Rose.—Dye with 2 lb. Diamine red 10 B.
Brilliant Yellow.—Dye with 1½ lb. Mikado golden yellow 8 G; then enter
into a cold bath which contains 1½ per cent. Auramine II. This gives a very
Page 210
bright shade of yellow.
Dark Brown.—Dye a bottom with 2 lb. Mikado brown 3 G O, and then top
with 3 lb. Bismarck brown and ½ lb. Capri blue G O N.
Crimson.—Dye with 2 lb. Mikado orange 5 R O and 2 lb. Hessian purple
N.
Sage Green.—Dye a bottom with 2 lb. Mikado yellow G, 14 oz. Eboli
green T and 3 oz. Mikado brown M, then top in a fresh cold bath with ½ lb.
Auramine II and ½ oz. Acridine Orange N 0.
Leaf Green.—Dye a bottom with 3 lb. Mikado golden yellow 8 G and 1 lb.
Eboli blue B; then top with 1½ lb. Capri green 2 G in a cold bath.
Deep Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Mikado orange 3 R O, 3 lb. Hessian grey S
and 1 lb. Hessian brown 2 B N; then top with 7 oz. Azine green T 0 and 2¼
lb. Acridine orange N 0.
Dark Cream.—Bottom with 1 oz. Diamine orange G; then top in a fresh
warm bath with 1 oz. Orange G G, ½ oz. Indian yellow R, 5 lb. Glauber's
salt and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Brilliant Violet.—Give a bottom with 1 lb. Diamine violet N; then top in a
fresh warm bath with 4 oz. Methyl violet B and 2 oz. Rhodamine.
Slate.—Bottom in a hot bath with 6 oz. Diamine dark blue B and 1½ oz.
Diamine brown M; then top in a fresh bath at 170° F. with 4 oz. Aniline
grey B, 1 oz. Cyanole extra, 5 lb. Glauber's salt and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Black Brown.—Give a bottom with 2 lb. Cotton brown A, 1 lb. Diamine
gold and 3½ lb. Oxydiamine black S O O O; then top in a fresh bath at 120°
F. with 4 oz. New methylene blue N, 1 oz. Safranine and ½ oz. Indian
yellow G.
Bright Violet.—Use ½ lb. Oxydiamine violet B and ¾ oz. Diamine dark
blue B; top after dyeing with ½ oz. Safranine, ¼ oz. Methylindone B and ¼
oz. Cyanole extra.
Drab.—Dye with 6 oz. Diamine orange G, 1 lb. Diamine bronze G and ¾
lb. Diamine brown M, topping afterwards in a bath of ¼ oz. Aniline grey B
Dark Brown.—Dye a bottom with 2 lb. Mikado brown 3 G O, and then top
with 3 lb. Bismarck brown and ½ lb. Capri blue G O N.
Crimson.—Dye with 2 lb. Mikado orange 5 R O and 2 lb. Hessian purple
N.
Sage Green.—Dye a bottom with 2 lb. Mikado yellow G, 14 oz. Eboli
green T and 3 oz. Mikado brown M, then top in a fresh cold bath with ½ lb.
Auramine II and ½ oz. Acridine Orange N 0.
Leaf Green.—Dye a bottom with 3 lb. Mikado golden yellow 8 G and 1 lb.
Eboli blue B; then top with 1½ lb. Capri green 2 G in a cold bath.
Deep Brown.—Dye with 2 lb. Mikado orange 3 R O, 3 lb. Hessian grey S
and 1 lb. Hessian brown 2 B N; then top with 7 oz. Azine green T 0 and 2¼
lb. Acridine orange N 0.
Dark Cream.—Bottom with 1 oz. Diamine orange G; then top in a fresh
warm bath with 1 oz. Orange G G, ½ oz. Indian yellow R, 5 lb. Glauber's
salt and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Brilliant Violet.—Give a bottom with 1 lb. Diamine violet N; then top in a
fresh warm bath with 4 oz. Methyl violet B and 2 oz. Rhodamine.
Slate.—Bottom in a hot bath with 6 oz. Diamine dark blue B and 1½ oz.
Diamine brown M; then top in a fresh bath at 170° F. with 4 oz. Aniline
grey B, 1 oz. Cyanole extra, 5 lb. Glauber's salt and 1 lb. acetic acid.
Black Brown.—Give a bottom with 2 lb. Cotton brown A, 1 lb. Diamine
gold and 3½ lb. Oxydiamine black S O O O; then top in a fresh bath at 120°
F. with 4 oz. New methylene blue N, 1 oz. Safranine and ½ oz. Indian
yellow G.
Bright Violet.—Use ½ lb. Oxydiamine violet B and ¾ oz. Diamine dark
blue B; top after dyeing with ½ oz. Safranine, ¼ oz. Methylindone B and ¼
oz. Cyanole extra.
Drab.—Dye with 6 oz. Diamine orange G, 1 lb. Diamine bronze G and ¾
lb. Diamine brown M, topping afterwards in a bath of ¼ oz. Aniline grey B
Page 211
and ¼ oz. Bismarck brown F F.
Leaf Green.—Dye with ½ lb. Diamine black H W, and 1 lb. Diamine fast
yellow B; top with ¼ oz. Brilliant green, ¼ oz. Indian yellow R, ½ oz.
Thioflavine T and ½ oz. Cyanole extra.
Dark Crimson.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine Bordeaux S, ¾ lb.
Diamine orange D C and 1½ lb. Diamine brown V, topping with 1 oz.
Magenta and ½ oz. Formyl violet S 4 B.
Turquoise Blue.—Use to dye the ground, 6 oz. Diamine sky blue F F and ½
oz. Diamine fast yellow A; top with 1½ oz. Cyanole extra and ¼ oz.
Brilliant green.
Dark Grey.—Dye with ½ oz. Diamine grey G, and 1½ oz. Diamine brown
M; top with ¼ oz. Orange extra and 1 oz. Cyanole extra.
Brilliant Orange.—Dye with 1 lb. Mikado orange R O, and top with 6 oz.
Acridine orange N O and 12 oz. Auramine I I.
Brown.—Dye a bottom colour with 3 lb. Mikado brown M, and top with 2
lb. Bismarck brown and 6 oz. Cresyl fast violet 2 R N.
Deep Crimson.—Dye with 1 lb. Columbia black R and top with 6 oz.
Magenta.
Pale Sea Green.—Use in the dye-bath ½ oz. Chrysophenine G, 1½ oz.
Chicago blue 6 B and 1½ oz. Alkali blue 6 B.
Bright Crimson.—Dye with 3 lb. Congo Corinth and top with 1 lb.
Magenta.
Dark Russian Green.—Dye with 3 lb. Columbia black B; then top with 1 lb.
Malachite green.
Gold Drab.—Dye with 5 oz. Columbia black, and top with 5 oz.
Chrysoidine R.
Bright Olive Yellow.—Dye with 1½ lb. Diamine gold, 1½ lb. Diamine fast
yellow A and ¾ lb. Diamine bronze G; top with ½ lb. Thioflavine T and ¼
lb. Chrysoidine.
Leaf Green.—Dye with ½ lb. Diamine black H W, and 1 lb. Diamine fast
yellow B; top with ¼ oz. Brilliant green, ¼ oz. Indian yellow R, ½ oz.
Thioflavine T and ½ oz. Cyanole extra.
Dark Crimson.—Use in the dye-bath 3 lb. Diamine Bordeaux S, ¾ lb.
Diamine orange D C and 1½ lb. Diamine brown V, topping with 1 oz.
Magenta and ½ oz. Formyl violet S 4 B.
Turquoise Blue.—Use to dye the ground, 6 oz. Diamine sky blue F F and ½
oz. Diamine fast yellow A; top with 1½ oz. Cyanole extra and ¼ oz.
Brilliant green.
Dark Grey.—Dye with ½ oz. Diamine grey G, and 1½ oz. Diamine brown
M; top with ¼ oz. Orange extra and 1 oz. Cyanole extra.
Brilliant Orange.—Dye with 1 lb. Mikado orange R O, and top with 6 oz.
Acridine orange N O and 12 oz. Auramine I I.
Brown.—Dye a bottom colour with 3 lb. Mikado brown M, and top with 2
lb. Bismarck brown and 6 oz. Cresyl fast violet 2 R N.
Deep Crimson.—Dye with 1 lb. Columbia black R and top with 6 oz.
Magenta.
Pale Sea Green.—Use in the dye-bath ½ oz. Chrysophenine G, 1½ oz.
Chicago blue 6 B and 1½ oz. Alkali blue 6 B.
Bright Crimson.—Dye with 3 lb. Congo Corinth and top with 1 lb.
Magenta.
Dark Russian Green.—Dye with 3 lb. Columbia black B; then top with 1 lb.
Malachite green.
Gold Drab.—Dye with 5 oz. Columbia black, and top with 5 oz.
Chrysoidine R.
Bright Olive Yellow.—Dye with 1½ lb. Diamine gold, 1½ lb. Diamine fast
yellow A and ¾ lb. Diamine bronze G; top with ½ lb. Thioflavine T and ¼
lb. Chrysoidine.
Page 212
Moss Brown.—Dye with 1 oz. Diamine brown M, 6 oz. Diamine fast
yellow A, 6 oz. Diamine bronze G, topping with 1 oz. new Methylene blue
N and 4 oz. Orange G G.
Dark Sea Green—Dye a bottom with 9 oz. Diamine black B and 4½ oz.
Diamine fast yellow B, then top with 2 oz. New methylene blue M and 2
oz. New phosphine G.
Old Gold.—Dye a ground with ½ lb. Diamine gold, 1¼ lb. Diamine fast
yellow A, and 6 oz. Diamine bronze G, topping with 8 oz. Thioflavine T, 1
oz. Indian yellow R and 1 oz. Brilliant green.
Cornflower Blue.—Dye the ground with 2½ lb. Diamine azo blue 2 B, 1½
oz. Alkali blue 3 B, ½ lb. Oxydiamine black S O O O, and top with 1 oz.
Metaphenylene blue B, 2 oz. New methylene blue R and 1 oz. Indigo blue
N.
Slate.—Dye with 7 oz. Diamine dark blue B and 1 oz. Diamine brown M;
top with 1 oz. Aniline grey B and 1 oz. Cyanole extra.
Pale Drab.—Dye the ground with 1 oz. Diamine orange G C, ¾ oz.
Diamine bronze G and ½ oz. Diamine brown M; top with ¾ oz. New
methylene blue N, 1 oz. Bismarck brown and 1 oz. Cyanole extra.
Deep Leaf Green.—Dye a ground colour with 1¼ lb. Diamine bronze G,
1½ lb. Diamine fast yellow A and 1½ lb. Diamine black H W; the topping
bath is made with ½ lb. Brilliant green, ½ lb. Chrysoidine and ¼ lb. New
methylene blue N.
Maroon.—Dye with 3 lb. Diamine Bordeaux S, ½ lb. Diamine orange D C
and ½ lb. Diamine brown V; top with ½ lb. Magenta and ¼ lb. Formyl
violet S 4 B.
Heliotrope.—Dye with 1 lb. Heliotrope 2 B.
Lilac Rose.—Dye with 8 lb. Columbia black R and 1 lb. Alkali blue B; after
dyeing pass through a weak acetic acid bath, then wash well.
Pea Green.—Dye with 2 lb. Chrysophenine, 1 lb. Chicago blue 6 B and 1
lb. Alkali blue 6 B; pass, after dyeing, through a weak acetic acid bath, then
wash well.
yellow A, 6 oz. Diamine bronze G, topping with 1 oz. new Methylene blue
N and 4 oz. Orange G G.
Dark Sea Green—Dye a bottom with 9 oz. Diamine black B and 4½ oz.
Diamine fast yellow B, then top with 2 oz. New methylene blue M and 2
oz. New phosphine G.
Old Gold.—Dye a ground with ½ lb. Diamine gold, 1¼ lb. Diamine fast
yellow A, and 6 oz. Diamine bronze G, topping with 8 oz. Thioflavine T, 1
oz. Indian yellow R and 1 oz. Brilliant green.
Cornflower Blue.—Dye the ground with 2½ lb. Diamine azo blue 2 B, 1½
oz. Alkali blue 3 B, ½ lb. Oxydiamine black S O O O, and top with 1 oz.
Metaphenylene blue B, 2 oz. New methylene blue R and 1 oz. Indigo blue
N.
Slate.—Dye with 7 oz. Diamine dark blue B and 1 oz. Diamine brown M;
top with 1 oz. Aniline grey B and 1 oz. Cyanole extra.
Pale Drab.—Dye the ground with 1 oz. Diamine orange G C, ¾ oz.
Diamine bronze G and ½ oz. Diamine brown M; top with ¾ oz. New
methylene blue N, 1 oz. Bismarck brown and 1 oz. Cyanole extra.
Deep Leaf Green.—Dye a ground colour with 1¼ lb. Diamine bronze G,
1½ lb. Diamine fast yellow A and 1½ lb. Diamine black H W; the topping
bath is made with ½ lb. Brilliant green, ½ lb. Chrysoidine and ¼ lb. New
methylene blue N.
Maroon.—Dye with 3 lb. Diamine Bordeaux S, ½ lb. Diamine orange D C
and ½ lb. Diamine brown V; top with ½ lb. Magenta and ¼ lb. Formyl
violet S 4 B.
Heliotrope.—Dye with 1 lb. Heliotrope 2 B.
Lilac Rose.—Dye with 8 lb. Columbia black R and 1 lb. Alkali blue B; after
dyeing pass through a weak acetic acid bath, then wash well.
Pea Green.—Dye with 2 lb. Chrysophenine, 1 lb. Chicago blue 6 B and 1
lb. Alkali blue 6 B; pass, after dyeing, through a weak acetic acid bath, then
wash well.
Page 213
Dark Drab.—Dye with ¼ lb. Diamine brown M, 1 lb. Diamine fast yellow
A and ¾ lb. Diamine bronze G; top with ½ lb. Orange G G and ½ lb.
Cyanole extra.
Deep Rose.—Dye the bottom colour with ½ lb. Diamine rose B D and top
with ¼ lb. Rhodamine B and 1 oz. Safranine.
Walnut Brown.—Dye the bottom colour with 1 lb. Oxydiamine black D, 1
lb. Diamine brown M and 1 lb. Oxydiamine violet B; the topping is done
with 4 oz. Safranine, 2 oz. New methylene blue N and 2 oz. Chrysoidine.
Dyeing of Plain Black.—Diamine blacks find a very extensive application
for dyeing blacks on satin, either dyed direct in one bath, or dyed,
diazotised and developed.
Union black S and Oxydiamine black D are particularly suitable for direct
blacks, and are used either alone or in a combination with Diamine jet black
S S, which produces a better covering of the silk, or with Oxydiamine black
S O O O, which deepens the shade of the cotton. According to the shade
required Diamine fast yellow A and B, Diamine green B or G, or Alkaline
blue may be used for shading.
Dye for about one hour at about 175° to 195° F. in as concentrated a bath as
possible, with about 7 to 8 lb. dye per 100 lb. of satin, 8 to 16 oz. Glauber's
salt and 5 to 8 oz. soap per 10 gallons dye liquor; keep cool in the bath for
some time and rinse.
The raising is either done in a tepid soap bath with the addition of some
new methylene blue, or in an acid bath to which Naphthol, blue black, Acid
green, etc., is added for shading the silk.
Direct dyed blacks are especially suitable for cheap goods (ribbons, light
linings, etc.), for which special fastness to water is not required; also for
tram and tussar silk plushes, which are afterwards topped with logwood.
If greater fastness is required, and more especially if it is a case of replacing
aniline black, Diaminogene diazotised and developed is a good dye-stuff. It
is extensively used for dyeing umbrella cloths and linings. Against aniline
black it has the great advantage of not tendering the fibre in the least, and
not turning green during storage. Diaminogene B and Diaminogene extra
A and ¾ lb. Diamine bronze G; top with ½ lb. Orange G G and ½ lb.
Cyanole extra.
Deep Rose.—Dye the bottom colour with ½ lb. Diamine rose B D and top
with ¼ lb. Rhodamine B and 1 oz. Safranine.
Walnut Brown.—Dye the bottom colour with 1 lb. Oxydiamine black D, 1
lb. Diamine brown M and 1 lb. Oxydiamine violet B; the topping is done
with 4 oz. Safranine, 2 oz. New methylene blue N and 2 oz. Chrysoidine.
Dyeing of Plain Black.—Diamine blacks find a very extensive application
for dyeing blacks on satin, either dyed direct in one bath, or dyed,
diazotised and developed.
Union black S and Oxydiamine black D are particularly suitable for direct
blacks, and are used either alone or in a combination with Diamine jet black
S S, which produces a better covering of the silk, or with Oxydiamine black
S O O O, which deepens the shade of the cotton. According to the shade
required Diamine fast yellow A and B, Diamine green B or G, or Alkaline
blue may be used for shading.
Dye for about one hour at about 175° to 195° F. in as concentrated a bath as
possible, with about 7 to 8 lb. dye per 100 lb. of satin, 8 to 16 oz. Glauber's
salt and 5 to 8 oz. soap per 10 gallons dye liquor; keep cool in the bath for
some time and rinse.
The raising is either done in a tepid soap bath with the addition of some
new methylene blue, or in an acid bath to which Naphthol, blue black, Acid
green, etc., is added for shading the silk.
Direct dyed blacks are especially suitable for cheap goods (ribbons, light
linings, etc.), for which special fastness to water is not required; also for
tram and tussar silk plushes, which are afterwards topped with logwood.
If greater fastness is required, and more especially if it is a case of replacing
aniline black, Diaminogene diazotised and developed is a good dye-stuff. It
is extensively used for dyeing umbrella cloths and linings. Against aniline
black it has the great advantage of not tendering the fibre in the least, and
not turning green during storage. Diaminogene B and Diaminogene extra
Page 214
are mostly used for this purpose, the former for jet blacks, the latter for
blue-black shades.
Proceed as follows: Enter the boiled off and acidulated goods in a boiling
bath as concentrated as possible, charged with 16 oz. Glauber's salt per 10
gallons liquor, and 1 lb. acetic acid per 100 lb. dry goods. For jet black add
for 100 lb. satin, 6 to 8 lb. Diaminogene, 1 to 2 lb. Naphthylamine black D,
½ to 1 lb. Diamine fast yellow A or Diamine green B; for very deep shades
about 1/5 of the quantity of Diaminogene B may be replaced with Diamine
jet black S S. For blue black, 6 to 8 lb. Diaminogene B, or 3 to 4 lb.
Diaminogene B, and 3 to 4 lb. Diaminogene extra. Dye for three-quarters to
one hour at the boil, allow to cool in the bath for about thirty minutes, then
rinse, diazotise and develop.
Phenylene diamine (93 per cent.) serves for developing jet blacks mixed
with resorcine for greenish shades. Beta-naphthol is used for blue blacks (1
lb. 5 oz. per 100 lb. of dry material, dissolved in its own weight of soda lye,
75° Tw.). The three developers may also be mixed with each other in any
proportions.
After developing soap hot with addition of new methylene blue, by
choosing a reddish or a bluish brand of new methylene, blue and black may
be shaded at will in the soap bath; finally rinse and raise with acetic acid.
If properly carried out this process will give a black almost equal to aniline
black; but having, as already mentioned, the advantage of not impairing the
strength of the fibre, and not turning green during storage.
As the dye-baths for blacks are charged with a proportionately high
percentage of dye-stuff for the first bath, and will not exhaust completely, it
is advisable to preserve them for further use.
For subsequent lots only two-thirds to three-fourths of the quantities of dye-
stuffs used for the first baths are required, which fact has to be taken into
consideration when calculating the cost of dyeing.
Dyeing Shot Effects on Satin.—Not all direct colours are equally well
adapted for the production of shot effects; those enumerated in Group I. are
most suitable for the purpose, and should be dyed with a larger quantity of
soap than is usual for solid shades, in order to leave the silk as little tinted
blue-black shades.
Proceed as follows: Enter the boiled off and acidulated goods in a boiling
bath as concentrated as possible, charged with 16 oz. Glauber's salt per 10
gallons liquor, and 1 lb. acetic acid per 100 lb. dry goods. For jet black add
for 100 lb. satin, 6 to 8 lb. Diaminogene, 1 to 2 lb. Naphthylamine black D,
½ to 1 lb. Diamine fast yellow A or Diamine green B; for very deep shades
about 1/5 of the quantity of Diaminogene B may be replaced with Diamine
jet black S S. For blue black, 6 to 8 lb. Diaminogene B, or 3 to 4 lb.
Diaminogene B, and 3 to 4 lb. Diaminogene extra. Dye for three-quarters to
one hour at the boil, allow to cool in the bath for about thirty minutes, then
rinse, diazotise and develop.
Phenylene diamine (93 per cent.) serves for developing jet blacks mixed
with resorcine for greenish shades. Beta-naphthol is used for blue blacks (1
lb. 5 oz. per 100 lb. of dry material, dissolved in its own weight of soda lye,
75° Tw.). The three developers may also be mixed with each other in any
proportions.
After developing soap hot with addition of new methylene blue, by
choosing a reddish or a bluish brand of new methylene, blue and black may
be shaded at will in the soap bath; finally rinse and raise with acetic acid.
If properly carried out this process will give a black almost equal to aniline
black; but having, as already mentioned, the advantage of not impairing the
strength of the fibre, and not turning green during storage.
As the dye-baths for blacks are charged with a proportionately high
percentage of dye-stuff for the first bath, and will not exhaust completely, it
is advisable to preserve them for further use.
For subsequent lots only two-thirds to three-fourths of the quantities of dye-
stuffs used for the first baths are required, which fact has to be taken into
consideration when calculating the cost of dyeing.
Dyeing Shot Effects on Satin.—Not all direct colours are equally well
adapted for the production of shot effects; those enumerated in Group I. are
most suitable for the purpose, and should be dyed with a larger quantity of
soap than is usual for solid shades, in order to leave the silk as little tinted
Page 215
as possible. Dye-stuffs of the other groups may be used if the dyeing is
conducted with proper care, i.e., keeping the baths more alkaline and
lowering the temperature. The goods are dyed with the addition for the two
coloured effects previously mentioned, then they are well rinsed, and
afterwards the silk is dyed with the suitable acid dye-stuffs, with addition of
sulphuric acid at a temperature of about 150° F. Care should be taken not to
use too much acid, and to keep the temperature of the bath sufficiently low,
as otherwise the acid may cause some of the dye-stuff to go off the cotton
and tint the silk. It is best to work at a temperature of about 150° F., with
addition of about 3 oz. concentrated sulphuric acid per 10 gallons dye-
liquor.
For shading the silk all acid dye-stuffs can be used which have been
mentioned in the foregoing tables.
If in shot effects the cotton is to be dyed bright and full shades, this is best
achieved by dyeing with direct colours first, and then topping with basic
colours as follows:—
Bottom the cotton first with the suitable direct colours, then dye the silk and
then treat the pieces for about two hours in a cold tannin bath (about 8 oz.
tannin per 10 gallons of water), then rinse once and pass through a tartar
emetic bath (about 3 oz. per 10 gallons), rinse thoroughly and dye the
cotton to shade with basic colours in a cold bath to which some acetic acid
has been added.
Should the silk become a little dull after this process, this may be remedied
by a slight soaping. After dyeing rinse well and raise with acetic acid.
Shot Effects with Black Cotton Warp.—Effects much in favour are
designs composed of black cotton and light or coloured silk. The most
suitable black dye for this purpose is Diamine black B H, diazotised and
developed.
Dye in as concentrated a bath as possible at about 160° F. with about 6 lb.
Diamine black B H, 1 lb. Diamine sky blue, pat., per 100 lb. of dry goods,
½ lb. Diamine orange D C, pat., with an addition of 6½ oz. soap, 4 to 5 dr.
soda per 10 gallons liquor, 16 oz. Glauber's salt. After dyeing rinse well in a
bath containing 6 dr. soda and 3 oz. soap per 10 gallons water, diazotised in
conducted with proper care, i.e., keeping the baths more alkaline and
lowering the temperature. The goods are dyed with the addition for the two
coloured effects previously mentioned, then they are well rinsed, and
afterwards the silk is dyed with the suitable acid dye-stuffs, with addition of
sulphuric acid at a temperature of about 150° F. Care should be taken not to
use too much acid, and to keep the temperature of the bath sufficiently low,
as otherwise the acid may cause some of the dye-stuff to go off the cotton
and tint the silk. It is best to work at a temperature of about 150° F., with
addition of about 3 oz. concentrated sulphuric acid per 10 gallons dye-
liquor.
For shading the silk all acid dye-stuffs can be used which have been
mentioned in the foregoing tables.
If in shot effects the cotton is to be dyed bright and full shades, this is best
achieved by dyeing with direct colours first, and then topping with basic
colours as follows:—
Bottom the cotton first with the suitable direct colours, then dye the silk and
then treat the pieces for about two hours in a cold tannin bath (about 8 oz.
tannin per 10 gallons of water), then rinse once and pass through a tartar
emetic bath (about 3 oz. per 10 gallons), rinse thoroughly and dye the
cotton to shade with basic colours in a cold bath to which some acetic acid
has been added.
Should the silk become a little dull after this process, this may be remedied
by a slight soaping. After dyeing rinse well and raise with acetic acid.
Shot Effects with Black Cotton Warp.—Effects much in favour are
designs composed of black cotton and light or coloured silk. The most
suitable black dye for this purpose is Diamine black B H, diazotised and
developed.
Dye in as concentrated a bath as possible at about 160° F. with about 6 lb.
Diamine black B H, 1 lb. Diamine sky blue, pat., per 100 lb. of dry goods,
½ lb. Diamine orange D C, pat., with an addition of 6½ oz. soap, 4 to 5 dr.
soda per 10 gallons liquor, 16 oz. Glauber's salt. After dyeing rinse well in a
bath containing 6 dr. soda and 3 oz. soap per 10 gallons water, diazotised in
Page 216
a fresh bath with 4 lb. nitrite of soda and 12 lb. hydrochloric acid (per 100
lb. of dry goods), rinse thoroughly and develop with 3 to 16 oz. phenylene
diamine (93 per cent.), with addition of 1 to 2 lb. soda. These two
operations should follow each other as quickly as possible, also care has to
be taken that the diazotised goods are not exposed to direct sunlight or heat,
which causes unlevel dyeings. The silk is then cleaned as far as possible by
hot soaping, and dyed at about 120° to 140° F., with acid dye-stuffs and the
addition of sulphuric acid. After dyeing rinse as usual and brighten.
Yellow and Violet,—Dye the cotton with 2 lb. Diamine fast yellow A, the
silk with 1 lb. Cyanole extra, and 1 lb. Forinyl violet S 4 B.
Black and Blue.—Dye the cotton with 5 lb. Diamine black B H, 1 lb.
Diamine sky blue, and ¼ lb. Diamine orange D C. After dyeing, diazotise
and develop with phenylene diamine as described above. Then dye the silk
with ½ lb. Pure soluble blue and 1 lb. Cyanole extra.
Black and Crimson.—Dye the black as in the previous recipe, then dye the
silk with 2 lb. Brilliant croceine 3 B and ½ lb. Rhodamine S.
Blue and Gold.—Dye the cotton with 2 lb. Diamine sky blue and the silk
with 1 lb. Fast yellow S.
Dark Blue and Green.—Dye the cotton with 1½ lb. Diamine black B H, 1½
lb. Diamine sky blue and ½ lb. Diamine azo blue 2 R; the silk with 2 lb.
Naphthol yellow S and 1 lb. New methylene blue G G.
Violet and Yellow.—Dye the cotton with 2 oz. Diamine violet N and the silk
with 1 lb. Fast yellow S.
Orange and Violet.—Dye the cotton with 2 lb. Diamine orange D C and the
silk with 1 lb. Formyl violet S 4 B.
Dark Blue and Olive.—Dye the cotton with 1½ lb. Diamineral blue R and
½ lb. Diamine azo blue 2 R, and the silk with 1 lb. Naphthol yellow B and 1
lb. Orange G G.
Green and Pink.—Dye the cotton with 1½ lb. Diamine fast yellow A and ¼
lb. Diamine sky blue, and the silk with 1 lb. Erythrosine B.
lb. of dry goods), rinse thoroughly and develop with 3 to 16 oz. phenylene
diamine (93 per cent.), with addition of 1 to 2 lb. soda. These two
operations should follow each other as quickly as possible, also care has to
be taken that the diazotised goods are not exposed to direct sunlight or heat,
which causes unlevel dyeings. The silk is then cleaned as far as possible by
hot soaping, and dyed at about 120° to 140° F., with acid dye-stuffs and the
addition of sulphuric acid. After dyeing rinse as usual and brighten.
Yellow and Violet,—Dye the cotton with 2 lb. Diamine fast yellow A, the
silk with 1 lb. Cyanole extra, and 1 lb. Forinyl violet S 4 B.
Black and Blue.—Dye the cotton with 5 lb. Diamine black B H, 1 lb.
Diamine sky blue, and ¼ lb. Diamine orange D C. After dyeing, diazotise
and develop with phenylene diamine as described above. Then dye the silk
with ½ lb. Pure soluble blue and 1 lb. Cyanole extra.
Black and Crimson.—Dye the black as in the previous recipe, then dye the
silk with 2 lb. Brilliant croceine 3 B and ½ lb. Rhodamine S.
Blue and Gold.—Dye the cotton with 2 lb. Diamine sky blue and the silk
with 1 lb. Fast yellow S.
Dark Blue and Green.—Dye the cotton with 1½ lb. Diamine black B H, 1½
lb. Diamine sky blue and ½ lb. Diamine azo blue 2 R; the silk with 2 lb.
Naphthol yellow S and 1 lb. New methylene blue G G.
Violet and Yellow.—Dye the cotton with 2 oz. Diamine violet N and the silk
with 1 lb. Fast yellow S.
Orange and Violet.—Dye the cotton with 2 lb. Diamine orange D C and the
silk with 1 lb. Formyl violet S 4 B.
Dark Blue and Olive.—Dye the cotton with 1½ lb. Diamineral blue R and
½ lb. Diamine azo blue 2 R, and the silk with 1 lb. Naphthol yellow B and 1
lb. Orange G G.
Green and Pink.—Dye the cotton with 1½ lb. Diamine fast yellow A and ¼
lb. Diamine sky blue, and the silk with 1 lb. Erythrosine B.
Page 217
Brown and Blue.—Dye the cotton with 3 lb. Mikado brown 2 B, and the
silk with ½ lb. Pure blue.
It is quite possible to produce two coloured effects containing blue in one
bath by using Alkali blue as a constituent with a direct dye which works
only on to the cotton, the alkali blue going on to the silk, as, for example, in
the following recipes:—
Orange and Blue.—The dye-bath is made with 3 lb. Mikado orange 5 R O
and 1¼ lb. Alkali blue 6 B. After the dyeing the goods are rinsed, then
passed through a bath of 1½ lb. sulphuric acid in 10 gallons water, washed
well and dried.
Olive and Blue.—The dye-bath is made with 1½ lb. Diamine fast yellow A,
2½ lb. Diamine orange DC, ¼ lb. Diamine sky blue, and 1 lb. Alkali blue 6
B, After dyeing rinse, then acidulate as above and wash well.
silk with ½ lb. Pure blue.
It is quite possible to produce two coloured effects containing blue in one
bath by using Alkali blue as a constituent with a direct dye which works
only on to the cotton, the alkali blue going on to the silk, as, for example, in
the following recipes:—
Orange and Blue.—The dye-bath is made with 3 lb. Mikado orange 5 R O
and 1¼ lb. Alkali blue 6 B. After the dyeing the goods are rinsed, then
passed through a bath of 1½ lb. sulphuric acid in 10 gallons water, washed
well and dried.
Olive and Blue.—The dye-bath is made with 1½ lb. Diamine fast yellow A,
2½ lb. Diamine orange DC, ¼ lb. Diamine sky blue, and 1 lb. Alkali blue 6
B, After dyeing rinse, then acidulate as above and wash well.
Page 218
CHAPTER VII.
OPERATIONS FOLLOWING DYEING.
WASHING, SOAPING, DRYING.
After loose cotton or wool, or cotton and woollen yarns, or piece goods of
every description have been dyed, before they can be sent out for sale they
have to pass through various operations of a purifying character. There are
some operations through which cloths pass that have as their object the
imparting of a certain appearance and texture to them, generally known as
finishing processes; of these it is not intended here to speak, but only of
those which precede these, but follow on the dyeing operations.
These processes are usually of a very simple character, and common to
most colours which are dyed, and here will be noticed the appliances and
manipulation necessary in the carrying out of these operations.
Squeezing or Wringing.—It is advisable when the goods are taken out of
the dye-bath to squeeze or wring them according to circumstances, in order
to press out all surplus dye-liquor, which can be returned to the dye-bath if
needful to be used again. This is an economical proceeding in many cases,
especially in working with many of the old tannin materials like sumac,
divi-divi, myrobolams, and the modern direct dyes which in the dyeing
operations are not completely extracted out of the bath, or in other words,
the dye-bath is not exhausted of colouring matter, and, therefore, it can be
used again for another lot of goods, simply by adding fresh material to
make up for that absorbed by the first lot of goods.
Loose wool and loose cotton are somewhat difficult to deal with by
squeezing or wringing, but the material may be passed through a pair of
squeezing rollers, such as are shown in Fig. 31, which will be more fully
dealt with later on. The machine shown is made by Messrs Read Holliday &
Sons.
OPERATIONS FOLLOWING DYEING.
WASHING, SOAPING, DRYING.
After loose cotton or wool, or cotton and woollen yarns, or piece goods of
every description have been dyed, before they can be sent out for sale they
have to pass through various operations of a purifying character. There are
some operations through which cloths pass that have as their object the
imparting of a certain appearance and texture to them, generally known as
finishing processes; of these it is not intended here to speak, but only of
those which precede these, but follow on the dyeing operations.
These processes are usually of a very simple character, and common to
most colours which are dyed, and here will be noticed the appliances and
manipulation necessary in the carrying out of these operations.
Squeezing or Wringing.—It is advisable when the goods are taken out of
the dye-bath to squeeze or wring them according to circumstances, in order
to press out all surplus dye-liquor, which can be returned to the dye-bath if
needful to be used again. This is an economical proceeding in many cases,
especially in working with many of the old tannin materials like sumac,
divi-divi, myrobolams, and the modern direct dyes which in the dyeing
operations are not completely extracted out of the bath, or in other words,
the dye-bath is not exhausted of colouring matter, and, therefore, it can be
used again for another lot of goods, simply by adding fresh material to
make up for that absorbed by the first lot of goods.
Loose wool and loose cotton are somewhat difficult to deal with by
squeezing or wringing, but the material may be passed through a pair of
squeezing rollers, such as are shown in Fig. 31, which will be more fully
dealt with later on. The machine shown is made by Messrs Read Holliday &
Sons.
Page 219
FIG. 31.—Squeezing Rollers.
Yarns in Hanks.—In the hank-dyeing process the hanks are wrung by
placing one end of the hank on a wringing horse placed over the dye-tub, a
dye stick on the other end of the hank giving two or three sharp pulls to
straighten out the yarn, and then twisting the stick round, the twisting of the
yarns puts some pressure on the fibres, thoroughly and uniformly squeezing
out the surplus liquor from the yarn.
Hank-wringing Machines.—Several forms of hank-wringing machines have
been devised. One machine consists of a pair of discs fitted on an axle;
these discs carry strong hooks on which the hanks are placed. The operator
places a hank on a pair of the hooks. The discs revolve and carry round the
hank, during the revolution the hank is twisted and the surplus liquor wrung
out, when the revolution of the discs carries the hank to the spot where it
entered the machine the hooks fly back to their original position, the hank
unwinds, it is then removed and a new hank put in its place, and so the
machine works on, hanks being put on and off as required. The capacity of
such a machine is great, and the efficiency of its working good.
Yarns in Hanks.—In the hank-dyeing process the hanks are wrung by
placing one end of the hank on a wringing horse placed over the dye-tub, a
dye stick on the other end of the hank giving two or three sharp pulls to
straighten out the yarn, and then twisting the stick round, the twisting of the
yarns puts some pressure on the fibres, thoroughly and uniformly squeezing
out the surplus liquor from the yarn.
Hank-wringing Machines.—Several forms of hank-wringing machines have
been devised. One machine consists of a pair of discs fitted on an axle;
these discs carry strong hooks on which the hanks are placed. The operator
places a hank on a pair of the hooks. The discs revolve and carry round the
hank, during the revolution the hank is twisted and the surplus liquor wrung
out, when the revolution of the discs carries the hank to the spot where it
entered the machine the hooks fly back to their original position, the hank
unwinds, it is then removed and a new hank put in its place, and so the
machine works on, hanks being put on and off as required. The capacity of
such a machine is great, and the efficiency of its working good.
Page 220
Mr. S. Spencer of Whitefield makes a hank-wringing machine which
consists of a pair of hooks placed over a vat. One of the hooks is fixed, the
other is made to rotate. A hank hung between the hooks is naturally twisted,
and all the surplus liquor wrung out. The liquor falling into the vat.
Roller Squeezing Machines for Yarn.—Hanks may be passed through a pair
of indiarubber squeezing rollers, which may be so arranged that they can be
fixed as required on the dye-bath. Such a pair of rollers is a familiar article,
and quite common and in general use in dye houses.
Piece Goods.—These are generally passed open through a pair of squeezing
rollers which are often attached to the dye-vat in which the pieces are dyed.
Read Holliday's Squeezing Machine.—In Fig. 31 is shown a squeezing
machine very largely employed for squeezing all kinds of piece goods and
cotton warps after dyeing or washing. It consists of a pair of heavy rollers
on which, by means of the screws shown at the top, a very considerable
pressure can be brought to bear. The piece is run through the eye shown on
the left, by which it is made into a rope form, then over the guiding rollers
and between the squeezing rollers, and into waggons for conveyance to
other machines. This machine is effective.
Another plan on which roller, or rather in this case disc, squeezing
machines is made, is to make the bottom roller with a square groove in the
centre, into this fits a disc, the cloth passing between them. The top disc can
by suitable screws be made to press upon the cloth in the groove, and thus
squeeze the water out of it.
Washing.—One of the most important operations following that of dyeing
is the washing with water to free the goods, whether cotton or woollen,
from all traces of loose dye, acids, mordanting materials, etc., which it is
not desirable should be left in, as they might interfere with the subsequent
finishing operations. For this purpose a plentiful supply of good clean water
is required; this should be as soft as possible, free from any suspended
matter which might settle upon the dyed goods, and stain or speck them.
Washing may be done by hand, as it frequently was in olden days, by
simply immersing the dyed fabrics in a tub of water, shaking, then wringing
out, again placing in fresh water to finish off. Or if the dye-works were on
consists of a pair of hooks placed over a vat. One of the hooks is fixed, the
other is made to rotate. A hank hung between the hooks is naturally twisted,
and all the surplus liquor wrung out. The liquor falling into the vat.
Roller Squeezing Machines for Yarn.—Hanks may be passed through a pair
of indiarubber squeezing rollers, which may be so arranged that they can be
fixed as required on the dye-bath. Such a pair of rollers is a familiar article,
and quite common and in general use in dye houses.
Piece Goods.—These are generally passed open through a pair of squeezing
rollers which are often attached to the dye-vat in which the pieces are dyed.
Read Holliday's Squeezing Machine.—In Fig. 31 is shown a squeezing
machine very largely employed for squeezing all kinds of piece goods and
cotton warps after dyeing or washing. It consists of a pair of heavy rollers
on which, by means of the screws shown at the top, a very considerable
pressure can be brought to bear. The piece is run through the eye shown on
the left, by which it is made into a rope form, then over the guiding rollers
and between the squeezing rollers, and into waggons for conveyance to
other machines. This machine is effective.
Another plan on which roller, or rather in this case disc, squeezing
machines is made, is to make the bottom roller with a square groove in the
centre, into this fits a disc, the cloth passing between them. The top disc can
by suitable screws be made to press upon the cloth in the groove, and thus
squeeze the water out of it.
Washing.—One of the most important operations following that of dyeing
is the washing with water to free the goods, whether cotton or woollen,
from all traces of loose dye, acids, mordanting materials, etc., which it is
not desirable should be left in, as they might interfere with the subsequent
finishing operations. For this purpose a plentiful supply of good clean water
is required; this should be as soft as possible, free from any suspended
matter which might settle upon the dyed goods, and stain or speck them.
Washing may be done by hand, as it frequently was in olden days, by
simply immersing the dyed fabrics in a tub of water, shaking, then wringing
out, again placing in fresh water to finish off. Or if the dye-works were on
Page 221
the banks of a running stream of clean water the dyed goods were simply
hung in the stream to be washed in a very effectual manner.
In these days it is best to resort to washing machines adapted to deal with
the various kinds of fibrous materials and fabrics in which they can be
subjected to a current of water.
hung in the stream to be washed in a very effectual manner.
In these days it is best to resort to washing machines adapted to deal with
the various kinds of fibrous materials and fabrics in which they can be
subjected to a current of water.
Page 222
FIG. 32.—Yarn-washing Machine.
Loose Wool and Cotton.—If this has been dyed by hand then the washing
may also be done in the same way by hand in a plain vat. If the dyeing has
been done on a machine, then the washing can be done on the same
machine.
Yarns.—Yarn in the cop form is best washed in the machine in which it is
dyed.
Yarns in Hanks.—A very common form of washing machine is shown in
Fig. 32. As will be seen it consists of a wooden vat, over which are arranged
a series of revolving reels on which the hanks are hung. The hanks are kept
in motion through the water, and so every part of the yarn is thoroughly
washed. Guides keep the hanks of yarn separate and prevent any
entanglement one with another. A pipe delivers constantly a current of clean
water, while another pipe carries away the used water. Motion is given to
the reels in this case by a donkey engine attached to the machine, but it may
also be driven by a belt from the main driving shaft of the works. This
machine is very effective.
Loose Wool and Cotton.—If this has been dyed by hand then the washing
may also be done in the same way by hand in a plain vat. If the dyeing has
been done on a machine, then the washing can be done on the same
machine.
Yarns.—Yarn in the cop form is best washed in the machine in which it is
dyed.
Yarns in Hanks.—A very common form of washing machine is shown in
Fig. 32. As will be seen it consists of a wooden vat, over which are arranged
a series of revolving reels on which the hanks are hung. The hanks are kept
in motion through the water, and so every part of the yarn is thoroughly
washed. Guides keep the hanks of yarn separate and prevent any
entanglement one with another. A pipe delivers constantly a current of clean
water, while another pipe carries away the used water. Motion is given to
the reels in this case by a donkey engine attached to the machine, but it may
also be driven by a belt from the main driving shaft of the works. This
machine is very effective.
Page 223
FIG. 33.—Dye-house Washing Machine.
Piece Goods.—Piece goods are mostly washed in machines, of which two
broad types may be recognised; first, those where the pieces are dealt with
in the form of ropes in a twisted form, and, second, those where the pieces
are washed open. There are some machines in which the cloths may be
treated either in the open or rope form as may be thought most desirable.
FIG. 34.—Cloth-washing Machine.
Piece Goods.—Piece goods are mostly washed in machines, of which two
broad types may be recognised; first, those where the pieces are dealt with
in the form of ropes in a twisted form, and, second, those where the pieces
are washed open. There are some machines in which the cloths may be
treated either in the open or rope form as may be thought most desirable.
FIG. 34.—Cloth-washing Machine.
Page 224
Fig. 33 represents a fairly well-known machine, made by Messrs. Mather &
Platt, in which the pieces are treated in a rope-like form. It consists of a
trough in which a constant current of water is maintained. At one end of this
trough is a square beating roller, at the other a wooden lattice roller. Above
the square beater, and out of the trough, are a pair of rollers whose purpose
is to draw the cloth through the machine and also partly to act as squeezing
rollers. As will be seen the cloth is threaded in rope form spirally round the
rollers, passing in at one end and out at the other, pegs in a guide rail
serving to keep the various portions separate. The square beater in its
revolutions has a beating action on the cloth tending to more effectual
washing. The lattice roller is simply a guide roller.
Fig. 34 shows a washing machine very largely used in the wool-dyeing
trade. The principal portion of this machine is of wood.
The internal parts consist of a large wooden bowl, or oftener, as in the
machine under notice, of a pair of wooden bowls which are pressed together
by springs with some small degree of force. Between these bowls the cloth
is placed, more or less loosely twisted up in a rope form, and the machines
are made to take four, six or eight pieces, or lengths of pieces, at one time,
the ends of the pieces being stitched together. A pipe running along the front
of the machine conveys a constant current of clean water which is caused to
impinge in the form of jets on the pieces of cloth as they run through the
machine, while an overflow carries away the used water. The goods are run
in this machine until they are considered to be sufficiently washed, which
may take half to one and a half hours.
In Fig. 35 is shown a machine designed to wash pieces in the broad or open
state. The machine contains a large number of guide rollers, built more or
less open, round which the pieces are guided—the ends of the pieces being
stitched together. Pipes carrying water are so arranged that jets of clean
water impinge on and thoroughly wash the cloth as it passes through—the
construction of the guide rollers facilitating the efficient washing of the
goods.
Platt, in which the pieces are treated in a rope-like form. It consists of a
trough in which a constant current of water is maintained. At one end of this
trough is a square beating roller, at the other a wooden lattice roller. Above
the square beater, and out of the trough, are a pair of rollers whose purpose
is to draw the cloth through the machine and also partly to act as squeezing
rollers. As will be seen the cloth is threaded in rope form spirally round the
rollers, passing in at one end and out at the other, pegs in a guide rail
serving to keep the various portions separate. The square beater in its
revolutions has a beating action on the cloth tending to more effectual
washing. The lattice roller is simply a guide roller.
Fig. 34 shows a washing machine very largely used in the wool-dyeing
trade. The principal portion of this machine is of wood.
The internal parts consist of a large wooden bowl, or oftener, as in the
machine under notice, of a pair of wooden bowls which are pressed together
by springs with some small degree of force. Between these bowls the cloth
is placed, more or less loosely twisted up in a rope form, and the machines
are made to take four, six or eight pieces, or lengths of pieces, at one time,
the ends of the pieces being stitched together. A pipe running along the front
of the machine conveys a constant current of clean water which is caused to
impinge in the form of jets on the pieces of cloth as they run through the
machine, while an overflow carries away the used water. The goods are run
in this machine until they are considered to be sufficiently washed, which
may take half to one and a half hours.
In Fig. 35 is shown a machine designed to wash pieces in the broad or open
state. The machine contains a large number of guide rollers, built more or
less open, round which the pieces are guided—the ends of the pieces being
stitched together. Pipes carrying water are so arranged that jets of clean
water impinge on and thoroughly wash the cloth as it passes through—the
construction of the guide rollers facilitating the efficient washing of the
goods.
Page 225
FIG. 35.—Cloth-washing Machine.
Soaping.—- Sometimes yarns or cloths have to be passed through a soap
bath after being dyed in order to brighten up the colours or develop them in
some way. In the case of yarns this can be done on the reel washing
machine such as is shown in Fig. 32. In the case of piece goods, a
continuous machine, in which the washing, soaping, etc., can be carried on
simultaneously, is often employed. Such a machine is shown in Fig. 36. It
consists of a number of compartments fitted with guide rollers so that the
cloth passes up and down several times through the liquors in the
compartments. Between one compartment and another is placed a pair of
squeezing rollers. The cloth is threaded in a continuous manner, well shown
in the drawing, through the machine. In one compartment it is treated with
water, in another soap liquor, in another water, and so on; and these
machines may be made with two, three or more compartments as may be
necessary for the particular work in hand. As seen in the drawing, the cloth
passes in at one end and out at the other finished. It is usually arranged that
a continuous current of the various liquors used flows through the various
compartments, thus ensuring the most perfect treatment of the cloths.
Soaping.—- Sometimes yarns or cloths have to be passed through a soap
bath after being dyed in order to brighten up the colours or develop them in
some way. In the case of yarns this can be done on the reel washing
machine such as is shown in Fig. 32. In the case of piece goods, a
continuous machine, in which the washing, soaping, etc., can be carried on
simultaneously, is often employed. Such a machine is shown in Fig. 36. It
consists of a number of compartments fitted with guide rollers so that the
cloth passes up and down several times through the liquors in the
compartments. Between one compartment and another is placed a pair of
squeezing rollers. The cloth is threaded in a continuous manner, well shown
in the drawing, through the machine. In one compartment it is treated with
water, in another soap liquor, in another water, and so on; and these
machines may be made with two, three or more compartments as may be
necessary for the particular work in hand. As seen in the drawing, the cloth
passes in at one end and out at the other finished. It is usually arranged that
a continuous current of the various liquors used flows through the various
compartments, thus ensuring the most perfect treatment of the cloths.
Page 226
FIG. 36.—Washing and Soaping Vats.
Steaming.—Sometimes it becomes necessary to subject dyed goods to a
process of steaming, as, for instance, with steam aniline blacks, khaki
shades, alizarine reds, etc., for the purpose of more fully developing and
fixing the dye upon the fibre. In the case of yarns, this operation is carried
out in the steaming cottage, one form of which is shown in Fig. 37. It
consists of a horizontal cylindrical iron vessel like a steam boiler, one end is
entirely closed, while the other is made to open and be closed tightly and
hermetically. The cottage is fitted with the necessary steam inlet and outlet
pipes, drain pipes for condensed water, pressure gauges. The yarn to be
steamed is hung on rods placed on a skeleton frame waggon on wheels
which can be run in and out of the steaming cottage as is required. The
drawing shows well the various important parts of the machine. In the case
of piece goods these also can be hung from rods in folds on such a waggon,
but it is much more customary to employ a continuous steaming chamber,
very similar to
Steaming.—Sometimes it becomes necessary to subject dyed goods to a
process of steaming, as, for instance, with steam aniline blacks, khaki
shades, alizarine reds, etc., for the purpose of more fully developing and
fixing the dye upon the fibre. In the case of yarns, this operation is carried
out in the steaming cottage, one form of which is shown in Fig. 37. It
consists of a horizontal cylindrical iron vessel like a steam boiler, one end is
entirely closed, while the other is made to open and be closed tightly and
hermetically. The cottage is fitted with the necessary steam inlet and outlet
pipes, drain pipes for condensed water, pressure gauges. The yarn to be
steamed is hung on rods placed on a skeleton frame waggon on wheels
which can be run in and out of the steaming cottage as is required. The
drawing shows well the various important parts of the machine. In the case
of piece goods these also can be hung from rods in folds on such a waggon,
but it is much more customary to employ a continuous steaming chamber,
very similar to
Page 227
FIG. 37.—Steaming Cottage.
the ageing and oxidising machine shown in Fig. 38, and also used in the
dyeing of aniline black.
Drying.—Following on the washing comes the final operation of the
dyeing process, that of drying the dyed and washed goods. Textile fabrics of
all kinds after they have passed through dye-baths, washing machines, etc.,
contain a large amount of water, often exceeding in weight that of the fibre
itself, and to take the goods direct from the preceding operations to the
drying plant means that a considerable amount of fuel must be expended to
drive
FIG. 38.—Steaming and Ageing Chamber.
off this large amount of water. It is therefore very desirable that the goods
be freed from as much of this water as possible before they are sent into any
drying chambers, and this may be done in three ways, by wringing,
squeezing and hydro-extracting. The first two methods have already been
described (p. 239, etc.) and need not again be alluded to; the last needs
some account.
the ageing and oxidising machine shown in Fig. 38, and also used in the
dyeing of aniline black.
Drying.—Following on the washing comes the final operation of the
dyeing process, that of drying the dyed and washed goods. Textile fabrics of
all kinds after they have passed through dye-baths, washing machines, etc.,
contain a large amount of water, often exceeding in weight that of the fibre
itself, and to take the goods direct from the preceding operations to the
drying plant means that a considerable amount of fuel must be expended to
drive
FIG. 38.—Steaming and Ageing Chamber.
off this large amount of water. It is therefore very desirable that the goods
be freed from as much of this water as possible before they are sent into any
drying chambers, and this may be done in three ways, by wringing,
squeezing and hydro-extracting. The first two methods have already been
described (p. 239, etc.) and need not again be alluded to; the last needs
some account.
Page 228
FIG. 39.—Hydro-extractor.
Hydro-extractors are a most efficient means for extracting water out of
textile fabrics. They are made in a variety of forms by several makers.
Essentially they consist of a cylindrical vessel, or basket, as it is called, with
perforated sides so constructed that it can be revolved at a high speed. This
vessel is enclosed in an outer cage. The goods are placed in the basket, as it
is termed, and then this is caused to revolve at high speed, when centrifugal
action comes into play, and the water contained in the goods finds its way to
the outside of the basket through the perforations, and so away from the
goods. Hydro-extractors are made in a variety of sizes and forms—in some
the driving gear is above, in others below the basket; in some the driving is
done by belt-gearing, in others a steam engine is directly connected with the
basket. Figs. 39 and 40 show two forms which are much in use in the textile
industry. They are very efficient, and extract water from textile goods more
completely than any other means, as will be obvious from a study of the
table below.
Hydro-extractors are a most efficient means for extracting water out of
textile fabrics. They are made in a variety of forms by several makers.
Essentially they consist of a cylindrical vessel, or basket, as it is called, with
perforated sides so constructed that it can be revolved at a high speed. This
vessel is enclosed in an outer cage. The goods are placed in the basket, as it
is termed, and then this is caused to revolve at high speed, when centrifugal
action comes into play, and the water contained in the goods finds its way to
the outside of the basket through the perforations, and so away from the
goods. Hydro-extractors are made in a variety of sizes and forms—in some
the driving gear is above, in others below the basket; in some the driving is
done by belt-gearing, in others a steam engine is directly connected with the
basket. Figs. 39 and 40 show two forms which are much in use in the textile
industry. They are very efficient, and extract water from textile goods more
completely than any other means, as will be obvious from a study of the
table below.
Page 229
FIG. 40.—Hydro-extractor.
The relative efficiency of the three systems of extracting the moisture out of
textile fabrics has been investigated by Grothe, who gives in his Appretur
der Gewebe, published in 1882, the following table showing the percentage
amount of water removed in fifteen minutes:—
Yarns. Wool. Silk. Cotton. Linen. Wringing 44.5 45.4 45.3 50.3 Squeezing
60.0 71.4 60.0 73.6 Hydro-extracting 83.5 77.0 81.2 82.8
Pieces. Wringing 33.4 44.5 44.5 54.6 Squeezing 64.0 69.7 72.2 83.0 Hydro-
extracting 77.8 75.5 82.3 86.0
In the practical working of hydro-extractors it is of the utmost importance
that the goods be carefully and regularly laid in the basket—not too much in
one part and too little in another. Any unevenness in this respect at the
speed at which they are driven lays such a strain on the bearings as to
seriously endanger the safety of the machine.
After being wrung, squeezed or hydro-extracted the goods are ready to be
dried. In the case of yarns, this may be done in rooms heated by steam pipes
placed on the floor, the hanks being hung on rods suspended from racks
arranged for the purpose.
The relative efficiency of the three systems of extracting the moisture out of
textile fabrics has been investigated by Grothe, who gives in his Appretur
der Gewebe, published in 1882, the following table showing the percentage
amount of water removed in fifteen minutes:—
Yarns. Wool. Silk. Cotton. Linen. Wringing 44.5 45.4 45.3 50.3 Squeezing
60.0 71.4 60.0 73.6 Hydro-extracting 83.5 77.0 81.2 82.8
Pieces. Wringing 33.4 44.5 44.5 54.6 Squeezing 64.0 69.7 72.2 83.0 Hydro-
extracting 77.8 75.5 82.3 86.0
In the practical working of hydro-extractors it is of the utmost importance
that the goods be carefully and regularly laid in the basket—not too much in
one part and too little in another. Any unevenness in this respect at the
speed at which they are driven lays such a strain on the bearings as to
seriously endanger the safety of the machine.
After being wrung, squeezed or hydro-extracted the goods are ready to be
dried. In the case of yarns, this may be done in rooms heated by steam pipes
placed on the floor, the hanks being hung on rods suspended from racks
arranged for the purpose.
Page 230
FIG. 41.—Automatic Yarn-dryer.
Where large quantities of yarn have to be dried, it is most economical to
employ a yarn-drying machine, and one form of such is shown in Fig. 41.
The appearance of the machine is that of one long room from the outside;
internally it is divided into compartments, each of which is heated up by
suitably arranged steam pipes, but the degree of heating in each
compartment varies—at the entrance end it is high, at the exit end lower.
The yarn is fed in at one end, being hung on rods, and by suitable gearing it
is carried directly through the various chambers or sections, and in its
passage the heat to which it is subjected drives off the water it contains. The
yarn requires no attention from the time it passes in wet at the one end of
the machine and comes out dry at the other end. The amount of labour
required is slight, only that represented by filling the sticks with wet yarn
and emptying them of the dried yarn. The machine works regularly and
well.
Where large quantities of yarn have to be dried, it is most economical to
employ a yarn-drying machine, and one form of such is shown in Fig. 41.
The appearance of the machine is that of one long room from the outside;
internally it is divided into compartments, each of which is heated up by
suitably arranged steam pipes, but the degree of heating in each
compartment varies—at the entrance end it is high, at the exit end lower.
The yarn is fed in at one end, being hung on rods, and by suitable gearing it
is carried directly through the various chambers or sections, and in its
passage the heat to which it is subjected drives off the water it contains. The
yarn requires no attention from the time it passes in wet at the one end of
the machine and comes out dry at the other end. The amount of labour
required is slight, only that represented by filling the sticks with wet yarn
and emptying them of the dried yarn. The machine works regularly and
well.
Page 231
FIG. 42.—Truck Yarn-dryer.
The drying is accomplished by circulating heated air through the yarns, this
heating being effected by steam coils, fresh air continually enters the
chambers, while water-saturated air is as continually being taken out at the
top of the chamber. One of the great secrets in all drying operations is to
have a constant current of fresh hot air playing on the goods to be dried; this
absorbs the moisture they contain, and the water-charged air thus produced
must be taken away as quickly as possible.
The drying is accomplished by circulating heated air through the yarns, this
heating being effected by steam coils, fresh air continually enters the
chambers, while water-saturated air is as continually being taken out at the
top of the chamber. One of the great secrets in all drying operations is to
have a constant current of fresh hot air playing on the goods to be dried; this
absorbs the moisture they contain, and the water-charged air thus produced
must be taken away as quickly as possible.
Page 232
FIG 43.—Drying Cylinders.
Fig. 42 shows what is called a truck yarn-dryer, which consists of a
chamber heated with steam pipes and fitted with an exhausting fan to draw
out the air and water vapour which is produced. The yarns are hung on
trucks which can be run in and out of the chamber for filling and emptying.
Piece Goods.—The most convenient manner of drying piece goods is to
employ the steam cylinder drying machine, such as is shown in Fig. 43.
This consists of a number of hollow tin or copper cylinders which can be
heated by steam passing in through the axles of the cylinders, which are
made hollow on purpose. The cloth to be dried passes round these cylinders,
which revolve while the cloth passes. They work very effectually. The
cylinders are arranged sometimes, as in the drawing, vertically; at other
times horizontally.
Fig. 42 shows what is called a truck yarn-dryer, which consists of a
chamber heated with steam pipes and fitted with an exhausting fan to draw
out the air and water vapour which is produced. The yarns are hung on
trucks which can be run in and out of the chamber for filling and emptying.
Piece Goods.—The most convenient manner of drying piece goods is to
employ the steam cylinder drying machine, such as is shown in Fig. 43.
This consists of a number of hollow tin or copper cylinders which can be
heated by steam passing in through the axles of the cylinders, which are
made hollow on purpose. The cloth to be dried passes round these cylinders,
which revolve while the cloth passes. They work very effectually. The
cylinders are arranged sometimes, as in the drawing, vertically; at other
times horizontally.
Page 233
CHAPTER VIII
TESTING OF THE COLOUR OF DYED FABRICS.
It is frequently desirable that dyers should be able to ascertain with some
degree of accuracy what dyes have been used to dye any particular samples
of dyed cloth that has been offered to them to match. In these days of the
thousand and one different dyes that are known it is by no means an easy
thing to do; and when, as is most often the case, two or three dye-stuffs
have been used in the production of a shade, the difficulty is materially
increased.
The only available method is to try the effect of various acid and alkaline
reagents on the sample, noting whether any change of colour occurs, and
judging accordingly. It would be a good thing for dyers to accustom
themselves to test the dyeings they do, and so accumulate a fund of
practical experience which will stand them in good stead whenever they
have occasion to examine a dyed pattern of unknown origin.
The limits of this book does not permit of there being given a series of
elaborate tables showing the action of various chemical reagents on fabrics
dyed with various colours; and such, indeed, serve very little purpose, for it
is most difficult to describe the minor differences which often serve to
distinguish one colour from another. Instead of doing so, we will point out
in some detail the methods of carrying out the various tests, and advise all
dyers to carry these out for themselves on samples dyed with known
colours, and when they have an unknown colour to test to make tests
comparatively with known colours that they think are likely to have been
used in the production of the dyed fabric they are testing.
One very common method is to spot the fabric, that is, to put a drop of the
reagent on it, usually with the end of the stopper of the reagent bottle, and
to observe the colour changes, if any, which ensue. This is a very useful test
and should not be omitted, and it is often employed in the testing of indigo
dyed goods with nitric acid, those of logwood with hydrochloric acid,
TESTING OF THE COLOUR OF DYED FABRICS.
It is frequently desirable that dyers should be able to ascertain with some
degree of accuracy what dyes have been used to dye any particular samples
of dyed cloth that has been offered to them to match. In these days of the
thousand and one different dyes that are known it is by no means an easy
thing to do; and when, as is most often the case, two or three dye-stuffs
have been used in the production of a shade, the difficulty is materially
increased.
The only available method is to try the effect of various acid and alkaline
reagents on the sample, noting whether any change of colour occurs, and
judging accordingly. It would be a good thing for dyers to accustom
themselves to test the dyeings they do, and so accumulate a fund of
practical experience which will stand them in good stead whenever they
have occasion to examine a dyed pattern of unknown origin.
The limits of this book does not permit of there being given a series of
elaborate tables showing the action of various chemical reagents on fabrics
dyed with various colours; and such, indeed, serve very little purpose, for it
is most difficult to describe the minor differences which often serve to
distinguish one colour from another. Instead of doing so, we will point out
in some detail the methods of carrying out the various tests, and advise all
dyers to carry these out for themselves on samples dyed with known
colours, and when they have an unknown colour to test to make tests
comparatively with known colours that they think are likely to have been
used in the production of the dyed fabric they are testing.
One very common method is to spot the fabric, that is, to put a drop of the
reagent on it, usually with the end of the stopper of the reagent bottle, and
to observe the colour changes, if any, which ensue. This is a very useful test
and should not be omitted, and it is often employed in the testing of indigo
dyed goods with nitric acid, those of logwood with hydrochloric acid,
Page 234
alizarine with caustic soda, and many others. It is simple and easy to carry
out, and only takes a few minutes.
To make a complete series of tests of dyed fabrics there should be provided
the following reagents:—
1. Strong sulphuric acid, as bought.
2. Dilute sulphuric acid, being the strong acid diluted with twenty times its
volume of water.
3. Concentrated hydrochloric acid.
4. Dilute hydrochloric acid, 1 acid to 20 water.
5. Concentrated nitric acid.
6. Dilute nitric acid, 1 acid to 20 water.
7. Acetic acid.
8. Caustic soda solution, 5 grams in 100 c.c. water.
9. Ammonia (strong).
10. Dilute ammonia, 1 strong ammonia to 10 water.
11. Carbonate of soda solution, 6 grams in 100 c.c. water.
12. Bleaching powder solution, 2° Tw.
13. Bisulphite of soda, 72° Tw.
14. Stannous chloride, 10 grams crystals in 100 c.c. water, with a little
hydrochloric acid.
15. Methylated spirit.
Small swatches of the dyed goods are put in clean porcelain basins, and
some of these solutions poured over them. Any change of colour of the
cloth is noted, as well as whether any colour is imparted to the solutions.
After making observations of the effects in the cold the liquids may be
warmed and the results again noted. After being treated with the acids the
out, and only takes a few minutes.
To make a complete series of tests of dyed fabrics there should be provided
the following reagents:—
1. Strong sulphuric acid, as bought.
2. Dilute sulphuric acid, being the strong acid diluted with twenty times its
volume of water.
3. Concentrated hydrochloric acid.
4. Dilute hydrochloric acid, 1 acid to 20 water.
5. Concentrated nitric acid.
6. Dilute nitric acid, 1 acid to 20 water.
7. Acetic acid.
8. Caustic soda solution, 5 grams in 100 c.c. water.
9. Ammonia (strong).
10. Dilute ammonia, 1 strong ammonia to 10 water.
11. Carbonate of soda solution, 6 grams in 100 c.c. water.
12. Bleaching powder solution, 2° Tw.
13. Bisulphite of soda, 72° Tw.
14. Stannous chloride, 10 grams crystals in 100 c.c. water, with a little
hydrochloric acid.
15. Methylated spirit.
Small swatches of the dyed goods are put in clean porcelain basins, and
some of these solutions poured over them. Any change of colour of the
cloth is noted, as well as whether any colour is imparted to the solutions.
After making observations of the effects in the cold the liquids may be
warmed and the results again noted. After being treated with the acids the
Page 235
swatches should be well washed with water, when the original colour may
be wholly or partially restored.
To give tables showing the effects of these reagents on the numerous dyes
now known would take up too much room and not serve a very useful
purpose, as such tables, if too much relied on, leave the operator somewhat
uncertain as to what he has before him. The reader will find in Hurst's
Dictionary of Coal-tar Colours some useful notes as to the action of acids
and alkalies on the various colours that may be of service to him.
Alizarine and the series of dye-stuffs to which it has given its name, fustic,
cochineal, logwood and other dyes of a similar class require the fabric to be
mordanted, and the presence of such mordant is occasionally an indirect
proof of the presence of these dyes.
To detect these mordants, a piece of the swatch should be burnt in a
porcelain or platinum crucible over a Bunsen burner, care being taken that
all carbonaceous matter be burnt off. A white ash will indicate the presence
of alumina mordants, red ash that of iron mordants, and a greenish ash
chrome mordants.
To confirm these the following chemical tests may be applied: Boil the ash
left in the crucible with a little strong hydrochloric acid and dilute with
water. Pass a current of sulphuretted hydrogen gas through the solution; if
there be any tin present a brown precipitate of tin sulphide will be obtained.
This can be filtered off. The filtrate is boiled for a short time with nitric
acid, and ammonia is added to the solution when alumina is thrown down
as a white gelatinous precipitate; iron is thrown down as a brown red bulky
precipitate; while chrome is thrown down as a greyish-looking gelatinous
precipitate. The precipitate obtained with the ammonia is filtered off, and a
drop of ammonium sulphide added, when any zinc present will be thrown
down as white precipitate of zinc sulphide: to the filtrate from this
ammonium oxalate may be added, when if lime is present a white
precipitate of calcium oxalate is obtained.
A test for iron is to dissolve some of the ash in a little hydrochloric acid,
and add a few drops of potassium ferrocyanide solution, when if any iron be
present a blue precipitate will be obtained.
be wholly or partially restored.
To give tables showing the effects of these reagents on the numerous dyes
now known would take up too much room and not serve a very useful
purpose, as such tables, if too much relied on, leave the operator somewhat
uncertain as to what he has before him. The reader will find in Hurst's
Dictionary of Coal-tar Colours some useful notes as to the action of acids
and alkalies on the various colours that may be of service to him.
Alizarine and the series of dye-stuffs to which it has given its name, fustic,
cochineal, logwood and other dyes of a similar class require the fabric to be
mordanted, and the presence of such mordant is occasionally an indirect
proof of the presence of these dyes.
To detect these mordants, a piece of the swatch should be burnt in a
porcelain or platinum crucible over a Bunsen burner, care being taken that
all carbonaceous matter be burnt off. A white ash will indicate the presence
of alumina mordants, red ash that of iron mordants, and a greenish ash
chrome mordants.
To confirm these the following chemical tests may be applied: Boil the ash
left in the crucible with a little strong hydrochloric acid and dilute with
water. Pass a current of sulphuretted hydrogen gas through the solution; if
there be any tin present a brown precipitate of tin sulphide will be obtained.
This can be filtered off. The filtrate is boiled for a short time with nitric
acid, and ammonia is added to the solution when alumina is thrown down
as a white gelatinous precipitate; iron is thrown down as a brown red bulky
precipitate; while chrome is thrown down as a greyish-looking gelatinous
precipitate. The precipitate obtained with the ammonia is filtered off, and a
drop of ammonium sulphide added, when any zinc present will be thrown
down as white precipitate of zinc sulphide: to the filtrate from this
ammonium oxalate may be added, when if lime is present a white
precipitate of calcium oxalate is obtained.
A test for iron is to dissolve some of the ash in a little hydrochloric acid,
and add a few drops of potassium ferrocyanide solution, when if any iron be
present a blue precipitate will be obtained.
Page 236
To make more certain of the presence of chrome, heat a little of the ash of
the cloth with caustic soda and chlorate of soda in a porcelain crucible until
well fused, then dissolve in water, acidify with acetic acid and add lead
acetate; a yellow precipitate indicates the presence of chrome.
A book on qualitative chemical analysis should be referred to for further
details and tests for metallic mordants.
The fastness of colours to light, air, rubbing, washing, soaping, acids and
alkalies is a feature of some considerable importance. There are indeed few
colours that will resist all these influences, and such are fully entitled to be
called fast. The decree of fastness varies very considerably. Some colours
will resist acids and alkalies well, but are not fast to light and air; some will
resist washing and soaping, but are not fast to acids; Some may be fast to
light, but are not so to washing. The following notes will show how to test
these features:—
Fastness to Light and Air.—This is simply tested by hanging a piece of
the dyed cloth in the air, keeping a piece in a drawer to refer to, so that the
influence on the original colour can be noted from time to time. If the piece
is left out in the open one gets not only the effect of light but also that of
climate on the colour, and there is no doubt wind, rain, hail and snow have
some influence on the fading of the colour.
If the piece is exposed under glass, the climatic influences do not come into
play, and one gets the effect of light alone.
In making tests of fastness, the dyer will and does pay due regard to the
character of the influences that the material will be subjected to in actual
use, and these vary very considerably; thus the colour of underclothing need
not be fast to light, for it is rarely subjected to that agent of destruction. On
the other hand it must be fast to washing, for that is an operation to which
underclothing is subjected week by week.
Window curtains are much exposed to light and air, and, therefore, colours
in which they are dyed should be fast to light and air. On the other hand
these curtains are rarely washed, and so the colour need not be quite fast to
washing. And so with other kinds of fabrics, there are scarcely two kinds
the cloth with caustic soda and chlorate of soda in a porcelain crucible until
well fused, then dissolve in water, acidify with acetic acid and add lead
acetate; a yellow precipitate indicates the presence of chrome.
A book on qualitative chemical analysis should be referred to for further
details and tests for metallic mordants.
The fastness of colours to light, air, rubbing, washing, soaping, acids and
alkalies is a feature of some considerable importance. There are indeed few
colours that will resist all these influences, and such are fully entitled to be
called fast. The decree of fastness varies very considerably. Some colours
will resist acids and alkalies well, but are not fast to light and air; some will
resist washing and soaping, but are not fast to acids; Some may be fast to
light, but are not so to washing. The following notes will show how to test
these features:—
Fastness to Light and Air.—This is simply tested by hanging a piece of
the dyed cloth in the air, keeping a piece in a drawer to refer to, so that the
influence on the original colour can be noted from time to time. If the piece
is left out in the open one gets not only the effect of light but also that of
climate on the colour, and there is no doubt wind, rain, hail and snow have
some influence on the fading of the colour.
If the piece is exposed under glass, the climatic influences do not come into
play, and one gets the effect of light alone.
In making tests of fastness, the dyer will and does pay due regard to the
character of the influences that the material will be subjected to in actual
use, and these vary very considerably; thus the colour of underclothing need
not be fast to light, for it is rarely subjected to that agent of destruction. On
the other hand it must be fast to washing, for that is an operation to which
underclothing is subjected week by week.
Window curtains are much exposed to light and air, and, therefore, colours
in which they are dyed should be fast to light and air. On the other hand
these curtains are rarely washed, and so the colour need not be quite fast to
washing. And so with other kinds of fabrics, there are scarcely two kinds
Page 237
which are subjected to the same influences, and require the colours to have
the same degree of fastness.
The fastness to rubbing is generally tested by rubbing the dyed cloth on a
piece of white paper.
Fastness to Washing.—This is generally tested by boiling a swatch of the
cloth in a solution of soap containing 4 grams of a good neutral curd soap
per litre for ten minutes and noting the effect—whether the soap solution
becomes coloured and to what degree, or whether it remains colourless, and
also whether the colour of the swatch has changed at all.
One very important point in connection with the soaping test is whether a
colour will run into a white fabric that may be soaped along with it. This is
tested by twisting strands of the dyed yarn or cloth with white yarn or cloth
and boiling them in the soap liquor for ten minutes and then noting the
effect, particularly observing whether the white pieces have taken up any
colour.
Fastness to acids and fastness to alkalies is observed while carrying out the
various acid and alkali tests given above.
the same degree of fastness.
The fastness to rubbing is generally tested by rubbing the dyed cloth on a
piece of white paper.
Fastness to Washing.—This is generally tested by boiling a swatch of the
cloth in a solution of soap containing 4 grams of a good neutral curd soap
per litre for ten minutes and noting the effect—whether the soap solution
becomes coloured and to what degree, or whether it remains colourless, and
also whether the colour of the swatch has changed at all.
One very important point in connection with the soaping test is whether a
colour will run into a white fabric that may be soaped along with it. This is
tested by twisting strands of the dyed yarn or cloth with white yarn or cloth
and boiling them in the soap liquor for ten minutes and then noting the
effect, particularly observing whether the white pieces have taken up any
colour.
Fastness to acids and fastness to alkalies is observed while carrying out the
various acid and alkali tests given above.
Page 238
CHAPTER IX.
EXPERIMENTAL DYEING AND COMPARATIVE DYE TESTING.
Every dyer ought to be able to make experiments in the mordanting and
dyeing of textile fibres for the purpose of ascertaining the best methods of
applying mordants or dye-stuffs, the best methods of obtaining any desired
shade, and for the purpose of making comparative tests of dyes or
mordanting materials with the object of determining their strength and
value. This is not by any means difficult, nor does it involve the use of any
expensive apparatus, so that a dyer need not hesitate to set up a small
dyeing laboratory for fear of the expense which it might entail.
In order to carry out the work indicated above there will be required several
pieces of apparatus. First, a small chemical balance, one that will carry 100
grams in each pan is quite large enough; and such a one, quite accurate
enough for this work, can be bought for 25s. to 30s., while if the dyer be too
poor even for this, a cheap pair of apothecaries' scales might be used. It is
advisable to procure a set of gram weights, and to get accustomed to them,
which is not a very difficult task.
In using the balance always put the substance to be weighed on the left-
hand pan, and the weights on the right-hand pan. Never put chemicals of
any kind direct on the pan, but weigh them in a watch glass, small porcelain
basin, or glass beaker, which has first been weighed, according to the nature
of the material which is being weighed. The sets of weights are always
fitted into a block or box, and every time they are used they should be put
back into their proper place.
The experimenter will find it convenient to provide himself with a few
small porcelain basins, glass beakers, cubic centimetre measures, two or
three 200 c.c. flasks with a mark on the neck, a few pipettes of various
sizes, 10 c.c., 20 c.c., 25 c.c.
The most important feature is the dyeing apparatus. Where only a single
dye test is to be made, a small copper or enamelled iron saucepan, such as
EXPERIMENTAL DYEING AND COMPARATIVE DYE TESTING.
Every dyer ought to be able to make experiments in the mordanting and
dyeing of textile fibres for the purpose of ascertaining the best methods of
applying mordants or dye-stuffs, the best methods of obtaining any desired
shade, and for the purpose of making comparative tests of dyes or
mordanting materials with the object of determining their strength and
value. This is not by any means difficult, nor does it involve the use of any
expensive apparatus, so that a dyer need not hesitate to set up a small
dyeing laboratory for fear of the expense which it might entail.
In order to carry out the work indicated above there will be required several
pieces of apparatus. First, a small chemical balance, one that will carry 100
grams in each pan is quite large enough; and such a one, quite accurate
enough for this work, can be bought for 25s. to 30s., while if the dyer be too
poor even for this, a cheap pair of apothecaries' scales might be used. It is
advisable to procure a set of gram weights, and to get accustomed to them,
which is not a very difficult task.
In using the balance always put the substance to be weighed on the left-
hand pan, and the weights on the right-hand pan. Never put chemicals of
any kind direct on the pan, but weigh them in a watch glass, small porcelain
basin, or glass beaker, which has first been weighed, according to the nature
of the material which is being weighed. The sets of weights are always
fitted into a block or box, and every time they are used they should be put
back into their proper place.
The experimenter will find it convenient to provide himself with a few
small porcelain basins, glass beakers, cubic centimetre measures, two or
three 200 c.c. flasks with a mark on the neck, a few pipettes of various
sizes, 10 c.c., 20 c.c., 25 c.c.
The most important feature is the dyeing apparatus. Where only a single
dye test is to be made, a small copper or enamelled iron saucepan, such as
Page 239
can be bought at any ironmonger's, may be used; this may conveniently be
heated by a gas boiling burner, such as can also be bought at an
ironmonger's or plumber's for 2s.
FIG. 44.—Experimental Dye-bath.
It is, however, advisable to have means whereby several dyeing
experiments can be made at one time and under precisely the same
conditions, and this cannot be done by using the simple means noted above.
To be able to make perfectly comparative dyeing experiments it is best to
use porcelain dye-pots—these may be bought from most dealers in
chemical apparatus—and to heat them in a water-bath arrangement.
The simplest arrangement is sketched in Fig. 44; it consists of a copper bath
measuring 15 inches long by 10½ inches broad and 6½ inches deep—this is
covered by a lid in which are six apertures to take the porcelain dye-baths.
The bath is heated by two round gas boiling burners of the type already
referred to.
The copper bath is filled with water, which, on being heated to the boil by
the gas burners, heats up the dye liquids in the dye-pots. The temperature in
the dye-pots under such conditions can never reach the boiling point; where
it is desirable, as in some cases of wool mordanting and dyeing, that it
should boil, there should be added to the water in the copper bath a quantity
of calcium chloride, which forms a solution that has a much higher boiling
heated by a gas boiling burner, such as can also be bought at an
ironmonger's or plumber's for 2s.
FIG. 44.—Experimental Dye-bath.
It is, however, advisable to have means whereby several dyeing
experiments can be made at one time and under precisely the same
conditions, and this cannot be done by using the simple means noted above.
To be able to make perfectly comparative dyeing experiments it is best to
use porcelain dye-pots—these may be bought from most dealers in
chemical apparatus—and to heat them in a water-bath arrangement.
The simplest arrangement is sketched in Fig. 44; it consists of a copper bath
measuring 15 inches long by 10½ inches broad and 6½ inches deep—this is
covered by a lid in which are six apertures to take the porcelain dye-baths.
The bath is heated by two round gas boiling burners of the type already
referred to.
The copper bath is filled with water, which, on being heated to the boil by
the gas burners, heats up the dye liquids in the dye-pots. The temperature in
the dye-pots under such conditions can never reach the boiling point; where
it is desirable, as in some cases of wool mordanting and dyeing, that it
should boil, there should be added to the water in the copper bath a quantity
of calcium chloride, which forms a solution that has a much higher boiling
Page 240
point than that of water, and so the dye liquors in the dye-pots may be
heated up to the boil.
An objection might be raised that with such an apparatus the temperature in
every part of the bath may not be uniform, and so the temperature of the
dye-liquors in the pots may vary also, and differences of temperature often
have a considerable influence on the shade of the colour which is being
dyed. This is a minor objection, which is more academic in its origin than of
practical importance. To obviate this Mr. William Marshall of the Rochdale
Technical School has devised a circular form of dye-bath, in which the
temperature in every part can be kept quite uniform.
The dyeing laboratories of technical schools and colleges are generally
provided with a more elaborate set of dyeing appliances. These, in the latest
constructed, consist of a copper bath supported on a hollow pair of
trunnions, that the bath can be turned over if needed. Into the bath are
firmly fixed three earthenware or porcelain dye-pots; steam for heating can
be sent through the trunnions. After the dyeing tests have been made the
apparatus can be turned over, and the contents of the dye-pots emptied into
a sink which is provided for the purpose.
Many other pieces of apparatus have been devised and made for the
purpose of carrying on dyeing experiments on the small scale, but it will not
be needful to describe these in detail. After all no more efficient apparatus
can be desired than that described above.
Dyeing experiments can be made with either yarns or pieces of cloth—
swatches, as they are commonly called—a very convenient size is a small
skein of yarn or a piece of cloth having a weight of 5 grams. These test
skeins or pieces ought to be well washed in hot water before use, so that
they are clean and free from any size or grease. A little soda or soap will
facilitate the cleansing process.
In carrying out a dyeing test the dye-pot should be filled with the water
required, using as little as can be consistent with the dye swatch being
handled comfortably therein, then there is added the required mordants,
chemicals, dyes, etc., according to the character of the work which is being
done.
heated up to the boil.
An objection might be raised that with such an apparatus the temperature in
every part of the bath may not be uniform, and so the temperature of the
dye-liquors in the pots may vary also, and differences of temperature often
have a considerable influence on the shade of the colour which is being
dyed. This is a minor objection, which is more academic in its origin than of
practical importance. To obviate this Mr. William Marshall of the Rochdale
Technical School has devised a circular form of dye-bath, in which the
temperature in every part can be kept quite uniform.
The dyeing laboratories of technical schools and colleges are generally
provided with a more elaborate set of dyeing appliances. These, in the latest
constructed, consist of a copper bath supported on a hollow pair of
trunnions, that the bath can be turned over if needed. Into the bath are
firmly fixed three earthenware or porcelain dye-pots; steam for heating can
be sent through the trunnions. After the dyeing tests have been made the
apparatus can be turned over, and the contents of the dye-pots emptied into
a sink which is provided for the purpose.
Many other pieces of apparatus have been devised and made for the
purpose of carrying on dyeing experiments on the small scale, but it will not
be needful to describe these in detail. After all no more efficient apparatus
can be desired than that described above.
Dyeing experiments can be made with either yarns or pieces of cloth—
swatches, as they are commonly called—a very convenient size is a small
skein of yarn or a piece of cloth having a weight of 5 grams. These test
skeins or pieces ought to be well washed in hot water before use, so that
they are clean and free from any size or grease. A little soda or soap will
facilitate the cleansing process.
In carrying out a dyeing test the dye-pot should be filled with the water
required, using as little as can be consistent with the dye swatch being
handled comfortably therein, then there is added the required mordants,
chemicals, dyes, etc., according to the character of the work which is being
done.
Page 241
Of such chemicals as soda, caustic soda, sodium sulphate (Glauber's salt),
tartar, bichromate of potash, it will be found convenient to prepare stock
solutions of known strength, say 50 grams per litre, and then by means of a
pipette any required quantity can be conveniently added. The same plan
might be followed in the case of dyes which are constantly in use, in this
case, 5 grams per litre will be found strong enough.
Supposing it is desired to make a test of a sample of direct red, using the
following proportions: 2 per cent. dye-stuff, 3 per cent. soda, 15 per cent.
Glauber's salt, and the weight of the swatch which is being used is 5 grams.
The following calculations are to be made to give the quantities of the
ingredients required.
For the dye-stuff:—
5 (weight of swatch) multiplied by 2 (per cent. of dye) and divided by 100
equals—
5x2
——— = 0.1 gram dye
100
For the soda we have similarly:—
5x3
——— = 0.15 gram soda.
100
For the Glauber's salt:—
5 x 15
———— = 0.75 gram Glauber's salt.
100
These quantities may be weighed out and added to the dye-bath, or if
solutions are kept, a calculation can be made as to the number of cubic
centimetres which contain the above quantities, and these measured out and
added to the dye-bath.
When all is ready, the bath is heated up, the swatch entered, and the work of
the test entered upon.
tartar, bichromate of potash, it will be found convenient to prepare stock
solutions of known strength, say 50 grams per litre, and then by means of a
pipette any required quantity can be conveniently added. The same plan
might be followed in the case of dyes which are constantly in use, in this
case, 5 grams per litre will be found strong enough.
Supposing it is desired to make a test of a sample of direct red, using the
following proportions: 2 per cent. dye-stuff, 3 per cent. soda, 15 per cent.
Glauber's salt, and the weight of the swatch which is being used is 5 grams.
The following calculations are to be made to give the quantities of the
ingredients required.
For the dye-stuff:—
5 (weight of swatch) multiplied by 2 (per cent. of dye) and divided by 100
equals—
5x2
——— = 0.1 gram dye
100
For the soda we have similarly:—
5x3
——— = 0.15 gram soda.
100
For the Glauber's salt:—
5 x 15
———— = 0.75 gram Glauber's salt.
100
These quantities may be weighed out and added to the dye-bath, or if
solutions are kept, a calculation can be made as to the number of cubic
centimetres which contain the above quantities, and these measured out and
added to the dye-bath.
When all is ready, the bath is heated up, the swatch entered, and the work of
the test entered upon.
Page 242
Students are recommended to make experiments on such points as:—
The shades obtained by using various proportions of dye-stuffs.
The influence of various assistants—common salt, soda, Glauber's salt,
borax, phosphate of soda—in the bath.
The influence of varying proportions of mordants on the shade of dyeing.
The value of various assistants, tartar, oxalic acid, lactic acid, sulphuric
acid, on the fixation of mordants.
The relative value of different tannin matters, etc.
Each dyer should make himself a pattern-book into which he should enter
his tests, with full particulars as to how they have been produced at the side.
It is important that a dyer should be able to make comparative dye tests to
ascertain the relative strength of any two, or more samples of dyes which
may be sent to him. This is not difficult, but requires considerable care in
carrying out the various operations involved.
Of each of the samples of dyes 0.5 gram should be weighed out and
dissolved in 100 c.c. of water, care being taken that every portion of the dye
is dissolved before any of the solution is used in making up the dye-vats.
Care should also be taken that the skeins of yarn or swatches of cloth are
exactly equal in weight; that the same volume of water is placed in each of
the dye-pots; that the same amount of sulphate of soda or other dye
assistants are added; that the quantities of dye-stuff and solutions used are
equal; in fact, that in all respects the conditions of dyeing are exactly the
same, such, in fact, being the vital conditions in making comparative dye
tests of the actual dyeing strength of several samples of dyes.
After the swatches have been dyed they are rinsed and then dried, when the
depth of shade dyed on them may be compared one with another. To
prevent any mistakes, it is well to mark the swatches with one, two, three or
more cuts as may be required.
It is easier to ascertain if two dyes are different in strength of colour than to
ascertain the relative difference between them. There are two plans
The shades obtained by using various proportions of dye-stuffs.
The influence of various assistants—common salt, soda, Glauber's salt,
borax, phosphate of soda—in the bath.
The influence of varying proportions of mordants on the shade of dyeing.
The value of various assistants, tartar, oxalic acid, lactic acid, sulphuric
acid, on the fixation of mordants.
The relative value of different tannin matters, etc.
Each dyer should make himself a pattern-book into which he should enter
his tests, with full particulars as to how they have been produced at the side.
It is important that a dyer should be able to make comparative dye tests to
ascertain the relative strength of any two, or more samples of dyes which
may be sent to him. This is not difficult, but requires considerable care in
carrying out the various operations involved.
Of each of the samples of dyes 0.5 gram should be weighed out and
dissolved in 100 c.c. of water, care being taken that every portion of the dye
is dissolved before any of the solution is used in making up the dye-vats.
Care should also be taken that the skeins of yarn or swatches of cloth are
exactly equal in weight; that the same volume of water is placed in each of
the dye-pots; that the same amount of sulphate of soda or other dye
assistants are added; that the quantities of dye-stuff and solutions used are
equal; in fact, that in all respects the conditions of dyeing are exactly the
same, such, in fact, being the vital conditions in making comparative dye
tests of the actual dyeing strength of several samples of dyes.
After the swatches have been dyed they are rinsed and then dried, when the
depth of shade dyed on them may be compared one with another. To
prevent any mistakes, it is well to mark the swatches with one, two, three or
more cuts as may be required.
It is easier to ascertain if two dyes are different in strength of colour than to
ascertain the relative difference between them. There are two plans
Page 243
available for this purpose—one is a dyeing test, the other is a colorimetric
test made with the solutions of the dyes.
Dyeing Test.—This method of ascertaining the relative value of two dyes
as regards strength of colour is carried out as follows: A preliminary test
will show which is stronger than the other. Then there is prepared a series of
dye-vats—one contains a swatch with the deepest of the two dyes, which is
taken as the standard; the others, swatches with the other dye, but
containing 2, 5 and 10 per cent. more dyestuff, and all these swatches are
dyed together, and after drying a comparison can be made between them
and the standard swatch and a judgment formed as to the relative strength of
the two dyes. A little experience will soon enable the dyer to form a correct
judgment of the difference in strength between two samples of dye-stuff.
Colorimetric Test.—This is based on the principle that the colour of a
solution of dye-stuff will be proportionate to its strength. Two white glass
tubes equal in diameter are taken. Solutions of the dye-stuff, 0.5 gram in
100 c.c. of water, are prepared, care being taken that the solution is
complete. Of one of these solutions 5 c.c. is taken and placed in one of the
glass tubes, and 5 c.c. of the other solution is placed in the other glass tube.
Of water 25 c.c. is now added to each tube, and then the colour of the
diluted liquids is compared by looking through them in a good light. That
sample which gives the deeper solution is the stronger in colouring power.
By diluting the stronger solution with water until it is of the same depth of
colour as the weaker, it may be assumed that the depth of the columns of
liquid in the two tubes is in proportion to the relative strength of the two
samples. Thus, if in one tube there are 30 c. of liquid and in the other 25 c.,
then the relative strength is as 30 to 25; and if the first is taken as the
standard at 100, a proportion sum gives
30 : 25 : : 100 : 83.3,
that is, the weaker sample has only 83.3 per cent, of the strength of the
stronger sample.
test made with the solutions of the dyes.
Dyeing Test.—This method of ascertaining the relative value of two dyes
as regards strength of colour is carried out as follows: A preliminary test
will show which is stronger than the other. Then there is prepared a series of
dye-vats—one contains a swatch with the deepest of the two dyes, which is
taken as the standard; the others, swatches with the other dye, but
containing 2, 5 and 10 per cent. more dyestuff, and all these swatches are
dyed together, and after drying a comparison can be made between them
and the standard swatch and a judgment formed as to the relative strength of
the two dyes. A little experience will soon enable the dyer to form a correct
judgment of the difference in strength between two samples of dye-stuff.
Colorimetric Test.—This is based on the principle that the colour of a
solution of dye-stuff will be proportionate to its strength. Two white glass
tubes equal in diameter are taken. Solutions of the dye-stuff, 0.5 gram in
100 c.c. of water, are prepared, care being taken that the solution is
complete. Of one of these solutions 5 c.c. is taken and placed in one of the
glass tubes, and 5 c.c. of the other solution is placed in the other glass tube.
Of water 25 c.c. is now added to each tube, and then the colour of the
diluted liquids is compared by looking through them in a good light. That
sample which gives the deeper solution is the stronger in colouring power.
By diluting the stronger solution with water until it is of the same depth of
colour as the weaker, it may be assumed that the depth of the columns of
liquid in the two tubes is in proportion to the relative strength of the two
samples. Thus, if in one tube there are 30 c. of liquid and in the other 25 c.,
then the relative strength is as 30 to 25; and if the first is taken as the
standard at 100, a proportion sum gives
30 : 25 : : 100 : 83.3,
that is, the weaker sample has only 83.3 per cent, of the strength of the
stronger sample.
Page 244
INDEX.
COMPILED BY MISS GRACE GREENWOOD, B.A. (LOND.).
COMPILED BY MISS GRACE GREENWOOD, B.A. (LOND.).
Page 245
A.
Acetate liquor, 190, 193.
— of alumina, 170.
— of chrome, 180.
— of lead, 159.
Acetic acid, 174, 180, 184, 227, 231.
Acid dyes;, 83, 159.
— dye-stuffs, topping with, 228.
— green, 84, 221, 229, 234.
— magenta, 84. 220.
— violet, 229.
— — 6 B, 211, 218.
— yellow, 220.
Acids, action of, on cellulose, 9.
Acridine orange N O, 231, 232.
Affinity of dye-stuff for fibre, 109.
Albumens, 4.
Algarobilla, 147, 148.
Alizarine, 18, 150, 157, 169, 180, 259.
— blue, 173, 174.
— — paste, 174.
— dyed goods, test of, 258.
— dyes, 84.
— oil, 170.
— orange, 173. 174.
— pink, 172.
— purple, 172.
— red, 171, 248.
Acetate liquor, 190, 193.
— of alumina, 170.
— of chrome, 180.
— of lead, 159.
Acetic acid, 174, 180, 184, 227, 231.
Acid dyes;, 83, 159.
— dye-stuffs, topping with, 228.
— green, 84, 221, 229, 234.
— magenta, 84. 220.
— violet, 229.
— — 6 B, 211, 218.
— yellow, 220.
Acids, action of, on cellulose, 9.
Acridine orange N O, 231, 232.
Affinity of dye-stuff for fibre, 109.
Albumens, 4.
Algarobilla, 147, 148.
Alizarine, 18, 150, 157, 169, 180, 259.
— blue, 173, 174.
— — paste, 174.
— dyed goods, test of, 258.
— dyes, 84.
— oil, 170.
— orange, 173. 174.
— pink, 172.
— purple, 172.
— red, 171, 248.
Page 246
— violet, 172.
— yellow N, 180.
Alkali blue B, 233.
— — 3 B, 233.
— — 6 B, 217, 232, 233, 238.
— yellow R, 209.
Alkalies, action of, on cotton, 6.
Alkaline blue, 211, 214, 215, 216.
— copper solution, 196.
Alpha-naphthol, 130, 132, 133, 186, 187, 188.
Alpha-naphthylamine, 182, 185, 187, 188.
— claret, 197.
Alum, 159, 164, 165. 166, 167.
Alumina, 157.
— acetate, 179.
— mordants, 259.
Amidazol blacks, 79, 121, 179.
— black G, 124, 126.
— brown, 121.
— cachou, 127.
— cutch, 126.
— drab, 127.
— green B, 127.
— — Y, 127.
— olive, 121.
Amidoazobenzene, 185, 187, 188.
Amido-azo bodies, 183.
— yellow N, 180.
Alkali blue B, 233.
— — 3 B, 233.
— — 6 B, 217, 232, 233, 238.
— yellow R, 209.
Alkalies, action of, on cotton, 6.
Alkaline blue, 211, 214, 215, 216.
— copper solution, 196.
Alpha-naphthol, 130, 132, 133, 186, 187, 188.
Alpha-naphthylamine, 182, 185, 187, 188.
— claret, 197.
Alum, 159, 164, 165. 166, 167.
Alumina, 157.
— acetate, 179.
— mordants, 259.
Amidazol blacks, 79, 121, 179.
— black G, 124, 126.
— brown, 121.
— cachou, 127.
— cutch, 126.
— drab, 127.
— green B, 127.
— — Y, 127.
— olive, 121.
Amidoazobenzene, 185, 187, 188.
Amido-azo bodies, 183.
Page 247
— compounds, 182.
Amidoazotoluol, 198.
— garnet, 198.
Amido bases, diazotisation of, 182.
— groups, 130.
Amido-diphenylamine, 183.
Amido-phenylamine, 133.
Amines, 181.
Ammonia, 174, 180.
— soda, 173.
Ammoniacal copper, 21.
Ammonium chloride, 180, 207.
Amyloid, 12.
Aniline, 13, 182, 184, 185, 186, 188.
— black, 79, 205, 234.
— grey B, 229, 231.
— hydrochloride, 181.
— oil, 206, 207.
— salt, 207.
Anisidine, 183.
Anthracene brown, 174.
Anthrapurpurine, 171.
Antimony fluoride, 147.
Amidoazotoluol, 198.
— garnet, 198.
Amido bases, diazotisation of, 182.
— groups, 130.
Amido-diphenylamine, 183.
Amido-phenylamine, 133.
Amines, 181.
Ammonia, 174, 180.
— soda, 173.
Ammoniacal copper, 21.
Ammonium chloride, 180, 207.
Amyloid, 12.
Aniline, 13, 182, 184, 185, 186, 188.
— black, 79, 205, 234.
— grey B, 229, 231.
— hydrochloride, 181.
— oil, 206, 207.
— salt, 207.
Anisidine, 183.
Anthracene brown, 174.
Anthrapurpurine, 171.
Antimony fluoride, 147.
Page 248
—— oxalate, 147.
Appretur der Gewebe, 252.
Archil substitute N, 229.
Artificial silk, 15.
Atlas red R, 102.
Auramine, 18, 147, 153.
—— G. 154.
—— I I, 151, 152, 153, 230, 231, 232.
Auroline, 209.
Automatic yarn-dryer, 253.
Azine green, T O, 231.
Azo-acid dyes, 210.
—— yellow, 211.
Azo blue, 85, 211.
—— —— 2 R, 228.
—— compounds, 182.
—— dyes, 18, 129, 159, 181.
—— mauve. 100, 210.
Appretur der Gewebe, 252.
Archil substitute N, 229.
Artificial silk, 15.
Atlas red R, 102.
Auramine, 18, 147, 153.
—— G. 154.
—— I I, 151, 152, 153, 230, 231, 232.
Auroline, 209.
Automatic yarn-dryer, 253.
Azine green, T O, 231.
Azo-acid dyes, 210.
—— yellow, 211.
Azo blue, 85, 211.
—— —— 2 R, 228.
—— compounds, 182.
—— dyes, 18, 129, 159, 181.
—— mauve. 100, 210.
Page 249
—— —— A M, 99, 106.
—— orseille B B, 229.
—— red A, 211, 214, 215, 216, 217, 223, 229.
—— rubine A, 229.
—— scarlet, 84.
—— violet, 100.
Azophor orange M N, 195.
—— red P N, 139, 141, 193,195.
B.
Barlow kiers, 30, 32.
Barwood, 18, 156, 178.
Basic dyes, 83.
—— —— topping with, 145.
—— dye-stuffs, topping with, 228.
Bast fibre, 2.
Bayer developer, 133.
Beaumont's cop-dyeing machine, 67.
Beige, 167.
—— orseille B B, 229.
—— red A, 211, 214, 215, 216, 217, 223, 229.
—— rubine A, 229.
—— scarlet, 84.
—— violet, 100.
Azophor orange M N, 195.
—— red P N, 139, 141, 193,195.
B.
Barlow kiers, 30, 32.
Barwood, 18, 156, 178.
Basic dyes, 83.
—— —— topping with, 145.
—— dye-stuffs, topping with, 228.
Bast fibre, 2.
Bayer developer, 133.
Beaumont's cop-dyeing machine, 67.
Beige, 167.
Page 250
Benzo azurine, 101, 107, 112.
—— —— G, 93, 101, 146, 201.
—— —— 3 G, 211.
—— —— R, 210.
—— black blue, 164.
—— blue, 227.
—— —— 3 B, 94.
—— —— black G, 210.
—— —— R W, 115.
—— brown, 92.
—— —— G, 100, 103.
—— —— N B, 100, 103.
—— —— N B X, 101.
—— chrome black blue B, 96, 118.
—— —— brown G, 118.
—— —— —— 5 G, 113.
—— —— —— R, 118.
—— —— —— 2 R, 117.
—— dyes, 18, 85, 208, 225.
—— —— G, 93, 101, 146, 201.
—— —— 3 G, 211.
—— —— R, 210.
—— black blue, 164.
—— blue, 227.
—— —— 3 B, 94.
—— —— black G, 210.
—— —— R W, 115.
—— brown, 92.
—— —— G, 100, 103.
—— —— N B, 100, 103.
—— —— N B X, 101.
—— chrome black blue B, 96, 118.
—— —— brown G, 118.
—— —— —— 5 G, 113.
—— —— —— R, 118.
—— —— —— 2 R, 117.
—— dyes, 18, 85, 208, 225.
Page 251
—— fast grey, 102.
—— —— scarlet 4 B S, 107.
—— green, B B, 93.
—— —— G, 92, 145.
Benzo-nitrol black B, 142.
—— brown G, 144.
—— dark brown N, 144.
—— developer, 141.
—— dyes, 139.
Benzo olive, 92.
—— orange R, 87, 92.
—— purpurine, 85, 101, 107.
—— —— B, 100, 210.
—— —— 4 B, 87, 89, 210, 217.
—— —— 6 B, 146.
—— —— 10 B, 210, 217.
Beta-naphthol, 130, 131, 132, 184, 186, 187, 188, 189, 191, 196, 235.
Beta-naphthylamine, 182, 185, 187, 188.
—— —— scarlet 4 B S, 107.
—— green, B B, 93.
—— —— G, 92, 145.
Benzo-nitrol black B, 142.
—— brown G, 144.
—— dark brown N, 144.
—— developer, 141.
—— dyes, 139.
Benzo olive, 92.
—— orange R, 87, 92.
—— purpurine, 85, 101, 107.
—— —— B, 100, 210.
—— —— 4 B, 87, 89, 210, 217.
—— —— 6 B, 146.
—— —— 10 B, 210, 217.
Beta-naphthol, 130, 131, 132, 184, 186, 187, 188, 189, 191, 196, 235.
Beta-naphthylamine, 182, 185, 187, 188.
Page 252
—— red, 196.
Bichromate of potash, 164, 165, 166, 167, 177, 179, 181.
—— of soda, 206.
Biebrich orange, 128.
—— scarlet, 128.
Birch's sewing machine, 25.
—— washing machine, 36.
Bismarck brown, 146, 147, 153, 165, 166, 167, 229, 230, 232.
—— —— F F, 231.
Bisulphate of soda, 221, 222, 223.
Black, 104, 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 137, 138, 139, 142, 144,
166, 214, 215, 217.
—— and blue shot, 222, 223.
—— and crimson shot dyes, 237.
—— and green blue shot, 222.
—— and pink shot, 223.
—— and yellow shot, 223.
—— blue, 116.
—— brown, 102, 103, 118, 136, 138.
Bichromate of potash, 164, 165, 166, 167, 177, 179, 181.
—— of soda, 206.
Biebrich orange, 128.
—— scarlet, 128.
Birch's sewing machine, 25.
—— washing machine, 36.
Bismarck brown, 146, 147, 153, 165, 166, 167, 229, 230, 232.
—— —— F F, 231.
Bisulphate of soda, 221, 222, 223.
Black, 104, 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 137, 138, 139, 142, 144,
166, 214, 215, 217.
—— and blue shot, 222, 223.
—— and crimson shot dyes, 237.
—— and green blue shot, 222.
—— and pink shot, 223.
—— and yellow shot, 223.
—— blue, 116.
—— brown, 102, 103, 118, 136, 138.
Page 253
—— dyeing of, 234.
—— iron liquor, 165.
Bleaching of cotton, 24.
— of fine fabrics, 42.
— of yarn, 43.
Blue, 96, 97, 98, 115, 125, 126, 130, 136, 145, 146, 155.
— and gold shot dyes, 237.
— and gold yellow shot, 222.
— and orange shot, 224.
— black, 136, 137, 138, 139, 154, 216, 219.
— developer A, 130.
— — AN, 134.
— green, 114.
— grey, 105.
Bluestone, 164, 165, 166, 178.
Bluish claret red, 187.
— rose, 153.
Borax, 86, 180, 221.
Brazil wood, 84, 156, 178, 179.
Bridson's washing machine, 36.
Bright blue, 95, 97, 98, 145, 151, 215, 217, 230.
— crimson, 232.
— grass green, 93.
— green, 146, 151.
— grey, 106.
— navy, 115, 116.
— olive yellow, 232.
— orange, 92.
—— iron liquor, 165.
Bleaching of cotton, 24.
— of fine fabrics, 42.
— of yarn, 43.
Blue, 96, 97, 98, 115, 125, 126, 130, 136, 145, 146, 155.
— and gold shot dyes, 237.
— and gold yellow shot, 222.
— and orange shot, 224.
— black, 136, 137, 138, 139, 154, 216, 219.
— developer A, 130.
— — AN, 134.
— green, 114.
— grey, 105.
Bluestone, 164, 165, 166, 178.
Bluish claret red, 187.
— rose, 153.
Borax, 86, 180, 221.
Brazil wood, 84, 156, 178, 179.
Bridson's washing machine, 36.
Bright blue, 95, 97, 98, 145, 151, 215, 217, 230.
— crimson, 232.
— grass green, 93.
— green, 146, 151.
— grey, 106.
— navy, 115, 116.
— olive yellow, 232.
— orange, 92.
Page 254
— pea green, 94.
— pink, 90.
— red, 87, 145.
— —lilac, 99.
— rose, 230.
— scarlet, 89, 130, 186.
— sea green, 151.
— straw, 90.
— violet, 231.
— walnut, 143.
— yellow, 90, 143, 154, 213, 214, 215, 229.
Brilliant azurine B, 146.
— — 5 G, 97, 211.
— cochineal 4 R, 222.
— Congo R, 210.
— croceine, 229.
— — 3 B, 237.
— green, 145, 146, 147, 151, 154, 229, 231, 232, 233.
— milling green B, 211.
— orange, 92.
— — G, 103, 218, 232.
— orseille C, 229.
— purpurine, 87.
— — R, 210.
— red, 88.
— rhoduline red B, 151.
— scarlet, 211, 229.
— — G, 211
— violet, 231.
— yellow, 230.
Bronze green, 114, 217.
— grey, 106.
Brown, 101, 103, 117, 120, 127, 128, 130, 144, 164, 174, 180, 218, 232.
— and blue shot dyes, 222, 238.
— pink, 90.
— red, 87, 145.
— —lilac, 99.
— rose, 230.
— scarlet, 89, 130, 186.
— sea green, 151.
— straw, 90.
— violet, 231.
— walnut, 143.
— yellow, 90, 143, 154, 213, 214, 215, 229.
Brilliant azurine B, 146.
— — 5 G, 97, 211.
— cochineal 4 R, 222.
— Congo R, 210.
— croceine, 229.
— — 3 B, 237.
— green, 145, 146, 147, 151, 154, 229, 231, 232, 233.
— milling green B, 211.
— orange, 92.
— — G, 103, 218, 232.
— orseille C, 229.
— purpurine, 87.
— — R, 210.
— red, 88.
— rhoduline red B, 151.
— scarlet, 211, 229.
— — G, 211
— violet, 231.
— yellow, 230.
Bronze green, 114, 217.
— grey, 106.
Brown, 101, 103, 117, 120, 127, 128, 130, 144, 164, 174, 180, 218, 232.
— and blue shot dyes, 222, 238.
Page 255
— and violet shot, 223.
— drab, 100.
Brownish orange, 186.
Buff brown, 102, 118, 126, 135.
— yellow, 91.
C.
Cachou de laval, 100, 121.
Camwood, 156, 178.
Capri blue, 230.
— green, 229.
— — 2 G, 231.
Carbonate of soda, 168, 209,
— of soda lye, 168.
Carbonising of woollen goods, 12.
Catechu, 187.
— brown, 112.
— — F K, 117.
— — G K, 117.
Caustic soda, 180.
— — liquor, 189.
— — lye, 196.
Cellulose, 5, 6.
— di-nitrate, 14, 15.
— hexa-nitrate, 14.
— penta-nitrate, 14.
— drab, 100.
Brownish orange, 186.
Buff brown, 102, 118, 126, 135.
— yellow, 91.
C.
Cachou de laval, 100, 121.
Camwood, 156, 178.
Capri blue, 230.
— green, 229.
— — 2 G, 231.
Carbonate of soda, 168, 209,
— of soda lye, 168.
Carbonising of woollen goods, 12.
Catechu, 187.
— brown, 112.
— — F K, 117.
— — G K, 117.
Caustic soda, 180.
— — liquor, 189.
— — lye, 196.
Cellulose, 5, 6.
— di-nitrate, 14, 15.
— hexa-nitrate, 14.
— penta-nitrate, 14.
Page 256
— tetra-nitrate, 14.
Ceruleine, 180.
Chalk, 180, 181.
Chardonnet's process for making silk, 15.
Chemical reagents, action of, 257.
Chemicing of cotton, 36.
Chemistry of cotton fibre, 1.
Chestnut, 100, 104, 118, 142, 219.
Chicago blue, 112, 227.
— — B, 115, 210.
— — 4 B, 116, 210.
— — 6 B, 95, 97, 114, 116, 146, 210, 217, 232, 233.
— — R, 210.
Chicago blue G, 210.
—— —— 4 R, 99, 100.
—— —— R W, 114, 115, 119.
—— dyes, 85.
Chloramine yellow, 209.
Chloride of copper, 180.
—— of lime, 37.
—— of soda, 207.
Ceruleine, 180.
Chalk, 180, 181.
Chardonnet's process for making silk, 15.
Chemical reagents, action of, 257.
Chemicing of cotton, 36.
Chemistry of cotton fibre, 1.
Chestnut, 100, 104, 118, 142, 219.
Chicago blue, 112, 227.
— — B, 115, 210.
— — 4 B, 116, 210.
— — 6 B, 95, 97, 114, 116, 146, 210, 217, 232, 233.
— — R, 210.
Chicago blue G, 210.
—— —— 4 R, 99, 100.
—— —— R W, 114, 115, 119.
—— dyes, 85.
Chloramine yellow, 209.
Chloride of copper, 180.
—— of lime, 37.
—— of soda, 207.
Page 257
Chlorophenine orange R, 91.
Chocolate brown, 102, 143, 155, 172.
Chromanil black R F, 120.
—— —— 4 R F, 119.
—— brown 2 G, 119.
Chrome, 157.
Chrome-logwood black, 177.
Chrome mordants, 259.
Chromic acid, 17.
Chromine G, 209.
Chromium chloride, 173.
—— fluoride, 112.
—— mordant, 173.
Chrysamine, 85, 92, 101, 210.
—— G, 91, 93, 113, 114, 146.
—— R, 92.
Chrysoidine, 147, 151, 164, 221, 232, 233.
—— R, 232.
Chocolate brown, 102, 143, 155, 172.
Chromanil black R F, 120.
—— —— 4 R F, 119.
—— brown 2 G, 119.
Chrome, 157.
Chrome-logwood black, 177.
Chrome mordants, 259.
Chromic acid, 17.
Chromine G, 209.
Chromium chloride, 173.
—— fluoride, 112.
—— mordant, 173.
Chrysamine, 85, 92, 101, 210.
—— G, 91, 93, 113, 114, 146.
—— R, 92.
Chrysoidine, 147, 151, 164, 221, 232, 233.
—— R, 232.
Page 258
Chrysophenine, 90, 100, 210, 217, 233.
—— G, 114, 119, 232.
Ciliary fibres, 1.
Claret, 89, 146.
—— red, 174.
Clayton yellow, 210.
Cloth-dyeing machine, 76.
Cloth scarlet, 160.
—— washing machine, illustration of, 245, 246, 247.
Cochineal, 156, 259.
Coffee brown, 165.
Collodion, 15.
Colorimetric test for relative value of dyes, 268.
Colouring matter, 3.
—— principle of dye-stuff, 156.
Colour lake, 18.
—— lakes, 156.
Columbia black B, 210, 232.
—— —— F B, 103, 104, 210, 218.
—— G, 114, 119, 232.
Ciliary fibres, 1.
Claret, 89, 146.
—— red, 174.
Clayton yellow, 210.
Cloth-dyeing machine, 76.
Cloth scarlet, 160.
—— washing machine, illustration of, 245, 246, 247.
Cochineal, 156, 259.
Coffee brown, 165.
Collodion, 15.
Colorimetric test for relative value of dyes, 268.
Colouring matter, 3.
—— principle of dye-stuff, 156.
Colour lake, 18.
—— lakes, 156.
Columbia black B, 210, 232.
—— —— F B, 103, 104, 210, 218.
Page 259
—— —— F B B, 105.
—— —— R, 232, 233.
—— blue G, 224.
—— green, 101, 146.
Columbia orange R, 91, 103, 104.
—— red S, 211.
—— yellow, 91, 115, 209.
Comparative dye testing, 262.
Condensed water, 227.
Congo blue 2 B, 95.
—— brown, 210.
—— —— G, 210, 217, 218.
—— Corinth, 232.
—— —— B, 99, 209, 211.
—— —— G. 89, 211, 217, 224.
—— dyes, 18, 85, 208, 225.
—— orange G, 210.
—— —— R, 92, 210.
—— —— R, 232, 233.
—— blue G, 224.
—— green, 101, 146.
Columbia orange R, 91, 103, 104.
—— red S, 211.
—— yellow, 91, 115, 209.
Comparative dye testing, 262.
Condensed water, 227.
Congo blue 2 B, 95.
—— brown, 210.
—— —— G, 210, 217, 218.
—— Corinth, 232.
—— —— B, 99, 209, 211.
—— —— G. 89, 211, 217, 224.
—— dyes, 18, 85, 208, 225.
—— orange G, 210.
—— —— R, 92, 210.
Page 260
—— R, 210.
—— red, 85, 107, 128.
—— rubine, 89.
Continuous dyeing machine, 79.
Cop dyeing, 64.
Cop-dyeing machine, Beaumont's, 67.
—— —— Graemiger, 65, 66.
—— —— Mommer's, 69.
—— —— Young & Crippin, 68.
Copper acetate, 177.
—— logwood black, 177.
—— nitrate, 177.
—— soda solution, 180.
—— sulphate, 112, 164, 166, 177, 181.
Copperas, 147, 164, 165, 166, 167, 172, 175, 178, 181, 200.
Cornflower blue, 218, 233.
Corron's hank-dyeing machine, 63.
Cotton bleaching, 23.
—— brown A, 231.
—— red, 85, 107, 128.
—— rubine, 89.
Continuous dyeing machine, 79.
Cop dyeing, 64.
Cop-dyeing machine, Beaumont's, 67.
—— —— Graemiger, 65, 66.
—— —— Mommer's, 69.
—— —— Young & Crippin, 68.
Copper acetate, 177.
—— logwood black, 177.
—— nitrate, 177.
—— soda solution, 180.
—— sulphate, 112, 164, 166, 177, 181.
Copperas, 147, 164, 165, 166, 167, 172, 175, 178, 181, 200.
Cornflower blue, 218, 233.
Corron's hank-dyeing machine, 63.
Cotton bleaching, 23.
—— brown A, 231.
Page 261
—— —— 91, 100, 101, 103, 106, 132, 137, 138, 144, 228.
—— dyeing, 18.
—— fibre, 2.
—— —— illustration of, 5.
—— —— impurities of, 3.
—— —— structure of, 4.
—— —— structure and chemistry of, 1.
—— fibres, composition of, 5.
—— —— production of colour direct on, 181.
—— scouring, 23.
Cotton-silk fabrics, dyeing of, 225.
Cotton wax, 3.
—— yellow, 100, 210.
Coupling process, 139.
Cream, 91.
Cresyl blue, 229.
— fast violet 2 R N, 232.
— violet, 229.
Crimson, 130, 135, 151, 155, 217, 219, 230.
— red, 88, 130.
—— dyeing, 18.
—— fibre, 2.
—— —— illustration of, 5.
—— —— impurities of, 3.
—— —— structure of, 4.
—— —— structure and chemistry of, 1.
—— fibres, composition of, 5.
—— —— production of colour direct on, 181.
—— scouring, 23.
Cotton-silk fabrics, dyeing of, 225.
Cotton wax, 3.
—— yellow, 100, 210.
Coupling process, 139.
Cream, 91.
Cresyl blue, 229.
— fast violet 2 R N, 232.
— violet, 229.
Crimson, 130, 135, 151, 155, 217, 219, 230.
— red, 88, 130.
Page 262
Croceine AZ, 223.
— orange, 128, 211.
— scarlet, 128, 160.
Cross-dye black, 79, 107, 121.
— — B, 123.
— — 2 B, 120.
— drab, 93, 121, 126.
Cross dyeing, 220.
Curcumeine, extra, 211, 218, 224.
Curcumine, 209, 217.
— S, 103, 104, 223.
Curcuphenine, 90.
Cutch, 147, 156, 164, 165, 166, 167, 178, 181, 186.
Cuticle fibres, 1.
Cyanole extra, 221, 222, 223, 229, 231, 232, 233, 237.
D.
Damages in bleached goods, 50.
Dark blue, 95, 96, 97, 98, 115, 116, 136, 139, 142, 153, 154, 155,215,
216, 217, 218, 219.
— — and green shot dyes, 237.
— — and olive shot dyes, 238.
— bronze, 115.
— brown, 180, 214, 216, 217, 218, 219, 230, 231.
— — and blue shot, 222.
— orange, 128, 211.
— scarlet, 128, 160.
Cross-dye black, 79, 107, 121.
— — B, 123.
— — 2 B, 120.
— drab, 93, 121, 126.
Cross dyeing, 220.
Curcumeine, extra, 211, 218, 224.
Curcumine, 209, 217.
— S, 103, 104, 223.
Curcuphenine, 90.
Cutch, 147, 156, 164, 165, 166, 167, 178, 181, 186.
Cuticle fibres, 1.
Cyanole extra, 221, 222, 223, 229, 231, 232, 233, 237.
D.
Damages in bleached goods, 50.
Dark blue, 95, 96, 97, 98, 115, 116, 136, 139, 142, 153, 154, 155,215,
216, 217, 218, 219.
— — and green shot dyes, 237.
— — and olive shot dyes, 238.
— bronze, 115.
— brown, 180, 214, 216, 217, 218, 219, 230, 231.
— — and blue shot, 222.
Page 263
— — olive, 165, 166.
— chestnut, 104.
— — brown, 101, 103, 117, 119.
— cream, 231.
— crimson, 136, 231.
— drab, 102, 126, 233.
— green, 93, 94, 113, 115, 127, 142, 144, 146, 151, 153, 214, 217, 219,
230.
— grey, 119, 120, 154, 215, 218, 232.
— lilac, 146.
— maroon, 89, 135.
— navy, 95, 97, 98, 115, 126, 137.
— olive, 92, 127, 164.
— — brown, 118.
— orange, 91.
— plum, 87, 99, 116, 138, 166.
— red, 88, 113.
— Russian green, 232.
— sage, 127, 216.
— scarlet, 153, 155.
— sea green, 94, 214, 232.
— slate, 106, 214.
— stone, 214.
— turquoise blue, 116.
— violet, 156.
— walnut, 216.
— — brown, 103.
— yellow, 90.
"Dead" cotton fibres, 4.
Deep black, 104.
— blue, 97, 126.
— brown, 104, 118, 231.
— chestnut brown, 102, 136.
— crimson, 89, 232.
— green, 94.
— chestnut, 104.
— — brown, 101, 103, 117, 119.
— cream, 231.
— crimson, 136, 231.
— drab, 102, 126, 233.
— green, 93, 94, 113, 115, 127, 142, 144, 146, 151, 153, 214, 217, 219,
230.
— grey, 119, 120, 154, 215, 218, 232.
— lilac, 146.
— maroon, 89, 135.
— navy, 95, 97, 98, 115, 126, 137.
— olive, 92, 127, 164.
— — brown, 118.
— orange, 91.
— plum, 87, 99, 116, 138, 166.
— red, 88, 113.
— Russian green, 232.
— sage, 127, 216.
— scarlet, 153, 155.
— sea green, 94, 214, 232.
— slate, 106, 214.
— stone, 214.
— turquoise blue, 116.
— violet, 156.
— walnut, 216.
— — brown, 103.
— yellow, 90.
"Dead" cotton fibres, 4.
Deep black, 104.
— blue, 97, 126.
— brown, 104, 118, 231.
— chestnut brown, 102, 136.
— crimson, 89, 232.
— green, 94.
Page 264
— leaf green, 233.
— olive brown, 180.
— orange, 92, 135, 214, 230.
— — yellow, 230.
— pink, 88.
— rose, 230, 233.
Delahunty's dyeing machine, 57, 58.
Delta purpurine, 107.
— — 5 B, 210.
Developing, 131.
—machine for paranitroaniline red, 194.
Diamine azo blue, 2 B, 233.
— — — R, 145.
— — — 2 R, 237, 238.
— — — RR, 136, 137.
— black B, 227, 232.
— — B H. 104, 106, 118, 136, 137, 138, 210, 215, 216, 237.
— — B O, 92, 100, 139, 210.
— — H W, 92, 93, 94, 95, 97, 102, 103, 104, 130, 132, 209, 214, 215,
228, 230, 231, 233.
— — R O, 87, 92, 93, 95, 100, 101, 104, 106, 138, 139, 146, 210, 228.
— blue, 112. 132.
— — 2 B, 210.
— — 3 B, 92, 98, 210, 227.
— — B B, 227.
— — B G, 96, 210, 228.
— — B X, 102, 209, 210, 228.
— — C B, 228.
— — G, 209.
Diamine blue 3 R, 95, 100, 115, 116, 117, 119, 210, 228.
— — R W, 95, 98, 113, 114, 117, 120, 209, 210, 228, 230.
— — black E, 97, 210, 228.
— olive brown, 180.
— orange, 92, 135, 214, 230.
— — yellow, 230.
— pink, 88.
— rose, 230, 233.
Delahunty's dyeing machine, 57, 58.
Delta purpurine, 107.
— — 5 B, 210.
Developing, 131.
—machine for paranitroaniline red, 194.
Diamine azo blue, 2 B, 233.
— — — R, 145.
— — — 2 R, 237, 238.
— — — RR, 136, 137.
— black B, 227, 232.
— — B H. 104, 106, 118, 136, 137, 138, 210, 215, 216, 237.
— — B O, 92, 100, 139, 210.
— — H W, 92, 93, 94, 95, 97, 102, 103, 104, 130, 132, 209, 214, 215,
228, 230, 231, 233.
— — R O, 87, 92, 93, 95, 100, 101, 104, 106, 138, 139, 146, 210, 228.
— blue, 112. 132.
— — 2 B, 210.
— — 3 B, 92, 98, 210, 227.
— — B B, 227.
— — B G, 96, 210, 228.
— — B X, 102, 209, 210, 228.
— — C B, 228.
— — G, 209.
Diamine blue 3 R, 95, 100, 115, 116, 117, 119, 210, 228.
— — R W, 95, 98, 113, 114, 117, 120, 209, 210, 228, 230.
— — black E, 97, 210, 228.
Page 265
— — — R, 102.
— Bordeaux, 87.
— — B, 89, 210, 215, 216, 228.
— — S, 210, 228, 231, 233.
— brilliant blue G, 96, 99, 115, 145, 210, 215, 216, 223, 227.
— bronze G, 91, 93, 100, 106, 114, 115, 118, 139, 144, 210, 214, 228,
231, 232, 233.
— brown, 112, 132.
— — B, 209, 228.
— — G, 104, 119, 209, 210.
— — 3 G, 209, 228, 230.
— — M, 90, 95, 102, 104, 118, 119, 138, 216, 217, 228, 231, 232.
— — N, 209, 217, 231, 233.
— — S, 210.
— — V, 92, 98, 138, 143, 144, 210, 228, 233.
— — Y, 92.
— catechine B, 101, 102, 103, 114, 117, 210, 216.
— — G, 89, 94, 101, 102, 103, 113, 117, 209, 210.
— colours, 227.
— cutch, 130, 132, 136, 137, 138.
— dark blue B, 114, 116, 118, 120, 209, 210, 216, 217, 228, 231, 233.
— — green N, 93.
— deep black Cr, 96.
— — — RB, 104.
— dyes, 18, 85, 208, 225.
— fast red, F, 87, 89, 90, 113, 118, 209, 228, 230.
— — yellow A, 90, 92, 114, 115, 116, 136, 137, 143, 144, 210, 213, 223,
227, 232, 233, 235, 237, 238.
— — — B, 89, 91, 92, 94, 97, 98, 113, 114, 117, 118, 119, 120, 138, 209,
214, 215, 216, 223, 228, 231, 232.
— gold, 100, 210, 213, 228, 230, 231, 232.
— green B, 93, 97, 115, 146, 209, 214, 228, 230, 235.
— — G, 94, 209, 210, 228.
— grey G, 106, 143, 228, 232.
— jet black, 139.
— — — Cr, 105, 118, 120, 121.
— — — O O, 144.
— Bordeaux, 87.
— — B, 89, 210, 215, 216, 228.
— — S, 210, 228, 231, 233.
— brilliant blue G, 96, 99, 115, 145, 210, 215, 216, 223, 227.
— bronze G, 91, 93, 100, 106, 114, 115, 118, 139, 144, 210, 214, 228,
231, 232, 233.
— brown, 112, 132.
— — B, 209, 228.
— — G, 104, 119, 209, 210.
— — 3 G, 209, 228, 230.
— — M, 90, 95, 102, 104, 118, 119, 138, 216, 217, 228, 231, 232.
— — N, 209, 217, 231, 233.
— — S, 210.
— — V, 92, 98, 138, 143, 144, 210, 228, 233.
— — Y, 92.
— catechine B, 101, 102, 103, 114, 117, 210, 216.
— — G, 89, 94, 101, 102, 103, 113, 117, 209, 210.
— colours, 227.
— cutch, 130, 132, 136, 137, 138.
— dark blue B, 114, 116, 118, 120, 209, 210, 216, 217, 228, 231, 233.
— — green N, 93.
— deep black Cr, 96.
— — — RB, 104.
— dyes, 18, 85, 208, 225.
— fast red, F, 87, 89, 90, 113, 118, 209, 228, 230.
— — yellow A, 90, 92, 114, 115, 116, 136, 137, 143, 144, 210, 213, 223,
227, 232, 233, 235, 237, 238.
— — — B, 89, 91, 92, 94, 97, 98, 113, 114, 117, 118, 119, 120, 138, 209,
214, 215, 216, 223, 228, 231, 232.
— gold, 100, 210, 213, 228, 230, 231, 232.
— green B, 93, 97, 115, 146, 209, 214, 228, 230, 235.
— — G, 94, 209, 210, 228.
— grey G, 106, 143, 228, 232.
— jet black, 139.
— — — Cr, 105, 118, 120, 121.
— — — O O, 144.
Page 266
— — — R B, 105, 120.
— new blue R, 98, 116, 120, 210.
— nitrazol black B, 143, 144.
— — brown B, 143, 210.
— — — G, 143, 210.
— — dye, 139.
— orange, 132.
— — B, 89, 92, 114, 117, 118, 119, 120, 209, 215, 216, 217, 228, 230.
— — D, 210.
— — D C, 223, 227, 231, 233, 237, 238.
— — F, 209.
— — G, 91, 102, 210, 214, 215, 221, 222, 231.
— — G D, 104.
— — G G, 227, 233.
— red, 107.
— — B, 210.
— — 4 B, 209.
— — 5 B, 88, 89, 103, 209, 215, 228.
— — 6 B, 209.
— — 10 B, 88, 89, 146, 209, 230.
— — N, 87.
— — N O, 210.
— rose, 223.
— — B D, 88, 209, 215, 228, 230, 233.
— — G D, 99.
— scarlet, 107.
— — B, 91, 106, 210, 215, 228.
— — 3 B, 88, 210, 228.
— — H S, 230.
— — S, 228.
— sky blue, 94, 97, 98, 145, 210, 215, 222, 237, 238.
— — — F F, 94, 96, 98, 114, 115, 210, 222, 223, 227, 232.
— steel blue L, 96, 210, 214, 222, 228.
— violet N, 87, 99, 100, 145, 146, 210, 223, 228, 231, 238.
— yellow, 92.
— yellow N, 90, 92, 93, 100, 113, 228, 230.
— new blue R, 98, 116, 120, 210.
— nitrazol black B, 143, 144.
— — brown B, 143, 210.
— — — G, 143, 210.
— — dye, 139.
— orange, 132.
— — B, 89, 92, 114, 117, 118, 119, 120, 209, 215, 216, 217, 228, 230.
— — D, 210.
— — D C, 223, 227, 231, 233, 237, 238.
— — F, 209.
— — G, 91, 102, 210, 214, 215, 221, 222, 231.
— — G D, 104.
— — G G, 227, 233.
— red, 107.
— — B, 210.
— — 4 B, 209.
— — 5 B, 88, 89, 103, 209, 215, 228.
— — 6 B, 209.
— — 10 B, 88, 89, 146, 209, 230.
— — N, 87.
— — N O, 210.
— rose, 223.
— — B D, 88, 209, 215, 228, 230, 233.
— — G D, 99.
— scarlet, 107.
— — B, 91, 106, 210, 215, 228.
— — 3 B, 88, 210, 228.
— — H S, 230.
— — S, 228.
— sky blue, 94, 97, 98, 145, 210, 215, 222, 237, 238.
— — — F F, 94, 96, 98, 114, 115, 210, 222, 223, 227, 232.
— steel blue L, 96, 210, 214, 222, 228.
— violet N, 87, 99, 100, 145, 146, 210, 223, 228, 231, 238.
— yellow, 92.
— yellow N, 90, 92, 93, 100, 113, 228, 230.
Page 267
Diamineral blue R, 95, 116, 227, 238.
Diaminogene, 234, 235.
— B, 138, 228, 234, 235.
— blue B B, 136, 138.
— extra, 143, 228, 234, 235.
Dianil black C R, 97, 119, 142.
— — N, 118, 120, 121.
— blue B, 94, 97, 98, 116, 142.
— — G, 98, 113.
— — 2 K, 94.
— — 4 R, 99, 116.
— brown B D, 119, 142.
— — G O, 142.
— — 3 G O, 103, 118, 119, 142, 143.
— — R, 102, 103, 118, 119, 142.
— — T, 102.
— claret B, 89, 99, 145.
— — G, 89.
— dark blue R, 94, 95, 97, 116, 142, 143.
— — — 3 R, 97, 142.
— — brown, 103.
— olive, 93.
— orange G, 89, 92.
— — 2 R, 92.
— red 4 B, 89, 145.
— scarlet G, 145.
— yellow, 94.
— — G, 91, 98.
— — 3 G, 91, 94, 113.
— — R, 94, 113.
— — 2 R, 91.
Dianisidine blue, 197.
Diazo-benzene chloride, 181.
Diaminogene, 234, 235.
— B, 138, 228, 234, 235.
— blue B B, 136, 138.
— extra, 143, 228, 234, 235.
Dianil black C R, 97, 119, 142.
— — N, 118, 120, 121.
— blue B, 94, 97, 98, 116, 142.
— — G, 98, 113.
— — 2 K, 94.
— — 4 R, 99, 116.
— brown B D, 119, 142.
— — G O, 142.
— — 3 G O, 103, 118, 119, 142, 143.
— — R, 102, 103, 118, 119, 142.
— — T, 102.
— claret B, 89, 99, 145.
— — G, 89.
— dark blue R, 94, 95, 97, 116, 142, 143.
— — — 3 R, 97, 142.
— — brown, 103.
— olive, 93.
— orange G, 89, 92.
— — 2 R, 92.
— red 4 B, 89, 145.
— scarlet G, 145.
— yellow, 94.
— — G, 91, 98.
— — 3 G, 91, 94, 113.
— — R, 94, 113.
— — 2 R, 91.
Dianisidine blue, 197.
Diazo-benzene chloride, 181.
Page 268
Diazo black. 132, 139.
— blue, 132.
— brown, 130, 139.
— compounds, 181.
— liquor, 190.
Diazotisation, 129.
— of amido bases, 182.
Diazotised paranitroaniline, 140.
Dictionary of Coal-tar Colours, 259.
Dinitroso-resorcine, 179.
Diphenyl brown B N, 103.
Direct deep black E extra, 104.
Direct dyeing, 85.
— dyes, 83.
— — fastness of, 106.
— fast brown B, 144.
— indigo blue, 98.
— orange R, 210.
— red, test of, 265.
— triamine black G X, 104.
— yellow G, 90, 106, 210.
Divi-divi, 147, 148, 239.
Drab, 93, 165, 216, 218, 219, 231.
Drying cylinders, 255.
— of dyed goods, 249.
— blue, 132.
— brown, 130, 139.
— compounds, 181.
— liquor, 190.
Diazotisation, 129.
— of amido bases, 182.
Diazotised paranitroaniline, 140.
Dictionary of Coal-tar Colours, 259.
Dinitroso-resorcine, 179.
Diphenyl brown B N, 103.
Direct deep black E extra, 104.
Direct dyeing, 85.
— dyes, 83.
— — fastness of, 106.
— fast brown B, 144.
— indigo blue, 98.
— orange R, 210.
— red, test of, 265.
— triamine black G X, 104.
— yellow G, 90, 106, 210.
Divi-divi, 147, 148, 239.
Drab, 93, 165, 216, 218, 219, 231.
Drying cylinders, 255.
— of dyed goods, 249.
Page 269
Dull lilac, 99.
— violet, 100.
Dye-beck, 77.
Dye-house washing machine, 244, 246.
Dyeing apparatus, 263.
— of basic dyes, 149.
— machinery, 53, 57.
— on metallic mordants, 156.
— test for relative value of dyes, 267.
Dye-jigger, 72, 73.
Dyers' bleach, 24.
Dye-tank, illustration of, 54.
Dye-tub, illustration of, 54.
Dye-vat, section of, 56.
E.
Eboli blue B, 231.
— green T, 230.
Emerald tint, 154.
Eosine, 84, 229.
Eosines, dyeing with, 158, 159.
Erie blue B X, 97.
— — 2 G, 210.
— violet, 100.
Dye-beck, 77.
Dye-house washing machine, 244, 246.
Dyeing apparatus, 263.
— of basic dyes, 149.
— machinery, 53, 57.
— on metallic mordants, 156.
— test for relative value of dyes, 267.
Dye-jigger, 72, 73.
Dyers' bleach, 24.
Dye-tank, illustration of, 54.
Dye-tub, illustration of, 54.
Dye-vat, section of, 56.
E.
Eboli blue B, 231.
— green T, 230.
Emerald tint, 154.
Eosine, 84, 229.
Eosines, dyeing with, 158, 159.
Erie blue B X, 97.
— — 2 G, 210.
Page 270
Erika B, 87.
— B N, 99, 100, 210, 224.
Erythrosine, 229.
— B, 238.
Erythrosines, 160.
Experimental dye-bath, 263.
— dyeing, 262.
F.
Farmer's washing machine, 36.
Fast acid green, 229.
— — — B N, 222.
— blue developer A D, 133.
— brown, 164.
— neutral violet B, 154,
— yellow S, 223, 237, 238.
Fastness of colours, 260.
— of colours to light and air, 260
— of colours to rubbing, 261.
— of colours to washing, 261.
— of direct dyes, 106.
Fatty acids, 3.
Fawn, 165.
— brown, 167.
— drab, 100, 216.
Fiery yellowish red, 186.
— B N, 99, 100, 210, 224.
Erythrosine, 229.
— B, 238.
Erythrosines, 160.
Experimental dye-bath, 263.
— dyeing, 262.
F.
Farmer's washing machine, 36.
Fast acid green, 229.
— — — B N, 222.
— blue developer A D, 133.
— brown, 164.
— neutral violet B, 154,
— yellow S, 223, 237, 238.
Fastness of colours, 260.
— of colours to light and air, 260
— of colours to rubbing, 261.
— of colours to washing, 261.
— of direct dyes, 106.
Fatty acids, 3.
Fawn, 165.
— brown, 167.
— drab, 100, 216.
Fiery yellowish red, 186.
Page 271
First green liquor, 168.
Fixation, 149.
— with couplers, 139.
— — developers, 128.
— — metallic salts, 112.
Flavo-purpurine, 171.
Formyl blue B, 211.
— violet, 84, 229, 233.
— — 6 B, 211.
— — 10 B, 211.
— — S 4 B, 211, 214, 215, 216, 222, 231, 237, 238.
Full blue, 43, 97.
— yellow orange, 186.
Furnival's Square beater, 30.
Fustic, 156, 157, 166, 178, 259.
— extract, 164, 165, 166, 167, 175, 176, 181.
G.
Gallipoli oil, 168.
Galls, 147, 148.
Gambier, 147.
Glauber's salt, 83, 108, 111, 209, 214, 215, 221, 222, 223,
225, 231, 234, 237.
Glycerine, 180.
Fixation, 149.
— with couplers, 139.
— — developers, 128.
— — metallic salts, 112.
Flavo-purpurine, 171.
Formyl blue B, 211.
— violet, 84, 229, 233.
— — 6 B, 211.
— — 10 B, 211.
— — S 4 B, 211, 214, 215, 216, 222, 231, 237, 238.
Full blue, 43, 97.
— yellow orange, 186.
Furnival's Square beater, 30.
Fustic, 156, 157, 166, 178, 259.
— extract, 164, 165, 166, 167, 175, 176, 181.
G.
Gallipoli oil, 168.
Galls, 147, 148.
Gambier, 147.
Glauber's salt, 83, 108, 111, 209, 214, 215, 221, 222, 223,
225, 231, 234, 237.
Glycerine, 180.
Page 272
Gold and green shot dyes, 221.
— brown, 100, 101, 102, 103, 138, 142, 143, 153, 216, 230.
— — and blue shot, 222.
— drab, 232.
— orange, 214.
— yellow, 91, 113, 130, 142, 230.
Good yellow, 213.
Graemiger cop-dyeing machine, 65, 66.
Grass green, 93.
Green, 92, 93, 94, 114, 130, 143, 145, 151, 180, 215.
— and buff shot, 223.
— and claret shot, 222.
— and pink shot dyes, 238.
— and orange shot, 224.
— and red shot, 223, 224.
— blue, 98.
— grey, 106, 120.
— olive, 92.
— yellow, 91.
Greening operation, 168.
Grey, 106, 120, 153, 219.
— and orange shot, 223.
— blue, 96.
— lilac, 99, 153.
— slate, 166.
— sour operation, 32.
Grothe, 252.
Ground fustic, 166.
— brown, 100, 101, 102, 103, 138, 142, 143, 153, 216, 230.
— — and blue shot, 222.
— drab, 232.
— orange, 214.
— yellow, 91, 113, 130, 142, 230.
Good yellow, 213.
Graemiger cop-dyeing machine, 65, 66.
Grass green, 93.
Green, 92, 93, 94, 114, 130, 143, 145, 151, 180, 215.
— and buff shot, 223.
— and claret shot, 222.
— and pink shot dyes, 238.
— and orange shot, 224.
— and red shot, 223, 224.
— blue, 98.
— grey, 106, 120.
— olive, 92.
— yellow, 91.
Greening operation, 168.
Grey, 106, 120, 153, 219.
— and orange shot, 223.
— blue, 96.
— lilac, 99, 153.
— slate, 166.
— sour operation, 32.
Grothe, 252.
Ground fustic, 166.
Page 273
Guinea green B, 211, 218, 224.
— violet B, 224.
— — 4 B, 211, 218.
Gum tragacanth, 192.
Gun cotton, 13.
H.
Half-silk fabrics, dyeing of, 225.
Hand dyeing, 53.
Hank bleaching, 45.
Hank-dyeing machine. Corron's, 63.
— — Klauder-Weldon's, 61, 62.
Hank-wringing machines, 241.
Havanna brown, 166.
Hawking machine, Holliday's, 78.
Hawthorne's washing machine, 36.
Heliotrope, 99, 233.
— B B, 90, 146.
— 2 B, 99, 233.
Hessian brown 2 M, 98.
— — 2 B N, 100, 231.
— grey S, 231.
— purple N, 230.
— violet B, 224.
— — 4 B, 211, 218.
Gum tragacanth, 192.
Gun cotton, 13.
H.
Half-silk fabrics, dyeing of, 225.
Hand dyeing, 53.
Hank bleaching, 45.
Hank-dyeing machine. Corron's, 63.
— — Klauder-Weldon's, 61, 62.
Hank-wringing machines, 241.
Havanna brown, 166.
Hawking machine, Holliday's, 78.
Hawthorne's washing machine, 36.
Heliotrope, 99, 233.
— B B, 90, 146.
— 2 B, 99, 233.
Hessian brown 2 M, 98.
— — 2 B N, 100, 231.
— grey S, 231.
— purple N, 230.
Page 274
— violet, 211.
Hoffman violet, 152.
Holliday, 182.
Holliday's hawking machine, 78.
— yarn-dyeing machine, 60.
Hurst's Silk Dyeing, 225.
Hydrocellulose, 12.
Hoffman violet, 152.
Holliday, 182.
Holliday's hawking machine, 78.
— yarn-dyeing machine, 60.
Hurst's Silk Dyeing, 225.
Hydrocellulose, 12.
Page 275
Hydrochloric acid, 177, 183, 184, 190.
— — action of, 11.
Hydro-extractors, 251, 252.
Hydrosulphite indigo vat, 204.
I.
Immedial black, 107, 121.
— blacks, 79.
— blue, 121.
— — C, 125.
Immedial bronze A, 128.
— — B, 128.
— brown, 121.
Impregnation with dye-stuff solution, 198.
Indamine blue N, 154.
Indazine, 229.
Indian yellow G, 211, 213, 214, 216, 217, 222, 229, 231.
— — R, 211, 213, 214, 229, 231, 232.
Indigo, 18, 20, 198.
— blue, 152, 154.
— — N, 229, 233.
— — S G N, 229.
— carmine, 165.
— dyed goods, test of, 258.
— dyeing, 199.
— dye-vat for cloth, 199.
— — action of, 11.
Hydro-extractors, 251, 252.
Hydrosulphite indigo vat, 204.
I.
Immedial black, 107, 121.
— blacks, 79.
— blue, 121.
— — C, 125.
Immedial bronze A, 128.
— — B, 128.
— brown, 121.
Impregnation with dye-stuff solution, 198.
Indamine blue N, 154.
Indazine, 229.
Indian yellow G, 211, 213, 214, 216, 217, 222, 229, 231.
— — R, 211, 213, 214, 229, 231, 232.
Indigo, 18, 20, 198.
— blue, 152, 154.
— — N, 229, 233.
— — S G N, 229.
— carmine, 165.
— dyed goods, test of, 258.
— dyeing, 199.
— dye-vat for cloth, 199.
Page 276
— extract, 84, 167.
— white, 200.
Indigotin, 198.
Indophenol, 205.
Induline, 229.
Irisamine G, 152, 153.
Iron, 157.
— liquor, 172, 175, 176, 180.
— mordants, 259.
— stains, 50.
— sulphate, 112.
J.
Janus black I, 219.
— — II, 219.
— blue G, 155.
— — R, 155, 219.
— brown B, 156, 219.
— — R, 219, 220.
— claret red B, 156, 219.
— dark blue B, 219.
— dyes, 155, 218.
— green B, 155, 219, 220.
— grey B, 156.
— — BB, 219, 220.
— red B, 155, 219.
— yellow G, 219.
— — R, 155, 156, 219, 220.
Jet black, 121.
— white, 200.
Indigotin, 198.
Indophenol, 205.
Induline, 229.
Irisamine G, 152, 153.
Iron, 157.
— liquor, 172, 175, 176, 180.
— mordants, 259.
— stains, 50.
— sulphate, 112.
J.
Janus black I, 219.
— — II, 219.
— blue G, 155.
— — R, 155, 219.
— brown B, 156, 219.
— — R, 219, 220.
— claret red B, 156, 219.
— dark blue B, 219.
— dyes, 155, 218.
— green B, 155, 219, 220.
— grey B, 156.
— — BB, 219, 220.
— red B, 155, 219.
— yellow G, 219.
— — R, 155, 156, 219, 220.
Jet black, 121.
Page 277
Jigger, 72.
Jig-wince, 74, 75.
K.
Katigen black, 121.
— brown, 107, 121.
— dark brown, 128.
— green, 121.
— olive G, 127.
Khaki, 180.
— shades, 248.
Kiers, 30.
Klauder-Weldon hank-dyeing machine, 61, 62.
L.
Lanacyl blue B B, 211.
— violet B, 211, 217.
Leaf green, 94, 113, 114, 231.
Lehner's process for making silk, 15.
Lemon yellow, 91.
Leuco, 198.
Light blue, 115, 138.
— brown, 101, 103, 117.
Jig-wince, 74, 75.
K.
Katigen black, 121.
— brown, 107, 121.
— dark brown, 128.
— green, 121.
— olive G, 127.
Khaki, 180.
— shades, 248.
Kiers, 30.
Klauder-Weldon hank-dyeing machine, 61, 62.
L.
Lanacyl blue B B, 211.
— violet B, 211, 217.
Leaf green, 94, 113, 114, 231.
Lehner's process for making silk, 15.
Lemon yellow, 91.
Leuco, 198.
Light blue, 115, 138.
— brown, 101, 103, 117.
Page 278
— chestnut brown, 137.
— green, 114, 143.
— grey, 106.
— indigo blue, 96.
— plum, 99.
— sage brown, 118.
— seal brown, 102.
— slate, 106.
Lilac, 98, 99.
— red, 87.
— rose, 233.
Lima wood, 178, 179.
Lime, 169, 202.
— and copperas vat for indigo dyeing, 200.
— boil for cotton, 28.
— sour operation, 32.
Logwood, 18, 84, 156, 157, 165, 167, 234, 259.
— black, 79, 174.
— — dyeing on yarn in hanks, 175.
— decoction, 177.
— dyed goods, test of, 258.
— extract, 164, 175, 176, 181.
— greys, 178.
Loose wool and cotton, washing of, 244.
Lye boil operation. 34.
M.
Machinery for dyeing, 53, 57.
— green, 114, 143.
— grey, 106.
— indigo blue, 96.
— plum, 99.
— sage brown, 118.
— seal brown, 102.
— slate, 106.
Lilac, 98, 99.
— red, 87.
— rose, 233.
Lima wood, 178, 179.
Lime, 169, 202.
— and copperas vat for indigo dyeing, 200.
— boil for cotton, 28.
— sour operation, 32.
Logwood, 18, 84, 156, 157, 165, 167, 234, 259.
— black, 79, 174.
— — dyeing on yarn in hanks, 175.
— decoction, 177.
— dyed goods, test of, 258.
— extract, 164, 175, 176, 181.
— greys, 178.
Loose wool and cotton, washing of, 244.
Lye boil operation. 34.
M.
Machinery for dyeing, 53, 57.
Page 279
Madder, 157.
— bleach, 24.
Magenta, 18, 147, 153, 229, 231, 232, 233.
Malachite green, 146, 152, 153, 229, 232.
Mandarine G, 211, 217, 218, 224.
Market bleach, 24, 38, 39.
Maroon, 89, 138, 153, 215, 233.
Mather & Platt's apparatus, 207.
— — bleaching kier, 30, 31.
— — machine, 246.
— — washing machine, 36.
— — yarn-bleaching kier, 49.
Mercerisation of cotton, 8.
Mercerised cotton fibres, illustrations of, 7, 9.
Mercer, John, 8, 21.
Metallic mordants, 156.
Metanitroaniline, 185, 186, 187, 188.
— orange, 195.
Metaphenylene blue, 229.
— — B, 154, 233.
Methylene blue, 17.
— — B B, 153.
— — 2 B, 153.
— — N, 232.
— bleach, 24.
Magenta, 18, 147, 153, 229, 231, 232, 233.
Malachite green, 146, 152, 153, 229, 232.
Mandarine G, 211, 217, 218, 224.
Market bleach, 24, 38, 39.
Maroon, 89, 138, 153, 215, 233.
Mather & Platt's apparatus, 207.
— — bleaching kier, 30, 31.
— — machine, 246.
— — washing machine, 36.
— — yarn-bleaching kier, 49.
Mercerisation of cotton, 8.
Mercerised cotton fibres, illustrations of, 7, 9.
Mercer, John, 8, 21.
Metallic mordants, 156.
Metanitroaniline, 185, 186, 187, 188.
— orange, 195.
Metaphenylene blue, 229.
— — B, 154, 233.
Methylene blue, 17.
— — B B, 153.
— — 2 B, 153.
— — N, 232.
Page 280
— grey B F, 153.
Methylindone B, 229, 231.
— R, 229.
Methyl violet, 18, 229.
— — B, 146, 151, 231.
— — 2 B, 146.
— — R, 146.
— — 3 R, 146.
— — 4 R, 152.
Mikado brown, 227.
— — 2 B, 238.
— — 3 G O, 230.
— — M, 103, 230, 232.
— dyes, 18.
— golden yellow 8 G, 230, 231.
— orange, 227.
— — G, 91.
— — 4 R, 91, 102.
— — R O, 232.
— — 3 R O, 231.
— — 4 R O, 218, 224.
— — 5 R O, 230, 238.
— yellow, 227.
— — G, 230.
Milk of lime, 28, 175.
Milling orange, 229.
— yellow, 229.
Mimosa, 209.
Mixed cotton and wool fabrics, dyeing of, 208.
Methylindone B, 229, 231.
— R, 229.
Methyl violet, 18, 229.
— — B, 146, 151, 231.
— — 2 B, 146.
— — R, 146.
— — 3 R, 146.
— — 4 R, 152.
Mikado brown, 227.
— — 2 B, 238.
— — 3 G O, 230.
— — M, 103, 230, 232.
— dyes, 18.
— golden yellow 8 G, 230, 231.
— orange, 227.
— — G, 91.
— — 4 R, 91, 102.
— — R O, 232.
— — 3 R O, 231.
— — 4 R O, 218, 224.
— — 5 R O, 230, 238.
— yellow, 227.
— — G, 230.
Milk of lime, 28, 175.
Milling orange, 229.
— yellow, 229.
Mimosa, 209.
Mixed cotton and wool fabrics, dyeing of, 208.
Page 281
Mommer's cop-dyeing machine, 69.
Mordant dyes, 84.
Mordants, 156.
— detection of, 259.
Moss brown, 143, 232.
Muslin bleaching, 41.
Myrabolam, 147, 148, 239.
— extract, 175, 176.
N.
Naphthol, 184.
— -azo-benzene, 181.
— black, 128.
— — B, 223.
— — 3 B, 222.
— blue black, 211, 214, 215, 216, 217, 222, 234.
— — G, 211, 222.
— — R, 211.
— colours, 182.
— D, 192.
— X, 192.
— yellow S, 229, 238.
Naphthylamine, 13, 132, 133, 184.
— black, 235.
— — 4 B, 211.
— — 6 B, 211, 217.
— — D, 211.
— ether, 130.
Mordant dyes, 84.
Mordants, 156.
— detection of, 259.
Moss brown, 143, 232.
Muslin bleaching, 41.
Myrabolam, 147, 148, 239.
— extract, 175, 176.
N.
Naphthol, 184.
— -azo-benzene, 181.
— black, 128.
— — B, 223.
— — 3 B, 222.
— blue black, 211, 214, 215, 216, 217, 222, 234.
— — G, 211, 222.
— — R, 211.
— colours, 182.
— D, 192.
— X, 192.
— yellow S, 229, 238.
Naphthylamine, 13, 132, 133, 184.
— black, 235.
— — 4 B, 211.
— — 6 B, 211, 217.
— — D, 211.
— ether, 130.
Page 282
Naphtindone B B, 153.
Navy, 97, 98, 154.
— blue, 96, 214, 216, 217.
Neutral grey, 132.
— — G, 99, 106.
— violet, 229.
New blue D, 229.
— methylene blue, 234, 235.
— — — G G, 238.
— — — M, 232.
— — — N, 126, 145, 154, 229, 231, 233.
— — — N X, 154.
— — — R, 153, 154, 233.
— — — 3 R, 145, 153.
— — grey B, 153.
— — — G, 154.
— phosphine G. 153, 154, 229, 232.
— Victoria blue B, 146, 151, 152.
Nigraniline, 206.
Nigrosine, 229.
Nitrate of copper, 177.
— of iron, 166, 175.
Nitrazol C, 139, 141, 193.
Nitric acid, action of, on cotton, 12.
Nitrite of soda, 183.
Nitro-aniline, 183.
Navy, 97, 98, 154.
— blue, 96, 214, 216, 217.
Neutral grey, 132.
— — G, 99, 106.
— violet, 229.
New blue D, 229.
— methylene blue, 234, 235.
— — — G G, 238.
— — — M, 232.
— — — N, 126, 145, 154, 229, 231, 233.
— — — N X, 154.
— — — R, 153, 154, 233.
— — — 3 R, 145, 153.
— — grey B, 153.
— — — G, 154.
— phosphine G. 153, 154, 229, 232.
— Victoria blue B, 146, 151, 152.
Nigraniline, 206.
Nigrosine, 229.
Nitrate of copper, 177.
— of iron, 166, 175.
Nitrazol C, 139, 141, 193.
Nitric acid, action of, on cotton, 12.
Nitrite of soda, 183.
Nitro-aniline, 183.
Page 283
Nitro-benzene, 13.
Nitro-naphthalene, 13.
Nitro-para-toluidine, 185, 187, 188.
Nitrosamine, 193.
— red, 195.
Nitroso-resorcine, 18.
Nitrous acid, 184.
Nut brown, 103, 118, 119, 218, 219.
O.
Oak bark, 147.
Obermaier machine, 57, 59.
Oil stains, 50.
Old gold, 90, 232.
Olive, 92, 93, 127, 143, 164.
— and blue shot dyes, 238.
— brown, 143, 154.
— green, 114, 142, 144, 153.
— oil, 170.
— yellow, 91.
Orange, 84, 91, 113, 130, 137, 151, 153, 154, 155, 215, 217.
— and blue shot, 224, 238.
— and violet shot, 223, 238.
Nitro-naphthalene, 13.
Nitro-para-toluidine, 185, 187, 188.
Nitrosamine, 193.
— red, 195.
Nitroso-resorcine, 18.
Nitrous acid, 184.
Nut brown, 103, 118, 119, 218, 219.
O.
Oak bark, 147.
Obermaier machine, 57, 59.
Oil stains, 50.
Old gold, 90, 232.
Olive, 92, 93, 127, 143, 164.
— and blue shot dyes, 238.
— brown, 143, 154.
— green, 114, 142, 144, 153.
— oil, 170.
— yellow, 91.
Orange, 84, 91, 113, 130, 137, 151, 153, 154, 155, 215, 217.
— and blue shot, 224, 238.
— and violet shot, 223, 238.
Page 284
— brown, 102.
— E N Z, 211, 214, 217, 222.
— extra, 211, 223, 232.
— G G, 221, 222, 231, 232, 233, 238.
— T A, 218.
— yellow, 143, 186.
Orthoamidoazotoluol, 186, 187, 188.
Orthonitrotoluidine, 196.
Oxidising agents, action of, on cotton, 16.
Oxycellulose, 16.
Oxydiamine black A, 97, 105, 209.
— — B M, 209, 215, 216, 217.
— — D, 209, 228, 233, 234.
— — M, 209.
— — N, 91, 97.
— — N R, 105.
— — S O O O, 210, 228, 231, 233.
— orange G, 104, 209.
— — R, 92, 104, 143, 144, 209.
— red S, 209.
— violet B, 99, 100, 210, 214, 228, 230, 231, 233.
— — G, 99, 100.
— yellow G G, 94, 146, 209.
Oxydianil yellow, 143.
Oxymuriate of tin, 166.
Oxyphenine, 91, 102, 209.
P.
— E N Z, 211, 214, 217, 222.
— extra, 211, 223, 232.
— G G, 221, 222, 231, 232, 233, 238.
— T A, 218.
— yellow, 143, 186.
Orthoamidoazotoluol, 186, 187, 188.
Orthonitrotoluidine, 196.
Oxidising agents, action of, on cotton, 16.
Oxycellulose, 16.
Oxydiamine black A, 97, 105, 209.
— — B M, 209, 215, 216, 217.
— — D, 209, 228, 233, 234.
— — M, 209.
— — N, 91, 97.
— — N R, 105.
— — S O O O, 210, 228, 231, 233.
— orange G, 104, 209.
— — R, 92, 104, 143, 144, 209.
— red S, 209.
— violet B, 99, 100, 210, 214, 228, 230, 231, 233.
— — G, 99, 100.
— yellow G G, 94, 146, 209.
Oxydianil yellow, 143.
Oxymuriate of tin, 166.
Oxyphenine, 91, 102, 209.
P.
Page 285
Padding machine, 80, 81, 193, 221.
Pale blue, 95, 97.
— brown, 102, 119, 122, 128, 164, 180.
— chamois, 166.
— chestnut, 143.
— drab, 233.
— fawn brown, 119, 130.
— — red, 89.
— gold yellow, 213.
— green, 94, 151.
— greenish grey, 120.
— leaf green, 113.
— lilac, 99.
— nut brown, 102.
— olive brown, 100.
— — green, 113.
— orange, 91, 92, 135.
— sage, 144.
— — green, 217.
— salmon, 87.
— sea green, 127, 232.
— sky blue, 95.
— walnut brown, 104.
Palm oil soap, 169.
Paramine blue B, 96.
— — black S, 96.
— brown C, 117.
— — G, 101.
— indigo blue, 96.
— navy blue R, 96.
Paranitroaniline, 185, 186, 187, 188, 190.
— brown, 196.
Pale blue, 95, 97.
— brown, 102, 119, 122, 128, 164, 180.
— chamois, 166.
— chestnut, 143.
— drab, 233.
— fawn brown, 119, 130.
— — red, 89.
— gold yellow, 213.
— green, 94, 151.
— greenish grey, 120.
— leaf green, 113.
— lilac, 99.
— nut brown, 102.
— olive brown, 100.
— — green, 113.
— orange, 91, 92, 135.
— sage, 144.
— — green, 217.
— salmon, 87.
— sea green, 127, 232.
— sky blue, 95.
— walnut brown, 104.
Palm oil soap, 169.
Paramine blue B, 96.
— — black S, 96.
— brown C, 117.
— — G, 101.
— indigo blue, 96.
— navy blue R, 96.
Paranitroaniline, 185, 186, 187, 188, 190.
— brown, 196.
Page 286
— red, 186, 188, 189.
— — dyed cotton, 196.
— — dye-tub, 191.
— — on piece goods, 192.
— — on yarn, 189.
— — with azophor red P N, 195.
— — with nitrazol C, 195.
Paratoluidine, 186, 187, 188.
Parchment paper, 11.
Paris violet, 152.
Patent blue, 84.
Peach wood, 178.
Peacock green, 214, 216.
Pea green, 114, 233.
Pectic acid, 3.
Permanganate of potash, 17.
Persian berries, 156, 178, 179.
Phenetidine, 183.
Phenol, 130, 132, 133, 181.
Phenylene diamine, 130, 132, 134, 235, 237.
Phosphate of soda, 86, 90, 91, 168, 170, 180, 225.
Piece-dyeing machines, 71.
— — dyed cotton, 196.
— — dye-tub, 191.
— — on piece goods, 192.
— — on yarn, 189.
— — with azophor red P N, 195.
— — with nitrazol C, 195.
Paratoluidine, 186, 187, 188.
Parchment paper, 11.
Paris violet, 152.
Patent blue, 84.
Peach wood, 178.
Peacock green, 214, 216.
Pea green, 114, 233.
Pectic acid, 3.
Permanganate of potash, 17.
Persian berries, 156, 178, 179.
Phenetidine, 183.
Phenol, 130, 132, 133, 181.
Phenylene diamine, 130, 132, 134, 235, 237.
Phosphate of soda, 86, 90, 91, 168, 170, 180, 225.
Piece-dyeing machines, 71.
Page 287
Piece goods, drying of, 256.
— — washing of, 244.
— — wringing of, 241.
Pink, 87, 88, 89, 152, 215.
Plate singeing, 27.
Plum, 99, 145, 146, 215.
Pluto black B, 108, 144.
Ponceau B, 164.
— 3 R B, 211, 217.
Potash, 86.
Primrose, 91, 154.
Primuline, 130, 131, 132, 135, 136, 138, 142, 143, 144, 209.
Production of colour direct on cotton fibres, 181.
Prussiate black, 207.
Pure blue, 238.
— soluble blue, 237.
Purple brown, 100.
Purpuramine, D H, 107.
Pyrolignite of iron, 172.
Pyroxyline, 13.
— — washing of, 244.
— — wringing of, 241.
Pink, 87, 88, 89, 152, 215.
Plate singeing, 27.
Plum, 99, 145, 146, 215.
Pluto black B, 108, 144.
Ponceau B, 164.
— 3 R B, 211, 217.
Potash, 86.
Primrose, 91, 154.
Primuline, 130, 131, 132, 135, 136, 138, 142, 143, 144, 209.
Production of colour direct on cotton fibres, 181.
Prussiate black, 207.
Pure blue, 238.
— soluble blue, 237.
Purple brown, 100.
Purpuramine, D H, 107.
Pyrolignite of iron, 172.
Pyroxyline, 13.
Page 288
Q.
Quercitron, 156, 178, 179.
— bark, 178.
— extract, 164, 165.
Quicklime, 200.
R.
Rayer & Lincoln machine, 26.
Read Holliday's squeezing machine, 241.
Red, 136, 187.
— brown, 100, 135.
— chocolate, 119.
— developer C, 192.
— drab, 165.
— lilac, 100.
— liquor, 165, 166, 169, 170, 176,
— orange, 91.
— plum, 117, 214.
— violet, 99, 116, 152, 155, 156.
Reddish brown, 102.
— puce, 187.
Reseda, 93.
— green, 167.
Resin boil, 35.
— soap liquor, 35.
Resorcine, 130, 132, 133, 235.
Quercitron, 156, 178, 179.
— bark, 178.
— extract, 164, 165.
Quicklime, 200.
R.
Rayer & Lincoln machine, 26.
Read Holliday's squeezing machine, 241.
Red, 136, 187.
— brown, 100, 135.
— chocolate, 119.
— developer C, 192.
— drab, 165.
— lilac, 100.
— liquor, 165, 166, 169, 170, 176,
— orange, 91.
— plum, 117, 214.
— violet, 99, 116, 152, 155, 156.
Reddish brown, 102.
— puce, 187.
Reseda, 93.
— green, 167.
Resin boil, 35.
— soap liquor, 35.
Resorcine, 130, 132, 133, 235.
Page 289
— green, 156.
Rhodamine, 229, 231.
— B, 153, 233.
— G, 152.
— 6, G, 152.
— S, 237.
Rhoduline violet, 151.
Rocceleine, 211.
Roller squeezing machines for yarn, 241.
Rose azurine B, 87.
— G, 87, 90.
— bengale, 229.
— lilac, 145, 151.
— pink, 87.
— red, 88, 89.
Rosophenine, 5 B, 88.
Russia green, 92, 113, 143, 153.
S.
Safranine, 18, 146, 153, 221, 229, 231, 233.
— G, 146.
— prima, 153.
— S, 155.
Sage, 214.
— brown, 104, 119, 135, 144, 218.
— green, 93, 180, 230.
Rhodamine, 229, 231.
— B, 153, 233.
— G, 152.
— 6, G, 152.
— S, 237.
Rhoduline violet, 151.
Rocceleine, 211.
Roller squeezing machines for yarn, 241.
Rose azurine B, 87.
— G, 87, 90.
— bengale, 229.
— lilac, 145, 151.
— pink, 87.
— red, 88, 89.
Rosophenine, 5 B, 88.
Russia green, 92, 113, 143, 153.
S.
Safranine, 18, 146, 153, 221, 229, 231, 233.
— G, 146.
— prima, 153.
— S, 155.
Sage, 214.
— brown, 104, 119, 135, 144, 218.
— green, 93, 180, 230.
Page 290
St. Dennis black, 121.
Saline salts, quantity used, 108.
Salmon, 89.
Salt, 165.
Satin fabrics, dyeing of, 225.
Scarlet, 88, 89, 135, 145, 146, 152, 153, 155, 215, 217, 230.
— R, 220.
Schaeffer's acid, 134.
Scouring cotton, 23.
Sea green, 94, 151.
Seal brown, 146.
Seed hairs, 1.
Shot effects, 220.
— on satin, dyeing of, 235.
— with black cotton warp, 236.
Silver grey, 106.
Singeing of cotton, 27.
— wash of cotton, 28.
Sky blue, 95, 98, 151, 215.
Slate, 106, 218, 231, 233.
— blue, 97, 120, 152, 216.
— green, 218.
Saline salts, quantity used, 108.
Salmon, 89.
Salt, 165.
Satin fabrics, dyeing of, 225.
Scarlet, 88, 89, 135, 145, 146, 152, 153, 155, 215, 217, 230.
— R, 220.
Schaeffer's acid, 134.
Scouring cotton, 23.
Sea green, 94, 151.
Seal brown, 146.
Seed hairs, 1.
Shot effects, 220.
— on satin, dyeing of, 235.
— with black cotton warp, 236.
Silver grey, 106.
Singeing of cotton, 27.
— wash of cotton, 28.
Sky blue, 95, 98, 151, 215.
Slate, 106, 218, 231, 233.
— blue, 97, 120, 152, 216.
— green, 218.
Page 291
Sliver dyeing, 58.
Slubbing dyeing, 58.
Soap, 165.
— effect on dye-stuffs, 226.
Soaping of dyed goods, 247.
Soda, 86, 132, 178.
— ash, 34, 166.
— crystals, 169.
— lye, 202, 235.
— zinc vat for indigo dyeing, 204.
Sodium acetate, 196.
— bichromate, 164.
— nitrite solution, 196, 198.
— stannate, preparing with, 158.
Solid blue, 229.
— green, 229.
— O, 179, 180.
Solidogen A, 145.
Soluble blue, 150, 160, 229.
Spencer's hank-wringing machine, 241.
Squeezing rollers, 240.
Stains in bleached goods, 50.
Steam aniline black, 207.
— — blacks, 248.
Slubbing dyeing, 58.
Soap, 165.
— effect on dye-stuffs, 226.
Soaping of dyed goods, 247.
Soda, 86, 132, 178.
— ash, 34, 166.
— crystals, 169.
— lye, 202, 235.
— zinc vat for indigo dyeing, 204.
Sodium acetate, 196.
— bichromate, 164.
— nitrite solution, 196, 198.
— stannate, preparing with, 158.
Solid blue, 229.
— green, 229.
— O, 179, 180.
Solidogen A, 145.
Soluble blue, 150, 160, 229.
Spencer's hank-wringing machine, 241.
Squeezing rollers, 240.
Stains in bleached goods, 50.
Steam aniline black, 207.
— — blacks, 248.
Page 292
Steaming and ageing chamber, 250.
— cottage, illustration of, 249.
— of dyed goods, 248.
Stearic acid, 3.
Stitching of cotton, 25.
Stone, 218.
Structure of cotton fibre, 1.
Sulfaniline black, 121.
— — G, 124.
— brown, 121.
— — 4 B, 127.
Sulphate of copper, 177.
— of iron, 167.
Sulphonates, 182.
Sulphon azurine B, 210, 217, 218.
— D, 93.
Sulphur colours, 121.
Sulphuric acid, 166.
— action of, on cotton, 10.
Sulphyl colours, 121.
Sumac, 83, 147, 148, 165, 166, 167, 172, 173, 178, 239.
— extract, 169, 175, 219, 220.
Sun yellow, 90.
— cottage, illustration of, 249.
— of dyed goods, 248.
Stearic acid, 3.
Stitching of cotton, 25.
Stone, 218.
Structure of cotton fibre, 1.
Sulfaniline black, 121.
— — G, 124.
— brown, 121.
— — 4 B, 127.
Sulphate of copper, 177.
— of iron, 167.
Sulphonates, 182.
Sulphon azurine B, 210, 217, 218.
— D, 93.
Sulphur colours, 121.
Sulphuric acid, 166.
— action of, on cotton, 10.
Sulphyl colours, 121.
Sumac, 83, 147, 148, 165, 166, 167, 172, 173, 178, 239.
— extract, 169, 175, 219, 220.
Sun yellow, 90.
Page 293
T.
Tannic acid, 18, 20, 83, 147, 172.
— mordant, dyeing on, 147.
Tannin, 173, 174, 236.
— grounding, 173.
— heliotrope, 145, 153, 229.
— orange R, 154, 155, 229.
Tanning, 148.
Tartar emetic, 147, 192, 219, 220.
Tartaric acid, 180.
Temperature of dye-baths, 226.
Terra-cotta brown, 143.
— red, 90, 143.
Testing of the colour of dyed fabrics, 257.
Thiazole yellow, 93, 94, 209.
Thiocarmine R, 84, 211, 214.
Thioflavine S, 94, 104, 106, 209, 213, 215, 222, 223, 228, 229.
— T, 153, 154, 229, 231, 232.
Tin crystals, 147, 169, 179.
— oxide, fixing, 158.
Titan blue, 210, 211.
— — 3 B, 93, 102, 164.
Tannic acid, 18, 20, 83, 147, 172.
— mordant, dyeing on, 147.
Tannin, 173, 174, 236.
— grounding, 173.
— heliotrope, 145, 153, 229.
— orange R, 154, 155, 229.
Tanning, 148.
Tartar emetic, 147, 192, 219, 220.
Tartaric acid, 180.
Temperature of dye-baths, 226.
Terra-cotta brown, 143.
— red, 90, 143.
Testing of the colour of dyed fabrics, 257.
Thiazole yellow, 93, 94, 209.
Thiocarmine R, 84, 211, 214.
Thioflavine S, 94, 104, 106, 209, 213, 215, 222, 223, 228, 229.
— T, 153, 154, 229, 231, 232.
Tin crystals, 147, 169, 179.
— oxide, fixing, 158.
Titan blue, 210, 211.
— — 3 B, 93, 102, 164.
Page 294
— — R, 102.
— brown O, 210.
— — P, 164.
— — R, 102, 210.
— — Y, 161, 210.
— colours, 227.
— como G, 95.
— — S N, 98.
— dyes, 18, 85.
— gold, 101, 102.
— ingrain blue, 135, 136, 142.
— marine blue, 211.
— navy R, 98.
— orange, 88.
— — N, 95.
— pink, 210.
— red, 107.
— scarlet C, 88.
— — D, 88.
— — S, 209.
— yellow, 210.
— — G, 145.
— — G G, 90.
Titan yellow Y, 90, 92, 93, 164.
Toluidine, 185, 187, 188.
— orange, 196.
Toluylene brown, 139.
— diamine, 134.
— orange, 139.
— —G, 90, 91, 100.
— —K, 100.
Topping, 140.
— with acid and basic dye-stuffs, 228.
— brown O, 210.
— — P, 164.
— — R, 102, 210.
— — Y, 161, 210.
— colours, 227.
— como G, 95.
— — S N, 98.
— dyes, 18, 85.
— gold, 101, 102.
— ingrain blue, 135, 136, 142.
— marine blue, 211.
— navy R, 98.
— orange, 88.
— — N, 95.
— pink, 210.
— red, 107.
— scarlet C, 88.
— — D, 88.
— — S, 209.
— yellow, 210.
— — G, 145.
— — G G, 90.
Titan yellow Y, 90, 92, 93, 164.
Toluidine, 185, 187, 188.
— orange, 196.
Toluylene brown, 139.
— diamine, 134.
— orange, 139.
— —G, 90, 91, 100.
— —K, 100.
Topping, 140.
— with acid and basic dye-stuffs, 228.
Page 295
— with basic dyes, 145.
Triamine black, 132.
— — B, 96, 137.
— — B T, 98.
Tropæoline O, 229.
— O O, 211, 229.
Truck yarn-dyer, 254, 255.
Turkey red, 87, 167, 181.
— — bleach, 38, 39.
— — oil, 88, 90, 95, 96, 160, 170, 171, 172, 173, 180, 189, 192, 196.
Turmeric, 165, 166, 167.
Turquoise blue, 98, 116, 151, 155, 232.
— — G, 146, 151, 152.
U.
Union black B, 209, 214.
— — S, 209, 214, 215, 216, 217, 228, 234.
— blue B B, 209.
V.
Valonia, 147.
Verdigris, 177.
Victoria blue, 150.
— — B, 151, 152.
Triamine black, 132.
— — B, 96, 137.
— — B T, 98.
Tropæoline O, 229.
— O O, 211, 229.
Truck yarn-dyer, 254, 255.
Turkey red, 87, 167, 181.
— — bleach, 38, 39.
— — oil, 88, 90, 95, 96, 160, 170, 171, 172, 173, 180, 189, 192, 196.
Turmeric, 165, 166, 167.
Turquoise blue, 98, 116, 151, 155, 232.
— — G, 146, 151, 152.
U.
Union black B, 209, 214.
— — S, 209, 214, 215, 216, 217, 228, 234.
— blue B B, 209.
V.
Valonia, 147.
Verdigris, 177.
Victoria blue, 150.
— — B, 151, 152.
Page 296
Vidal black, 107, 121, 123.
— blacks, 79.
Violet, 99, 100, 146, 154, 230.
— and yellow shot dyes, 238.
— blue, 97.
W.
Walnut brown, 102, 119, 138, 142, 219, 233.
Warp bleaching, 43.
Warp-dyeing machines, 69, 70, 71.
Washing after dyeing, 239.
Washing and soaping vats, illustration of, 248.
— of cotton in bleaching, 36.
— operations after dyeing, 242.
Water blue, 229.
— of condition, 6.
— volume used in dyeing, 107.
White indigo, 198.
— liquor treatment, 168.
— sour operation, 38.
Whizzing, 45.
Willesden waterproof cloths, 22.
Wince dye beck, 74.
Witz, George, 17.
— blacks, 79.
Violet, 99, 100, 146, 154, 230.
— and yellow shot dyes, 238.
— blue, 97.
W.
Walnut brown, 102, 119, 138, 142, 219, 233.
Warp bleaching, 43.
Warp-dyeing machines, 69, 70, 71.
Washing after dyeing, 239.
Washing and soaping vats, illustration of, 248.
— of cotton in bleaching, 36.
— operations after dyeing, 242.
Water blue, 229.
— of condition, 6.
— volume used in dyeing, 107.
White indigo, 198.
— liquor treatment, 168.
— sour operation, 38.
Whizzing, 45.
Willesden waterproof cloths, 22.
Wince dye beck, 74.
Witz, George, 17.
Page 297
Wool black 6 B, 211, 217, 218, 223, 224.
— green, 84.
Worral's singeing machine, 27.
Wringing of dyed goods, 239.
Y.
Yarn bleaching, 43.
— washing machine, illustration of, 243.
Yarns in cop form, washing of, 244.
— in hanks, washing of, 244.
— in hanks, wringing of, 240.
Yellow, 90, 91, 113, 151.
— and violet shot dyes, 237.
— olive, 91.
Yellowish claret red, 187.
Young & Crippin's cop-dyeing machine, 68.
Z.
Zambesi black, 132.
— — B, 210, 218.
— — B R, 97.
— — D, 103, 104, 218.
— — F, 115, 119, 210.
— blue, 130,
— — B X, 136.
— — R X, 217, 218.
— green, 84.
Worral's singeing machine, 27.
Wringing of dyed goods, 239.
Y.
Yarn bleaching, 43.
— washing machine, illustration of, 243.
Yarns in cop form, washing of, 244.
— in hanks, washing of, 244.
— in hanks, wringing of, 240.
Yellow, 90, 91, 113, 151.
— and violet shot dyes, 237.
— olive, 91.
Yellowish claret red, 187.
Young & Crippin's cop-dyeing machine, 68.
Z.
Zambesi black, 132.
— — B, 210, 218.
— — B R, 97.
— — D, 103, 104, 218.
— — F, 115, 119, 210.
— blue, 130,
— — B X, 136.
— — R X, 217, 218.
Page 298
— brown, 130.
— — G, 210.
— — 2 G, 136, 210.
— dyes, 85, 208.
Zinc and lime vat for indigo dyeing, 201.
— bisulphite indigo vat, 203.
— chloride, 20.
— sulphate, 112.
— — G, 210.
— — 2 G, 136, 210.
— dyes, 85, 208.
Zinc and lime vat for indigo dyeing, 201.
— bisulphite indigo vat, 203.
— chloride, 20.
— sulphate, 112.
Page 299
Page 300
THE ABERDEEN UNIVERSITY PRESS
LIMITED.
SEPTEMBER, 1901.
This Catalogue cancels all former editions.
The Publishers seek to issue thoroughly helpful works. These books in
every instance will, they believe, be found of good value. Employers
will do well to place copies of these books in the hands of the bright
and promising young men in their employ, in order the better to equip
them to become increasingly useful as employees. A workman who
uses his brains must be preferable to one who does not think about his
work. Brains require stimulus. These books provide that stimulus.
LIMITED.
SEPTEMBER, 1901.
This Catalogue cancels all former editions.
The Publishers seek to issue thoroughly helpful works. These books in
every instance will, they believe, be found of good value. Employers
will do well to place copies of these books in the hands of the bright
and promising young men in their employ, in order the better to equip
them to become increasingly useful as employees. A workman who
uses his brains must be preferable to one who does not think about his
work. Brains require stimulus. These books provide that stimulus.
Page 301
A Catalogue
OF
OF
Page 302
Special Technical Works
FOR
MANUFACTURERS, PROFESSIONAL MEN, STUDENTS,
COLLEGES AND TECHNICAL SCHOOLS
BY EXPERT WRITERS
FOR THE
OIL, PAINT, COLOUR VARNISH, SOAP, CHEMICAL, TEXTILE,
LEATHER, PAPER, COLLIERY, POTTERY, GLASS, PLUMBING AND
DECORATING TRADES AND SCIENTIFIC PROFESSIONS.
PUBLISHED BY
SCOTT, GREENWOOD & CO.,
PUBLISHERS OF TECHNICAL BOOKS,
19 LUDGATE HILL, LONDON, E.C.
Tel. Address: "PRINTERIES, LONDON". Tel. No. 5403, Bank.
N.B.—Full Particulars of Contents of any of the following books sent post
free on application.
Messrs. Scott, Greenwood &. Co. are open to make offers for the
publication of technical works.
FOR
MANUFACTURERS, PROFESSIONAL MEN, STUDENTS,
COLLEGES AND TECHNICAL SCHOOLS
BY EXPERT WRITERS
FOR THE
OIL, PAINT, COLOUR VARNISH, SOAP, CHEMICAL, TEXTILE,
LEATHER, PAPER, COLLIERY, POTTERY, GLASS, PLUMBING AND
DECORATING TRADES AND SCIENTIFIC PROFESSIONS.
PUBLISHED BY
SCOTT, GREENWOOD & CO.,
PUBLISHERS OF TECHNICAL BOOKS,
19 LUDGATE HILL, LONDON, E.C.
Tel. Address: "PRINTERIES, LONDON". Tel. No. 5403, Bank.
N.B.—Full Particulars of Contents of any of the following books sent post
free on application.
Messrs. Scott, Greenwood &. Co. are open to make offers for the
publication of technical works.
Page 303
Books on Oils, Soaps, Colours, Chemicals, Glue,
Varnishes, etc.
THE PRACTICAL COMPOUNDING OF OILS, TALLOW AND
GREASE FOR LUBRICATION, ETC.
By AN EXPERT OIL REFINER. 100 pp. 1898. Demy 8vo. Price 7s. 6d.;
India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Introductory Remarks on the General Nomenclature of Oils,
Tallow and Greases suitable for Lubrication.—II., Hydrocarbon Oils.—III.,
Animal and Fish Oils.—IV., Compound Oils.—V., Vegetable Oils.—VI.,
Lamp Oils.—VII., Engine Tallow, Solidified Oils and Petroleum Jelly.—
VIII., Machinery Greases: Loco and Anti-friction.—IX., Clarifying and
Utilisation of Waste Fats, Oils, Tank Bottoms, Drainings of Barrels and
Drums, Pickings Up, Dregs, etc.—X., The Fixing and Cleaning of Oil
Tanks, etc.—Appendix and General Information.
Press Opinions.
"This work is written from the standpoint of the oil trade, but its
perusal will be found very useful by users of machinery and all who
have to do with lubricants in any way."—Colliery Guardian.
"The properties of the different grades of mineral oil and of the animal
and vegetable non-drying oils are carefully described, and the author
justly insists that the peculiarities of the machinery on which the
lubricants are to be employed must be considered almost before
everything else.... The chapters on grease and solidified oils, etc., are
excellent."—The Ironmonger.
Varnishes, etc.
THE PRACTICAL COMPOUNDING OF OILS, TALLOW AND
GREASE FOR LUBRICATION, ETC.
By AN EXPERT OIL REFINER. 100 pp. 1898. Demy 8vo. Price 7s. 6d.;
India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Introductory Remarks on the General Nomenclature of Oils,
Tallow and Greases suitable for Lubrication.—II., Hydrocarbon Oils.—III.,
Animal and Fish Oils.—IV., Compound Oils.—V., Vegetable Oils.—VI.,
Lamp Oils.—VII., Engine Tallow, Solidified Oils and Petroleum Jelly.—
VIII., Machinery Greases: Loco and Anti-friction.—IX., Clarifying and
Utilisation of Waste Fats, Oils, Tank Bottoms, Drainings of Barrels and
Drums, Pickings Up, Dregs, etc.—X., The Fixing and Cleaning of Oil
Tanks, etc.—Appendix and General Information.
Press Opinions.
"This work is written from the standpoint of the oil trade, but its
perusal will be found very useful by users of machinery and all who
have to do with lubricants in any way."—Colliery Guardian.
"The properties of the different grades of mineral oil and of the animal
and vegetable non-drying oils are carefully described, and the author
justly insists that the peculiarities of the machinery on which the
lubricants are to be employed must be considered almost before
everything else.... The chapters on grease and solidified oils, etc., are
excellent."—The Ironmonger.
Page 304
SOAPS. A Practical Manual of the Manufacture of Domestic, Toilet and
other Soaps. By GEORGE H. HURST, F.C.S. Illustrated with Sixty-six
Engravings. 390 pp. 1898. Price 12s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 13s. 6d.;
Other Countries, 15s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Introductory.—II., Soap-maker's Alkalies.—III., Soap Fats and
Oils.—IV., Perfumes.—V., Water as a Soap Material.—VI., Soap
Machinery.—VII., Technology of Soap-making.—VIII., Glycerine in Soap
Lyes.—IX., Laying out a Soap Factory.—X., Soap Analysis.—Appendices.
Press Opinions.
"We think it is the most practical book on these subjects that has come
to us from England so far."—American Soap Journal.
"Much useful information is conveyed in a convenient and trustworthy
manner which will appeal to practical soap-makers."—Chemical Trade
Journal.
"Works that deal with manufacturing processes, and applied chemistry
in particular, are always welcome. Especially is this the case when the
material presented is so up-to-date as we find it here."—Bradford
Observer.
"The best and most reliable methods of analysis are fully discussed,
and form a valuable source of reference to any works' chemist.... Our
verdict is a capitally produced book, and one that is badly needed."—
Birmingham Post.
ANIMAL FATS AND OILS: Their Practical Production, Purification and
Uses for a great Variety of Purposes. Their Properties, Falsification and
Examination. A Handbook for Manufacturers of Oil and Fat Products, Soap
and Candle Makers, Agriculturists, Tanners, Margarine Manufacturers, etc.,
etc. By LOUIS EDGAR ANDÉS. Sixty-two Illustrations. 240 pp. 1898.
other Soaps. By GEORGE H. HURST, F.C.S. Illustrated with Sixty-six
Engravings. 390 pp. 1898. Price 12s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 13s. 6d.;
Other Countries, 15s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Introductory.—II., Soap-maker's Alkalies.—III., Soap Fats and
Oils.—IV., Perfumes.—V., Water as a Soap Material.—VI., Soap
Machinery.—VII., Technology of Soap-making.—VIII., Glycerine in Soap
Lyes.—IX., Laying out a Soap Factory.—X., Soap Analysis.—Appendices.
Press Opinions.
"We think it is the most practical book on these subjects that has come
to us from England so far."—American Soap Journal.
"Much useful information is conveyed in a convenient and trustworthy
manner which will appeal to practical soap-makers."—Chemical Trade
Journal.
"Works that deal with manufacturing processes, and applied chemistry
in particular, are always welcome. Especially is this the case when the
material presented is so up-to-date as we find it here."—Bradford
Observer.
"The best and most reliable methods of analysis are fully discussed,
and form a valuable source of reference to any works' chemist.... Our
verdict is a capitally produced book, and one that is badly needed."—
Birmingham Post.
ANIMAL FATS AND OILS: Their Practical Production, Purification and
Uses for a great Variety of Purposes. Their Properties, Falsification and
Examination. A Handbook for Manufacturers of Oil and Fat Products, Soap
and Candle Makers, Agriculturists, Tanners, Margarine Manufacturers, etc.,
etc. By LOUIS EDGAR ANDÉS. Sixty-two Illustrations. 240 pp. 1898.
Page 305
Demy 8vo. Price 10s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 11s.; Other Countries, 12s.;
strictly net.
Contents.
Introduction. Occurrence, Origin, Properties and Chemical Constitution of
Animal Fats Preparation of Animal Fats and Oils. Machinery. Tallow-
melting Plant. Extraction Plant. Presses. Filtering Apparatus. Butter: Raw
Material and Preparation, Properties, Adulterations. Beef Lard or Remelted
Butter, Testing. Candle-fish Oil. Mutton-Tallow. Hare Fat. Goose Fat.
Neatsfoot Oil. Bone Fat: Bone Boiling, Steaming Bones,. Extraction,
Refining. Bone Oil. Artificial Butter: Oleomargarine, Margarine
Manufacture in France, Grasso's Process, "Kaiser's Butter," Jahr &
Münzberg's Method, Filbert's Process, Winter's Method. Human Fat. Horse
Fat. Beef Marrow. Turtle Oil. Hog's Lard: Raw Material, Preparation,
Properties, Adulterations, Examination. Lard Oil. Fish Oils. Liver Oils.
Artificial Train Oil. Wool Fat: Properties, Purified Wool Fat. Spermaceti:
Examination of Fats and Oils in General.
Press Opinions.
"The descriptions of technical processes are clear, and the book is well
illustrated and should prove useful."—Manchester Guardian.
"It is a valuable work, not only for the student, but also for the
practical manufacturer of oil and fat products."—Journal of the
American Chemical Society.
"The work is very fully illustrated, and the style throughout is in strong
contrast to that employed in many such treatises, being simple and
clear."—Shoe and Leather Record.
"An important handbook for the 'fat industry,' now a large one. The
explanation of the most scientific processes of production lose nothing
of their clearness in the translation."—Newcastle Chronicle.
"The latest and most improved forms of machinery are in all cases
indicated, and the many advances which have been made during the
past years in the methods of producing the more common animal fats
—lard, tallow and butter—receive due attention."—Glasgow Herald.
strictly net.
Contents.
Introduction. Occurrence, Origin, Properties and Chemical Constitution of
Animal Fats Preparation of Animal Fats and Oils. Machinery. Tallow-
melting Plant. Extraction Plant. Presses. Filtering Apparatus. Butter: Raw
Material and Preparation, Properties, Adulterations. Beef Lard or Remelted
Butter, Testing. Candle-fish Oil. Mutton-Tallow. Hare Fat. Goose Fat.
Neatsfoot Oil. Bone Fat: Bone Boiling, Steaming Bones,. Extraction,
Refining. Bone Oil. Artificial Butter: Oleomargarine, Margarine
Manufacture in France, Grasso's Process, "Kaiser's Butter," Jahr &
Münzberg's Method, Filbert's Process, Winter's Method. Human Fat. Horse
Fat. Beef Marrow. Turtle Oil. Hog's Lard: Raw Material, Preparation,
Properties, Adulterations, Examination. Lard Oil. Fish Oils. Liver Oils.
Artificial Train Oil. Wool Fat: Properties, Purified Wool Fat. Spermaceti:
Examination of Fats and Oils in General.
Press Opinions.
"The descriptions of technical processes are clear, and the book is well
illustrated and should prove useful."—Manchester Guardian.
"It is a valuable work, not only for the student, but also for the
practical manufacturer of oil and fat products."—Journal of the
American Chemical Society.
"The work is very fully illustrated, and the style throughout is in strong
contrast to that employed in many such treatises, being simple and
clear."—Shoe and Leather Record.
"An important handbook for the 'fat industry,' now a large one. The
explanation of the most scientific processes of production lose nothing
of their clearness in the translation."—Newcastle Chronicle.
"The latest and most improved forms of machinery are in all cases
indicated, and the many advances which have been made during the
past years in the methods of producing the more common animal fats
—lard, tallow and butter—receive due attention."—Glasgow Herald.
Page 306
VEGETABLE FATS AND OILS: Their Practical Preparation, Purification
and Employment for Various Purposes, their Properties, Adulteration and
Examination. A Handbook for Oil Manufacturers and Refiners, Candle,
Soap and Lubricating Oil Makers, and the Oil and Fat Industry in General.
Translated from the German of LOUIS EDGAR ANDÉS. 94 Illustrations.
320 pp. 1897. Demy 8vo. Price 10s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 11s.; Other
Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Statistical Data. General Properties of the Vegetable Fats and Oils.
Estimation of the Amount of Oil in Seeds. Table of Vegetable Fats and Oils,
with French and German Nomenclature, Source and Origin and Percentage
of Fat in the Plants from which they are Derived. The Preparation of
Vegetable Fats and Oils: Storing Oil Seeds: Cleaning the Seed. Apparatus
for Grinding Oil Seeds and Fruits. Installation of Oil and Fat Works.
Extraction Method of Obtaining Oils and Fats. Oil Extraction Installations,
Press Moulds, Non-drying Vegetable Oils. Vegetable drying Oils. Solid
Vegetable Fats. Fruits Yielding Oils and Fats. Wool-softening Oils. Soluble
Oils. Treatment of the Oil after Leaving the Press. Improved Methods of
Refining with Sulphuric Acid and Zinc Oxide or Lead Oxide. Refining with
Caustic Alkalies, Ammonia, Carbonates of the Alkalies, Lime. Bleaching
Fats and Oils. Practical Experiments on the Treatment of Oils with regard to
Refining and Bleaching. Testing Oils and Fats.
Press Opinions.
"Concerning that and all else within the wide and comprehensive
connection involved, this book must be invaluable to every one
directly or indirectly interested in the matters it treats of."—
Commerce. "The proprietors of the Oil and Colourman's Journal have
not only placed a valuable and highly interesting book of reference in
the hands of the fats and oils industry in general, but have rendered no
slight service to experimental and manufacturing chemists."—
Manufacturing Chemist.
IRON-CORROSION, ANTI-FOULING AND ANTI-CORROSIVE
PAINTS. By LOUIS EDGAR ANDÉS. 62 Illustrations. 275 pp. Translated
and Employment for Various Purposes, their Properties, Adulteration and
Examination. A Handbook for Oil Manufacturers and Refiners, Candle,
Soap and Lubricating Oil Makers, and the Oil and Fat Industry in General.
Translated from the German of LOUIS EDGAR ANDÉS. 94 Illustrations.
320 pp. 1897. Demy 8vo. Price 10s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 11s.; Other
Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Statistical Data. General Properties of the Vegetable Fats and Oils.
Estimation of the Amount of Oil in Seeds. Table of Vegetable Fats and Oils,
with French and German Nomenclature, Source and Origin and Percentage
of Fat in the Plants from which they are Derived. The Preparation of
Vegetable Fats and Oils: Storing Oil Seeds: Cleaning the Seed. Apparatus
for Grinding Oil Seeds and Fruits. Installation of Oil and Fat Works.
Extraction Method of Obtaining Oils and Fats. Oil Extraction Installations,
Press Moulds, Non-drying Vegetable Oils. Vegetable drying Oils. Solid
Vegetable Fats. Fruits Yielding Oils and Fats. Wool-softening Oils. Soluble
Oils. Treatment of the Oil after Leaving the Press. Improved Methods of
Refining with Sulphuric Acid and Zinc Oxide or Lead Oxide. Refining with
Caustic Alkalies, Ammonia, Carbonates of the Alkalies, Lime. Bleaching
Fats and Oils. Practical Experiments on the Treatment of Oils with regard to
Refining and Bleaching. Testing Oils and Fats.
Press Opinions.
"Concerning that and all else within the wide and comprehensive
connection involved, this book must be invaluable to every one
directly or indirectly interested in the matters it treats of."—
Commerce. "The proprietors of the Oil and Colourman's Journal have
not only placed a valuable and highly interesting book of reference in
the hands of the fats and oils industry in general, but have rendered no
slight service to experimental and manufacturing chemists."—
Manufacturing Chemist.
IRON-CORROSION, ANTI-FOULING AND ANTI-CORROSIVE
PAINTS. By LOUIS EDGAR ANDÉS. 62 Illustrations. 275 pp. Translated
Page 307
from the German. Demy 8vo. 1900. Price 10s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 11s.;
Other Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Ironrust and its Formation—Protection from Rusting by Paint—Grounding
the Iron with Linseed Oil, etc.—Testing Paints—Use of Tar for Painting on
Iron—Anti-corrosive Paints—Linseed Varnish—Chinese Wood Oil—Lead
Pigments—Iron Pigments—Artificial Iron Oxides—Carbon—Preparation
of Anti-corrosive Paints—Results of Examination of Several Anti-corrosive
Paints—Paints for Ship's Bottoms—Anti-fouling Compositions—Various
Anti-corrosive and Ship's Paints—Official Standard Specifications for
Ironwork Paints—Index.
Press Opinions.
"This is a very valuable book, translated from the German, discussing
in detail anti-fouling and anti-corrosive paints."—British Mercury.
"Will be of great service to paint manufacturers, engineering
contractors, ironfounders, shipbuilders and others."—Engineer and
Iron Trades Advertiser.
"The book before us deals with the subject in a manner at once
practical and scientific, and is well worthy of the attention of all
builders, architects and engineers."—The Builder.
"The book is very readable and full of valuable information, and
bearing in mind the importance of the subject treated, it is one which
engineers will be well advised to procure at an early date."—Railway
Engineer.
"The author goes fully into his subject, and the translator has been
successful in reproducing in another language what he has to say.
There are given in the text numerous illustrations of the rusting of iron,
prepared in the course of a series of personal experiments on the
formation of rust."—Journal of Gas Lighting.
"This work is a very elaborate and useful record of the various
phenomena in connection with the corrosion of iron and its protection
Other Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Ironrust and its Formation—Protection from Rusting by Paint—Grounding
the Iron with Linseed Oil, etc.—Testing Paints—Use of Tar for Painting on
Iron—Anti-corrosive Paints—Linseed Varnish—Chinese Wood Oil—Lead
Pigments—Iron Pigments—Artificial Iron Oxides—Carbon—Preparation
of Anti-corrosive Paints—Results of Examination of Several Anti-corrosive
Paints—Paints for Ship's Bottoms—Anti-fouling Compositions—Various
Anti-corrosive and Ship's Paints—Official Standard Specifications for
Ironwork Paints—Index.
Press Opinions.
"This is a very valuable book, translated from the German, discussing
in detail anti-fouling and anti-corrosive paints."—British Mercury.
"Will be of great service to paint manufacturers, engineering
contractors, ironfounders, shipbuilders and others."—Engineer and
Iron Trades Advertiser.
"The book before us deals with the subject in a manner at once
practical and scientific, and is well worthy of the attention of all
builders, architects and engineers."—The Builder.
"The book is very readable and full of valuable information, and
bearing in mind the importance of the subject treated, it is one which
engineers will be well advised to procure at an early date."—Railway
Engineer.
"The author goes fully into his subject, and the translator has been
successful in reproducing in another language what he has to say.
There are given in the text numerous illustrations of the rusting of iron,
prepared in the course of a series of personal experiments on the
formation of rust."—Journal of Gas Lighting.
"This work is a very elaborate and useful record of the various
phenomena in connection with the corrosion of iron and its protection
Page 308
against corrosion.... The book is an exceedingly useful record of what
has been done in connection with iron preservation, and will
undoubtedly prove to be of much value to railway engineers,
shipowners, etc."—Fairplay.
"Herr Andés' book, written purely from a scientific standpoint, will be
particularly useful to iron manufacturers, shipbuilders and
shipowners.... The book is beautifully printed on good paper, and its
appearance does credit to the publishers; the work of translation has
been remarkably well done, the language bearing none of those
irritating traces of Teutonism which disfigure so many English
versions of German technical works."—The Ironmonger.
"This knowledge is conveyed with characteristic German thoroughness
in this useful work of Herr Andés, which loses nothing of clearness in
Mr. Salter's excellent translation. The causes of rust formation are
examined, the proper methods of cleansing the ironwork detailed, and
the constitution and application of suitable preventative coverings
explained.... The book is a welcome contribution to technological
literature, and will be found worthy of the careful study of all who are
professionally engaged in the arrangement or superintendence of the
class of work dealt with."—Western Daily Mercury.
"The author explains the nature of rust and its formation, and the text
is illustrated from about fifty photographs. An immense amount of
carefully arranged information follows as to the best methods of
applying anti-corrosive substances and the various pigments most
efficacious for use under all circumstances. The author has evidently
thoroughly investigated and mastered the subject of iron corrosion, its
cause and its prevention; and we regard his book as of the greatest
importance to bridge-builders and makers and users of structural iron
and steel. The book is illustrated throughout and is admirably indexed
and arranged."—Iron and Steel Trades Journal.
THE MANUFACTURE OF ALUM AND THE SULPHATES AND
OTHER SALTS OF ALUMINA AND IRON. Their Uses and
Applications as Mordants in Dyeing and Calico Printing, and their other
Applications in the Arts, Manufactures, Sanitary Engineering, Agriculture
has been done in connection with iron preservation, and will
undoubtedly prove to be of much value to railway engineers,
shipowners, etc."—Fairplay.
"Herr Andés' book, written purely from a scientific standpoint, will be
particularly useful to iron manufacturers, shipbuilders and
shipowners.... The book is beautifully printed on good paper, and its
appearance does credit to the publishers; the work of translation has
been remarkably well done, the language bearing none of those
irritating traces of Teutonism which disfigure so many English
versions of German technical works."—The Ironmonger.
"This knowledge is conveyed with characteristic German thoroughness
in this useful work of Herr Andés, which loses nothing of clearness in
Mr. Salter's excellent translation. The causes of rust formation are
examined, the proper methods of cleansing the ironwork detailed, and
the constitution and application of suitable preventative coverings
explained.... The book is a welcome contribution to technological
literature, and will be found worthy of the careful study of all who are
professionally engaged in the arrangement or superintendence of the
class of work dealt with."—Western Daily Mercury.
"The author explains the nature of rust and its formation, and the text
is illustrated from about fifty photographs. An immense amount of
carefully arranged information follows as to the best methods of
applying anti-corrosive substances and the various pigments most
efficacious for use under all circumstances. The author has evidently
thoroughly investigated and mastered the subject of iron corrosion, its
cause and its prevention; and we regard his book as of the greatest
importance to bridge-builders and makers and users of structural iron
and steel. The book is illustrated throughout and is admirably indexed
and arranged."—Iron and Steel Trades Journal.
THE MANUFACTURE OF ALUM AND THE SULPHATES AND
OTHER SALTS OF ALUMINA AND IRON. Their Uses and
Applications as Mordants in Dyeing and Calico Printing, and their other
Applications in the Arts, Manufactures, Sanitary Engineering, Agriculture
Page 309
and Horticulture. Translated from the French of LUCIEN GESCHWIND.
195 Illustrations. Nearly 400 pp. Royal 8vo. 1901. Price 12s. 6d.; India and
Colonies, 13s. 6d.; Other Countries, 15s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I., Theoretical Study of Aluminium, Iron, and Compounds of these
Metals.—Chapters I., Aluminium and its Compounds.—II., Iron and Iron
Compounds.
Part II., Manufacture of Aluminium Sulphates and Sulphates of Iron.—
Chapters III., Manufacture of Aluminium Sulphate and the Alums.—IV.,
Manufacture of Sulphates of Iron.
Part III., Uses of the Sulphates of Aluminium and Iron.—Chapters V.,
Uses of Aluminium Sulphate and Alums—Application to Wool and Silk—
Preparing and using Aluminium Acetates—Employment of Aluminium
Sulphate in Carbonising Wool—The Manufacture of Lake Pigments—
Manufacture of Prussian Blue—Hide and Leather Industry—Paper Making
—Hardening Plaster—Lime Washes—Preparation of Non-inflammable
Wood, etc.—Purification of Waste Waters.—VI., Uses and Applications of
Ferrous Sulphate and Ferric Sulphates.—Dyeing—Manufacture of
Pigments—Writing Inks—Purification of Lighting Gas—Agriculture—
Cotton Dyeing—Disinfectant—Purifying Waste Liquors—Manufacture of
Nordhausen Sulphuric Acid—Fertilising.
Part IV., Chemical Characteristics of Iron and Aluminium.—Analysis of
Various Aluminous or Ferruginous Products.—Chapter VII., Aluminium.
—Analysing Aluminium Products.—Alunite Alumina—Sodium
Aluminate—Aluminium Sulphate. Chapter VIII., Iron.—Analytical
Characteristics of Iron Salts—Analysis of Pyritic Lignite—Ferrous and
Ferric Sulphates—Rouil Mordant—Index.
MANUAL OF AGRICULTURAL CHEMISTRY. By HERBERT INGLE,
F.I.C., Lecturer on Agricultural Chemistry, the Yorkshire College; Lecturer
in the Victoria University. [In the press.
Contents.
195 Illustrations. Nearly 400 pp. Royal 8vo. 1901. Price 12s. 6d.; India and
Colonies, 13s. 6d.; Other Countries, 15s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I., Theoretical Study of Aluminium, Iron, and Compounds of these
Metals.—Chapters I., Aluminium and its Compounds.—II., Iron and Iron
Compounds.
Part II., Manufacture of Aluminium Sulphates and Sulphates of Iron.—
Chapters III., Manufacture of Aluminium Sulphate and the Alums.—IV.,
Manufacture of Sulphates of Iron.
Part III., Uses of the Sulphates of Aluminium and Iron.—Chapters V.,
Uses of Aluminium Sulphate and Alums—Application to Wool and Silk—
Preparing and using Aluminium Acetates—Employment of Aluminium
Sulphate in Carbonising Wool—The Manufacture of Lake Pigments—
Manufacture of Prussian Blue—Hide and Leather Industry—Paper Making
—Hardening Plaster—Lime Washes—Preparation of Non-inflammable
Wood, etc.—Purification of Waste Waters.—VI., Uses and Applications of
Ferrous Sulphate and Ferric Sulphates.—Dyeing—Manufacture of
Pigments—Writing Inks—Purification of Lighting Gas—Agriculture—
Cotton Dyeing—Disinfectant—Purifying Waste Liquors—Manufacture of
Nordhausen Sulphuric Acid—Fertilising.
Part IV., Chemical Characteristics of Iron and Aluminium.—Analysis of
Various Aluminous or Ferruginous Products.—Chapter VII., Aluminium.
—Analysing Aluminium Products.—Alunite Alumina—Sodium
Aluminate—Aluminium Sulphate. Chapter VIII., Iron.—Analytical
Characteristics of Iron Salts—Analysis of Pyritic Lignite—Ferrous and
Ferric Sulphates—Rouil Mordant—Index.
MANUAL OF AGRICULTURAL CHEMISTRY. By HERBERT INGLE,
F.I.C., Lecturer on Agricultural Chemistry, the Yorkshire College; Lecturer
in the Victoria University. [In the press.
Contents.
Page 310
Chapters I., Introduction.—II., The Atmosphere.—III., The Soil.—IV., The
Reactions occurring in Soils.—V., The Analysis of Soils.—VI., Manures,
Natural.—VII., Manures (continued).—VIII., The Analysis of Manures.—
IX., The Constituents of Plants.—X., The Plant.—XI, Crops.—XII., The
Animal.
LUBRICATING OILS, FATS AND GREASES: Their Origin,
Preparation, Properties, Uses and Analyses. A Handbook for Oil
Manufacturers, Refiners and Merchants, and the Oil and Fat Industry in
General. By GEORGE H. HURST, F.C.S. Second Edition. Sixty-five
Illustrations. 313 pp. Demy 8vo. 1901. Price 10s. 6d.; India and Colonies,
11s.; Other Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Introductory. Oils and Fats, Fatty Oils and Fats, Hydrocarbon
Oils, Uses of Oils.—II., Hydrocarbon Oils. Distillation, Simple
Distillation, Destructive Distillation, Products of Distillation,
Hydrocarbons, Paraffins, Olefins, Napthenes.—III., Scotch Shale Oils.
Scotch Shales, Distillation of Scotch Oils, Shale Retorts, Products of
Distilling Shales.
Separating Products, Treating Crude Shale Oil, Refining Shale Oil, Shale
Oil Stills, Shale Naphtha Burning Oils, Lubricating Oils, Wax.—IV.,
Petroleum. Occurrence, Geology, Origin, Composition, Extraction,
Refining, Petroleum Stills, Petroleum Products, Cylinder Oils, Russian
Petroleum, Deblooming Mineral Oils.—V., Vegetable and Animal Oils.
Introduction, Chemical Composition of Oils and Fats, Fatty Acids,
Glycerine, Extraction of Animal and Vegetable Fats and Oils, Animal Oils,
Vegetable Oils, Rendering, Pressing, Refining, Bleaching, Tallow, Tallow
Oil, Lard Oil, Neatsfoot Oil, Palm Oil, Palm Nut Oil, Cocoa-nut Oil, Castor
Oil, Olive Oil, Rape and Colza Oils, Arachis Oil, Niger Seed Oil, Sperm
Oils, Whale Oil, Seal Oil, Brown Oils, Lardine, Thickened Rape Oil.—VI.,
Testing and Adulteration of Oils. Specific Gravity, Alkali Tests, Sulphuric
Acid Tests, Free Acids in Oils, Viscosity Tests, Flash and Fire Tests,
Evaporation Tests, Iodine and Bromide Tests, Elaidin Test, Melting Point of
Fat, Testing Machines.—VII., Lubricating Greases. Rosin Oil, Anthracene
Oil, Making Greases, Testing and Analysis of Greases.—VIII.,
Reactions occurring in Soils.—V., The Analysis of Soils.—VI., Manures,
Natural.—VII., Manures (continued).—VIII., The Analysis of Manures.—
IX., The Constituents of Plants.—X., The Plant.—XI, Crops.—XII., The
Animal.
LUBRICATING OILS, FATS AND GREASES: Their Origin,
Preparation, Properties, Uses and Analyses. A Handbook for Oil
Manufacturers, Refiners and Merchants, and the Oil and Fat Industry in
General. By GEORGE H. HURST, F.C.S. Second Edition. Sixty-five
Illustrations. 313 pp. Demy 8vo. 1901. Price 10s. 6d.; India and Colonies,
11s.; Other Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Introductory. Oils and Fats, Fatty Oils and Fats, Hydrocarbon
Oils, Uses of Oils.—II., Hydrocarbon Oils. Distillation, Simple
Distillation, Destructive Distillation, Products of Distillation,
Hydrocarbons, Paraffins, Olefins, Napthenes.—III., Scotch Shale Oils.
Scotch Shales, Distillation of Scotch Oils, Shale Retorts, Products of
Distilling Shales.
Separating Products, Treating Crude Shale Oil, Refining Shale Oil, Shale
Oil Stills, Shale Naphtha Burning Oils, Lubricating Oils, Wax.—IV.,
Petroleum. Occurrence, Geology, Origin, Composition, Extraction,
Refining, Petroleum Stills, Petroleum Products, Cylinder Oils, Russian
Petroleum, Deblooming Mineral Oils.—V., Vegetable and Animal Oils.
Introduction, Chemical Composition of Oils and Fats, Fatty Acids,
Glycerine, Extraction of Animal and Vegetable Fats and Oils, Animal Oils,
Vegetable Oils, Rendering, Pressing, Refining, Bleaching, Tallow, Tallow
Oil, Lard Oil, Neatsfoot Oil, Palm Oil, Palm Nut Oil, Cocoa-nut Oil, Castor
Oil, Olive Oil, Rape and Colza Oils, Arachis Oil, Niger Seed Oil, Sperm
Oils, Whale Oil, Seal Oil, Brown Oils, Lardine, Thickened Rape Oil.—VI.,
Testing and Adulteration of Oils. Specific Gravity, Alkali Tests, Sulphuric
Acid Tests, Free Acids in Oils, Viscosity Tests, Flash and Fire Tests,
Evaporation Tests, Iodine and Bromide Tests, Elaidin Test, Melting Point of
Fat, Testing Machines.—VII., Lubricating Greases. Rosin Oil, Anthracene
Oil, Making Greases, Testing and Analysis of Greases.—VIII.,
Page 311
Lubrication. Friction and Lubrication, Lubricant, Lubrication of Ordinary
Machinery, Spontaneous Combustion of Oils, Stainless Oils, Lubrication of
Engine Cylinders, Cylinder Oils.—Appendices. A. Table of Baume's
Hydrometer—B. Table of Thermometric Degrees—C. Table of Specific
Gravities of Oils—Index.
Press Opinions.
"The book is well printed, and is a credit alike to author, printer and
publisher."—Textile Mercury.
"It will be a valuable addition to the technical library of every steam
user's establishment." —Machinery Market.
"Mr. Hurst has in this work supplied a practical treatise which should
prove of especial value to oil dealers, and also, though in a less degree,
to oil users."—Textile Manufacturer.
"This is a clear and concise treatment of the method of manufacturing
and refining lubricating oils.... The book is one which is well worthy
the attention of readers who are users of oil."—Textile Recorder.
"We have no hesitation in saying that in our opinion this book ought to
be very useful to all those who are interested in oils, whether as
manufacturers or users of lubricants, or to those chemists or engineers
whose duty it may be to report upon the suitability of the same for any
particular class of work."—Engineer.
"The author is widely known and highly respected as an authority on
the chemistry of oils and the technics of lubrication, and it is safe to
say that no work of similar interest or equal value to the general oil-
selling and consuming public has heretofore appeared in the English
language."—Drugs, Oils and Paints, U.S.A.
"This valuable and useful work, which is both scientific and practical,
has been written with a view of supplying those who deal in and use
oils, etc., for the purpose of lubrication, with some information
respecting the special properties of the various products which cause
these various oils to be of value as lubricants."—Industries and Iron.
Machinery, Spontaneous Combustion of Oils, Stainless Oils, Lubrication of
Engine Cylinders, Cylinder Oils.—Appendices. A. Table of Baume's
Hydrometer—B. Table of Thermometric Degrees—C. Table of Specific
Gravities of Oils—Index.
Press Opinions.
"The book is well printed, and is a credit alike to author, printer and
publisher."—Textile Mercury.
"It will be a valuable addition to the technical library of every steam
user's establishment." —Machinery Market.
"Mr. Hurst has in this work supplied a practical treatise which should
prove of especial value to oil dealers, and also, though in a less degree,
to oil users."—Textile Manufacturer.
"This is a clear and concise treatment of the method of manufacturing
and refining lubricating oils.... The book is one which is well worthy
the attention of readers who are users of oil."—Textile Recorder.
"We have no hesitation in saying that in our opinion this book ought to
be very useful to all those who are interested in oils, whether as
manufacturers or users of lubricants, or to those chemists or engineers
whose duty it may be to report upon the suitability of the same for any
particular class of work."—Engineer.
"The author is widely known and highly respected as an authority on
the chemistry of oils and the technics of lubrication, and it is safe to
say that no work of similar interest or equal value to the general oil-
selling and consuming public has heretofore appeared in the English
language."—Drugs, Oils and Paints, U.S.A.
"This valuable and useful work, which is both scientific and practical,
has been written with a view of supplying those who deal in and use
oils, etc., for the purpose of lubrication, with some information
respecting the special properties of the various products which cause
these various oils to be of value as lubricants."—Industries and Iron.
Page 312
"A mere glance at the table of contents is sufficient to show how
various are the conditions to which these materials have to be applied,
how much knowledge is required for the selection of the right kind for
each particular purpose, and how by processes of mixture or
manufacture the requisite qualities are obtained in each case."—
Manchester Guardian.
AMMONIA AND ITS COMPOUNDS: Their Manufacture and Uses. By
CAMILLE VINCENT, Professor at the Central School of Arts and
Manufactures, Paris. Translated from the French by M. J. SALTER. Royal
8vo. 113 pp. 1901. Thirty-two Illustrations. Price 5s.; India and Colonies,
5s. 6d.; Other Countries, 6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., General Considerations: Sections 1. Various Sources of
Ammoniacal Products; 2. Human Urine as a Source of Ammonia. II.,
Extraction of Ammoniacal Products from Sewage: Sections 1.
Preliminary Treatment of Excreta in the Settling Tanks—The Lencauchez
Process, The Bilange Process, The Kuentz Process; 2. Treatment of the
Clarified Liquors for the Manufacture of Ammonium Sulphate—The
Figuera Process and Apparatus, Apparatus of Margueritte and Sourdeval,
The Lair Apparatus, Apparatus of Sintier and Muhe, Apparatus of Bilange,
The Kuentz Process, Process and Apparatus of Hennebutte and De Vauréal;
3. Treatment of Entire Sewage—Chevalet's Apparatus, Paul Mallet's
Apparatus, Lencauchez's Apparatus. III., Extraction of Ammonia from
Gas Liquor: Sections 1. Clarification of Gas Liquor; 2. Manufacture of
Ammonium Sulphate—A. Mallet's Apparatus, A. Mallet's Modified
Apparatus, Paul Mallet's Apparatus, Chevalet's Apparatus, Grüneberg's
Apparatus; 3. Concentration of Gas Liquor—Solvay's Apparatus, Kuentz's
Apparatus, Grüneberg's Apparatus. IV., Manufacture of Ammoniacal
Compounds from Bones, Nitrogenous Waste, Beetroot Wash and Peat:
Sections 1. Ammonia from Bones: 2. Ammonia from Nitrogenous Waste
Materials; 3. Ammonia from Beetroot Wash (Vinasse): 4. Ammonia from
Peat—Treatment of the Ammoniacal Liquors. V., Manufacture of Caustic
Ammonia, and Ammonium Chloride, Phosphate and Carbonate:
Sections 1. Manufacture of Caustic Ammonia; 2. Manufacture of
Ammonium Chloride—From Fermented Urine, Process of the Lesage
various are the conditions to which these materials have to be applied,
how much knowledge is required for the selection of the right kind for
each particular purpose, and how by processes of mixture or
manufacture the requisite qualities are obtained in each case."—
Manchester Guardian.
AMMONIA AND ITS COMPOUNDS: Their Manufacture and Uses. By
CAMILLE VINCENT, Professor at the Central School of Arts and
Manufactures, Paris. Translated from the French by M. J. SALTER. Royal
8vo. 113 pp. 1901. Thirty-two Illustrations. Price 5s.; India and Colonies,
5s. 6d.; Other Countries, 6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., General Considerations: Sections 1. Various Sources of
Ammoniacal Products; 2. Human Urine as a Source of Ammonia. II.,
Extraction of Ammoniacal Products from Sewage: Sections 1.
Preliminary Treatment of Excreta in the Settling Tanks—The Lencauchez
Process, The Bilange Process, The Kuentz Process; 2. Treatment of the
Clarified Liquors for the Manufacture of Ammonium Sulphate—The
Figuera Process and Apparatus, Apparatus of Margueritte and Sourdeval,
The Lair Apparatus, Apparatus of Sintier and Muhe, Apparatus of Bilange,
The Kuentz Process, Process and Apparatus of Hennebutte and De Vauréal;
3. Treatment of Entire Sewage—Chevalet's Apparatus, Paul Mallet's
Apparatus, Lencauchez's Apparatus. III., Extraction of Ammonia from
Gas Liquor: Sections 1. Clarification of Gas Liquor; 2. Manufacture of
Ammonium Sulphate—A. Mallet's Apparatus, A. Mallet's Modified
Apparatus, Paul Mallet's Apparatus, Chevalet's Apparatus, Grüneberg's
Apparatus; 3. Concentration of Gas Liquor—Solvay's Apparatus, Kuentz's
Apparatus, Grüneberg's Apparatus. IV., Manufacture of Ammoniacal
Compounds from Bones, Nitrogenous Waste, Beetroot Wash and Peat:
Sections 1. Ammonia from Bones: 2. Ammonia from Nitrogenous Waste
Materials; 3. Ammonia from Beetroot Wash (Vinasse): 4. Ammonia from
Peat—Treatment of the Ammoniacal Liquors. V., Manufacture of Caustic
Ammonia, and Ammonium Chloride, Phosphate and Carbonate:
Sections 1. Manufacture of Caustic Ammonia; 2. Manufacture of
Ammonium Chloride—From Fermented Urine, Process of the Lesage
Page 313
Company, Kuentz's Process; From Gas Liquor, English Process, Kuentz's
Process; From the Dry Distillation of Animal Matter; From Ammonium
Sulphate, Sublimation; 3. Ammonium Phosphates; 4. Carbonates of
Ammonium—Sesquicarbonate from Animal Matter, English Process. Uses.
VI., Recovery of Ammonia from the Ammonia-Soda Mother Liquors:
Sections 1. General Considerations; 2. Apparatus of Schlœsing and Rolland;
3. Apparatus of the Société Anonyme de l'Est.—Index.
THE MANUFACTURE OF VARNISHES, OIL REFINING AND
BOILING, AND KINDRED INDUSTRIES. Describing the Manufacture
of Spirit Varnishes and Oil Varnishes; Raw Materials: Resins, Solvents and
Colouring Principles; Drying Oils: their Properties, Applications and
Preparation by both Hot and Cold Processes; Manufacture, Employment
and Testing of Different Varnishes. Translated from the French of ACH.
LIVACHE, Ingénieur Civil des Mines. Greatly Extended and Adapted to
English Practice, with numerous Original Recipes. By JOHN GEDDES
MCINTOSH, Lecturer on Oils, Colours and Varnishes, Regent Street
Polytechnic. Twenty-seven Illustrations. 400 pp. Demy 8vo. 1899. Price
12s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 13s. 6d.; Other Countries, 15s.; strictly net.
Contents.
I. Resins: Gum Resins, Oleo Resins and Balsams, Commercial Varieties,
Source, Collection, Characteristics, Chemical Properties, Physical
Properties, Hardness, Adulterations. Appropriate Solvents, Special
Treatment, Special Use.—II. Solvents: Natural, Artificial, Manufacture,
Storage, Special Use.—III. Colouring: Principles, (1) Vegetable, (2) Coal
Tar, (3) Coloured Resinates, (4) Coloured Oleates and Linoleates.—Gum
Running: Furnaces, Bridges, Flues, Chimney Shafts, Melting Pots,
Condensers, Boiling or Mixing Pans, Copper Vessels, Iron Vessels (Cast),
Iron Vessels (Wrought), Iron Vessels (Silvered), Iron Vessels (Enamelled),
Steam Superheated Plant, Hot-air Plant.—Spirit Varnish Manufacture: Cold
Solution Plant, Mechanical Agitators, Hot Solution Plant, Jacketted Pans,
Mechanical Agitators, Clarification and Filtration, Bleaching Plant, Storage
Plant.—Manufacture, Characteristics and Uses of the Spirit Varnishes
yielded by: Amber, Copal, Dammar, Shellac, Mastic, Sandarac, Rosin,
Asphalt, India Rubber, Gutta Percha, Collodion, Celluloid, Resinates,
Oleates.—Manufacture of Varnish Stains.—Manufacture of Lacquers.—
Process; From the Dry Distillation of Animal Matter; From Ammonium
Sulphate, Sublimation; 3. Ammonium Phosphates; 4. Carbonates of
Ammonium—Sesquicarbonate from Animal Matter, English Process. Uses.
VI., Recovery of Ammonia from the Ammonia-Soda Mother Liquors:
Sections 1. General Considerations; 2. Apparatus of Schlœsing and Rolland;
3. Apparatus of the Société Anonyme de l'Est.—Index.
THE MANUFACTURE OF VARNISHES, OIL REFINING AND
BOILING, AND KINDRED INDUSTRIES. Describing the Manufacture
of Spirit Varnishes and Oil Varnishes; Raw Materials: Resins, Solvents and
Colouring Principles; Drying Oils: their Properties, Applications and
Preparation by both Hot and Cold Processes; Manufacture, Employment
and Testing of Different Varnishes. Translated from the French of ACH.
LIVACHE, Ingénieur Civil des Mines. Greatly Extended and Adapted to
English Practice, with numerous Original Recipes. By JOHN GEDDES
MCINTOSH, Lecturer on Oils, Colours and Varnishes, Regent Street
Polytechnic. Twenty-seven Illustrations. 400 pp. Demy 8vo. 1899. Price
12s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 13s. 6d.; Other Countries, 15s.; strictly net.
Contents.
I. Resins: Gum Resins, Oleo Resins and Balsams, Commercial Varieties,
Source, Collection, Characteristics, Chemical Properties, Physical
Properties, Hardness, Adulterations. Appropriate Solvents, Special
Treatment, Special Use.—II. Solvents: Natural, Artificial, Manufacture,
Storage, Special Use.—III. Colouring: Principles, (1) Vegetable, (2) Coal
Tar, (3) Coloured Resinates, (4) Coloured Oleates and Linoleates.—Gum
Running: Furnaces, Bridges, Flues, Chimney Shafts, Melting Pots,
Condensers, Boiling or Mixing Pans, Copper Vessels, Iron Vessels (Cast),
Iron Vessels (Wrought), Iron Vessels (Silvered), Iron Vessels (Enamelled),
Steam Superheated Plant, Hot-air Plant.—Spirit Varnish Manufacture: Cold
Solution Plant, Mechanical Agitators, Hot Solution Plant, Jacketted Pans,
Mechanical Agitators, Clarification and Filtration, Bleaching Plant, Storage
Plant.—Manufacture, Characteristics and Uses of the Spirit Varnishes
yielded by: Amber, Copal, Dammar, Shellac, Mastic, Sandarac, Rosin,
Asphalt, India Rubber, Gutta Percha, Collodion, Celluloid, Resinates,
Oleates.—Manufacture of Varnish Stains.—Manufacture of Lacquers.—
Page 314
Manufacture of Spirit Enamels.—Analysis of Spirit Varnishes.—Physical
and Chemical Constants of Resins. —Table of Solubility of Resins in
different Menstrua.—Systematic qualitative Analysis of Resins, Hirschop's
tables.—Drying Oils: Oil Crushing Plant, Oil Extraction Plant, Individual
Oils, Special Treatment of Linseed Oil, Poppyseed Oil, Walnut Oil,
Hempseed Oil, Llamantia Oil, Japanese Wood Oil, Gurjun Balsam, Climatic
Influence on Seed and Oil.—Oil Refining: Processes, Thenard's, Liebig's,
Filtration, Storage, Old Tanked Oil.—Oil Boiling: Fire Boiling Plant, Steam
Boiling Plant, Hot-Air Plant, Air Pumps, Mechanical Agitators, Vincent's
Process, Hadfield's Patent, Storer's Patent, Walton's Processes, Continental
Processes, Pale Boiled Oil, Double Boiled Oil, Hartley and Blenkinsop's
Process.—Driers: Manufacture, Special Individual Use of (1) Litharge, (2)
Sugar of Lead, (3) Red Lead, (4) Lead Borate, (5) Lead Linoleate, (6) Lead
Resinate, (7) Black Oxide of Manganese, (8) Manganese Acetate, (9)
Manganese Borate, (10) Manganese Resinate, (II) Manganese Linoleate,
Mixed Resinates and Linoleates, Manganese and Lead, Zinc Sulphate,
Terebine, Liquid Driers.—Solidified Boiled Oil.—Manufacture of
Linoleum.—Manufacture of India Rubber Substitutes.—Printing Ink
Manufacture—Lithographic Ink Manufacture.—Manufacture of Oil
Varnishes.—Running and Special Treatment of Amber, Copal, Kauri,
Manilla.—Addition of Oil to Resin.—Addition of Resin to Oil.—Mixed
Processes.—Solution in Cold of previously Fused Resin.—Dissolving
Resins in Oil, etc., under pressure.—Filtration.—Clarification.—Storage.—
Ageing.—Coach-makers' Varnishes and Japans.—Oak Varnishes.—
Japanners' Stoving Varnishes.—Japanners' Gold Size.—Brunswick Black.
—Various Oil Varnishes.—Oil-Varnish Stains.—Varnishes for "Enamels".-
India Rubber Varnishes.—Varnishes Analysis: Processes, Matching.—
Faults in Varnishes: Cause, Prevention.—Experiments and Exercises.
Press Opinions.
"There is no question that this is a useful book."—Chemist and
Druggist.
"The different formulæ which are quoted appear to be far more
'practical' than such as are usually to be found in text-books: and
assuming that the original was published two or three years ago, and
was only slightly behindhand in its information, the present volume
and Chemical Constants of Resins. —Table of Solubility of Resins in
different Menstrua.—Systematic qualitative Analysis of Resins, Hirschop's
tables.—Drying Oils: Oil Crushing Plant, Oil Extraction Plant, Individual
Oils, Special Treatment of Linseed Oil, Poppyseed Oil, Walnut Oil,
Hempseed Oil, Llamantia Oil, Japanese Wood Oil, Gurjun Balsam, Climatic
Influence on Seed and Oil.—Oil Refining: Processes, Thenard's, Liebig's,
Filtration, Storage, Old Tanked Oil.—Oil Boiling: Fire Boiling Plant, Steam
Boiling Plant, Hot-Air Plant, Air Pumps, Mechanical Agitators, Vincent's
Process, Hadfield's Patent, Storer's Patent, Walton's Processes, Continental
Processes, Pale Boiled Oil, Double Boiled Oil, Hartley and Blenkinsop's
Process.—Driers: Manufacture, Special Individual Use of (1) Litharge, (2)
Sugar of Lead, (3) Red Lead, (4) Lead Borate, (5) Lead Linoleate, (6) Lead
Resinate, (7) Black Oxide of Manganese, (8) Manganese Acetate, (9)
Manganese Borate, (10) Manganese Resinate, (II) Manganese Linoleate,
Mixed Resinates and Linoleates, Manganese and Lead, Zinc Sulphate,
Terebine, Liquid Driers.—Solidified Boiled Oil.—Manufacture of
Linoleum.—Manufacture of India Rubber Substitutes.—Printing Ink
Manufacture—Lithographic Ink Manufacture.—Manufacture of Oil
Varnishes.—Running and Special Treatment of Amber, Copal, Kauri,
Manilla.—Addition of Oil to Resin.—Addition of Resin to Oil.—Mixed
Processes.—Solution in Cold of previously Fused Resin.—Dissolving
Resins in Oil, etc., under pressure.—Filtration.—Clarification.—Storage.—
Ageing.—Coach-makers' Varnishes and Japans.—Oak Varnishes.—
Japanners' Stoving Varnishes.—Japanners' Gold Size.—Brunswick Black.
—Various Oil Varnishes.—Oil-Varnish Stains.—Varnishes for "Enamels".-
India Rubber Varnishes.—Varnishes Analysis: Processes, Matching.—
Faults in Varnishes: Cause, Prevention.—Experiments and Exercises.
Press Opinions.
"There is no question that this is a useful book."—Chemist and
Druggist.
"The different formulæ which are quoted appear to be far more
'practical' than such as are usually to be found in text-books: and
assuming that the original was published two or three years ago, and
was only slightly behindhand in its information, the present volume
Page 315
gives a fair insight into the position of the varnish industry."—The
Ironmonger.
Letter from the Teacher of a Technical Class.
"As a teacher I have often been consulted as to the best work on
Varnish Manufacture and kindred industries, and have been at a loss in
recommending a really practical one. It is therefore with pleasure that I
can now testify as to the merits of the book on these subjects by A.
Livache and J.G. McIntosh recently published by Messrs. Scott,
Greenwood & Co. In my opinion no varnish maker ought to be without
it; moreover, it is the best text-book that could be put into the hands of
trade students or beginners. It has also the merits of being thoroughly
up-to-date and of possessing a remarkably comprehensive index. I can
conscientiously recommend it to my students and trade friends."—
CHARLES HARRISON, Lecturer on the Manufacture of Painters'
Oils, Colours and Varnishes, Borough Polytechnic, Borough Road,
S.E. "23rd May, 1899"
THE MANUFACTURE OF LAKE PIGMENTS FROM ARTIFICIAL
COLOURS. By FRANCIS H. JENNISON, F.I.C., F.C.S. Sixteen
Coloured Plates, showing Specimens of Eighty-nine Colours, specially
prepared from the Recipes given in the Book. 136 pp. Demy 8vo. 1900.
Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Introduction.—II., The Groups of the Artificial Colouring
Matters.—III., The Nature and Manipulation of Artificial Colours.—IV.,
Lake-forming Bodies for Acid Colours. —V., Lake-forming Bodies' Basic
Colours.—VI., Lake Bases.—VII., The Principles of Lake Formation.—
VIII., Red Lakes.—IX., Orange, Yellow, Green, Blue, Violet and Black
Lakes. —X., The Production of Insoluble Azo Colours in the Form of
Pigments.—XI., The General Properties of Lakes Produced from Artificial
Colours.—XII., Washing, Filtering and Finishing. —XIII., Matching and
Testing Lake Pigments.—Index.
Press Opinions.
Ironmonger.
Letter from the Teacher of a Technical Class.
"As a teacher I have often been consulted as to the best work on
Varnish Manufacture and kindred industries, and have been at a loss in
recommending a really practical one. It is therefore with pleasure that I
can now testify as to the merits of the book on these subjects by A.
Livache and J.G. McIntosh recently published by Messrs. Scott,
Greenwood & Co. In my opinion no varnish maker ought to be without
it; moreover, it is the best text-book that could be put into the hands of
trade students or beginners. It has also the merits of being thoroughly
up-to-date and of possessing a remarkably comprehensive index. I can
conscientiously recommend it to my students and trade friends."—
CHARLES HARRISON, Lecturer on the Manufacture of Painters'
Oils, Colours and Varnishes, Borough Polytechnic, Borough Road,
S.E. "23rd May, 1899"
THE MANUFACTURE OF LAKE PIGMENTS FROM ARTIFICIAL
COLOURS. By FRANCIS H. JENNISON, F.I.C., F.C.S. Sixteen
Coloured Plates, showing Specimens of Eighty-nine Colours, specially
prepared from the Recipes given in the Book. 136 pp. Demy 8vo. 1900.
Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Introduction.—II., The Groups of the Artificial Colouring
Matters.—III., The Nature and Manipulation of Artificial Colours.—IV.,
Lake-forming Bodies for Acid Colours. —V., Lake-forming Bodies' Basic
Colours.—VI., Lake Bases.—VII., The Principles of Lake Formation.—
VIII., Red Lakes.—IX., Orange, Yellow, Green, Blue, Violet and Black
Lakes. —X., The Production of Insoluble Azo Colours in the Form of
Pigments.—XI., The General Properties of Lakes Produced from Artificial
Colours.—XII., Washing, Filtering and Finishing. —XIII., Matching and
Testing Lake Pigments.—Index.
Press Opinions.
Page 316
"It is evidently the result of prolonged research, and cannot but prove a
valuable consulting work to those engaged in the industry."—Derby
Mercury.
"The practical portion of the volume is the one which will especially
commend itself, as that is the part of the subject which most readers would
buy the book for."—Chemist and Druggist.
"This work just issued is a very valuable treatise on the manufacture of lake
pigments of the coal-tar series principally. The plan adopted by the author
in writing up the subject enables the manufacture to be very readily
understood.... The general properties of lakes produced from artificial
colours, washing, filtering and finishing, and matching and testing lake
pigments are well and exhaustively described, so that no manufacturer or
user of lake pigments can well afford to be without this work."—Chemical
Trade Journal.
"This is undoubtedly a book which will occupy a very high place amongst
technical works, and will prove of exceptional value to all whom it
immediately concerns. We have no hesitation in recommending it as one of
the best works of its class we have ever read. Mr. Jennison has set about his
task with a lucid style, and with a complete mastery of his subject. .. We do
not think students of the technical side of the paint and colour industry can
possibly spend 7s. 6d. in a more profitable way than by buying this
publication."—Eastern Morning News.
THE TESTING AND VALUATION OF RAW MATERIALS USED IN
PAINT AND COLOUR MANUFACTURE. By M.W. JONES, F.C.S. A
Book for the Laboratories of Colour Works. 88 pp. Crown 8vo. 1900. Price
5s.; India and Colonies, 5s. 6d.; Other Countries, 6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Aluminium Compounds. China Clay. Iron Compounds. Potassium
Compounds. Sodium Compounds. Ammonium Hydrate. Acids. Chromium
Compounds. Tin Compounds. Copper Compounds. Lead Compounds. Zinc
Compounds. Manganese Compounds. Arsenic Compounds. Antimony
Compounds. Calcium Compounds. Barium Compounds. Cadmium
valuable consulting work to those engaged in the industry."—Derby
Mercury.
"The practical portion of the volume is the one which will especially
commend itself, as that is the part of the subject which most readers would
buy the book for."—Chemist and Druggist.
"This work just issued is a very valuable treatise on the manufacture of lake
pigments of the coal-tar series principally. The plan adopted by the author
in writing up the subject enables the manufacture to be very readily
understood.... The general properties of lakes produced from artificial
colours, washing, filtering and finishing, and matching and testing lake
pigments are well and exhaustively described, so that no manufacturer or
user of lake pigments can well afford to be without this work."—Chemical
Trade Journal.
"This is undoubtedly a book which will occupy a very high place amongst
technical works, and will prove of exceptional value to all whom it
immediately concerns. We have no hesitation in recommending it as one of
the best works of its class we have ever read. Mr. Jennison has set about his
task with a lucid style, and with a complete mastery of his subject. .. We do
not think students of the technical side of the paint and colour industry can
possibly spend 7s. 6d. in a more profitable way than by buying this
publication."—Eastern Morning News.
THE TESTING AND VALUATION OF RAW MATERIALS USED IN
PAINT AND COLOUR MANUFACTURE. By M.W. JONES, F.C.S. A
Book for the Laboratories of Colour Works. 88 pp. Crown 8vo. 1900. Price
5s.; India and Colonies, 5s. 6d.; Other Countries, 6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Aluminium Compounds. China Clay. Iron Compounds. Potassium
Compounds. Sodium Compounds. Ammonium Hydrate. Acids. Chromium
Compounds. Tin Compounds. Copper Compounds. Lead Compounds. Zinc
Compounds. Manganese Compounds. Arsenic Compounds. Antimony
Compounds. Calcium Compounds. Barium Compounds. Cadmium
Page 317
Compounds. Mercury Compounds. Ultramarine. Cobalt and Carbon
Compounds. Oils Index.
Press Opinions.
"Though this excellent little work can appeal only to a limited class,
the chemists in colour works, yet it will appeal to them very strongly
indeed, for it will put them on the track of short, rapid, and yet
approximately, accurate methods of testing the comparative value of
competing samples of raw material used in paint and colour
manufacture."—North British Daily Mail.
"This little text-book is intended to supplement the larger and more
comprehensive works on the subject, and it embodies the result of Mr.
Jones' experiments and experiences, extending over a long period. It
gives, under separate headings, the principal ingredients and impurities
found in the raw materials, and is a handy work of reference for
ascertaining what is valuable or detrimental in the sample under
examination."—Blackburn Times.
"There is no attempt at literary adornment nor straining after literary
effect, but the lessons are imparted in simple and concise language.
This is just what a text-book should be.... The treatise is certainly most
useful, and bears internal evidence of being the results of actual work
in a busy manufactory and not of ephemeral cramming in a technical
school. The chapter arrangement is good, the index satisfactory, and
the book is altogether one which the practical chemist should keep as
accessible to his crucibles and filter paper."—Manchester Courier.
THE CHEMISTRY OF ESSENTIAL OILS AND ARTIFICIAL
PERFUMES. By ERNEST J. PARRY, B.SC. (Lond.), F.I.C., F.C.S.
Illustrated with Twenty Engravings. 400 pp. 1899. Demy 8vo. Price 12s.
6d.; India and Colonies, 13s. 6d.; Other Countries, 15s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Compounds. Oils Index.
Press Opinions.
"Though this excellent little work can appeal only to a limited class,
the chemists in colour works, yet it will appeal to them very strongly
indeed, for it will put them on the track of short, rapid, and yet
approximately, accurate methods of testing the comparative value of
competing samples of raw material used in paint and colour
manufacture."—North British Daily Mail.
"This little text-book is intended to supplement the larger and more
comprehensive works on the subject, and it embodies the result of Mr.
Jones' experiments and experiences, extending over a long period. It
gives, under separate headings, the principal ingredients and impurities
found in the raw materials, and is a handy work of reference for
ascertaining what is valuable or detrimental in the sample under
examination."—Blackburn Times.
"There is no attempt at literary adornment nor straining after literary
effect, but the lessons are imparted in simple and concise language.
This is just what a text-book should be.... The treatise is certainly most
useful, and bears internal evidence of being the results of actual work
in a busy manufactory and not of ephemeral cramming in a technical
school. The chapter arrangement is good, the index satisfactory, and
the book is altogether one which the practical chemist should keep as
accessible to his crucibles and filter paper."—Manchester Courier.
THE CHEMISTRY OF ESSENTIAL OILS AND ARTIFICIAL
PERFUMES. By ERNEST J. PARRY, B.SC. (Lond.), F.I.C., F.C.S.
Illustrated with Twenty Engravings. 400 pp. 1899. Demy 8vo. Price 12s.
6d.; India and Colonies, 13s. 6d.; Other Countries, 15s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Page 318
Chapters I., The General Properties of Essential Oils.—II., Compounds
occurring in Essential Oils.—III., The Preparation of Essential Oils.—
IV., The Analysis of Essential Oils.—V., Systematic Study of the
Essential Oils.—VI., Terpeneless Oils.—VII., The Chemistry of
Artificial Perfumes.—Appendix: Table of Constants.
Press Opinions.
"There can be no doubt that the publication will take a high place in
the list of scientific text-books."—London Argus
"We can heartily recommend this volume to all interested in the
subject of essential oils from the scientific or the commercial
standpoint."—British and Colonial Druggist.
"Mr. Parry has done good service in carefully collecting and
marshalling the results of the numerous researches published in
various parts of the world."—Pharmaceutical Journal.
"At various times monographs have been printed by individual
workers, but it may safely be said that Mr. Parry is the first in these
latter days to deal with the subject in an adequate manner. His book is
well conceived and well written.... He is known to have sound
practical experience in analytical methods, and he has apparently taken
pains to make himself au fait with the commercial aspects of the
subject."—Chemist and Druggist.
"Mr. Parry's reputation as a scientist is fully established, and we can
therefore accept any work emanating from his pen as being of the
greatest practical value. We have perused the work before us with
much care, and are convinced that the contents will be found most
serviceable and its publication most opportune.... He avoids
unnecessary details, but includes everything that is essential to
systematic treatment, while he attempts no more 'than to give an
outline of the principles involved'.... We congratulate Mr. Parry on the
scientific value of his work, and hope that if the progress of the
colonies in the manufacture of essential oils and perfumes equals what
we are justified in expecting, it will become an Australian handbook,
everywhere appreciated."—The Australian Brewers' Journal.
occurring in Essential Oils.—III., The Preparation of Essential Oils.—
IV., The Analysis of Essential Oils.—V., Systematic Study of the
Essential Oils.—VI., Terpeneless Oils.—VII., The Chemistry of
Artificial Perfumes.—Appendix: Table of Constants.
Press Opinions.
"There can be no doubt that the publication will take a high place in
the list of scientific text-books."—London Argus
"We can heartily recommend this volume to all interested in the
subject of essential oils from the scientific or the commercial
standpoint."—British and Colonial Druggist.
"Mr. Parry has done good service in carefully collecting and
marshalling the results of the numerous researches published in
various parts of the world."—Pharmaceutical Journal.
"At various times monographs have been printed by individual
workers, but it may safely be said that Mr. Parry is the first in these
latter days to deal with the subject in an adequate manner. His book is
well conceived and well written.... He is known to have sound
practical experience in analytical methods, and he has apparently taken
pains to make himself au fait with the commercial aspects of the
subject."—Chemist and Druggist.
"Mr. Parry's reputation as a scientist is fully established, and we can
therefore accept any work emanating from his pen as being of the
greatest practical value. We have perused the work before us with
much care, and are convinced that the contents will be found most
serviceable and its publication most opportune.... He avoids
unnecessary details, but includes everything that is essential to
systematic treatment, while he attempts no more 'than to give an
outline of the principles involved'.... We congratulate Mr. Parry on the
scientific value of his work, and hope that if the progress of the
colonies in the manufacture of essential oils and perfumes equals what
we are justified in expecting, it will become an Australian handbook,
everywhere appreciated."—The Australian Brewers' Journal.
Page 319
DRYING OILS, BOILED OIL AND SOLID AND LIQUID DRIERS.
By L.E. ANDÉS. A Practical Work for Manufacturers of Oils, Varnishes,
Printing Inks, Oilcloth and Linoleum, Oilcakes, Paints, etc. Expressly
Written for this Series of Special Technical Books, and the Publishers hold
the Copyright for English and Foreign Editions. Forty-two Illustrations. 360
pp. 1901. Demy 8vo. Price 12s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 13s. 6d.; Other
Countries, 15s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., General Chemical and Physical Properties of the Drying Oils;
Cause of the Drying Property; Absorption of Oxygen: Behaviour towards
Metallic Oxides, etc.—II., The Properties of and Methods for obtaining the
Drying Oils.—III., Production of the Drying Oils by Expression and
Extraction: Refining and Bleaching; Oil Cakes and Meal: The Refining and
Bleaching of the Drying Oils; The Bleaching of Linseed Oil.—IV., The
Manufacture or Boiled Oil; The Preparation of Drying Oils for Use in the
Grinding of Paints and Artists' Colours and in the Manufacture of Varnishes
by Heating over a Fire or by Steam, by the Cold Process, by the Action of
Air, and by Means of the Electric Current; The Driers used in Boiling
Linseed Oil; The Manufacture of Boiled Oil and the Apparatus therefor;
Livache's Process for Preparing a Good Drying Oil and its Practical
Application.—V., The Preparation of Varnishes for Letterpress,
Lithographic and Copperplate Printing, for Oilcloth and Waterproof
Fabrics: The Manufacture of Thickened Linseed Oil, Burnt Oil, Stand Oil
by Fire Heat, Superheated Steam, and by a Current of Air.—VI., Behaviour
of the Drying Oils and Boiled Oils towards Atmospheric Influences, Water,
Acids and Alkalies.—VII., Boiled Oil Substitutes.—VIII., The Manufacture
of Solid and Liquid Driers from Linseed Oil and Rosin; Linolic Acid
Compounds of the Driers.—IX., The Adulteration and Examination of the
Drying Oils and Boiled Oil.
REISSUE OF CHEMICAL ESSAYS OF C.W. SCHEELE. First
Published in English in 1786. Translated from the Academy of Sciences at
Stockholm, with Additions. 300 pp. Demy 8vo. 1901. Price 5s.; India and
Colonies, 5s. 6d.; Other Countries, 6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
By L.E. ANDÉS. A Practical Work for Manufacturers of Oils, Varnishes,
Printing Inks, Oilcloth and Linoleum, Oilcakes, Paints, etc. Expressly
Written for this Series of Special Technical Books, and the Publishers hold
the Copyright for English and Foreign Editions. Forty-two Illustrations. 360
pp. 1901. Demy 8vo. Price 12s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 13s. 6d.; Other
Countries, 15s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., General Chemical and Physical Properties of the Drying Oils;
Cause of the Drying Property; Absorption of Oxygen: Behaviour towards
Metallic Oxides, etc.—II., The Properties of and Methods for obtaining the
Drying Oils.—III., Production of the Drying Oils by Expression and
Extraction: Refining and Bleaching; Oil Cakes and Meal: The Refining and
Bleaching of the Drying Oils; The Bleaching of Linseed Oil.—IV., The
Manufacture or Boiled Oil; The Preparation of Drying Oils for Use in the
Grinding of Paints and Artists' Colours and in the Manufacture of Varnishes
by Heating over a Fire or by Steam, by the Cold Process, by the Action of
Air, and by Means of the Electric Current; The Driers used in Boiling
Linseed Oil; The Manufacture of Boiled Oil and the Apparatus therefor;
Livache's Process for Preparing a Good Drying Oil and its Practical
Application.—V., The Preparation of Varnishes for Letterpress,
Lithographic and Copperplate Printing, for Oilcloth and Waterproof
Fabrics: The Manufacture of Thickened Linseed Oil, Burnt Oil, Stand Oil
by Fire Heat, Superheated Steam, and by a Current of Air.—VI., Behaviour
of the Drying Oils and Boiled Oils towards Atmospheric Influences, Water,
Acids and Alkalies.—VII., Boiled Oil Substitutes.—VIII., The Manufacture
of Solid and Liquid Driers from Linseed Oil and Rosin; Linolic Acid
Compounds of the Driers.—IX., The Adulteration and Examination of the
Drying Oils and Boiled Oil.
REISSUE OF CHEMICAL ESSAYS OF C.W. SCHEELE. First
Published in English in 1786. Translated from the Academy of Sciences at
Stockholm, with Additions. 300 pp. Demy 8vo. 1901. Price 5s.; India and
Colonies, 5s. 6d.; Other Countries, 6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Page 320
Memoir; C.W. Scheele and his work (written for this edition).—Chapters I.,
On Fluor Mineral and its Acid.—II., On Fluor Mineral.—III., Chemical
Investigation of Fluor Acid, with a View to the Earth which it Yields, by Mr.
Wiegler.—IV., Additional Information Concerning Fluor Minerals.—V., On
Manganese, Magnesium, or Magnesia Vitrariorum.—VI., On Arsenic and
its Acid.—VII., Remarks upon Salts of Benzoin—VIII., On Silex, Clay and
Alum.—IX., Analysis of the Calculus Vesical.—X., Method of Preparing
Mercurius.
Dulcis Via Humida.—XI., Cheaper and more Convenient Method of
Preparing Pulvis Algarothi.—XII., Experiments upon Molybdaena.—XIII.,
Experiments on Plumbago.—XIV., Method of Preparing a New Green
Colour.—XV., Of the Decomposition of Neutral Salts by Unslaked Lime
and Iron.—XVI., On the. Quantity of Pure Air which is Daily Present in our
Atmosphere.—XVII., On Milk and its Acid.—XVIII., On the Acid of
Saccharum Lactis. —XIX., On the Constituent Parts of Lapis Ponderosus or
Tungsten.—XX., Experiments and Observations on Ether.
GLUE AND GLUE TESTING. By SAMUEL RIDEAL, D.SC. Lond.,
F.I.C. Fourteen Engravings. 144 pp. Demy 8vo. 1900. Price 10s. 6d.; India
and Colonies, 11s.; Other Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Constitution and Properties: Definitions and Sources,
Gelatine, Chondrin and Allied Bodies, Physical and Chemical Properties,
Classification, Grades and Commercial Varieties.—II., Raw Materials and
Manufacture: Glue Stock, Lining, Extraction, Washing and Clarifying,
Filter Presses, Water Supply, Use of Alkalies, Action of Bacteria and of
Antiseptics, Various Processes, Cleansing, Forming, Drying, Crushing, etc.,
Secondary Products. —III., Uses of Glue: Selection and Preparation for
Use, Carpentry, Veneering, Paper-Making, Bookbinding, Printing Rollers,
Hectographs, Match Manufacture, Sandpaper, etc., Substitutes for other
Materials, Artificial Leather and Caoutchouc.—IV., Gelatine: General
Characters, Liquid Gelatine, Photographic Uses, Size, Tanno-, Chrome and
Formo-Gelatine, Artificial Silk, Cements, Pneumatic Tyres, Culinary, Meat
Extracts, Isinglass, Medicinal and other Uses, Bacteriology.—V., Glue
On Fluor Mineral and its Acid.—II., On Fluor Mineral.—III., Chemical
Investigation of Fluor Acid, with a View to the Earth which it Yields, by Mr.
Wiegler.—IV., Additional Information Concerning Fluor Minerals.—V., On
Manganese, Magnesium, or Magnesia Vitrariorum.—VI., On Arsenic and
its Acid.—VII., Remarks upon Salts of Benzoin—VIII., On Silex, Clay and
Alum.—IX., Analysis of the Calculus Vesical.—X., Method of Preparing
Mercurius.
Dulcis Via Humida.—XI., Cheaper and more Convenient Method of
Preparing Pulvis Algarothi.—XII., Experiments upon Molybdaena.—XIII.,
Experiments on Plumbago.—XIV., Method of Preparing a New Green
Colour.—XV., Of the Decomposition of Neutral Salts by Unslaked Lime
and Iron.—XVI., On the. Quantity of Pure Air which is Daily Present in our
Atmosphere.—XVII., On Milk and its Acid.—XVIII., On the Acid of
Saccharum Lactis. —XIX., On the Constituent Parts of Lapis Ponderosus or
Tungsten.—XX., Experiments and Observations on Ether.
GLUE AND GLUE TESTING. By SAMUEL RIDEAL, D.SC. Lond.,
F.I.C. Fourteen Engravings. 144 pp. Demy 8vo. 1900. Price 10s. 6d.; India
and Colonies, 11s.; Other Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Constitution and Properties: Definitions and Sources,
Gelatine, Chondrin and Allied Bodies, Physical and Chemical Properties,
Classification, Grades and Commercial Varieties.—II., Raw Materials and
Manufacture: Glue Stock, Lining, Extraction, Washing and Clarifying,
Filter Presses, Water Supply, Use of Alkalies, Action of Bacteria and of
Antiseptics, Various Processes, Cleansing, Forming, Drying, Crushing, etc.,
Secondary Products. —III., Uses of Glue: Selection and Preparation for
Use, Carpentry, Veneering, Paper-Making, Bookbinding, Printing Rollers,
Hectographs, Match Manufacture, Sandpaper, etc., Substitutes for other
Materials, Artificial Leather and Caoutchouc.—IV., Gelatine: General
Characters, Liquid Gelatine, Photographic Uses, Size, Tanno-, Chrome and
Formo-Gelatine, Artificial Silk, Cements, Pneumatic Tyres, Culinary, Meat
Extracts, Isinglass, Medicinal and other Uses, Bacteriology.—V., Glue
Page 321
Testing: Review of Processes, Chemical Examination, Adulteration,
Physical Tests, Valuation of Raw Materials.—VI., Commercial Aspects.
Press Opinions.
"This work is of the highest technical character, and gives not only a
full and practical account of the raw materials and manufacture of
glues, gelatines and similar substances, but gives many hints and
information on the use of such substances in veneering, carpentry and
many other purposes. Many tests are given for glue in different stages
of the progress of its manufacture, and the commercial value of a
commodity so much in general use is exemplified by statistics and
figures. It is certainly a valuable treatise upon an article for which very
little literature in any form has previously been obtainable."—
Carpenter and Builder.
"Books on the art of glue making are more than usually scarce, and
users of that article, as well as those who may be tempted to embark in
the industry, should therefore welcome this book by Dr. Samuel
Rideal, a Fellow of the Institute of Chemistry, and a leading authority.
In this book he has collected the more important facts connected with
the manufacture of glue and allied products, and stated the experience
he has gained in examining various commercial samples during the
past ten years.... Dr. Rideal's book must be regarded as a valuable
contribution to other technical literature, which manufacturers,
merchants and users may study with profit."—British Trade Journal.
"This volume is the latest addition to the excellent series of special
technical works for manufacturers and professional and commercial
men issued by the well-known publishers of The Oil and Colourman's
Journal. The volume in every way fully maintains the high standard of
excellence of the whole series, and deals with the subject of glue
making and glue testing in a thoroughly exhaustive manner. Chapters
are given on the constitution and properties, and raw material and
manufacture, and of the uses of glue, and in this latter respect it will
doubtless be information to many readers to learn to what extent glue
enters into the manufacture of many commercial products not
apparently associated with glue. Exhaustive chapters on the processes
Physical Tests, Valuation of Raw Materials.—VI., Commercial Aspects.
Press Opinions.
"This work is of the highest technical character, and gives not only a
full and practical account of the raw materials and manufacture of
glues, gelatines and similar substances, but gives many hints and
information on the use of such substances in veneering, carpentry and
many other purposes. Many tests are given for glue in different stages
of the progress of its manufacture, and the commercial value of a
commodity so much in general use is exemplified by statistics and
figures. It is certainly a valuable treatise upon an article for which very
little literature in any form has previously been obtainable."—
Carpenter and Builder.
"Books on the art of glue making are more than usually scarce, and
users of that article, as well as those who may be tempted to embark in
the industry, should therefore welcome this book by Dr. Samuel
Rideal, a Fellow of the Institute of Chemistry, and a leading authority.
In this book he has collected the more important facts connected with
the manufacture of glue and allied products, and stated the experience
he has gained in examining various commercial samples during the
past ten years.... Dr. Rideal's book must be regarded as a valuable
contribution to other technical literature, which manufacturers,
merchants and users may study with profit."—British Trade Journal.
"This volume is the latest addition to the excellent series of special
technical works for manufacturers and professional and commercial
men issued by the well-known publishers of The Oil and Colourman's
Journal. The volume in every way fully maintains the high standard of
excellence of the whole series, and deals with the subject of glue
making and glue testing in a thoroughly exhaustive manner. Chapters
are given on the constitution and properties, and raw material and
manufacture, and of the uses of glue, and in this latter respect it will
doubtless be information to many readers to learn to what extent glue
enters into the manufacture of many commercial products not
apparently associated with glue. Exhaustive chapters on the processes
Page 322
and methods of glue testing, and on its commercial aspects, complete
this useful and most carefully prepared volume."—Carriage Builders'
Journal
.
TECHNOLOGY OF PETROLEUM: Oil Fields of the World—Their
History, Geography and Geology—Annual Production and Development—
Oil-well Drilling—Transport. By HENRY NEUBERGER and HENRY
NOALHAT. Translated from the French by J. G. MCINTOSH. 550 pp. 153
Illustrations. 26 Plates. Royal 8vo. 1901. Price 21s.; India and Colonies,
22s.; Other Countries, 23s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I., Study of the Petroliferous Strata—Chapters I., Petroleum—
Definition.—II., The Genesis or Origin of Petroleum.—III., The Oil Fields
of Galicia, their History.—IV.. Physical Geography and Geology of the
Galician Oil Fields.—V.. Practical Notes on Galician Land Law—
Economic Hints on Working, etc.—VI., Roumania—History, Geography,
Geology. —VII., Petroleum in Russia—History.—VIII., Russian Petroleum
(continued)—Geography and Geology of the Caucasian Oil Fields.—IX..
Russian Petroleum (continued).—X., The Secondary Oil Fields of Europe.
Northern Germany, Alsace, Italy, etc.—XI., Petroleum in France.—XII.,
Petroleum in Asia—Transcaspian and Turkestan Territory—Turkestan—
Persia—British India and Burmah—British Burmah or Lower Burmah—
China—Chinese Thibet—Japan, Formosa and Saghalien.—XIII., Petroleum
in Oceania—Sumatra. Java, Borneo—Isle of Timor—Philippine Isles—
New Zealand.—XIV., The United States of America—History. —XV.,
Physical Geology and Geography of the United States Oil Fields.—XVI.,
Canadian and other North American Oil Fields.—XVII., Economic Data of
Work in North America. —XVIII., Petroleum in the West Indies and South
America.—XIX., Petroleum in the French Colonies.
Part II., Excavations.—Chapter XX., Hand Excavation or Hand Digging of
Oil Wells. Part III., Methods of Boring.—Chapters XXI., Methods of Oil-
well Drilling or Boring.—XXII., Boring Oil Wells with the Rope.—XXIII.,
Drilling with Rigid Rods and a Free-fall—Fabian System.—XXIV., Free-
fall Drilling by Steam Power.—XXV., Oil-well Drilling by the Canadian
this useful and most carefully prepared volume."—Carriage Builders'
Journal
.
TECHNOLOGY OF PETROLEUM: Oil Fields of the World—Their
History, Geography and Geology—Annual Production and Development—
Oil-well Drilling—Transport. By HENRY NEUBERGER and HENRY
NOALHAT. Translated from the French by J. G. MCINTOSH. 550 pp. 153
Illustrations. 26 Plates. Royal 8vo. 1901. Price 21s.; India and Colonies,
22s.; Other Countries, 23s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I., Study of the Petroliferous Strata—Chapters I., Petroleum—
Definition.—II., The Genesis or Origin of Petroleum.—III., The Oil Fields
of Galicia, their History.—IV.. Physical Geography and Geology of the
Galician Oil Fields.—V.. Practical Notes on Galician Land Law—
Economic Hints on Working, etc.—VI., Roumania—History, Geography,
Geology. —VII., Petroleum in Russia—History.—VIII., Russian Petroleum
(continued)—Geography and Geology of the Caucasian Oil Fields.—IX..
Russian Petroleum (continued).—X., The Secondary Oil Fields of Europe.
Northern Germany, Alsace, Italy, etc.—XI., Petroleum in France.—XII.,
Petroleum in Asia—Transcaspian and Turkestan Territory—Turkestan—
Persia—British India and Burmah—British Burmah or Lower Burmah—
China—Chinese Thibet—Japan, Formosa and Saghalien.—XIII., Petroleum
in Oceania—Sumatra. Java, Borneo—Isle of Timor—Philippine Isles—
New Zealand.—XIV., The United States of America—History. —XV.,
Physical Geology and Geography of the United States Oil Fields.—XVI.,
Canadian and other North American Oil Fields.—XVII., Economic Data of
Work in North America. —XVIII., Petroleum in the West Indies and South
America.—XIX., Petroleum in the French Colonies.
Part II., Excavations.—Chapter XX., Hand Excavation or Hand Digging of
Oil Wells. Part III., Methods of Boring.—Chapters XXI., Methods of Oil-
well Drilling or Boring.—XXII., Boring Oil Wells with the Rope.—XXIII.,
Drilling with Rigid Rods and a Free-fall—Fabian System.—XXIV., Free-
fall Drilling by Steam Power.—XXV., Oil-well Drilling by the Canadian
Page 323
System.—XXVI., Drilling Oil Wells on the Combined System.—XXVII.,
Comparison between the Combined Fauck System and the Canadian.—
XXVIII., The American System of Drilling with the Rope.—XXIX.,
Hydraulic Boring with the Drill by Hand and Steam Power.—XXX., Rotary
Drilling of Oil Wells, Bits, Steel-crowned Tools, Diamond Tools—Hand
Power and Steam Power—Hydraulic Sand-pumping.—XXXI.,
Improvements in and different Systems of Drilling Oil Wells.
Part IV., Accidents.—Chapters XXXII., Boring Accidents—Methods of
preventing them—Methods of remedying them.—XXXIII., Explosives and
the use of the "Torpedo" Levigation.—XXXIV., Storing and Transport of
Petroleum.—XXXV., General Advice—Prospecting, Management and
carrying on of Petroleum Boring Operations.
Part V., General Data.—Customary Formulæ.—Memento. Practical Part.
General Data bearing on Petroleum.—Glossary or Technical Terms used in
the Petroleum Industry.—Copious Index.
A DICTIONARY OF CHEMICALS AND RAW PRODUCTS USED IN
THE MANUFACTURE OF PAINTS, COLOURS, VARNISHES AND
ALLIED PREPARATIONS. By GEORGE H. HURST, F.C.S. Demy 8vo.
380 pp. 1901. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s.
6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
The names of the Chemicals and Raw Products are arranged in alphabetical
order, and the description of each varies in length from half to eight pages.
The following are some of the articles described and explained: Acetates—
Acetic Acid—Acidimetry—Alcohol—Alum—Ammonia—Amber—Animi
— Arsenic—Beeswax—Benzol—Bichromates of Potash and Soda—
Bleaching Powder—Bone Black—Boric Acid—Brunswick Green—
Cadmium Yellow—Carbonates—Carmine—Carnauba Wax—Caustic
Potash and Soda—Chrome Colours—Clay—Coal Tar Colours—Copal—
Dammar—Drying Oils—Emerald Green—Gamboge—Glue—Glycerine—
Gums—Gypsum—Indian Red—Japanese Lacquer—Lac—Lakes—Lamp
Black—Lead Compounds—Linseed Oil—Magnesia—Manganese
Compounds—Mica—Nitric Acid—Ochres—Orange Lead—Orr's White—
Paraffin—Prussian Blue—Rosin Oil—Sepia—Sienna—Smalts—Sodium
Comparison between the Combined Fauck System and the Canadian.—
XXVIII., The American System of Drilling with the Rope.—XXIX.,
Hydraulic Boring with the Drill by Hand and Steam Power.—XXX., Rotary
Drilling of Oil Wells, Bits, Steel-crowned Tools, Diamond Tools—Hand
Power and Steam Power—Hydraulic Sand-pumping.—XXXI.,
Improvements in and different Systems of Drilling Oil Wells.
Part IV., Accidents.—Chapters XXXII., Boring Accidents—Methods of
preventing them—Methods of remedying them.—XXXIII., Explosives and
the use of the "Torpedo" Levigation.—XXXIV., Storing and Transport of
Petroleum.—XXXV., General Advice—Prospecting, Management and
carrying on of Petroleum Boring Operations.
Part V., General Data.—Customary Formulæ.—Memento. Practical Part.
General Data bearing on Petroleum.—Glossary or Technical Terms used in
the Petroleum Industry.—Copious Index.
A DICTIONARY OF CHEMICALS AND RAW PRODUCTS USED IN
THE MANUFACTURE OF PAINTS, COLOURS, VARNISHES AND
ALLIED PREPARATIONS. By GEORGE H. HURST, F.C.S. Demy 8vo.
380 pp. 1901. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s.
6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
The names of the Chemicals and Raw Products are arranged in alphabetical
order, and the description of each varies in length from half to eight pages.
The following are some of the articles described and explained: Acetates—
Acetic Acid—Acidimetry—Alcohol—Alum—Ammonia—Amber—Animi
— Arsenic—Beeswax—Benzol—Bichromates of Potash and Soda—
Bleaching Powder—Bone Black—Boric Acid—Brunswick Green—
Cadmium Yellow—Carbonates—Carmine—Carnauba Wax—Caustic
Potash and Soda—Chrome Colours—Clay—Coal Tar Colours—Copal—
Dammar—Drying Oils—Emerald Green—Gamboge—Glue—Glycerine—
Gums—Gypsum—Indian Red—Japanese Lacquer—Lac—Lakes—Lamp
Black—Lead Compounds—Linseed Oil—Magnesia—Manganese
Compounds—Mica—Nitric Acid—Ochres—Orange Lead—Orr's White—
Paraffin—Prussian Blue—Rosin Oil—Sepia—Sienna—Smalts—Sodium
Page 324
Carbonate—Sublimed White Lead—Sulphuric Acid—Terra Verte—Testing
Pigments—Turpentine—Ultramarine—Umbers—Vermilionettes—White
Lead—Whiting—Zinc Compounds.—Appendix: Comparison of Baume
Hydrometer and Specific Gravity for Liquids Lighter than Water—
Hydrometer Table for Liquids Heavier than Water—Comparison of
Temperature Degrees—Tables for Converting French Metric Weights and
Measures into English—Table of the Elements—etc., etc.—Copious Index.
Press Opinions.
"This treatise will be welcomed by those interested in this industry
who have not secured the full advantage of a course of scientific
training."—Chemical Trade Journal.
"In concise and lucid terms almost every ingredient used in paint and
colour manufacture is described, together with the methods of testing
their intrinsic and chemical value."—Pontefract Express.
"Such a book of reference for paint, colour and varnish manufacturers
has long been needed, and in Mr. Hurst the publishers have secured a
compiler who is not only a well-known authority and expert, but who
has the gift of communicating his knowledge in a concise and lucid
form."—Manchester Courier.
PURE AIR, OZONE AND WATER. A Practical Treatise of their
Utilisation and Value in Oil, Grease, Soap, Paint, Glue and other Industries.
By W. B. COWELL. Twelve Illustrations. 1900. Price 5s.; India and
Colonies, 5s. 6d.: Other Countries, 6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Atmospheric Air; Lifting of Liquids: Suction Process; Preparing
Blown Oils; Preparing Siccative Drying Oils.—II., Compressed Air;
Whitewash.—III., Liquid Air; Retrocession.—IV., Purification of Water;
Water Hardness.—V., Fleshings and Bones.—VI., Ozonised Air in the
Bleaching and Deodorising of Fats, Glues, etc.: Bleaching Textile Fibres.—
Appendix: Air and Gases: Pressure of Air at Various Temperatures; Fuel;
Table of Combustibles; Saving of Fuel by Heating Feed Water; Table of
Solubilities of Scale Making Minerals: British Thermal Units Tables;
Pigments—Turpentine—Ultramarine—Umbers—Vermilionettes—White
Lead—Whiting—Zinc Compounds.—Appendix: Comparison of Baume
Hydrometer and Specific Gravity for Liquids Lighter than Water—
Hydrometer Table for Liquids Heavier than Water—Comparison of
Temperature Degrees—Tables for Converting French Metric Weights and
Measures into English—Table of the Elements—etc., etc.—Copious Index.
Press Opinions.
"This treatise will be welcomed by those interested in this industry
who have not secured the full advantage of a course of scientific
training."—Chemical Trade Journal.
"In concise and lucid terms almost every ingredient used in paint and
colour manufacture is described, together with the methods of testing
their intrinsic and chemical value."—Pontefract Express.
"Such a book of reference for paint, colour and varnish manufacturers
has long been needed, and in Mr. Hurst the publishers have secured a
compiler who is not only a well-known authority and expert, but who
has the gift of communicating his knowledge in a concise and lucid
form."—Manchester Courier.
PURE AIR, OZONE AND WATER. A Practical Treatise of their
Utilisation and Value in Oil, Grease, Soap, Paint, Glue and other Industries.
By W. B. COWELL. Twelve Illustrations. 1900. Price 5s.; India and
Colonies, 5s. 6d.: Other Countries, 6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Atmospheric Air; Lifting of Liquids: Suction Process; Preparing
Blown Oils; Preparing Siccative Drying Oils.—II., Compressed Air;
Whitewash.—III., Liquid Air; Retrocession.—IV., Purification of Water;
Water Hardness.—V., Fleshings and Bones.—VI., Ozonised Air in the
Bleaching and Deodorising of Fats, Glues, etc.: Bleaching Textile Fibres.—
Appendix: Air and Gases: Pressure of Air at Various Temperatures; Fuel;
Table of Combustibles; Saving of Fuel by Heating Feed Water; Table of
Solubilities of Scale Making Minerals: British Thermal Units Tables;
Page 325
Volume of the Flow of Steam into the Atmosphere; Temperature of Steam.
—Index.
Press Opinions.
"This is a valuable work in little space.... In arrangement it is a
commendable work, and its value is increased by the index which
brings the little volume to a close."—Newcastle Daily Journal.
"The book is written solely for manufacturers, who, without doubt,
will find it exceedingly practical and useful. The volume contains an
appendix wherein is given a great many tables, etc., which
manufacturers in the trades referred to will find of inestimable value
"Blackburn Times.
THE MANUFACTURE OF MINERAL AND LAKE PIGMENTS.
Containing Directions for the Manufacture of all Artificial, Artists and
Painters' Colours, Enamel, Soot and Metallic Pigments. A Text-book for
Manufacturers, Merchants, Artists and Painters. By Dr. JOSEF BERSCH.
Translated from the Second Revised Edition by ARTHUR C. WRIGHT,
M.A. (Oxon.), B.Sc. (Lond.), formerly Assistant Lecturer and Demonstrator
in Chemistry at the Yorkshire College, Leeds. Forty-three Illustrations. 476
pp., demy 8vo. 1901. Price 12s. 6d.; India and Colonies. 13s. 6d.; Other
Countries, 15s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Introduction.—II., Physico-chemical Behaviour of Pigments.—
III., Raw Materials Employed in the Manufacture of Pigments.—IV.,
Assistant Materials.—V., Metallic Compounds.—VI., The Manufacture of
Mineral Pigments.—VII., The Manufacture of White Lead.—VIII., Enamel
White.—IX., Washing Apparatus.—X., Zinc White.—XI.. Yellow Mineral
Pigments.—XII., Chrome Yellow.—XIII., Lead Oxide Pigments.—XIV.,
Other Yellow Pigments.—XV., Mosaic; Gold.—XVI., Red Mineral
Pigments.—XVII., The Manufacture of Vermilion.—XVIII., Antimony
Vermilion.—XIX., Ferric Oxide Pigments.—XX., Other Red Mineral
Pigments.—XXI., Purple of Cassius.—XXII., Blue Mineral Pigments. —
XXIII., Ultramarine.—XXIV., Manufacture of Ultramarine.—XXV., Blue
Copper Pigments. —XXVI., Blue Cobalt Pigments.—XXVII., Smalts.—
—Index.
Press Opinions.
"This is a valuable work in little space.... In arrangement it is a
commendable work, and its value is increased by the index which
brings the little volume to a close."—Newcastle Daily Journal.
"The book is written solely for manufacturers, who, without doubt,
will find it exceedingly practical and useful. The volume contains an
appendix wherein is given a great many tables, etc., which
manufacturers in the trades referred to will find of inestimable value
"Blackburn Times.
THE MANUFACTURE OF MINERAL AND LAKE PIGMENTS.
Containing Directions for the Manufacture of all Artificial, Artists and
Painters' Colours, Enamel, Soot and Metallic Pigments. A Text-book for
Manufacturers, Merchants, Artists and Painters. By Dr. JOSEF BERSCH.
Translated from the Second Revised Edition by ARTHUR C. WRIGHT,
M.A. (Oxon.), B.Sc. (Lond.), formerly Assistant Lecturer and Demonstrator
in Chemistry at the Yorkshire College, Leeds. Forty-three Illustrations. 476
pp., demy 8vo. 1901. Price 12s. 6d.; India and Colonies. 13s. 6d.; Other
Countries, 15s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Introduction.—II., Physico-chemical Behaviour of Pigments.—
III., Raw Materials Employed in the Manufacture of Pigments.—IV.,
Assistant Materials.—V., Metallic Compounds.—VI., The Manufacture of
Mineral Pigments.—VII., The Manufacture of White Lead.—VIII., Enamel
White.—IX., Washing Apparatus.—X., Zinc White.—XI.. Yellow Mineral
Pigments.—XII., Chrome Yellow.—XIII., Lead Oxide Pigments.—XIV.,
Other Yellow Pigments.—XV., Mosaic; Gold.—XVI., Red Mineral
Pigments.—XVII., The Manufacture of Vermilion.—XVIII., Antimony
Vermilion.—XIX., Ferric Oxide Pigments.—XX., Other Red Mineral
Pigments.—XXI., Purple of Cassius.—XXII., Blue Mineral Pigments. —
XXIII., Ultramarine.—XXIV., Manufacture of Ultramarine.—XXV., Blue
Copper Pigments. —XXVI., Blue Cobalt Pigments.—XXVII., Smalts.—
Page 326
XXVIII., Green Mineral Pigments.—XXIX., Emerald Green.—XXX.,
Verdigris.—XXXI., Chromium Oxide.—XXXII., Other Green Chromium
Pigments.—XXXIII., Green Cobalt Pigments.—XXXIV., Green
Manganese Pigments.—XXXV., Compounded Green Pigments.—XXXVI.,
Violet Mineral Pigments.—XXXVII.. Brown Mineral Pigments.—
XXXVIII., Brown Decomposition Products.—XXXIX., Black Pigments.—
XL., Manufacture of Soot Pigments.—XLI., Manufacture of Lamp Black.
—XLII., The Manufacture of Soot Black without Chambers.—XLIII.,
Indian Ink.—XLIV., Enamel Colours.—XLV., Metallic Pigments.—XLVI.,
Bronze Pigments—XLVII., Vegetable Bronze Pigments.
PIGMENTS OF ORGANIC ORIGIN.—Chapters XLVIII., Lakes.—
XLIX., Yellow Lakes.—L., Red Lakes.—LI., Manufacture of Carmine.—
LII., The Colouring Matter of Lac.—LIII., Safflower or Carthamine Red.—
LIV., Madder and its Colouring Matters.—LV., Madder Lakes.—LVI.,
Manjit (Indian Madder).—LVII., Lichen Colouring Matters.—LVIII., Red
Wood Lakes. —LIX., The Colouring Matters of Sandal Wood and Other
Dye Woods.—LX., Blue Lakes.—LXI., Indigo Carmine.—LXII., The
Colouring Matter of Log Wood.—LXIII., Green Lakes.—LXIV., Brown
Organic Pigments.—LXV., Sap Colours.—LXVI., Water Colours.—
LXVII., Crayons.—LXVIII., Confectionery Colours.—LXIX., The
Preparation of Pigments for Painting.—LXX., The Examination of
Pigments.—LXXI., Examination of Lakes.—LXXII., The Testing of Dye-
Woods.—LXXIII., The Design of a Colour Works.—LXXIV.—Commercial
Names of Pigments.—Appendix: Conversion of Metric to English Weights
and Measures.—Centigrade and Fahrenheit Thermometer Scales.—Index.
BONE PRODUCTS AND MANURES: An Account of the most recent
Improvements in the Manufacture of Fat, Glue, Animal Charcoal, Size,
Gelatine and Manures. By THOMAS LAMBERT, Technical and Consulting
Chemist. Illustrated by Twenty-one Plans and Diagrams. 162 pp., demy
8vo. 1901. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.;
strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Chemical Composition of Bones—Arrangement of Factory—
Crushing of Bones —Treatment with Benzene—Benzene in Crude Fat—
Verdigris.—XXXI., Chromium Oxide.—XXXII., Other Green Chromium
Pigments.—XXXIII., Green Cobalt Pigments.—XXXIV., Green
Manganese Pigments.—XXXV., Compounded Green Pigments.—XXXVI.,
Violet Mineral Pigments.—XXXVII.. Brown Mineral Pigments.—
XXXVIII., Brown Decomposition Products.—XXXIX., Black Pigments.—
XL., Manufacture of Soot Pigments.—XLI., Manufacture of Lamp Black.
—XLII., The Manufacture of Soot Black without Chambers.—XLIII.,
Indian Ink.—XLIV., Enamel Colours.—XLV., Metallic Pigments.—XLVI.,
Bronze Pigments—XLVII., Vegetable Bronze Pigments.
PIGMENTS OF ORGANIC ORIGIN.—Chapters XLVIII., Lakes.—
XLIX., Yellow Lakes.—L., Red Lakes.—LI., Manufacture of Carmine.—
LII., The Colouring Matter of Lac.—LIII., Safflower or Carthamine Red.—
LIV., Madder and its Colouring Matters.—LV., Madder Lakes.—LVI.,
Manjit (Indian Madder).—LVII., Lichen Colouring Matters.—LVIII., Red
Wood Lakes. —LIX., The Colouring Matters of Sandal Wood and Other
Dye Woods.—LX., Blue Lakes.—LXI., Indigo Carmine.—LXII., The
Colouring Matter of Log Wood.—LXIII., Green Lakes.—LXIV., Brown
Organic Pigments.—LXV., Sap Colours.—LXVI., Water Colours.—
LXVII., Crayons.—LXVIII., Confectionery Colours.—LXIX., The
Preparation of Pigments for Painting.—LXX., The Examination of
Pigments.—LXXI., Examination of Lakes.—LXXII., The Testing of Dye-
Woods.—LXXIII., The Design of a Colour Works.—LXXIV.—Commercial
Names of Pigments.—Appendix: Conversion of Metric to English Weights
and Measures.—Centigrade and Fahrenheit Thermometer Scales.—Index.
BONE PRODUCTS AND MANURES: An Account of the most recent
Improvements in the Manufacture of Fat, Glue, Animal Charcoal, Size,
Gelatine and Manures. By THOMAS LAMBERT, Technical and Consulting
Chemist. Illustrated by Twenty-one Plans and Diagrams. 162 pp., demy
8vo. 1901. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.;
strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Chemical Composition of Bones—Arrangement of Factory—
Crushing of Bones —Treatment with Benzene—Benzene in Crude Fat—
Page 327
Analyses of Clarified Fats—Mechanical Cleansing of Bones—Animal
Charcoal—Tar and Ammoniacal Liquor, Char and Gases, from good quality
Bones—Method of Retorting the Bones—Analyses of Chars—"Spent"
Chars—Cooling of Tar and Ammoniacal Vapours—Value of Nitrogen for
Cyanide of Potash—Bone Oil—Marrow Bones—Composition of Marrow
Fat—Premier Juice—Buttons.—II., Properties of Glue—Glutin and
Chondrin—Skin Glue—Liming of Skins—Washing—Boiling of Skins—
Clarification of Glue Liquors—Acid Steeping of Bones—Water System of
Boiling Bones—Steam Method of Treating Bones—Nitrogen in the Treated
Bones—Glue-Boiling and Clarifying-House—Plan showing Arrangement
of Clarifying Vats—Plan showing Position of Evaporators—Description of
Evaporators—Sulphurous Acid Generator—Clarification of Liquors—
Section of Drying-House—Specification of a Glue—Size—Uses and
Preparation and Composition of Size—Concentrated Size.—III., Properties
of Gelatine—Preparation of Skin Gelatine —Washing—Bleaching—
Boiling—Clarification—Evaporation—Drying—Bone Gelatine—Selecting
Bones—Crushing—Dissolving—Bleaching—Boiling—Properties of Glutin
and Chondrin —Testing of Glues and Gelatines.—IV., The Uses of Glue,
Gelatine and Size in Various Trades—Soluble and Liquid Glues—Steam
and Waterproof Glues.—V., Manures—Importation of Food Stuffs—Soils
—Germination—Plant Life.—VI., Natural Manures—Water and Nitrogen
in Farmyard Manure—Full Analysis of Farmyard Manure—Action on
Crops—Water-Closet.
System—Sewage Manure—Green Manures.—VII., Artificial Manures—
Bones—Boiled and Steamed Bones—Mineral Phosphates—English
Coprolites—French and Spanish Phosphorites—German and Belgian
Phosphates—Basic Slag—Guanos Proper—Guano Phosphates.—VIII.,
Mineral Manures—Common Salt—Potash Salts—Calcareous Manures—
Prepared Nitrogenous Manures—Ammoniacal Compounds—Sodium
Nitrate—Potassium Nitrate—Organic Nitrogenous Matters—Shoddy—
Hoofs and Horns—Leather Waste—Dried Meat—Dried Blood—
Superphosphates—Composition—Manufacture—Section of Manure-Shed
—First and Ground Floor Plans of Manure-Shed—Quality of Acid Used—
Mixings—Special Manures—Potato Manure—Dissolved Bones—
Dissolved Bone Compound—Enriched Peruvian Guano—Special Manure
for Garden Stuffs, etc.—Special Manure for Grass Lands—Special Tobacco
Charcoal—Tar and Ammoniacal Liquor, Char and Gases, from good quality
Bones—Method of Retorting the Bones—Analyses of Chars—"Spent"
Chars—Cooling of Tar and Ammoniacal Vapours—Value of Nitrogen for
Cyanide of Potash—Bone Oil—Marrow Bones—Composition of Marrow
Fat—Premier Juice—Buttons.—II., Properties of Glue—Glutin and
Chondrin—Skin Glue—Liming of Skins—Washing—Boiling of Skins—
Clarification of Glue Liquors—Acid Steeping of Bones—Water System of
Boiling Bones—Steam Method of Treating Bones—Nitrogen in the Treated
Bones—Glue-Boiling and Clarifying-House—Plan showing Arrangement
of Clarifying Vats—Plan showing Position of Evaporators—Description of
Evaporators—Sulphurous Acid Generator—Clarification of Liquors—
Section of Drying-House—Specification of a Glue—Size—Uses and
Preparation and Composition of Size—Concentrated Size.—III., Properties
of Gelatine—Preparation of Skin Gelatine —Washing—Bleaching—
Boiling—Clarification—Evaporation—Drying—Bone Gelatine—Selecting
Bones—Crushing—Dissolving—Bleaching—Boiling—Properties of Glutin
and Chondrin —Testing of Glues and Gelatines.—IV., The Uses of Glue,
Gelatine and Size in Various Trades—Soluble and Liquid Glues—Steam
and Waterproof Glues.—V., Manures—Importation of Food Stuffs—Soils
—Germination—Plant Life.—VI., Natural Manures—Water and Nitrogen
in Farmyard Manure—Full Analysis of Farmyard Manure—Action on
Crops—Water-Closet.
System—Sewage Manure—Green Manures.—VII., Artificial Manures—
Bones—Boiled and Steamed Bones—Mineral Phosphates—English
Coprolites—French and Spanish Phosphorites—German and Belgian
Phosphates—Basic Slag—Guanos Proper—Guano Phosphates.—VIII.,
Mineral Manures—Common Salt—Potash Salts—Calcareous Manures—
Prepared Nitrogenous Manures—Ammoniacal Compounds—Sodium
Nitrate—Potassium Nitrate—Organic Nitrogenous Matters—Shoddy—
Hoofs and Horns—Leather Waste—Dried Meat—Dried Blood—
Superphosphates—Composition—Manufacture—Section of Manure-Shed
—First and Ground Floor Plans of Manure-Shed—Quality of Acid Used—
Mixings—Special Manures—Potato Manure—Dissolved Bones—
Dissolved Bone Compound—Enriched Peruvian Guano—Special Manure
for Garden Stuffs, etc.—Special Manure for Grass Lands—Special Tobacco
Page 328
Manures—Sugar-Cane Manure—Compounding of Manures—Valuation of
Manures.—IX., Analyses of Raw and Finished Products—Common Raw
Bones—Degreased Bones—Crude Fat—Refined Fat—Degelatinised Bones
—Animal Charcoal—Bone Superphosphates—Guanos—Dried Animal
Products—Potash Compounds—Sulphate of Ammonia—Extraction in
Vacuo—Description of a Vacuum Pan—French and British Gelatines
compared.—Index.
Press Opinion.
"We can with confidence recommend the perusal of the book to all
persons interested in the manufacture of artificial manures, and also to
the large number of farmers and others who are desirous of working
their holdings on the most up-to-date methods, and obtaining the best
possible results, which scientific research has placed within their
reach."—Wigan Observer.
ANALYSIS OF RESINS AND BALSAMS. Demy 8vo. 340 pp. 1901.
Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I., Definition of Resins in General—Definition of Balsams, and
especially the Gum Resins—External and Superficial Characteristics of
Resinous Bodies—Distinction between Resinous Bodies and Fats and Oils
—Origin, Occurrence and Collection of Resinous Substances—
Classification—Chemical Constituents of Resinous Substances—Resinols
—Resinot Annols—Behaviour of Resin Constituents towards the
Cholesterine Reactions—Uses and Identification of Resins—Melting-point
—Solvents—Acid Value—Saponification Value—Resin Value—Ester and
Ether Values—Acetyl and Corbonyl Value—Methyl Value—Resin Acid—
Systematic Résumé of the Performance of the Acid and Saponification
Value Tests.
Part II., Balsams—Introduction—Definitions—Canada Balsam—Copaiba
Balsam—Angostura Copaiba Balsam—Bahia Copaiba Balsam—
Carthagena Copaiba Balsam—Maracaibo Copaiba Balsam—Maturin
Copaiba Balsam—Gurjum Copaiba Balsam—Para Copaiba Balsam—
Surinam Copaiba Balsam—West African Copaiba Balsam—Mecca Balsam
Manures.—IX., Analyses of Raw and Finished Products—Common Raw
Bones—Degreased Bones—Crude Fat—Refined Fat—Degelatinised Bones
—Animal Charcoal—Bone Superphosphates—Guanos—Dried Animal
Products—Potash Compounds—Sulphate of Ammonia—Extraction in
Vacuo—Description of a Vacuum Pan—French and British Gelatines
compared.—Index.
Press Opinion.
"We can with confidence recommend the perusal of the book to all
persons interested in the manufacture of artificial manures, and also to
the large number of farmers and others who are desirous of working
their holdings on the most up-to-date methods, and obtaining the best
possible results, which scientific research has placed within their
reach."—Wigan Observer.
ANALYSIS OF RESINS AND BALSAMS. Demy 8vo. 340 pp. 1901.
Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I., Definition of Resins in General—Definition of Balsams, and
especially the Gum Resins—External and Superficial Characteristics of
Resinous Bodies—Distinction between Resinous Bodies and Fats and Oils
—Origin, Occurrence and Collection of Resinous Substances—
Classification—Chemical Constituents of Resinous Substances—Resinols
—Resinot Annols—Behaviour of Resin Constituents towards the
Cholesterine Reactions—Uses and Identification of Resins—Melting-point
—Solvents—Acid Value—Saponification Value—Resin Value—Ester and
Ether Values—Acetyl and Corbonyl Value—Methyl Value—Resin Acid—
Systematic Résumé of the Performance of the Acid and Saponification
Value Tests.
Part II., Balsams—Introduction—Definitions—Canada Balsam—Copaiba
Balsam—Angostura Copaiba Balsam—Bahia Copaiba Balsam—
Carthagena Copaiba Balsam—Maracaibo Copaiba Balsam—Maturin
Copaiba Balsam—Gurjum Copaiba Balsam—Para Copaiba Balsam—
Surinam Copaiba Balsam—West African Copaiba Balsam—Mecca Balsam
Page 329
—Peruvian Balsam—Tolu Balsam—Acaroid Resin—Amine—Amber—
African and West Indian Kino—Bengal Kino—Labdanum—Mastic—Pine
Resin—Sandarach—Scammonium—Shellac—Storax—Adulteration of
Styrax Liquidus Crudus—Purified Storax—Styrax Crudus Colatus—
Tacamahac—Thapsia Resin—Turpentine—Chios Turpentine—Strassburg
Turpentine—Turpeth Turpentine. Gum Resins—Ammoniacum—Bdellium
—Euphorbium—Galbanum—Gamboge—Lactucarium— Myrrh—
Opopanax—Sagapenum—Olibanum or Incense—Acaroid Resin—Amber
—Thapsia Resin.—Index.
MANUFACTURE OF PAINT. A Practical Handbook for Paint
Manufacturers, Merchants and Painters. By J. CRUICKSHANK SMITH,
B.Sc. Demy 8vo. 1901. 200 pp. 60 Illustrations and 1 Large Diagram. Price
7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I., Chapters I., Preparation of Raw Material.—II., Storing of Raw
Material.—III., Testing and Valuation of Raw Material—Paint Plant and
Machinery.
Part II., Chapter V., The Grinding of White Lead.—VI., Grinding of White
Zinc.—VII., Grinding of other White Pigments.—VIII., Grinding of Oxide
Paints.—IX., Grinding of Staining Colours.—X., Grinding of Black Paints.
—XI., Grinding of Chemical Colours—Yellows.—XII., Grinding of
Chemical Colours—Blues.—XIII., Grinding Greens.—XIV., Grinding
Reds.—XV., Grinding Lakes.—XVI., Grinding Colours in Water.—XVII.,
Grinding Colours in Turpentine.
Part III., Chapters XVIII., The Uses of Paint.—XIX., Testing and Matching
Paints.—XX., Economic Considerations.—Index.
THE CHEMISTRY OF PIGMENTS. By ERNEST J. PARRY, B.Sc,
F.I.C., F.C.S., and J.H. COSTE, F.I.C., F.C.S. [In the press.
Contents.
African and West Indian Kino—Bengal Kino—Labdanum—Mastic—Pine
Resin—Sandarach—Scammonium—Shellac—Storax—Adulteration of
Styrax Liquidus Crudus—Purified Storax—Styrax Crudus Colatus—
Tacamahac—Thapsia Resin—Turpentine—Chios Turpentine—Strassburg
Turpentine—Turpeth Turpentine. Gum Resins—Ammoniacum—Bdellium
—Euphorbium—Galbanum—Gamboge—Lactucarium— Myrrh—
Opopanax—Sagapenum—Olibanum or Incense—Acaroid Resin—Amber
—Thapsia Resin.—Index.
MANUFACTURE OF PAINT. A Practical Handbook for Paint
Manufacturers, Merchants and Painters. By J. CRUICKSHANK SMITH,
B.Sc. Demy 8vo. 1901. 200 pp. 60 Illustrations and 1 Large Diagram. Price
7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I., Chapters I., Preparation of Raw Material.—II., Storing of Raw
Material.—III., Testing and Valuation of Raw Material—Paint Plant and
Machinery.
Part II., Chapter V., The Grinding of White Lead.—VI., Grinding of White
Zinc.—VII., Grinding of other White Pigments.—VIII., Grinding of Oxide
Paints.—IX., Grinding of Staining Colours.—X., Grinding of Black Paints.
—XI., Grinding of Chemical Colours—Yellows.—XII., Grinding of
Chemical Colours—Blues.—XIII., Grinding Greens.—XIV., Grinding
Reds.—XV., Grinding Lakes.—XVI., Grinding Colours in Water.—XVII.,
Grinding Colours in Turpentine.
Part III., Chapters XVIII., The Uses of Paint.—XIX., Testing and Matching
Paints.—XX., Economic Considerations.—Index.
THE CHEMISTRY OF PIGMENTS. By ERNEST J. PARRY, B.Sc,
F.I.C., F.C.S., and J.H. COSTE, F.I.C., F.C.S. [In the press.
Contents.
Page 330
Chapters I., Introductory—Composition of White Light—Theory of Colour,
etc.—II., The Application of Pigments—Artistic, Decorative, Protective
Methods of Applying Pigments.—III., White Pigments.—IV., Inorganic
Coloured Pigments.—V., Organic Pigments.
NOTES ON LEAD ORES: Their Distribution and Properties. By JAS.
FAIRIE, F.G.S. Crown 8vo. 1901. 64 pages. Price 2s. 6d.; Abroad, 3s.;
strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Definitions—Properties—Occurrence.—II., Galena—
Johnstonite—Cerussite—Céruse (White Lead)—Minium—Red Lead.—III.,
Pyromorphite—Mimetene—Hediphane—Crocoise—Wulfenite.—
Vanadinite—IV., Bleiglatte—Anglesite—Caledonite—Linarite—Lanarkite
—Leadhillite—Susannite—Clausthalite—Cotunnite.—V., Mendipite—
Matlockite—Cromfordite—Nagyagite—Altaite—Melanochroite—
Vauguelinite—Scheeletine.—VI., Plattnerite—Tilkerodite—Raphanosmite
—Deckenite—Descloezite—Dufrenaysite—Bleinierite—Moffrasite —
Geocronite—Kilbrechenite—Schulzite—Boulangerite—Heteromorphite—
Meneghinite—Jamesonite—Plagionite—Zinkenite.—VII., Kobellite—
Bournonite—Selenkupferblei—Nussierite—Percylite—Wolchite—
Polysphracrite—Miesite.—Index.
THE RISKS AND DANGERS OF VARIOUS OCCUPATIONS AND
THEIR PREVENTION. By LEONARD A. PARRY, M.D., B.S. (Lond.).
196 pp., demy 8vo. 1900. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other
Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Occupations which are Accompanied by the Generation and
Scattering of Abnormal Quantities of Dust.—II., Trades in which there is
Danger of Metallic Poisoning.—III., Certain Chemical Trades.—IV., Some
Miscellaneous Occupations.—V., Trades in which Various Poisonous
Vapours are Inhaled.—VI., General Hygienic Considerations.—Index.
etc.—II., The Application of Pigments—Artistic, Decorative, Protective
Methods of Applying Pigments.—III., White Pigments.—IV., Inorganic
Coloured Pigments.—V., Organic Pigments.
NOTES ON LEAD ORES: Their Distribution and Properties. By JAS.
FAIRIE, F.G.S. Crown 8vo. 1901. 64 pages. Price 2s. 6d.; Abroad, 3s.;
strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Definitions—Properties—Occurrence.—II., Galena—
Johnstonite—Cerussite—Céruse (White Lead)—Minium—Red Lead.—III.,
Pyromorphite—Mimetene—Hediphane—Crocoise—Wulfenite.—
Vanadinite—IV., Bleiglatte—Anglesite—Caledonite—Linarite—Lanarkite
—Leadhillite—Susannite—Clausthalite—Cotunnite.—V., Mendipite—
Matlockite—Cromfordite—Nagyagite—Altaite—Melanochroite—
Vauguelinite—Scheeletine.—VI., Plattnerite—Tilkerodite—Raphanosmite
—Deckenite—Descloezite—Dufrenaysite—Bleinierite—Moffrasite —
Geocronite—Kilbrechenite—Schulzite—Boulangerite—Heteromorphite—
Meneghinite—Jamesonite—Plagionite—Zinkenite.—VII., Kobellite—
Bournonite—Selenkupferblei—Nussierite—Percylite—Wolchite—
Polysphracrite—Miesite.—Index.
THE RISKS AND DANGERS OF VARIOUS OCCUPATIONS AND
THEIR PREVENTION. By LEONARD A. PARRY, M.D., B.S. (Lond.).
196 pp., demy 8vo. 1900. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other
Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Occupations which are Accompanied by the Generation and
Scattering of Abnormal Quantities of Dust.—II., Trades in which there is
Danger of Metallic Poisoning.—III., Certain Chemical Trades.—IV., Some
Miscellaneous Occupations.—V., Trades in which Various Poisonous
Vapours are Inhaled.—VI., General Hygienic Considerations.—Index.
Page 331
This book contains valuable information for the following trades—Aerated
Water Manufacture, Alkali Manufacture, Aniline Manufacture, Barometer
Making, Brass Founders, Bromine Manufacture, Bronze Moulders, Brush
Making, Builders, Cabinet Makers, Calico Printing, Chloride of Lime
Manufacture, Coal Miners, Cocoa-nut Fibre Making, Colour Grinders,
Copper Miners, Cotton Goods Manufacture, Cotton Yarn Dyeing, Cutlery
Trades, Dry Cleaning, Electricity Generating, Electroplaters, Explosives
Manufacture, File Making, Flint Milling, Floor Cloth Makers, Furriers,
Fustian Clothing Making, Galvanised Iron Manufacture, Gassing Process,
Gilders, Glass Making, Glass Paper Making, Glass Polishing and Cutting,
Grinding Processes, Gunpowder Manufacturing, Gutta-percha Manufacture,
Hat Makers, Hemp Manufacture, Horn Goods Making, Horse-hair Making,
Hydrochloric Acid Manufacture, India-rubber Manufacture, Iodine
Manufacture, Ivory Goods Making, Jewellers, Jute Manufacture, Knife
Grinders, Knife Handle Makers, Lace Makers, Lacquering, Lead Melters,
Lead Miners, Leather Making, Linen Manufacture Linoleum Making,
Lithographic Printing and Bronzing, Lithographing, Masons, Match
Manufacture, Melanite Making, Mirror Making, Needle Grinders, Needle
Making, Nitro-benzole Making, Nitro-glycerine Making, Paint Makers,
Paper Making, Philosophical Instrument Makers, Photographers, Pieric
Acid Making, Portland Cement Making, Pottery Manufacture, Printers,
Quicksilver Mining, Rag Pickers, Razor Grinders, Red Lead Making, Rope
Making, Sand Paper Making, Saw Grinders, Scissors Grinders, Shoddy
Manufacture, Shot Making, Silk Making, Silver Mining, Skinners, Slag,
Wood Manufacture, Steel Makers, Steel Pen Making, Stereotypers, Stone
Masons, Straw Hat Makers, Sulphuric Acid Manufacture, Sweeps, Table-
knife Grinders, Tanners, Telegraphists, Textile Industries, Tin Miners,
Turners, Type Founders, Umbrella Makers, Wall Paper Making, White Lead
Making, Wood Working, Woollen Manufacture, Wool Sorters, Zinc Oxide
Manufacture. Zinc Working, etc., etc.
Press Opinions.
"The language used is quite simple, and can be understood by any
intelligent person engaged in the trades dealt with."—The Clarion.
"This is an appalling book. It shows that there is scarcely a trade or
occupation that has not a risk or a danger attached to it."—Local
Water Manufacture, Alkali Manufacture, Aniline Manufacture, Barometer
Making, Brass Founders, Bromine Manufacture, Bronze Moulders, Brush
Making, Builders, Cabinet Makers, Calico Printing, Chloride of Lime
Manufacture, Coal Miners, Cocoa-nut Fibre Making, Colour Grinders,
Copper Miners, Cotton Goods Manufacture, Cotton Yarn Dyeing, Cutlery
Trades, Dry Cleaning, Electricity Generating, Electroplaters, Explosives
Manufacture, File Making, Flint Milling, Floor Cloth Makers, Furriers,
Fustian Clothing Making, Galvanised Iron Manufacture, Gassing Process,
Gilders, Glass Making, Glass Paper Making, Glass Polishing and Cutting,
Grinding Processes, Gunpowder Manufacturing, Gutta-percha Manufacture,
Hat Makers, Hemp Manufacture, Horn Goods Making, Horse-hair Making,
Hydrochloric Acid Manufacture, India-rubber Manufacture, Iodine
Manufacture, Ivory Goods Making, Jewellers, Jute Manufacture, Knife
Grinders, Knife Handle Makers, Lace Makers, Lacquering, Lead Melters,
Lead Miners, Leather Making, Linen Manufacture Linoleum Making,
Lithographic Printing and Bronzing, Lithographing, Masons, Match
Manufacture, Melanite Making, Mirror Making, Needle Grinders, Needle
Making, Nitro-benzole Making, Nitro-glycerine Making, Paint Makers,
Paper Making, Philosophical Instrument Makers, Photographers, Pieric
Acid Making, Portland Cement Making, Pottery Manufacture, Printers,
Quicksilver Mining, Rag Pickers, Razor Grinders, Red Lead Making, Rope
Making, Sand Paper Making, Saw Grinders, Scissors Grinders, Shoddy
Manufacture, Shot Making, Silk Making, Silver Mining, Skinners, Slag,
Wood Manufacture, Steel Makers, Steel Pen Making, Stereotypers, Stone
Masons, Straw Hat Makers, Sulphuric Acid Manufacture, Sweeps, Table-
knife Grinders, Tanners, Telegraphists, Textile Industries, Tin Miners,
Turners, Type Founders, Umbrella Makers, Wall Paper Making, White Lead
Making, Wood Working, Woollen Manufacture, Wool Sorters, Zinc Oxide
Manufacture. Zinc Working, etc., etc.
Press Opinions.
"The language used is quite simple, and can be understood by any
intelligent person engaged in the trades dealt with."—The Clarion.
"This is an appalling book. It shows that there is scarcely a trade or
occupation that has not a risk or a danger attached to it."—Local
Page 332
Government Journal.
"Dr. Parry has not only pointed out the 'risks and dangers of various
occupations': he has suggested means for their prevention. The work is
primarily a practical one."—Colliery Manager.
"This is a most useful book which should be in the hands of all
employers of labour, foremen, and intelligent workmen, and is one of
great utility to sanitary inspectors, and even on occasion to medical
men."—Health.
"The writer has succeeded in collecting a large amount of information,
and though one could wish he had presented it in a rather more
attractive style, he has certainly condensed it into a very small
space."—Physician and Surgeon.
"The little book before us is one which will be found exceedingly
useful to manufacturers and even factory inspectors.... No attempt is
made to show how diseases when originated are to be cured, but,
acting on the sound principle that prevention is better than cure, means
are stated how to avoid the harm."—Bristol Mercury.
"The author has endeavoured to treat the question in simple rather than
in technical language, and he has lucidly catalogued the most
dangerous trades and their symptoms, and in each case specified the
best methods of dealing with them.... To those for whom the volume is
specially designed, Dr. Parry's treatise should be a useful
handbook."—Sheffield Independent.
"A very useful manual for employers of labour, foremen, intelligent
workmen, and, in spite of the author's modesty, for medical men. We
have the peculiar risks and dangers of all the dangerous trades
carefully described; the mode of action of various chemicals, etc., used
in different industries given, with full directions how to minimise
unavoidable risks."—Leeds Mercury.
"Most of the trades in the country are alluded to, and upon those that
are dangerous the necessary attention is bestowed, and means are
recommended whereby danger may be prevented or lessened. The
author has evidently studied his subject with care, and has made full
"Dr. Parry has not only pointed out the 'risks and dangers of various
occupations': he has suggested means for their prevention. The work is
primarily a practical one."—Colliery Manager.
"This is a most useful book which should be in the hands of all
employers of labour, foremen, and intelligent workmen, and is one of
great utility to sanitary inspectors, and even on occasion to medical
men."—Health.
"The writer has succeeded in collecting a large amount of information,
and though one could wish he had presented it in a rather more
attractive style, he has certainly condensed it into a very small
space."—Physician and Surgeon.
"The little book before us is one which will be found exceedingly
useful to manufacturers and even factory inspectors.... No attempt is
made to show how diseases when originated are to be cured, but,
acting on the sound principle that prevention is better than cure, means
are stated how to avoid the harm."—Bristol Mercury.
"The author has endeavoured to treat the question in simple rather than
in technical language, and he has lucidly catalogued the most
dangerous trades and their symptoms, and in each case specified the
best methods of dealing with them.... To those for whom the volume is
specially designed, Dr. Parry's treatise should be a useful
handbook."—Sheffield Independent.
"A very useful manual for employers of labour, foremen, intelligent
workmen, and, in spite of the author's modesty, for medical men. We
have the peculiar risks and dangers of all the dangerous trades
carefully described; the mode of action of various chemicals, etc., used
in different industries given, with full directions how to minimise
unavoidable risks."—Leeds Mercury.
"Most of the trades in the country are alluded to, and upon those that
are dangerous the necessary attention is bestowed, and means are
recommended whereby danger may be prevented or lessened. The
author has evidently studied his subject with care, and has made full
Page 333
use of the experience of others who have had a larger insight into the
industries of the country."—British Medical Journal.
"The work is well written and printed, and its verbiage such as to be
comprehensible to the workman no less than to the master. The careful
and general perusal of a work of this nature cannot but be attended by
beneficial results of a far-reaching nature, and we therefore heartily
recommend the book to our readers. Medical Officers of Health and
Sanitary Inspectors especially should find the work of great
interest."—Sanitary Record.
"It is written in simple language, and its instructions can be easily
followed.... There are some employers, at any rate, who are more
ignorant of, than indifferent to, the slow murder of their workpeople,
and if the facts so succinctly set forth in this book were brought to
their notice, and if the Trade Unions made it their business to insist on
the observance of the better conditions Dr. Parry described, much
might be done to lessen the workman's peril."—Weekly Times and
Echo.
PRACTICAL X RAY WORK. By FRANK T. ADDYMAN,
B.Sc. (Lond.), F.I.C., Member of the Roentgen Society of London;
Radiographer to St. George's Hospital; Demonstrator of Physics and
Chemistry, and Teacher of Radiography in St. George's Hospital Medical
School. Demy 8vo. 12 Plates from Photographs of X Ray Work. 52
Illustrations. 200 pp. 1901. Price 10s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 11s.; Other
Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I., Historical—Chapters I., Introduction.—II., Work leading up to the
Discovery of the X Rays.—III., The Discovery.
Part II., Apparatus and its Management—Chapters I., Electrical Terms.—
II., Sources of Electricity.—III., Induction Coils.—IV., Electrostatic
Machines.—V., Tubes.—VI., Air Pumps.—VII., Tube Holders and
Stereoscopic Apparatus.—VIII., Fluorescent Screens.
industries of the country."—British Medical Journal.
"The work is well written and printed, and its verbiage such as to be
comprehensible to the workman no less than to the master. The careful
and general perusal of a work of this nature cannot but be attended by
beneficial results of a far-reaching nature, and we therefore heartily
recommend the book to our readers. Medical Officers of Health and
Sanitary Inspectors especially should find the work of great
interest."—Sanitary Record.
"It is written in simple language, and its instructions can be easily
followed.... There are some employers, at any rate, who are more
ignorant of, than indifferent to, the slow murder of their workpeople,
and if the facts so succinctly set forth in this book were brought to
their notice, and if the Trade Unions made it their business to insist on
the observance of the better conditions Dr. Parry described, much
might be done to lessen the workman's peril."—Weekly Times and
Echo.
PRACTICAL X RAY WORK. By FRANK T. ADDYMAN,
B.Sc. (Lond.), F.I.C., Member of the Roentgen Society of London;
Radiographer to St. George's Hospital; Demonstrator of Physics and
Chemistry, and Teacher of Radiography in St. George's Hospital Medical
School. Demy 8vo. 12 Plates from Photographs of X Ray Work. 52
Illustrations. 200 pp. 1901. Price 10s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 11s.; Other
Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I., Historical—Chapters I., Introduction.—II., Work leading up to the
Discovery of the X Rays.—III., The Discovery.
Part II., Apparatus and its Management—Chapters I., Electrical Terms.—
II., Sources of Electricity.—III., Induction Coils.—IV., Electrostatic
Machines.—V., Tubes.—VI., Air Pumps.—VII., Tube Holders and
Stereoscopic Apparatus.—VIII., Fluorescent Screens.
Page 334
Part III., Practical X Ray Work—Chapters I., Installations.—II.,
Radioscopy.—III., Radiography.—IV., X Rays in Dentistry.—V., X Rays in
Chemistry.—VI., X Rays in War.—Index
.
List of Plates.
Frontispiece—Congenital Dislocation of Hip-Joint.—I., Needle in Finger.
—II., Needle in Foot.—III., Revolver Bullet in Calf and Leg.—IV., A
Method of Localisation.—V., Stellate Fracture of Patella showing shadow
of "Strapping".—VI., Sarcoma.—VII., Six-weeks'-old Injury to Elbow
showing new Growth of Bone.—VIII., Old Fracture of Tibia and Fibula
badly set.—IX., Heart Shadow.—X., Fractured Femur showing Grain of
Splint.—XI., Barrell's Method of Localisation.
DRYING BY MEANS OF AIR AND STEAM. Explanations, Formulæ,
and Tables for Use in Practice. Translated from the German of E.
HAUSBRAND. Two Diagrams and Thirteen Tables. Demy 8vo. 1901. 72
pp. Price 5s.; India and Colonies, 5s. 6d.; Other Countries, 6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Preface.—British and Metric Systems Compared—Centigrade and Fahr.
Thermometers.—Chapters I, Introduction.—II., Estimation of the
Maximum Weight of Saturated Aqueous Vapour which can be contained in
1 kilo. of Air at Different Pressure and Temperatures.—III., Calculation of
the Necessary Weight and Volume of Air, and of the Least Expenditure of
Heat, per Drying Apparatus with Heated Air, at the Atmospheric Pressure:
A, With the Assumption that the Air is Completely Saturated with Vapour
both before Entry and after Exit from the Apparatus.—B, When the
Atmospheric Air is Completely Saturated before entry, but at its exit is only
¾, ½ or ¼ Saturated.—C, When the Atmospheric Air is not Saturated with
Moisture before Entering the Drying Apparatus.—IV., Drying Apparatus, in
which, in the Drying Chamber, a Pressure is Artificially Created, Higher or
Lower than that of the Atmosphere.—V., Drying by Means of Superheated
Steam, without Air.—VI., Heating Surface, Velocity of the Air Current,
Dimensions of the Drying Room, Surface of the Drying Material, Losses of
Heat.—Index.
Radioscopy.—III., Radiography.—IV., X Rays in Dentistry.—V., X Rays in
Chemistry.—VI., X Rays in War.—Index
.
List of Plates.
Frontispiece—Congenital Dislocation of Hip-Joint.—I., Needle in Finger.
—II., Needle in Foot.—III., Revolver Bullet in Calf and Leg.—IV., A
Method of Localisation.—V., Stellate Fracture of Patella showing shadow
of "Strapping".—VI., Sarcoma.—VII., Six-weeks'-old Injury to Elbow
showing new Growth of Bone.—VIII., Old Fracture of Tibia and Fibula
badly set.—IX., Heart Shadow.—X., Fractured Femur showing Grain of
Splint.—XI., Barrell's Method of Localisation.
DRYING BY MEANS OF AIR AND STEAM. Explanations, Formulæ,
and Tables for Use in Practice. Translated from the German of E.
HAUSBRAND. Two Diagrams and Thirteen Tables. Demy 8vo. 1901. 72
pp. Price 5s.; India and Colonies, 5s. 6d.; Other Countries, 6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Preface.—British and Metric Systems Compared—Centigrade and Fahr.
Thermometers.—Chapters I, Introduction.—II., Estimation of the
Maximum Weight of Saturated Aqueous Vapour which can be contained in
1 kilo. of Air at Different Pressure and Temperatures.—III., Calculation of
the Necessary Weight and Volume of Air, and of the Least Expenditure of
Heat, per Drying Apparatus with Heated Air, at the Atmospheric Pressure:
A, With the Assumption that the Air is Completely Saturated with Vapour
both before Entry and after Exit from the Apparatus.—B, When the
Atmospheric Air is Completely Saturated before entry, but at its exit is only
¾, ½ or ¼ Saturated.—C, When the Atmospheric Air is not Saturated with
Moisture before Entering the Drying Apparatus.—IV., Drying Apparatus, in
which, in the Drying Chamber, a Pressure is Artificially Created, Higher or
Lower than that of the Atmosphere.—V., Drying by Means of Superheated
Steam, without Air.—VI., Heating Surface, Velocity of the Air Current,
Dimensions of the Drying Room, Surface of the Drying Material, Losses of
Heat.—Index.
Page 335
Page 336
Leather Trades.
THE LEATHER WORKER'S MANUAL. Being a Compendium of
Practical Recipes and Working Formulæ for Curriers, Bootmakers, Leather
Dressers, Blacking Manufacturers, Saddlers, Fancy Leather Workers, and
all Persons engaged in the Manipulation of Leather. By H.C. STANDAGE.
165 pp. 1900. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s.
6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Blackings, Polishes, Glosses, Dressings, Renovators, etc., for
Boot and Shoe Leather.—II., Harness Blackings, Dressings, Greases,
Compositions, Soaps, and Boot-top Powders and Liquids, etc., etc.—III.,
Leather Grinders' Sundries.—IV., Currier's Seasonings, Blacking
Compounds, Dressings, Finishes, Glosses, etc.—V., Dyes and Stains for
Leather.—VI., Miscellaneous Information.—VII., Chrome Tannage.—
Index.
Press Opinions.
"The book being absolutely unique, is likely to be of exceptional value
to all whom it concerns, as it meets a long-felt want."—Birmingham
Gazette.
"This is a valuable collection of practical receipts and working
formulæ for the use of those engaged in the manipulation of leather.
We have no hesitation in recommending it as one of the best books of
its kind, an opinion which will be endorsed by those to whom it
appeals."—Liverpool Mercury.
"We think we may venture to state, so far as the opinion of the leather
trade under the Southern Cross is concerned, that it will be one of
approval. As practical men, having a long and wide experience of the
leather trade in Australia, we are certain that there are many tanners
and curriers carrying on business in remote townships of the colonies
THE LEATHER WORKER'S MANUAL. Being a Compendium of
Practical Recipes and Working Formulæ for Curriers, Bootmakers, Leather
Dressers, Blacking Manufacturers, Saddlers, Fancy Leather Workers, and
all Persons engaged in the Manipulation of Leather. By H.C. STANDAGE.
165 pp. 1900. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s.
6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Blackings, Polishes, Glosses, Dressings, Renovators, etc., for
Boot and Shoe Leather.—II., Harness Blackings, Dressings, Greases,
Compositions, Soaps, and Boot-top Powders and Liquids, etc., etc.—III.,
Leather Grinders' Sundries.—IV., Currier's Seasonings, Blacking
Compounds, Dressings, Finishes, Glosses, etc.—V., Dyes and Stains for
Leather.—VI., Miscellaneous Information.—VII., Chrome Tannage.—
Index.
Press Opinions.
"The book being absolutely unique, is likely to be of exceptional value
to all whom it concerns, as it meets a long-felt want."—Birmingham
Gazette.
"This is a valuable collection of practical receipts and working
formulæ for the use of those engaged in the manipulation of leather.
We have no hesitation in recommending it as one of the best books of
its kind, an opinion which will be endorsed by those to whom it
appeals."—Liverpool Mercury.
"We think we may venture to state, so far as the opinion of the leather
trade under the Southern Cross is concerned, that it will be one of
approval. As practical men, having a long and wide experience of the
leather trade in Australia, we are certain that there are many tanners
and curriers carrying on business in remote townships of the colonies
Page 337
to whom such a manual of practical recipes will be invaluable.... This
manual is not a mere collection of recipes for the various purposes to
which they may be applied, but it is also replete with instructions
concerning the nature of the materials recommended to be used in
making up the recipes.... We think every intelligent leather man should
avail himself of the manual. It is undoubtedly a valuable contribution
to the technology of the leather trade."—Australian Leather Journal
and Boot and Shoe Recorder.
PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE LEATHER INDUSTRY. By A.M.
VILLON. A Translation of Villon's "Traité Pratique de la Fabrication des
cuirs et du Travail des Peaux". By FRANK T. ADDYMAN, B.SC. (Lond.),
F.I.C., F.C.S.; and Corrected by an Eminent Member of the Trade. 500 pp.,
royal 8vo. 1901. 123 Illustrations. Price 21s.; India and Colonies, 22s.;
Other Countries, 23s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Preface—Translator's Preface—List of Illustrations.
Part I., Materials used in Tanning—Chapter I., Skins: I., Skin and its
Structure; II., Skins used in Tanning; III., Various Skins and their Uses—
Chapter II., Tannin and Tanning Substances: I., Tannin; II., Barks (Oak);
III., Barks other than Oak; IV., Tanning Woods; V., Tannin-bearing Leaves;
VI., Excrescences; VII., Tan-bearing Fruits; VIII., Tan-bearing Roots and
Bulbs; IX., Tanning Juices: X., Tanning Substances used in Various
Countries; XI., Tannin Extracts; XII., Estimation of Tannin and Tannin
Principles.
Part II., Tanning—Chapter I., The Installation of a Tannary: I., Tan
Furnaces; II., Chimneys, Boilers, etc.; III., Steam Engines—Chapter II.,
Grinding and Trituration of Tanning Substances: I., Cutting up Bark: II.,
Grinding Bark; III., The Grinding of Tan Woods; IV., Powdering Fruit,
Galls and Grains; V., Notes on the Grinding of Bark—Chapter III.,
Manufacture of Sole Leather: I., Soaking; II., Sweating and Unhairing; III.,
Plumping and Colouring; IV., Handling; V., Tanning; VI., Tanning
manual is not a mere collection of recipes for the various purposes to
which they may be applied, but it is also replete with instructions
concerning the nature of the materials recommended to be used in
making up the recipes.... We think every intelligent leather man should
avail himself of the manual. It is undoubtedly a valuable contribution
to the technology of the leather trade."—Australian Leather Journal
and Boot and Shoe Recorder.
PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE LEATHER INDUSTRY. By A.M.
VILLON. A Translation of Villon's "Traité Pratique de la Fabrication des
cuirs et du Travail des Peaux". By FRANK T. ADDYMAN, B.SC. (Lond.),
F.I.C., F.C.S.; and Corrected by an Eminent Member of the Trade. 500 pp.,
royal 8vo. 1901. 123 Illustrations. Price 21s.; India and Colonies, 22s.;
Other Countries, 23s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Preface—Translator's Preface—List of Illustrations.
Part I., Materials used in Tanning—Chapter I., Skins: I., Skin and its
Structure; II., Skins used in Tanning; III., Various Skins and their Uses—
Chapter II., Tannin and Tanning Substances: I., Tannin; II., Barks (Oak);
III., Barks other than Oak; IV., Tanning Woods; V., Tannin-bearing Leaves;
VI., Excrescences; VII., Tan-bearing Fruits; VIII., Tan-bearing Roots and
Bulbs; IX., Tanning Juices: X., Tanning Substances used in Various
Countries; XI., Tannin Extracts; XII., Estimation of Tannin and Tannin
Principles.
Part II., Tanning—Chapter I., The Installation of a Tannary: I., Tan
Furnaces; II., Chimneys, Boilers, etc.; III., Steam Engines—Chapter II.,
Grinding and Trituration of Tanning Substances: I., Cutting up Bark: II.,
Grinding Bark; III., The Grinding of Tan Woods; IV., Powdering Fruit,
Galls and Grains; V., Notes on the Grinding of Bark—Chapter III.,
Manufacture of Sole Leather: I., Soaking; II., Sweating and Unhairing; III.,
Plumping and Colouring; IV., Handling; V., Tanning; VI., Tanning
Page 338
Elephants' Hides; VII., Drying; VIII., Striking or Pinning—Chapter IV.,
Manufacture of Dressing Leather: I., Soaking; II., Depilation; III., New
Processes for the Depilation of Skins; IV., Tanning; V., Cow Hides; VI.,
Horse Hides; VII., Goat Skins; Manufacture of Split Hides—Chapter V., On
Various Methods of Tanning: I., Mechanical Methods; II., Physical
Methods; III., Chemical Methods; IV., Tanning with Extracts—Chapter VI.,
Quantity and Quality: I., Quantity; II., Net Cost; III., Quality of Leather—
Chapter VII., Various Manipulations of Tanned Leather: I., Second Tanning;
II., Grease Stains: III., Bleaching Leather; IV., Waterproofing Leather; V.,
Weighting Tanned Leather; VI., Preservation of Leather—Chapter VIII.,
Tanning Various Skins.
Part III., Currying—Chapter I., Waxed Calf: I., Preparation; II., Shaving;
III., Stretching or Slicking; IV., Oiling the Grain: V., Oiling the Flesh Side;
VI., Whitening and Graining; VII., Waxing; VIII., Finishing; IX., Dry
Finishing; X., Finishing in Colour; XI., Cost—Chapter II., White Calf: I.,
Finishing in White—Chapter III., Cow Hide for Upper Leathers: I., Black
Cow Hide; II., White Cow Hide; III., Coloured Cow Hide.—Chapter IV.,
Smooth Cow Hide—Chapter V., Black Leather—Chapter VI.,
Miscellaneous Hides: I., Horse; II., Goat; III., Waxed Goat Skin: IV., Matt
Goat Skin—Chapter VII., Russia Leather: I., Russia Leather; II., Artificial
Russia Leather.
Part IV., Enamelled, Hungary and Chamoy Leather, Morocco,
Parchment, Furs and Artificial Leather—Chapter I., Enamelled Leather:
I., Varnish Manufacture; II., Application of the Enamel; III., Enamelling in
Colour—Chapter II., Hungary Leather: I., Preliminary; II., Wet Work or
Preparation; III., Aluming; IV., Dressing or Loft Work; V., Tallowing; VI.,
Hungary Leather from Various Hides—Chapter III., Tawing: I., Preparatory
Operations; II., Dressing; III., Dyeing Tawed Skins; IV., Rugs—Chapter
IV., Chamoy Leather—Chapter V., Morocco: I., Preliminary Operations; II.,
Morocco Tanning; III., Mordants used in Morocco Manufacture; IV.,
Natural Colours used in Morocco Dyeing; V., Artificial Colours; VI.
Different Methods of Dyeing; VII., Dyeing with Natural Colours; VIII.,
Dyeing with Aniline Colours; IX., Dyeing with Metallic Salts; X., Leather
Printing; XI., Finishing Morocco; XII., Shagreen; XIII., Bronzed Leather—
Chapter VI., Gilding and Silvering: I., Gilding; II., Silvering; III., Nickel
and Cobalt—Chapter VII., Parchment—Chapter VIII., Furs and Furriery: I.,
Manufacture of Dressing Leather: I., Soaking; II., Depilation; III., New
Processes for the Depilation of Skins; IV., Tanning; V., Cow Hides; VI.,
Horse Hides; VII., Goat Skins; Manufacture of Split Hides—Chapter V., On
Various Methods of Tanning: I., Mechanical Methods; II., Physical
Methods; III., Chemical Methods; IV., Tanning with Extracts—Chapter VI.,
Quantity and Quality: I., Quantity; II., Net Cost; III., Quality of Leather—
Chapter VII., Various Manipulations of Tanned Leather: I., Second Tanning;
II., Grease Stains: III., Bleaching Leather; IV., Waterproofing Leather; V.,
Weighting Tanned Leather; VI., Preservation of Leather—Chapter VIII.,
Tanning Various Skins.
Part III., Currying—Chapter I., Waxed Calf: I., Preparation; II., Shaving;
III., Stretching or Slicking; IV., Oiling the Grain: V., Oiling the Flesh Side;
VI., Whitening and Graining; VII., Waxing; VIII., Finishing; IX., Dry
Finishing; X., Finishing in Colour; XI., Cost—Chapter II., White Calf: I.,
Finishing in White—Chapter III., Cow Hide for Upper Leathers: I., Black
Cow Hide; II., White Cow Hide; III., Coloured Cow Hide.—Chapter IV.,
Smooth Cow Hide—Chapter V., Black Leather—Chapter VI.,
Miscellaneous Hides: I., Horse; II., Goat; III., Waxed Goat Skin: IV., Matt
Goat Skin—Chapter VII., Russia Leather: I., Russia Leather; II., Artificial
Russia Leather.
Part IV., Enamelled, Hungary and Chamoy Leather, Morocco,
Parchment, Furs and Artificial Leather—Chapter I., Enamelled Leather:
I., Varnish Manufacture; II., Application of the Enamel; III., Enamelling in
Colour—Chapter II., Hungary Leather: I., Preliminary; II., Wet Work or
Preparation; III., Aluming; IV., Dressing or Loft Work; V., Tallowing; VI.,
Hungary Leather from Various Hides—Chapter III., Tawing: I., Preparatory
Operations; II., Dressing; III., Dyeing Tawed Skins; IV., Rugs—Chapter
IV., Chamoy Leather—Chapter V., Morocco: I., Preliminary Operations; II.,
Morocco Tanning; III., Mordants used in Morocco Manufacture; IV.,
Natural Colours used in Morocco Dyeing; V., Artificial Colours; VI.
Different Methods of Dyeing; VII., Dyeing with Natural Colours; VIII.,
Dyeing with Aniline Colours; IX., Dyeing with Metallic Salts; X., Leather
Printing; XI., Finishing Morocco; XII., Shagreen; XIII., Bronzed Leather—
Chapter VI., Gilding and Silvering: I., Gilding; II., Silvering; III., Nickel
and Cobalt—Chapter VII., Parchment—Chapter VIII., Furs and Furriery: I.,
Page 339
Preliminary Remarks; II., Indigenous Furs; III., Foreign Furs from Hot
Countries; IV., Foreign Furs from Cold Countries; V., Furs from Birds'
Skins; VI., Preparation of Furs; VII., Dressing; VIII., Colouring; IX.,
Preparation of Birds' Skins; X., Preservation of Furs—Chapter IX.,
Artificial Leather: I., Leather made from Scraps; II., Compressed Leather;
III., American Cloth; IV., Papier Mâché; V., Linoleum: VI., Artificial
Leather.
Part V., Leather Testing and the Theory of Tanning—Chapter I., Testing
and Analysis of Leather: I., Physical Testing of Tanned Leather: II.,
Chemical Analysis—Chapter II., The Theory of Tanning and the other
Operations of the Leather and Skin Industry: I., Theory of Soaking; II.,
Theory of Unhairing; III., Theory of Swelling; IV., Theory of Handling; V.,
Theory of Tanning; VI., Theory of the Action of Tannin on the Skin; VII.,
Theory of Hungary Leather Making; VIII., Theory of Tawing; IX., Theory
of Chamoy Leather Making; X., Theory of Mineral Tanning.
Part VI., Uses of Leather—Chapter I., Machine Belts: I., Manufacture of
Belting; II., Leather Chain Belts; III., Various Belts, IV., Use of Belts—
Chapter II., Boot and Shoe-making: I., Boots and Shoes; II., Laces—
Chapter III., Saddlery: I., Composition of a Saddle; II., Construction of a
Saddle—Chapter IV., Harness: I., The Pack Saddle; II., Harness—Chapter
V., Military Equipment—Chapter VI., Glove Making—Chapter VII.,
Carriage Building—Chapter VIII., Mechanical Uses.
Appendix, The World's Commerce in Leather—I., Europe; II., America;
III., Asia; IV., Africa; Australasia—Index.
Press Opinions.
"The book is well and lucidly written. The writer is evidently a
practical man, who also has taken the trouble to make himself
acquainted with the scientific and technical side of his trade ... French
methods differ largely from our own: sometimes we think our ways the
best, but not always. The practical man may pick up many useful hints
which may help him to improve his methods." —Shoe Manufacturers'
Monthly Journal.
Countries; IV., Foreign Furs from Cold Countries; V., Furs from Birds'
Skins; VI., Preparation of Furs; VII., Dressing; VIII., Colouring; IX.,
Preparation of Birds' Skins; X., Preservation of Furs—Chapter IX.,
Artificial Leather: I., Leather made from Scraps; II., Compressed Leather;
III., American Cloth; IV., Papier Mâché; V., Linoleum: VI., Artificial
Leather.
Part V., Leather Testing and the Theory of Tanning—Chapter I., Testing
and Analysis of Leather: I., Physical Testing of Tanned Leather: II.,
Chemical Analysis—Chapter II., The Theory of Tanning and the other
Operations of the Leather and Skin Industry: I., Theory of Soaking; II.,
Theory of Unhairing; III., Theory of Swelling; IV., Theory of Handling; V.,
Theory of Tanning; VI., Theory of the Action of Tannin on the Skin; VII.,
Theory of Hungary Leather Making; VIII., Theory of Tawing; IX., Theory
of Chamoy Leather Making; X., Theory of Mineral Tanning.
Part VI., Uses of Leather—Chapter I., Machine Belts: I., Manufacture of
Belting; II., Leather Chain Belts; III., Various Belts, IV., Use of Belts—
Chapter II., Boot and Shoe-making: I., Boots and Shoes; II., Laces—
Chapter III., Saddlery: I., Composition of a Saddle; II., Construction of a
Saddle—Chapter IV., Harness: I., The Pack Saddle; II., Harness—Chapter
V., Military Equipment—Chapter VI., Glove Making—Chapter VII.,
Carriage Building—Chapter VIII., Mechanical Uses.
Appendix, The World's Commerce in Leather—I., Europe; II., America;
III., Asia; IV., Africa; Australasia—Index.
Press Opinions.
"The book is well and lucidly written. The writer is evidently a
practical man, who also has taken the trouble to make himself
acquainted with the scientific and technical side of his trade ... French
methods differ largely from our own: sometimes we think our ways the
best, but not always. The practical man may pick up many useful hints
which may help him to improve his methods." —Shoe Manufacturers'
Monthly Journal.
Page 340
"This book cannot fail to be of great value to all engaged in the leather
trades ... The British may believe that the French can teach them
nothing in the work of leather tanning generally, but a comparison of
the methods of the two countries will certainly yield a few wrinkles
which may lead to advantageous results. Only a man understanding the
science and technique of the trade could have written the book, and it
is well done." —Midland Free Press.
"Gives much useful and interesting information concerning the various
processes by which the skins of animals are converted into leather.
Written by a French Chemist after five years of constant study and
application: it shows all that detail of analysis which we are
accustomed to find in scientists, and which the practical tanner is too
much in the habit of ignoring, sometimes to his own loss." —Leeds
Mercury.
"Nor can there be much doubt that this expectation will be fully
justified by the result. Thanks to the conspicuous painstaking with
which Mr. Addyman has discharged his duty, and the 123 illustrations
by which the text is elucidated, the volume can hardly fail to prove a
very valuable standard work of its class. It can thus be confidently
recommended to all who are more or less practically interested in the
technology of a very important subject." —Leicester Post.
"This is, in every respect, an altogether admirable, practical, clear and
lucid treatise on the various and numerous branches of the great leather
industry, of which it deals in an exhaustive, highly intelligent,
workmanlike and scientific manner ... It is a handsome addition to
every man's knowledge of his trade, whether he be a leading director
of a large public company, or an industrious employee in the works,
wishing to improve his services by the addition of his brains to his
work." —Shoe and Leather Trader.
"M. Villon writes as one having a very full knowledge of all branches
of the subject, and in days when foreign competition has enforced on
English manufacturers the importance of no longer being content with
rule-of-thumb methods which have come down to them from their
forefathers it certainly should be worth the while of English tanners to
trades ... The British may believe that the French can teach them
nothing in the work of leather tanning generally, but a comparison of
the methods of the two countries will certainly yield a few wrinkles
which may lead to advantageous results. Only a man understanding the
science and technique of the trade could have written the book, and it
is well done." —Midland Free Press.
"Gives much useful and interesting information concerning the various
processes by which the skins of animals are converted into leather.
Written by a French Chemist after five years of constant study and
application: it shows all that detail of analysis which we are
accustomed to find in scientists, and which the practical tanner is too
much in the habit of ignoring, sometimes to his own loss." —Leeds
Mercury.
"Nor can there be much doubt that this expectation will be fully
justified by the result. Thanks to the conspicuous painstaking with
which Mr. Addyman has discharged his duty, and the 123 illustrations
by which the text is elucidated, the volume can hardly fail to prove a
very valuable standard work of its class. It can thus be confidently
recommended to all who are more or less practically interested in the
technology of a very important subject." —Leicester Post.
"This is, in every respect, an altogether admirable, practical, clear and
lucid treatise on the various and numerous branches of the great leather
industry, of which it deals in an exhaustive, highly intelligent,
workmanlike and scientific manner ... It is a handsome addition to
every man's knowledge of his trade, whether he be a leading director
of a large public company, or an industrious employee in the works,
wishing to improve his services by the addition of his brains to his
work." —Shoe and Leather Trader.
"M. Villon writes as one having a very full knowledge of all branches
of the subject, and in days when foreign competition has enforced on
English manufacturers the importance of no longer being content with
rule-of-thumb methods which have come down to them from their
forefathers it certainly should be worth the while of English tanners to
Page 341
see what lessons they can learn from French practice, and French
practice, we should imagine, could hardly have a better exponent than
the author of this large volume." —Western Daily Press and Bristol
Times.
"At a time when all or nearly all our British industries are to a greater
or less extent hampered by the pressure of continental and American
competition, any hints that can be obtained as to the methods pursued
by competitors must necessarily be of value ... That it will be of
interest and value, not merely to English tanners, but to those
associated with many kindred industrial branches, goes without saying
... As a work of reference the volume will be extremely useful in the
trade, and where leisure affords sufficient opportunity a careful perusal
and study of it would afford ample reward." —Kettering Guardian.
"This is a very handsomely got up and elaborate work just issued by
this well-known technical book-publishing firm ... When we say that
the work consists of over 500 large pages with about 120 illustrations,
and almost innumerable tables, it will be seen at once that we cannot
attempt anything like an exhaustive resume of its contents, and even if
we did the details would be of little interest to our general readers,
while those who are engaged in the leather industry will probably
obtain the book for themselves—at least they would do well to do so....
Altogether the 'Treatise' has evidently been very carefully prepared,
and by a man who thoroughly knows the subject, and hence it will be a
very valuable technical book for English firms and workers.'—Walsall
Observer.
practice, we should imagine, could hardly have a better exponent than
the author of this large volume." —Western Daily Press and Bristol
Times.
"At a time when all or nearly all our British industries are to a greater
or less extent hampered by the pressure of continental and American
competition, any hints that can be obtained as to the methods pursued
by competitors must necessarily be of value ... That it will be of
interest and value, not merely to English tanners, but to those
associated with many kindred industrial branches, goes without saying
... As a work of reference the volume will be extremely useful in the
trade, and where leisure affords sufficient opportunity a careful perusal
and study of it would afford ample reward." —Kettering Guardian.
"This is a very handsomely got up and elaborate work just issued by
this well-known technical book-publishing firm ... When we say that
the work consists of over 500 large pages with about 120 illustrations,
and almost innumerable tables, it will be seen at once that we cannot
attempt anything like an exhaustive resume of its contents, and even if
we did the details would be of little interest to our general readers,
while those who are engaged in the leather industry will probably
obtain the book for themselves—at least they would do well to do so....
Altogether the 'Treatise' has evidently been very carefully prepared,
and by a man who thoroughly knows the subject, and hence it will be a
very valuable technical book for English firms and workers.'—Walsall
Observer.
Page 342
Books on Pottery, Bricks, Tiles, Glass, etc.
THE MANUAL OF PRACTICAL POTTING. Revised and Enlarged.
Third Edition. 200 pp. 1901. Price 17s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 18s. 6d.;
Other Countries, 20s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Introduction. The Rise and Progress of the Potter's Art.—Chapters I.,
Bodies. China and Porcelain Bodies, Parian Bodies, Semi-porcelain and
Vitreous Bodies, Mortar Bodies, Earthenwares Granite and C.C. Bodies,
Miscellaneous Bodies, Sagger and Crucible Clays, Coloured Bodies, Jasper
Bodies, Coloured Bodies for Mosaic Painting, Encaustic Tile Bodies, Body
Stains, Coloured Dips.—II., Glazes. China Glazes, Ironstone Glazes,
Earthenware Glazes, Glazes without Lead, Miscellaneous Glazes, Coloured
Glazes, Majolica Colours.—III., Gold and Cold Colours. Gold, Purple of
Cassius, Marone and Ruby, Enamel Coloured Bases, Enamel Colour
Fluxes, Enamel Colours, Mixed Enamel Colours, Antique and Vellum
Enamel Colours, Underglaze Colours, Underglaze Colour Fluxes, Mixed
Underglaze Colours, Flow Powders, Oils and Varnishes.—IV., Means and
Methods. Reclamation of Waste Gold, The Use of Cobalt, Notes on Enamel
Colours, Liquid or Bright Gold.—V., Classification and Analysis.
Classification of Clay Ware, Lord Playfair's Analysis of Clays, The Markets
of the World, Time and Scale of Firing, Weights of Potter's Material,
Decorated Goods Count.—VI., Comparative Loss of Weight of Clays.—
VII., Ground Felspar Calculations.—VIII., The Conversion of Slop Body
Recipes into Dry Weight.—IX., The Cost of Prepared Earthenware Clay.—
X., Forms and Tables. Articles of Apprenticeship, Manufacturer's Guide to
Stocktaking, Table of Relative Values of Potter's Materials, Hourly Wages
Table, Workman's Settling Table, Comparative Guide for Earthenware and
China Manufacturers in the use of Slop Flint and Slop Stone, Foreign Terms
applied to Earthenware and China Goods, Table for the Conversion of
Metrical Weights and Measures on the Continent of South America. Index.
THE MANUAL OF PRACTICAL POTTING. Revised and Enlarged.
Third Edition. 200 pp. 1901. Price 17s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 18s. 6d.;
Other Countries, 20s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Introduction. The Rise and Progress of the Potter's Art.—Chapters I.,
Bodies. China and Porcelain Bodies, Parian Bodies, Semi-porcelain and
Vitreous Bodies, Mortar Bodies, Earthenwares Granite and C.C. Bodies,
Miscellaneous Bodies, Sagger and Crucible Clays, Coloured Bodies, Jasper
Bodies, Coloured Bodies for Mosaic Painting, Encaustic Tile Bodies, Body
Stains, Coloured Dips.—II., Glazes. China Glazes, Ironstone Glazes,
Earthenware Glazes, Glazes without Lead, Miscellaneous Glazes, Coloured
Glazes, Majolica Colours.—III., Gold and Cold Colours. Gold, Purple of
Cassius, Marone and Ruby, Enamel Coloured Bases, Enamel Colour
Fluxes, Enamel Colours, Mixed Enamel Colours, Antique and Vellum
Enamel Colours, Underglaze Colours, Underglaze Colour Fluxes, Mixed
Underglaze Colours, Flow Powders, Oils and Varnishes.—IV., Means and
Methods. Reclamation of Waste Gold, The Use of Cobalt, Notes on Enamel
Colours, Liquid or Bright Gold.—V., Classification and Analysis.
Classification of Clay Ware, Lord Playfair's Analysis of Clays, The Markets
of the World, Time and Scale of Firing, Weights of Potter's Material,
Decorated Goods Count.—VI., Comparative Loss of Weight of Clays.—
VII., Ground Felspar Calculations.—VIII., The Conversion of Slop Body
Recipes into Dry Weight.—IX., The Cost of Prepared Earthenware Clay.—
X., Forms and Tables. Articles of Apprenticeship, Manufacturer's Guide to
Stocktaking, Table of Relative Values of Potter's Materials, Hourly Wages
Table, Workman's Settling Table, Comparative Guide for Earthenware and
China Manufacturers in the use of Slop Flint and Slop Stone, Foreign Terms
applied to Earthenware and China Goods, Table for the Conversion of
Metrical Weights and Measures on the Continent of South America. Index.
Page 343
CERAMIC TECHNOLOGY: Being some Aspects of Technical Science
as Applied to Pottery Manufacture. Edited by CHARLES F. BINNS. 100
pp. 1897. Price 12s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 13s. 6d.; Other Countries, 15s.;
strictly net.
Contents.
Preface.—Introduction.—Chapters I., The Chemistry of Pottery.—II.,
Analysis and Synthesis.—III., Clays and their Components.—IV., The
Biscuit Oven.—V., Pyrometry.—VI., Glazes and their Composition.—VII.,
Colours and Colour-making.—Index.
RECIPES FOR FLINT GLASS MAKING. By a British Glass Master
and Mixer. Sixty Recipes. Being Leaves from the Mixing Book of several
experts in the Flint Glass Trade, containing up-to-date recipes and valuable
information as to Crystal, Demi-crystal and Coloured Glass in its many
varieties. It contains the recipes for cheap metal suited to pressing, blowing,
etc., as well as the most costly crystal and ruby. British manufacturers have
kept up the quality of this glass from the arrivals of the Venetians to Hungry
Hill, Stourbridge, up to the present time. The book also contains remarks as
to the result of the metal as it left the pots by the respective metal mixers,
taken from their own memoranda upon the originals. 1900. Price for United
Kingdom, 10s. 6d.; Abroad. 15s.; United States, 84; strictly net.
Contents.
Ruby—Ruby from Copper—Flint for using with the Ruby for Coating—A
German Metal —Cornelian, or Alabaster—Sapphire Blue—Crysophis—
Opal—Turquoise Blue—Gold Colour —Dark Green—Green (common)—
Green for Malachite—Blue for Malachite—Black for Melachite —Black—
Common Canary Batch—Canary—White Opaque Glass—Sealing-wax Red
—Flint—Flint Glass (Crystal and Demi)—Achromatic Glass—Paste Glass
—White Enamel —Firestone—Dead White (for moons)—White Agate—
Canary—Canary Enamel—Index.
COLOURING AND DECORATION OF CERAMIC WARE. By ALEX.
BRONGNIART. With Notes and Additions by ALPHONSE SALVETAT.
Translated from the French. 200 pp. 1898. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies,
8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
as Applied to Pottery Manufacture. Edited by CHARLES F. BINNS. 100
pp. 1897. Price 12s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 13s. 6d.; Other Countries, 15s.;
strictly net.
Contents.
Preface.—Introduction.—Chapters I., The Chemistry of Pottery.—II.,
Analysis and Synthesis.—III., Clays and their Components.—IV., The
Biscuit Oven.—V., Pyrometry.—VI., Glazes and their Composition.—VII.,
Colours and Colour-making.—Index.
RECIPES FOR FLINT GLASS MAKING. By a British Glass Master
and Mixer. Sixty Recipes. Being Leaves from the Mixing Book of several
experts in the Flint Glass Trade, containing up-to-date recipes and valuable
information as to Crystal, Demi-crystal and Coloured Glass in its many
varieties. It contains the recipes for cheap metal suited to pressing, blowing,
etc., as well as the most costly crystal and ruby. British manufacturers have
kept up the quality of this glass from the arrivals of the Venetians to Hungry
Hill, Stourbridge, up to the present time. The book also contains remarks as
to the result of the metal as it left the pots by the respective metal mixers,
taken from their own memoranda upon the originals. 1900. Price for United
Kingdom, 10s. 6d.; Abroad. 15s.; United States, 84; strictly net.
Contents.
Ruby—Ruby from Copper—Flint for using with the Ruby for Coating—A
German Metal —Cornelian, or Alabaster—Sapphire Blue—Crysophis—
Opal—Turquoise Blue—Gold Colour —Dark Green—Green (common)—
Green for Malachite—Blue for Malachite—Black for Melachite —Black—
Common Canary Batch—Canary—White Opaque Glass—Sealing-wax Red
—Flint—Flint Glass (Crystal and Demi)—Achromatic Glass—Paste Glass
—White Enamel —Firestone—Dead White (for moons)—White Agate—
Canary—Canary Enamel—Index.
COLOURING AND DECORATION OF CERAMIC WARE. By ALEX.
BRONGNIART. With Notes and Additions by ALPHONSE SALVETAT.
Translated from the French. 200 pp. 1898. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies,
8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Page 344
Contents.
The Pastes, Bodies or Ceramic Articles Capable of being Decorated by
Vitrifiable Colours—The Chemical Preparation of Vitrifiable Colours—
Composition and Preparation of Vitrifiable Colours—The Oxides—
Preparation of Oxides—Preparation of Chromates—Preparation of other
Colours—Composition and Preparation of Fluxes—Muffle Colours—
Recipes for Colours—Use of Metals—Lustres—Preparation and
Application of Colours—Composition of Coloured Pastes—Underglaze
Colours—Colours in the Glaze—Overglaze Colours—Painting in
Vitrifiable Colours—Gilding—Burnishing—Printing—Enlarging and
Reducing Gelatine Prints—Muffle Kilns for Vitrifiable Colours—Influence
of the Material on the Colour—Changes Resulting from the Actions of the
Fire—Alterations Resulting from the Colours—Alterations in Firing.
HOW TO ANALYSE CLAY. Practical Methods for Practical Men. By
HOLDEN M. ASHBY, Professor of Organic Chemistry, Harvey Medical
College, U.S.A. Twenty Illustrations. 1898. Price 2s. 6d.; Abroad, 3s.;
strictly net.
Contents.
List of Apparatus—List of Atomic Weights—Use of Balance, and Burette,
Sand Bath, and Water Bath—Dessicator—Drying Oven—Filtering—Fusion
—Determination of Water, Organic Matter, Iron, Calcium, Alkalies,
Limestone, Silica, Alumina, Magnesium, etc.—Mechanical Analysis—
Rational Analysis—Standard Solutions—Volumetric Analysis—Standards
for Clay Analysis—Sampling.
ARCHITECTURAL POTTERY. Bricks, Tiles, Pipes, Enamelled Terra-
cottas, Ordinary and Incrusted Quarries, Stoneware Mosaics, Faïences and
Architectural Stoneware. By LEON LOUVRE. With Five Plates. 950
Illustrations in the Text, and numerous estimates. 500 pp., royal 8vo. 1900.
Translated from the French by K. H. BIRD, M.A., and W. MOORE BINNS.
Price 15s.; India and Colonies, 16s.; Other Countries, 17s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I. Plain Undecorated Pottery.—Chapter I., Clays: § 1, Classification,
General Geological Remarks.—Classification, Origin, Locality; § 2,
The Pastes, Bodies or Ceramic Articles Capable of being Decorated by
Vitrifiable Colours—The Chemical Preparation of Vitrifiable Colours—
Composition and Preparation of Vitrifiable Colours—The Oxides—
Preparation of Oxides—Preparation of Chromates—Preparation of other
Colours—Composition and Preparation of Fluxes—Muffle Colours—
Recipes for Colours—Use of Metals—Lustres—Preparation and
Application of Colours—Composition of Coloured Pastes—Underglaze
Colours—Colours in the Glaze—Overglaze Colours—Painting in
Vitrifiable Colours—Gilding—Burnishing—Printing—Enlarging and
Reducing Gelatine Prints—Muffle Kilns for Vitrifiable Colours—Influence
of the Material on the Colour—Changes Resulting from the Actions of the
Fire—Alterations Resulting from the Colours—Alterations in Firing.
HOW TO ANALYSE CLAY. Practical Methods for Practical Men. By
HOLDEN M. ASHBY, Professor of Organic Chemistry, Harvey Medical
College, U.S.A. Twenty Illustrations. 1898. Price 2s. 6d.; Abroad, 3s.;
strictly net.
Contents.
List of Apparatus—List of Atomic Weights—Use of Balance, and Burette,
Sand Bath, and Water Bath—Dessicator—Drying Oven—Filtering—Fusion
—Determination of Water, Organic Matter, Iron, Calcium, Alkalies,
Limestone, Silica, Alumina, Magnesium, etc.—Mechanical Analysis—
Rational Analysis—Standard Solutions—Volumetric Analysis—Standards
for Clay Analysis—Sampling.
ARCHITECTURAL POTTERY. Bricks, Tiles, Pipes, Enamelled Terra-
cottas, Ordinary and Incrusted Quarries, Stoneware Mosaics, Faïences and
Architectural Stoneware. By LEON LOUVRE. With Five Plates. 950
Illustrations in the Text, and numerous estimates. 500 pp., royal 8vo. 1900.
Translated from the French by K. H. BIRD, M.A., and W. MOORE BINNS.
Price 15s.; India and Colonies, 16s.; Other Countries, 17s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I. Plain Undecorated Pottery.—Chapter I., Clays: § 1, Classification,
General Geological Remarks.—Classification, Origin, Locality; § 2,
Page 345
General Properties and Composition: Physical Properties, Contraction,
Analysis, Influence of Various Substances on the Properties of Clays; § 3,
Working of Clay-Pits—I. Open Pits: Extraction, Transport, Cost—II.
Underground Pits—Mining Laws. Chapter II., Preparation of the Clay:
Weathering, Mixing, Cleaning, Crushing and Pulverising—Crushing
Cylinders and Mills, Pounding Machines—Damping: Damping Machines—
Soaking, Shortening, Pugging: Horse and Steam Pug-Mills, Rolling
Cylinders—Particulars of the Above Machines. Chapter III., Bricks: § 1,
Manufacture—(1) Hand and Machine Moulding,—I. Machines Working by
Compression: on Soft Clay, on Semi-Firm Clay, on Firm Clay, on Dry Clay.
—II. Expression Machines: with Cylindrical Propellers, with Screw
Propellers—Dies—Cutting-tables—Particulars of the Above Machines—
General Remarks on the Choice of Machines—Types of Installations—
Estimates—Plenishing, Hand and Steam Presses, Particulars—(2) Drying,
by Exposure to Air, Without Shelter, and Under Sheds—Drying-rooms in
Tiers, Closed Drying-rooms, in Tunnels, in Galleries—Detailed Estimates
of the Various Drying-rooms, Comparison of Prices—Transport from the
Machines to the Drying-rooms, Barrows, Trucks, Plain or with Shelves,
Lifts—(3) Firing—I. In Clamps—II. In Intermittent Kilns. A, Open: a,
using Wood; b Coal; b´, in Clamps; b´´, Flame—B, Closed: c, Direct Flame;
c´, Rectangular; c´´, Round; d, Reverberatory—III. Continuous Kilns: C,
with Solid Fuel: Round Kiln, Rectangular Kiln, Chimneys (Plans and
Estimates)—D, With Gas Fuel, Fillard Kiln (Plans and Estimates),
Schneider Kiln (Plans and Estimates), Water-gas Kiln—Heat Production of
the Kilns; § 2, Dimensions, Shapes, Colours, Decoration, and Quality of
Bricks—Hollow Bricks, Dimensions and Prices of Bricks, Various Shapes,
Qualities—Various Hollow Bricks, Dimensions, Resistance, Qualities; § 3,
Applications —History—Asia, Africa, America, Europe: Greek, Roman,
Byzantine, Turkish, Romanesque, Gothic, Renaissance, Architecture—
Architecture of the Nineteenth Century: in Germany, England, Belgium,
Spain, Holland, France, America—Use of Bricks—Walls, Arches,
Pavements, Flues, Cornices—Facing with Coloured Bricks—Balustrades.
Chapter IV., Tiles: § 1, History; § 2, Manufacture—(1) Moulding, by Hand,
by Machinery: Preparation of the Clay, Soft Paste, Firm Paste, Hard Paste
—Preparation of the Slabs, Transformation into Flat Tiles, into Jointed Tiles
—Screw, Cam and Revolver Presses—Particulars of Tile-presses—(2)
Drying—Planchettes, Shelves, Drying-barrows and Trucks—(3) Firing—
Analysis, Influence of Various Substances on the Properties of Clays; § 3,
Working of Clay-Pits—I. Open Pits: Extraction, Transport, Cost—II.
Underground Pits—Mining Laws. Chapter II., Preparation of the Clay:
Weathering, Mixing, Cleaning, Crushing and Pulverising—Crushing
Cylinders and Mills, Pounding Machines—Damping: Damping Machines—
Soaking, Shortening, Pugging: Horse and Steam Pug-Mills, Rolling
Cylinders—Particulars of the Above Machines. Chapter III., Bricks: § 1,
Manufacture—(1) Hand and Machine Moulding,—I. Machines Working by
Compression: on Soft Clay, on Semi-Firm Clay, on Firm Clay, on Dry Clay.
—II. Expression Machines: with Cylindrical Propellers, with Screw
Propellers—Dies—Cutting-tables—Particulars of the Above Machines—
General Remarks on the Choice of Machines—Types of Installations—
Estimates—Plenishing, Hand and Steam Presses, Particulars—(2) Drying,
by Exposure to Air, Without Shelter, and Under Sheds—Drying-rooms in
Tiers, Closed Drying-rooms, in Tunnels, in Galleries—Detailed Estimates
of the Various Drying-rooms, Comparison of Prices—Transport from the
Machines to the Drying-rooms, Barrows, Trucks, Plain or with Shelves,
Lifts—(3) Firing—I. In Clamps—II. In Intermittent Kilns. A, Open: a,
using Wood; b Coal; b´, in Clamps; b´´, Flame—B, Closed: c, Direct Flame;
c´, Rectangular; c´´, Round; d, Reverberatory—III. Continuous Kilns: C,
with Solid Fuel: Round Kiln, Rectangular Kiln, Chimneys (Plans and
Estimates)—D, With Gas Fuel, Fillard Kiln (Plans and Estimates),
Schneider Kiln (Plans and Estimates), Water-gas Kiln—Heat Production of
the Kilns; § 2, Dimensions, Shapes, Colours, Decoration, and Quality of
Bricks—Hollow Bricks, Dimensions and Prices of Bricks, Various Shapes,
Qualities—Various Hollow Bricks, Dimensions, Resistance, Qualities; § 3,
Applications —History—Asia, Africa, America, Europe: Greek, Roman,
Byzantine, Turkish, Romanesque, Gothic, Renaissance, Architecture—
Architecture of the Nineteenth Century: in Germany, England, Belgium,
Spain, Holland, France, America—Use of Bricks—Walls, Arches,
Pavements, Flues, Cornices—Facing with Coloured Bricks—Balustrades.
Chapter IV., Tiles: § 1, History; § 2, Manufacture—(1) Moulding, by Hand,
by Machinery: Preparation of the Clay, Soft Paste, Firm Paste, Hard Paste
—Preparation of the Slabs, Transformation into Flat Tiles, into Jointed Tiles
—Screw, Cam and Revolver Presses—Particulars of Tile-presses—(2)
Drying—Planchettes, Shelves, Drying-barrows and Trucks—(3) Firing—
Page 346
Divided Kilns—Installation of Mechanical Tileworks—Estimates; § 3,
Shapes, Dimensions and Uses of the Principal Types of Tile—Ancient
Tiles: Flat, Round, Roman, Flemish—Modern Tiles—With Vertical
Interrupted Join: Gilardoni's, Martin's; Hooked, Boulet's Villa; with Vertical
Continuous Join: Muller's, Alsace, Pantile—Foreign Tiles—Special Tiles—
Ridge Tiles, Coping Tiles, Border Tiles, Frontons, Gutters, Antefixes,
Membron, Angular—Roofing Accessories: Chimney-pots, Mitrons,
Lanterns, Chimneys—Qualities of Tiles—Black Tiles—Stoneware Tiles—
Particulars of Tiles. Chapter V., Pipes: I. Conduit Pipes—Manufacture—
Moulding: Horizontal Machines, Vertical Machines, Worked by Hand and
Steam—Particulars of these Machines—Drying—Firing—II. Chimney
Flues—Ventiducts and "Boisseaux," "Waggons"—Particulars of these
Products. Chapter VI., Quarries: 1, Plain Quarries of Ordinary Clay; 2, of
Cleaned Clay—Machines, Cutting, Mixing, Polishing—Drying and Firing
—Applications—Particulars of Quarries. Chapter VII., Terra-cotta: History
—Manufacture—Application: Balustrades, Columns, Pilasters, Capitals,
Friezes, Frontons, Medallions, Panels, Rose-windows, Ceilings—
Appendix: Official Methods of Testing Terra-cottas.
Part II. Made-up or Decorated Pottery.—Chapter I., General Remarks on
the Decoration of Pottery: Dips—Glazes: Composition, Colouring,
Preparation, Harmony with Pastes—Special Processes of Decoration—
Enamels, Opaque, Transparent, Colours, Underglaze, Over-glaze—Other
Processes: Crackling, Mottled, Flashing, Metallic Iridescence, Lustres.
Chapter II., Glazed and Enamelled Bricks—History: Glazing—Enamelling
—Applications: Ordinary Enamelled Bricks, Glazed Stoneware, Enamelled
Stoneware—Enamelled Tiles. Chapter III., Decorated Quarries: I. Paving
Quarries—1, Decorated with Dips—2, Stoneware: A, Fired to Stoneware: a,
of Slag Base—Applications; b, of Melting Clay—Applications—B, Plain or
Incrusted Stoneware; a, of Special Clay (Stoke-on-Trent)—Manufacture—
Application—b, of Felspar Base—Colouring, Manufacture, Moulding,
Drying, Firing—Applications.—II. Facing Quarries—1, in Faience—A, of
Limestone Paste—B, of Silicious Paste—C, of Felspar Paste—
Manufacture, Firing—2, of Glazed Stoneware—3, of Porcelain—
Applications of Facing Quarries.—III. Stove Quarries—Preparation of the
Pastes, Moulding, Firing, Enamelling, Decoration—Applications—
Faiences for Fireplaces. Chapter IV., Architectural Decorated Pottery: § 1,
Shapes, Dimensions and Uses of the Principal Types of Tile—Ancient
Tiles: Flat, Round, Roman, Flemish—Modern Tiles—With Vertical
Interrupted Join: Gilardoni's, Martin's; Hooked, Boulet's Villa; with Vertical
Continuous Join: Muller's, Alsace, Pantile—Foreign Tiles—Special Tiles—
Ridge Tiles, Coping Tiles, Border Tiles, Frontons, Gutters, Antefixes,
Membron, Angular—Roofing Accessories: Chimney-pots, Mitrons,
Lanterns, Chimneys—Qualities of Tiles—Black Tiles—Stoneware Tiles—
Particulars of Tiles. Chapter V., Pipes: I. Conduit Pipes—Manufacture—
Moulding: Horizontal Machines, Vertical Machines, Worked by Hand and
Steam—Particulars of these Machines—Drying—Firing—II. Chimney
Flues—Ventiducts and "Boisseaux," "Waggons"—Particulars of these
Products. Chapter VI., Quarries: 1, Plain Quarries of Ordinary Clay; 2, of
Cleaned Clay—Machines, Cutting, Mixing, Polishing—Drying and Firing
—Applications—Particulars of Quarries. Chapter VII., Terra-cotta: History
—Manufacture—Application: Balustrades, Columns, Pilasters, Capitals,
Friezes, Frontons, Medallions, Panels, Rose-windows, Ceilings—
Appendix: Official Methods of Testing Terra-cottas.
Part II. Made-up or Decorated Pottery.—Chapter I., General Remarks on
the Decoration of Pottery: Dips—Glazes: Composition, Colouring,
Preparation, Harmony with Pastes—Special Processes of Decoration—
Enamels, Opaque, Transparent, Colours, Underglaze, Over-glaze—Other
Processes: Crackling, Mottled, Flashing, Metallic Iridescence, Lustres.
Chapter II., Glazed and Enamelled Bricks—History: Glazing—Enamelling
—Applications: Ordinary Enamelled Bricks, Glazed Stoneware, Enamelled
Stoneware—Enamelled Tiles. Chapter III., Decorated Quarries: I. Paving
Quarries—1, Decorated with Dips—2, Stoneware: A, Fired to Stoneware: a,
of Slag Base—Applications; b, of Melting Clay—Applications—B, Plain or
Incrusted Stoneware; a, of Special Clay (Stoke-on-Trent)—Manufacture—
Application—b, of Felspar Base—Colouring, Manufacture, Moulding,
Drying, Firing—Applications.—II. Facing Quarries—1, in Faience—A, of
Limestone Paste—B, of Silicious Paste—C, of Felspar Paste—
Manufacture, Firing—2, of Glazed Stoneware—3, of Porcelain—
Applications of Facing Quarries.—III. Stove Quarries—Preparation of the
Pastes, Moulding, Firing, Enamelling, Decoration—Applications—
Faiences for Fireplaces. Chapter IV., Architectural Decorated Pottery: § 1,
Page 347
Faiences; § 2, Stoneware; § 3, Porcelain. Chapter V., Sanitary Pottery:
Stoneware Pipes: Manufacture, Firing—Applications—Sinks—
Applications—Urinals, Seats and Pans—Applications—Drinking-fountains,
Washstands. Index.
Stoneware Pipes: Manufacture, Firing—Applications—Sinks—
Applications—Urinals, Seats and Pans—Applications—Drinking-fountains,
Washstands. Index.
Page 348
A TREATISE ON THE CERAMIC
INDUSTRIES.
A Complete Manual for Pottery, Tile and Brick Works. By EMILE
BOURRY, Ingénieur des Arts et Manufactures. Translated from the French
by WILTON P. RIX, Examiner in Pottery and Porcelain to the City and
Guilds of London Technical Institute, Pottery Instructor to the Hanley
School Board. Royal 8vo. 1901. Over 700 pp. Price 21s.; India and
Colonies, 22s.; Other Countries, 23s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I., General Pottery Methods. Chapters I., Definition and History.
Definitions and Classification of Ceramic Products—Historic Summary of
the Ceramic Art.—II., Raw Materials of Bodies. Clays: Pure Clay and
Natural Clays—Various Raw Materials: Analogous to Clay—
Agglomerative and Agglutinative—Opening—Fusible—Refractory—Trials
of Raw Materials.—III., Plastic Bodies. Properties and Composition—
Preparation of Raw Materials: Disaggregation—Purification—Preparation
of Bodies: By Plastic Method—By Dry Method—By Liquid Method.—IV.,
Formation. Processes of Formation: Throwing—Expression—Moulding by
Hand, on the Jolley, by Compression, by Slip Casting—Slapping—
Slipping.—V., Drying. Drying of Bodies—Processes of Drying: By
Evaporation—By Aeration—By Heating—By Ventilation—By Absorption.
—VI., Glazes. Composition and Properties—Raw Materials—Manufacture
and Application.—VII., Firing. Properties of the Bodies and Glazes during
Firing—Description of the Kilns—Working of the Kilns.—VIII.,
Decoration. Colouring Materials—Processes of Decoration.
Part II., Special Pottery Methods. Chapters IX., Terra Cottas.
Classification: Plain Ordinary, Hollow, Ornamental, Vitrified, and Light
Bricks—Ordinary and Black Tiles—Paving Tiles—Pipes—Architectural
Terra Cottas—Vases, Statues and Decorative Objects—Common Pottery—
Pottery for Water and Filters—Tobacco Pipes—Lustre Ware—Properties
and Tests for Terra Cottas.—X., Fireclay Goods. Classification:
INDUSTRIES.
A Complete Manual for Pottery, Tile and Brick Works. By EMILE
BOURRY, Ingénieur des Arts et Manufactures. Translated from the French
by WILTON P. RIX, Examiner in Pottery and Porcelain to the City and
Guilds of London Technical Institute, Pottery Instructor to the Hanley
School Board. Royal 8vo. 1901. Over 700 pp. Price 21s.; India and
Colonies, 22s.; Other Countries, 23s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I., General Pottery Methods. Chapters I., Definition and History.
Definitions and Classification of Ceramic Products—Historic Summary of
the Ceramic Art.—II., Raw Materials of Bodies. Clays: Pure Clay and
Natural Clays—Various Raw Materials: Analogous to Clay—
Agglomerative and Agglutinative—Opening—Fusible—Refractory—Trials
of Raw Materials.—III., Plastic Bodies. Properties and Composition—
Preparation of Raw Materials: Disaggregation—Purification—Preparation
of Bodies: By Plastic Method—By Dry Method—By Liquid Method.—IV.,
Formation. Processes of Formation: Throwing—Expression—Moulding by
Hand, on the Jolley, by Compression, by Slip Casting—Slapping—
Slipping.—V., Drying. Drying of Bodies—Processes of Drying: By
Evaporation—By Aeration—By Heating—By Ventilation—By Absorption.
—VI., Glazes. Composition and Properties—Raw Materials—Manufacture
and Application.—VII., Firing. Properties of the Bodies and Glazes during
Firing—Description of the Kilns—Working of the Kilns.—VIII.,
Decoration. Colouring Materials—Processes of Decoration.
Part II., Special Pottery Methods. Chapters IX., Terra Cottas.
Classification: Plain Ordinary, Hollow, Ornamental, Vitrified, and Light
Bricks—Ordinary and Black Tiles—Paving Tiles—Pipes—Architectural
Terra Cottas—Vases, Statues and Decorative Objects—Common Pottery—
Pottery for Water and Filters—Tobacco Pipes—Lustre Ware—Properties
and Tests for Terra Cottas.—X., Fireclay Goods. Classification:
Page 349
Argillaceous, Aluminous, Carboniferous, Silicious and Basic Fireclay
Goods—Fireclay Mortar (Pug)—Tests for Fireclay Goods.—XI. Faiences.
Varnished Faiences—Enamelled Faiences—Silicious Faiences—Pipeclay
Faiences—Pebble Work—Feldspathic Faiences—Composition, Processes
of Manufacture and General Arrangements of Faience Potteries.—XII.,
Stoneware. Stoneware Properly So-called: Paving Tiles—Pipes—Sanitary
Ware—Stoneware for Food Purposes and Chemical Productions—
Architectural Stoneware—Vases, Statues and other Decorative Objects—
Fine Stoneware.—XIII., Porcelain. Hard Porcelain for Table Ware and
Decoration, for the Fire, for Electrical Conduits, for Mechanical Purposes;
Architectural Porcelain, and Dull or Biscuit Porcelain—Soft Phosphated or
English Porcelain—Soft Vitreous Porcelain, French and New Sevres—
Argillaceous Soft or Seger's Porcelain—Dull Soft or Parian Porcelain—
Dull Feldspathic Soft Porcelain.—Index.
THE ART OF RIVETING GLASS, CHINA AND EARTHENWARE.
By J. HOWARTH.
Second Edition. 1900. Price 1s. net; by post, home or abroad, 1s. 1d.
Contents.
Tools and Materials Required—Wire Used for Rivets—Soldering Solution
—Preparation for Drilling—Commencement of Drilling—Cementing—
Preliminaries to Riveting—Rivets to Make—To Fix the Rivets—Through-
and-through Rivets—Soldering—Tinning a Soldering-iron—Perforated
Plates, Handles, etc.—Handles of Ewers, etc.—Vases and Comports—
Marble and Alabaster Ware—Decorating—How to Loosen Fast Decanter
Stoppers—China Cements.
NOTES OF POTTERY CLAYS. Their Distribution, Properties, Uses and
Analyses of Ball Clays, China Clays and China Stone. By JAS. FAIRIE,
F.G.S. 1901. 132 pp. Crown 8vo. Price 3s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 4s.;
Other Countries, 4s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Definitions—Occurrence—Brick Clays—Fire Clays—Analyses of Fire
Clays.—Ball Clays—Properties—Analyses—Occurrence—Pipe Clay—
Black Clay—Brown Clay—Blue Clay—Dorsetshire and Devonshire Clays.
Goods—Fireclay Mortar (Pug)—Tests for Fireclay Goods.—XI. Faiences.
Varnished Faiences—Enamelled Faiences—Silicious Faiences—Pipeclay
Faiences—Pebble Work—Feldspathic Faiences—Composition, Processes
of Manufacture and General Arrangements of Faience Potteries.—XII.,
Stoneware. Stoneware Properly So-called: Paving Tiles—Pipes—Sanitary
Ware—Stoneware for Food Purposes and Chemical Productions—
Architectural Stoneware—Vases, Statues and other Decorative Objects—
Fine Stoneware.—XIII., Porcelain. Hard Porcelain for Table Ware and
Decoration, for the Fire, for Electrical Conduits, for Mechanical Purposes;
Architectural Porcelain, and Dull or Biscuit Porcelain—Soft Phosphated or
English Porcelain—Soft Vitreous Porcelain, French and New Sevres—
Argillaceous Soft or Seger's Porcelain—Dull Soft or Parian Porcelain—
Dull Feldspathic Soft Porcelain.—Index.
THE ART OF RIVETING GLASS, CHINA AND EARTHENWARE.
By J. HOWARTH.
Second Edition. 1900. Price 1s. net; by post, home or abroad, 1s. 1d.
Contents.
Tools and Materials Required—Wire Used for Rivets—Soldering Solution
—Preparation for Drilling—Commencement of Drilling—Cementing—
Preliminaries to Riveting—Rivets to Make—To Fix the Rivets—Through-
and-through Rivets—Soldering—Tinning a Soldering-iron—Perforated
Plates, Handles, etc.—Handles of Ewers, etc.—Vases and Comports—
Marble and Alabaster Ware—Decorating—How to Loosen Fast Decanter
Stoppers—China Cements.
NOTES OF POTTERY CLAYS. Their Distribution, Properties, Uses and
Analyses of Ball Clays, China Clays and China Stone. By JAS. FAIRIE,
F.G.S. 1901. 132 pp. Crown 8vo. Price 3s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 4s.;
Other Countries, 4s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Definitions—Occurrence—Brick Clays—Fire Clays—Analyses of Fire
Clays.—Ball Clays—Properties—Analyses—Occurrence—Pipe Clay—
Black Clay—Brown Clay—Blue Clay—Dorsetshire and Devonshire Clays.
Page 350
—China Clay or Kaolin—Occurrence—Chinese Kaolin—Cornish Clays—
Hensbarrow Granite—Properties, Analyses and Composition of China
Clays—Method of Obtaining China Clay—Experiments with Chinese
Kaolin—Analyses of Chinese and Japanese Clays and Bodies—Irish Clays.
—Chinese Stone—Composition—Occurrence—Analyses.—Index.
PAINTING ON GLASS AND PORCELAIN AND ENAMEL
PAINTING. A Complete Introduction to the Preparation of all the Colours
and Fluxes used for Painting on Porcelain, Enamel, Faience and Stoneware,
the Coloured Pastes and Coloured Glasses, together with a Minute
Description of the Firing of Colours and Enamels. On the Basis of Personal
Practical Experience of the Condition of the Art up to Date. By FELIX
HERMANN, Technical Chemist. With Eighteen Illustrations. 300 pp.
Translated from the German second and enlarged Edition. 1897. Price 10s.
6d.; India and Colonies, 11s.; Other Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
History of Glass Painting.—Chapters I., The Articles to be Painted: Glass,
Porcelain, Enamel, Stoneware, Faience.—II., Pigments: 1, Metallic
Pigments: Antimony Oxide, Naples Yellow, Barium Chromate, Lead
Chromate, Silver Chloride, Chromic Oxide.—III., Fluxes: Fluxes, Felspar,
Quartz, Purifying Quartz, Sedimentation, Quenching, Borax, Boracic Acid,
Potassium and Sodium Carbonates, Rocaille Flux.—IV., Preparation of the
Colours for Glass Painting.—V., The Colour Pastes.—VI., The Coloured
Glasses.—VII., Composition of the Porcelain Colours.—VIII., The Enamel
Colours: Enamels for Artistic Work.—IX., Metallic Ornamentation:
Porcelain Gilding, Glass Gilding.—X., Firing the Colours: 1, Remarks on
Firing: Firing Colours on Glass. Firing Colours on Porcelain; 2, The Muffle.
—XI., Accidents occasionally Supervening during the Process of Firing.—
XII., Remarks on the Different Methods of Painting on Glass, Porcelain,
etc.—Appendix: Cleaning Old Glass Paintings.
Press Opinions.
"Mr. Hermann, by a careful division of his subject, avoids much
repetition, yet makes sufficiently clear what is necessary to be known
in each art. He gives very many formulæ; and his hints on the various
Hensbarrow Granite—Properties, Analyses and Composition of China
Clays—Method of Obtaining China Clay—Experiments with Chinese
Kaolin—Analyses of Chinese and Japanese Clays and Bodies—Irish Clays.
—Chinese Stone—Composition—Occurrence—Analyses.—Index.
PAINTING ON GLASS AND PORCELAIN AND ENAMEL
PAINTING. A Complete Introduction to the Preparation of all the Colours
and Fluxes used for Painting on Porcelain, Enamel, Faience and Stoneware,
the Coloured Pastes and Coloured Glasses, together with a Minute
Description of the Firing of Colours and Enamels. On the Basis of Personal
Practical Experience of the Condition of the Art up to Date. By FELIX
HERMANN, Technical Chemist. With Eighteen Illustrations. 300 pp.
Translated from the German second and enlarged Edition. 1897. Price 10s.
6d.; India and Colonies, 11s.; Other Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
History of Glass Painting.—Chapters I., The Articles to be Painted: Glass,
Porcelain, Enamel, Stoneware, Faience.—II., Pigments: 1, Metallic
Pigments: Antimony Oxide, Naples Yellow, Barium Chromate, Lead
Chromate, Silver Chloride, Chromic Oxide.—III., Fluxes: Fluxes, Felspar,
Quartz, Purifying Quartz, Sedimentation, Quenching, Borax, Boracic Acid,
Potassium and Sodium Carbonates, Rocaille Flux.—IV., Preparation of the
Colours for Glass Painting.—V., The Colour Pastes.—VI., The Coloured
Glasses.—VII., Composition of the Porcelain Colours.—VIII., The Enamel
Colours: Enamels for Artistic Work.—IX., Metallic Ornamentation:
Porcelain Gilding, Glass Gilding.—X., Firing the Colours: 1, Remarks on
Firing: Firing Colours on Glass. Firing Colours on Porcelain; 2, The Muffle.
—XI., Accidents occasionally Supervening during the Process of Firing.—
XII., Remarks on the Different Methods of Painting on Glass, Porcelain,
etc.—Appendix: Cleaning Old Glass Paintings.
Press Opinions.
"Mr. Hermann, by a careful division of his subject, avoids much
repetition, yet makes sufficiently clear what is necessary to be known
in each art. He gives very many formulæ; and his hints on the various
Page 351
applications of metals and metallic lustres to glass and porcelains will
be found of much interest to the amateur."—Art Amateur, New York.
"For the unskilled and amateurs the name of the publishers will be
sufficient guarantee for the utility and excellence of Mr. Hermann's
work, even if they are already unacquainted with the author.... The
whole cannot fail to be both of service and interest to glass workers
and to potters generally, especially those employed upon high-class
work."—Staffordshire Sentinel.
"In Painting on Glass and Porcelain the author has dealt very
exhaustively with the technical as distinguished from the artistic side
of his subject, the work being entirely devoted to the preparation of the
colours, their application and firing. For manufacturers and students it
will be a valuable work, and the recipes which appear on almost every
page form a very valuable feature. The author has gained much of his
experience in the celebrated Sevres manufactory, a fact which adds a
good deal of authority to the work."—Builders Journal.
"The compiler displays that painstaking research characteristic of his
nation, and goes at length into the question of the chemical
constitution of the pigments and fluxes to be used in glass-painting,
proceeding afterwards to a description of the methods of producing
coloured glass of all tints and shades.... Very careful instructions are
given for the chemical and mechanical preparation of the colours used
in glass-staining and porcelain-painting; indeed, to the china painter
such a book as this should be of permanent value, as the author claims
to have tested and verified every recipe he includes, and the volume
also comprises a section devoted to enamels both opaque and
translucent, and another treating of the firing of porcelain, and the
accidents that occasionally supervene in the furnace."—Daily
Chronicle.
A reissue of
THE HISTORY OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE POTTERIES; AND THE
RISE AND PROGRESS OF THE MANUFACTURE OF POTTERY
AND PORCELAIN.
be found of much interest to the amateur."—Art Amateur, New York.
"For the unskilled and amateurs the name of the publishers will be
sufficient guarantee for the utility and excellence of Mr. Hermann's
work, even if they are already unacquainted with the author.... The
whole cannot fail to be both of service and interest to glass workers
and to potters generally, especially those employed upon high-class
work."—Staffordshire Sentinel.
"In Painting on Glass and Porcelain the author has dealt very
exhaustively with the technical as distinguished from the artistic side
of his subject, the work being entirely devoted to the preparation of the
colours, their application and firing. For manufacturers and students it
will be a valuable work, and the recipes which appear on almost every
page form a very valuable feature. The author has gained much of his
experience in the celebrated Sevres manufactory, a fact which adds a
good deal of authority to the work."—Builders Journal.
"The compiler displays that painstaking research characteristic of his
nation, and goes at length into the question of the chemical
constitution of the pigments and fluxes to be used in glass-painting,
proceeding afterwards to a description of the methods of producing
coloured glass of all tints and shades.... Very careful instructions are
given for the chemical and mechanical preparation of the colours used
in glass-staining and porcelain-painting; indeed, to the china painter
such a book as this should be of permanent value, as the author claims
to have tested and verified every recipe he includes, and the volume
also comprises a section devoted to enamels both opaque and
translucent, and another treating of the firing of porcelain, and the
accidents that occasionally supervene in the furnace."—Daily
Chronicle.
A reissue of
THE HISTORY OF THE STAFFORDSHIRE POTTERIES; AND THE
RISE AND PROGRESS OF THE MANUFACTURE OF POTTERY
AND PORCELAIN.
Page 352
With References to Genuine Specimens, and Notices of Eminent Potters.
By SIMEON SHAW. (Originally Published in 1829.) 265 pp. 1900. Demy
8vo. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly
net.
Contents.
Introductory Chapter showing the position of the Pottery Trade at the
present time (1899).—Chapters I., Preliminary Remarks.—II., The
Potteries, comprising Tunstall, Brownhills, Greenfield and New Field,
Golden Hill, Latebrook, Green Lane, Burslem, Longport and Dale Hall, Hot
Lane and Cobridge, Hanley and Shelton, Etruria, Stoke, Penkhull, Fenton,
Lane Delph, Foley, Lane End.—III., On the Origin of the Art, and its
Practice among the early Nations.—IV., Manufacture of Pottery, prior to
1700.—V., The Introduction of Red Porcelain by Messrs. Elers, of
Bradwell, 1690.—VI., Progress of the Manufacture from 1700 to Mr.
Wedgwood's commencement in 1760.—VII. Introduction of Fluid Glaze.
—Extension of the Manufacture of Cream Colour.—Mr. Wedgwood's
Queen's Ware.—Jasper, and Appointment of Potter to Her Majesty.—Black
Printing.—VIII., Introduction of Porcelain. Mr. W. Littler's Porcelain.—
Mr. Cookworthy's Discovery of Kaolin and Petuntse, and Patent.—Sold to
Mr. Champion—resold to the New Hall Com.—Extension of Term.—IX.,
Blue Printed Pottery. Mr. Turner, Mr. Spode (1), Mr. Baddeley, Mr. Spode
(2), Messrs. Turner, Mr. Wood, Mr. Wilson, Mr. Minton.—Great Change in
Patterns of Blue Printed.—X., Introduction of Lustre Pottery.
Improvements in Pottery and Porcelain subsequent to 1800.
Press Opinions.
"There is much curious and useful information in the work, and the
publishers have rendered the public a service in reissuing it."—Burton
Mail.
"Copies of the original work are now of considerable value, and the
facsimile reprint now issued cannot but prove of considerable interest
to all interested in the great industry."—Derby Mercury.
"The book will be especially welcomed at a time when interest in the
art of pottery manufacture commands a more widespread and general
By SIMEON SHAW. (Originally Published in 1829.) 265 pp. 1900. Demy
8vo. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly
net.
Contents.
Introductory Chapter showing the position of the Pottery Trade at the
present time (1899).—Chapters I., Preliminary Remarks.—II., The
Potteries, comprising Tunstall, Brownhills, Greenfield and New Field,
Golden Hill, Latebrook, Green Lane, Burslem, Longport and Dale Hall, Hot
Lane and Cobridge, Hanley and Shelton, Etruria, Stoke, Penkhull, Fenton,
Lane Delph, Foley, Lane End.—III., On the Origin of the Art, and its
Practice among the early Nations.—IV., Manufacture of Pottery, prior to
1700.—V., The Introduction of Red Porcelain by Messrs. Elers, of
Bradwell, 1690.—VI., Progress of the Manufacture from 1700 to Mr.
Wedgwood's commencement in 1760.—VII. Introduction of Fluid Glaze.
—Extension of the Manufacture of Cream Colour.—Mr. Wedgwood's
Queen's Ware.—Jasper, and Appointment of Potter to Her Majesty.—Black
Printing.—VIII., Introduction of Porcelain. Mr. W. Littler's Porcelain.—
Mr. Cookworthy's Discovery of Kaolin and Petuntse, and Patent.—Sold to
Mr. Champion—resold to the New Hall Com.—Extension of Term.—IX.,
Blue Printed Pottery. Mr. Turner, Mr. Spode (1), Mr. Baddeley, Mr. Spode
(2), Messrs. Turner, Mr. Wood, Mr. Wilson, Mr. Minton.—Great Change in
Patterns of Blue Printed.—X., Introduction of Lustre Pottery.
Improvements in Pottery and Porcelain subsequent to 1800.
Press Opinions.
"There is much curious and useful information in the work, and the
publishers have rendered the public a service in reissuing it."—Burton
Mail.
"Copies of the original work are now of considerable value, and the
facsimile reprint now issued cannot but prove of considerable interest
to all interested in the great industry."—Derby Mercury.
"The book will be especially welcomed at a time when interest in the
art of pottery manufacture commands a more widespread and general
Page 353
interest than at any previous time."—Wolverhampton Chronicle.
"This work is all the more valuable because it gives one an idea of the
condition of affairs existing in the north of Staffordshire before the
great increase in work and population due to modern
developments."—Western Morning News.
"The History gives a graphic picture of North Staffordshire at the end
of the last and the beginning of the present century, and states that in
1829 there was 'a busy and enterprising community' in the Potteries of
fifty thousand persons.... We commend it to our readers as a most
entertaining and instructive publication,"—Staffordshire Sentinel.
A Reissue of
THE CHEMISTRY OF THE SEVERAL NATURAL AND
ARTIFICIAL HETEROGENEOUS COMPOUNDS USED IN
MANUFACTURING PORCELAIN, GLASS AND POTTERY.
By SIMEON SHAW.
(Originally published in 1837.) 750 pp. 1900. Royal 8vo. Price 14s.; India
and Colonies, 15s.; Other Countries, 16s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
PART I., ANALYSIS AND MATERIALS.—Chapters I., Introduction:
Laboratory and Apparatus; Elements: Combinative Potencies,
Manipulative Processes for Analysis and Reagents, Pulverisation, Blow-
pipe Analysis, Humid Analysis, Preparatory Manipulations, General
Analytic Processes, Compounds Soluble in Water, Compounds Soluble only
in Acids, Compounds (Mixed) Soluble in Water, Compounds (Mixed)
Soluble in Acids, Compounds (Mixed) Insoluble, Particular Analytic
Processes.—II., Temperature: Coal, Steam Heat for Printers' Stoves.—III.,
Acids and Alkalies: Boracic Acid, Muriatic Acid, Nitric Acid, Sulphuric
Acid, Potash, Soda, Lithia, Calculation of Chemical Separations.—IV., The
Earths: Alumine, Clays, Silica, Flint, Lime, Plaster of Paris, Magnesia,
Barytes, Felspar, Grauen (or China Stone), China Clay, Chert.—V., Metals:
Reciprocal Combinative Potencies of the Metals, Antimony, Arsenic,
Chromium, Green Oxide, Cobalt, Chromic Acid, Humid Separation of
"This work is all the more valuable because it gives one an idea of the
condition of affairs existing in the north of Staffordshire before the
great increase in work and population due to modern
developments."—Western Morning News.
"The History gives a graphic picture of North Staffordshire at the end
of the last and the beginning of the present century, and states that in
1829 there was 'a busy and enterprising community' in the Potteries of
fifty thousand persons.... We commend it to our readers as a most
entertaining and instructive publication,"—Staffordshire Sentinel.
A Reissue of
THE CHEMISTRY OF THE SEVERAL NATURAL AND
ARTIFICIAL HETEROGENEOUS COMPOUNDS USED IN
MANUFACTURING PORCELAIN, GLASS AND POTTERY.
By SIMEON SHAW.
(Originally published in 1837.) 750 pp. 1900. Royal 8vo. Price 14s.; India
and Colonies, 15s.; Other Countries, 16s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
PART I., ANALYSIS AND MATERIALS.—Chapters I., Introduction:
Laboratory and Apparatus; Elements: Combinative Potencies,
Manipulative Processes for Analysis and Reagents, Pulverisation, Blow-
pipe Analysis, Humid Analysis, Preparatory Manipulations, General
Analytic Processes, Compounds Soluble in Water, Compounds Soluble only
in Acids, Compounds (Mixed) Soluble in Water, Compounds (Mixed)
Soluble in Acids, Compounds (Mixed) Insoluble, Particular Analytic
Processes.—II., Temperature: Coal, Steam Heat for Printers' Stoves.—III.,
Acids and Alkalies: Boracic Acid, Muriatic Acid, Nitric Acid, Sulphuric
Acid, Potash, Soda, Lithia, Calculation of Chemical Separations.—IV., The
Earths: Alumine, Clays, Silica, Flint, Lime, Plaster of Paris, Magnesia,
Barytes, Felspar, Grauen (or China Stone), China Clay, Chert.—V., Metals:
Reciprocal Combinative Potencies of the Metals, Antimony, Arsenic,
Chromium, Green Oxide, Cobalt, Chromic Acid, Humid Separation of
Page 354
Nickel from Cobalt, Arsenite of Cobalt, Copper, Gold, Iron, Lead,
Manganese, Platinum, Silver, Tin, Zinc.
PART II., SYNTHESIS AND COMPOUNDS.—Chapters I., Sketch of the
Origin and Progress of the Art.—II., Science of Mixing: Scientific
Principles of the Manufacture, Combinative Potencies of the Earths.—III.,
Bodies: Porcelain—Hard, Porcelain—Fritted Bodies, Porcelain—Raw
Bodies, Porcelain—Soft, Fritted Bodies, Raw Bodies, Stone Bodies,
Ironstone, Dry Bodies, Chemical Utensils, Fritted Jasper, Fritted Pearl,
Fritted Drab, Raw Chemical Utensils, Raw Stone, Raw Jasper, Raw Pearl,
Raw Mortar, Raw Drab, Raw Brown, Raw Fawn, Raw Cane, Raw Red
Porous, Raw Egyptian, Earthenware, Queen's Ware, Cream Colour, Blue
and Fancy Printed, Dipped and Mocha, Chalky, Rings, Stilts, etc.—IV.,
Glazes: Porcelain—Hard Fritted, Porcelain—Soft Fritted, Porcelain—Soft
Raw, Cream Colour Porcelain, Blue Printed Porcelain, Fritted Glazes,
Analysis of Fritt, Analysis of Glaze, Coloured Glazes, Dips, Smears and
Washes: Glasses: Flint Glass, Coloured Glasses, Artificial Garnet, Artificial
Emerald, Artificial Amethyst, Artificial Sapphire, Artificial Opal, Plate
Glass, Crown Glass, Broad Glass, Bottle Glass, Phosphoric Glass, British
Steel Glass, Glass-Staining and Painting, Engraving on Glass, Dr. Faraday's
Experiments.—V., Colours: Colour Making, Fluxes or Solvents,
Components of the Colours: Reds, etc., from Gold, Carmine or Rose
Colour, Purple, Reds, etc., from Iron, Blues, Yellows, Greens, Blacks,
White, Silver for Burnishing, Gold for Burnishing, Printer's Oil, Lustres.
PART III., TABLES OF THE CHARACTERISTICS OF CHEMICAL
SUBSTANCES.—Preliminary Remarks, Oxygen (Tables), Sulphur and its
Compounds, Nitrogen ditto, Chlorine ditto, Bromine ditto, Iodine ditto,
Fluorine ditto, Phosphorous ditto, Boron ditto, Carbon ditto, Hydrogen
ditto, Observations, Ammonium and its Compounds (Tables), Thorium
ditto, Zirconium ditto, Aluminium ditto, Yttrium ditto, Glucinum ditto,
Magnesium ditto, Calcium ditto, Strontium ditto, Barium ditto, Lithium
ditto, Sodium and its Compounds Potassium ditto, Observations, Selenium
and its Compounds (Tables), Arsenic ditto, Chromium ditto, Vanadium
ditto, Molybdenum ditto, Tungsten ditto, Antimony ditto, Tellurium ditto,
Tantalum ditto, Titanium ditto, Silicium ditto, Osmium ditto, Gold ditto,
Iridium ditto, Rhodium ditto, Platinum ditto, Palladium ditto, Mercury ditto,
Silver ditto, Copper ditto, Uranium ditto, Bismuth and its Compounds, Tin
Manganese, Platinum, Silver, Tin, Zinc.
PART II., SYNTHESIS AND COMPOUNDS.—Chapters I., Sketch of the
Origin and Progress of the Art.—II., Science of Mixing: Scientific
Principles of the Manufacture, Combinative Potencies of the Earths.—III.,
Bodies: Porcelain—Hard, Porcelain—Fritted Bodies, Porcelain—Raw
Bodies, Porcelain—Soft, Fritted Bodies, Raw Bodies, Stone Bodies,
Ironstone, Dry Bodies, Chemical Utensils, Fritted Jasper, Fritted Pearl,
Fritted Drab, Raw Chemical Utensils, Raw Stone, Raw Jasper, Raw Pearl,
Raw Mortar, Raw Drab, Raw Brown, Raw Fawn, Raw Cane, Raw Red
Porous, Raw Egyptian, Earthenware, Queen's Ware, Cream Colour, Blue
and Fancy Printed, Dipped and Mocha, Chalky, Rings, Stilts, etc.—IV.,
Glazes: Porcelain—Hard Fritted, Porcelain—Soft Fritted, Porcelain—Soft
Raw, Cream Colour Porcelain, Blue Printed Porcelain, Fritted Glazes,
Analysis of Fritt, Analysis of Glaze, Coloured Glazes, Dips, Smears and
Washes: Glasses: Flint Glass, Coloured Glasses, Artificial Garnet, Artificial
Emerald, Artificial Amethyst, Artificial Sapphire, Artificial Opal, Plate
Glass, Crown Glass, Broad Glass, Bottle Glass, Phosphoric Glass, British
Steel Glass, Glass-Staining and Painting, Engraving on Glass, Dr. Faraday's
Experiments.—V., Colours: Colour Making, Fluxes or Solvents,
Components of the Colours: Reds, etc., from Gold, Carmine or Rose
Colour, Purple, Reds, etc., from Iron, Blues, Yellows, Greens, Blacks,
White, Silver for Burnishing, Gold for Burnishing, Printer's Oil, Lustres.
PART III., TABLES OF THE CHARACTERISTICS OF CHEMICAL
SUBSTANCES.—Preliminary Remarks, Oxygen (Tables), Sulphur and its
Compounds, Nitrogen ditto, Chlorine ditto, Bromine ditto, Iodine ditto,
Fluorine ditto, Phosphorous ditto, Boron ditto, Carbon ditto, Hydrogen
ditto, Observations, Ammonium and its Compounds (Tables), Thorium
ditto, Zirconium ditto, Aluminium ditto, Yttrium ditto, Glucinum ditto,
Magnesium ditto, Calcium ditto, Strontium ditto, Barium ditto, Lithium
ditto, Sodium and its Compounds Potassium ditto, Observations, Selenium
and its Compounds (Tables), Arsenic ditto, Chromium ditto, Vanadium
ditto, Molybdenum ditto, Tungsten ditto, Antimony ditto, Tellurium ditto,
Tantalum ditto, Titanium ditto, Silicium ditto, Osmium ditto, Gold ditto,
Iridium ditto, Rhodium ditto, Platinum ditto, Palladium ditto, Mercury ditto,
Silver ditto, Copper ditto, Uranium ditto, Bismuth and its Compounds, Tin
Page 355
ditto, Lead ditto, Cerium ditto, Cobalt ditto, Nickel ditto, Iron ditto,
Cadmium ditto, Zinc ditto, Manganese ditto, Observations, Isomorphous
Groups, Isomeric ditto, Metameric ditto, Polymeric ditto, Index.
Press Opinions.
"This interesting volume has been kept from the pencil of the modern
editor and reprinted in its entirety by the enterprising publishers of The
Pottery Gazette and other trade journals.... There is an excellent
historical sketch of the origin and progress of the art of pottery which
shows the intimate knowledge of classical as well as (the then) modern
scientific literature possessed by the late Dr. Shaw; even the etymology
of many of the Staffordshire place-names is given."—Glasgow Herald.
"The historical sketch of the origin and progress of pottery is very
interesting and instructive. The science of mixing is a problem of great
importance, and the query how the natural products, alumina and silica
can be compounded to form the best wares may be solved by the aid of
chemistry instead of by guesses, as was formerly the case. This portion
of the book may be most suggestive to the manufacturer, as also the
chapters devoted to the subject of glazes, glasses and colours."—
Birmingham Post.
"Messrs. Scott, Greenwood & Co. are doing their best to place before
the pottery trades some really good books, likely to aid the
Staffordshire manufacturers, and their spirited enterprise is worthy of
encouragement, for the utility of technical literature bearing upon the
practical side of potting goes without saying.... They are to be
congratulated on their enterprise in republishing it, and we can only
hope that they will meet with the support they deserve. It seems to be a
volume that is worth looking through by both manufacturers and
operatives alike, and all local institutions, at any rate, should secure
copies."—Staffordshire Sentinel.
Cadmium ditto, Zinc ditto, Manganese ditto, Observations, Isomorphous
Groups, Isomeric ditto, Metameric ditto, Polymeric ditto, Index.
Press Opinions.
"This interesting volume has been kept from the pencil of the modern
editor and reprinted in its entirety by the enterprising publishers of The
Pottery Gazette and other trade journals.... There is an excellent
historical sketch of the origin and progress of the art of pottery which
shows the intimate knowledge of classical as well as (the then) modern
scientific literature possessed by the late Dr. Shaw; even the etymology
of many of the Staffordshire place-names is given."—Glasgow Herald.
"The historical sketch of the origin and progress of pottery is very
interesting and instructive. The science of mixing is a problem of great
importance, and the query how the natural products, alumina and silica
can be compounded to form the best wares may be solved by the aid of
chemistry instead of by guesses, as was formerly the case. This portion
of the book may be most suggestive to the manufacturer, as also the
chapters devoted to the subject of glazes, glasses and colours."—
Birmingham Post.
"Messrs. Scott, Greenwood & Co. are doing their best to place before
the pottery trades some really good books, likely to aid the
Staffordshire manufacturers, and their spirited enterprise is worthy of
encouragement, for the utility of technical literature bearing upon the
practical side of potting goes without saying.... They are to be
congratulated on their enterprise in republishing it, and we can only
hope that they will meet with the support they deserve. It seems to be a
volume that is worth looking through by both manufacturers and
operatives alike, and all local institutions, at any rate, should secure
copies."—Staffordshire Sentinel.
Page 356
Paper Making.
THE DYEING OF PAPER PULP. A Practical Treatise for the use of
Papermakers, Paperstainers. Students and others. By JULIUS ERFURT,
Manager of a Paper Mill. Translated into English and Edited with Additions
by JULIUS HÜBNER, F.C.S., Lecturer on Papermaking at the Manchester
Municipal Technical School. With Illustrations and 157 patterns of paper
dyed in the pulp. Royal 8vo, 180 pp. 1901. Price 15s.; India and Colonies,
16s.; Other Countries, 20s.; strictly net. Limited edition.
Contents.
I., Behaviour of the Paper Fibres during the Process of Dyeing, Theory
of the Mordant—Cotton: Flax and Hemp; Esparto; Jute; Straw Cellulose:
Chemical and Mechanical Wood Pulp; Mixed Fibres: Theory of Dyeing.—
II., Colour Fixing Mediums (Mordants)—Alum: Aluminium Sulphate;
Aluminium Acetate; Tin Crystals (Stannous Chloride); Copperas (Ferrous
Sulphate); Nitrate of Iron (Ferric Sulphate); Pyrolignite of Iron (Acetate of
Iron); Action of Tannic Acid; Importance of Materials containing Tannin;
Treatment with Tannic Acid of Paper Pulp intended for dyeing; Blue Stone
(Copper Sulphate): Potassium Bichromate: Sodium Bichromate; Chalk
(Calcium Carbonate); Soda Crystals (Sodium Carbonate): Antimony
Potassium Tartrate (Tartar Emetic).—III., Influence of the Quality of the
Water Used.—IV., Inorganic Colours—1. Artificial Mineral Colours: Iron
Buff; Manganese Bronze: Chrome Yellow (Chromate of Lead): Chrome
Orange (Basic Chromate of Lead): Red Lead; Chrome Green: Blue with
Yellow Prussiate: Prussian Blue: Method for Producing Prussian Blue free
from Acid: Ultramarine—2. Natural Mineral Colours (Earth Colours):
Yellow Earth Colours: Red Earth Colours; Brown Earth Colours; Green,
Grey and Black Earth Colours: White Earth Colours: White Clay (China
Clay): White Gypsum; Baryta: Magnesium Carbonate: Talc, Soapstone.—
V., Organic Colours—1. Colours of Vegetable and Animal Origin: (a)
Substantive (Direct Dyeing) Colouring Matters: Annatto; Turmeric:
Safflower; (b) Adjective (Indirect Dyeing) Colouring Matters: Redwood;
Cochineal; Weld: Persian Berries; Fustic Extract; Quercitron: Catechu
THE DYEING OF PAPER PULP. A Practical Treatise for the use of
Papermakers, Paperstainers. Students and others. By JULIUS ERFURT,
Manager of a Paper Mill. Translated into English and Edited with Additions
by JULIUS HÜBNER, F.C.S., Lecturer on Papermaking at the Manchester
Municipal Technical School. With Illustrations and 157 patterns of paper
dyed in the pulp. Royal 8vo, 180 pp. 1901. Price 15s.; India and Colonies,
16s.; Other Countries, 20s.; strictly net. Limited edition.
Contents.
I., Behaviour of the Paper Fibres during the Process of Dyeing, Theory
of the Mordant—Cotton: Flax and Hemp; Esparto; Jute; Straw Cellulose:
Chemical and Mechanical Wood Pulp; Mixed Fibres: Theory of Dyeing.—
II., Colour Fixing Mediums (Mordants)—Alum: Aluminium Sulphate;
Aluminium Acetate; Tin Crystals (Stannous Chloride); Copperas (Ferrous
Sulphate); Nitrate of Iron (Ferric Sulphate); Pyrolignite of Iron (Acetate of
Iron); Action of Tannic Acid; Importance of Materials containing Tannin;
Treatment with Tannic Acid of Paper Pulp intended for dyeing; Blue Stone
(Copper Sulphate): Potassium Bichromate: Sodium Bichromate; Chalk
(Calcium Carbonate); Soda Crystals (Sodium Carbonate): Antimony
Potassium Tartrate (Tartar Emetic).—III., Influence of the Quality of the
Water Used.—IV., Inorganic Colours—1. Artificial Mineral Colours: Iron
Buff; Manganese Bronze: Chrome Yellow (Chromate of Lead): Chrome
Orange (Basic Chromate of Lead): Red Lead; Chrome Green: Blue with
Yellow Prussiate: Prussian Blue: Method for Producing Prussian Blue free
from Acid: Ultramarine—2. Natural Mineral Colours (Earth Colours):
Yellow Earth Colours: Red Earth Colours; Brown Earth Colours; Green,
Grey and Black Earth Colours: White Earth Colours: White Clay (China
Clay): White Gypsum; Baryta: Magnesium Carbonate: Talc, Soapstone.—
V., Organic Colours—1. Colours of Vegetable and Animal Origin: (a)
Substantive (Direct Dyeing) Colouring Matters: Annatto; Turmeric:
Safflower; (b) Adjective (Indirect Dyeing) Colouring Matters: Redwood;
Cochineal; Weld: Persian Berries; Fustic Extract; Quercitron: Catechu
Page 357
(Cutch); Logwood Extract—2. Artificial Organic (Coal Tar) Colours: Acid
Colours; Basic Colours: Substantive (Direct Dyeing) Colours; Dissolving of
the Coal Tar Colours: Auramine O O; Naphthol Yellow S O; Quinoline
Yellow O: Metanil Yellow O: Paper Yellow O: Azoflavine RS O, S O;
Cotton Yellow G X X and R X X: Orange 11 O: Chrysoidine A O O, RL O
O: Vesuvine Extra O O; Vesuvine BC O O; Fast.
Brown O, Naphthylamine Brown O; Water Blue IN O; Water Blue TB O;
Victoria Blue B O O; Methylene Blue MD O O; Nile Blue R O O; New
Blue S O O; Indoine Blue BB O O; Eosine 442 Nx; Phloxine B B N;
Rhodamine B O O; Rhodamine 6G O O: Naphthylamine Red G O; Fast
Red A O; Cotton Scarlet O; Erythrine RR O; Erythrine X O; Erythrine P O;
Ponceau 2 R O; Fast Ponceau G O and B O; Paper Scarlet P O O;
Saffranine PP O O; Magenta Powder A O O; Acetate of Magenta O O;
Cerise D 10 O O; Methyl Violet BB O O; Crystal Violet O O; Acid Violet 3
BN O, 4 R O; Diamond Green B O O; Nigrosine WL O; Coal Black O O;
Brilliant Black B O.—VI., Practical Application of the Coal Tar Colours
according to their Properties and their Behaviour towards the Different
Paper Fibres—Coal Tar Colours, which rank foremost, as far as their
fastness to light is concerned; Colour Combinations with which colourless
or nearly colourless Backwater is obtained; Colours which do not bleed into
White Fibres, for Blotting and Copying Paper Pulp; Colours which produce
the best results on Mechanical Wood and on Unbleached Sulphite Wood;
Dyeing of Cotton, Jute and Wool Half-stuff for Mottling White or Light
Coloured Papers; Colours suitable for Cotton; Colours specially suitable for
Jute Dyeing; Colours suitable for Wool Fibres.—VII., Dyed Patterns on
Various Pulp Mixtures—Placard and Wrapping Papers; Black Wrapping
and Cartridge Papers; Blotting Papers; Mottled and Marbled Papers made
with Coloured Linen, Cotton and Union Rags, or with Cotton, Jute, Wool
and Sulphite Wood Fibres, dyed specially for this purpose; Mottling with
Dark Blue Linen; Mottling with Dark Blue Linen and Dark Blue Cotton;
Mottling with Dark Blue Cotton; Mottling with Dark Blue and Red Cotton;
Mottling with Dark Red Cotton; Mottling of Bleached Stuff, with 3 to 4 per
cent. of Dyed Cotton Fibres; Mottling with Dark Blue Union (Linen and
Wool or Cotton Warp with Wool Weft); Mottling with Blue Striped Red
Union; Mottling of Bleached Stuff with 3 to 4 per cent. of Dyed Wool
Fibres; Mottling of Bleached Stuff with 3 to 4 per cent. of Dyed Jute Fibres;
Colours; Basic Colours: Substantive (Direct Dyeing) Colours; Dissolving of
the Coal Tar Colours: Auramine O O; Naphthol Yellow S O; Quinoline
Yellow O: Metanil Yellow O: Paper Yellow O: Azoflavine RS O, S O;
Cotton Yellow G X X and R X X: Orange 11 O: Chrysoidine A O O, RL O
O: Vesuvine Extra O O; Vesuvine BC O O; Fast.
Brown O, Naphthylamine Brown O; Water Blue IN O; Water Blue TB O;
Victoria Blue B O O; Methylene Blue MD O O; Nile Blue R O O; New
Blue S O O; Indoine Blue BB O O; Eosine 442 Nx; Phloxine B B N;
Rhodamine B O O; Rhodamine 6G O O: Naphthylamine Red G O; Fast
Red A O; Cotton Scarlet O; Erythrine RR O; Erythrine X O; Erythrine P O;
Ponceau 2 R O; Fast Ponceau G O and B O; Paper Scarlet P O O;
Saffranine PP O O; Magenta Powder A O O; Acetate of Magenta O O;
Cerise D 10 O O; Methyl Violet BB O O; Crystal Violet O O; Acid Violet 3
BN O, 4 R O; Diamond Green B O O; Nigrosine WL O; Coal Black O O;
Brilliant Black B O.—VI., Practical Application of the Coal Tar Colours
according to their Properties and their Behaviour towards the Different
Paper Fibres—Coal Tar Colours, which rank foremost, as far as their
fastness to light is concerned; Colour Combinations with which colourless
or nearly colourless Backwater is obtained; Colours which do not bleed into
White Fibres, for Blotting and Copying Paper Pulp; Colours which produce
the best results on Mechanical Wood and on Unbleached Sulphite Wood;
Dyeing of Cotton, Jute and Wool Half-stuff for Mottling White or Light
Coloured Papers; Colours suitable for Cotton; Colours specially suitable for
Jute Dyeing; Colours suitable for Wool Fibres.—VII., Dyed Patterns on
Various Pulp Mixtures—Placard and Wrapping Papers; Black Wrapping
and Cartridge Papers; Blotting Papers; Mottled and Marbled Papers made
with Coloured Linen, Cotton and Union Rags, or with Cotton, Jute, Wool
and Sulphite Wood Fibres, dyed specially for this purpose; Mottling with
Dark Blue Linen; Mottling with Dark Blue Linen and Dark Blue Cotton;
Mottling with Dark Blue Cotton; Mottling with Dark Blue and Red Cotton;
Mottling with Dark Red Cotton; Mottling of Bleached Stuff, with 3 to 4 per
cent. of Dyed Cotton Fibres; Mottling with Dark Blue Union (Linen and
Wool or Cotton Warp with Wool Weft); Mottling with Blue Striped Red
Union; Mottling of Bleached Stuff with 3 to 4 per cent. of Dyed Wool
Fibres; Mottling of Bleached Stuff with 3 to 4 per cent. of Dyed Jute Fibres;
Page 358
Mottling of Bleached Stuff with 3 to 4 per cent. of Dyed Sulphite Wood
Fibres: Wall Papers; Packing Papers.—VIII., Dyeing to Shade—Index.
Press Opinions.
"The book is one that is of value to every one connected with the
colouring of paper."—Paper Trade Journal.
"The great feature of the volume is undoubtedly the series of actual
patterns of dyed papers, 157 in all—twelve of which, made in
England, have been added to the original German series. Detailed
formulæ are given for the preparation of the pulp for each, and the tints
of the samples practically form a key, by means of which the accuracy
of the student's or practitioner's experiments can be tested.... On the
whole the publication is one of distinct importance to the trade, and
will no doubt speedily become a standard work of reference amongst
papermakers, both in the 'lab.' and the office, as well as being an
excellent text-book for the use of students in the increasing number of
technical institutes in which papermaking is taught."—World's Paper
Trade Review.
Fibres: Wall Papers; Packing Papers.—VIII., Dyeing to Shade—Index.
Press Opinions.
"The book is one that is of value to every one connected with the
colouring of paper."—Paper Trade Journal.
"The great feature of the volume is undoubtedly the series of actual
patterns of dyed papers, 157 in all—twelve of which, made in
England, have been added to the original German series. Detailed
formulæ are given for the preparation of the pulp for each, and the tints
of the samples practically form a key, by means of which the accuracy
of the student's or practitioner's experiments can be tested.... On the
whole the publication is one of distinct importance to the trade, and
will no doubt speedily become a standard work of reference amongst
papermakers, both in the 'lab.' and the office, as well as being an
excellent text-book for the use of students in the increasing number of
technical institutes in which papermaking is taught."—World's Paper
Trade Review.
Page 359
Enamelling on Metal.
ENAMELS AND ENAMELLING. An Introduction to the Preparation and
Application of all Kinds of Enamels for Technical and Artistic Purposes.
For Enamel Makers, Workers in Gold and Silver, and Manufacturers of
Objects of Art. By PAUL RANDAU. Translated from the German. With
Sixteen Illustrations. 180 pp. 1900. Price 10s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 11s.;
Other Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
I., Introduction.—II., Composition and Properties of Glass.—III., Raw
Materials for the Manufacture of Enamel.—IV., Substances Added to
Produce Opacity.—V., Fluxes.—VI., Pigments.—VII., Decolorising Agents.
—VIII., Testing the Raw Materials with the Blow-pipe Flame.—IX.,
Subsidiary Materials.—X., Preparing the Materials for Enamel Making.—
XI., Mixing the Materials.—XII., The Preparation of Technical Enamels,
The Enamel Mass.—XIII., Appliances for Smelting the Enamel Mass.—
XIV., Smelting the Charge.—XV., Composition of Enamel Masses.—XVI.,
Composition of Masses for Ground Enamels.—XVII., Composition of
Cover Enamels.—XVIII., Preparing the Articles for Enamelling.—XIX.,
Applying the Enamel.—XX., Firing the Ground Enamel.—XXI., Applying
and Firing the Cover Enamel or Glaze.—XXII., Repairing Defects in
Enamelled Ware.—XXIII., Enamelling Articles of Sheet Metal.—XXIV.,
Decorating Enamelled Ware.—XXV., Specialities in Enamelling.—XXVI.,
Dial-plate Enamelling.—XXVII., Enamels for Artistic Purposes, Recipes
for Enamels of Various Colours.—Index.
Press Opinions.
"Should prove of great service to all who are either engaged in or
interested in the art of enamelling."—Jewellers and Watchmakers'
Trade Advertiser.
"I must inform you that this is the best book ever I have come across
on enamels, and it is worth double its cost."—J. Minchin, Jr., Porto,
ENAMELS AND ENAMELLING. An Introduction to the Preparation and
Application of all Kinds of Enamels for Technical and Artistic Purposes.
For Enamel Makers, Workers in Gold and Silver, and Manufacturers of
Objects of Art. By PAUL RANDAU. Translated from the German. With
Sixteen Illustrations. 180 pp. 1900. Price 10s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 11s.;
Other Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
I., Introduction.—II., Composition and Properties of Glass.—III., Raw
Materials for the Manufacture of Enamel.—IV., Substances Added to
Produce Opacity.—V., Fluxes.—VI., Pigments.—VII., Decolorising Agents.
—VIII., Testing the Raw Materials with the Blow-pipe Flame.—IX.,
Subsidiary Materials.—X., Preparing the Materials for Enamel Making.—
XI., Mixing the Materials.—XII., The Preparation of Technical Enamels,
The Enamel Mass.—XIII., Appliances for Smelting the Enamel Mass.—
XIV., Smelting the Charge.—XV., Composition of Enamel Masses.—XVI.,
Composition of Masses for Ground Enamels.—XVII., Composition of
Cover Enamels.—XVIII., Preparing the Articles for Enamelling.—XIX.,
Applying the Enamel.—XX., Firing the Ground Enamel.—XXI., Applying
and Firing the Cover Enamel or Glaze.—XXII., Repairing Defects in
Enamelled Ware.—XXIII., Enamelling Articles of Sheet Metal.—XXIV.,
Decorating Enamelled Ware.—XXV., Specialities in Enamelling.—XXVI.,
Dial-plate Enamelling.—XXVII., Enamels for Artistic Purposes, Recipes
for Enamels of Various Colours.—Index.
Press Opinions.
"Should prove of great service to all who are either engaged in or
interested in the art of enamelling."—Jewellers and Watchmakers'
Trade Advertiser.
"I must inform you that this is the best book ever I have come across
on enamels, and it is worth double its cost."—J. Minchin, Jr., Porto,
Page 360
Portugal, 22nd July, 1900.
"This is a very useful and thoroughly practical treatise, and deals with
every branch of the enameller's art. The manufacture of enamels of
various colours and the methods of their application are described in
detail. Besides the commoner enamelling processes, some of the more
important special branches of the business, such as cloisonne work are
dealt with. The work is well got up, and the illustrations of apparatus
are well executed. The translator is evidently a man well acquainted
both with the German language and the subject-matter of the book."—
Invention.
"This is a most welcome volume, and one for which we have long
waited in this country. For years we have been teaching design applied
to enamelling as well as to several other crafts, but we have not risen
to the scientific side of the question. Here is a handbook dealing with
the composition and making of enamels for application to metals for
the most part, but also for other allied purposes. It is written in a
thoroughly practical way [Transcribers Note: Text source unreadable],
and its author—Paul Randau—has made its subject a very particular
study. The [Transcribers Note: Text source unreadable] almost all
things which come from the German chemical expert, is a model of
good workmanship [Transcribers Note: Text source unreadable] and
arrangement, and no one who is in search of a handbook to
enamelling, [Transcribers Note: Text source unreadable] whether he is
a craftsman producing his beautiful translucent colours on gold, silver
and copper, or the hollow-ware manufacturer making enamelled
saucepans and kettles, can wish for a more useful practical manual."—
Birmingham Gazette.
THE ART OF ENAMELLING ON METAL. By W. NORMAN
BROWN. Twenty-eight Illustrations. Crown 8vo. 60 pp. 1900. Price 2s. 6d.;
Abroad, 3s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., History—Cloisonné—Champs Levé—Translucent Enamel—
Surface Painted Enamels.—II., Cloisonné—Champs Levés—Translucent—
"This is a very useful and thoroughly practical treatise, and deals with
every branch of the enameller's art. The manufacture of enamels of
various colours and the methods of their application are described in
detail. Besides the commoner enamelling processes, some of the more
important special branches of the business, such as cloisonne work are
dealt with. The work is well got up, and the illustrations of apparatus
are well executed. The translator is evidently a man well acquainted
both with the German language and the subject-matter of the book."—
Invention.
"This is a most welcome volume, and one for which we have long
waited in this country. For years we have been teaching design applied
to enamelling as well as to several other crafts, but we have not risen
to the scientific side of the question. Here is a handbook dealing with
the composition and making of enamels for application to metals for
the most part, but also for other allied purposes. It is written in a
thoroughly practical way [Transcribers Note: Text source unreadable],
and its author—Paul Randau—has made its subject a very particular
study. The [Transcribers Note: Text source unreadable] almost all
things which come from the German chemical expert, is a model of
good workmanship [Transcribers Note: Text source unreadable] and
arrangement, and no one who is in search of a handbook to
enamelling, [Transcribers Note: Text source unreadable] whether he is
a craftsman producing his beautiful translucent colours on gold, silver
and copper, or the hollow-ware manufacturer making enamelled
saucepans and kettles, can wish for a more useful practical manual."—
Birmingham Gazette.
THE ART OF ENAMELLING ON METAL. By W. NORMAN
BROWN. Twenty-eight Illustrations. Crown 8vo. 60 pp. 1900. Price 2s. 6d.;
Abroad, 3s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., History—Cloisonné—Champs Levé—Translucent Enamel—
Surface Painted Enamels.—II., Cloisonné—Champs Levés—Translucent—
Page 361
Painted.—III., Painted Enamel—Apparatus—Furnaces and Muffles for
Firing.—IV., The Copper Base or Plate—Planishing—Cloisons—Champ
Levé Plates.—V., Enamels—Trituration—Washing—Coating a Plate with
Enamel—Firing Ordinary Plaques for Painting—Designing—Squaring off.
—VI., Designs for Cloisonné—Designs for Painted Enamels—Technical
Processes—Brushes, etc.,—Colours—Grisaille—Full-coloured Designs.
Press Opinion.
"The information conveyed in The Art of Enamelling on Metal is as
complete as can be expected in a manual of ordinary length, and is
quite ample in all respects to start students in a most interesting branch
of decorative art. All necessary requisites are fully described and
illustrated, and the work is one, indeed, which any one may pursue
with interest, for those who are interested artistically in enamels are a
numerous body."—Hardware Metals and Machinery.
Firing.—IV., The Copper Base or Plate—Planishing—Cloisons—Champ
Levé Plates.—V., Enamels—Trituration—Washing—Coating a Plate with
Enamel—Firing Ordinary Plaques for Painting—Designing—Squaring off.
—VI., Designs for Cloisonné—Designs for Painted Enamels—Technical
Processes—Brushes, etc.,—Colours—Grisaille—Full-coloured Designs.
Press Opinion.
"The information conveyed in The Art of Enamelling on Metal is as
complete as can be expected in a manual of ordinary length, and is
quite ample in all respects to start students in a most interesting branch
of decorative art. All necessary requisites are fully described and
illustrated, and the work is one, indeed, which any one may pursue
with interest, for those who are interested artistically in enamels are a
numerous body."—Hardware Metals and Machinery.
Page 362
Books on Textile and Dyeing Subjects.
THE TECHNICAL TESTING OF YARNS AND TEXTILE FABRICS.
With Reference to Official Specifications. Translated from the German of
Dr. J. HERZFELD. Second Edition. Sixty-nine Illustrations. 200 pp. Demy
8vo. 1901. Price 10s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 11s.; Other Countries, 12s.;
strictly net.
Contents.
Yarn Testing:. III., Determining the Yarn Number.—IV., Testing the Length
of Yarns.—V., Examination of the External Appearance of Yarn.—VI.,
Determining the Twist of Yarn and Twist.—VII., Determination of Tensile
Strength and Elasticity.—VIII., Estimating the Percentage of Fat in Yarn.—
IX., Determination of Moisture (Conditioning).—Appendix.
Press Opinions.
"It would be well if our English manufacturers would avail themselves
of this important addition to the extensive list of German publications
which, by the spread of technical information, contribute in no small
degree to the success, and sometimes to the supremacy, of Germany in
almost every branch of textile manufacture."—Manchester Courier.
"This is probably the most exhaustive book published in English on
the subject dealt with.... We have great confidence in recommending
the purchase of this book by all manufacturers of textile goods of
whatever kind, and are convinced that the concise and direct way in
which it is written, which has been admirably conserved by the
translator, renders it peculiarly adapted for the use of English
readers."—Textile Recorder.
"A careful study of this book enables one to say with certainty that it is
a standard work on the subject. Its importance is enhanced greatly by
the probability that we have here, for the first time in our own
language, in one volume, a full, accurate, and detailed account, by a
THE TECHNICAL TESTING OF YARNS AND TEXTILE FABRICS.
With Reference to Official Specifications. Translated from the German of
Dr. J. HERZFELD. Second Edition. Sixty-nine Illustrations. 200 pp. Demy
8vo. 1901. Price 10s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 11s.; Other Countries, 12s.;
strictly net.
Contents.
Yarn Testing:. III., Determining the Yarn Number.—IV., Testing the Length
of Yarns.—V., Examination of the External Appearance of Yarn.—VI.,
Determining the Twist of Yarn and Twist.—VII., Determination of Tensile
Strength and Elasticity.—VIII., Estimating the Percentage of Fat in Yarn.—
IX., Determination of Moisture (Conditioning).—Appendix.
Press Opinions.
"It would be well if our English manufacturers would avail themselves
of this important addition to the extensive list of German publications
which, by the spread of technical information, contribute in no small
degree to the success, and sometimes to the supremacy, of Germany in
almost every branch of textile manufacture."—Manchester Courier.
"This is probably the most exhaustive book published in English on
the subject dealt with.... We have great confidence in recommending
the purchase of this book by all manufacturers of textile goods of
whatever kind, and are convinced that the concise and direct way in
which it is written, which has been admirably conserved by the
translator, renders it peculiarly adapted for the use of English
readers."—Textile Recorder.
"A careful study of this book enables one to say with certainty that it is
a standard work on the subject. Its importance is enhanced greatly by
the probability that we have here, for the first time in our own
language, in one volume, a full, accurate, and detailed account, by a
Page 363
practical expert, of the best technical methods for the testing of textile
materials, whether in the raw state or in the more or less finished
product."—Glasgow Herald.
"The author has endeavoured to collect and arrange in systematic form
for the first time all the data relating to both physical and chemical
tests as used throughout the whole of the textile industry, so that not
only the commercial and textile chemist, who has frequently to reply
to questions on these matters, but also the practical manufacturer of
textiles and his subordinates, whether in spinning, weaving, dyeing,
and finishing, are catered for.... The book is profusely illustrated, and
the subjects of these illustrations are clearly described."—Textile
Manufacturer.
DECORATIVE AND FANCY TEXTILE FABRICS.
With Designs and Illustrations. By R.T. LORD. A Valuable Book for
Manufacturers and Designers of Carpets, Damask, Dress and all Textile
Fabrics. 200 pp. 1898. Demy 8vo. 132 Designs and Illustrations. Price 7s.
6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., A Few Hints on Designing Ornamental Textile Fabrics.—II., A
Few Hints on Designing Ornamental Textile Fabrics (continued).—III., A
Few Hints on Designing Ornamental Textile Fabrics (continued).—IV., A
Few Hints on Designing Ornamental Textile Fabrics (continued).—V., Hints
for Ruled-paper Draughtsmen.—VI., The Jacquard Machine.—VII.,
Brussels and Wilton Carpets.—VIII., Tapestry Carpets.—IX., Ingrain
Carpets.—X., Axminster Carpets.—XI., Damask and Tapestry Fabrics.—
XII., Scarf Silks and Ribbons.—XIII., Silk Handkerchiefs.—XIV., Dress
Fabrics.—XV., Mantle Cloths.—XVI., Figured Plush.—XVII., Bed Quilts.
—XVIII., Calico Printing.
Press Opinions.
"The book can be strongly recommended to students and practical
men."—Textile Colourist.
materials, whether in the raw state or in the more or less finished
product."—Glasgow Herald.
"The author has endeavoured to collect and arrange in systematic form
for the first time all the data relating to both physical and chemical
tests as used throughout the whole of the textile industry, so that not
only the commercial and textile chemist, who has frequently to reply
to questions on these matters, but also the practical manufacturer of
textiles and his subordinates, whether in spinning, weaving, dyeing,
and finishing, are catered for.... The book is profusely illustrated, and
the subjects of these illustrations are clearly described."—Textile
Manufacturer.
DECORATIVE AND FANCY TEXTILE FABRICS.
With Designs and Illustrations. By R.T. LORD. A Valuable Book for
Manufacturers and Designers of Carpets, Damask, Dress and all Textile
Fabrics. 200 pp. 1898. Demy 8vo. 132 Designs and Illustrations. Price 7s.
6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., A Few Hints on Designing Ornamental Textile Fabrics.—II., A
Few Hints on Designing Ornamental Textile Fabrics (continued).—III., A
Few Hints on Designing Ornamental Textile Fabrics (continued).—IV., A
Few Hints on Designing Ornamental Textile Fabrics (continued).—V., Hints
for Ruled-paper Draughtsmen.—VI., The Jacquard Machine.—VII.,
Brussels and Wilton Carpets.—VIII., Tapestry Carpets.—IX., Ingrain
Carpets.—X., Axminster Carpets.—XI., Damask and Tapestry Fabrics.—
XII., Scarf Silks and Ribbons.—XIII., Silk Handkerchiefs.—XIV., Dress
Fabrics.—XV., Mantle Cloths.—XVI., Figured Plush.—XVII., Bed Quilts.
—XVIII., Calico Printing.
Press Opinions.
"The book can be strongly recommended to students and practical
men."—Textile Colourist.
Page 364
"Those engaged in the designing of dress, mantle tapestry, carpet and
other ornamental textiles will find this volume a useful work of
reference."—Leeds Mercury.
"The book is to be commended as a model manual, appearing at an
opportune time, since every day is making known a growing desire for
development in British industrial art."—Dundee Advertiser.
"Designers especially, who desire to make progress in their calling,
will do well to take the hints thrown out in the first four chapters on
'Designing Ornamental Textile Fabrics'."—Nottingham Daily
Guardian.
POWER-LOOM WEAVING AND YARN NUMBERING, According to
Various Systems, with Conversion Tables. An Auxiliary and Text-book for
Pupils of Weaving Schools, as well as for Self-Instruction and for General
Use by those engaged in the Weaving Industry. Translated from the German
of ANTHON GRUNER. With Twenty-six Diagrams in Colours. 150 pp.
1900. Crown 8vo. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries,
8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
I., Power-Loom Weaving in General. Various Systems of Looms.—II.,
Mounting and Starting the Power-Loom. English Looms.—Tappet or
Treadle Looms.—Dobbies.—III., General Remarks on the Numbering,
Reeling and Packing-of Yarn.—Appendix.—Useful Hints. Calculating
Warps.—Weft Calculations.—Calculations of Cost Price in Hanks.
Press Opinions.
"A long-felt want in the weaving industry has been supplied by the
issue of a cheap volume dealing with the subject." —Belfast Evening
Telegraph.
"The work has been clearly translated from the German and published
with suitable illustrations.... The author has dealt very practically with
the subject." —Bradford Daily Telegraph.
other ornamental textiles will find this volume a useful work of
reference."—Leeds Mercury.
"The book is to be commended as a model manual, appearing at an
opportune time, since every day is making known a growing desire for
development in British industrial art."—Dundee Advertiser.
"Designers especially, who desire to make progress in their calling,
will do well to take the hints thrown out in the first four chapters on
'Designing Ornamental Textile Fabrics'."—Nottingham Daily
Guardian.
POWER-LOOM WEAVING AND YARN NUMBERING, According to
Various Systems, with Conversion Tables. An Auxiliary and Text-book for
Pupils of Weaving Schools, as well as for Self-Instruction and for General
Use by those engaged in the Weaving Industry. Translated from the German
of ANTHON GRUNER. With Twenty-six Diagrams in Colours. 150 pp.
1900. Crown 8vo. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries,
8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
I., Power-Loom Weaving in General. Various Systems of Looms.—II.,
Mounting and Starting the Power-Loom. English Looms.—Tappet or
Treadle Looms.—Dobbies.—III., General Remarks on the Numbering,
Reeling and Packing-of Yarn.—Appendix.—Useful Hints. Calculating
Warps.—Weft Calculations.—Calculations of Cost Price in Hanks.
Press Opinions.
"A long-felt want in the weaving industry has been supplied by the
issue of a cheap volume dealing with the subject." —Belfast Evening
Telegraph.
"The work has been clearly translated from the German and published
with suitable illustrations.... The author has dealt very practically with
the subject." —Bradford Daily Telegraph.
Page 365
"The book, which contains a number of useful coloured diagrams,
should prove invaluable to the student, and its handy form will enable
it to become a companion more than some cumbrous work." —Cotton
Factory Times.
"The book has been prepared with great care, and is most usefully
illustrated. It is a capital text-book for use in the weaving schools or
for self-instruction, while all engaged in the weaving industry will find
its suggestions helpful." —Northern Daily Telegraph.
"The various systems are treated in a careful manner; also the different
looms and their manufacture, as well as the whole processes of the
work. Yarn numbering according to various systems, with conversion
tables and numerous coloured diagrams, materially assist to a clear
comprehension of the subject." —Northern Whig.
"The 'inside' managers of our textile mills in which the work is
complex or greatly varied, and where yarns of different materials are in
use, will find this work convenient for reference in case of novelty or
difficulty. We may also say the same in relation to the textile student.
Its description of the parts of the loom and their functions will be of
use to the latter, being of the most elementary kind."—Textile Mercury.
"The author attempts to fill a gap in weaving literature caused by the
neglect of many obscure points connected with the industry. A short
review is given of the power-loom as a whole, followed by a
description of the different parts of the machinery with their
advantages and defects.... The book is severely technical, but must on
that account be very valuable to the pupil who is determined to master
this industrial art."—Cheshire County News.
"It is clear and concise, and gives just that knowledge in quality and
amount which any student of the weaving industry ought to consider as
a minimum necessary for his thorough comprehension of his future
profession. The handiness and variety of the information comprised in
Section III., dealing with the numbering and reeling of yarns employed
in the various systems in different countries, struck us as particularly
useful."—North British Daily Mail.
should prove invaluable to the student, and its handy form will enable
it to become a companion more than some cumbrous work." —Cotton
Factory Times.
"The book has been prepared with great care, and is most usefully
illustrated. It is a capital text-book for use in the weaving schools or
for self-instruction, while all engaged in the weaving industry will find
its suggestions helpful." —Northern Daily Telegraph.
"The various systems are treated in a careful manner; also the different
looms and their manufacture, as well as the whole processes of the
work. Yarn numbering according to various systems, with conversion
tables and numerous coloured diagrams, materially assist to a clear
comprehension of the subject." —Northern Whig.
"The 'inside' managers of our textile mills in which the work is
complex or greatly varied, and where yarns of different materials are in
use, will find this work convenient for reference in case of novelty or
difficulty. We may also say the same in relation to the textile student.
Its description of the parts of the loom and their functions will be of
use to the latter, being of the most elementary kind."—Textile Mercury.
"The author attempts to fill a gap in weaving literature caused by the
neglect of many obscure points connected with the industry. A short
review is given of the power-loom as a whole, followed by a
description of the different parts of the machinery with their
advantages and defects.... The book is severely technical, but must on
that account be very valuable to the pupil who is determined to master
this industrial art."—Cheshire County News.
"It is clear and concise, and gives just that knowledge in quality and
amount which any student of the weaving industry ought to consider as
a minimum necessary for his thorough comprehension of his future
profession. The handiness and variety of the information comprised in
Section III., dealing with the numbering and reeling of yarns employed
in the various systems in different countries, struck us as particularly
useful."—North British Daily Mail.
Page 366
"This work brings before weavers who are actually engaged in the
various branches of fabrics, as well as the technical student, the
different parts of the general run of power-looms in such a manner that
the parts of the loom and their bearing to each other can be readily
understood.... The work should prove of much value, as it is in every
sense practical, and is put before the reader in such a clear manner that
it can be easily understood." —Textile Industries.
"The book under notice is intended as an instructor to those engaged in
power-loom weaving, and, judging by its compilation, the author is a
thorough master of the craft. It is not overloaded with details, and he
manages to compress in a book of some 150 pages all that one can
possibly wish to know about the different parts of the machinery,
whether of English or foreign make, and for whatever kind of cloth
required. A comprehensive summary is also included of the various
yarns and methods of numbering them, as well as a few useful hints
and a number of coloured diagrams for mandarin weavings. The book
is printed in bold, legible type, on good paper, has a copious index, and
is well and strongly bound." —Ashton-under-Lyne Herald.
"In dealing with the complicated parts of various classes of power-
looms, the writer, who is one of the professors at the Royal Weaving
School of Asch, brings to the work a thorough knowledge of the
subject, and, what is of great value, he has the gift of communicating
his knowledge in a way which is easily understood. The smallest
details of loom-setting are entered into, and a full explanation of
problems, which are a source of anxiety to many engaged in
overlooking, is given. Students will find the work an admirable text-
book, and all who are interested in weaving will see in it a valuable
addition to the literature on this subject.... The book is in small
compass, and is crowded with valuable information."—Bradford
Observer.
COLOUR: A HANDBOOK OF THE THEORY OF COLOUR. By
GEORGE H. HURST, F.C.S. With Ten Coloured Plates and Seventy-two
Illustrations. 160 pp. Demy 8vo. 1900. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies,
8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
various branches of fabrics, as well as the technical student, the
different parts of the general run of power-looms in such a manner that
the parts of the loom and their bearing to each other can be readily
understood.... The work should prove of much value, as it is in every
sense practical, and is put before the reader in such a clear manner that
it can be easily understood." —Textile Industries.
"The book under notice is intended as an instructor to those engaged in
power-loom weaving, and, judging by its compilation, the author is a
thorough master of the craft. It is not overloaded with details, and he
manages to compress in a book of some 150 pages all that one can
possibly wish to know about the different parts of the machinery,
whether of English or foreign make, and for whatever kind of cloth
required. A comprehensive summary is also included of the various
yarns and methods of numbering them, as well as a few useful hints
and a number of coloured diagrams for mandarin weavings. The book
is printed in bold, legible type, on good paper, has a copious index, and
is well and strongly bound." —Ashton-under-Lyne Herald.
"In dealing with the complicated parts of various classes of power-
looms, the writer, who is one of the professors at the Royal Weaving
School of Asch, brings to the work a thorough knowledge of the
subject, and, what is of great value, he has the gift of communicating
his knowledge in a way which is easily understood. The smallest
details of loom-setting are entered into, and a full explanation of
problems, which are a source of anxiety to many engaged in
overlooking, is given. Students will find the work an admirable text-
book, and all who are interested in weaving will see in it a valuable
addition to the literature on this subject.... The book is in small
compass, and is crowded with valuable information."—Bradford
Observer.
COLOUR: A HANDBOOK OF THE THEORY OF COLOUR. By
GEORGE H. HURST, F.C.S. With Ten Coloured Plates and Seventy-two
Illustrations. 160 pp. Demy 8vo. 1900. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies,
8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Page 367
Contents.
Chapters I., Colour and Its Production. Light, Colour, Dispersion of
White Light Methods of Producing the Spectrum, Glass Prism and
Diffraction Grating Spectroscopes, The Spectrum, Wave Motion of Light,
Recomposition of White Light, Hue, Luminosity, Purity of Colours, The
Polariscope, Phosphorescence, Fluorescence, Interference.—II., Cause of
Colour in Coloured Bodies. Transmitted Colours, Absorption Spectra of
Colouring Matters.—III., Colour Phenomena and Theories. Mixing
Colours, White Light from Coloured Lights, Effect of Coloured Light on
Colours, Complementary Colours, Young-Helmholtz Theory, Brewster
Theory, Supplementary Colours, Maxwell's Theory, Colour Photography.—
IV., The Physiology of Light. Structure of the Eye, Persistence of Vision,
Subjective Colour Phenomena, Colour Blindness.—V., Contrast. Contrast,
Simultaneous Contrast, Successive Contrast, Contrast of Tone. Contrast of
Colours, Modification of Colours by Contrast, Colour Contrast in
Decorative Design.—VI., Colour in Decoration and Design. Colour
Harmonies, Colour Equivalents, Illumination and Colour, Colour and
Textile Fabrics, Surface Structure and Colour.—VII., Measurement of
Colour. Colour Patch Method, The Tintometer, Chromometer.
Press Opinions.
"This useful little book possesses considerable merit, and will be of
great utility to those for whom it is primarily intended."—Birmingham
Pos.
"It will be found to be of direct service to the majority of dyers, calico
printers and colour mixers, to whom we confidently recommend it."—
Chemical Trade Journal.
"It is thoroughly practical, and gives in simple language the why and
wherefore of the many colour phenomena which perplex the dyer and
the colourist."—Dyer and Calico Printer.
"We have found the book very interesting, and can recommend it to all
who wish to master the different aspects of colour theory, with a view
to a practical application of the knowledge so gained."—Chemist and
Druggist.
Chapters I., Colour and Its Production. Light, Colour, Dispersion of
White Light Methods of Producing the Spectrum, Glass Prism and
Diffraction Grating Spectroscopes, The Spectrum, Wave Motion of Light,
Recomposition of White Light, Hue, Luminosity, Purity of Colours, The
Polariscope, Phosphorescence, Fluorescence, Interference.—II., Cause of
Colour in Coloured Bodies. Transmitted Colours, Absorption Spectra of
Colouring Matters.—III., Colour Phenomena and Theories. Mixing
Colours, White Light from Coloured Lights, Effect of Coloured Light on
Colours, Complementary Colours, Young-Helmholtz Theory, Brewster
Theory, Supplementary Colours, Maxwell's Theory, Colour Photography.—
IV., The Physiology of Light. Structure of the Eye, Persistence of Vision,
Subjective Colour Phenomena, Colour Blindness.—V., Contrast. Contrast,
Simultaneous Contrast, Successive Contrast, Contrast of Tone. Contrast of
Colours, Modification of Colours by Contrast, Colour Contrast in
Decorative Design.—VI., Colour in Decoration and Design. Colour
Harmonies, Colour Equivalents, Illumination and Colour, Colour and
Textile Fabrics, Surface Structure and Colour.—VII., Measurement of
Colour. Colour Patch Method, The Tintometer, Chromometer.
Press Opinions.
"This useful little book possesses considerable merit, and will be of
great utility to those for whom it is primarily intended."—Birmingham
Pos.
"It will be found to be of direct service to the majority of dyers, calico
printers and colour mixers, to whom we confidently recommend it."—
Chemical Trade Journal.
"It is thoroughly practical, and gives in simple language the why and
wherefore of the many colour phenomena which perplex the dyer and
the colourist."—Dyer and Calico Printer.
"We have found the book very interesting, and can recommend it to all
who wish to master the different aspects of colour theory, with a view
to a practical application of the knowledge so gained."—Chemist and
Druggist.
Page 368
"Mr. Hurst's Handbook on the Theory of Colour will be found
extremely useful, not only to the art student, but also to the craftsman,
whose business it is to manipulate pigments and dyes."—Nottingham
Daily Guardian.
TEXTILE RAW MATERIALS AND THEIR CONVERSION INTO
YARNS. (The Study of the Raw Materials and the Technology of the
Spinning Process.) Text-book for Textile, Trade and Higher Technical
Schools. By JULIUS ZIPSER. Translated from German by CHARLES
SALTER. 302 Illustrations. 480 pp. Demy 8vo. 1901. Price 10s. 6d.; India
and Colonies, 11s.; Other Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Raw Materials: Cotton—Wool—Flax—Hemp—Jute—Hair—Shearing
Sheep—Goat Wool—Silk—Detection and Estimation of Textile Raw
Materials in Yarns and Fabrics—Tests.—The Technology of Spinning.
Cotton Spinning: Bale Breakers—Carding—Combing—Roving—Mule
Frames—Yarn Testing—Humidifiers. Flax Spinning: Tow Spinning—
String Spinning—Carded Woollen Yarn—Belt Condenser—Fine Spinning
—Yarn Numbering.—Manufacture of True Worsted Yarn: Semi-Worsted
Yarns.—Artificial Wool or Shoddy Spinning: Spinning Shoddy.—Index.
THE COLOUR PRINTING OF CARPET YARNS. A Useful Manual for
Colour Chemists and Textile Printers. By DAVID PATERSON, F.C.S.
Seventeen Illustrations. 132 pp. Demy 8vo. 1900. Price 7s. 6d.; India and
Colonies, 8s. Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Structure and Constitution of Wool Fibre.—II., Yarn Scouring.
—III., Scouring Materials.—IV., Water for Scouring.—V., Bleaching Carpet
Yarns.—VI., Colour Making for Yarn Printing.—VII., Colour Printing
Pastes.—VIII., Colour Recipes for Yarn Printing.—IX., Science of Colour
Mixing.—X., Matching of Colours.—XI., "Hank" Printing.—XII., Printing
Tapestry Carpet Yarns.—XIII., Yarn Printing.—XIV., Steaming Printed
Yarns.—XV., Washing of Steamed Yarns.—XVI., Aniline Colours Suitable
for Yarn Printing.—XVII., Glossary of Dyes and Dye-wares used in Wood
Yarn Printing.—Appendix.
extremely useful, not only to the art student, but also to the craftsman,
whose business it is to manipulate pigments and dyes."—Nottingham
Daily Guardian.
TEXTILE RAW MATERIALS AND THEIR CONVERSION INTO
YARNS. (The Study of the Raw Materials and the Technology of the
Spinning Process.) Text-book for Textile, Trade and Higher Technical
Schools. By JULIUS ZIPSER. Translated from German by CHARLES
SALTER. 302 Illustrations. 480 pp. Demy 8vo. 1901. Price 10s. 6d.; India
and Colonies, 11s.; Other Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Raw Materials: Cotton—Wool—Flax—Hemp—Jute—Hair—Shearing
Sheep—Goat Wool—Silk—Detection and Estimation of Textile Raw
Materials in Yarns and Fabrics—Tests.—The Technology of Spinning.
Cotton Spinning: Bale Breakers—Carding—Combing—Roving—Mule
Frames—Yarn Testing—Humidifiers. Flax Spinning: Tow Spinning—
String Spinning—Carded Woollen Yarn—Belt Condenser—Fine Spinning
—Yarn Numbering.—Manufacture of True Worsted Yarn: Semi-Worsted
Yarns.—Artificial Wool or Shoddy Spinning: Spinning Shoddy.—Index.
THE COLOUR PRINTING OF CARPET YARNS. A Useful Manual for
Colour Chemists and Textile Printers. By DAVID PATERSON, F.C.S.
Seventeen Illustrations. 132 pp. Demy 8vo. 1900. Price 7s. 6d.; India and
Colonies, 8s. Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Structure and Constitution of Wool Fibre.—II., Yarn Scouring.
—III., Scouring Materials.—IV., Water for Scouring.—V., Bleaching Carpet
Yarns.—VI., Colour Making for Yarn Printing.—VII., Colour Printing
Pastes.—VIII., Colour Recipes for Yarn Printing.—IX., Science of Colour
Mixing.—X., Matching of Colours.—XI., "Hank" Printing.—XII., Printing
Tapestry Carpet Yarns.—XIII., Yarn Printing.—XIV., Steaming Printed
Yarns.—XV., Washing of Steamed Yarns.—XVI., Aniline Colours Suitable
for Yarn Printing.—XVII., Glossary of Dyes and Dye-wares used in Wood
Yarn Printing.—Appendix.
Page 369
Press Opinions.
"The book is worthy the attention of the trade."—Worcester Herald.
"The treatise is arranged with great care, and follows the processes
described in a manner at once clear and convincing."—Glasgow
Record.
"A most useful manual dealing in an intelligible and interesting
manner with the colour printing of carpet yarns."—Kidderminster
Times.
"An eminent expert himself, the author has evidently strained every
effort in order to make his work the standard guide of its class."—
Leicester Post.
"The book, which is admirably printed and illustrated, should fulfil the
need of a practical guide in the colour printing of carpet yarns.—
Nottingham Express.
"The subject is very exhaustively treated in all its branches.... The
work, which is very well illustrated with designs, machines, and wool
fibres, will be a useful addition to our textile literature."—Northern
Whig.
"It gives an account of its subject which is both valuable and
instructive in itself, and likely to be all the more welcome because
books dealing with textile fabrics usually have little or nothing to say
about this way of decorating them."—Scotsman.
"The work shows a thorough grasp of the leading characteristics as
well as the minutiae of the industry, and gives a lucid description of its
chief departments.... As a text-book in technical schools where this
branch of industrial education is taught, the book is valuable, or it may
be perused with pleasure as well as profit by any one having an interest
in textile industries."—Dundee Courier.
"The book bears every mark of an extensive practical knowledge of
the subject in all its bearings, and supplies a real want in technical
literature. Chapters IX. and X., on the science of colour mixing and
"The book is worthy the attention of the trade."—Worcester Herald.
"The treatise is arranged with great care, and follows the processes
described in a manner at once clear and convincing."—Glasgow
Record.
"A most useful manual dealing in an intelligible and interesting
manner with the colour printing of carpet yarns."—Kidderminster
Times.
"An eminent expert himself, the author has evidently strained every
effort in order to make his work the standard guide of its class."—
Leicester Post.
"The book, which is admirably printed and illustrated, should fulfil the
need of a practical guide in the colour printing of carpet yarns.—
Nottingham Express.
"The subject is very exhaustively treated in all its branches.... The
work, which is very well illustrated with designs, machines, and wool
fibres, will be a useful addition to our textile literature."—Northern
Whig.
"It gives an account of its subject which is both valuable and
instructive in itself, and likely to be all the more welcome because
books dealing with textile fabrics usually have little or nothing to say
about this way of decorating them."—Scotsman.
"The work shows a thorough grasp of the leading characteristics as
well as the minutiae of the industry, and gives a lucid description of its
chief departments.... As a text-book in technical schools where this
branch of industrial education is taught, the book is valuable, or it may
be perused with pleasure as well as profit by any one having an interest
in textile industries."—Dundee Courier.
"The book bears every mark of an extensive practical knowledge of
the subject in all its bearings, and supplies a real want in technical
literature. Chapters IX. and X., on the science of colour mixing and
Page 370
colour matching respectively, are especially good, and we do not
remember to have seen the bearing of various kinds of light, and of the
changes from one kind of light to another on the work of the colourist,
so well treated elsewhere."—Dyer and Calico Printer.
"It is thoroughly practical, and contains much information which has
not hitherto appeared in book form. It is pleasing to note that the
practical part is not crowded out with purely 'practical recipes'. A few
typical examples are given, and the rest is left to the common sense
and judgment of the printer or works' chemist. Another pleasing
feature is the accounts given here and there of the author's own
researches on the subject. The work will be of interest to printers of
wool generally, and to those engaged in the dyeing of this fibre."—
Journal of the Society of Dyers and Colourists.
A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE BLEACHING OF LINEN AND
COTTON YARN AND FABRICS. By L. TAILFER, Chemical and
Mechanical Engineer. Translated from the French by JOHN GEDDES
MCINTOSH, Lecturer on Chemical Technology, London. Demy 8vo. 1901.
Price 12s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 13s. 6d; Other Countries, 15s.; strictly
net.
Contents.
Chapter I. General Considerations on Bleaching. Chapter II. Steeping.
Chapter III. Washing: Its End and Importance—Roller Washing Machines
—Wash Wheel (Dash Wheel)—Stocks or Wash Mill—Squeezing. Chapter
IV. Lye Boiling—Lye Boiling with Milk of Lime—Lye Boiling with Soda
Lyes—Description of Lye Boiling Keirs—Operations of Lye Boiling—
Concentration of Lyes. Chapter V. Mather and Platt's Keir—Description of
the Keir—Saturation of the Fabrics—Alkali used in Lye Boiling—
Examples of Processes. Chapter VI. Soap—Action of Soap in Bleaching—
Quality and Quantity of Soaps to use in the Lye—Soap Lyes or Scalds—
Soap Scouring Stocks. Chapter VII. Bleaching on Grass or on the Bleaching
Green or Lawn. Chapter VIII. Chemicking—Remarks on Chlorides and
their Decolourising Action—Chemicking Cisterns—Chemicking—
Strengths, etc. Chapter IX. Sours—Properties of the Acids—Effects
Produced by Acids—Souring Cisterns. Chapter X. Drying—Drying by
remember to have seen the bearing of various kinds of light, and of the
changes from one kind of light to another on the work of the colourist,
so well treated elsewhere."—Dyer and Calico Printer.
"It is thoroughly practical, and contains much information which has
not hitherto appeared in book form. It is pleasing to note that the
practical part is not crowded out with purely 'practical recipes'. A few
typical examples are given, and the rest is left to the common sense
and judgment of the printer or works' chemist. Another pleasing
feature is the accounts given here and there of the author's own
researches on the subject. The work will be of interest to printers of
wool generally, and to those engaged in the dyeing of this fibre."—
Journal of the Society of Dyers and Colourists.
A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE BLEACHING OF LINEN AND
COTTON YARN AND FABRICS. By L. TAILFER, Chemical and
Mechanical Engineer. Translated from the French by JOHN GEDDES
MCINTOSH, Lecturer on Chemical Technology, London. Demy 8vo. 1901.
Price 12s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 13s. 6d; Other Countries, 15s.; strictly
net.
Contents.
Chapter I. General Considerations on Bleaching. Chapter II. Steeping.
Chapter III. Washing: Its End and Importance—Roller Washing Machines
—Wash Wheel (Dash Wheel)—Stocks or Wash Mill—Squeezing. Chapter
IV. Lye Boiling—Lye Boiling with Milk of Lime—Lye Boiling with Soda
Lyes—Description of Lye Boiling Keirs—Operations of Lye Boiling—
Concentration of Lyes. Chapter V. Mather and Platt's Keir—Description of
the Keir—Saturation of the Fabrics—Alkali used in Lye Boiling—
Examples of Processes. Chapter VI. Soap—Action of Soap in Bleaching—
Quality and Quantity of Soaps to use in the Lye—Soap Lyes or Scalds—
Soap Scouring Stocks. Chapter VII. Bleaching on Grass or on the Bleaching
Green or Lawn. Chapter VIII. Chemicking—Remarks on Chlorides and
their Decolourising Action—Chemicking Cisterns—Chemicking—
Strengths, etc. Chapter IX. Sours—Properties of the Acids—Effects
Produced by Acids—Souring Cisterns. Chapter X. Drying—Drying by
Page 371
Steam—Drying by Hot Air—Drying by Air. Chapter XI. Damages to
Fabrics in Bleaching—Yarn Mildew—Fermentation—Iron Rust Spots—
Spots from Contact with Wood—Spots incurred on the Bleaching Green—
Damages arising from the Machines. Chapter XII. Examples of Methods
used in Bleaching—Linen—Cotton. Chapter XIII. The Valuation of Caustic
and Carbonated Alkali (Soda) and General Information Regarding these
Bodies—Object of Alkalimetry—Titration of Carbonate of Soda—
Comparative Table of Different Degrees of Alkalimetrical Strength—Five
Problems relative to Carbonate of Soda —Caustic Soda, its Properties and
Uses—Mixtures of Carbonated and Caustic Alkali—Note on a Process of
Manufacturing Caustic Soda and Mixtures of Caustic and Carbonated
Alkali (soda). Chapter XIV. Chlorometry—Titration—Wagner's
Chlorometric Method—Preparation of Standard Solutions—Apparatus for
Chlorine Valuation—Alkali in Excess in Decolourising Chlorides. Chapter
XV. Chlorine and Decolourising Chlorides—Synopsis—Chlorine—
Chloride of Lime—Hypochlorite of Soda—Brochoki's Chlorozone—
Various Decolourising Hypochlorites—Comparison of Chloride of Lime
and Hypochlorite of Soda. Chapter XVI. Water—Qualities of Water—
Hardness—Dervaux's Purifier—Testing the Purified Water—Different Plant
for Purification—Filters. Chapter XVII. Bleaching of Yarn—Weight of Yarn
—Lye Boiling—Chemicking—Washing—Bleaching of Cotton Yarn.
Chapter XVIII. The Installation of a Bleach Works—Water Supply—Steam
Boilers—Steam Distribution Pipes—Engines—Keirs—Washing Machines
—Stocks—Wash Wheels—Chemicking and Souring Cisterns—Various—
Buildings. Chapter XIX. Addenda—Energy of Decolourising Chlorides and
Bleaching by Electricity and Ozone—Energy of Decolourising Chlorides—
Chlorides—Production of Chlorine and Hypochlorites by Electrolysis—
Lunge's Process for increasing the intensity of the Bleaching Power of
Chloride of Lime—Trilfer's Process for Removing the Excess of Lime or
Soda from Decolourising Chlorides—Bleaching by Ozone.
THE SCIENCE OF COLOUR MIXING. A Manual intended for the use
of Dyers, Calico Printers and Colour Chemists. By DAVID PATERSON,
F.C.S. Forty-one Illustrations, Five Coloured Plates, and Four Plates
showing Eleven Dyed Specimens of Fabrics. 132 pp. Demy 8vo. 1900.
Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Fabrics in Bleaching—Yarn Mildew—Fermentation—Iron Rust Spots—
Spots from Contact with Wood—Spots incurred on the Bleaching Green—
Damages arising from the Machines. Chapter XII. Examples of Methods
used in Bleaching—Linen—Cotton. Chapter XIII. The Valuation of Caustic
and Carbonated Alkali (Soda) and General Information Regarding these
Bodies—Object of Alkalimetry—Titration of Carbonate of Soda—
Comparative Table of Different Degrees of Alkalimetrical Strength—Five
Problems relative to Carbonate of Soda —Caustic Soda, its Properties and
Uses—Mixtures of Carbonated and Caustic Alkali—Note on a Process of
Manufacturing Caustic Soda and Mixtures of Caustic and Carbonated
Alkali (soda). Chapter XIV. Chlorometry—Titration—Wagner's
Chlorometric Method—Preparation of Standard Solutions—Apparatus for
Chlorine Valuation—Alkali in Excess in Decolourising Chlorides. Chapter
XV. Chlorine and Decolourising Chlorides—Synopsis—Chlorine—
Chloride of Lime—Hypochlorite of Soda—Brochoki's Chlorozone—
Various Decolourising Hypochlorites—Comparison of Chloride of Lime
and Hypochlorite of Soda. Chapter XVI. Water—Qualities of Water—
Hardness—Dervaux's Purifier—Testing the Purified Water—Different Plant
for Purification—Filters. Chapter XVII. Bleaching of Yarn—Weight of Yarn
—Lye Boiling—Chemicking—Washing—Bleaching of Cotton Yarn.
Chapter XVIII. The Installation of a Bleach Works—Water Supply—Steam
Boilers—Steam Distribution Pipes—Engines—Keirs—Washing Machines
—Stocks—Wash Wheels—Chemicking and Souring Cisterns—Various—
Buildings. Chapter XIX. Addenda—Energy of Decolourising Chlorides and
Bleaching by Electricity and Ozone—Energy of Decolourising Chlorides—
Chlorides—Production of Chlorine and Hypochlorites by Electrolysis—
Lunge's Process for increasing the intensity of the Bleaching Power of
Chloride of Lime—Trilfer's Process for Removing the Excess of Lime or
Soda from Decolourising Chlorides—Bleaching by Ozone.
THE SCIENCE OF COLOUR MIXING. A Manual intended for the use
of Dyers, Calico Printers and Colour Chemists. By DAVID PATERSON,
F.C.S. Forty-one Illustrations, Five Coloured Plates, and Four Plates
showing Eleven Dyed Specimens of Fabrics. 132 pp. Demy 8vo. 1900.
Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Page 372
Chapters I., Colour a Sensation; Colours of Illuminated Bodies; Colours of
Opaque and Transparent Bodies; Surface Colour.—II., Analysis of Light;
Spectrum; Homogeneous Colours; Ready Method of Obtaining a Spectrum.
—III., Examination of Solar Spectrum; The Spectroscope and Its
Construction; Colourists' Use of the Spectroscope.—IV., Colour by
Absorption; Solutions and Dyed Fabrics; Dichroic Coloured Fabrics in
Gaslight.—V., Colour Primaries of the Scientist versus the Dyer and Artist;
Colour Mixing by Rotation and Lye Dyeing: Hue, Purity, Brightness; Tints:
Shades, Scales, Tones, Sad and Sombre Colours.—VI., Colour Mixing:
Pure and Impure Greens, Orange and Violets; Large Variety of Shades from
few Colours; Consideration of the Practical Primaries: Red, Yellow and
Blue.—VII., Secondary Colours; Nomenclature of Violet and Purple Group;
Tints and Shades of Violet; Changes in Artificial Light.—VIII., Tertiary
Shades; Broken Hues; Absorption Spectra of Tertiary Shades.—Appendix:
Four Plates with Dyed Specimens Illustrating Text.—Index.
Press Opinions.
"The work has evidently been prepared with great care, and, as far as
we can judge, should be very useful to the dyer and colourist."—
Halifax Courier.
"The volume, which is clearly and popularly written, should prove of
the utmost service to all who are concerned with the practical use of
colours, whether as dyers or painters."—Scotsman.
"To the practical colourist, and also to technical students, Mr.
Paterson's new work will be very welcome. We are often asked to
recommend books on different subjects, and have no hesitation in
advising the purchase of the present volume by dyers and calico
printers, as containing a mass of most useful information at a nominal
price."—Irish Textile Journal.
"Mr. Paterson's work not only clearly deals with the theory of colour,
but supplies lucid directions for the practical application of the theory.
His work will be found exceedingly helpful, not only to the practical
colourist, but also to students in our textile colleges, by forming a
useful complement to their class lectures. There are several exquisitely
coloured plates and a large number of other illustrations of theory and
Opaque and Transparent Bodies; Surface Colour.—II., Analysis of Light;
Spectrum; Homogeneous Colours; Ready Method of Obtaining a Spectrum.
—III., Examination of Solar Spectrum; The Spectroscope and Its
Construction; Colourists' Use of the Spectroscope.—IV., Colour by
Absorption; Solutions and Dyed Fabrics; Dichroic Coloured Fabrics in
Gaslight.—V., Colour Primaries of the Scientist versus the Dyer and Artist;
Colour Mixing by Rotation and Lye Dyeing: Hue, Purity, Brightness; Tints:
Shades, Scales, Tones, Sad and Sombre Colours.—VI., Colour Mixing:
Pure and Impure Greens, Orange and Violets; Large Variety of Shades from
few Colours; Consideration of the Practical Primaries: Red, Yellow and
Blue.—VII., Secondary Colours; Nomenclature of Violet and Purple Group;
Tints and Shades of Violet; Changes in Artificial Light.—VIII., Tertiary
Shades; Broken Hues; Absorption Spectra of Tertiary Shades.—Appendix:
Four Plates with Dyed Specimens Illustrating Text.—Index.
Press Opinions.
"The work has evidently been prepared with great care, and, as far as
we can judge, should be very useful to the dyer and colourist."—
Halifax Courier.
"The volume, which is clearly and popularly written, should prove of
the utmost service to all who are concerned with the practical use of
colours, whether as dyers or painters."—Scotsman.
"To the practical colourist, and also to technical students, Mr.
Paterson's new work will be very welcome. We are often asked to
recommend books on different subjects, and have no hesitation in
advising the purchase of the present volume by dyers and calico
printers, as containing a mass of most useful information at a nominal
price."—Irish Textile Journal.
"Mr. Paterson's work not only clearly deals with the theory of colour,
but supplies lucid directions for the practical application of the theory.
His work will be found exceedingly helpful, not only to the practical
colourist, but also to students in our textile colleges, by forming a
useful complement to their class lectures. There are several exquisitely
coloured plates and a large number of other illustrations of theory and
Page 373
practice in colour blending, and also a series of plates with specimens
of dyed fabrics attached, in explication of the author's views."—
Wakefield Express.
"Mr. Paterson has little to say upon the experimental aspect or on its
æsthetics, but much upon the theory of colour, especially as it bears
upon the question—an all-important one to dyers, calico printers and
artists, who have to produce such a variety of shades and tints—of the
admixture of one colour upon another.... The author is a dyer, and in
his concluding chapters keeps well before him the special wants and
requirements of dyers. He writes pleasantly and lucidly, and there is no
difficulty in following him, although here and there a lapse into
ambiguousness occurs. The book is well printed, generously supplied
with coloured plates, very nicely if not brightly got up; and the dyed
patterns at the end enhance the value of the book to the dyer."—Textile
Mercury.
"For some time the proprietors of The Oil and Colourman's Journal
have been engaged in the publication of a series of practical handbooks
intended for the use of those interested in certain branches of
technology, and the present volume is the latest addition to their list.
The feature which the works have in common—and it is an all-
important one in treatises of this sort—is their eminently practical
character. The primary aim of the publishers is to provide scientific
text-books which will be helpful to those who are either actively
engaged in the practice of the arts in question, or who are studying
with that immediate end in view.... Mr. Paterson speaks with that
assured knowledge of an expert, and in the present volume, as in that
which he has already contributed to the same series, he sets forth the
true foundation of the art of colouring in a manner at once
comprehensive and judicious.... For dyers, calico printers and
colourists in general, whose desire it is to work with accuracy in their
respective branches, the treatise will prove an invaluable guide-book,
provided the principles and methods it describes are studied with
intelligence and care. To this end, every encouragement has been given
that well-chosen examples, carefully executed plates and diagrams,
and an exhaustive index can supply."—Glasgow Herald.
of dyed fabrics attached, in explication of the author's views."—
Wakefield Express.
"Mr. Paterson has little to say upon the experimental aspect or on its
æsthetics, but much upon the theory of colour, especially as it bears
upon the question—an all-important one to dyers, calico printers and
artists, who have to produce such a variety of shades and tints—of the
admixture of one colour upon another.... The author is a dyer, and in
his concluding chapters keeps well before him the special wants and
requirements of dyers. He writes pleasantly and lucidly, and there is no
difficulty in following him, although here and there a lapse into
ambiguousness occurs. The book is well printed, generously supplied
with coloured plates, very nicely if not brightly got up; and the dyed
patterns at the end enhance the value of the book to the dyer."—Textile
Mercury.
"For some time the proprietors of The Oil and Colourman's Journal
have been engaged in the publication of a series of practical handbooks
intended for the use of those interested in certain branches of
technology, and the present volume is the latest addition to their list.
The feature which the works have in common—and it is an all-
important one in treatises of this sort—is their eminently practical
character. The primary aim of the publishers is to provide scientific
text-books which will be helpful to those who are either actively
engaged in the practice of the arts in question, or who are studying
with that immediate end in view.... Mr. Paterson speaks with that
assured knowledge of an expert, and in the present volume, as in that
which he has already contributed to the same series, he sets forth the
true foundation of the art of colouring in a manner at once
comprehensive and judicious.... For dyers, calico printers and
colourists in general, whose desire it is to work with accuracy in their
respective branches, the treatise will prove an invaluable guide-book,
provided the principles and methods it describes are studied with
intelligence and care. To this end, every encouragement has been given
that well-chosen examples, carefully executed plates and diagrams,
and an exhaustive index can supply."—Glasgow Herald.
Page 374
COLOUR MATCHING ON TEXTILES. A Manual intended for the use
of Students of Colour Chemistry, Dyeing and Textile Printing. By DAVID
PATERSON, F.C.S. Coloured Frontispiece. Twenty-nine Illustrations and
Fourteen Specimens of Dyed Fabrics Illustrating Text. Demy 8vo. 132 pp.
1901. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.;
strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Colour Vision and Structure of the Eye—Perception of Colour
—Primary and Complementary Colour Sensations.—II., Daylight for
Colour Matching—Selection of a Good Pure Light—Diffused Daylight,
Direct Sunlight, Blue Skylight, Variability of Daylight, etc., etc.—III.,
Matching of Hues—Purity and Luminosity of Colours—Matching Bright
Hues —Aid of Tinted Films—Matching Difficulties Arising from Contrast.
—IV., Examination of Colours by Reflected and Transmitted Lights—
Effect of Lustre and Transparency of Fibres in Colour Matching.—V.,
Matching of Colours on Velvet Pile—Optical Properties of Dye-stuffs,
Dichroism. Fluorescence.—VI., Use of Tinted Mediums—Orange Film—
Defects of the Eye—Yellowing of the Lens—Colour Blindness, etc.—VII.,
Matching of Dyed Silk Trimmings and Linings and Bindings—Its
Difficulties—Behaviour of Shades in Artificial Light—Colour Matching of
Old Fabrics, etc.—VIII., Examination of Dyed Colours under the Artificial
Lights —Electric Arc, Magnesium and Dufton, Gardner Lights, Welsbach,
Acetylene, etc.—Testing Qualities of an Illuminant.—IX., Influence of the
Absorption Spectrum in Changes of Hue under the Artificial Lights—Study
of the Causes of Abnormal Modifications of Hue, etc.
Reissue of THE ART OF DYEING WOOL, SILK AND COTTON.
Translated from the French of M. HELLOT, M. MACQUER and M. LE
PILEUR D'APLIGNY. First Published in English in 1789. Six Plates. Demy
8vo. 446 pp. 1901. Price 5s.; India and Colonies, 5s. 6d.; Other Countries,
6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I., The Art of Dyeing Wool and Woollen Cloth, Stuffs, Yarn,
Worsted, etc.: Introduction.—Chapters I., Of the Vessels and Utensils used
of Students of Colour Chemistry, Dyeing and Textile Printing. By DAVID
PATERSON, F.C.S. Coloured Frontispiece. Twenty-nine Illustrations and
Fourteen Specimens of Dyed Fabrics Illustrating Text. Demy 8vo. 132 pp.
1901. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.;
strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Colour Vision and Structure of the Eye—Perception of Colour
—Primary and Complementary Colour Sensations.—II., Daylight for
Colour Matching—Selection of a Good Pure Light—Diffused Daylight,
Direct Sunlight, Blue Skylight, Variability of Daylight, etc., etc.—III.,
Matching of Hues—Purity and Luminosity of Colours—Matching Bright
Hues —Aid of Tinted Films—Matching Difficulties Arising from Contrast.
—IV., Examination of Colours by Reflected and Transmitted Lights—
Effect of Lustre and Transparency of Fibres in Colour Matching.—V.,
Matching of Colours on Velvet Pile—Optical Properties of Dye-stuffs,
Dichroism. Fluorescence.—VI., Use of Tinted Mediums—Orange Film—
Defects of the Eye—Yellowing of the Lens—Colour Blindness, etc.—VII.,
Matching of Dyed Silk Trimmings and Linings and Bindings—Its
Difficulties—Behaviour of Shades in Artificial Light—Colour Matching of
Old Fabrics, etc.—VIII., Examination of Dyed Colours under the Artificial
Lights —Electric Arc, Magnesium and Dufton, Gardner Lights, Welsbach,
Acetylene, etc.—Testing Qualities of an Illuminant.—IX., Influence of the
Absorption Spectrum in Changes of Hue under the Artificial Lights—Study
of the Causes of Abnormal Modifications of Hue, etc.
Reissue of THE ART OF DYEING WOOL, SILK AND COTTON.
Translated from the French of M. HELLOT, M. MACQUER and M. LE
PILEUR D'APLIGNY. First Published in English in 1789. Six Plates. Demy
8vo. 446 pp. 1901. Price 5s.; India and Colonies, 5s. 6d.; Other Countries,
6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Part I., The Art of Dyeing Wool and Woollen Cloth, Stuffs, Yarn,
Worsted, etc.: Introduction.—Chapters I., Of the Vessels and Utensils used
Page 375
in Dyeing.—II., Of the Fixed and Fugitive, commonly called Great and
Little Dye.—III., Of Colours in Grain. Dyeing Wool: IV., Of Blue.—V., Of
the Pastel Vat—Directions for the Proper Management of the Vat—
Indications when the Vat has Suffered by too much or too little Lime, the
two extremes which ought carefully to be avoided—The Preparations of
Indigo for the Pastel Vat.—VI., Of the Woad Vat.—VII., Of the Indigo Vat.
—VIII., Of the Cold Indigo Vat with Urine—A Hot Indigo Vat with Urine
—To Reheat a Urine Vat.—IX., A Cold Indigo Vat without Urine. —X., Of
the Method of Dyeing Blue.—XI., Of Red.—XII., Of Scarlet in Grain, or
Venetian Scarlet.—XIII., Of Fire Scarlet.—XIV., Of Crimson.—XV., Of
Gum Lac Scarlet.—XVI., Of the Coccus polonicus, a Colouring Insect.—
XVII., Of Madder Red.—XVIII., Of Yellow.—XIX., Of Brown or Fawn
Colour.—XX., Of Black.—XXI., Of the Colours obtained from a Mixture
of Blue and Red.—XXII., Of the Mixture of Blue and Yellow.—XXIII., Of
the Mixture of Blue and Fawn Colour.—XXIV., Of the Mixture of Blue and
Black.—XXV., Of the Mixture of Red and Yellow.—XXVI., Of the Mixture
of Red and Fawn.—XXVII., Of the Mixture of Red and Black.—XXVIII.,
Of the Mixture of Yellow and Fawn Colours.—XXIX., Of the Mixture of
Yellow and Black.—XXX., Of the Mixture of Fawn Colour and Black.—
XXXI., Of the Principal Mixtures of the Primitive Colours by Three and
Three.—XXXII., The Method of Blending Wool of Different Colours for
mixed Cloth or Stuffs.—XXXIII., The Method of Preparing Felts for Trial.
—XXXIV., The Method of Dyeing Woollens False Colours.—XXXV., Of
Flock or Goats' Hair.—XXXVI., Of Archil, and the Method of Using It.—
XXXVII., Of Logwood.—XXXVIII., Of Brazil Wood.—XXXIX., Of
Fustic—XL., Roucou.—XLI., Of French Berries. —XLII., Of Turmeric.—
XLIII., Instructions for the Proof Liquor for Wool and Woollen Stuffs.
Part II., The Art of Dyeing Silk: Ungumming and Boiling for White.—For
Boiling of Silks Intended to be Dyed.—Observations on Ungumming and
Boiling.—Of White.—Of Whitening.—Sulphuring. —Observations on
Whitening and Sulphuring.—Of Aluming.—Remarks on Aluming.—Of
Blue.—Remarks on the Blue of Indigo.—Of Yellow.—Remarks on Yellow.
—Aurora, Orange, Mordore, Gold Colour and Chamois.—Red and
Crimson.—Remarks on Crimson.—Of False Crimson or the Red of Brazil.
—Remarks on the Red, or Crimson of Brazil Wood.—Of Scarlet, Orange,
Red and Cherry Colour.—Preparation of the Carthamus or Bastard Saffron.
Little Dye.—III., Of Colours in Grain. Dyeing Wool: IV., Of Blue.—V., Of
the Pastel Vat—Directions for the Proper Management of the Vat—
Indications when the Vat has Suffered by too much or too little Lime, the
two extremes which ought carefully to be avoided—The Preparations of
Indigo for the Pastel Vat.—VI., Of the Woad Vat.—VII., Of the Indigo Vat.
—VIII., Of the Cold Indigo Vat with Urine—A Hot Indigo Vat with Urine
—To Reheat a Urine Vat.—IX., A Cold Indigo Vat without Urine. —X., Of
the Method of Dyeing Blue.—XI., Of Red.—XII., Of Scarlet in Grain, or
Venetian Scarlet.—XIII., Of Fire Scarlet.—XIV., Of Crimson.—XV., Of
Gum Lac Scarlet.—XVI., Of the Coccus polonicus, a Colouring Insect.—
XVII., Of Madder Red.—XVIII., Of Yellow.—XIX., Of Brown or Fawn
Colour.—XX., Of Black.—XXI., Of the Colours obtained from a Mixture
of Blue and Red.—XXII., Of the Mixture of Blue and Yellow.—XXIII., Of
the Mixture of Blue and Fawn Colour.—XXIV., Of the Mixture of Blue and
Black.—XXV., Of the Mixture of Red and Yellow.—XXVI., Of the Mixture
of Red and Fawn.—XXVII., Of the Mixture of Red and Black.—XXVIII.,
Of the Mixture of Yellow and Fawn Colours.—XXIX., Of the Mixture of
Yellow and Black.—XXX., Of the Mixture of Fawn Colour and Black.—
XXXI., Of the Principal Mixtures of the Primitive Colours by Three and
Three.—XXXII., The Method of Blending Wool of Different Colours for
mixed Cloth or Stuffs.—XXXIII., The Method of Preparing Felts for Trial.
—XXXIV., The Method of Dyeing Woollens False Colours.—XXXV., Of
Flock or Goats' Hair.—XXXVI., Of Archil, and the Method of Using It.—
XXXVII., Of Logwood.—XXXVIII., Of Brazil Wood.—XXXIX., Of
Fustic—XL., Roucou.—XLI., Of French Berries. —XLII., Of Turmeric.—
XLIII., Instructions for the Proof Liquor for Wool and Woollen Stuffs.
Part II., The Art of Dyeing Silk: Ungumming and Boiling for White.—For
Boiling of Silks Intended to be Dyed.—Observations on Ungumming and
Boiling.—Of White.—Of Whitening.—Sulphuring. —Observations on
Whitening and Sulphuring.—Of Aluming.—Remarks on Aluming.—Of
Blue.—Remarks on the Blue of Indigo.—Of Yellow.—Remarks on Yellow.
—Aurora, Orange, Mordore, Gold Colour and Chamois.—Red and
Crimson.—Remarks on Crimson.—Of False Crimson or the Red of Brazil.
—Remarks on the Red, or Crimson of Brazil Wood.—Of Scarlet, Orange,
Red and Cherry Colour.—Preparation of the Carthamus or Bastard Saffron.
Page 376
—Remarks on the Dye of Carthamus or Bastard Saffron.—Of the False
Poppy or Fire Colour Produced with Brazil Wood.—False Rose Colour.—
Of Green. —Remarks.—Of Olives.—Remarks.—Of Violet.—Of Fine
Violet, or Violet in Grain.—Of False or Common Violets or Lilac.—Of the
Violet of Logwood.—Remarks.—Violet of Logwood and Verdigris.—
Violets of Brazil and Logwood.—Remarks.—Violets from Brazil Wood and
Archil. —Of Purple, Gillyflower, and of Fine Cochineal or Purple.—Of
False Purple.—Of Maroons, Cinnamons and White Lees.—Remarks.—Of
Nut Greys. Thorn Greys, Black and Iron Greys and others of the same
Species.—Of Black.—Softening of Black.—Black in the Raw.—Remarks
on Black.—Particular Process Communicated by M. Hellot.—Genoa
Crimson, a Process Proved in May, 1743.—Violet Crimson of Italy.—Half
Violet.—Genoa Black for Velvets.
Part III., The Art of Dyeing Cotton and Linen Thread, together with the
Method of Stamping Silks, Cottons, etc.: Of Dyeing in General.—Inquiry
concerning Wool, Silk, Cotton and Flax.—Of Wool.—Of Silk.—Of Cotton.
—Of Flax.—Conclusion from the Examination of Substances Commonly
Dyed.—Of Bleaching.—Preparation for Stuffs to be Dyed.—Astringents.—
Theory of Dyeing Stuffs Prepared with Alum.—Of Colouring Substances.
—Of Cochineal and Colouring Insects.—Of Madder.—Of Vegetables
Furnishing a Yellow Dye.—Of the Colouring Drugs Used in Dyeing
without Astringents.—Of Indigo.—Of Substances Used in Dyeing Fawn
and Root Colour.—Of Carthamus, Roucou, etc.—Of Black. Of Dyeing of
Cotton Thread: Of Cleansing.—Of the Colours Employed for the Dyeing
of Cotton Thread.—Of Blue.—Of Red.—Adrianople Red.—Observations
on this Dye.—Of Yellow.—Of Green.—Of Violet.—Of Red Cinnamon.—
Of Black.—Black for Linen and Cotton Thread by a Combination of
Colours.—Of Grey.—Of More Durable Greys.—Of Musk Colour.—Olive
and Duck Greens.—Of Browns, Maroons, Coffee Colours, etc.—Of Silk
Stuffs Dyed of Several Colours.—The Manner of Stamping Silk, etc., in
Europe.—Of a Linen with a Blue Ground and White Pattern.—Of Saxon
Blue.—Observations on this Dye.—Indexes.
THE DYEING OF COTTON FABRICS: A Practical Handbook for the
Dyer and Student. By FRANKLIN BEECH, Practical Colourist and
Chemist. 272 pp. Forty-four Illustrations of Bleaching and Dyeing
Poppy or Fire Colour Produced with Brazil Wood.—False Rose Colour.—
Of Green. —Remarks.—Of Olives.—Remarks.—Of Violet.—Of Fine
Violet, or Violet in Grain.—Of False or Common Violets or Lilac.—Of the
Violet of Logwood.—Remarks.—Violet of Logwood and Verdigris.—
Violets of Brazil and Logwood.—Remarks.—Violets from Brazil Wood and
Archil. —Of Purple, Gillyflower, and of Fine Cochineal or Purple.—Of
False Purple.—Of Maroons, Cinnamons and White Lees.—Remarks.—Of
Nut Greys. Thorn Greys, Black and Iron Greys and others of the same
Species.—Of Black.—Softening of Black.—Black in the Raw.—Remarks
on Black.—Particular Process Communicated by M. Hellot.—Genoa
Crimson, a Process Proved in May, 1743.—Violet Crimson of Italy.—Half
Violet.—Genoa Black for Velvets.
Part III., The Art of Dyeing Cotton and Linen Thread, together with the
Method of Stamping Silks, Cottons, etc.: Of Dyeing in General.—Inquiry
concerning Wool, Silk, Cotton and Flax.—Of Wool.—Of Silk.—Of Cotton.
—Of Flax.—Conclusion from the Examination of Substances Commonly
Dyed.—Of Bleaching.—Preparation for Stuffs to be Dyed.—Astringents.—
Theory of Dyeing Stuffs Prepared with Alum.—Of Colouring Substances.
—Of Cochineal and Colouring Insects.—Of Madder.—Of Vegetables
Furnishing a Yellow Dye.—Of the Colouring Drugs Used in Dyeing
without Astringents.—Of Indigo.—Of Substances Used in Dyeing Fawn
and Root Colour.—Of Carthamus, Roucou, etc.—Of Black. Of Dyeing of
Cotton Thread: Of Cleansing.—Of the Colours Employed for the Dyeing
of Cotton Thread.—Of Blue.—Of Red.—Adrianople Red.—Observations
on this Dye.—Of Yellow.—Of Green.—Of Violet.—Of Red Cinnamon.—
Of Black.—Black for Linen and Cotton Thread by a Combination of
Colours.—Of Grey.—Of More Durable Greys.—Of Musk Colour.—Olive
and Duck Greens.—Of Browns, Maroons, Coffee Colours, etc.—Of Silk
Stuffs Dyed of Several Colours.—The Manner of Stamping Silk, etc., in
Europe.—Of a Linen with a Blue Ground and White Pattern.—Of Saxon
Blue.—Observations on this Dye.—Indexes.
THE DYEING OF COTTON FABRICS: A Practical Handbook for the
Dyer and Student. By FRANKLIN BEECH, Practical Colourist and
Chemist. 272 pp. Forty-four Illustrations of Bleaching and Dyeing
Page 377
Machinery. Demy 8vo. 1901. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.: Other
Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Structure and Chemistry of the Cotton Fibre.—II., Scouring and
Bleaching of Cotton.—III., Dyeing Machinery and Dyeing Manipulations.
—IV., Principals and Practice of Cotton Dyeing—1, Direct Dyeing; 2,
Direct Dyeing followed by Fixation with Metallic Salts; 3, Direct Dyeing
followed by Fixation with Developers; 4, Direct Dyeing followed by
Fixation with Couplers; 5, Dyeing on Tannic Mordant; 6, Dyeing on
Metallic Mordant; 7, Production of Colour Direct upon Cotton Fibres; 8,
Dyeing Cotton by Impregnation with Dye-stuff Solution.—V., Dyeing
Union (Mixed Cotton and Wool) Fabrics.—VI., Dyeing Half Silk (Cotton-
Silk, Satin) Fabrics.—VII., Operations following Dyeing—Washing,
Soaping, Drying.—VIII., Testing of the Colour of Dyed Fabrics.—IX.,
Experimental Dyeing and Comparative Dye Testing.—Index.
The book contains numerous recipes for the production on Cotton Fabrics
of all kinds of a great range of colours, thus making it of great service in the
Dye-house, while to the Student it is of value in that the scientific principles
which underlie the operations of dyeing are clearly laid down.
COTTON SPINNING (First Year). By THOMAS THORNLEY, Spinning
Master, Bolton Technical School. 160 pp. 84 Illustrations. Crown 8vo.
1901. Price 3s.; Abroad, 3s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Syllabus and Examination Papers of the City and Guilds of London
Institute.—Chapters I., Cultivation, Classification, Ginning, Baling and
Mixing of the Raw Cotton.—II., Bale-Breakers, Mixing Lattices and
Hopper Feeders—III., Opening and Scutching.—IV., Carding.—Index to
Illustrations.—General Index.
COTTON SPINNING (Intermediate, or Second Year). By THOMAS
THORNLEY. 180 pp. 70 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. 1901. Price 5s.; India
and British Colonies, 5s. 6d.; Other Countries, 6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Structure and Chemistry of the Cotton Fibre.—II., Scouring and
Bleaching of Cotton.—III., Dyeing Machinery and Dyeing Manipulations.
—IV., Principals and Practice of Cotton Dyeing—1, Direct Dyeing; 2,
Direct Dyeing followed by Fixation with Metallic Salts; 3, Direct Dyeing
followed by Fixation with Developers; 4, Direct Dyeing followed by
Fixation with Couplers; 5, Dyeing on Tannic Mordant; 6, Dyeing on
Metallic Mordant; 7, Production of Colour Direct upon Cotton Fibres; 8,
Dyeing Cotton by Impregnation with Dye-stuff Solution.—V., Dyeing
Union (Mixed Cotton and Wool) Fabrics.—VI., Dyeing Half Silk (Cotton-
Silk, Satin) Fabrics.—VII., Operations following Dyeing—Washing,
Soaping, Drying.—VIII., Testing of the Colour of Dyed Fabrics.—IX.,
Experimental Dyeing and Comparative Dye Testing.—Index.
The book contains numerous recipes for the production on Cotton Fabrics
of all kinds of a great range of colours, thus making it of great service in the
Dye-house, while to the Student it is of value in that the scientific principles
which underlie the operations of dyeing are clearly laid down.
COTTON SPINNING (First Year). By THOMAS THORNLEY, Spinning
Master, Bolton Technical School. 160 pp. 84 Illustrations. Crown 8vo.
1901. Price 3s.; Abroad, 3s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Syllabus and Examination Papers of the City and Guilds of London
Institute.—Chapters I., Cultivation, Classification, Ginning, Baling and
Mixing of the Raw Cotton.—II., Bale-Breakers, Mixing Lattices and
Hopper Feeders—III., Opening and Scutching.—IV., Carding.—Index to
Illustrations.—General Index.
COTTON SPINNING (Intermediate, or Second Year). By THOMAS
THORNLEY. 180 pp. 70 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. 1901. Price 5s.; India
and British Colonies, 5s. 6d.; Other Countries, 6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Page 378
Syllabuses and Examination Papers of the City and Guilds of London
Institute.—Chapters I., The Combing Process.—II., The Drawing Frame.—
III., Bobbin and Fly Frames.—IV., Mule Spinning.—V., Ring Spinning.—
Index to Illustrations.—General Index.
COTTON SPINNING (Honours, or Third Year). By THOMAS
THORNLEY. 216 pp. 74 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. 1901. Price 5s.; India
and British Colonies, 5s. 6d.; Other Countries, 6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Syllabuses and Examination Papers of the City and Guilds of London
Institute.—Chapters I., Cotton.—II., The Practical Manipulation of Cotton
Spinning Machinery.—III., Doubling and Winding.—IV., Reeling.—V.,
Warping.—VI., Production and Costs.—VII., Main Driving.—VIII.,
Arrangement of Machinery and Mill Planning.—IX., Waste and Waste
Spinning.—Index to Illustrations.—General Index.
Institute.—Chapters I., The Combing Process.—II., The Drawing Frame.—
III., Bobbin and Fly Frames.—IV., Mule Spinning.—V., Ring Spinning.—
Index to Illustrations.—General Index.
COTTON SPINNING (Honours, or Third Year). By THOMAS
THORNLEY. 216 pp. 74 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. 1901. Price 5s.; India
and British Colonies, 5s. 6d.; Other Countries, 6s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Syllabuses and Examination Papers of the City and Guilds of London
Institute.—Chapters I., Cotton.—II., The Practical Manipulation of Cotton
Spinning Machinery.—III., Doubling and Winding.—IV., Reeling.—V.,
Warping.—VI., Production and Costs.—VII., Main Driving.—VIII.,
Arrangement of Machinery and Mill Planning.—IX., Waste and Waste
Spinning.—Index to Illustrations.—General Index.
Page 379
Books for Mining Engineers and Steam Users.
RECOVERY WORK AFTER PIT FIRES. A Description of the Principal
Methods Pursued, especially in Fiery Mines, and of the Various Appliances
Employed, such as Respiratory and Rescue Apparatus, Dams, etc. By
ROBERT LAMPRECHT, Mining Engineer and Manager. Translated from
the German. Illustrated by Six large Plates, containing Seventy-six
Illustrations. 175 pp., demy 8vo. 1901. Price 10s. 6d.; India and Colonies,
11s.; Other Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Preface.—I., Causes of Pit Fires: 1, Fires Resulting from the Spontaneous
Ignition of Coal; 2, Fires Caused by Burning Timber; 3, Fires Caused by
Fire-damp Explosions.—II., Preventive Regulations: 1, The Outbreak and
Rapid Extension of a Shaft Fire can be most reliably prevented by
Employing little or no Combustible Material in the Construction of the
Shaft; 2, Precautions for Rapidly Localising an Outbreak of Fire in the
Shaft; 3, Precautions to be Adopted in case those under 1 and 2 Fail or
Prove Inefficient Precautions against Spontaneous Ignition of Coal.
Precautions for Preventing Explosions of Fire-damp and Coal Dust.
Employment of Electricity in Mining, particularly in Fiery Pits.
Experiments on the Ignition of Fire-damp Mixtures and Clouds of Coal
Dust by Electricity.—III., Indications of an Existing-or Incipient Fire.—
IV., Appliances for Working in Irrespirable Gases: 1, Respiratory
Apparatus; 2, Apparatus with Air Supply Pipes, (a) The Bremen Smoke
Helmet, (b) The Müller Smoke Helmet, (c) The Stolz Rescue Mask; 3,
Reservoir Apparatus: 4, Oxygen Apparatus. The Schwann Respiratory
Apparatus. The Fleuss Respiratory Apparatus. The Improved Walcher-
Gärtner Pneumatophor, (a) The Single Bottle Apparatus, Instructions for
using the Pneumatophor, Taking to Pieces and Resetting the Apparatus
ready for Use; (b) Two Bottle Apparatus (Shamrock Type). The Neupert
Rescue Apparatus (The Mayer-Pilar System).—V. Extinguishing-Pit Fires:
(a)Chemical Means: (b) Extinction with Water. Dragging down the Burning
Masses and Packing with Clay: (c) Insulating the Seat of the Fire by Dams.
RECOVERY WORK AFTER PIT FIRES. A Description of the Principal
Methods Pursued, especially in Fiery Mines, and of the Various Appliances
Employed, such as Respiratory and Rescue Apparatus, Dams, etc. By
ROBERT LAMPRECHT, Mining Engineer and Manager. Translated from
the German. Illustrated by Six large Plates, containing Seventy-six
Illustrations. 175 pp., demy 8vo. 1901. Price 10s. 6d.; India and Colonies,
11s.; Other Countries, 12s.; strictly net.
Contents.
Preface.—I., Causes of Pit Fires: 1, Fires Resulting from the Spontaneous
Ignition of Coal; 2, Fires Caused by Burning Timber; 3, Fires Caused by
Fire-damp Explosions.—II., Preventive Regulations: 1, The Outbreak and
Rapid Extension of a Shaft Fire can be most reliably prevented by
Employing little or no Combustible Material in the Construction of the
Shaft; 2, Precautions for Rapidly Localising an Outbreak of Fire in the
Shaft; 3, Precautions to be Adopted in case those under 1 and 2 Fail or
Prove Inefficient Precautions against Spontaneous Ignition of Coal.
Precautions for Preventing Explosions of Fire-damp and Coal Dust.
Employment of Electricity in Mining, particularly in Fiery Pits.
Experiments on the Ignition of Fire-damp Mixtures and Clouds of Coal
Dust by Electricity.—III., Indications of an Existing-or Incipient Fire.—
IV., Appliances for Working in Irrespirable Gases: 1, Respiratory
Apparatus; 2, Apparatus with Air Supply Pipes, (a) The Bremen Smoke
Helmet, (b) The Müller Smoke Helmet, (c) The Stolz Rescue Mask; 3,
Reservoir Apparatus: 4, Oxygen Apparatus. The Schwann Respiratory
Apparatus. The Fleuss Respiratory Apparatus. The Improved Walcher-
Gärtner Pneumatophor, (a) The Single Bottle Apparatus, Instructions for
using the Pneumatophor, Taking to Pieces and Resetting the Apparatus
ready for Use; (b) Two Bottle Apparatus (Shamrock Type). The Neupert
Rescue Apparatus (The Mayer-Pilar System).—V. Extinguishing-Pit Fires:
(a)Chemical Means: (b) Extinction with Water. Dragging down the Burning
Masses and Packing with Clay: (c) Insulating the Seat of the Fire by Dams.
Page 380
Dam Building. Dam Work in the Fiery Pits of Southern Hungary: (a) Cross-
dams of Clay; (b) Masonry Dams, Gallery Linings. Wagner's Portable
Safety Dam. Analyses of Fire Gases. Isolating the Seat of a Fire with Dams:
Working in Irrespirable Gases ("Gas-diving"): 1, Air-Lock Work
(Horizontal Advance) on the Mayer System as Pursued at Karwin in 1894;
2, Air-Lock Work (Horizontal Advance) by the Mauerhofer Modified
System. Vertical Advance. Mayer System. Complete Isolation of the Pit.
Flooding a Burning Section isolated by means of Dams. Wooden Dams: (a)
Upright Balk Dams; (b) Horizontal Balk Dams; (c) Wedge Dams, Masonry
Dams. Examples of Cylindrical and Dome-shaped Dams. Dam Doors:
Flooding the Whole Pit.—VI., Rescue Stations: (a) Stations above
Ground; (b) Underground Rescue Stations.—VII., Spontaneous Ignition
of Coal in Bulk.—Index.
Illustrations.
Sheet I., Respiratory and Rescue Appliances—Precautions against Fire.
Figs. 1, Smoke Helmet; 2, Muller's Smoke Helmet; 3, Low-pressure
Respiration Apparatus; 4, High-pressure Respiration Apparatus; 5, The
Stolz Mask for Rescue Work: 6, Precautions against Fire.—Sheet II.,
Respiratory and Rescue Apparatus. Figs. 1, Recovery Work with Müller's
Smoke Helmet after a Fire: 2-8, The Fleuss Respiration Apparatus: 9, The
Walcher-Gärtner Pneumatophor: 10-12, Pneumatophor (Shamrock Type).—
Sheet III., Respiratory and Rescue Apparatus—Stretchers. Figs. 1-8,
Rescue Apparatus manufactured by O. Neupert's Successor (Mayer-Pilar
System); 1, Front View; 2, Section through Bag and Mask; 3, Rear View: 4,
Apparatus and Mask laid out Flat (view from above); 5, Apparatus and
Mask laid out Flat (view from below): 6, Locking Device for Closing Bag;
7, Apparatus Complete, Mounted for Rescue Work; 8, Improved Valve in
the Respiration Tubes; 9-12, Stretchers. Fig. 9, Stretcher Covered with
Brown Canvas: 10, Stretcher Covered with Brown Canvas, fitted with
Adjustable Head-rest: 11, Folding Stretcher Covered with Brown Canvas;
12, Rupprecht's Stretcher Covered with Brown Canvas; 13, Dr. Rühlmann's
Stretcher.—Sheet IV., Dams. Figs. 1-7, R. Wagners Portable Safety Dam.—
Sheet V., Signalling Appliances —Dam Construction—Cable Laying.
Figs. 1-3, Signalling Appliances: 1, Small Induction Apparatus for Pit
Work; 2, Bell Signal for Pit Work; 3, Pit Telephone; 4-18, Dam
Construction; 4, 5, Upright Timber Dam; 6, 7, Timber Dam with Wooden
dams of Clay; (b) Masonry Dams, Gallery Linings. Wagner's Portable
Safety Dam. Analyses of Fire Gases. Isolating the Seat of a Fire with Dams:
Working in Irrespirable Gases ("Gas-diving"): 1, Air-Lock Work
(Horizontal Advance) on the Mayer System as Pursued at Karwin in 1894;
2, Air-Lock Work (Horizontal Advance) by the Mauerhofer Modified
System. Vertical Advance. Mayer System. Complete Isolation of the Pit.
Flooding a Burning Section isolated by means of Dams. Wooden Dams: (a)
Upright Balk Dams; (b) Horizontal Balk Dams; (c) Wedge Dams, Masonry
Dams. Examples of Cylindrical and Dome-shaped Dams. Dam Doors:
Flooding the Whole Pit.—VI., Rescue Stations: (a) Stations above
Ground; (b) Underground Rescue Stations.—VII., Spontaneous Ignition
of Coal in Bulk.—Index.
Illustrations.
Sheet I., Respiratory and Rescue Appliances—Precautions against Fire.
Figs. 1, Smoke Helmet; 2, Muller's Smoke Helmet; 3, Low-pressure
Respiration Apparatus; 4, High-pressure Respiration Apparatus; 5, The
Stolz Mask for Rescue Work: 6, Precautions against Fire.—Sheet II.,
Respiratory and Rescue Apparatus. Figs. 1, Recovery Work with Müller's
Smoke Helmet after a Fire: 2-8, The Fleuss Respiration Apparatus: 9, The
Walcher-Gärtner Pneumatophor: 10-12, Pneumatophor (Shamrock Type).—
Sheet III., Respiratory and Rescue Apparatus—Stretchers. Figs. 1-8,
Rescue Apparatus manufactured by O. Neupert's Successor (Mayer-Pilar
System); 1, Front View; 2, Section through Bag and Mask; 3, Rear View: 4,
Apparatus and Mask laid out Flat (view from above); 5, Apparatus and
Mask laid out Flat (view from below): 6, Locking Device for Closing Bag;
7, Apparatus Complete, Mounted for Rescue Work; 8, Improved Valve in
the Respiration Tubes; 9-12, Stretchers. Fig. 9, Stretcher Covered with
Brown Canvas: 10, Stretcher Covered with Brown Canvas, fitted with
Adjustable Head-rest: 11, Folding Stretcher Covered with Brown Canvas;
12, Rupprecht's Stretcher Covered with Brown Canvas; 13, Dr. Rühlmann's
Stretcher.—Sheet IV., Dams. Figs. 1-7, R. Wagners Portable Safety Dam.—
Sheet V., Signalling Appliances —Dam Construction—Cable Laying.
Figs. 1-3, Signalling Appliances: 1, Small Induction Apparatus for Pit
Work; 2, Bell Signal for Pit Work; 3, Pit Telephone; 4-18, Dam
Construction; 4, 5, Upright Timber Dam; 6, 7, Timber Dam with Wooden
Page 381
Door; 8, 9, Dome-shaped Dams; 10,11, Dome-shaped Dam with Iron Door;
12,13, The Wenker and Berninghaus Locking Device for Dam Doors; 14-
17, Dam Construction: 18, Damming a Gallery Lined with Iron: 19,
Support for Cable.—Sheet VI., Working with Diving Gear in
Irrespirable Gases—Gallery Work. Figs. 1-4, Air-Lock Work (Mayer
System); 5-7. Air-Lock (Mauerhofer's Modification of the Mayer System);
8-11, Construction of Dams at the Pluto Shaft.—Sheet VII., Working with
Diving Gear in Irrespirable Gases (Mayer System)—Appliances in the
Shaft. Figs. 1, 2, Sections of Shaft and Air Apparatus; 3, Salzmann
Reducing Valve for Reserve Air Supply; 4,5, L. v. Bremen's Respiration
Apparatus with Karwin Reserve Appliance: 6, Cross Section of the
Franziska Shaft; 7, Method of Supplying Air to Main Pipe and Winding
same on Drum; 8, Clamp.
Press Opinions.
"A work of this extremely valuable character deserves to be made
widely known amongst colliery managers and mining engineers at
home and abroad."—Coal and Iron.
"This book is, in a manner, unique. The literature of mining accidents
is fairly extensive, but it consists largely of departmental Blue
Books."—Sheffield Daily Telegraph.
"A concise and lucid description of the principal methods pursued,
especially in fiery mines, and of the various appliances employed, such
as respiratory and rescue apparatus, dams, etc."—Staffs Advertiser.
"The prevention of spontaneous combustion in collieries and the
extinction of underground fires are duties that fall heavily on many
colliery managers. They should, therefore, welcome this translation of
Mr. Lamprecht's German treatise."—Ironmonger.
"The book under notice supplies the needed full description, drawings,
and mode of using these new appliances in actual fires, and should be
studied by every colliery manager, seeing that even our best managed
collieries have not been free from fires, more or less disastrous to life
and property.—Colliery Manager.
12,13, The Wenker and Berninghaus Locking Device for Dam Doors; 14-
17, Dam Construction: 18, Damming a Gallery Lined with Iron: 19,
Support for Cable.—Sheet VI., Working with Diving Gear in
Irrespirable Gases—Gallery Work. Figs. 1-4, Air-Lock Work (Mayer
System); 5-7. Air-Lock (Mauerhofer's Modification of the Mayer System);
8-11, Construction of Dams at the Pluto Shaft.—Sheet VII., Working with
Diving Gear in Irrespirable Gases (Mayer System)—Appliances in the
Shaft. Figs. 1, 2, Sections of Shaft and Air Apparatus; 3, Salzmann
Reducing Valve for Reserve Air Supply; 4,5, L. v. Bremen's Respiration
Apparatus with Karwin Reserve Appliance: 6, Cross Section of the
Franziska Shaft; 7, Method of Supplying Air to Main Pipe and Winding
same on Drum; 8, Clamp.
Press Opinions.
"A work of this extremely valuable character deserves to be made
widely known amongst colliery managers and mining engineers at
home and abroad."—Coal and Iron.
"This book is, in a manner, unique. The literature of mining accidents
is fairly extensive, but it consists largely of departmental Blue
Books."—Sheffield Daily Telegraph.
"A concise and lucid description of the principal methods pursued,
especially in fiery mines, and of the various appliances employed, such
as respiratory and rescue apparatus, dams, etc."—Staffs Advertiser.
"The prevention of spontaneous combustion in collieries and the
extinction of underground fires are duties that fall heavily on many
colliery managers. They should, therefore, welcome this translation of
Mr. Lamprecht's German treatise."—Ironmonger.
"The book under notice supplies the needed full description, drawings,
and mode of using these new appliances in actual fires, and should be
studied by every colliery manager, seeing that even our best managed
collieries have not been free from fires, more or less disastrous to life
and property.—Colliery Manager.
Page 382
THE PREVENTION OF SMOKE. Combined with the Economical
Combustion of Fuel. By W.C. POPPLEWELL, M.Sc, A.M.Inst., C.E.,
Consulting Engineer. 46 Illustrations. 190 pp. 1901. Demy 8vo. Price 7s.
6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Introductory.—Chapters I., Fuel and Combustion.—II., Hand Firing in
Boiler Furnaces.—III., Stoking by Mechanical Means.—IV., Powdered
Fuel.—V., Gaseous Fuel.—VI., Efficiency and Smoke Tests of Boilers.—
VII., Some Standard Smoke Trials.—VIII., The Legal Aspect of the Smoke
Question.—IX., The Best Means to be adopted for the Prevention of
Smoke.—Index.
GAS AND COAL DUST FIRING. A Critical Review of the Various
Appliances Patented in Germany for this purpose since 1885. By ALBERT
PÜTSCH. 130 pp. Demy 8vo. 1901. Translated from the German. With 103
Illustrations. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.;
strictly net.
Contents.
Generators—Generators Employing Steam—Stirring and Feed Regulating
Appliances—Direct Generators—Burners—Regenerators and Recuperators
—Glass Smelting Furnaces—Metallurgical Furnaces—Pottery Furnace—
Coal Dust Firing.—Index.
Press Opinions.
"The work is worthy of perusal by all consumers of fuel. It is
exceedingly well printed and illustrated."—Chemical Trade Journal.
"The book will appeal with force to the manufacturer as well as to the
technical student, whilst it is also of far more than average interest to
the general reader."—Halifax Guardian.
"The importance that gas and coal dust firing have attained of recent
years, and especially the great interest attaching of late to the question
of coal dust firing, makes the appearance of the present volume most
opportune."—Iron and Coal Trades Review.
Combustion of Fuel. By W.C. POPPLEWELL, M.Sc, A.M.Inst., C.E.,
Consulting Engineer. 46 Illustrations. 190 pp. 1901. Demy 8vo. Price 7s.
6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Introductory.—Chapters I., Fuel and Combustion.—II., Hand Firing in
Boiler Furnaces.—III., Stoking by Mechanical Means.—IV., Powdered
Fuel.—V., Gaseous Fuel.—VI., Efficiency and Smoke Tests of Boilers.—
VII., Some Standard Smoke Trials.—VIII., The Legal Aspect of the Smoke
Question.—IX., The Best Means to be adopted for the Prevention of
Smoke.—Index.
GAS AND COAL DUST FIRING. A Critical Review of the Various
Appliances Patented in Germany for this purpose since 1885. By ALBERT
PÜTSCH. 130 pp. Demy 8vo. 1901. Translated from the German. With 103
Illustrations. Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.;
strictly net.
Contents.
Generators—Generators Employing Steam—Stirring and Feed Regulating
Appliances—Direct Generators—Burners—Regenerators and Recuperators
—Glass Smelting Furnaces—Metallurgical Furnaces—Pottery Furnace—
Coal Dust Firing.—Index.
Press Opinions.
"The work is worthy of perusal by all consumers of fuel. It is
exceedingly well printed and illustrated."—Chemical Trade Journal.
"The book will appeal with force to the manufacturer as well as to the
technical student, whilst it is also of far more than average interest to
the general reader."—Halifax Guardian.
"The importance that gas and coal dust firing have attained of recent
years, and especially the great interest attaching of late to the question
of coal dust firing, makes the appearance of the present volume most
opportune."—Iron and Coal Trades Review.
Page 383
"The German author has long followed the development of various
systems of gas firing, and in the present treatise he discusses the merits
of appliances patented since 1885. His text and the numerous
illustrations indispensable to it will be found useful by all who are
engaged in practical work in the same field."—North British Daily
Mail.
systems of gas firing, and in the present treatise he discusses the merits
of appliances patented since 1885. His text and the numerous
illustrations indispensable to it will be found useful by all who are
engaged in practical work in the same field."—North British Daily
Mail.
Page 384
Books on Plumbing, Decorating, Metal Work, etc.,
etc.
EXTERNAL PLUMBING WORK. A Treatise on Lead Work for Roofs.
By JOHN W. HART, R.P.C. 180 Illustrations. 270 pp. Demy 8vo. 1896.
Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Cast Sheet Lead.—II., Milled Sheet Lead.—III., Roof
Cesspools.—IV., Socket Pipes.—V., Drips.—VI., Gutters.—VII., Gutters
(continued).—VIII., Breaks.—IX., Circular Breaks.—X., Flats—XL, Flats
(continued).—XII., Rolls on Flats.—XIII., Roll Ends.—XIV., Roll
Intersections.—XV., Seam Rolls.—XVI., Seam Rolls (continued).—XVII.,
Tack Fixings.—XVIII., Step Flashings.—XIX., Step Flashings (continued).
—XX., Secret Gutters.—XXI., Soakers.—XXII., Hip and Valley Soakers.
—XXIII., Dormer Windows.—XXIV., Dormer Windows (continued).—
XXV., Dormer Tops.—XXVI., Internal Dormers.—XXVII., Skylights.—
XXVIII., Hips and Ridging.—XXIX., Hips and Ridging (continued).—
XXX., Fixings for Hips and Ridging.—XXXI., Ornamental Ridging.—
XXXII., Ornamental Curb Rolls.—XXXIII., Curb Rolls.—XXXIV.,
Cornices.—XXXV., Towers and Finials.—XXXVI., Towers and Finials
(continued).—XXXVII.,Towers and Finials (continued).—XXXVIII.,
Domes.—XXXIX., Domes (continued).—XL., Ornamental Lead Work.—
XLI., Rain Water Heads.—XLII., Rain Water Heads (continued).—XLIII.,
Rain Water Heads (continued).
Press Opinions.
"This is an eminently practical and well-illustrated volume on the
management of external lead work."—Birmingham Daily Post.
"It is thoroughly practical, containing many valuable hints, and cannot fail
to be of great benefit to those who have not had large experience."—
Sanitary Journal.
etc.
EXTERNAL PLUMBING WORK. A Treatise on Lead Work for Roofs.
By JOHN W. HART, R.P.C. 180 Illustrations. 270 pp. Demy 8vo. 1896.
Price 7s. 6d.; India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents.
Chapters I., Cast Sheet Lead.—II., Milled Sheet Lead.—III., Roof
Cesspools.—IV., Socket Pipes.—V., Drips.—VI., Gutters.—VII., Gutters
(continued).—VIII., Breaks.—IX., Circular Breaks.—X., Flats—XL, Flats
(continued).—XII., Rolls on Flats.—XIII., Roll Ends.—XIV., Roll
Intersections.—XV., Seam Rolls.—XVI., Seam Rolls (continued).—XVII.,
Tack Fixings.—XVIII., Step Flashings.—XIX., Step Flashings (continued).
—XX., Secret Gutters.—XXI., Soakers.—XXII., Hip and Valley Soakers.
—XXIII., Dormer Windows.—XXIV., Dormer Windows (continued).—
XXV., Dormer Tops.—XXVI., Internal Dormers.—XXVII., Skylights.—
XXVIII., Hips and Ridging.—XXIX., Hips and Ridging (continued).—
XXX., Fixings for Hips and Ridging.—XXXI., Ornamental Ridging.—
XXXII., Ornamental Curb Rolls.—XXXIII., Curb Rolls.—XXXIV.,
Cornices.—XXXV., Towers and Finials.—XXXVI., Towers and Finials
(continued).—XXXVII.,Towers and Finials (continued).—XXXVIII.,
Domes.—XXXIX., Domes (continued).—XL., Ornamental Lead Work.—
XLI., Rain Water Heads.—XLII., Rain Water Heads (continued).—XLIII.,
Rain Water Heads (continued).
Press Opinions.
"This is an eminently practical and well-illustrated volume on the
management of external lead work."—Birmingham Daily Post.
"It is thoroughly practical, containing many valuable hints, and cannot fail
to be of great benefit to those who have not had large experience."—
Sanitary Journal.
Page 385
"Works on sanitary plumbing are by no means rare, but treatises dealing
with external plumbing work are sufficiently scarce to ensure for Mr. Hart's
new publication a hearty reception."—The Ironmonger.
"With Mr. Harts treatise in his hands the young plumber need not be afraid
of tackling outside work. He would do well to study its pages at leisure, so
that he may be ready for it when called upon."—Ironmongery.
HINTS TO PLUMBERS ON JOINT WIPING, PIPE BENDING AND
LEAD BURNING. Third Edition, Revised and Corrected. By JOHN W.
HART, R.P.C. 184 Illustrations. 313 pp. Demy 8vo. 1901. Price 7s. 6d.;
India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents. Introduction.—Chapters I., Pipe Bending.—II., Pipe Bending
(continued).—III., Pipe Bending (continued).—IV., Square Pipe Bendings.
—V., Half-circular Elbows.—VI., Curved Bends on Square Pipe.—VII.,
Bossed Bends.—VIII., Curved Plinth Bends.—IX., Rain-water Shoes on
Square Pipe.—X., Curved and Angle Bends.—XL, Square Pipe Fixings.—
XII., Joint-wiping.—XIII., Substitutes for Wiped Joints.—XIV., Preparing
Wiped Joints.—XV., Joint Fixings.—XVI., Plumbing Irons.—XVII., Joint
Fixings.—XVIII., Use of "Touch" in Soldering.—XIX., Underhand Joints.
—XX., Blown and Copper Bit Joints.—XXL, Branch Joints.—XXII.,
Branch Joints (continued).—XXIII., Block Joints.—XXIV., Block Joints
(continued).—XXV., Block Fixings.—XXVI., Astragal Joints—Pipe
Fixings.—XXVII., Large Branch Joints.—XXVIII., Large Underhand
Joints.—XXIX., Solders.—XXX., Autogenous Soldering or Lead Burning.
—Index.
Press Opinions.
"Rich in useful diagrams as well as in hints."—Liverpool Mercury.
"The papers are eminently practical, and go much farther into the
mysteries they describe than the title 'Hints' properly suggests."—
Scotsman.
"The articles are apparently written by a thoroughly practical man. As
a practical guide the book will doubtless be of much service."—
Glasgow Herald.
with external plumbing work are sufficiently scarce to ensure for Mr. Hart's
new publication a hearty reception."—The Ironmonger.
"With Mr. Harts treatise in his hands the young plumber need not be afraid
of tackling outside work. He would do well to study its pages at leisure, so
that he may be ready for it when called upon."—Ironmongery.
HINTS TO PLUMBERS ON JOINT WIPING, PIPE BENDING AND
LEAD BURNING. Third Edition, Revised and Corrected. By JOHN W.
HART, R.P.C. 184 Illustrations. 313 pp. Demy 8vo. 1901. Price 7s. 6d.;
India and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents. Introduction.—Chapters I., Pipe Bending.—II., Pipe Bending
(continued).—III., Pipe Bending (continued).—IV., Square Pipe Bendings.
—V., Half-circular Elbows.—VI., Curved Bends on Square Pipe.—VII.,
Bossed Bends.—VIII., Curved Plinth Bends.—IX., Rain-water Shoes on
Square Pipe.—X., Curved and Angle Bends.—XL, Square Pipe Fixings.—
XII., Joint-wiping.—XIII., Substitutes for Wiped Joints.—XIV., Preparing
Wiped Joints.—XV., Joint Fixings.—XVI., Plumbing Irons.—XVII., Joint
Fixings.—XVIII., Use of "Touch" in Soldering.—XIX., Underhand Joints.
—XX., Blown and Copper Bit Joints.—XXL, Branch Joints.—XXII.,
Branch Joints (continued).—XXIII., Block Joints.—XXIV., Block Joints
(continued).—XXV., Block Fixings.—XXVI., Astragal Joints—Pipe
Fixings.—XXVII., Large Branch Joints.—XXVIII., Large Underhand
Joints.—XXIX., Solders.—XXX., Autogenous Soldering or Lead Burning.
—Index.
Press Opinions.
"Rich in useful diagrams as well as in hints."—Liverpool Mercury.
"The papers are eminently practical, and go much farther into the
mysteries they describe than the title 'Hints' properly suggests."—
Scotsman.
"The articles are apparently written by a thoroughly practical man. As
a practical guide the book will doubtless be of much service."—
Glasgow Herald.
Page 386
"So far as the practical hints in this work are concerned, it will be
useful to apprentices and students in technical schools, as it deals
mainly with the most important or difficult branches of the plumber's
craft, viz., joint wiping, pipe bending and lead burning.... 'Hints' are the
most useful things to an apprentice, and there are many in this work
which are not to be found in some of the text-books."—English
Mechanic.
"22 Pryme Street,
Hull, 24th November, 1894.
"Gentlemen,—Your books to hand for which accept my best thanks,
also for circulars. I myself got one of J.W. Hart's books on Plumbing
from your traveller, and having looked through the same I can safely
recommend it as being the best book I have seen. Mr. J.W. Hart treats
exhaustively upon soldering and pipe bending, which are two of the
most essential branches in the plumbing trade."
THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF DIPPING, BURNISHING,
LACQUERING AND BRONZING BRASS WARE. By W. NORMAN
BROWN. 35 pp. Crown 8vo. 1900. Price 2s.; Abroad, 2s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents. Chapters I., Cleansing and Dipping; Boiling up and Cleansing:
Dipping.—II., Scratch-brushing and Burnishing; Polishing; Burnishing.—
III., Lacquering; Tools; Lacquers.—IV., Bronzing; Black Bronzing;
Florentine Red Bronzing; Green Bronzing.—Index.
Press Opinions.
"Mr. Brown is clearly a master of his craft, and has also the immense
advantage of being able to convey his instructions in a manner at once
clear and concise."—Leicester Post.
"A thoroughly practical little treatise on the subject in all its branches,
and one which should be in the hands of every tradesman or amateur
who has lacquering to do."—Irish Builder.
WORKSHOP WRINKLES for Decorators, Painters, Paperhangers and
Others. By W.N. BROWN. Crown 8vo. 128 pp. 1901. Price 2s. 6d.; Abroad,
3s.; strictly net.
useful to apprentices and students in technical schools, as it deals
mainly with the most important or difficult branches of the plumber's
craft, viz., joint wiping, pipe bending and lead burning.... 'Hints' are the
most useful things to an apprentice, and there are many in this work
which are not to be found in some of the text-books."—English
Mechanic.
"22 Pryme Street,
Hull, 24th November, 1894.
"Gentlemen,—Your books to hand for which accept my best thanks,
also for circulars. I myself got one of J.W. Hart's books on Plumbing
from your traveller, and having looked through the same I can safely
recommend it as being the best book I have seen. Mr. J.W. Hart treats
exhaustively upon soldering and pipe bending, which are two of the
most essential branches in the plumbing trade."
THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF DIPPING, BURNISHING,
LACQUERING AND BRONZING BRASS WARE. By W. NORMAN
BROWN. 35 pp. Crown 8vo. 1900. Price 2s.; Abroad, 2s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents. Chapters I., Cleansing and Dipping; Boiling up and Cleansing:
Dipping.—II., Scratch-brushing and Burnishing; Polishing; Burnishing.—
III., Lacquering; Tools; Lacquers.—IV., Bronzing; Black Bronzing;
Florentine Red Bronzing; Green Bronzing.—Index.
Press Opinions.
"Mr. Brown is clearly a master of his craft, and has also the immense
advantage of being able to convey his instructions in a manner at once
clear and concise."—Leicester Post.
"A thoroughly practical little treatise on the subject in all its branches,
and one which should be in the hands of every tradesman or amateur
who has lacquering to do."—Irish Builder.
WORKSHOP WRINKLES for Decorators, Painters, Paperhangers and
Others. By W.N. BROWN. Crown 8vo. 128 pp. 1901. Price 2s. 6d.; Abroad,
3s.; strictly net.
Page 387
Contents. Parts I., Decorating.—II., Painting.—III., Paper-hanging.—IV.,
Miscellaneous. Arranged in alphabetical order.
HOUSE DECORATING AND PAINTING. By W. NORMAN BROWN.
Eighty-eight Illustrations. 150 pp. Crown 8vo. 1900. Price 3s. 6d.; India and
Colonies, 4s.; Other Countries, 4s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents. Chapters I., Tools and Appliances.—II., Colours and Their
Harmony.—III., Pigments and Media.—IV., Pigments and Media.—V.,
Pigments and Media.—VI., Pigments and Media.—VII., Preparation of
Work, etc.—VIII., Application of Ordinary Colour.—IX., Graining.—X.,
Graining.—XI., Graining.—XII., Gilding.—XIII., Writing and Lettering.—
XIV., Sign Painting.—XV., Internal Decoration.—Index.
Press Opinion.
"The author is evidently very thoroughly at home in regard to the
technical subjects he has set himself to elucidate, from the mechanical
rather than the artistic point of view, although the matter of correctness
of taste is by no means ignored. Mr. Brown's style is directness itself,
and there is no tyro in the painting trade, however mentally ungifted,
who could fail to carry away a clearer grasp of the details of the
subject after going over the performance."—Building Industries.
A HISTORY OF DECORATIVE ART. By W. NORMAN BROWN.
Thirty-nine Illustrations. 96 pp. Crown 8vo. 1900. Price 2s. 6d.; Abroad,
3s.; strictly net.
Contents. Chapters I., Primitive and Prehistoric Art.—II., Egyptian Art.—
III., Assyrian Art.—IV., The Art of Asia Minor.—V., Etruscan Art.—VI.,
Greek Art.—VII., Roman Art.—VIII., Byzantine Art.—IX., Lombard or
Romanesque Art.—X., Gothic Art.—XI., Renaissance Art.—XII., The
Victorian Period.—Index.
Press Opinion.
"In the course of a hundred pages with some forty illustrations Mr.
Brown gives a very interesting and comprehensive survey of the
progress and development of decorative art. It cannot, of course, be
Miscellaneous. Arranged in alphabetical order.
HOUSE DECORATING AND PAINTING. By W. NORMAN BROWN.
Eighty-eight Illustrations. 150 pp. Crown 8vo. 1900. Price 3s. 6d.; India and
Colonies, 4s.; Other Countries, 4s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents. Chapters I., Tools and Appliances.—II., Colours and Their
Harmony.—III., Pigments and Media.—IV., Pigments and Media.—V.,
Pigments and Media.—VI., Pigments and Media.—VII., Preparation of
Work, etc.—VIII., Application of Ordinary Colour.—IX., Graining.—X.,
Graining.—XI., Graining.—XII., Gilding.—XIII., Writing and Lettering.—
XIV., Sign Painting.—XV., Internal Decoration.—Index.
Press Opinion.
"The author is evidently very thoroughly at home in regard to the
technical subjects he has set himself to elucidate, from the mechanical
rather than the artistic point of view, although the matter of correctness
of taste is by no means ignored. Mr. Brown's style is directness itself,
and there is no tyro in the painting trade, however mentally ungifted,
who could fail to carry away a clearer grasp of the details of the
subject after going over the performance."—Building Industries.
A HISTORY OF DECORATIVE ART. By W. NORMAN BROWN.
Thirty-nine Illustrations. 96 pp. Crown 8vo. 1900. Price 2s. 6d.; Abroad,
3s.; strictly net.
Contents. Chapters I., Primitive and Prehistoric Art.—II., Egyptian Art.—
III., Assyrian Art.—IV., The Art of Asia Minor.—V., Etruscan Art.—VI.,
Greek Art.—VII., Roman Art.—VIII., Byzantine Art.—IX., Lombard or
Romanesque Art.—X., Gothic Art.—XI., Renaissance Art.—XII., The
Victorian Period.—Index.
Press Opinion.
"In the course of a hundred pages with some forty illustrations Mr.
Brown gives a very interesting and comprehensive survey of the
progress and development of decorative art. It cannot, of course, be
Page 388
pretended that in the limited space named the subject is treated
exhaustively and in full detail, but it is sufficiently complete to satisfy
any ordinary reader; indeed, for general purposes, it is, perhaps, more
acceptable than a more elaborate treatise."—Midland Counties Herald.
A HANDBOOK ON JAPANNING AND ENAMELLING FOR
CYCLES, BEDSTEADS, TINWARE, ETC. By WILLIAM NORMAN
BROWN. Price 2s. net. [Ready.
Contents. A Few Words on Enamelling—Appliances and Apparatus—
Japans or Enamels—To Test Enamel for Lead—Japanning or Enamelling
Metals—Japanning Tin, such as Tea Trays, and similar Goods—Enamelling
Old Work—Enamel for Cast Iron—Enamel for Copper Cooking Utensils—
The Enamelling Stove—Enamelling Bedsteads, Frames and similar large
pieces—Paints and Varnishes for Metallic Surfaces—Varnishes for
Ironwork—Blacking for Iron—Processes for Tin Plating—Galvanising—
Metal Polishes—Colours for Polished Brass—A Golden Varnish for Metal
—Painting on Zinc—Carriage Varnish—Japanese Varnish and its
Application.—Index.
THE PRINCIPLES OF HOT WATER SUPPLY. By JOHN W. HART,
R.P.C. With 129 Illustrations. 1900. 177 pp., demy 8vo. Price 7s. 6d.; India
and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents. Chapters I., Water Circulation.—II., The Tank System.—III.,
Pipes and Joints.—IV., The Cylinder System.—V., Boilers for the Cylinder
System.—VI., The Cylinder System.—VII., The Combined Tank and
Cylinder System.—VIII., Combined Independent and Kitchen Boiler.—IX.,
Combined Cylinder and Tank System with Duplicate Boilers.—X., Indirect
Heating and Boiler Explosions.—XI., Pipe Boilers.—XII., Safety Valves.—
XIII., Safety Valves.—XIV., The American System.—XV., Heating Water
by Steam.—XVI., Steam Kettles and Jets.—XVII., Heating Power of
Steam.—XVIII., Covering for Hot Water Pipes.—Index.
Press Opinion.
"If all plumbers were to read this book, and if they followed the
instructions given, there would, we are sure, be fewer accidents from
household boiler explosions, and many lives might be saved. No doubt
exhaustively and in full detail, but it is sufficiently complete to satisfy
any ordinary reader; indeed, for general purposes, it is, perhaps, more
acceptable than a more elaborate treatise."—Midland Counties Herald.
A HANDBOOK ON JAPANNING AND ENAMELLING FOR
CYCLES, BEDSTEADS, TINWARE, ETC. By WILLIAM NORMAN
BROWN. Price 2s. net. [Ready.
Contents. A Few Words on Enamelling—Appliances and Apparatus—
Japans or Enamels—To Test Enamel for Lead—Japanning or Enamelling
Metals—Japanning Tin, such as Tea Trays, and similar Goods—Enamelling
Old Work—Enamel for Cast Iron—Enamel for Copper Cooking Utensils—
The Enamelling Stove—Enamelling Bedsteads, Frames and similar large
pieces—Paints and Varnishes for Metallic Surfaces—Varnishes for
Ironwork—Blacking for Iron—Processes for Tin Plating—Galvanising—
Metal Polishes—Colours for Polished Brass—A Golden Varnish for Metal
—Painting on Zinc—Carriage Varnish—Japanese Varnish and its
Application.—Index.
THE PRINCIPLES OF HOT WATER SUPPLY. By JOHN W. HART,
R.P.C. With 129 Illustrations. 1900. 177 pp., demy 8vo. Price 7s. 6d.; India
and Colonies, 8s.; Other Countries, 8s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents. Chapters I., Water Circulation.—II., The Tank System.—III.,
Pipes and Joints.—IV., The Cylinder System.—V., Boilers for the Cylinder
System.—VI., The Cylinder System.—VII., The Combined Tank and
Cylinder System.—VIII., Combined Independent and Kitchen Boiler.—IX.,
Combined Cylinder and Tank System with Duplicate Boilers.—X., Indirect
Heating and Boiler Explosions.—XI., Pipe Boilers.—XII., Safety Valves.—
XIII., Safety Valves.—XIV., The American System.—XV., Heating Water
by Steam.—XVI., Steam Kettles and Jets.—XVII., Heating Power of
Steam.—XVIII., Covering for Hot Water Pipes.—Index.
Press Opinion.
"If all plumbers were to read this book, and if they followed the
instructions given, there would, we are sure, be fewer accidents from
household boiler explosions, and many lives might be saved. No doubt
Page 389
the majority of householders know or care little about the subject, but
any one who wishes to adopt the most up-to-date system of supplying
hot water throughout his house will be able to do so if he reads Mr.
Hart's book and follows the instruction given. It is a work that all who
have charge of domestic water supply should study. It is a practical and
profitable book."—Wigar Observer.
any one who wishes to adopt the most up-to-date system of supplying
hot water throughout his house will be able to do so if he reads Mr.
Hart's book and follows the instruction given. It is a work that all who
have charge of domestic water supply should study. It is a practical and
profitable book."—Wigar Observer.
Page 390
Brewing and Botanical.
HOPS IN THEIR BOTANICAL, AGRICULTURAL AND
TECHNICAL ASPECT, AND AS AN ARTICLE OF COMMERCE. By
EMMANUEL GROSS, Professor at the Higher Agricultural College,
Tetschen-Liebwerd. Translated from the German. Seventy-eight
Illustrations. 1900. 340 pp. Demy 8vo. Price 12s. 6d.; India and Colonies,
13s. 6d.; Other Countries, 15s.; strictly net.
Contents. PART I., HISTORY OF THE HOP. PART II., THE HOP PLANT.
Introductory.—The Roots.—The Stem and Leaves.—Inflorescence and
Flower: Inflorescence and Flower of the Male Hop: Inflorescence and
Flower of the Female Hop.—The Fruit and its Glandular Structure: The
Fruit and Seed.—Propagation and Selection of the Hop.—Varieties of the
Hop: (a) Red Hops; (b) Green Hops; (c) Pale Green Hops.—Classification
according to the Period of Ripening: 1. Early August Hops; 2. Medium
Early Hops; 3. Late Hops.—Injuries to Growth: Malformations; Diseases
Produced by Conditions of Soil and Climate: 1. Leaves Turning Yellow, 2.
Summer or Sun-brand, 3. Cones Dropping Off, 4. Honey Dew, 5. Damage
from Wind, Hail and Rain; Vegetable Enemies of the Hop: Animal Enemies
of the Hop.—Beneficial Insects on Hops.
PART III., CULTIVATION. The Requirements of the Hop in Respect of
Climate, Soil and Situation: Climate; Soil; Situation,—Selection of Variety
and Cuttings.—Planting a Hop Garden: Drainage; Preparing the Ground;
Marking-out for Planting; Planting; Cultivation and Cropping of the Hop
Garden in the First Year.—Work to be Performed Annually in the Hop
Garden: Working the Ground; Cutting; The Non-cutting System; The
Proper Performance of the Operation of Cutting: I. Method of Cutting:
Close Cutting, Ordinary Cutting, The Long Cut, The Topping Cut; II.
Proper Season for Cutting: Autumn Cutting, Spring Cutting: Manuring;
Training the Hop Plant: Poled Gardens, Frame Training; Principal Types of
Frames: Pruning, Cropping, Topping, and Leaf Stripping the Hop Plant;
Picking, Drying and Bagging.—Principal and Subsidiary Utilisation of
Hops and Hop Gardens.—Life of a Hop Garden; Subsequent Cropping.—
HOPS IN THEIR BOTANICAL, AGRICULTURAL AND
TECHNICAL ASPECT, AND AS AN ARTICLE OF COMMERCE. By
EMMANUEL GROSS, Professor at the Higher Agricultural College,
Tetschen-Liebwerd. Translated from the German. Seventy-eight
Illustrations. 1900. 340 pp. Demy 8vo. Price 12s. 6d.; India and Colonies,
13s. 6d.; Other Countries, 15s.; strictly net.
Contents. PART I., HISTORY OF THE HOP. PART II., THE HOP PLANT.
Introductory.—The Roots.—The Stem and Leaves.—Inflorescence and
Flower: Inflorescence and Flower of the Male Hop: Inflorescence and
Flower of the Female Hop.—The Fruit and its Glandular Structure: The
Fruit and Seed.—Propagation and Selection of the Hop.—Varieties of the
Hop: (a) Red Hops; (b) Green Hops; (c) Pale Green Hops.—Classification
according to the Period of Ripening: 1. Early August Hops; 2. Medium
Early Hops; 3. Late Hops.—Injuries to Growth: Malformations; Diseases
Produced by Conditions of Soil and Climate: 1. Leaves Turning Yellow, 2.
Summer or Sun-brand, 3. Cones Dropping Off, 4. Honey Dew, 5. Damage
from Wind, Hail and Rain; Vegetable Enemies of the Hop: Animal Enemies
of the Hop.—Beneficial Insects on Hops.
PART III., CULTIVATION. The Requirements of the Hop in Respect of
Climate, Soil and Situation: Climate; Soil; Situation,—Selection of Variety
and Cuttings.—Planting a Hop Garden: Drainage; Preparing the Ground;
Marking-out for Planting; Planting; Cultivation and Cropping of the Hop
Garden in the First Year.—Work to be Performed Annually in the Hop
Garden: Working the Ground; Cutting; The Non-cutting System; The
Proper Performance of the Operation of Cutting: I. Method of Cutting:
Close Cutting, Ordinary Cutting, The Long Cut, The Topping Cut; II.
Proper Season for Cutting: Autumn Cutting, Spring Cutting: Manuring;
Training the Hop Plant: Poled Gardens, Frame Training; Principal Types of
Frames: Pruning, Cropping, Topping, and Leaf Stripping the Hop Plant;
Picking, Drying and Bagging.—Principal and Subsidiary Utilisation of
Hops and Hop Gardens.—Life of a Hop Garden; Subsequent Cropping.—
Page 391
Cost of Production, Yield and Selling Prices. PART IV.—Preservation and
Storage.—Physical and Chemical Structure of the Hop Cone.—Judging the
Value of Hops. PART V.—Statistics of Production.—The Hop Trade.—
Index.
Press Opinions.
"The subject is dealt with fully in every little detail; consequently, even
the veriest tyro can take away some useful information from its
pages."—Irish Farming World.
"Farmers are but little given to reading; but nowadays brewers have to
study their trade and keep abreast of its every aspect, and as far as
regards our trade, to them this book especially appeals, and will be
especially useful."—Licensed Victuallers' Gazette.
"Like an oasis in the desert comes a volume upon the above subject, by
the Professor at the Higher Agricultural College, Tetschen-Liebwerd,
Germany, who has been fortunate enough to obtain an excellent
translator from the German in the person of Mr. Charles Salter. The
paucity of works upon the history and cultivation of hops is surprising
considering the scope it gives for an interesting and useful work."—
Hereford Times.
"We can safely say that this book deals more comprehensively and
thoroughly with the subject of hops than any work previously
published in this country.... No one interested in the hop industry can
fail to extract a large amount of information from Professor Gross's
pages, which, although primarily intended for Continental readers, yet
bear very closely on what may be termed the cosmopolitan aspects of
the science of hop production."—South Eastern Gazette.
"This is, in our opinion, the most scholarly and exhaustive treatise on
the subject of hops, their culture and preservation, etc., that has been
published, and to the hop grower especially will its information and
recommendations prove valuable. Brewers, too, will find the chapter
devoted to 'Judging the Value of Hops' full of useful hints, while the
whole scope and tenor of the book bear testimony to the studious and
Storage.—Physical and Chemical Structure of the Hop Cone.—Judging the
Value of Hops. PART V.—Statistics of Production.—The Hop Trade.—
Index.
Press Opinions.
"The subject is dealt with fully in every little detail; consequently, even
the veriest tyro can take away some useful information from its
pages."—Irish Farming World.
"Farmers are but little given to reading; but nowadays brewers have to
study their trade and keep abreast of its every aspect, and as far as
regards our trade, to them this book especially appeals, and will be
especially useful."—Licensed Victuallers' Gazette.
"Like an oasis in the desert comes a volume upon the above subject, by
the Professor at the Higher Agricultural College, Tetschen-Liebwerd,
Germany, who has been fortunate enough to obtain an excellent
translator from the German in the person of Mr. Charles Salter. The
paucity of works upon the history and cultivation of hops is surprising
considering the scope it gives for an interesting and useful work."—
Hereford Times.
"We can safely say that this book deals more comprehensively and
thoroughly with the subject of hops than any work previously
published in this country.... No one interested in the hop industry can
fail to extract a large amount of information from Professor Gross's
pages, which, although primarily intended for Continental readers, yet
bear very closely on what may be termed the cosmopolitan aspects of
the science of hop production."—South Eastern Gazette.
"This is, in our opinion, the most scholarly and exhaustive treatise on
the subject of hops, their culture and preservation, etc., that has been
published, and to the hop grower especially will its information and
recommendations prove valuable. Brewers, too, will find the chapter
devoted to 'Judging the Value of Hops' full of useful hints, while the
whole scope and tenor of the book bear testimony to the studious and
Page 392
careful manner in which its contents have been elaborated."—Brewers'
Journal.
"Considering the extent to which this country draws its hop supplies
from abroad, this translation of Professor Gross's volume will prove an
interesting and instructive addition to the library of any brewer or
brewers' chemist, the more so as the work of translation has been
admirably carried out in simple and vigorous English.... The volume is
one of a valuable series of special technical works for trades and
professions the publishers are issuing, and is the first so far dealing
with the brewing industry."—Burton Mail.
"A work upon the above subject must be welcomed if for no other
reason than the dearth of books dealing with so interesting a theme, but
fortunately apart from this the book will afford excellent reading to all
interested in hops and their culture. Professor Gross takes one over the
whole field, by commencing with the earliest history of the plant—so
far back as the days of ancient Greece—and from both practical,
theoretical and scientific standpoints, deals with the cultivation,
classification and formation of the hop.... In speaking of the production
of new varieties sound information is given, and should be of value to
those who are always in search of improvements."—Hereford Journal.
"This work is, without doubt, the most thorough and extensive
compilation on hops ever yet offered to the public, and for this reason
should be warmly welcomed and appreciated by men interested in the
subject. Although primarily written for those engaged in the industry
abroad, and mainly Continental in theory and practice, it nevertheless
appeals to those connected with the hop growing and brewing business
in England, not only by way of a comparison, but also as an
instruction. The volume is at once practical and scientific, is well got
up, and teems with illustrations and statistics. In a word, it is a book
that should find its way into the hands of all who are occupied in hop
production and distribution at home; and it also contains valuable
information and suggestions for the brewers themselves."—Brewers'
Guardian.
Journal.
"Considering the extent to which this country draws its hop supplies
from abroad, this translation of Professor Gross's volume will prove an
interesting and instructive addition to the library of any brewer or
brewers' chemist, the more so as the work of translation has been
admirably carried out in simple and vigorous English.... The volume is
one of a valuable series of special technical works for trades and
professions the publishers are issuing, and is the first so far dealing
with the brewing industry."—Burton Mail.
"A work upon the above subject must be welcomed if for no other
reason than the dearth of books dealing with so interesting a theme, but
fortunately apart from this the book will afford excellent reading to all
interested in hops and their culture. Professor Gross takes one over the
whole field, by commencing with the earliest history of the plant—so
far back as the days of ancient Greece—and from both practical,
theoretical and scientific standpoints, deals with the cultivation,
classification and formation of the hop.... In speaking of the production
of new varieties sound information is given, and should be of value to
those who are always in search of improvements."—Hereford Journal.
"This work is, without doubt, the most thorough and extensive
compilation on hops ever yet offered to the public, and for this reason
should be warmly welcomed and appreciated by men interested in the
subject. Although primarily written for those engaged in the industry
abroad, and mainly Continental in theory and practice, it nevertheless
appeals to those connected with the hop growing and brewing business
in England, not only by way of a comparison, but also as an
instruction. The volume is at once practical and scientific, is well got
up, and teems with illustrations and statistics. In a word, it is a book
that should find its way into the hands of all who are occupied in hop
production and distribution at home; and it also contains valuable
information and suggestions for the brewers themselves."—Brewers'
Guardian.
Page 393
Public Libraries.
BRITISH LIBRARY YEAR BOOK, 1900-1901. A Record of Library
Progress and Work. 54 Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 345 pp. 1900. Edited by
THOMAS GREENWOOD. Price 3s.; abroad, 3s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents. Notes for Library Committees. Contributed Articles: The Library
Rate. Some Points in Library Planning—Mr. Burgoyne. Library
Classification—Mr. Jast. Developments in Library Cataloguing—Mr.
Quinn. Children and Public Libraries—Mr. Ballinger. Fire Prevention and
Insurance—Mr. Davis. The Educational Work of the Library Association—
Mr. Roberts. The Library Assistants' Association—Mr. Chambers. British
Municipal Libraries established under the various Public Libraries or
Special Acts, and those supported out of Municipal Funds giving particulars
of Establishment, Organisation, Staff, Methods and Librarians. Table
showing the Rate, Income, Work and Hours of the Rate-supported Libraries.
Statistical Abstracts. British non-Municipal Libraries, Endowed, Collegiate,
Proprietary and others, showing date of Establishment, number of Volumes,
Particulars of Administration, and Librarians. Library Associations and
Kindred Societies.
Press Opinions. "This is a handbook which tells the reader everything
about public libraries, great and small, in the United Kingdom.... The book
is decidedly one of the best arranged volumes ever published, and there is
no doubt that the editor has been at great pains to obtain the latest and most
accurate information from all places. County, district and parish councils,
ministers of religion, and schoolmasters everywhere should make
themselves acquainted with its contents. Its perusal cannot fail to serve the
ends of the library movement. The illustrations, of which there is a large
number, are very good."—Western (Cardiff) Mail.
BRITISH LIBRARY YEAR BOOK, 1900-1901. A Record of Library
Progress and Work. 54 Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 345 pp. 1900. Edited by
THOMAS GREENWOOD. Price 3s.; abroad, 3s. 6d.; strictly net.
Contents. Notes for Library Committees. Contributed Articles: The Library
Rate. Some Points in Library Planning—Mr. Burgoyne. Library
Classification—Mr. Jast. Developments in Library Cataloguing—Mr.
Quinn. Children and Public Libraries—Mr. Ballinger. Fire Prevention and
Insurance—Mr. Davis. The Educational Work of the Library Association—
Mr. Roberts. The Library Assistants' Association—Mr. Chambers. British
Municipal Libraries established under the various Public Libraries or
Special Acts, and those supported out of Municipal Funds giving particulars
of Establishment, Organisation, Staff, Methods and Librarians. Table
showing the Rate, Income, Work and Hours of the Rate-supported Libraries.
Statistical Abstracts. British non-Municipal Libraries, Endowed, Collegiate,
Proprietary and others, showing date of Establishment, number of Volumes,
Particulars of Administration, and Librarians. Library Associations and
Kindred Societies.
Press Opinions. "This is a handbook which tells the reader everything
about public libraries, great and small, in the United Kingdom.... The book
is decidedly one of the best arranged volumes ever published, and there is
no doubt that the editor has been at great pains to obtain the latest and most
accurate information from all places. County, district and parish councils,
ministers of religion, and schoolmasters everywhere should make
themselves acquainted with its contents. Its perusal cannot fail to serve the
ends of the library movement. The illustrations, of which there is a large
number, are very good."—Western (Cardiff) Mail.
Page 394
WORKS IN PREPARATION.
PRINCIPLES OF SIDEROLOGY (The Science of Iron). Translated from
the German of HANKS FREIHERR v. ZÜPTNER.
STAINED GLASS (Ancient and Modern) and FRET LEAD GLAZING.
By E.R. SUFFLING.
TREATISE ON CLOTH FINISHING. By ROBERT BEAUMONT, of
Yorkshire College, Leeds.
INDIA-RUBBER; GUTTA PERCHA.
EVAPORATION, CONDENSATION AND COOLING. Calculations of
Dimensions of Apparatus. By E. HAUSBRAND. Tables. For Chemists,
Chemical and Mechanical Engineers.
THE CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY OF TEXTILE FIBRES. Spinning,
Washing, Bleaching, Dyeing, Printing and Finishing. By Dr. G. von
GEORGIEVICS. [In the Press.
WEAVING MACHINERY. Three Vols. By HARRY NISBET.
COLOUR TERMS: THEIR PROPER USE AND MEANING. By
DAVID PATERSON.
LEAD AND ITS COMPOUNDS. By THOS. LAMBERT.
COTTON COMBERS AND THE COMBING PROCESS. By THOS.
THORNLEY. [In the Press.
TIMBER. Its Physical and Chemical Properties, Description, Distribution
throughout the World, Forests, Preservation of Timber, and Applications.
From the French of Paul Charpentier. 179 Illustrations. About 500 pp.
USE OF WATER IN THE INDUSTRIAL ARTS. Composition—
Influences—Residual Water—Purification—Analysis. From the French of
H. de la Coux. 135 Illustrations. About 500 pp.
PRINCIPLES OF SIDEROLOGY (The Science of Iron). Translated from
the German of HANKS FREIHERR v. ZÜPTNER.
STAINED GLASS (Ancient and Modern) and FRET LEAD GLAZING.
By E.R. SUFFLING.
TREATISE ON CLOTH FINISHING. By ROBERT BEAUMONT, of
Yorkshire College, Leeds.
INDIA-RUBBER; GUTTA PERCHA.
EVAPORATION, CONDENSATION AND COOLING. Calculations of
Dimensions of Apparatus. By E. HAUSBRAND. Tables. For Chemists,
Chemical and Mechanical Engineers.
THE CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY OF TEXTILE FIBRES. Spinning,
Washing, Bleaching, Dyeing, Printing and Finishing. By Dr. G. von
GEORGIEVICS. [In the Press.
WEAVING MACHINERY. Three Vols. By HARRY NISBET.
COLOUR TERMS: THEIR PROPER USE AND MEANING. By
DAVID PATERSON.
LEAD AND ITS COMPOUNDS. By THOS. LAMBERT.
COTTON COMBERS AND THE COMBING PROCESS. By THOS.
THORNLEY. [In the Press.
TIMBER. Its Physical and Chemical Properties, Description, Distribution
throughout the World, Forests, Preservation of Timber, and Applications.
From the French of Paul Charpentier. 179 Illustrations. About 500 pp.
USE OF WATER IN THE INDUSTRIAL ARTS. Composition—
Influences—Residual Water—Purification—Analysis. From the French of
H. de la Coux. 135 Illustrations. About 500 pp.
Page 395
DYERS' MATERIALS: An Introduction to the Examination, Evaluation
and Application of the Most Important Substances Used in Dyeing,
Printing, Bleaching and Finishing. By PAUL HEERMANN, Ph.D.
Translated by ARTHUR C. WRIGHT, M.A. (Oxon.), B.Sc. (Lond.).—[In
the Press.
and Application of the Most Important Substances Used in Dyeing,
Printing, Bleaching and Finishing. By PAUL HEERMANN, Ph.D.
Translated by ARTHUR C. WRIGHT, M.A. (Oxon.), B.Sc. (Lond.).—[In
the Press.
Page 396
HANDY GUIDES TO THE CHOICE OF
BOOKS.
Vol. I. PROSE FICTION.
Vol. II. TECHNICAL, TRADE AND COMMERCIAL BOOKS.
Others to follow. [In Preparation.
The Publishers will advise when any of the above books are ready to firms
sending their addresses.
BOOKS.
Vol. I. PROSE FICTION.
Vol. II. TECHNICAL, TRADE AND COMMERCIAL BOOKS.
Others to follow. [In Preparation.
The Publishers will advise when any of the above books are ready to firms
sending their addresses.
Page 397
*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE DYEING OF
COTTON FABRICS: A PRACTICAL HANDBOOK FOR THE DYER
AND STUDENT ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will
be renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
States without permission and without paying copyright royalties.
Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license,
apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic
works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and
trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not
be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of
the trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the Project
Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
eBook, complying with the trademark license is very easy. You may
use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative
works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks
may be modified and printed and given away—you may do practically
ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S.
copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
COTTON FABRICS: A PRACTICAL HANDBOOK FOR THE DYER
AND STUDENT ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will
be renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
States without permission and without paying copyright royalties.
Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license,
apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic
works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and
trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not
be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of
the trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the Project
Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
eBook, complying with the trademark license is very easy. You may
use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative
works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks
may be modified and printed and given away—you may do practically
ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S.
copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
Page 398
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or
any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic
work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept
all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg electronic works in your possession. If
you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg
electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this
agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom
you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people
who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg electronic
works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or
any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic
work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept
all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg electronic works in your possession. If
you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg
electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this
agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom
you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people
who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg electronic
works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the
Page 399
collection of Project Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the
individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the
United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in
the United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg mission of promoting free
access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg works
in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project
Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can easily comply with
the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format
with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you share it
without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which
the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase
“Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed,
viewed, copied or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the
United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in
the United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg mission of promoting free
access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg works
in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project
Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can easily comply with
the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format
with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you share it
without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which
the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase
“Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed,
viewed, copied or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
Page 400
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located
in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the
country where you are located before using this eBook.
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived
from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a
notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright
holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United
States without paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or
providing access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”
associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with
the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain
permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg License for all works posted
with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of
this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide
access to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format
other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official
in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the
country where you are located before using this eBook.
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived
from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a
notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright
holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United
States without paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or
providing access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”
associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with
the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain
permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg License for all works posted
with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of
this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide
access to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format
other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official
Page 401
version posted on the official Project Gutenberg website
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of
obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided
that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of
obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided
that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
Page 402
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth
in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the
Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in
Section 3 below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend
considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and
proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the
Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they may be
stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete,
inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES -
Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in
paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party
distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this
agreement, disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and
expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO
REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH
OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE
FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth
in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the
Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in
Section 3 below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend
considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and
proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the
Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they may be
stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete,
inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES -
Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in
paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party
distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this
agreement, disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and
expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO
REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH
OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE
FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
Page 403
EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it,
you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by
sending a written explanation to the person you received the work
from. If you received the work on a physical medium, you must return
the medium with your written explanation. The person or entity that
provided you with the defective work may elect to provide a
replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work
electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose to
give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu
of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a
refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If
any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law
of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the
Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the
Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™
electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any
volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability,
costs and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly
from any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a)
DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it,
you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by
sending a written explanation to the person you received the work
from. If you received the work on a physical medium, you must return
the medium with your written explanation. The person or entity that
provided you with the defective work may elect to provide a
replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work
electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose to
give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu
of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a
refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If
any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law
of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the
Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the
Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™
electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any
volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability,
costs and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly
from any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a)
Page 404
distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b) alteration,
modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg work,
and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
from people in all walks of life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals
and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely
available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure and
permanent future for Project Gutenberg and future generations. To
learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and
the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state
of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue
Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is
64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S.
federal laws and your state’s laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza
#516, Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact
modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg work,
and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
from people in all walks of life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals
and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely
available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure and
permanent future for Project Gutenberg and future generations. To
learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and
the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state
of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue
Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is
64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S.
federal laws and your state’s laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza
#516, Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact
Page 405
links and up to date contact information can be found at the
Foundation’s website and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without
widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small
donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax
exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable
effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have
not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Foundation’s website and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without
widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small
donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax
exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable
effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have
not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Page 406
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including
how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including
how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.